Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

TOP STUDENT HISTORY REVISION KIT (QUESTIONS & ANSWERS) IN PDF

TOP STUDENT HISTORY REVISION KIT

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT I

PART 1

SECTION  A .

  1. Give two results of the interaction of Kenyan communities during their migration and

settlement.                                                                                                                           (2mks)

  1. Mention any two communities with age-set system of organisation in Kenya.    (2mks)
  2. State two circumstances under which it may not be against the law to kill a person. (2mk)
  3. Name two Portuguese generals that led expeditions to East coast of Africa.    (2mks)
  4. State two problems experienced by missionaries in Kenya.    (2mks)
  5. Give two distinctive features of Trade Union movement in Kenya during colonial period.                                                                                                                                  (2mks)
  6. State two reasons why the British government built the Kenya, Uganda railways.    (2mks)
  7. State two results of the Lennox-Royal Constitutional reforms of October 1957.           (2mks)
  8. According to sessional paper No.10 of 1965 on African Socialism and it’s application to

planning in Kenya, identify two principles that guide economic, social and political development

in Kenya.                                                                                                                 (2mks)

  1. Explain why Kenyans celebrate Kenyatta day as a National Holiday.
  2. State two circumstances under which a general election can be held in Kenya. (2mks)
  3. Explain what is meant by appellate jurisdiction according to Kenyan court system. (1mk)
  4. Name two committees of the cabinet. (2mks)
  5. State two reasons of giving prison sentences.    (2mks)
  6. Name the most import document that is relied upon by Historians for direct account of

the East Coast of Africa.                                                                                              (1mk)

 

SECTION  B.

  1. a) Outline any three achievements of Thomas Joseph Mboya in his political career.        (3mks)
  2. b) Explain the role played by Jomo Kenyatta in the struggle for independence.            (12mks)
  3. a) What were the causes of the mau-mau uprising in Kenya.     (5mks)
  4. b) Explain FIVE impacts of mau-mau uprising in Kenya.                                            (10mks)
  5. a) Highlight THREE objectives of the local Native councils set up in 1924.      (3mks)
  6. b) Explain SIX impacts of the Indian Ocean trade in Kenya.                                        (12mks)
  7. a) State FIVE causes of the migration of Iteso community to their present homeland.      (5mks)
  8. b) Describe the political organisation of the Kalenjins community upto 1870’s.           (10mks)

     

SECTION  C.    

  1. a) List FIVE factors that led to the rise of multi-party democracy in Kenya.       (5mks)
  2. b) Explain FIVE factors that discourage National Unity.                                              (10mks)
  3. a) State THREE functions of chiefs as representatives of the government in locations. (3mks)
  4. b) Explain functions and responsibilities of the president.                                            (12mks)
  5. a) Outline THREE principles provided in the Kenyan legal system.       (3mks)
  6. b) Explain SIX functions of local authorities in Kenya today.                                                    (12mks)

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT I

PART II

 

SECTION  A.

  1. State two advantages of using oral traditions in the study of Africa history.                              (2mks)
  2. Name two uses of Acheulian tools during the old stone Age period.       (2mks)
  3. Identify three consequences of iron working technology in Africa before the colonial period.                                                                                                                                                  (3mks)
  4. State two factors that influenced early urbanization in Greece.                                      (2mks)
  5. Name two uses of the wheel in Mesopotamia                                                                (2mks)
  6. Name two agricultural inventions that led to the improvement of agriculture in North America

in the 19th century.                                                                                                                  (2mks)

  1. Identify three factors that led to the industrial revolution in Germany in the 19th century. (3mks)

 

 

 

  1. Name two ways by which advances in medical science have improved man’s life expectancy.

(2mks)

  1. State two effects of the construction of Suez Canal in 1869.   (2mks)
  2. State two diplomatic methods which were used by European states to establish their rule in Africa in the 19th century. (2mks)
  3. Name two leaders of the Algerian War of independence. (2mks)
  4. Why was President Anwar Sadat of Egypt assassinated in 1981? (1mk)

 

   

  SECTION   B.

 

13  .a) Name three hunting methods that were used by the old stone Age men.              (3mks)

  1. b) What were the effects of crop and animal domestication during the New Stone Age period.

(12mks)

  1. a) Discuss the factors that favoured the rise of United States of America as a world Industrial power

(10mks)

  1. b) State five problems that hinder industrialization in the third world countries.         (5mks)

15  a) Discuss the organization of Trans-Atlantic Trade.                                                      (5mks)

  1. b) What were the effects of Trans-Atlantic Trade. (10mks)
  2. a) Explain why king Lewanika collaborated with the British. (10mks)
  3. b) What were the results of collaboration between King Lewanika and the British?  (5mks)

 

SECTION  C.

 

  1. a) Why did USA adopt a federal constitution after the American war of independence? (5mks)
  2. b) Explain how the USA government is organised.                                                   (10mks)
  3. a) How did the 1914 Sarajevo incident contribute to the rise of the first world war. 6mks)
  4. b) What were the results of the Treaty of Versailles.                                                (9mks)
  5. a) Discuss the factors that led to the rise of African nationalism in Ghana after the second World War.

(10mks)

  1. b) State five methods which were used by the African Political parties in the Struggle for Ghana’s

independence                                                                                                          (5mks)

 

 

HISTORY I

PART 1

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A .

 

  1. Give TWO results of the interaction of Kenya communities during their migration and

     settlements:

–     Intermarriage strengthened relations between communities.

–     Trade development between communities.

–     Assimilation and absorption of some communities by others.

–    Expulsion of some communities from their places of settlement.

(2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. Mention any TWO communities with age set system of organisation in Kenya:.

–     Nandi / kalenjin      –      Pokomo

–     Maasai                    –      Borana      ( 2 points 2 x 1 = 2 mks)

 

  1. State TWO circumstances under which it may not be against the Law to kill a person:

–     When it is self defence or in defence of property.

–     In the process of Lawful arrest or prevention of escape of a person who is lawfully detained.

–     In the course of suppressing a riot, mutiny or rebellion.

–     In order to prevent a person from committing a criminal act.

–     In event of war.                              (2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. Name TWO Portuguese generals that led Expeditions to the East coast of Africa:

–     Vasgo – da Gama.               –      Petro Alvarries Cabral.

–     Ruy Lourence Ravasco.       –      Francisco de Almeida.                    (2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. State TWO problems experienced by missionaries in Kenya:

–     Coastal people were Muslims and did not welcome Christian missionaries.

–     Hostility of some communities who did not want foreigners in their land.

–     Hostility from slave traders as missionaries opposed to slave trade.

–     Inadequate suppliers of food, and medicines.

–     Lack of means of transport e.g moved on foot.

–     Language barriers e.g had to learn Kiswahili and local languages.

–     Attack by tropical diseases.

–     Rivalries between missionaries of different denominations.

–     Catechists used by the missionaries to convert people were regarded as outcasts.

–     Met resistance from Africans as they preached against polygamy, circumcision and traditional religion.      (Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. Distinctive features of trade union movement in Kenya:

–     Early trade union movement were dominated by non-Africans.

–     Fought for their course through organised strikes.

–     Worked together with Nationalists to fight for improved conditions for Africa.

–     They only existed where there was wage or earning labour force e.g urban areas.

–     It was difficult for Africans working in European farms to unite together as a single force.

–     The educated elite in urban areas are the ones who mobilised trade union activities.

(Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. State TWO reasons why the British government built the Uganda Railways:

–     To establish effective control over British East Africa.

–     To facilitate economic exploitation of the region.

–     To stop slave trade and promote legitimate trade.

–     To help in the movement of troops and government administration.

–     Link Uganda with the East coast and the outside world for greater economic growth.

      (Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. State TWO results of the Lennox – Boyd constitutional reforms of October 1957:

–     Government created 6 more African constituencies.

–     Elections were held in March 1958 where 14 African countries elected to Legco.

–     Musa Amalemba was elected as second minister (ministry of housing).

–     1959, Sir Michael Blundell resigned from the post of minister for agriculture to lead the new Kenya group.

–     Three political parties were formed e.g Kenya National party of Michael Blundell, Kenya Independent Movement of Oginga odinga and United party of group captain Briggs.-

( Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. According to sessional paper no 10 of 1965 on African socialism and its application to planning in Kenya, identify TWO principles that guide economic, social and political development in Kenya.

–     Political democracy.

–     Mutual social responsibilities.

–     Various forms of  ownership.

–     A range of controls to ensure that property is used in mutual interest of society  and its members..

–     Progressive  taxes to ensure an equitable distribution of wealth and income.

–     Diffusion of ownership to avoid economic disparities.

(Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

10) Explain why Kenyan’s celebrate Kenyatta day as A National Holiday:

–     To commemorate the day Kenyatta and other leaders of K.A.U. were arrested by colonial government.

–     To remind us of the sufferings and blood shed by our people in the struggle for independence.

(Any 1 point 1 x 1 = 1mk)

 

  1. State TWO circumstances under which a general election can be made in Kenya:

–     After every five years i.e at the end of the current parliament.

–     When president dissolves parliament and calls general election as happened in 1983.

–     When the government becomes unpopular and is forced to resign by a vote of no confidence.

(Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks) 

 

  1. Explain what is made by apellate jurisdiction:

–     The powers conferred upon a court to hear appeals from lower courts.

(1 x 1 = 1mk)

 

  1. Name TWO committees of the cabinet:

–     An ad hoc committee.

–     Development committee.

–     Foreign affairs committee.

–     Manpower committee.                    (Any 2 points, 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. State TWO reasons of giving prisons sentences:

–     To rehabilitate the offender.

–     To punish the offender with the aim of correcting him.

–     To deter those who might be thinking of committing crimes.

( Any 2 points 2 x 1 = 2mks)

 

  1. Name the most important document relied on by historians for direct account of the East

      Africa coast:

–     Periplus of the Erythraean sea written by a Greeks based in Egypt.

( 1 x 1 = 1mk)

 

SECTION B .

 

  1. a) Outline any THREE achievements of Thomas Mboya in his political career:

–     Became the National General Secretary of Kenya local government workers union in 1953.

–     Was elected also the Secretary General of the Kenya Federation of labour in 1953.

–     Protested against government decision to separate the Agikuyu, Aembu and Meru from other communities in Nairobi.

–     Attended trade union meetings in Brussels in 1954 and London.

–     His visits led to opening of offices for International conference of Free Trade Union and the Trade Union congress in Nairobi.

–     Attended local and overseas seminars on trade unionism.

–     Gave outstanding lectures on trade unionism.

–     Campaigned for the release of the detained unionists and other political leaders.

–     Made extensive tours of U.S.A and Canada where he explained Africa problems and called for better conditions.

–     1957 He was elected to the Legislative council.

–     Formed Nairobi peoples convention party and became its president upto 1960.

–     1958, he was elected to the international conference of free trade Unions executive board.

–     He also became first president of All – African peoples conference in Accra, Ghana in 1958 where he explained Kenyans political problems under colonial rule.

–     Became director of publicity and Treasurer of K.A.U in 1952 and 1953 respectively.

–     Protested against white domination of the government economic activities and the practice of racism.

–     Became Secretary General of K.A.N.U from 1960 to 1969.

–     Played leading role in the negotiations for independence at Lancaster Conference .

–     Held the post of Minister of labour, Minister for Justice and Constitutional affairs and Minister for Planning and economic development.

( Any 3 points outlined 3 x 1 = 3mks)

  1. b) Explain the role played by Jomo Kenyatta in the struggle for independence:

–     He became the Secretary General of  Kikuyu Central Association and played the role drafting letters for K.C.A and translation from English and Kiswahili to Kikuyu.

–     In 1928 Kenyatta was chosen to represent land grievances before the Hilton Young Commission in Nairobi and he acted as interpreter.

–     Became the editor of K.C.A newspaper “Mwigwithania” where he wrote articles on Kikuyu customs and culture as well as urging them to improve agricultural methods and take children to school.

–     February 1929, he was sent by K.C.A to present their land grievances before the British government and met with several Nationalist eg Nationalist from India, A Nigerian Lawyer, Ladipo Solanke etc.

–     Wrote an article in the Sunday workers, the communist party newspaper in Britain dealing with independence for oppressed Kenyan Africans.

–     After returning from Britain in 1930, he supported the formation of independent school movement in central Kenya to the disappointment of the Missionaries.

–     April 1931, he represented the Kenya Africans before British Parliamentary committee on closer union of Kenya, Uganda and Tanganyika.

–     1937, he became a member International African Service Bureau who was to fight for civil liberties and self determination for all Africans.

–     1934, he supported North Kavirondo Central Association against the alienation of Abaluyia lands in Kakamega where gold was discovered.

–     He also supported the formation of the Taita Hills Association and Ukambani Members Association.

–     He wrote articles in British Press and gave Lectures about Kenya’s economic and political problems.

–     Participated in 1945 Pan-African Congress in Manchester which wanted freedom for colonised Africans and Liberties for Africans worldwide.

–     On his return from London in 1946 he replaced James Gichuru as President for K.A.U, making the party popular countrywide.

–     1952, the colonial government declared a state of emergency under which Jomo Kenyatta and other political leaders were arrested, tried and imprisoned.

–     1961, Kenyatta was released from prison and became president of K.A.N.U, joined the legislative council and worked with other nationalist for fight for independence.

–     1962, he with other nationalists attended the Lancaster house conference which prepared the way for Uhuru.

–     1st June 1963, Kenya attained it’s Self-government with Kenyatta as first Prime Minister.

–     1964, Kenya became a republic with Kenyatta as its first President.

 

  1. a) What were the causes of mau-mau uprising in Kenya:

–     Africans wanted proper representation in the in the legislative council i.e. wanted elected members not nominated .

–     Africans wanted to regain their lost land i.e. land taken for taken for white settlements.

–     The squater system where Africans were grouped on white farms where they provided labour, worked for long hours at low pay.

–     Emergence of ex-servicemen whose world outlook was wide. Those wanted constitutional changes and attainment of independence now.

–     Formation of National political parties like K.A.U. encouraged the mau mau. The leaders of those political parties supported mau mau as they fought for same principles.

–     The assumption of  K.A.U. leaders by Radical group made the movement forceful.

–     The 1949 oathings in squatters and central province bound people together in support of mau mau.

–     The formation of forty group by ex-servicemen in 1946 led to organised opposition against Europeans .They stopped the kikuyu people from terracing under control of District officer .

–     The group emerged as freedom fighters.

                             (Any 5 points = 5×1 = 5mks)

 

  1. b) Explain five impacts of MAU MAU uprising in Kenya:

–     It made it clear to constitutional planners that Africans wanted majority rule in Kenya.

–     It proved to the colonial government in Kenya that they were unable to control the internal situation .Troops and money had come from Britain to suppress the mau mau. Hence the responsibility for permanent settlement now rested with Britain.

–     Over $50 million were drained from Britain and Kenya to support the uprising.

–     Many people died in the war e.g. 10,000 mau mau men, 2,000 civilian African, 1,000 government troops and 50,000 Europeans and Asians civilian s died.

–     Tens of thousands of Africans were herded into reserves and detention camps. Thousands of prisoners suffered harsh treatment.

–     People lived for 10 years in fear for their lives. Villages, Clans and families were divided into loyalists and mau mau supporters.

–     It forced the government of the British to change the constitution to improve African life e .g 1957, eight Africans were elected to legislative council. The swynnarton plan was effected to give titles of land to Africans .Africans were allowed for the first time to grow cash  crops.

–     Mau mau forced independence to come.

                  (Any 5 points explained=5×2=10mks)

 

  1. a) Highlight Three Objectives of the Local Native Council set up in 1924:

–     To encourage and develop a sense of responsibility and duty towards the state among the African leaders.

–     To provide a forum through which the old, the young and the educated Africans could express  themselves but restrict them to district level.

–     To provide a means through which the government could come to understand the African and be able to contain him.                    (Any three points 3×1=3mks)

 

  1. b) Explain six impacts of Indian ocean trade in Kenya:

–     Led to foundation and development of  city states. Villages grew into towns and towns into stone built cities e .g . Lamu, Mombasa, Malindi, Pate, Manila etc.

–     Led to the spread  of Islamic religion to the interior of Kenya .Many people were converted  to Islamic faith.

–     Islamic culture and civilization spread along the coast e .g  dressing habits, eating  habits became Asian and Islamic.

–     Arabic design and architecture spread along the coast of Kenya and later into the interior of Kenya e .g. mosque, Schools and shops were built using Arabic design and architecture.

–     Most city- states became wealthy and powerful. There was often conflicts between them for control of trade and taxes charged on traders.

–     Islamic government and sheria laws were established in some of the city-states e .g. Mombasa,  Malindi , Gedi  e.t.c.

–     Rulers and merchants grew wealthy due to Indian ocean trade.

–     They dressed in expensive silk cloth from China and cotton clothes from India, they lived in houses built of stones, finely decorated, ate in splendid plates, porcelain plates from China.

–     It opened up the interior of Kenya to the outside

–     Islamic schools where people were taught how to read and write were built

–     The Arabs and Persians intermarried with the coast Bantu giving rise to a new breed of people called waswahili. A new language emerged

–     Arabs and Persians along the coast introduced new crops, spices and cooking style e.g banana, coconut, rice, clove and wheat.

                  (Any 6 points explained = 6 x 2 = 12mks)

  1. a) State FIVE causes of the migration of Iteso community to their present homeland:

–     Search for pasture and water for their animals.

–     Pressure from the Karamanjong and Turkana.

–     Over population, hence the need for fresh land for settlement.

–     Epidemic of cattle diseases.

–     Drought and famine.

–     The spirit of adventure and desire for loot and plunder.

      (Any 5 points = 5 x 1 = 5mks)

 

  1. b) Describe the political organisation of the Kalenjin community upto 1870s:

–     Kalenjin political system was based on semi-independent territorial units called bororosiet (Bororiet –singular).

–     Each bororiet was controlled by council of elders who members were chosen due to their wisdom and military skill.

–     Elders maintained law and order in the community, settled major disputes, made important decisions affecting the community. Their court was the final court in the land.

–     Each bororiet was further divided into smaller political units under smaller council of elders.

–     They defined grazing grounds and settled minor disputes.

–     In the 19th century the office of the Orkoiyot was introduced to the Nandi and Kipsigis. The Orkoiyot was a diviner and was skilled in foretelling the future, interpreting omens and in averting ill luck

–     The institution of the Orkoiyot brought a high degree of centralisation in the Kalenjin political structure e.g co-ordinated all the activities throughout the land. The office of the Orkoiyot brought together all the different Kipsigis groups into one strong community.

–     Boys of the same age group joined a named age- set e.g Maina, Chuma, Sawe, Korongoro, Kipkoiimet, Kiplelach, Kimnyige and Nyongi.

–     Boys also qualified after circumcision to join bororiets junior warriors, a permanent warrior group that conquered new lands and defendant the community against external attacks.

–     Age-sets was maintained by changing of age-set names through the “Sageet ap eito” ceremony marking the official hand –over of power from one age-set to the next. It was performed every 10 to 15 years

–     Complete cycle of age-set names took between 50 and 100 yrs.

      (Any 5 points 5 x 1 = 5mks)

 

SECTION C.

 

5    a)   List FIVE factors that led to rise of Multi-party Democracy in Kenya:

–     Alleged rigging of the 1988 General election against some candidates through 70% rule i.e Queuing system.

–     KANU policies of grilling and suspending or expelling those critical to the system.

–     Political changes in the Soviet Union e.g Mikhail Gorbachevs political reforms.

–     Western Aid conditions e.g give only to countries initiating democratic policies and pluralism.

–     Influence of pluralism from Zambia and Togo..

–     Role of activists e.g clergy men, politicians, lawyers and journalists kept up the pressure for multi-partism.

–     KANUs response to criticism by organising political rallies where they claimed to revive tribalism, disrupt political stability and retard economic development.

–     Saitoti Review Committee Report of 1990. Abolition of que-voting system and expulsion from the party     (Any 5 points 5 x 1 = 5mks)

 

  1. b) Explain FIVE factors that discourage National Unity:

Religious conflicts

–     Lack of tolerance of each others religious beliefs can lead to inter-denominational conflicts.

–     Inter-denominational rivalry has led to civil wars in Lebanon.

Tribalism

–     Some Kenyans practice tribalism by favouring people of their own ethnic groups in employment and colleges.

–     Tribal clashes often pose a threat to National unity.

Racialism:

–     The practice of discriminating against people of a different race may cause friction and violence e.g Apartheid,  Nepotism

–     The practice of using facilities and resources to serve only one’s relatives e.g admitting relatives to colleges, employing them e.tc.

Corruption

–     The practice of giving and soliciting for bribes. It discourages national unity as it instills the belief that only money can buy public services and bend laws to avoid punishment.

      (Any 5 points explained 5 x 2 = 10 mks)

 

  1. a) State THREE functions of chiefs as representatives of the government in locations:

–     Maintain law and order in the location.

–     Act as a link between the people in the location and the government.

–     Explaining government policies to the people in the location.

–     Encouraging development projects in the location.

–     Ensuring that people co-exist peacefully.

–     Issuing permits for both private and public functions within the location.

–     Controlling the use of dangerous drugs like bhang.

–     Settling minor disputes between people in the location.

–     Chairman of the locational Development committee.

–     Mobilizing people to participate in public works.

–     Monitor payment of taxes like coffee, cars, radio and bicycles licences.

–     Convening “barazas” where people air their views on matters affecting their welfare.

      (Any 3 points 3 x 1 = 3mks)

 

  1. b) Explain SIX functions and responsibilities of the president:

–     Responsible for upholding the constitution. This requires that the president ensure no person or groups of persons violate the constitution. He ensures the rule of law is held.

–     Has the responsibility of protecting the interests, rights and freedom of citizens. He ensures the establishment of democratic institutions to facilitate peoples participation in government.

–     Is responsible for forming a government after general election by appointing the cabinet and permanent secretaries

–     Appoints senior civil servants as permanent secretaries, ambassadors, commissioners of police, chairman of parastatals e.tc.

–     Is the chief spokesman for a Kenya in matters involving foreign relations. Some times he delegates the duty to his ambassadors and foreign minister.

–     Appoints special commissions and boards to look into particular issues of public interest.

–     Leads the nation in celebrating National holidays like Madaraka day, Jamhuri day, Kenyatta day.

–     Officially opens projects, starts some projects and holds harambee meetings.

–     Gives honour to deserving Kenyans for their exemplary service e.g the Order of the Golden Heart of Kenya, Distinguished Service Medal and Head of state commendation.

–     Leader of Government and National Assembly. Summons parliament and gives opening speeches and closing speech.

–     Attends parliamentary debates.

      (Any 6 points explained 6 x 2 = 12 mks)

 

  1. a) Outline THREE principles provided in the Kenya legal Systems:

–    The independence of the Judiciary e.g the judiciary is separate from other arms of the government

–     They are not influenced by or dictated by anybody in the conduct of their official duties.

–     The rule of law i.e all citizens and residents are subjects to and governed by same law irrespective of their status, race, colour, religion or economic privillege.

–     A person is assumed innocent until he is proved guilty by courts of law. Hence the police cannot administer justice to a suspect but must take him or her for trial before court of law.

–     According to the law cases are heard either publicly or in camera.

      (Any 3 points 3 x 1 = 3 mks)

 

  1. b) Explain SIX functions of local authorities in Kenya today:

–     Providing public services required by local people in their areas of jurisdiction. These include educational facilities like schools and libraries, cattle dips, waters supply, roads e.t.c.

–     They run social services like day care centres, social clubs, meal services and hostels e.t.c.

–     Provision of housing facilities in Urban areas. They clear slum dwellings, build and manage new houses, provide sewarage, rubbish disposal, street lighting e.t.c.

–     Providing recreation services like swimming pools, sports grounds, parks, museums, gardens, public films shows e.t.c.

–     Are responsible for public health functions like food hygiene dispensaries, cleanliness in shops and offices, ortuaries, ambulance services, vaccination and immunisation programmes.

–     Burying destitute persons who die within their areas of jurisdiction i.e no relatives to claim and bury them

–     Regulating trading activities through provisions of markets, abattoirs, consumer protection, trading licenses and permits.

–     Providing building regulation and protection. They approve building plans, provide fire control / services.

–     Passing by – laws to regulate specific aspects of public life e.g prohibition of dumping rubbish in certain areas. By laws are approved by Local government.

–     Providing job and training opportunities for people within their jurisdiction e.g councilors, administrators, clerks, labourers.

–     It enhances participatory democracy as it affords the people to participate in the management of public affairs and their government through elected mayors, chairman and councilors.

–     Assisting officers of the central government at district level to find solutions to local problems. They are better placed to determine the nature and complexity of local problems.

      (Any 6 points explained 6 x 2 = 12 mks)

 

HISTORY I

PART II

MARKING SCHEME.

 

SECTION A:

 

  1. Advantages of oral tradition:

–     Lack of written records in many pre-colonial African societies. Hence oral tradition offer the

most effective way of studying pre-colonial African history

–     Oral traditions offer a more lively/enjoyable way of studying African history

–     In information obtained through oral traditions can be used to supplement other sources of history

1 point 1 mark               Total 2 marks.

 

  1. Use of Acheulian tools:

–     Digging of roots.                       –    Killing animals.

–     Cutting animal skins.                –    Skinning animals.

–     Scrapping animal skins.            –    Pounding vegetables.

–     Breaking animals bones.                                               Any 1 point 1 mk           Total 2 mks

 

  1. Consequences of iron working technology:

–     Production of farming tools hence increase in food production.

–     Increased food production led to an increase in human population.

–     Increased human population forced people to migrate to sparsely populated regions.

–                  Some communities manufactured fighting weapons such as spears which they used to conquer

their neighbours.

–     Individuals who possessed iron working skills acquired special status in some societies.

1 point 1mk                   Total 3 mks.

 

  1. Factors that favoured early urbanisation in Greece:

–     Trading / commercial.

–     Sporting activities.

–     Self defence.

Total 2mks

 

  1. Uses of the wheel in mesopotamia:

–     Making of high quality pots from clay.

–     Building war chariots.

–     Making vehicles (carts) for transporting agricultural produce from the farms.

Any 1 point 1mk                        Total 2 mks.

 

  1. Agricultural inventions that led to the improvement of Agriculture in N.America in the 19th

      century:

–     Invention of reapers by Cyrus Mc Cormick in 1831.

–   Invention of steel plough by John Deer in 1839.

1 point 1mk                  Total 2mks.

 

  1. Factors that led to Industrial Revolution in Germany in the 19th century:

–     The formation of Zollverein (Custom Union) in 1818.

–     Construction of railways between 1835 and 1850.

–     The discovery of coal in Selesia.

–     The growth of an efficient banking system and joint stock company.

–     Political unification in 1871 which helped to integrate the national market.

–     Rise of ambitious private entrepreneurs such as Siemens Dernburgh and Krupp.

–     Flow of foreign capital and technology in the country.

–     Military success against France in the 1870 – 71 which brought self-glorification and business confidence which helped to boost industries.

1 point 1mk                   Total 3mks

 

  1. Ways by which advances in medical science have improved mans life expectancy:

–     Through discovery of drugs most of the diseases that used to kill people have been brought under control.

–     Improvement in surgery have reduced incidence of death during surgical operations.

–     The invention of vaccine has contributed greatly in controlling the spread of killer diseases such as measles.

            1 point 1mk                   Total 2mks

 

  1. Effects of the construction of Suez canal:

–     It provided a direct link between Europe and Asia.

–     Increased volume of trade between Asia and Europe.

–     It led to the growth of European interest in Africa and far East which encourage Europeans to search for colonies.

1 point 1mk                   Total 2mks.

 

  1. Diplomatic methods that were used by Europeans to establish their rule in Africa in the 19th

      century:

–     Establishing diplomatic relationship with the African rulers.

–     Signing protection treaties with African rulers.

–     Europeans states signed partition agreement among themselves in areas where spheres of influence were contested.

–     Some Europeans states used their nationals such as explorer, missionaries and traders to lure chiefs into accepting. them through gifts such as clothes, beads, weapons and drinks.

–     In some areas they used divide and rule tactics.

1 point 1mk                   Total 2mks.

 

  1. Two leaders of Algerian war of independence:

–     Ferhat Abbas.

–     Mohammed Ben Bella.

1 personality 1mk                      Total 2mks.

 

  1. Why president Auwar Sadat was assasinated in 1981:

–     His historic visit to Jerusalem (Israel) in 1977                1mk

 

SECTION B.

13.a) Hunting methods that were used by the late Stone age people:

–     Chasing wild animals and throwing stones to entangle the escaping prey.

–     Digging big pits in the path through which animals went to drink water.

–     Chasing and herding animals over steep cliffs or swampy lakes.

–     Trapping animals around watering points.

1 point 1mk                   Total 3mks.

  1. b) Results of crop and animal domestication:

–     It improved mans ability to raise food, this reducing his reliance on the natural environment.

–     Gradually, more efficient methods of farming were developed leading to the use of better farming methods and tools such as iron hoes and the raising of crops through irrigation.

–     Food production increased which led to the growth of human population.

–     Due to increased food production man began to lead a more settled life.

–     Increased human population led to division of labour. Thus some people became farmers, while others engaged in weaving, pottery, metal work and trading.

–     As man began to lead a more  settled life, towns emerged, some of which became important commercial, administration and cultural centres.

–     With the rise of human settlements, laws for governing human conduct were formulated. This in turn led to the rise of rulers such as chiefs and kings to enforce the laws.

–     Increased food production led to food surplus which stimulated internal and external trade.

Any point 2mks             Total 12 mks

 

14.a) Factors that favoured the rise of the united States as a worlds industrial power:

–     After U.S.A attained independence in 1781 many people migrated into the country from Western Europe. The migrants provided labour for the exploitation of natural resources which led to the foundation for industrial development in the country.

–     In addition, the new migrants offered a ready domestic market for the locally manufactured goods and services

–     The country in addition had a wide range of industrial minerals such as copper, iron, coal and oil in addition to forestry resources which helped to boost industrial development in the country.

–     Availability of good road and railway network which were instrumental in the transportation of the raw materials to the industries and distribution of finished products to the market.

–     Moreover, president Theodore Roosevelt who took over in 1901 introduced “conservation Laws” which helped to prevent careless exploitation of natural resources. This, to some extent helped to increase the pace of industrialization in the country.

–     During the reign of President Woodrow Wilson (1913) new reforms (New freedom) were introduced in the country. The reforms, allowed ordinary people to participate in the business thus stimulating the growth of industries. Moreover the new reforms gave farmers an opportunity to borrow money from banks which helped to modernise agriculture. This helped to boost agro-based industries in addition to providing food for the urban industrial workers.

–     Additionally, the American unity and long period of political stability due to strong leadership helped the growth of industries.

–     The country’s policy of isolation and neutrality in world affairs especially during the first and the second world wars enabled the country to have an earlier and undisrupted industrial take off.

–     Further, the country witnessed a wide range of scientific and technological inventions, which were a further boost to the country’s industrial development.

–     Additionally, the emergence of the cold war after the second world war led to military and technological competition between U.S.A and USSR. This forced U.S.A to intensify her technological developments which was a further boost to industrial development.

Any point 2mks              Total 10mks.

 

  1. b) Problems that hinder industrialisation in the third world countries:

–     Lack of capital.

–     Lack of technological knowhow.

–     Poor transport and communication network.

–     Low purchasing power of manufactured goods among the people in the developed countries.

–     Competition from developed countries.

–     Political instability in some countries.

–     Neo-colonialism.                                   1 point 1mk                   Total 5mks

 

15.a) The organisation of Trans-Atlantic Trade:

–     Trans – Atlantic trade developed in 15th century between Europe, West-Africa and the America.

–     The trade involved European traders, African middle men and American Plantation owners.

–     European traders bought trading items such as cotton, clothes, spirits guns and gun powder; iron ware and glass ware to the west Africa. These were exchanged for slaves animal skins, gold and ivory which were brought from the interior parts of west Africa to the coast by African middlemen.

–     Commercial transactions between European merchants and African middlemen took place either in the coastal parts suck as Elmina, lagos and Quidah which were built by European Merchants or on ships anchored in the rivers

–     Of all exports from west Africa slaves were the most important item of trade. These were captured from the interior and transported to the coast by the African middlemen. At the coast they were locked in warehouses. Once the transactions were over, they were tightly packed in ships and shipped across the Atlantic ocean to the Americas

–     In the Americas slaves were sold to the plantation owners through auction. Thereafter they became either domestic servants or workers in mines, cotton, tobacco and sugar plantations.

–     The product of slave labour namely minerals and raw materials such as sugar, tobacco and cotton were inturn exported to Europe from the Americas.

Any point 1mk               Total 5 mks      

 

16.a) Reasons why King Lewanika collaborated with the British:

–     He wanted the British to protect him against his internal opposers.

–     His kingdom had been weakened militarily due to the kololo invasion in 1840. For these reason, he had no option but to collaborate..

–     The Lozi kingdom was under external threat from its more powerful neighbours, namely the Ngoni and Ndebele. Hence Lewanika sought assistance from the British in order to secure protection.

–     Further, the kingdom was faced with increasing threat from the Boers, the German and Portuguese.  For this reason, Lewanika undertook to collaborate with British in order to ward off threats from other Europeans.

–     Some Lozi vassal states were attempting to declare their independence, thus threatening the unity of the kingdom. Consequently, Lewanika sought British assistance in order to retain the unity of the kingdom.

–     Lewanika was in addition influenced by his close ally, chief Khama of Bamagwato to seek protection from the British.

–     Further, Lewanika had hope that by collaborating with the British his people would acquire western education and technology.

–     Additionally, Lewanika nursed the view that such a collaboration would promote trade between Britain and his kingdom.

                        (Any point 2mks )                      Total10marks.

 

  1. b) Result of collaboration between Lewanika and the British:

–     Colonial rule was established in northern Rhodesia without bloodshed.

–     Lewanika retained his position as the paramount chief of the Lozi.

–     The British used their foothold in Barotsel and (Bulozi) to subjugate the Lozi neighbours who did not co-operate

–     The British South African company built schools in Barotseland thus laying the foundation of Western education in the kingdom

–     The British South African company in addition started small scale mining industries in the kingdom.

–     Under the influence of the British South African company, the practice of slavery in Barotseland reduced significantly.

–     Western culture and Christianity were introduced in the kingdom.

–     Communication in Barotseland was improved through the construction of roads and telegraphic lines.

Any point 1mk               Total 5 mks.

 

SECTION C.

17  a)   Reasons why USA government adopted a federal constitution:

–     To achieve unity among the different states.

–     To come up with a national government capable of levying taxes, enforcing laws and regulating commerce

–     To enable USA government to govern the unconquered Western lands.

 

–     To maintain forces adequate for national defence.

–     To ensure that smaller states were not dominated by the bigger states.

–     Federalism was viewed as a means of creating a larger international market.

Any point 1mk               Total 5mks

 

  1. b) How the USA government is organised:

–     It is a federal republic.

–     The president is the head of state and the chief executive.

–     The president is in addition the commander in chief of the armed forces.

–     The legislature consists of two houses, namely the house of representatives and the senate.

–     The federal government is composed of union Republic and autonomous republics which have their own government responsible for running affairs such education, health, transport, law and order.

–     The federal government is in charge of running the whole country through the congress in areas such as national defence, foreign affairs and currency.

–     The country has a party political system with two main parties. These are Democratic and Republican parties.

–     There is separation of power, for instance, the legislature in the congress are separated from the judges of the supreme court. Similarly, the executive i.e the president and his cabinet have no role to play in law-making process or the administration of justice.

–     The federal government intervenes incase of conflict between the states and makes the final decision through the Supreme Court. However, states can negotiate between themselves without involving the federal government.               1 point 2 mks                Total 10 mks.

 

  1. a) How the 1914 Sarajevo incident contributed to the rise of the first World war:

–     In June 1914, the Austro-Hungarian heir apparent, Franz Fedenand and his wife were assassinated in Sarajevo, Serbia.

–     Austria accused Serbia with a set of demands some of which were not acceptable to the government of Serbia.

–     Serbia thus rejected the demands. Consequently, Austria declared war on Serbia.

–     Russia in turn prepared her forces in readiness to defend Serbia incase she was to be attacked by Austria.

–     Germany demanded that Russia should demobilize. Russia refused. As a result, Germany declared war on Russia on 1st of August 1914.

–     After declaring war on Russia, Germany demanded that France should remain neutral. However, France did not oblige, hence Germany declared war on France on 3rd August 1914.

–     Noting the new developments, Britain had warned Germany that she should respect the 1839 Treaty which had guaranteed Belgium neutrality. Hence when Germany overrun Belgium in the course of invading France, Britain declared war on Germany.

–     Hence in mid-August 1914, all the great powers of Europe namely Germany, France, Britain, Austria and Russia came to be involved in the war. Thus what had began as a local Austro- Serbian conflict was transformed into a world war.

Any point 1mk               Total 6mks.

 

  1. b) Results of the Treaty of Versailes:

–     German was solely blamed for the 1st world war

–     The size of German was reduced by one eighth and her population was deprived of her colonial possessions and overseas investments.

–     Germany lost the province of Alsace and Lorraine, much of Schleswig, South Eastern Silesia and strip of Eastern Prussia.

–     Germany was required to pay a war indemnity of 6,600 million pounds.

–     Germany was restricted to an army recruitment of 100,000 men.

–     German army was restricted in the equipment it could use. For instance there was a ban on tanks, heavy artillery, military aircraft and poison gas. The navy was in addition banned from using submarines.

–     The treaty prevented any possible union between Germany and Austria.

–     The city of Danzig became a free city under jurisdiction of the league of Nations.

–     The Saar valley with its deposits of coal and iron was placed under the League of Nations.

Any 1 point 1mk                                    Total 9 mks.

 

19.a) Factors that led to the rise of African nationalism in Ghana after the second world war:

–     African ex-soldiers from Ghana had fought and killed Europeans during the second world war.

–     This shattered the myth of white man’s superiority. For this reason, the ex-soldiers gained confidence and thus were inspired to struggle for their independence.

–     The ex-soldiers in addition had come into contact with people in different countries such as

–     India, Burma and Borneo. Through these contacts, the ex-soldiers learnt much in regard to the struggle for independence. This motivated them to demand the independence of their country.

–     Furthermore, the ex-soldiers were poorly compensated after the war by the colonial government. For this reason, they agitated for the independence of Ghana.

–     Additionally, the war led to the formation of the United Nations Organization (UNO). To promote peace and justice in the world, UNO had advocated an end to colonialism. This encouraged Africans in Ghana to press for change.

–     The second world war in addition had led to economic hardships in Ghana which resulted in unemployment and inflation. Consequently, Africans demanded changes inorder to improve their economic and social well being.

–     Furthermore, Africans pressed for the decolonization of their country (Ghana) due to, low prices for their cocoa produce; being forced to cutdown their cocoa trees; and denial of export-import licences.

–     Majority of educated Africans, namely teachers, doctors and lawyers were dissatisfied due to lack of constitutional progress in favour of greater African participation in the political affairs of the country by 1945. For this reason, they agitated for change in order for the country to be free from British colonial rule.

     

  1. b) Methods used by African political parties in the struggle for Ghana’s independence:

–     Organising mass rallies to explain their goals and policies to the people.

–     Organising strikes and riots.

–     Taking part in general elections, for instance in 1951, 1954, and 1956.

–     Using propaganda to attract followers.

–     Improving the social and economic conditions of the African by for instance building roads, schools and hospitals.

–     Looting European shops.

1 point 1mk                   total 5 mks.

 

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT  II

PART I

 

SECTION A  (25MKS)

  1. State two reasons why the Oromo migrated from their cradleland into Kenya.           2mks
  2. Give two reasons why the Arabs settled along the Kenyan Coast before the 15th century. 2mks
  3. State two circumstances that can lead to General Elections in Kenya.       2mks
  4. State three functions of the Armed Forces in Kenya.       3mks
  5. Identify the last stage in the Law-making process in Kenya.       1mks
  6. Give the main reason why the Kenya African Democratic Union was formed. 2mks
  7. Give three results of organisation during the colonial period in Kenya.       3mks
  8. State two demands that were made by Africans to the colonial government between 1920 and 1939.                                                                                                                                        2mks
  9. What role was played by the Kenyan African Union in the struggle for independence in Kenya.                                                                                                                           3mks
  10. Give the main function of the Kenya Court of Appeal. 1mk
  11. State two problems that the local Authorities face in Kenya       2mks
  12. Give the main reason why the Taita resisted the colonial role. 1mk
  13. State two effects of plantation farming along the East African Coast. 2mks

 

SECTION B.  (45MKS)

 

14.a.   State five economic activities of the Akamba during the pre-colonial period.               5mks

  1. Discuss the effects of the migration and settlement of the Luo in Kenya.                                    10mks
  2. a. Identify three methods that were used by the British to establish their rule in Kenya. 3mks
  3. Explain the factors that made the Nandi to resist the British for a long time.            12mks

16.a.   What role was played by the African chiefs during the colonial period?                   3mks

  1. Explain six effects of colonial labour policies on the Africans.            12mks
  2. a. State five effects of Christian missionary activities in Kenya.                                        12mks
  3. Explain five factors that hindered the spread of Christianity in Kenya before the 19th Century.

5mks

SECTION C.  (30MKS)

  1. a. Identify five sources of Government revenue in Kenya.       5mks
  2. Explain five ways through which the parliament controls public expenditure in Kenya. 5mks

19.a.  Give three symbols of National Unity.                                                                             3mks

  1. Give six reasons why we need national unity in Kenya.             12mks
  2. a. Name any three political parties
  3. Explain six problems that the opposition parties have faced since 1991.                          12mks

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT II

PART I

MARKING SCHEME.

 

SECTION A ( 25MKS)

  1. – Search for pasture / overgrazing

–   International feuds / quarrels

–   Spirit of adventure

–   Human and animal disease

–   Over population

–   External attacks

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Trade

–   Persecution by rival Muslims at home

–   Cool climate compared to hostile climate at home

–   To spread Islam

–   Spirit of adventure

      2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – End of five year  term of the parliament

–  If a “vote of no confidence is passed against the government and president

–  If the president snaps electrons

1 x 1 = 1mk

 

  1. – Acts as a deterrent factor to the would be attacks

–     Defends our coastline, waters from illegal anchoring and dumping of wastes, boundaries.

–     Assists the police in case of civil disorder

–     Participates in developments eg. building of bridges and road construction.

–     Provide social amenities eg. hospitals and schools

–     Help in evacuating people during floods and other calamities

3 x 1 = 3mks.

 

 

  1. – Gazetting of the Act.
  2. – To represent the interests of minority groups in Kenya.
  3. – Led to development of slums

–   Unity among the Africans of different ethnic communities

–   Overcrowding / diseases

–   Crime due to unemployment

–   Rural –urban migration

–   Social evils eg. prostitution’s

–    Towns became centres of Nationalistic activities

–     Formation of Ethnic welfare Associations.

3 x 1 = 3mks.

 

  1. – Expansion of  Educational facilities

–     Reduction of taxes

–     Removal of Kipande

–     Return of alienated lands

–     End of forced labour

–     African representation in the Legico

–     Removal of the colonial status of the country.

–     Lifting of the destocking policy.

–     Equal pay for equal work

–     Better living and working conditions.

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – Gave support to Eliud Mathu who had been nominated to represent Africans interests in the –

Legco

–     Brought Unity among Africans – it was a mass movement.

–     Educated the African on their rights

–     Voiced African grievances to the colonial government

–     Supported the Maumau movement

–     Worked together with the trade unions and as a result the Kipande was replaced with work cards for all races.

3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. To listen / hear appeal cases from lower courts.

1 x 1 = 1 mk

 

  1. – Lack of capital to carry out their projects

–     Corruption by the officials

–     Mismanagement of funds and other resources.

–     Vandalism of their installations by people

–     Over employment / Ghost workers

–     Lack of co-operation by the people who do not obey by-laws

–     Poor maintenance of their equipment’s eg. vehicles

–     Numerous strikes due to non-payment of salaries.

–     Conflicts among the officials

–     Too much power is vested in the office of the Minister of local Government

–   Political interference.

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

  1. – To maintain their independence

 

  1. – Increased Slave trade

–     Attracted Europeans to come and trade for raw materials

–     Increase volume of the long distance trade

–     Led to penetration of Arabs and the Swahili to the interior

–     Led to the spread of Islam in the interior

–     Led to the spread of the Swahili culture in the interior

2 x 1 = 2mks

 

SECTION B (45MKS)

 

14.a.  –  Farming eg. millet

–     Trading

–     Herding

–     Iron working

–     Hunting and gathering

–     Bee keeping

–     Basketry and weaving

–     Pottery

5 x 1 = 5mks.

 

  1. – Conflicts with other communities

–           Displacement of some communities

–           Intermarriage

–           Cultural exchange

–           Copied farming methods from Bantu

–           Traded with the neighbours

–           Increased population in the areas they settled.

 

  1. a.

–           Company rule

–           Signing of treaties

–           Conquest

–           Establishing forts and stations.

–           Diplomacy using puppets.

            3 x 1 = 3mks.

 

b.-  Had a standing army

–   Had a long tradition of resisting intruders

–   Resisted to prevent Kimnyoles prophecy of the ;iron snake’ coming true.

–                                           Had knowledge of the terrain

–                                                Used Guerrilla warfare

– Had National pride so they saw the British as another group which needed to be conquered.

– Hated the colour of whites which was seen as evil / ghosts which needed to be exercised

–                                              Had food for the warriors.

6 x 2 = 12 mks

 

16  a.  –    Collecting taxes

–    Maintenance of law and order

–      Settled minor disputes

–      Made colonial policies acceptable eg. Western medicine.

–      Recruited labour for settler farms.

        3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. – Land Alienation:  Due to the small portions the Africans could not be self sufficient thus they had

to seek for wage labour.

–     Denial from growing cash cops:  This meant Africans could not be able to get an alternative to get money thus they had to go to the settler farms.

–     Introduction of numerous taxes:  These were only payable by cash and money was only available from whites and Indians

–     Introduction of Kipande:  This prevented the Africans from changing employers thus they had to stick to the settle farms.

–     Squatter system;  Africans who were squatters spent most of their time on the Landlords farm and had no time for their small portions of land.

–     Enacting Ordinances e.g Native Registration Ordinance which required all males of age 16 yrs and above to register thus all able-bodied were recruited for labour denying it to the African reserves

–     Introduction of cash economy / monitisation of the economy.  Every purchase of oil, soap etc had to be in form of money.  This affected the barter system among the Africans.

–     Creation of reserves:  these were overcrowded and since the land was small there was no food –  This forced the Africans to move to settler farms or towns to look for wage labour.

6 x 2 = 12 mks

 

 

17.a.  –  Introduction  of formal education made some Africans to get semi skilled jobs.

–     Translation of bible into Kiswahili and local languages enhanced spread of Christianity.

–     Introduction of Western medicine led to cure of diseases like leprosy that traditional medicine could not cure.

–     Their research on coffee / crops led to introduction of coffee  plantations

–     They stopped slave trade.  This saved Africans from the misery of being enslaved.

–     They set freed slave centres eg. Jomvu where the slaves were rehabilitated.

–   They helped in improving transport and communication by building roads to their mission stations.

–     They spread Western culture – those Africans who adopted it abandoned some cultural practices.                                    5 x 1 = 5mks.

 

  1. – Islam was already established along the coast.  Africans were reluctant to change  to a new

religion.

–     Islam was more tolerant to some African customs eg. Polygamy

–     The Portuguese crusaders were very cruel so the inhumanity was associated with the religion.

–     The Portuguese were too few to make an impact on the Africans.

–     The Portuguese rarely interacted with the local people

–     The Portuguese were affected by tropical diseases

–     Poor transport thus the missionaries could not get to the interior

–     The missionaries ran out of food and medicine.

6 x 2 = 12mks.

 

SECTION C. 

18.a.  –  Indirect taxes e.g customs duties excise duties and export duties.

–     Direct taxes e.g Pay As You Earn (PAYE) interests on Investments and earnings profits from businesses.

–     Licences eg. trading and driving licences

–     Profits from parastatals eg. Central Bank

–     Court Fines

–     Domestic borrowing eg. sale of Government bonds, Treasury bills

–     External sources eg. grants and loans from donors

–     Service Charges

–     Cess eg. Coffee, tea.

5 x 1 = 5mks.

 

  1. –  The government Estimates have to be approved by parliament

–   Parliament approves the money to be allocated to each ministry

–   All government Expenditure must be audited by controller and Auditor General.

–   Parliament monitors the government tender systems for purchase of materials and services

–  The permanent Secretary in every ministry is the chief accounting officer and makes sure money

is used for intended projects

–  The parliament debates on the budget of each ministry.

5 x 2 = 10mks.

 

  1. a. – Confirms appointments of civil services

–                                            Hires and fires civil servants

–      Authorises promotions deployments retirements, disciplining of civil Servants

–                    Ensures democratic process is enjoyed by acting impartially

–                Ensures fairness and shield civil service against undue influence.

  1. – Has power to prologue the parliament

–   Has power to dissolve the parliament       –    Has power to declare a state of emergency

–   Has power to appoint senior government officials equice president, Ministers

–   Has power to nominate six members of parliament.

–   Has power to grant clemency to people condemned to death.

–   Has power to send a contingent of soldiers for peace keeping missions

–   Has power to authorise formation of commissions of inquiry on issues affecting the citizens.

6 x 2 = 12mks

 

  1. – Forum for Restoration of Democracy.  (FORD)

–     Forum for Restoration of Democracy Kenya (Ford Kenya)

–     Forum for Restoration of Democracy Asili (Ford Asili)

–     Kenya Social congress (KSC)

–     Kenya National Congress (KNC)

–     Party for Independent Candidates of Kenya (PICK)

–     Kenya National Democratic Alliance (KENDA)

–     Social Democratic Party (SDP)

–     National Development Party (NDP)

           3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. – Denial of licences to hold meetings

–     Inadequate coverage by mass media

–     Lack of capital

–     Some parties are tribal based thus lack support from other communities

–     Harassment of the officials by police

–     Detention of some leaders eg. Charles Rubia and Kenneth Matiba

–     Arrests of some officials by police

–     Disunity among the parties

–     Defection by some officials from their parties to KANU.

6 X 2 = 12mks.

 

HISTORY & GOVT II

PART 11

 

SECTION A. 

 

  1. What is the meaning of the term government.       1mk
  2. State two cultural developments of early man during the Newstone Age.       2mks
  3. Give two farming methods that were used in Europe before 1750.       2mks
  4. Give two characteristics of Industrial Revolution.       2mks
  5. Give two reasons why the Odwira festival was held among the Asante.       2mks
  6. List two items that were exported from Western Sudan to North African during the

Trans-saharan trade.                                                                                                                  2mks

  1. Give two factors that led to the rise of Ethiopia during the 19th Century.       2mks
  2. List down one economic activity the Europeans involved themselves in before the 19th century. 1mk
  3. State one advantage of solar energy.       1mk
  4. State two reasons why the British used direct rule in Southern Rhodesia. 2mks
  5. State three problems that Zaire has faced since independence. 3mks
  6. Give one reason why the priests offered sacrifices in ancient Egypt. 1mk
  7. Give two reasons why city states developed in Greece. 2mks
  8. Name one scientific discovery that promoted use of surgery to save human lives. 1mk
  9. Give one reason why man domesticated animals.       1mk

 

SECTION B.

  1. a. State three terms of the Berlin conference of 1884 – 5.       3mks
  2. Discuss the reasons why Samori Toure resisted the French for a long time 12mks
  3. a. Give five methods that were used to spread Islam in Africa.              5mks

 

 

  1. Explain five effects of the spread of Islam in Africa by the 19th century              5mks
  2. a. Give three modern sources of energy.       3mks
  3. What factors promoted industrialisation in Brazil.             12mks
  4. a. State three factors that promoted early Agriculture in India.                                     3mks
  5. Explain how food shortages in the third world can be solved.            12mks

 

SECTION C.  (30 mks)

  1. a Give three limitations of relying on messengers as a means of communication.          3mks
  2. Give the positive effects of modern means of communication.                                       12mks
  3. a. Give three factors that led to Nationalism in South Africa. 3mks
  4. Explain the methods that the Africans in South Africa used in their struggle for Independence.                                                                                                                          12mks
  5. a. Give three advantages of relying on archaeology for information on history and government.                                                                                                                                3mks
  6. Explain the importance of studying history and government.                               12mks

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT II

PART II

MARKING SCHEME.

 

  1. It is practice of exercising control over ones subject.

Term can also refer to a body that governs a certain geographical area ie. A country

1 x 1 = 1mk.

 

  1. – Development of religion

–  Development of government

–  Settlements in villages ie man living a sedentary life.

–  Man decorated himself with ornaments eg. beads

–  Man decorated his rock shelters with animal, paintings, hunting scenes and other designs.

–  Man had simple art and crafts e.g baskets, pots.

–  Man made better tools that were lighter and sharper i.e the microlilths.

2 x 1  = 2mks.

 

  1. – Open field system

–     Replacement of human labour by machines

–     Rise of factory systems

–     Rise of the living standards

–     New sources of energy

–     Improved transport and communication

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Mass production of goods

–     Replacement of human labour by machines

–     Rise of the living standards

–     New sources of energy

–     Improvement transport and communication.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – During this festival prayers were made for the nation.

–     Planning for the following year was done

–     Disputes among various ornaments would be solved

–     Attendance by the omanhenes was a sign of their loyalty to the Asantehene.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Gold

–     Slaved

–     Ivory

–     Pepper

–     Animal Skins

–     Ostrich feathers

–     Kola nuts         2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. –  Unity through the Amharic language, culture and religion.

–     Able and competent leadership by such leaders as Yohannis iv, Theodore and Menelik II.

–     They were involved in trade – were able to acquire guns and gun powder

–     Modernized army – trained and well organized

–     Had a mixed economy thus had an ample supply of food for the soldiers.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Farming

–  Mining

–  Trading.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – It is a renewable source of energy.

–     It is cheap – to harness

–     Non – pollutant

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Wanted to have maximum profits from resources eg. land mining and labour.

–     The forceful occupation had destroyed the political institutions eg. Induna system thus they could not use indirect rule

–     The area had been occupied through force thus there was resentment and hostility from the Africans

–     The British had adequate and willing personnel to administer the area

–     The British had enough capital.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Coup de etats

–     Assassination of the presidents eg. Kabila, Patrick Lumumba.

–     Poor foreign policies eg. Neighbours – others have been supporting rebels

–     Poor infrastructure to encourage exploitation of resources

–     Foreign interference by former colonialists eg. Belgium.

–     Illiteracy – lack of adequate schools

–     Poor health – inadequate medical facilities

–     Political instability – tribal wars between the government and rebels

–     Foreign debts

–     Lack of capital

–     Food storage’s due to high population

–     Constant wars,

–     Harsh climate.

3 x 1  = 3mks.

 

  1. – Thanksgiving for the good harvests

–  Appeasing the gods especially during calamities.

1 x 1 = 1mk

 

  1. – Trade eg. Corinth Cocyra, knossos

–     Security – some were established on cliffs and islands

–     Millitary functions eg. Sparta

–     Cultural functions eg. Athens

–     Administration eg. Athens

–     Religious functions eg. Anthens

–     Availability of food.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. – Carbonic acid

–   Either / chloroform

1 x 1 = 1mk

 

  1. – To have a ready source of food

–     Some animals were social eg. dogs

–     For security eg. dogs

–     To help him hunt other animals

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

 

SECTION B.

  1. a. – Europeans agreed to use principle of spheres of influence.  Any nation that had

representatives in a given country would occupy it as its territory.

–     Agreed on Effective occupation:  that Any European country could claim any territory in African provided they sent administrators to administer the area

–     If any European nation wanted to extend its boundaries, it had to notify others to avoid clashes.

–     All European nations agreed to stamp out slave trade and slavery in their areas.

–     All  European nations agreed to protect traders, explorers, missionaries from the native attacks.

–     All European nations agreed that Zambezi, Congo and Niger basins would be free from European traders and navigation.

3 x 1 = 3mks.

 

  1. – Trade – guns and powder

–     Standing army

–     Was a Muslim – Jihad

–     Use of guerrilla and knowledge of terrain

–     Used scorch earth method

–     Was determined to retain independence

–     Manufactured weapons eg. guns

–     Had food for his armies

–     Use diplomacy eg. Bisandugu

–     Reinforcements delayed from France

6 x 2 = 12 mks

 

  1. a.

–     Trade

–     Intermarriage

–     Settlement / conquest

–     Muslim Zealots

–     Conversion of rulers

–     Exemplary life of Muslims giving alms attracted people to Islam.

 

  1. – Increase in trade

–     New communities ie. Swahili

–     Madrassa type of education

–     Sharia

–     New code of dressing

–     New dietary habits

–     New ruling systems i.e by sultan

–     New architectural designs – Arabic

        5 x 2 = 10mks

 

  1. – Cool

–     Steam

–     Petroleum

–     Electricity

–     Nuclear energy

–     Geo-thermal

–     Solar energy

3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. – Availability of economic and valuable minerals eg Iron ore, bauxite, gold

–     Availability of raw materials e.g coffee, cocoa, soyabeans.

–     The eruption of the two world wars isolated Brazil from Europe so that she could not import manufactured goods thus she started import substitute industries.

–     Provision of labour from her population as well as skilled labour from European immigrants

–     Provision of market from her population

–     Improvement of transport and communication eg. Railways, roads.

6 x 2 = 12mks

 

  1. a. – Availability of water from R. Ganges

–     Good irrigation methods eg. use of dykes & canals

–     Good storage facilities eg. baskets, pots

–     Fertility of the solid due to deposition of silt.

2 x 1 = 2mks.

 

  1. –      Encourage cultivation of draught resistant crops

–     Improve transport facilities for transportation of produce to factories and markets

–     Improve storage facilities for better storage of produce

–     Encourage growing of food crops rather than concentrating on cash crops

–     Encourage growing of some indigenous crops such as millet, sorghum

–     Provide incentives to the food – crop farmers eg. raising the prices of such foods.

–     Have good government food policies

–     Encourage the farmers by providing extension services.

–     Make family planning effective

–    Discourage cutting down of trees and encourage reafforestation to stop soil erosion and protect

catchment areas.

–     The fertilizers should be made affordable so that the farmer can buy them to improve the yields.

–     Encourage irrigation in the arid and semi arid areas

–     Reclaim more land and put it under food cultivation

–     Encourage research on better breeds and cheap fertilizers.

12 x 1 = 12mks.

 

SECTION C.

 

  1. – Messengers can forget the message

–     Messenger can be attacked by wild animals

–     Messenger can die on the way

–     Messenger can distort the message

–     The further the place the less the reliable.

3 x 1 = 3mks

 

  1. – Has made communication easier – Telephones, Telefax.

–     Has been used for educational purposes

–     Are a source of entertainment

–     Have made trade transactions easier promoting international trade.

–     Space exploration

–     Promoted tourism through advertisements

–     Improve security – police

–     Disasters can be averted / managed

–     Promoted employment opportunities

–     Facilitated easy administration

–     Helped in the spread of positive ideas

–     Promoted international peace and understanding

–     Guiding of traffic and ships in the sea through satellites

12 x 1 = 12 mks

 

  1. –    Desire to be independent

–     Desire by Africans to control their resources for their good

–     Desire to remove apartheid system with its racist laws

–     Desire by the Africans to have a say in a the government

3 x 1 = 3 mks

 

  1. – Formation of political parties eg. ANC to artialete their grievances

–     Demonstrations, Strikes, boycotts organised by university students

–     Sabotage and violence against racist regime

–     Seeking for anti-apartheid international / Regional support from OAU and UNO

–     Using church to condemn racialism eg. by Desmond Tutu.

–     Use of military by the “Spear of the Nation” Ukombo  sizwe”.

–     Establishing operational basis in other countries after banning the political parties.

–     Using writing of books, magazines eg. Abante cry freedom

–     Use of films eg/ Saraffina, Steve Biko

–     Negotiations e.g between De-Klerk and Nelson Mandela

6 x 2 = 12mks.

 

21.a.

–     Archaeology provides dates for the fossils and artefacts

–     Provides evidence ie one can see the fossils and artefacts

–     Very ancient information can be given by archaeology.

3 x 1 = 3 mks

 

b    –  Helps us learn about our culture – Cultural heritage.

–    Helps us to appreciate other peoples culture

–    Helps us to sharpen and develop analystic skills about historical data / information

–    Helps to understand why we need a government

–    Helps to develop patriotism and National pride

–    Helps us to solve our problems and to predict what might happen in the future

–    Provides intellectual fulfilment well paying professions like teaching law, archaeology etc.

6 x 2 = 12mks.

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT  III

PART I

 

SECTION A:

 

  1. Name the fossils which were found on Rusinga Island by Louis Leakey. (1 mk)
  2. Give two reasons for the migrations and settlement of the Abagusii into Kenya before 1800.(2 mks)
  3. Name two communities which belong to the Mijikenda. (2 mks)
  4. Identify three aspects of the Swahili culture that emerged along the Kenyan coast by 1500.(3 mks)
  5. State two factors which contributed the development of plantation farming along the Kenyan coast in the 19th century. (2 mks)
  6. Give two reasons why the British government took over direct control of Kenya from Imperial British East Africa Company. (2 mks)
  7. State three roles played by African chiefs in local government in Kenya under colonial rule. (3mks)
  8. What was the main method used by Thomas Joseph Mboya in the struggle to protect African rights against colonialism?             (1 mk)
  9. List two measures taken by the colonial government to suppress the activities of the Mau Mau rebels. (2 mks)
  10. Identify the main currency used in Kenya before 1919. (1 mk).
  11. State three problems faced by white settler farmers in Kenya during the colonial period.3 mks)
  12. Name the body which appoints the Divisional Officers. (1 mk)
  13. State the main function of the Attorney-General. (1 mk)
  14. Which provision in the constitution guarantees an individual the right to form a political party? (1 mk)

SECTION B:

  1. (a) Describe the pre-colonial government of the Maasai community. (10 mks)

(b)  What factors undermined the Maasai military power in the 19th century?                        (5 mks)

  1. (a) What difficulties were encountered by the British during the construction of the
    Kenya-Uganda Railway?                                                                                                (5 mks)

(b)  Explain the impact of the railway on the economy of Kenya during the colonial period.(10 mks)

  1. (a) Explain why Nabongo Mumia of Wanga kingdom collaborated with the British. (5 mks)

(b)  What were the results of Mumia’s collaboration?                                                           (10 mks)

  1. (a) Outline the characteristics of African Independent Churches which emerged in Kenya during the colonial period. (3 mks)

(b)  Explain the factors that led to the rise of African Independent Churches in Kenya during the colonial era.                                                                                                            (12 mks)

SECTION C:

 

  1. (a) Trace the origins of FORD-Kenya Party. (5 mks)

(b)  What are the policies of FORD-Kenya?                                                             (10 mks)

  1. (a) Explain the role of the Judiciary in Kenya. (12 mks)

(b)  What is meant by the independence of the Judiciary?                                        (3 mks)

  1. (a) List the branches of local government in Kenya. (5 mks)

(b)  Describe the functions of local government authorities.                                     (10 mks)

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT III

PART II

 

SECTION A. 

 

  1. List down three reasons why history and government should be taught in schools. (3 mks)
  2. Identify two uses of stone tools during the Old Stone Age period. (3 mks)
  3. List down two factors which led to the domestication of corps and animals during the Neolithic period. (3 mks)
  4. Identify two uses of gold in Ancient Egypt. (2 mks)
  5. State two ways in which development in motoring during the 1920’s led to improvements in road transport in Europe. (2 mks)
  6. How did the Agrarian revolution lead to rural urban migration in Europe in the nineteenth century?       (1 mk)
  7. Identify two uses of coal in Britain in the nineteenth century. (2 mks)
  8. State two ways in which scientific inventions have led to improvements in Agriculture.(2 mks)
  9. How did the “Great Leap Forward” contribute to industrial development in china? (2 mks)
  10. What was the most important item of trade that was exported from West Africa to North Africa during the Trans-Saharan trade? (1 mk)
  11. Identify one disadvantage of International Trade Agreements. (1 mk)
  12. Why had the Lozi power declined by the second half of the nineteenth century? (2 mks)
  13. Why did the colonial powers hold the Berlin conference between 1884 and 1885? (1 mk)
  14. State the two objectives of the 1967 Arusha Declaration in Tanzania. (2 mks)
  15. What was the immediate outcome of the 1642 English Civil War in Britain? (1 mk)

 

SECTION B:  (45 Marks)

  1. (a) What factors facilitated the development of Early Agriculture in Mesopotamia? (5 mks)

(b)  Discuss possible solutions to the problem of food shortages in the Third World

countries.                                                                                                         (10 mks)

  1. (a) What factors influenced the growth of urban centres in Ancient Greece?                       (6 mks)

(b)  Discuss the social problems that were brought by urbanization in Britain during the Industrial Revolution.                                                                                                   (9 mks)

  1. (a) What were the roles of diviners among the Yoruba of Nigeria? (6 mks)

(b)  Why was Menelik II able to defeat the Italians in 1896?                                     (10 mks)

 

  1. (a) What measures did emperor Tewedros II take in his effort to create a united Ethiopian Empire?       (5 mks)

(b)  Describe the religious beliefs and practice of the Maya.                                      (9 mks)

 

SECTION C:

  1. (a) Why did the British adopt the policy of indirect rule in Northern Nigeria?             (5 mks)

(b)  Discuss the factors that undermined the policy of indirect rule in Nigeria.                      (10 mks)

  1. (a) What methods did the African nationalists in South Africa use in their struggle for independence? (5 mks)

(b)  Discuss the problems faced by the Africans in South Africa in their struggle for independence.                                                                                                                     (10 mks)

  1. (a) State the roles and functions of the monarchy in Britain. (5 mks)

(b)  How is parliamentary supremacy guaranteed in Britain?                                     (10 mks)

 

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT III

PART I

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A: (25 Marks)

  1. Dryopithecus Africanus/Proconsul. (1 mk)

 

  1. Population increase
  • Famine and droughts
  • External attacks e.g. by the Maasai, Luo
  • Internal conflicts
  • Animal and human diseases. (2 mks)
  1. Chonyi Giriama            Rabai                Kambe             Kauma

Digo           Duruma            Ribe                 Jibana                                       (2×1 = 2 mks)

  1. – The religion of Swahili people was Islam.
  • Government was based on Islamic law/sharia.
  • Formal education – reading and writing in Arabic was provided in Muslim schools/Madrasa.
  • Speaking of Kiswahili language.
  • Distinct style of dressing: men – Kanzus and caps, women – veils and buibui..
  • Diet consisted of spiced foods, rice. (3×1 = 3 mks)
  1. – Availability of cheap labour (slaves).
  • Increased demand for cloves, cashewnuts in foreign markets
  • Existence of wealthy Arabs and Swahilis ready to invest in a large-scale farming.
  • Suitability of soils/fertile lands.
  • Sayyid Said’s efforts in encouraging plantation                         (2×1 = 2 mks)
  1. The company was faced by problems:-
  • Shortage of funds for administration.
  • Poor means of transport and communication
  • Shortage of personnel
  • Hostility of local people/resistance. (2×1 = 2 mks)
  1. – Recruited labourers in their local areas.
  • Settled minor disputes.
  • Maintained law and order.
  • Persuaded Africans to accept foreign ideas e.g. Western medicine.
  • Collected taxes. (3×1 = 3 mks)
  1. – Trade Unions.
  2. – Military operations against the rebels.
  • Arrests and imprisonment/detentions of freedom fighters.
  • Declaration of state of emergency. (1952 – 60). (2×1 = 2 mks)
  1. – Indian Rupee.
  2. – Shortage of labour – Africans were unwilling to work in settler farms.
  • Attacks from affected African communities – those whose lands were alienated.
  • Animal and crop diseases resulted in low production.
  • Poor accessibility – lack of in-roads to their farms.
  • Lack of prior knowledge of farming seasons. (3×1  = 3 mks)

 

  1. Public Service Commission. (1 mk)
  2. A – G is the Chief Legal Advisor to the Government. (1 mk)
  3. Freedom of Assembly and Association. (1 mk)

 

SECTION B:  (45 Marks)

 

  1. (a) Pre-colonial government of the Maasai.
  • They had a segmentary/decentralized system of government.
  • Basic units of administration were clans, which were headed by councils of elders.
  • To qualify as an elder, a man must have undergone through circumcision, which placed him in an age-set.
  • And must have proved his military ability as a warrior (moran).
  • Elders settled disputes,
  • Punished offenders
  • And advised morans concerning raids.
  • Maasai had standing armies consisted of young warriors (morans)
  • Who lived in manyattas where they were trained to develop courage against enemies.
  • By early 19th century, sections of the Maasai had evolved the institution of Oloiboni.
  • Oloiboni was a religious leader who performed sacrifices in times of crises
  • And God/Enkai was worshipped as controller of life in general(political, economic and social).

(Any 10×1)                   (10 mks)

(b)  Maasai were weakened by:

  • Civil wars e.g. Purko vs Kwavi Maasai.
  • Succession disputes between Lenana and Sendeyo after death of Mbatiany.
  • Prolonged droughts and famines, and locust invasions.
  • Cattle diseases (rinderpest) and small pox, cholera reduced their population.
  • Rise of the Nandi – they raided Maasai cattle.
  • Loss of independence due to British invasion. (5×1) = 5 mks)

 

  1. (a) – Attacks by hostile communities e.g. Nandi.
  • Shortage of labour.
  • Inadequate funds.
  • Lack of building materials.
  • Man-eaters of Tsavo.
  • Geographical barriers e.g. Rift Valley.
  • Diseases – malaria, yellow fever.
  • Shortage of food and water.
  • Poor means of transport and communication. (5×1)               (5 mks)

 

(b)  The railway:

  • Improved transport (e.g. of bulky goods) and communication between the coast and interior of Kenya.
  • Led to expansion of local and international trade as it linked Kenya and outside world.
  • Led to development of Agriculture as white farmers settled in the Highlands and set up plantations/opened up the interior leading to the coming of settler farmers.
  • Led to growth of towns in which Asians settled and set up businesses.
  • Created employment opportunities for Africans.
  • Stimulated development of industries. Factories grew in areas where the railway passed e.g. Bata Shoe company in Limuru. (5×2)                (10 mks)

 

  1. (a) – To secure military support against his enemies e.g. the Luo of Ugenya.
  • To strengthen his position as King.
  • To obtain material benefits from the British .
  • To acquire firearms.
  • To gain prestige/fame by associating with the British. (5×1)                (5 mks)

 

(b)  –   His headquarters at Mumias became the administrative centre of the British in Western Kenya until 1920.

  • Wanga Kingdom gained more territories e.g. location of Bunyala, Samia and Bugonga.
  • Loss of independence of the Wanga.
  • Mumia’s power was streghthened.
  • Mumia’s prestige was raised – he became paramount chief in 1909.
  • Wanga people were used as agents of the British to rule various parts of Western Kenya.
  • Use of Wanga as agent led to/increased hostility and conflicts with their neighbours.

(5×2)                            (10 mks)

  1. (a) – Were led by Africans.
  • They retained some doctrines of parent (mission) churches.
  • They incorporated some African traditional customs (e.g. polygamy, circumcision, use of drums in worship).
  • Continued to have links with mission churches/were not completely independent. (3×1=3 mks)

(b)  –  Missionary condemnation of African traditions and customs e.g. polygamy, female circumcision

led some African Christians to form their own churches.

  • European missionaries denied Africans top positions of leadership in their churches. Africans

were determined to set up their own churches where they could be leaders.

  • Colonialism and its injustices e.g. forced labour, Kipande system, lack of African representation

in the Legislative council, led to the desire for independence in all aspects of life.

  • Africans were dissatisfied with mission education which emphasized manual/technical skills.
  • They set up their own churches and schools to provide better quality education for their

children.

  • Competition/rivalry among various missionary societies caused confusion among African converts. Some of them therefore broke away.
  • Bible translations into local languages enabled educated Africans to read and understand the Bible. This created conflict and dissatisfaction with missionary interpretations, resulting in Africans forming their own churches.
  • Inconsistency between what the missionaries preached and what they practiced e.g. they preached love and equality yet they practiced racial discrimination in church leadership; this led to some African Christians breaking away.

(6×2)                (12 mks)

SECTION C: 

 

  1. (a) – Origin of FORD-Kenya can be traced back to the repeal of Section 2A of the Constitution of Kenya in December 1991.
  • Until then Kenya was a de jure one party state.
  • The constitutional amendment led to multi-party system.
  • In 1992, the first opposition party – FORD was formed by multi-party activists (e.g. Matiba, Oginga Odinga, Shikuku).
  • Later in 1992, original FORD split up into two parties: FORD-Kenya and FORD-Asili.
  • This was due to disagreements among the founders.
  • The first chairman of FORD-Kenya was Oginga Odinga.
  • Other founders were: Paul Muite – the first Vice Chairman/Kijana Wamalwa – the second Vice Chairman/Gitobu Imanyara – Sectretary General. (5×1)                (5 mks)

 

  1. (b) – Provide for improved health, social and  welfare services.
  • Secure for all Kenyans equal opportunities for employment and education.
  • Restore, protect and promote human rights, civil liberties, freedom and rights of the individual.
  • Encourage and promote strong co-operation and strong co-operative movements.
  • Enhance cultural life of Kenyans in all aspects of national development.
  • Promote a market economy and implement sound economic investment and monetary policies to achieve rapid and sustained development with social justice.
  • Protect, conserve and improve environmental management and initiate sound national population policy.
  • Create awareness among Kenyans on public issues and policies, and ensure equitable distribution of wealth.
  • Promote African unity and UNO ideals. (5×2)                            (10 mks)

 

  1. (a) – Role of the Judiciary.
  • Administers justice through a system of courts/deals with criminal and civil cases and punish offenders.
  • Interprets the constitution/law.
  • Ensures collection of fines.
  • Protects the constitutional rights and freedoms of the individual.
  • Administers oaths – swears in president, ministers after elections.
  • Checks bills before it becomes law to ensure it does not conflict with the constitution of the land.                                                           (6×2)                (12 mks)

 

(b)  –    Decisions made in courts must be strictly in accordance with the law – the rule of law must be observed in handling legal matters.

  • Decisions by judges/magistrates have to be based on available evidence.
  • And have to be made without fear of intimidation or favour – i.e be just and free.
  • Judges and magistrates have to discharge their duties professionally.

(3×1)                                                    (3 mks)

  1. (a) –   County  councils                                      –    City councils.

–       Urban councils                                         –    Area councils.

–      Town councils                                           –    Municipal councils.

(5×1)                                                    (5 mks)

(b)  –      Provided educational facilities and services e.g. schools and libraries.

  • Proved social/welfare services e.g. say care centres, children’s homes.
  • Establish and maintain health services – e.g. dispensaries, sports grounds.
  • Construct and maintain residential and public utility houses.
  • Install and maintain water, drainage and sewerage systems.
  • Collect and dispose of refuse.
  • Issue licenses for and inspect business premises e.g. shops, bars.
  • Establish and maintain appropriate public transport and communication facilities.
  • Impose cess and other levies on crops e.g. coffee and tea.
  • Issue and approve plans to regulate buildings.
  • Provide services for protection of the public and property e.g. fire control services and municipal askaris.
  • Provide job and training opportunities e.g. for clerks.
  • Ensure satisfactory standards of hygiene e.g. in public toilets are observed.

(10×1)              (10 mks)

 

HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT III

PART II

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A: 

 

  1. Reasons why history and government should be taught in schools.
  • History promotes national unity.
  • History promotes patriotism.
  • History promotes moral/ethical values.
  • Students appreciate their democratic rights.
  • History enables students to understand other people’s culture.
  • History promotes critical thinking.
  • It is an enjoyable subject.
  • It is a career subject. One can be employed as an administrator, a diplomat a social worker or a teacher.
  • It is a vital subject in education for world interdependence.
  • History promotes an understanding and respect for our community’s past activities.
  • History fosters empathy.
  • History provides intellectual fulfilment and an interest in further reading.

(1 point 1 mark (total 2 mks)

 

  1. Two uses of stone tools during the Old Stone Age period:
  • Cutting roots and/or branches for food.
  • Making other tools.
  • Digging up roots.
  • Skinning animals.
  • Cutting and scrapping animal skins.
  • Killing animals.
  • For defence. (1 use 1 mark (total 2 marks)

 

  1. Two factors which led to the domestication of crops and animals during the Neolithic period.
  • Increase in human population. Hence, hunting and gathering could no longer satisfy man’s food requirements.
  • Dry conditions in many parts of the world had led to a decline in wild crops and animals.
  • Some animals such as the wild dog were domesticated to assist man during hunting.

(1 point 1 mark (total 2 marks)

 

 

  1. Two uses of gold in Ancient Egypt:
  • Making utensils such as plates.
  • Making jewellery ornaments such as bracelets.
  • Decorating swords.
  • Making handles of flint knives.
  • Making vases.
  • As a medium of exchange/item of trade.

      (One use 1 mark (Total 2 marks)

 

  1. How development in motoring during the 1920’s led to improvements in road transport in Europe.
  • Straightening of old roads.
  • Old roads were widened.
  • New trunk roads were built.
  • Motor ways/highways were built for exclusive use of motor vehicles.
  • “Fly-over: brides were built in many places.
  • Modern bridges were constructed.
  • In many parts of Europe, dual carriage ways were built.

(1 point 1 marks  (Total 2 marks)

 

  1. How Agrarian Revolution contributed to rural-urban migration in Europe in the nineteenth century:
  • Agrarian Revolution led to the enclosure movement. Hence, a large number of peasants were displaced thereby migrating to the urban centres in search of employment opportunities.

            (1 mrk)

  1. Two uses of Coal in Britain in the nineteenth century:
  • Smelting iron.
  • Heating water for industrial and domestic use.
  • Providing warmth in homes.
  • As a cooking fuel in homes.
  • As a transport fuel for vehicles, locomotives and ships.
  • Providing light in houses and factories.

                  (Any 1 use 1 mark (total 2 marks)

 

  1. Two ways in which scientific inventions have led to improvements in Agriculture:
  • Invention of modern farming machines such as tractors have improved the efficiency of work in the farms.
  • Increased use of fertilizers, pesticides, fungicides and herbicides has improved crop yields.
  • Cross-breeding in crops and livestock has increased agricultural output.
  • Use of modern food storage techniques has reduced loss of crops after harvest.

(1  point 1 mark       Total = 2 mks)

 

  1. How the “Great Leap Forward” led to industrial development in China:
  • It emphasized agricultural mechanization thus leading to increased production of industrial raw materials.
  • Moreover, increased mechanization led to increased food production which in turn supported industrial workers in town.
  • Furthermore, it encouraged the setting up of light industries in the rural areas.
  • The Great Leap Forward” in addition stimulated the spread of factories and mines from the coastal town into the interior.
  • Additionally, the “Great Leap Forward” encouraged trade with the outside world which helped China to accumulate capital for industrial growth.

.                       (1 point 1 mark     Total = 2 mks)

 

  1. The most important item of trade that was exported from West Africa to North Africa during the Trans-Saharan trade:
  • (1 mk)

 

 

  1. One disadvantage of International Trade Agreements:
  • A member country may be forced to abandon her former trading partners who may not be members of the trading block.
  • A member nation may be compelled to create new trading barriers with non-member countries in order to conform to the policy of the trading block.

(1 point 1 mark   Total =  1 mk)

 

  1. Why the Lozi power had declined by the second half of the nineteenth century:
  • Succession disputes which led to internal/civil war in the empire.
  • Invasion by the Kololo.

(1 point 1 mark Total =  2 mks)

 

  1. Why the colonial powers held the Berlin Conference between 1884 and 1885:
  • To solve territorial disputes in Africa that had intensified following the scramble for colonials in the continent by the colonial powers. (1 mk)

 

  1. The two major objectives of the 1967 Arusha Declaration:
  • Promoting self-reliance in the country.
  • Promoting equality in the country in order to ensure that citizens lived as equals.

(One point 1 mark (total 2 mks)

 

  1. The immediate outcome of the 1642 English Civil war.
  • The execution of Charles I. (1 mk)

 

SECTION B.

 

  1. (a) Factors that facilitated the development of Early Agriculture in Mesopotamia:
  • Availability of water for irrigation.
  • Existence of fertile soils deposited by river Euphrates and Tigris.
  • Invention of farming methods by the Sumerians, namely: building banks and ditches along rivers to prevent flooding of farmlands, draining swamps, and irrigating dryland by use of shadoof method of irrigation.
  • Invention and use of farming tools such as Ox-drawn plough which facilitated cultivation.
  • Building and storage facilities. For instance, the sumerians used baskets and clay pots for storing grains.
  • The Sumerians had developed knowledge of forecasting weather which helped them to plan farming activities more effectively. (1 point 1 mark (total 5 marks)

 

(b)  Possible solutions to the problem of food shortage in the Third World Countries:

  • Offering appropriate incentives to the farmers such as raising the minimum price for agricultural products and offering low interest loans to the farmers.
  • Adopting ideal population control measures through family planning programmes.
  • Establishing agricultural marketing boards for purchasing farm produce and selling the same in case of a natural calamity such as drought.
  • Adopting proper food storage techniques to minimize loss during and after harvest.
  • Improving infrastructure in the rural areas by upgrading rural access roads in order to facilitate the marketing of farm produce.
  • Extending land reclamation programmes through irrigation and draining of swampy areas.
  • Adopting appropriate environmental conservation measures such as afforestation in order to check desertification.
  • Encouraging farmers to not only grow cash crops but also to partition their plots so as to have a room for growing food crops.
  • Extending agricultural extension services so as to enable farmers to acquire modern farming skills.
  • Adopting proper land ownership policies. For instance need to be issued with title deeds which they can use to secure credit facilities.
  • Initiating effective mechanisms for solving domestic and international disputes so as to minimize civil wars and territorial disputes, both of which lead to instability and consequently food shortages in some third world countries.
  • Upgrading incomes in the rural areas in order to stem rural-urban migration, which to a certain extent contributes to food shortages due to loss of able-bodied men from the rural areas.
  • Third world countries should also design effective ways of monitoring the movement of locusts and other destructive pests such as army worms. This may hopefully enable them to take appropriate measures before such pests can cause large scale destruction of crops.
  • Intensifying scientific research in order to not only come up with cheaper and high quality fertilizers but also food crops and animals that can resist both drought and diseases.

(1 point 1 mark     Total = 10 mks)

 

  1. (a) Factors that influenced the growth of urban centres in Ancient Greece:
  • Defence – the early Greek settlers tended to settle in areas that were easy to defend from external invasion.
  • Soils – the Greek city-states were located in areas that had fertile soils for growing crops.
  • Kinship ties – the feeling of kinship made early Greek settlers to settle together. Such settlements gradually developed into towns.
  • Trade – the Greeks tended to settle in urban areas, for they were ideal for overseas trade.
  • Water – the Greeks mostly settled in areas where they could easily secure water for domestic use.
  • Cultural factors – Greek scholars, for instance philosophers and writers tended to settle in towns like Athens for it was in such centers where they had an opportunity to meet and exchange ideas. Moreover sportsmen were attracted by the urban centres, where they had an opportunity to both exercise and develop their talents.

      (1 point 1 mark  (total 6 mks)

 

  • Social problems that were brought by urbanization in Britain during the Industrial Revolution:
  • Inadequate housing facilities which led to overcrowding and development of slums.
  • Inadequate sanitary facilities such as garbage collection amenities, clean water and drainage system.
  • High incidence of diseases such as dysentery, cholera and typhoid due to overcrowding in the urban centres.
  • High death rates in the urban centres due to a combination of factors such as poor health facilities, overcrowding, pollution (both air and water) malnutrition and diseases.
  • Unemployment in the urban centres.
  • High level of poverty and unemployment led to pauperism as the poor resorted to begging as a means of earning livelihood.
  • The problem of unemployment which was prevalent in virtually all industrial cities increased incidence of urban crimes.
  • High level of alcoholism which the poor/unemployed urban dwellers saw as an alternative way of reducing their frustrations.
  • A combination of factors such as poverty, unemployment and alcoholism led to high incidence of prostitution in many industrial towns.
  • Related to the problem of prostitution was the break-up of formal marriages as illicit marriages became a common feature in the urban centres.

(1 point 1 mark  Total = 9 marks)

 

  1. (a) Role of diviners among the Yoruba of Nigeria:
  • Acted as mediators between the gods and the people.
  • Predicting future events.
  • Officiating religious festivals/ceremonies.
  • Making sacrifices to the gods.
  • Offering prayers during private and public religious ceremonies.
  • Giving religious and judicious advice to the people.
  • Controlling the power of rulers through the use of taboos.

(1 point 1 mark  Total =  6 marks)

 

(b)  Religious beliefs and practices of the Maya:

  • They worshipped many gods/were polytheists.
  • Believed that their gods had both good and bad aspects.
  • Believed that life was a struggle between good and evil gods.
  • They believed in life after death. They believed that warriors who died in war and people killed in sacrifices were sure of going straight to heaven.
  • They had priests whose role was to perform religious rites and offer advice to the people.
  • The Maya offered human sacrifice to their gods.
  • They had temples where they worshipped their gods.
  • During religious festivals, worshippers participated by singing and dancing out side the temple as the priests conducted ceremonies in the temple.
  • They believed in the existence of a supreme God whom they called the creator/Huna

kuhabkin.

(1 point 1 mark Total =  9 mks)

 

  1. (a) Measures taken by emperor Tewedros II to create a United Ethiopian empire:
  • He destroyed the power of provincial kings by replacing them with paid governors whom he could appoint and dismiss at will.
  • He broke the existing large provinces into smaller ones for ease of administration.
  • He created a strong national army which was put under his command. The army compromised of men from different parts of the empire, a factor that promoted loyalty to the emperor and the nation.
  • He put down local rebellions and banditry which were a hindrance to his unification programme.
  • He instituted a system of taxation whereby the citizens, irrespective of their social status were required to contribute part of their income to the state. This helped him to raise money for financing his unification campaign.
  • He modified the empire’s judicial system in order to ensure that fair justice was administered to the accused.

(1 point 1 mark   Total =  5 mks)

 

(b) Reasons why Menelik II was able to defeat the Italians in 1896:

  • Menelik in addition had raised an army that was far much superior in number compared to the Italian forces.
  • Furthermore, the Ethiopian army was not only numerically superior but was equipped with modern arms, which Menelik had acquired earlier from the Europeans.
  • Additionally, unlike the Italian army, the Ethiopian forces knew the geography of the territory in which they were fighting. Hence, while the former experienced mobility difficulties the latter were able to move with minimal hindrances.
  • The Italian army generals, were somewhat incompetent in their campaign against the Ethiopians. For instance, they were occasionally fed with wrong information by the Ethiopians thereby making wrong moves.
  • The Ethiopians, in addition, were a united people, a factor that enabled them to forge a united front against the Italians.
  • Moreover, the Ethiopians were determined to be free from any form of foreign domination. For this reason, they fought with a lot of determination to retain their independence.                                                                                           (1 point 1 mark  Total =  10 mks)

 

SECTION C:

 

  1. (a) Reasons why the British adopted the policy of indirect rule in northern Nigeria.
  • The need to preserve indigenous local government institutions.
  • Lack of sufficient administrative personnel.
  • Inadequate funds to employ white administrators.
  • An attempt to avoid revolt against colonial rule since through the system, the Africans, the British officials argued – would feel that they were still being ruled by their African leaders.
  • Existence of a centralized system of government in northern Nigeria prior to the coming of the British.
  • The British had prior experience in the use of this system of administration for they had successfully used it in India.

(1 point 1 mark  Total = 5 mks)

 

 

 

(b)  Factors that undermined the policy of indirect rule in Nigeria:

  • The policy was devised to suit northern Nigeria where an indigenous centralized system of administration was already in existence. Consequently it was not very successful in areas such as Iboland where such administrative structures were non-existent.
  • Save for northern Nigeria where the British officials had learnt the local Hausa language, majority of the white officials knew little of the local languages in other parts of Nigeria. Consequently, they were unable to communicate effectively with the local rulers thus hampering the successful implementation of the indirect rule policy.
  • Furthermore, the success of the policy required the education of African rulers. However, since Western education was alien the Africans, the education part of the policy was somewhat unsuccessful.
  • Moreover, some of the British officials were unable to sell their ideas to the native rulers effectively in regard to the objective and hence benefits of the indirect rule policy.
  • Additionally the role of local rulers changed considerably with the introduction of indirect rule in Nigeria. For instance, they were expected to recruit labour for the successful implementation of local projects. However, the native rulers were compelled to use force in some occasions, a factor that made them unpopular.
  • Furthermore, although the policy of indirect rule aimed at promoting partnership in administration, the African rulers gradually realized that they had lost their authority to the British. For instance, they had no mandate to impose tax without the consent of the British officials. Moreover, they were compelled to abolish cultural practices such as human sacrifice and slavery which were regarded as barbaric by the British. Consequently, some of the African rulers lost confidence in the indirect rule policy of administration.

      1 point 1 mark   Total = 10 mks)

 

  1. (a) Methods used by the African nationalists in South Africa in their struggle for independence:
  • Forming political parties that played a key role in coordinating nationalist activities. For instance the African National congress (ANC) and Pan Africanist Congress (PAC) which were founded in 1912 and 1952 respectively.
  • Negotiating with the white South African government.
  • Partitioning international organizations such as the OAU and UNO in order to gain their support against the repressive apartheid policies.
  • Armed struggle. For instance, ANC opened military bases in Tanzania and Zambia. Using such bases the military wing (Umkhonto we Sizwe) of the ANC sabotaged military and economic installation in south Africa through bombing.
  • Organizing mass demonstrations and riots in the urban centres. For example, in 1961, PAC organized large demonstrations against pass laws, an episode that culminated in the infamous sharpville Massacre in which 69 people were killed and hundreds wounded.
  • Organizing boycotts and strikes. For example the African nationalists organized job boycotts during the 1970s. similarly, there were student riots in Soweto in 1976 following the introduction of Afrikaans as a medium of instruction in schools. Similar student demonstrations were organized in 1980 and 1984.
  • Harmonizing nationalist activities through trade Union Movement. For instance, in 1979, the Federation of South African Trade Union Movement was formed and became instrumental in the 1979 and 1981 black workers strike.
  • Religious protest – for instance, church leaders like Alan Boesak and Desmond Tutu played a key role in championing the African nationalist cause in the country.
  • Use of mass media such as the Africanist newspaper and other forms of publication to educate the masses.
  • Hunger strike – some of the jailed nationalists resorted to hunger strike as a form of protest against incarceration and the oppressive government policies.

(1 point 1 mark  (total 5 mks)

 

(b) Problems faced by the African nationalists in south Africa in their struggle for independence:

  • Political assassination and mass killing of the nationalists both within and without South Africa. For instance, Steve Biko, the leader of the Black consciousness movement was killed in police custody in 1977.
  • Lack of adequate funds to finance their activities such as the purchase arms.
  • Harassment, arrest and subsequent jailing/ detention of the nationalist leaders. For example, following the famous Rivonia trial (1964), nationalists’ leaders namely: Walter Sisulu, Govan Mbeki and Nelson Mandela were detained.
  • Banning of political parties for instance, ANC and PAC were banned in 1961.
  • Lack of a well-trained army to effectively challenge the government.
  • Lack of unity among the nationalists for instance, PAC splintered from the ANC in 1959 due to differing views on how to carry out the struggle. This was in view of the fact that while the latter wanted peaceful approach, the former was in favour of military methods to achieve its objectives.
  • Opposition from the ordinary whites who opposed majority rule in the country for fear of losing their wealth and privileged position.
  • The presence of Portuguese in Angola and Mozambique. Being sympathetic to the apartheid government, they arrested and subsequently repatriated black nationalists who had taken refuge in Mozambique and Angola.
  • Banning of publications that were sympathetic to the nationalists. For instance, following the 1963 Undesirable Publications Act, publications that contracted apartheid policies such as Thomas Hardy’s novel – The Return of the Native – were banned.
  • The 1959 Bantustan Policy, through which the government aimed at creating semi-independent African states in the country. The policy undermined African nationalist activities for it tended to divide the blacks along ethnic lines.
  • The government in addition used money to employ black informers. Africans who were lured into this trap gave information to the government that was detrimental to the struggle.                                                                                                       (1 point 1 mark  (total 10 mks)
  1. (a) Roles and functions of the Monarchy in Britain:
  • The monarchy is the legal/constitutional head of state.
  • The King or Queen is the commander-In-Chief of the armed forces in Britain.
  • The monarchy gives authority to the winning political party to form a government after elections.
  • The monarchy officially opens the parliament after elections.
  • The monarchy has to grant assent before a Bill becomes a law.
  • The monarchy is the role model in matters regarding the accepted moral/social standards in the country.
  • The monarchy has the power to appoint members in the House of Lords.

1 point 1 mark  (total 5 marks)

 

(b)  How parliamentary supremacy is guaranteed in Britain:

  • It is only parliament that has the power to make, amend or abolish any existing law.
  • The parliament, in addition is the only institution in the country that can pass a vote of no confidence in the government, and thus force it to resign.
  • Furthermore, it is only members of parliament who have the power to approve government expenditure and revenue.
  • In addition, parliament is the only government organ that has the power to declare war incase the country is attacked from without.
  • Moreover, no parliament can legally bind its successor.
  • Furthermore, no decision of parliament can be overruled by any court of law in the country.
  • Parliament in addition, is the only institution that has the power to declare a state of emergency in the country. 1 point 1 mark  (total 10 mks)

 

 

HISTORY IV

PART I

 

SECTION A .

 

  1. What is the name of the fossil that was discovered by Mary Leakey on Rusinga Island? (1 mk)
  2. Identify TWO ways in which iron working technology facilitated the migration and settlement of the Bantu in Kenya (2 marks)
  3. Name TWO Coastal Bantu communities in Kenya that are linguistically related to the Miji Kenda (2 marks)
  4. Identify TWO factors that had facilitated the spread of Islam in Kenya by 1500 (2 marks)
  5. Give TWO reasons why the Portuguese occupied the Kenyan Coast between 1500 and 1700 (2 marks)
  6. Name TWO plantation crops that were grown along the Kenyan Coast during the pre-colonial period (2 marks)
  7. State TWO social effects of Missionary activities in Kenya during the nineteenth century (2 marks)
  8. Name TWO African political movements that developed in Kenya between 1918 and 1939

(2 marks                                                                                                                              (2 marks)

  1. Give TWO reasons why trade union movement in Kenya was confined to the urban centres during the colonial period (2 marks)
  2. State TWO anti-social activities that are controlled by Chiefs in Kenya (2 marks)
  3. Name TWO African nationalist parties whose leaders attended the Lancaster House conference                                                                                                                 (2 marks)
  4. State TWO ways in which Kiswahili language helps to promote national unity in Kenya
    (2 marks)
  5. State TWO roles of a returning officer during General Elections in Kenya (2 marks)

 

 

SECTION B .

 

  1. (a) What factors made the Kalenjin to migrate into Kenya during the pre-colonial period? 5 marks.                                                                                                                                                    (5 marks)

(b)     Describe the political organisation of the Kalenjin during the pre-colonial period      (10 marks)

  1. (a) What factors had led to the development of trade between the Kenyan Coast and the

outside world by 1500AD?                                                                             (5 marks)

(b)     Explain the effects of Indian Ocean trade to the people of Kenya                  (10 marks)

  1. (a) Why were the Portuguese able to occupy the Kenyan Coast during the sixteenth century?                                                                                                                            (3 marks)

(b)     Explain the results of the Portuguese rule on the Kenyan Coast                    (12 marks)

  1. (a) Why did the British colonise Kenya in the nineteenth century?                      (3 marks)

(b)     Explain the results of Nabongo Mumia’s collaboration with the British         (12 marks)

 

SECTION C .

 

  1. (a) What are the functions of the District Executive Committee in the ruling party KANU?                                                                                                                             (5 marks)

(b)     Explain the policies of KANU                                                                      (10 marks)

  1. (a) What are the necessary conditions for a parliamentary candidate in Kenya?    (3 marks)

(b)     Explain the functions of parliament in Kenya                                               (12 marks)

  1. (a) What are the branches of the local government in Kenya?                              (5 marks)
  • How does the central government control local authorities in Kenya                     (10 marks)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT IV

PART I

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A

  1. Drypithecus Africanus / Proconsul (1 mark)

 

  1. * The Bantu were able to manufacture farming tools thereby increasing food production.

*    This led to population increase which forced them to migrate to other areas

*     They were able to conquer their neighbours for they had iron weapons  (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Taita – Taveta

*        Pokomo                                                                                             (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Trading activities between Arabs and Africans at the coast

*        Islam was accepted by Africans for it was accommodating to the African traditions
and cultural practices e.g. polygamy

*        The settling of Arabs at the coast

*        Being a new religion some Africans accepted it out of curiosity          (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * To trade / control Indian Ocean trade

*        To spread Christianity                                                                        (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Maize

*        Millet

*        Sesame

*        Coconuts

*        Nuts

*        Beans                                                                                                (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * African religious beliefs and practices were undermined

*        Missionaries introduced Western education and culture

*        Missionaries introduced medical facilities in Kenya

*        They facilitated the abolition of slave trade

*        Some aspects of African culture e.g. female circumcision and polygamy were undermined

*        Caused disunity between Africans who accepted Christianity and those who followed

traditional religion

*        Led to the rise and growth of African Independent churches               (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Young Kikuyu Association

*        Kikuyu Association

*        Young Kavirondo Association

*        East African Association

*        Kavirondo Tax Payers Welfare Association

*        Kikuyu Central Association

*        Ukamba Members Association

*        Taita Hills Association

*        Coast African Association                                                                  (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * It was in the urban centres where trade unions would get funds to finance their  activities

from the urban workers

*       It was relatively easy for the African urban workers to unite as opposed to the Africans working in European farms

*       Most of the trade union movement leaders where educated elites who were working in the urban centres

*       It was easy to sell trade union movement ideas to the urban workers for they were relatively better educated than their counterparts in the rural areas

*        It was easy to mobilise urban workers during trade union movement meetings

(2 x 1 = 2 marks)

  1. * Water pollution

*        Deforestation

*        Brewing of illicit beer

*        Stealing other people’s property e.g. cattle                                          (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Kenya African National Union (KANU)

*        Kenya African Democratic Union (KADU)                                         (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Facilitates the sharing of ideas between Kenyans of different ethnic backgrounds

*        Enhances interaction between Kenyans hailing from different cultural backgrounds

(2 x 1 = 2 marks)

  1. * To receive nomination papers from prospective candidates

*        To distribute ballot papers and boxes to the polling stations

*        To supervise voting and counting of votes

*        To announce election results

*        To appoint presiding officers

*        To fix polling stations                                                                        (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

SECTION B.

14.(a) *       Family conflicts / internal quarrels / feuds

*       Attack by hostile neighbours

*       Population pressure

*       Search for land for settlement

*       The spirit of adventure

*       Natural calamities e.g. drought and famine

*       Search for pastures for their livestock

*       Outbreak of cattle diseases                                                                 (5 x 1 = 5 marks)

 

(b)     *       Were organised in semi-independent territorial units known as Bororosiek

*       Each territorial unit was controlled by a council of elders

*      Members of the council of elders were chosen on the basis of their seniority, wisdom and

military skills

*     The council of elders was responsible for maintaining law and order and settling major

disputes in the Bororosiek

*     Each Bororiet was further divided into smaller political units under lesser councils of elders

*     The lesser councils of elders had the role of defining grazing grounds and settling minor

disputes

*     Young initiates joined the warrior class whose role was to defend the community against

external attack and conquering new territories

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

 

15.(a)*   Existence of enterprising merchants in places like Persia and Saudi Arabia

*    Availability of trading goods at the Coast e.g. ivory, slaves and animal skins

*    Demand for goods from the Kenyan coast e.g. ivory in both Europe and Asia

*    Accessibility of the Kenyan coast by sea

*    Political stability at the Coast which created an ideal / conducive environment for trade

*   The Monsoon winds facilitated the movement of traders to and from the coast

(5 x 1 = 5 marks)

(b)     *        Led to the rise of commercial towns e.g. Mombasa and Lamu

*        Led to the introduction of Islam religion at the Coast

*        Arabic literacy skills were introduced at the Coast

*        Led to the rise of Swahili language and culture

*        Arabic architectural designs were introduced at the Coast

*        New crops e.g. coconut, wheat and rice were introduced at the Coast

*        Islamic sharia laws were introduced at the Coast

*        Led to the rise of slave trade which brought sufferings to the African communities

*        Introduction of firearms which encouraged inter-tribal wars in some parts of Kenya

*        Gave value to resources that previously had little local value e.g. tortoise shell and

rhinocerous horns

*        Stratified the society at the Coast between the wealthy merchants who lived in stone         houses, the ordinary people who dwelled in mud huts and finally the slaves

*        Cowrie shells became a medium of exchange in some places

*        Kenyan Coast came to be known to the outside world

*        Led to the development of closer links between the Kenyan coast and the outside world

                   (10 x 1 = 10 marks)

16.(a) *        They had superior weapons

*        They had well trained soldiers

*        They knew the geography of the Coast

*        They were supported by their mother country Portugal

*        Coastal people were not united to challenge the Portuguese

*        The Portuguese organised surprise attacks on the Coastal settlements

*        The Portuguese were united during their invasion of the Kenyan Coast

(3 x 1 = 3 marks)

(b)     *        Decline of the Coastal trade

*        Decay of some Coastal towns e.g. Gedi

*        Some Coastal people lost their lives from Portuguese raids

*        Level of poverty at the Coast increased due to the imposition of heavy taxes by the

Portuguese

*        The Portuguese enriched Kiswahili language with such loan words as Meza and Mvinyo

*        They taught the Coastal people the idea of using animal manure in the farms

*        They built Fort Jesus which is today an important historic site that attracts
tourists

*        They introduced new crops at the Coast e.g. maize, cassava and pineapples

*        Portuguese rule led to the development of closer links between the Kenyan Coast and India

*        They introduced new architectural designs e.g. Fort Jesus

*        They introduced guns and gun powder along the Coast which led to fear and  insecurity in

the region

*        Due to their harshness the Coastal people developed a negative attitude

towards Europeans and by extension Christianity

(6 x 2 = 12 marks)

17.(a) *        Britain wanted to establish a market for her manufactured goods

*        To stop slave trade

*        To ensure that Kenya and Uganda were not taken by rival European powers such as

Germany

*        Kenya was strategically placed for the British would get hold of Uganda and hence control

the source of river Nile

*        Britain viewed Kenya as a potential area for investing surplus capital

*        To protect European missionaries and traders in the region

*        Britain saw Kenya as a potential area for securing raw materials for her industries                                                                                          (6 x 1 = 12 marks)

(b)     *        The British were able to establish their rule in Western Kenya through the
assistance of Wanga warriors

*        The Wanga were used as agents of British colonial rule in Western Kenya

*        There developed hatred between the Wanga and their neighbours

*        Nabongo was made a paramount Chief thereby increasing his power and
prestige

*        Nabongo’s headquarters at Elureko became the centre of British administration in Western

Kenya

*        Nabongo became an advisor to the British over the appointment of Chiefs and headmen in

Western Kenya

(6 x 2 = 12 marks)

 

SECTION C .

 

18.(a) *        To implement party propaganda at the district level

*        To organise the party at the district level

*        To promote political awareness among the people at the local/ district level

*        To offer people general education at the district level

*        To recruit party members

*        Maintaining discipline among the party members at the district level

*        Promoting the spirit of self-reliance / self-help amongst the people at the  district  level

*        Supervising the activities of sub-branch, location and sub-location committees

(5 x 1 = 5 marks)

(b)     *        Safeguarding Kenya’s sovereignty / independence

*        Protecting the environment for the benefit of prosperity / future generations

*        Promoting national unity

*        Promoting democratic ideas / principles in the country                                                                    *        Protecting human life

*        Promoting socio-economic development in the country through say expansion
of education, industrialisation etc.

*        Adhering to the Bill of Rights that protects the rights and freedoms of the
individual in the country

*        Supporting and respecting the independence of the Judiciary

*        Supporting the ideas of the Organisation of African Unity (OAU) and United
Nations Organisation (UNO)                                                            (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

 

19.(a) *        One must be a Kenyan citizen

*        Be of 21 years of age and over

*        Be a registered voter in the constituency he/she wants to contest in the election

*        Be able to read and write in English and Kiswahili

*        Must have resided / lived in Kenya for at least six months before the polling day

*        Be nominated by his/her party                                                           (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

 

(b)     *        Making and amending laws in the country

*        Controlling government revenue and expenditure

*        Members of Parliament (MP’s) act as a link between the people and the
government

*        It protects the individual against abuse of power by either the executive,
judiciary or powerful individuals

*        Checks abuse of power of individual MP’s and government offices through
substantive motion that may force an errant individual to resign from his/her
post

*        Checking the performance of government by asking critical questions to the
ministers in regard to the performance of their ministries

*        Firing the President and/or government through a vote of no confidence if the
MP’s feel that either of the two have performed below the expectations of the
people

*        Establishing statutory bodies / parastatals in the country

(6 x 2 = 12 marks)

20.(a) *        Municipal councils

*        County councils

*        Urban councils

*        Area councils

*        Town councils

*        City councils                                                                                     (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

(b)     *        Central government gives directives and policy guidelines to the local authorities

*        Central government through the Minister of Local Government has power to probe                         the activities of the local government

*        The Minister for Local Government has authority to punish errant local authority
officers

*        Local Authority by-laws have to be approved by the central government in order to

be operational

*        The central government can dissolve a local government whose performance is
dismal/poor

*        Central government has power to upgrade a local authority from a lower to a higher                        status

*        The Central government through the Minister of Local government can reorganise

the administration of a local authority whose performance is below expectations

*        The Central government is represented in local government meetings by its

appointed officials e.g. District Commissioners

*        Local authority budgets must be approved by the Central government before they

are implemented

*        Local government loan applications must be approved by the Minister for Local                              government                                                                                     (6 x 2 = 12 marks)

 

 

HISTORY IV

PART II

 

SECTION A .

 

  1. State any TWO major branches of history (2 marks)
  2. State the most important reason why oral traditions are important in the study of pre-colonial

African history                                                                                                             (1 mark)

  1. How was Australopithecus similar to modern man? (2 marks)
  2. Why were early urban centres located near water bodies? (2 marks)
  3. Identify TWO uses of roads in the ancient Roman Empire (2 marks)
  4. State TWO ways in which railways facilitated Agrarian Revolution in Western Europe
    (2 marks)
  5. State TWO results of mechanisation in the British textile industry in the eighteenth century  (2 marks)
  6. How was steam power used in the nineteenth century? (2 marks)
  7. What was the contribution of Edward Jenner in the medical field? (1 mark)

 

 

  1. Identify TWO government policies that have facilitated industrialization in Brazil (2 marks)
  2. Name any TWO gods of the Maya people (2 marks)
  3. Why were the British able to suppress the Ndebele uprising? (2 marks)
  4. Identify the main political problem that Zaire has faced since independence (1 mark)
  5. State any TWO roles of the President in France (2 marks)

 

 

SECTION B .

 

15.(a) What factors led to the rise of early agriculture in Mesopotamia?                             (6 marks)

(b) Explain ways in which crop and animal domestication improved man’s way of life

during   the Neolitic period                                                                                    (9 marks)

 

16.(a) How were slaves obtained in West Africa during the Trans-Atlantic trade                 (5 marks)

(b)          Describe the organisation of Trans-Atlantic slave trade?                               (10 marks)

 

17.(a) What were the results of the invention of steam ship?                                             (6 marks)

(b)          Explain how man has benefited from improvements in air transport               (9 marks)

 

18.(a) What factors facilitated the spread of Islam in Africa upto the nineteenth century?   (5 marks)

(b) Explain the effects of the spread of Islam in Africa during the pre-colonial period   (10 marks)

 

SECTION C .

 

19.(a)   How did European nations acquire colonies in Africa during the nineteenth century?        (3 marks)

(b)            Explain the results of Maji Maji uprising                                                    (12 marks)

 

20.(a) Explain the economic activities that were carried out by the Lozi people during the
pre-colonial period                                                                                                (3 marks)

(b) Describe the political organization of the Lozi kingdom during the pre-colonial period     (12 marks)

 

21.(a)   What were the necessary conditions for one to become a French citizen in Senegal?          (3 marks)

(b)   Explain the results of the French policy of Assimilation in Senegal                        (12 marks)

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT  IV

PART II

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A

  1. * Political History

*        Social History

*        Economic history                                                                              (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Lack of written records / documents                                                                (1 mark)
  2. * Stood upright like modern man

*        Walked on two legs

*        Their canines were similar to those of modern man

*        Used hands / fingers

*        Made tools like modern man                                                              (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * For ease of communication

*        It was easy to get water for irrigation

*        Such sites were ideal for fetching water for domestic and industrial purposes

*        Such centres were easier to defend from external invasion                  (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Transportation of people

*        Transportation of goods

*        Transportation of soldiers in times of trouble

*        Deploying of administrators to the various parts of the empire            (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * They facilitated the transportation of agricultural workers

*        They facilitated the movement of farm produce to the market

*        They facilitated the transportation of farm inputs to the farms            (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Cotton replaced wool as the raw material for making clothes

*        Many people who were employed in the cottage industry lost their jobs

*        Coal replaced wood as the major source of energy in the textile industry

*        Led to increased use of iron and steel

*        Led to the emergence of textile towns e.g. Manchester and Leeds       (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Pumping water out of mines

*        Driving ships and locomotives

*        Smelting iron

*        It provided energy for driving machines in the factories

*        Producing light in factories                                                                (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * He invented vaccine                                                                                       (1 mark)
  2. * Restriction of imported goods that can be produced locally

*        The government has invested in heavy industries

*        Promotion of technical / scientific education

*        Encouraging foreigners to invest in the country                                  (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Kunabku

*        Kukulcan

*        Yumkax

*        Itcama

*        Chac

*        Pipil                                                                                                  (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * The British had superior arms

*        Lack of unity among the Africans

*        The Ndebele were demoralized for the uprising was handled ruthlessly by the  British

 

*        Britain soldiers were well trained and better organized                        (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

  1. * Rivalry over leadership                                                                                    (1 mark)

 

  1. * He is the Head of State

*        He is the executive head of the French government

*        He appoints the Prime Minister / Premier

*        Formulates domestic and foreign policy

*        Controls defence

*        Assumes legislative and executive powers during a national emergency (2 x 1 = 2 marks)

 

SECTION B

 

  1. (a) *Availability of water for irrigation from rivers Euphrates and Tigris

*        Presence of fertile soils deposited by rivers Tigris and Euphrates

*        Sumerians had invented farming tools e.g. Ox drawn plough and Seed drill

*        Favourable topography which facilitated irrigation

*        High population in the region provided labour in the farms

*        Summerians had invented irrigation techniques e.g. camels which facilitated irrigation

*        Towns in the region e.g. Ur, Uruk, Kish and Babylon created market for farm produce

*        Political stability in the region enabled farmers to carry out agricultural activities

with   ease

*        Sumerians had invented a system of writing which enabled them to measure and
record both agricultural production and consumption

*        Sumerians had invented food storage facilities such as pots and public granaries

*        Sumerians had invented weather forecasting techniques which enabled them to plan                       their activities

*        Sumerian rulers e.g. Sargon, Ur-Nammu and Hammurabi encouraged agricultural                           activities in the region.

(6 x 1 = 6 marks)

(b)     *        The level of food production increased

*        Man’s food supply became regular throughout the year

*        Man saved both time and energy that would have been used in hunting wild animals            and collecting wild fruits

*        Man was able to raise crops through irrigation in dry areas thereby increasing his area of

habitation

*        Man began to eat a balanced diet which improved not only his health but also his                           lifespan

*        Led to the rise of trade at the community and inter-community level

*        Individuals who not only engaged in the farms undertook other tasks e.g. basketry                          and pottery hence increasing mans material wealth

*        Led to the rise of permanent settlements which stimulated the development of

organised states

*        Led to the development of a wide range of sciences and arts e.g. geometry and                                arithmetric both of which developed out of the need to measure land accurately

*        Led to the development of the art of writing which was a vital skill for keeping
records on farm produce

*        Some of the domesticated animals e.g. the horse and the camel improved man’s
mobility

*        Led to the emergence of urban centres which improved the level of interaction
between individuals

*        Some individuals engaged themselves in reading and writing for they could be
supported by the agricultural sector, a factor that laid the foundation for formal education.

*        Led to the production and continued refinement of agricultural tools such as sickles                        and iron hoes

*        Some individuals who were not engaged in farmwork had time to concentrate on                            spiritual matters thereby facilitating the development of religion.

*        The need to make food storage items like baskets led to the development of weaving             skills which were gradually utilized in weaving clothes                                 (9 x 1 = 9 marks)

 

16.(a) *        Some individuals were sold by their rulers for being criminals

*        Through raiding

*        Through trickery

*        Sale of war captives

*        Kidnapping

*        Some individuals were sold by their relatives to settle debts

*        Slaves could be obtained by being exchanged for items like cotton clothes and guns

(5 x 1 = 5 marks)

(b)     *        The trade was operated a long three routes, namely; Europe to West Africa to the                            New World (America and Carribean) and the New World to Europe

*        The trade involved European traders, African middlemen and plantation owners in

the New World

*        The trade was both in kind (barter) and in money

*        Slaves were transported in large cargo by boats and ships

*        Slaves were bought and sold in different market centres in West Africa

*        There were established places where slaves were kept while awaiting shipment or                            collection to their destination

*        Slaves were forced to march long distances from the interior to the coast

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

17.(a) *        Steam ships promoted international trade

*        Led to increased use of coal

*        Led to increased use of iron and steel

*        Increased use of steamships created employment to many people e.g. sailors,

shippers, engineers and captains

*        Facilitated exploration                                                                       (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

(b)     *        Air transport facilitates the transportation of perishable goods e.g. flowers and fruits

*        Used by flying doctors during emergency cases

*        Aircrafts are used in transporting soldiers and military equipment in times of war

*        Used for spying purposes

*        Aircrafts are used in weather forecasting

*        Aircrafts are used in aerial photography

*        Aircrafts are used in space exploration

*        Aircrafts are used to spray pesticides and insecticides to protect crops* Used in the evacuation in

flooded areas and areas struck by earthquakes

*        Has created employment opportunities to many people e.g. pilotes, air hostess and

aircraft engineers

*        Has promoted cultural interaction between world communities

*        Has facilitated the movement of people into inaccessible areas e.g. mountain tops

*        Has promoted trade between nations                                                  (9 x 1 = 9 marks)

 

  1. (a)* Missionary activities of Muslim scholars

*        Trade

*        Intermarriage

*        Jihad / war

*        Migration and settlement of Muslims / Arabs in various parts of Africa

*        Some people accepted Islam for fear of being enslaved

*        Other people accepted Islam out of curiosity for it was a new religion

*        Influence of already converted African rulers                                     (5 x  1 = 5 marks)

 

(b)     *        Arabic language spread to many parts of Africa e.g. North Africa

*        Led to intermarriages between Arabs and Africans

*        Islam weakened African indigenous religion in some areas

*        Arabic language enriched local languages e.g. Kiswahili and Hausa

*        Islamic law (sharia) was introduced in areas where Islam was established

*        Islam brought a new type of education based on the Koran

*        Arabic and Persian architectural styles were introduced in some areas e.g. along the                         Coast of West Africa and North Africa

*        Africans who accepted Islam adopted Arabic dress, music and eating habits

*        Islam acted as a unifying factor among the believers

*        Spread of Islam led to the introduction of new crops e.g. cloves in East Africa

*        Led to the development of coastal towns                                          (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

 

SECTION C

 

19.(a) *        Use of military force against uncooperative communities e.g. Ndebele

*        Signing treaties with the local African rulers

*        Signing treaties amongst themselves e.g. 1886 & 1890 Aglo-German agreements

*        Use of treachery                                                                                (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

(b)     *        Destruction of property e.g. houses and crops

*        Many people lost their lives

*        Caused disunity between Africans who supported the rebellion and those who did not

*        Africans lost faith in their traditional religion thereby maxing some to accept

Christianity

*        Many people were displaced

*        Laid basis for future African nationalism in Tanzania

*        Led to famine and starvation

*        Many Africans were arrested and either imprisoned or hanged

*        Germans involved Africans in the administration of the local affairs

*        Created fear and insecurity in Southern Tanzania

*        Africans learnt the futility of resisting a better armed opponent

*        Germans improved the social life of Africans by promoting African health and education

(6 x 2 = 12 marks)

20.(a) *        The Lozi grew crops like millet, maize and cassava

*        They kept cattle

*        Raided their neighbours e.g. Tonga and Ila for cattle

*        They traded among themselves and with the Portuguese

*        Practiced fishing along river Zambezi

*        Made iron implements e.g. hoes and spears

*        Practiced pottery and basketry                                                            (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

(b)     *        The Lozi had a centralized monarchical government

*        Position of the monarchy was hereditary

*        The King (Litunga) maintained unity in the kingdom

*        There was a queen mother and a queen sister who assisted Litunga / King in the day-                      to-day running of the Kingdom

*        There was a council of elders who offered advisory services to Litunga besides                                 overseeing tax collection

*        The council of Chiefs was organized in a hierachical order e.g. at the top were chiefs                       from the leading families. Below were lesser chiefs from the conquered people

*        Litunga had two capitals, namely; Levlui on the Bulozi floodplain which he occupied                    during dry seasons  and Mangui on the adjacent hills which he resided during wet          seasons

*        The administrative system was organized around groupings for the purpose of maintaining

unity in the kingdom e.g. there was a section dealing with the administration

and justice while the other handled the treasury and recruitment of communal labour.                                                                                                        (6 x 2 = 12 marks)

 

21.(a) *        To have been born in Senegal

*        To be aged 21 years and above

*        To have a place of residence

*        Know how to read and write in French

*        Be loyal to the state

*        To have served the state for at least 10 years

*        To be of good conduct / well behaved

*        Be leading a good life                                                                        (3 x 1 = 3 marks)

 

(b)     *        Senegal  was in corporated into the French Republic

*        French culture was promoted in Senegal

*        Many Africans adopted French hence undermining African traditions and  cultural                          practices

*        Africans who were assimilated acquired the right to participate in the political affairs of

France

*        Traditional rulers in Senegal lost their power / authority

*        Islam religion was undermined in the four communes of Senegal i.e. St. Louis, Goree,

Dakar and Rufsque where many Africans had adopted Christianity

*        Led to the rise of a priviledged class of Africans who were regarded as being equal with

the French people.

*        Created disunity among Africans who had qualified to be citizens and those who had                      not i.e. the subjects

*        Promoted the French system of education in Senegal

*        Created an educated class of African elite who played an important role in the rise of

African nationalism in Senegal

(6 x 2 = 12 marks)

 

HISTORY&GOVERNMENT V

PART I

 

SECTION  A ( 25 MARKS)

 

  1. State two economic activities of the Kamba during the pre-colonial period.                  (2mks)
  2. What were the function of the Laibon among the Massai during the precolonial period? (2mk)
  3. What was the major result of the encounter between the coastal Bantu and the Oromo? (1mk)
  4. Identify two factors that facilitated the contact between the Kenyan coast and the outside world before 1500AD            (2mks)
  5. State two terms of the 1886 Anglo-german Agreement            (2mks)
  6. Why were the local Native Councils established in Kenya during the colonial period                      (2mks)
  7. Give two reasons why Africans were denied the right to grow cash crops in Kenya during the colonial period.                                  (2mks)
  8. Identify two features of formal education in Kenya during the colonial period           (2mks)
  9. State two factors which led to the formation of Taita Hills Association.                      (2mks)
  10. How did the trade union movement contribute to the struggle for independence in Kenya. (2mks)
  11. State one aim of the second Lancaster House Conference            (1mk)
  12. Identify the body which appoints Assistant chiefs in Kenya.           (1mk)
  13. State two social interactions which promote national unity in Kenya         (2mks)
  14. Give two factors which hastened the introduction of multi party democracy in Kenya in 1991.

(2mks)

 

 


SECTION B (45 MARKS)

 

15(a).What factors led to the migration of the Eastern Cushites into Kenya during the  pre-colonial

period?                                                                                                                               (5mks)

(b). Discuss the results of the migration and settlement of the Cushites in Kenya during the pre-

colonial  period.                                                                                                         (10mks)

16(a). Why did the Portuguese establish their rule at the Kenyan coast in 1500A.D ?                           (3mks)

(b). Explain the factors that led to the decline of the Portuguese rule at the Kenyan coast.       (2mks)

17(a). Why did some African communities resist the establishment of British rule in Kenya.?     (7mks)

(b). Explain the results of the African resistance against the introduction of British rule in Kenya.                                                                                                                                             (8mks)

18(a). What factors led to the migration of Africans into the urban centres during the  colonial period                                                                                                                                    (5mks)

(b). Discuss the effects of urbanization in Kenya during the colonial period.                         (10mks)

 

 

SECTION C .

 

19(a). Why is national integration essential in Kenya?                                                            (5mks)

(b). Explain the factors that have undermined governments efforts to promote national unity in

Kenya since independence.                                                                                                    (10mks)

20(a). What are the functions of the Attorney General in Kenya?                                                        (5mks)

(b). Describe the stages through which a bill passes before it becomes a law in           Kenya          (10mks)

21(a). What is the role of  the Public Service Commission in Kenya?                                      (5mks)

(b). Explain the functions of Civil Servants in Kenya.                                                         (10mks).

 

 

HISTORY V

PART II

 

SECTION  A .

 

  1. Identify two sources of information used by historians to write the history of man during the

pre-historic period                                                                                                         (2mks)

  1. Give two factors which facilitated crop domestication in Mesopotamia.        (2mks)
  2. Name two metals which were used to manufacture weapons for defence in pre-colonial Africa.                                                                                                                                      (2mks)
  3. List down two limitations of road transport        (2mks)
  4. Give two agricultural changes that were introduced in western Europe from the mid eighteenth century.                      (2mks)
  5. State two problems that hinder third world countries in their effort to industrilise         (2mks)
  6. Identify two forms of communication that offer mass entertainment                                       (2mks)
  7. Name one item of trade that was exchanged for salt in the western Sudan during the

Tran-Saharan trade                                                                                                                         (1mk)

  1. State two similarities between Islam and Christianity                                    (2mks)
  2. What was the most important factor that facilitated European colonization of Africa in the nineteenth century?                                                                                            (1mk)
  3. State the main reason why the Ndebele fought the British                          (1mk)
  4. Name two systems of colonial administration which were used by the French to administer

their colonies in Africa                                                                                                      (2mks)

  1. Name two Houses of the French parliament                                                 (2mks)
  2. State two objectives of the Commonwealth.                                    (2mks)

 

SECTION B

 

  1. (a). How did bipedalism improve mans way of life during the early stage period?            (3mks)

(b). Explain the economic activities of man during the new stone age period.                    (12mks)

  1. (a). What were the uses of coal in Europe in the nineteenth century?   (5 mks)

(b). Discuss the factors that favoured the development of industries in Britain in the nineteenth century                                                                                                                    (10mks)

  1. (a). Explain the factors that facilitated the spread of Christianity in southern Europe by the end of the    fourth century A.D                                                                                             (5mks)

(b). Discuss factors which led to the emergence of the protestant churches in the sixteenth century.                                                                                                                                     (10mks)

  1. (a). Explain the factors which led to the abolition of the slave trade in the nineteenth century

(5mks)

(b). Discuss the effects of Trans-Atlantic trade on west Africa                                  (10mks)

 

SECTION C.

 

  1. (a). What were the economic activities of the Buganda Kingdom during the pre-colonial period?      (5mks)

(b). Describe the political organization of the Buganda Kingdom during the pre-colonial period.                                                                                                                        (10mks)

  1. (a). How did the apartheid laws in south Africa discriminate against Africans?        (5mks)

(b). Discuss the problems that were faced by African nationalists in South Africa in their struggle

against apartheid.                                                                                              (10mks)

  1. (a). Why was the Economic Community of West Africa States (ECOWAS) formed? (5mks)

(b). Explain the factors that have undermined the activities of the OAU.                (10mks)

 

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT V

PART I

MARKING SCHEME

 

SECTION A

  1. – Cattle keeping
  • Hunting and Gathering
  • Trading activities – local & long distance trade
  • Making iron tools / implements/ weapons
  • Making cooking and food storage facilities.
  • Growing crops e.g                      2 x 1 mk each =( 2 marks).

 

  1. – Officiating religious ceremonies
  • Advised the council of elders
  • Blessed warrior before they went to war / cattle raiding parties
  • Predicted future events
  • Explained mysteries of nature to the people
  • Offered communal prayers to god.

                           2 x 1 mark each = (2marks)

 

  1. –The Bantu were forced by the Oromo to disperse from Shungwaya.                    1 mark.

 

  1. – Existence of monsoon winds which facilitated the movement of the outsiders to and from  the

Kenyan coast.

  • Accessibility of the Kenyan coast by sea.
  • The outsiders had developed boat/ dhow making skills
  • Availability of funds to finance the journey to and from the Kenyan coast

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – Witu and the territory between rivers Umba and Ruvuma were given to the Germans
  • The sultan was given the islands of Pemba, Pate, Zanzibar, Mafia and Lamu.
  • The sultan was awarded a 16km strip of land along the coast .
  • The territory North of river Umba and river Jumba was given to the British

2 x 1 = ( 2marks)

 

  1. – To promote a sense of responsibility towards the state among the Africans
  • To give Africans an opportunity to participate in the administration of the local areas.
  • To enable the Africans to present their needs to the government
  • To give the colonial government an opportunity to control the Africans.

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – To protect European farmers against competition from African farmers
  • To safeguard the supply of cheap African labour to the European farms
  • To safeguard against the demand of land by Africans in the Kenya highlands.

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – Formal education was organised along racial lines
  • African schools had inferior facilities
  • Europeans received academic education while Africans received industrial / technical education.
  • There was separate examinations for Europeans, Africans and Asians
  • Africans had very limited opportunities for secondary and post- secondary education

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – The Taita wanted to oppose the colonial policy of destocking
  • They wanted to regain land that they had lost to the British.
  • They wanted to oppose the government move to relocate the Wadawida from Taita hills to Samburu district.
  • To oppose the kipande system

2 x 1 = (2mks)

 

  1. – Trade unions organised strikes and boycotts to oppose the unpopular colonial policy.
  • They educated / sensitised workers on the need to join / support nationalist parties like K.A.U and KANU
  • They gave moral and material / financial support to the political parties that struggled for independence.
  • They offered training opportunities to the potential nationalist leaders e.g Tom Mboya.

2 x 1 =  (2 marks)

 

  1. – To draft the independence constitution
  • To sort out the differences between KANU and KADU.

1 x 1 = ( 1mark)

 

  1. – Public Service Commission (PSC) 1 mark

 

  1. – Inter community marriages
  • Sports/ games
  • Working together in places of work e.g offices.

2 x 1 =(2marks)

 

  1. – Repealing of section 2(a) of the Kenyan constitution  which legalised the formation of many

political parties

  • Economic hardships in the country which compelled Kenyans to demand for change.
  • External pressure from the international community/ donors
  • End of the cold war which influenced USA to compel African countries e.g Kenya to legalise pluralism
  • Internal agitation for pluralism by multiparty activists.

2 x 1 = ( 2maks)

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION B

  1. (a) – They were searching for pasture and water for their livestock
  • Their territory had been attacked by hostile neighbours /external attack
  • Outbreak of natural calamities e.g drought and famine
  • Family and clan conflicts
  • Some Cushites migrated in search of land for settlement.
  • Some migrated due to the spirit of adventure.

5 points x 1 mark each = (5marks)

 

(b) – The Cushites introduced livestock farming in the areas they settled

  • They increased human population in the areas they settled
  • Their settlement led to increased rivalry and conflict over land ownership
  • They spread Islamic religion in the areas they settled
  • They intermarried with the communities they came into contact with e.g the coastal Bantu and the Samburu.
  • A new cultural group – the Cushites – was introduced in Kenya
  • They established trading contact with the communities they came into contact with e.g they sold milk and butter to the Bantus in exchange for grains.
  • They attacked the eastern Bantu at shungwaya thereby forcing them to move to their present homeland.
  • They introduced new cultural practices e.g circumcision to the Bantus
  • They acquired the art of iron working and mixed farming from the Bantus.

5 points x 2 marks = (10 marks)

 

  1. (a) – The Portuguese wanted to spread Christianity at the coast
  • To control the Indian Ocean trade
  • To establish ports along the coast that could facilitate their naval and commercial activities in the far East
  • They wanted to control the Kenyan coast to prevent other people e.g Egyptians and Turks from doing so. 3 x 1 = (3marks)

 

(b)    –   Some coastal people revolted against the Portuguese in order to regain their independence.

  • Their harsh rule compelled the coastal people to rebel against them
  • Most of the Portuguese officials at the coast were corrupt hence they embezzled revenue thereby making it difficult for Portugal to sustain her rule at the coast.
  • Decline of Indian ocean trade which forced Portugal to lose interest in her coastal possessions
  • Their coastal settlements were attacked by the Zimba terrorists which made life at the coast unbearable to the Portuguese
  • The long distance between the coast and Portugal made it difficult for Portuguese officials at the coast to receive reinforcement from Portugal I time.
  • Portuguese officials were attacked by the tropical diseases e.g malaria thereby discouraging those who survived to remain.
  • Their commercial monopoly in the Indian ocean was challenged by the rival European powers, namely the Dutch and the British.
  • Their coastal settlements were frequently attacked by the Turks and Oman Arabs who had arrived in the scene to rescue their fellow Muslims.

6 x 2 = 12marks

 

  1. (a) –Some communities resisted in order to protect their independence
  • Some communities underestimated the military strength of the British
  • To protect their land.
  • Some had strong economic base to sustain their resistance e.g the Nandi.
  • Some like the Abagusii and the Turkana were encouraged to resist by their religious leaders who convinced them that they would receive supernatural protection against the British.
  • Some communities e.g the Swahili and the Mazrui Arabs were against the imposition of unpopular leaders by the British.
  • Some were against forced labour
  • Others like the Kamba and the Taita were opposing the colonial policy of destocking.

7 x 1 = 7 marks

 

(b) –     The resistance brought war between some African communities e.g the Nandi and the British.

  • The resultant wars led to the loss of life and property
  • The British confiscated crops and livestock from the resisting communities
  • Wars of resistance led to widespread fear and insecurity in some of the affected areas.
  • Productive economic activities e.g farming and trade were disrupted in some of the areas that were affected by wars of resistance.
  • In most cases the resisting communities lost land to the British
  • Resistance wars proved to the British that Africans were ready to die in defence of their independence
  • Resistance promoted unity between Africans of a particular community against alien rule.
  • The resistance laid the foundation for future African Nationalism in Kenya.

8 x 1 = 8 marks

 

  1. (a) –Some Africans migrated in search of wage employment in the urban centres
  • Some were attracted by the high standard of living in the urban centres e.g electricity and piped water.
  • Some moved to the urban centres to escape conscription for labour which was needed in the European farms
  • Some were escaping taxation in the rural areas
  • Others moved to the urban centres due to the loss of land in their rural areas.
  • Some moved to the urban centres in search of western education
  • Some moved to establish small scale business enterprises.

5 x 1 = (5marks)

 

(b) – Urbanization led to overcrowding in the African residential areas which encouraged the

development of slums.

  • urbanization facilitated the interaction of people from different ethnic backgrounds.
  • The difficult urban life forced many people to engage in crime and other antisocial behaviours such as prostitution as a means of survival.
  • Rural areas lost their active part of labour force thereby disrupting agricultural activities in the affected areas.
  • Urban centres attracted industrial entrepreneurs who invested their capital in the centres thereby creating job opportunities.
  • Led to congestion in African living quarters which lowered the quality of sanitary conditions. This led to high incidence of contagious diseases like cholera in some of the affected areas.
  • Availability of jobs in the urban centres led to the emergence of a class of people who earned their living through wage employment.
  • Led to the migration of people from the rural areas to the urban centres.
  • The influx of people into the urban centres interfered with socio-cultural set up in the rural areas. For instance women increasingly took some roles hitherto held by men.
  • Led to the co-existence of different ethnic groups which promoted national integration/unity
  • Urbanization interfered with some traditional social institutions e.g the family whose role was undermined due to the separation of husband and wife.
  • Led to the formation of social welfare organizations to cater for the interests of Africans living in the towns. The organizations laid the foundation for African nationalism in the country.
  • Urbanization led to the popularization of sports and sporting activities e.g football and athletics among the urban dwellers.

10 x 1 = 10 marks

 

SECTION C.

  1. (a) –National integration enables Kenyans of different ethnic and racial backgrounds to live together in peace .
  • It enables Kenyans to solve national problems like drought and famine as one people.
  • It enables Kenyans to jointly participate in the cultural activities like games and sports.
  • It promotes political stability in the country.
  • It creates a sense of security among Kenyans
  • It enables people to mix freely in place of work and educational institutions.
  • Enhances nationalism /patriotism
  • Encourages foreigners e.g tourists to visit our country.
  • Promotes foreign investments in the country

5 x 1 = (5marks)

 

(b)  –    Existence of different ethnic groups in the country tends to encourage tribalism in the allocation

of national resources. This works against national unity.

  • Political differences especially with the introduction of multi –party democracy in 1991
  • Religious differences. These have tended to divide Kenyans along religious lines
  • Corrupt practices e.g Nepotism and mismanagement of different resources by those in key positions in the government.
  • Economic disparities at both the individual and regional levels have tended to undermine the governments efforts to promote national unity in the country /government’s.
  • International propaganda against the country which tends to gain support among some Kenyans.
  • Poorly developed transport facilities in some parts of the country. This makes it rather difficult for people in such regions to interract with other Kenyans.
  • Formation of tribal associations such as Gema and soccer clubs that are tribally based e.g. Abaluhya F.C.
  • Insecurity in some areas due to banditry. This discourages other Kenyans from visiting such insecure areas thereby undermining efforts to promote national integration.
  • Tribal clashes as did happen in 1991/1992 and 1997.

5 x 2 = 10 marks

 

  1. (a) – The Attorney General (A.G) is the chief legal adviser to the government.
  • G is the chief state prosecuter.
  • G interprets the laws of Kenya
  • G drafts the government bills.
  • The A.G serves as the an ex- officio member of the parliament.
  • The A.G has the responsibility of presenting a drafted bill to parliament for consideration and debate. 5 x 1 = ( 5 marks)

 

(b) –    The bill is introduced in the parliament by Attorney General or the minister under whose

portfolio the matter of the bill falls. This stage is the first reading.

  • The bill goes to the second reading . It is debated by the members of the parliament. (MPs)
  • The bill moves to the third stage (committee stage). The bill is improved by a committee selected by the Parliament. This is done by incorporating in the bill suggestions made during the second reading.
  • The bill moves to the fourth stage (report stage), Whereby it is taken back to the parliament. This is in order for the MPs to be satisfied that suggestions/ recommendations made during the second reading have been taken into account.
  • The bill then passes to the third reading. At this stage it is debated further by the MPs and any necessary amendments
  • The bill is then passed to the president for assent after which it becomes a law or an Act of parliament.
  • After the presidential assent the new law is published in the Kenya Gazette for public knowledge and awareness.

5 x 2 = (10 marks)

 

  1. (a) – The Public Service Commission (P S C) is charged with the responsibility of appointing,

promoting and disciplining civil servants in Kenya.

  • P S C formulates code of conduct for the civil servants in Kenya
  • P S C facilitates fairness in the civil service with regards to promotions, demotions and dismissal of civil servants in Kenya.
  • Advertising jobs/ vacancies in the civil service both in the local dailies and the Kenya gazette.
  • Delegating authority to the heads of department to appoint junior civil servants.

5 x 1 = 5 marks

 

 

 

 

  • – Civil servants facilitate the implementation of government policies / programs in Kenya.
  • They interpret government policies to the people through public barazas
  • Advise minister on policy matters.
  • They keep/ maintain government records
  • They participate in the drawing and preparations of the district and national budget.
  • They maintain law and order
  • They help in collecting the government revenue
  • Civil servants e.g doctors and teachers give direct services to the people.

5 x 2 = (10 marks)       

 

HISTORY & GOVERNMENT V

PART II

MARKING SCHEME

 

 

  1. – Archeology
  • Botany/Zoology
  • Geology
  • Rock paintings / engravings

2 x 1 mark each = (2marks)

 

  1. – Presence of fertile soils / silt along rivers Tigris and Euphrates
  • Availability of water for irrigation
  • Existence of indigenous crops e.g barley and wheat / indigenous.
  • Invention of farming methods by the Sumerians e.g building banks to prevent flooding of farmland and the Shadoof method of irrigation.
  • Invention and use of farming tools e.g Ox-drawn plough.
  • Construction and use of food storage facilities.

2 x 1 each = (2marks)

 

  1. – Iron
  • Bronze
  • Copper

2 x 1 = (2mks)

 

  1. – Carries less bulky goods in comparison with railway, water and air transport
  • Cannot carry goods beyond the land into the sea.
  • Frequency / rate of road related accidents is higher than those caused by air, railway and water transports.

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – Farms were mechanised.
  • Fallows were abolished.
  • Animal breeding was introduced
  • Fencing / enclosing / hedging of plots / farms
  • Use of manure / fertilizers in the farms
  • Crop rotation
  • Reclaiming of waste land.

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – Low purchasing power among the citizens
  • Low level of technological knowhow
  • Lack of capital / adequate funds to invest in the industrial sector.
  • Poorly developed transport and communication system
  • Competition from developed countries
  • Poor economic policies
  • Neo – Colonialism.

2 x 1 = (2marks)

 

  1. – Cinema
  • Film
  • Television 2 x 1 = ( 2 marks)

 

  1. – Gold
  • Slaves
  • Ivory
  • Kola nuts
  • Animal skins
  • Ostrich feathers
  • Pepper 2 x 1 = ( 2 marks)

 

  1. – Belief in one God
  • Belief in the existence of angels
  • Belief in prophets
  • Belief in life after death

2 x 1 = ( 2 marks)

 

  1. – European colonial powers possessed superior weapons 1mark

 

  1. – To preserve their independence 1 mark

 

  1. – Assimilation
  • Association 2 x 1 = ( 2mks)
  1. – Senate
  • National Assembly

2 x 1 = ( 2marks)

 

  1. – To promote world peace
  • To promote economic development of the member states
  • To promote the rights of the individual
  • To promote international trade

 

  • To fight against colonial administration
  • To promote development .

2 x 1 = ( 2mks)

 

SECTION B.

 

  1. (a) – The forelimbs / hands were freed for other useful activities e.g making tools.
  • Man’s mobility improved
  • Man’s ability to hunt improved
  • Man acquired an upright posture thereby improving his ability to detect his enemies
  • Man’s ability to gather fruits and vegetables improved.

3 x 1 = ( 3mks)

 

(b) – The new stone age people made microlithic tools e.g fishing harpoons and bone needles

  • They made weapons e.g bows and arrows
  • They practiced basketry and pottery
  • They made clothes / garments using animal skins
  • They made red Ochre for body decoration
  • They traded with their neighbours
  • They domesticated crops
  • Practiced fishing
  • Making utensils e.g. stone bowls

6 x 2 marks each = (12 marks)

 

 

 

  1. (a) – Smelting iron
  • Heating water for industrial and domestic use
  • Providing warmth in the homes
  • As cooking fuel in the homes
  • Was used as fuel for driving vehicles, locomotives and ships
  • Providing lights in houses and factories.

5 x 1 = ( 5 marks)

 

(b) – Availability of skilled labour force

  • Existence of cottage industries which provided a base for industrial development
  • The country had a large supply of industrial energy e.g. coal
  • The country had a large population which offered a steady market for her manufactured goods.
  • The country had a large number of colonies which provided a ready external market for her manufactured goods
  • Availability of iron ore for heavy industries
  • Availability of a large pool of unskilled labor force
  • Existence of rich entrepreneurs who were willing to invest in industries.
  • The country had enjoyed a long period of political stability.
  • Agrarian Revolution increased food for industrial workers and raw materials for industries.
  • Availability of a well developed transport and communication network e.g. canals and railways.
  • Scientific /technological inventions led to the improvement and expansions of industries in Britain.
  • The country’s policy of promoting free trade encouraged industrialization .
  • The country had a large navy which protected her merchants from foreign competition
  • Existence of banks and insurance systems gave financial assistance and security to the industrialists. 10 x 1  =   (10 marks)

 

  1. (a) – Missionary work of the apostles e.g. Peter and Paul who established early churches in

Southern  Europe.

  • Missionary work of the early Christian converts.
  • Persecution of Christians. Due to the fear of persecution in the roman empire, many Christian converts fled to different parts of Southern Europe thereby spreading Christianity in the process.
  • Emperor Constantine’s support for Christianity, which encouraged the spread of Christian faith in the Roman empire.
  • Being a new religion, some people accepted it out of curiosity to understand it.
  • Peace and security in the Roman empire encouraged the spread of Christianity in Southern Europe.
  • Existence of roads in the Roman empire facilitated the movement of Christian missionaries in the empire.
  • Existence of common languages for communication e.g. Latin and Greek.

5 x 1 = (5 marks)

 

(b) –   Translation of the bible into many languages in Europe. Hence the Bible became accessible to

many  people thereby giving them a chance to criticise it.

  • Corruption among the clergy. For instance some of the clergy bribed their way to senior positions. Due to such malpractices many people lost confidence in the Catholic church.
  • Life of luxury of the clergy. For example some Catholic priests and the pope lived in the Palaces, where they were served by many servants and had a lot of wealth. This became a centre of controversy and gradually led to the formation of Protestant churches.
  • Selling of indulgences. The tradition of the church held that those who had sinned perform an act of self denial in order to be forgiven. However the catholic church began to sell letters of indulgences (pardon) to the rich people. Hence some rich people became habitual sinners thereby creating room for criticism against the church.
  • Development of printing press. This development made it possible to pinpoint and subsequently spread the weaknesses of the Roman Catholic church thereby paving way for the rise of the Protestant church.
  • The unwillingness of the church to accommodate the views of reformists such as Martin Luther.
  • Absolute power of the pope. The pope, the reformists argued had a lot of power over religious matters thereby denying people the right to act independently. This paved the way for the rise of the Protestant churches.
  • Growth of nationalism in Europe. The rise of nationalism in different parts of Europe disillusioned people in different parts of Europe who began to question their answerability to Rome. Hence they expressed the need to be free from the pope in matters related to marriage, divorce, wills and trying of the clergy.
  • Excessive wealth of church. The church had become too rich for instance, it owned large tracks of land and this attracted envy and criticism both from the kings and the rulers.
  • Immoral practices of the clergy. For instance some kept mistresses, thereby contravening the rule of celibacy. This led to increased criticism towards the church leadership.
  • Challenge of some of the doctrines and ceremonies of the church. For example, the reformists questioned the practice of addressing prayers and confessions through priests rather than to God directly. 5 x 2 = ( 10 marks)

 

  1. (a) – Rise of anti – slavery movement in Europe towards the end of the eighteenth century. The

movement emphasized on the equality of all men irrespective of colour or creed. Gradually,

the  movement gained support and  thus played an important role towards the abolition of

slave trade.

  • The spread of Christianity in Africa in the nineteenth century. Christian missionaries argued that their work in Africa was being interfered with by slave merchants. Hence they pressed their mother countries e.g. Britain to legally abolish slave trade.
  • The industrial revolution. Industralists in Europe needed raw materials for their industries. Hence they influenced their governments to outlaw slave trade in Africa in order to facilitate the exploitation of raw materials in the continent.
  • The influence of economists in both Europe and America. The economists argued that slave labor was less productive than free labor. This argument influenced governments in Europe to legally abolish the trade.
  • The need for markets for manufactured goods. Since slave trade was insecure to human life and property, owners of industries pressed their governments to abolish the trade. This was in order to get a conducive atmosphere to market their finished products.
  • The independence of the United States of America (USA) from Britain in 1776. Since Britain relied on slave labor to exploit her American colonies, the independence of USA meant that they were no longer useful to Britain. This motivated Britain to enact anti-slave trade laws that facilitated the abolition of slave trade.
  • The American civil war ( 1861- 1865) between the Northern states and the slave owning states in the south. The defeat of the slave owning states led to the abolition of slavery in the USA.

5 x 1 =  ( 5 marks)

 

(b) –    Many areas were de-populated due to the slave raiding activities .

  • Led to the introduction of firearms in West Africa which caused inter tribal wars, fear and insecurity.
  • West Africa lost a large number of young productive people thereby undermining the economic development of the region
  • Led to the importation of manufactured goods such as iron-ware and cotton clothes. This led to the decline of indigenous industries in some areas.
  • Chiefs changed their rle in some areas. For example, they ceased to be the custodian of their people, as they began to sell them to the slave dealers.
  • It stimulated the rise of states in the region e.g. Fante, Asante, and Dahomey due to the acquisition of firearms which they used to expand their territories through the conquest.
  • It led to the rise of the powerful class of merchants e.g. Jaja of Opobo. Some of the merchants became political leaders.
  • It led to the creation of new states in West Africa, namely Liberia and Sierra Leone which comprised of freed slaves from America
  • The trade somewhat contributed to the decline of Trans –Saharan trade since, some West African merchants shifted their commercial activities to the West African coast.
  • As a result of Trans – Atlantic trade Europeans developed some interest in West Africa. Gradually this interest led to the colonisation of West Africa by European powers in the nineteenth century.
  • Since slave trading activities had weakened the African communities in the region , they were unable to resist the imposition of colonial rule in west Africa .
  • The trade stimulated the development of urban centres in the region e.g. Lagos.
  • It led to the rise of Mulatto population along the coast of West Africa due to the intermarriages between Africans and Europeans. 5 x 2 = ( 10 marks)

 

SECTION C.

  1. (a) – The Buganda grew a variety of crops e.g. millet, sorghum and bananas.
  • They kept cattle and goats
  • They manufactured farm implements e.g iron hoes.
  • They bark clothes.
  • They mined salt
  • The Buganda made / build canoes
  • They practiced fishing on the shoes of lake Victoria and in the numerous rivers that cris-crossed their country.
  • They traded with their neighbors e.g. the Bunyoro and the coastal Swahili and the Arab merchants

5 x 1 = ( 5 marks)

 

(b) – Buganda Kingdom was a centralised monarchy that was headed by a king / Kabaka.

  • The office of the Kabaka was hereditary.
  • Kabaka was assisted by a number of officials to administer the Kingdom. These included the prime minister (Katikiirio), the senior chief (Mugema), chief justice (Omulamuzi) and the treasurer (Omuwanika).
  • The kingdom had an advisory council (Lukiiko) or parliament which made laws for the kingdom in addition to advising the Kabaka.
  • Kabaka had unlimited powers. For instance he was the overall head of political and judicial matters, commander in chief of the armed forces and could fire senior government officials at will
  • For ease of administration, the kingdom was divided into administrative units called Sazas which were in turn sub divided into sub counties (Gombololas), these were headed by chiefs and lesser chiefs respectively.
  • Both Saza and Gombolola chiefs had the responsibility of collecting taxes and maintaining law and order in their respective jurisdictions.

5 x 2 =  ( 10 marks).

 

  1. (a) – Apartheid laws denied Africans right to form political parties.
  • Africans were denied freedom of movement.
  • Africans were given low quality education
  • Africans were denied freedom of speech
  • Africans were given low quality medical and housing facilities.
  • Africans were compelled to use different roads and hotels from those that were used by whites.
  • Africans were confined in the black homelands / Bantustans.

5 x 1 = ( 5 marks )

 

(b) – African nationalists in South Africa lacked adequate funds to finance their nationalists activities.

  • They were affected by political assassination of their leaders e.g. Steve Biko – 1977
  • Banning of political parties, for instance ANC and PAC were outlawed in 1961.
  • Frequent harassment of the nationalist leaders
  • Jailing of the nationalists leaders e.g. following the infamous Rivona trial of 1964, Nelson Mandela and his co- accused nationalists namely, Walter Silulu and Govan Mbeki were detained.
  • The African nationalists lacked a well trained army to effectively challenge the apartheid regime.
  • Disunity among the nationalists leaders e.g. PAC splintered from the ANC in 1959.
  • Opposition from the civilian white population.
  • The presence of Portuguese in Angola and Mozambique since they were sympathetic to the apartheid government. They repatriated black nationalists from South Africa who had taken refuge in Angola and Mozambique.
  • Banning of publications that were sympathetic to the nationalists. For instance following the 1963 Undesirable Publications Act, publications that contradicted apartheid policies such as Thomas Hardy’s novel – The Return of the Native- were banned.
  • The 1959 Bantustan policy which divided the black people along ethnic lines.
  • The government used money to employ black informers who gave information to the government that was detrimental to the nationalist struggle.

5 x 2 = ( 10 marks)

 

  1. (a) – Economic community of West Africans States ( ECOWAS) was formed to promote economic independence of the member states.
  • To promote economic cooperation among West African states in such fields as trade and agriculture.
  • To promote unity and solidarity among member states
  • Promote cultural interractions among member states.
  • To facilitate movement of people among the member states.
  • Create customs union in the region
  • Promote industrial movement among the member states.
  • Promote peace in the region
  • Set up a fund that would finance viable economic projects among member states.
  • x 1  =  (5 mks)

 

(b) – Personal differences among leaders which makes it difficult for some of them to come together.

  • Existence of national interest among member states which override continental commitment.
  • Lack of funds to implement OAU activities since some of members fail to remit their subscriptions regularly.
  • Lack of an army to enforce OAU decisions e.g. border conflicts between member states.
  • External interference by foreign powers in some of its activities.
  • Divided loyalty – some member states countries belong to other organizations e.g. commonwealth.
  • Political instability in the continent makes it difficult for the OAU to operate effectively.
  • Some member countries are still attached to their former colonial masters, thereby undermining their commitment to the organization.
  • Existence of basic problems within member states which require immediate attention e.g. famine, drought and diseases. This tends to divert commitment to the QAU among the affected states.
  • Ideological / political differences among member states.
  • Dispute among member states.

05  x  2   = ( 10 marks)

COMPUTER STUDIES NOTES FREE PDF FORM 2

WORD PROCESSORS

Chapter outline

  • Definition of word processor.
  • Purpose of word processing.
  • Using a word processing package (Microsoft word).

1.4 Editing and formatting a document.

 1.5 Creating and editing a table.

1.6 Mail merge document.

  1. 7 Inserting graphics.

1.8 Printing a document.

DOWNLOAD COMPUTER STUDIES NOTES IN PDF IN THE LINKS BELOW;

COMPUTER STUDIES NOTES FORM 1-4 PDF

Free Computer Studies notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers, Exams, Marking Schemes, Topical revision materials, Syllabus and Many more

Definition of a word processor

What is a word processor?

A word processor is an application software that enables a person to create, save, edit, format and print text documents. Word processing is the act of using a word processor.

 

Examples of word processors

Examples of word processors include, Microsoft Word, Corel WordPerfect, WordStar, Lotus WordPro and many others.

A word processor has a number of advantages over he type writer that include:

  1. A document can be stored in the computer for future reference in computer files that do not occupy physical space like the one on paper. This creates a paperless document-processing environment.
  2. Typing using a word processor is easier and more efficient because some actions are automated. For example, word-wrap feature automatically takes the cursor to the beginning of the next line once you reach the end of the current. Another automatic features common in most word processors is automatic insertion of a new page after reaching the end of the current page.
  3.  Most word processors have special editing tools such as spelling and grammar checkers and thesaurus that help the user to easily Correct grammar and spelling mistakes. A thesaurus helps to find a word or phrase with similar meanings.
  4.  With insert and type over modes available in most word processors, one can easily insert or replace a word or a phrase without affecting the structure and neatness of the document.
  5. Word processors have superior document formatting features. Formatting refers to the art of making the document more attractive and appealing to the eye. Such features include, underlining, boldfacing, italicization, applying different colors etc.
  6.  While a typewriter may require that we retype the entire document when we want many copies, with a word processor, printing lets you produce as many copies per session as needed.
  7. Using the cut, copy and paste commands, you can incorporate other text without having to retype it.

 

Basic word processing features and concepts

  1. They allow the user to create a file, save it and open it again and again for reuse, editing or formatting.
  2. They have almost similar document windows with the following Features:

(a) Most are designed to look like a piece of paper with a few

(b) Most of the screen is blank before typing of text.

(c) There is a cursor, which blinks at the position where you can Begin entering text.

(d) There is a status bar or line that provides the user with current status information such as saving operation, the name of the file in use, the current page, the current imaginary horizontal-line and column cursor position.

(e) Word wrap: The feature that automatically moves a word or cursor to the beginning of the next line if it does not fit at the end of the current line.

(g) Scrolling: This is the vertical movement of text document on the screen. We can scroll through a text document using the up or do n arrow keys, page up and page down keys and also using, a mouse in windows based word processors.

(h) Help: Sometimes we get lost, confused or need more information on how to use an application. Help contains instruction, tips, pointers, explanations and guidance. You can get help by either pressing F 1 on the keyboard or clicking Help from the menu.

(i) Editing Modes: Word processors have two editing modes, insert and type over mode. In insert mode, every character typed between words, lines or characters is placed at the cursor position. This pushes all the text in front of the cursor away without deleting it. However in type over mode every character typed deletes what was there before and replaces it with new text at the cursor position.

  1. Nearly all word processors have a spelling checker, thesaurus (Dictionary of synonyms) and grammar checker.
  2. They provide for the use of headers and footers, indexing, footnotes and references, typefaces (fonts) and character set.
  3. Most word processors have ability to create and import tables, text and graphics from other programs.

Mostly, word processors are used for writing letters, reports, projects, books, essays, memos curriculum vitae etc.

Factors to consider when choosing a word processor The choice of a word processor depend on:

  1. The type of operating system. For example, most microcomputers are currently running on Windows based operating system such as Microsoft Windows. This means that you should consider acquiring a graphical user interface based Word Processor,
  2. Its user-friendliness, i.e. ease of use.
  3. Its formatting and editing features. They should be good and varied.

 

Using a word processing package Microsoft Word

.

Microsoft Word is one of the components of Microsoft Office. Microsoft Office is integrated software with a number of interrelated programs. The programs include Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet called Microsoft Excel, and a database management system called Microsoft Access, communication software called Microsoft Outlook, and a presentation package called Microsoft PowerPoint among others.

Although there are several versions of Microsoft Word, the most common are Word 97, Word 2000, WordXP and Word 2003. These versions of Microsoft Word are found in Microsoft Office 97, 2000, XP and 2003 suites respectively.

Starting Microsoft Word

There are a number of ways you can start Microsoft Word. However the

Simplest is by using programs start menu.

 

Starting Microsoft Word from the start menu

  1. Click the start button.
  2. Point to programs/ all programs if you are using Windows XP
  3. Click from the programs menu

Microsoft Word screen layout

Once you start Microsoft Word, it provides you with a blank document window referred to as the new document template where you can create your document.

However you may need to use other specialised templates such as Faxes and letters, Memos and Web page. How? Click File then select New from the menu. The New dialog box in Figure 1.3 that appears enables a person to select a template by activating templates tab then double clicking its icon.

 

With Windows multitasking capability, you can have more than one document window at the same time sharing one application window. However, each document window will have its own title bar but both will share other facilities like the menu bar of the application window.

However only one document window will be visible on the desktop at a time while others remains minimized or covered. This window is referred to as the active document window. To switch between document windows, click their buttons on the taskbar.

 

Parts of a window

 

Title bar

A title bar is mostly a blue strip at the top of the window that displays the title of the currently running application or task. However it is possible to change the color of the title bar using the display properties.

 

The title bar also enables the user to move the window around the desktop. This is possible by pointing to it then dragging using the mouse.

 

On the right of the title bar are three tiny buttons called minimize, restore/ maximize and the close buttons.

The minimize button reduces a window to become a button on the taskbar.

 

The restore/maximize button stretches the window to cover the entire desktop or restore it to its original size respectively.

The close button is used to close and exit a window.

 

Menu bar

Provides a drop down list of commands that one can use to perform a task. Examples are File, Exit, Window and Help. Figure 1.4 shows the File drop down menu.

Too/bars

These are rows of buttons or icons that represent commands. The command buttons are shortcuts to the same commands you can access from the menu bar. There are various toolbars available in Microsoft Word but the most common are the Standard and Formatting toolbars (Figure 1.5 and 1.6)

To see what other commands are, just point to the icon on the toolbar and a text tip will be displayed showing the function of the icon.

Most of these commands will be discussed later.

Hiding and displaying the toolbars

  1. Click the View menu option.
  2. Position the pointer on Toolbars.
  3. Click the type of tool bar required to select it.

 

Selected toolbars have ticks or check marks next to them as shown in Figure 1.7.

Rulers

Microsoft Word provides the user with vertical and horizontal on screen rulers that helps the user position text or objects in the right position.

 

If the ruler is not visible on the screen, then display it using the following procedure.

  1. Click the View menu option.
  2. On the drop down menu that appears, click Ruler. A check mark or tick will appear next to it showing that the ruler is displayed on the screen.

 

Work area

This is the working area where you can enter text or graphical objects. All windows based application programs provide the user with a unique working area suited to that particular application.

 

Status bar

This is an interactive strip at the bottom of the screen that acts as a communication link between the user and the program. It displays interactive activities like saving, opening, background printing, cursor position etc.

Scroll bars/button_ and scroll arrows

Scroll bars or buttons are horizontal and vertical bars on the borders of a window that the user drags to scroll upward, downwards, to the right or left of a document. Scroll arrows are arrows at the end of the scroll bars that the user clicks instead of dragging the scroll button. Using scroll bars or arrows is equivalent to using the arrow keys on the keyboard

 

Running the program

 

Creating a document

When you start a new document, you will see a blinking vertical bar called an insertion pointer. You can move your insertion pointer by using the arrow keys or the mouse.

 

In case you are in Microsoft Word and you want to create another new document, you should proceed as follows:

  1. Click the File menu,
  2. Choose new, from the resulting dialog box, click Blank Document Or select template by clicking any template’s tab
  3. Click the OK button.

 

Saving a new document

  1. From the file menu, click save or Save As or simply click the save Button on the Standard toolbar. The difference between save and save as is that although both give the save as dialog box when saving for the first time, Save allows the user to save document without the opportunity to change the file name or the location. Figure 1.9 below shows a save as dialog box.

2.In the file name box, type a unique name for the document

3.Select a the location or drive you want to save in, by clicking the down arrow on the right of save in list box,

4.To save the file in a different format or type such as Word 6.0, Word for Macintosh etc. click the down arrow on the right of Save as type list box and choose a file type.

5.Click the save button. The file will automatically be saved as a Microsoft Word document.

Opening an existing document

1.From the file menu, click Open command or on the Standard toolbar, click the Open button. Alternatively press Ctrl + 0 key combination on the keyboard. The Open dialog box shown appears.

2.Select a drive or folder where the file is saved.

3.In the file name box, type or select the name of the document you want to open.

4.Click the open button

To open a document created in another program, click the file format you want in the files of type box, and then double click the document name in the folder list. You can also use wildcards in the file name box for example, type *. Document to find Microsoft Word files.

 

NB: Microsoft Word keeps a list of shortcut links to recently used files on the file drop down menu. If the list of recently used documents is not displayed, you can configure Microsoft Word to be displaying them by doing the following:

  1. Click the Tools then Options command. This displays the options Dialog box.
  2. On the general tab, select the recently used file list check box as Shown in Figure 1.11.

 

Protecting a document with a password

A password is a combination of characters that prevents other users from opening and changing a document without permission. If a document is protected by a password, only the person who knows the password can open the document or edit it.

 

To save a document with a password

  1. Create or open the document you want to protect
  2. From the file menu, choose Save As.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Tools button in the save as dialog box
  4. Click General options.
  5. Type in a password in the password to open. This prompts the user to enter password when opening a document.
  6. Type in a password in the password to modify. This prevents the user from making changes to a document unless the user enters the correct password.
  7. Finally click OK.

 

Closing a document

Closing a document means unloading the current active document from memory so that the user can create or open another without necessarily exiting from Word.

To close a document:

  1. Click the File menu.
  2. Choose Close.

 

Exiting from Word

  1. To exit from Word, make sure all open documents are saved.
  2. Click File menu,
  3. Click Exit command.

 

NB: You can exit from Microsoft Word by pressing Alt + F4 keys or by double clicking the application icon at the left most comer of the title bar. If you have not saved any of the open documents, Microsoft Word prompts you to save the document first.

 

1.4

Editing and formatting a document

 

Editing

Editing refers to making necessary changes to an existing document. Apart from manual editing using delete, insert and overtype/overwrite commands, Microsoft Word provides the user with inbuilt tools such as the spelling and grammar checker, thesaurus, undo and re-do, find and replace etc.

 

Block operations

 

Selecting (highlighting) a block of text

The purpose of selecting text is to enable the user perform a number of editing or formatting operations on the selected block of text. Microsoft Word presents the user with a number of ways for selecting a block of text. You can either select a block of text using the mouse or keyboard.

 

  Selecting with a mouse

  1. To select a word, place the insertion pointer on the word then, double Click it.
  2. To select a sentence, positions the mouse pointer at the left margin until it changes to a right arrow, and then click once.
  3. To select a paragraph, place the pointer at the beginning or end of the paragraph. Notice that the pointer changes to I-beam. Now drag the I-beam over the text to be selected and release the mouse button at the end of the text you wish to work on.

 

Selecting with the keyboard

  1. To select one word, move the insertion pointer to the beginning or End of the word then press Shift+Ctrl+Right or left arrow.
  1. To select one line, press Shift+Up or Shift+Down arrow key. Alternatively, move the insertion point to the end or beginning of The line then press Shift+Home or end keys respectively.

3.To select an entire page; press Shift+Page Down or Shift+Page Up. 4. To select the entire document, press Ctrl+A or place the cursor at the beginning of the document then press Shift+Ctrl+End.

 

Deleting text

  1. To delete a character or a word from the right to the left, place the insertion pointer on the right of the word then press the backspace key.
  2. To delete a character to the right of the cursor position, place the Insertion pointer on the left of the word then press the Delete key.

 

To delete a block of text

  1. Highlight the text to be deleted.
  2. Press the Delete key.

 

Restoring deleted text

To restore text that has just been deleted in the current word processing session: click the Edit menu, then the Undo command

 

Copying and moving text and objects

Copying means creating a duplicate of text or an object while moving means changing the position of text or an object in a document. In Microsoft Word, you can copy or move a block of text.

To copy a block of text:

  1. Highlight the text,
  2. Click Edit, then Copy or simply click the Copy button on the standard Toolbar.
  3. Position the insertion pointer where you want to copy the text,
  4. Click Edit then Paste or simply click the Paste button on the standard toolbar.

 

NB: To use the keyboard shortcut keys, press Ctrl + C to copy, then Ctrl + V to paste

 

To move text and objects

  1. Highlight the text,
  2. Click Edit, then Cut or simply click the Cut button (whose icon is a Pair of scissors) from the standard toolbar.
  3. Position the insertion pointer where you want the text to be placed,
  4. Click Edit then Paste or click the Paste button on the standard toolbar.

 

NB: To use the keyboard shortcut keys, press Ctrl + X to cut, then Ctrl + V to paste

Typing modes

There are two typing modes in a word processor that assist the user in typing or editing text documents. These are:

  1. Insert mode.
  2. Overtype/typeover mode.

 

Insert mode

This is the default mode in most word processors. In this case when text is inserted between words or characters it pushes the existing text away without replacing it.

 

Typeover mode.

In this case, when text is typed between existing words or characters, the new text automatically replaces the existing text by deleting it. To switch between typeover and insert mode, simply press the insert key on the keyboard or double click the OVR label on the status bar.

 

Find and replace

When you need to search for a word or phrase in a large document, use the Find command. In case you wish to replace a word or phrase, use the Replace option.

 

Find

  1. Click Edit menu, then click Find command. The find dialog box appears.
  2.  Type the text or phrase you want to search for then click FindNext
  3.  Step 2 can be repeated if you wish to find other occurrences of the same word or phrase. Click OK when a message appears telling you that Microsoft Word has finished searching the document. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

 

NB: You can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F to find. Some search options:

 

You can specify search options by clicking the more buttons to display them. They include:

  1. Match case: This identifies only text that matches in case with that in the find what box e.g. it will not find the word DEEN if you typed deen and selected the match case option.
  2. Whole Word: Searches for a word or phrase that is whole. If it is part of another word it will not be found, e.g. the word ever will not be found in words like however, whenever etc. during the search.
  3. Use wildcards: Wildcards are special symbols such as * and? That are used to represent a set of words with certain characters in common e.g. names like Jeff, Joe, Jane can be represented using a wildcard as J* which means all names starting with J.
  4. Like: Searches for words, which are similar in pronunciation e.g., fare and fair.

 

Replace command

Click Edit menu then Replace command. The dialog box appears.

 

Type the name you want to replace in the Find what box and the one that will replace it in the Replace with box. Click the Find next button to find the next occurrence of the word then click Replace button to replace it. To replace all the occurrences of the word in the document at once, click the Replace all button.

Proofreading

Proofreading refers to checking whether the document has typographical or grammar errors. Microsoft Word has tools for proofreading e.g. spelling and grammar checker, Thesaurus, Autocomplete and Autocorrect.

 

Spelling and grammar checker

The spelling and grammar checker is an inbuilt tool that helps the user to correct spelling errors and incorrect grammar structures. However, the checker can only recognise errors of those words whose correct spelling is in its dictionaries. A correctly spelt word used wrongly cannot be detected hence the document should be proofread just before and after printing. To check the accuracy of spelling and grammar:

  1. Click Tools menu option.
  2. Click Spelling and grammar on the drop down menu. The spelling

And grammar checker dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1.14.

Words that do not match in the custom dictionary are highlighted for correction. The lower plane of the dialog box suggests to the user with a list of suggested correct words.

  1. Either choose one of the following buttons:

(a) Change to correct only the highlighted incorrect word.

(b) Change all to correct all the occurrences of the misspelled word.

(c) Ignore to retain the highlighted and continue. For example, although a word like jembe may not be in the custom dictionary, in the Kenyan context, the word is acceptable therefore if highlighted, click Ignore.

(d) Ignore all to retain all the occurrences of the same word or phrase in the document from another language e.g. a Kiswahili

(e) Click Add to add the word into the custom dictionary.

 

In case you want to undo the changes made, click on the Undo button at the lower bottom of the spelling and grammar dialog box.

 

NB: You can close the spelling and grammar dialog box even if the process is not complete by choosing Close.

 

Using the thesaurus

This is an editing tool that helps the user find words or phrases with similar meaning (synonyms) or opposite meaning (antonyms) to the one selected.

To use the Thesaurus:

 

  1. Select a word or a phrase.
  2. Click Tools, and then point to Language.
  3. Click Thesaurus to see Figure 1.15 displayed on the screen.
  4. For synonyms, under the heading Replace with Synonym, choose an alternative word phrase you intend to use as replacement for the selected text.
  5. To replace a word or a phrase with an antonym, select the word or phrase with antonym enclosed in brackets.
  6. Click Replace.

 

Autocomplete The auto complete feature displays a complete word when the user types the first few characters of the word. This enables the user to type faster by simply accepting the suggested word if indeed he/she intend to type it. To accept the suggestion, simply press the Enter key, and continue typing other word or phrases

The figure shows an auto text that automatically completes Dear sir or Madam text entries.

 

To turn auto complete on/off

  1. Click Insert menu and point to Auto text. A dropdown list is displayed.
  2. Click AutoText.
  3. Select or clear the Show AutoComplete tip for AutoText and dates Check box
  4. Type in an Auto text in the Enter AutoText entries here text box then Click Add.
  5. Click Close.

Autocorrect

The auto correct feature automatically detects wrongly spelled or capitalised words and replaces them with the correct word. However, the settings of auto correct are user defined e.g. if a person keeps on typing the word certain as certain, set the auto correct feature to replace the later with the former. Figure 1.18 shows the auto correct feature.

 

To turn auto correct on/off

  1. Click Tools menu, then AutoCorrect.
  2. To turn on the spelling checker corrections, select the Replace text as you type check box, and then select the Automatically use suggestions from the spelling checker check box.
  3. To turn off the spelling checker corrections, click Automatically use suggestions from the spelling checker check Box at the bottom of the dialog box
  4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Undo and redo

Undo: It reverses the last command that was issued in Order to revert back to the previous state. To undo, click Edit then Undo command.

Redo: It does the last undone action. To redo, click Edit, then Redo Command.

 

Formatting a document

Formatting refers to applying various styles or features to enhance the document’s appearance. You can format text, a paragraph or a page.

Text formatting

Text formatting refers to features such as changing fonts (type, style and size of characters), changing text color, underlining, bolding Italicising etc. You can use either the formatting tools bar or the Format menu to underline, bold, etc.

 

To format existing text using the format menu

  1. Highlight the text to be formatted
  2. From Format menu, click the Font command. A dialog box with all Text formatting features is displayed
  3. To change font type and size, where necessary scroll down the Font list box then click the font required, for example Verdana font style would appears as Verdana. To increase the font size, where necessary, scroll down the Size list box and select the required size e.g. 12 points (pt). A point is 1/72 of an inch in height. 72 points i.e. 72/72 is equivalent to 1 inch For example “Verdana” is in Times New Roman 16 points and “Verdana” is in Verdana 16 points.
  4. Bolding text: Bolding makes the selected text appear darker than the rest of the text. To bold text:
  • Activate the font dialog box.
  • From the font dialog box, select Bold.
  1. Underline text: Underlining refers to placing a line at the base or bottom of a word or a phrase. To underline:

(a) Activate the font dialog box.

(b) Click the down arrow at the right of Underline style and select. The underline style required e.g. single, double, dashed etc.

  1. Italicising text: To italicise is to make the text slant forward.

(a) To italicise activate the font dialog box.

(b) Click Italic.

  1. Changing the font color: In most cases, the font default color is black. However you can change the font color for example to red, green, blue etc. To change the font color,

(a) Activate the font dialog box

(b) Click the down arrow at the right of font color list box and

Select the color of your choice.

 

Using formatting toolbar

As mentioned earlier, the formatting toolbar lets the user easily format text by clicking the required format button. To format some text, highlight it first then click a command on the toolbar.

For example to bold text, highlight it then click then bolding command (B) on the formatting toolbar.

 

Paragraph formatting

 

Text alignment

Text alignment refers to how text is lined up on the page relative to the left, right or center of the page. There are four ways in which text can be aligned namely left aligned, centered, right aligned and justified.

 

Left alignment

Lines of text are lined up evenly along the left margin but unevenly at The right margin. This is the default alignment. To align left,

  1. Highlight your text.
  2. Simply click the left alignment button. Alternatively click format, Paragraph. And select left from the alignment list box as shown in Figure 1.20.
  3. Click OK. To apply the choice.

 

Right alignment

This is opposite of left alignment. Lines of text are lined up evenly along the right margin but unevenly at the left margin. To align right,

  1. Highlight your text
  2. Simply click the right alignment button. Alternatively click Format, Paragraph. select Rigl1t from alignment list box, then click OK..

Center alignment

The lines of text are centered unevenly between the left and right margins.

To center text,

 

  1. Highlight your text,
  2. Simply click the Center, button. Alternatively click format, paragraph,

Select centered from alignment list box, then click OK.

Justification

Lines of text are arranged evenly along the left and right margin.

To justify text,

  1. Highlight your text
  2. Simply click the Justify alignment button. Alternatively click Format,

Paragraph, select Justify from Alignment list box, then click OK.

 

Change case

When typing a text, there are a number of cases the user may intend to apply in order to create contrast within the text. These are:

  1. Sentence case: All the first characters in a sentence are in uppercase (Capitalised).
  2. Lowercase: All characters appear in lowercase.
  3. Uppercase: All characters appear in uppercase.
  4. Title case: All the first characters of each word in a sentence appear in uppercase.
  5. Toggle case: It changes upper cases to lowercases and vice versa.

 

Figure 1.21 shows a dialog box for change case.

 

To change case in an existing text;

  1. Highlight the text.
  2. From the format menu, click Change case.
  3. From change case dialog box, select the case type to be applied.
  4. Click OK.

Drop caps

There are times when you wish to attract the reader’s attention by making the first character in a sentence large, taking more space in the next line. Such kind of a character is said to be “dropped”.

To apply drop cap;

  1. Highlight the first character in the sentence
  2. From the Format menu, click Drop Cap. Drop cap dialog box appears
  3. Click Dropped or In Margin
  4. Select font in case you wish to apply a certain font to the dropped Cap
  5. Specify the number of lines to drop.
  6. Click OK

Indenting paragraphs

Indentation refers to moving the text away from the margin. You can indent the first sentence in a paragraph (first line), the whole paragraph (full indent) or the rest of the text except the first line (hanging indentations).

First line indent

  1. Select the paragraph to be indented
  2. From the format menu click paragraph. Paragraph properties dialog box appears
  3. Click the down arrow in the list box under Special and select First Line.
  1. Specify by how far the paragraph is to be indented from the margin

In the by text box

Click OK to apply the indent and close the dialog box. The paragraph will be indented

NB: You can also indent the first line by positioning the cursor at the beginning of the paragraph then press the Tab key.

Hanging Indent

  1. Select the paragraph to be indented
  2. From format menu, click Paragraph.
  3. Click the down arrow in the list box under Special and select Hanging. 4. Specify by how far the paragraph is to be indented from the margin In the by text box
  4. Click OK to apply the indent and close the dialog box. The paragraph will be indented

Full indent                     ­

  1. Select the paragraph to be indented or position the cursor anywhere in the paragraph
  2. From the formatting tool bars, click the Increase or Decrease indent Button

Setting tabs

Tabs are used to indent the first line of a paragraph or create columnar data. By default the tab stop is set at 0.5 of an inch. To change the default setting:

  1. From the format menu, click Tabs
  2. Enter a new value for tab stop in the Tab stop Position box.
  3. Choose the type of tab either left, center or right.
  1. If need be specify the Tab leader option
  2. Click the Set button then OK.

Setting tabs using the ruler

The easiest way to set tabs is by using the ruler. On the left comer of the horizontal ruler is a tab alignment button that lets the user select the type of tab. Figure 1.28 shows various tab alignment buttons, while Table 1.1 gives an explanation of each button.

To set the tab using the ruler;

  1. Click on the tab button to choose the required tab type. Notice that the tab type keeps on changing as you click the tab button.
  2. Set the tab stop by clicking where you want it to be on the ruler.
  3. Drag the tab stop

 

Button Name Purpose
Left tab Text is left aligned
Center tab Text is centered
Bar tab Inserts a vertical line at
    Tab stop and align text to
    The right of the line
. Decimal tab Text is aligned at decimal
  Character
Right tab Text is right aligned

 

Table 1.1 Examples of tabs

 

Line and character spacing

Line spacing refers to the vertical distance between lines of text. The default line spacing is single spacing. This type of spacing accommodates the characters in a text leaving a small extra space between lines. Character spacing on the other hand refers to the space between the characters in the text.

 

To change line spacing:

  1. Highlight the text,
  2. From format menu, click Paragraph to display the paragraph dialog Box.
  3. Click the down arrow from the Line Spacing list box and select the Type of spacing required e.g. double, 1.5, at least etc.
  4. Click OK to effect the changes. To change character spacing:
  5. Highlight the text
  6. From Format menu, click Font.
  7. Click the Character Spacing tab
  8. Adjust the spacing as required
  9. Click OK.

Bullets and numbering

Bullets and numbers are used to mark steps in a procedure or items in a list.

To apply bullets and numbers in a list:

  1. Select the list.
  2. From the Format menu, click Bullets and numbering. A dialog box appears.
  3. Do one of the following;

(a) To apply bullets, click the Bulleted tab.

(b) To apply independent numbers click the Numbered tab.

(c) To apply outlined numbered list, click Outline Numbered. Tab

  1. Click OK to effect the changes and close the dialog box.

 

Section breaks

A break is used to identify where a section, a column or a page ends and the beginning of next. This allows the user to apply more than one paragraph or page format in the same document especially when it comes to page layout, size, different margins etc.

 

To insert a section break

  1. Position the text cursor in the document where the break is to be inserted.
  2. Click Insert then. Break.
  1. From the Break dialog box select the type of section break to insert e.g. page break.
  1. Click OK.

 

Formatting pages

Inserting page breaks

A page break identifies the end of one page and the beginning of the next. NofQ1ally, Word automatically inserts a new page after the current. One is full. However, there may be a need to start a new page even if the. Current one is not full.

 

To insert page breaks:

  1. Position the pointer where the break is to be inserted.
  2. Click Insert then Break.
  3. From the Break dialog box
  4.  Click Page break then OK.

 

Creating columns

To, create columns on existing text:

  1. Highlight the text
  2. From Format menu, click Columns to display the dialog box
  3. In the columns dialog box, select the number of columns or type in the Number of columns text box
  4. In the Width and spacing boxes, specify the column widths and space between columns
  5. Click OK

Page setup

Page setup options let the user specify the size of the margins, paper size, paper source and layout.

 

Setting margins

Margins are blank spaces around the edges of the page. Only text and objects inside the margins are printable.

 

To set up margins:

  1. Click the File menu then Page setup. Page setup dialog box appears
  2. Click the Margins tab.
  3. Enter the values for the left, right, top and bottom margins in the respective boxes.
  4. Click OK.

 

Setting the paper size

By default, the paper size may be either Letter or A4. An A4 paper has dimensions 210 mm x 297 mm

 

To specify a different paper size

  1. From the File menu click Page setup
  2. In the page setup dialog box click the Paper size tab.
  3. Select the size of paper required from the paper size list. If your size is different from the ones provided, click Custom size and enter dimensions in the height and width boxes.
  4. Click OK.

Specifying page orientation

The term page orientation refers to the positioning of the page in relation to the text. The two available orientations are:

Portrait: text and graphics are printed with the longest side vertically upright. For example, on an A4 piece of paper, the 210 mm edges are at the bottom and top.

 

Landscape: With landscape, text and graphical objects are placed with the longest side of the page placed horizontally and the lines of text printed parallel. For example, to create a timetable on an A4 page, the 297 mm side should be horizontal.

 

To select the orientation:

  1. From File menu, choose Page setup.
  2. Click on the Paper size tab and a dialog box comes on the screen.
  3. Select the orientation required then clicks the OK button.

 

Page layout

This option lets the user specify how text will be placed on the page from the margins. By default, text starts from the top margin.

 

To change the layout

  1. From File menu, choose Page setup. The dialog box Appears.
  2. Click on the Layout tab.
  3. From the Vertical alignment tab, select the alignment required then click OK.

 

Inserting headers and footers

Headers, footers and page numbers make it easy to locate information. Headers are few words placed at the top of every page while footers appear at the bottom. To insert headers and footers:

  1. Click on the. Headers and Footers from the View menu
  2. In the text boxes that appear, type a header using the top text box or a footer using the bottom text box or even both if you are to insert both a header and footer.

Inserting page numbers

To give your document page numbers:

  1. From the Insert menu, click Page numbers to display the dialog box
  2. In the Position box, specify where you want the page numbers to be inserted.
  3. In the alignment box, specify whether the number is to be on the right, left, center, inside or outside
  4. Use the Format button to choose the number format, i.e. 1,2,3,…, A,B, C etc. You can start from any page number by using Start at box

 

Creating and editing tables

 

Creating tables

A table is a feature in Microsoft Word made up of rows and columns that is used to organise and enhance display of information.

 

Creating a new table

. .

You can create a table either by using the Insert Table command from tables menu, or by using Draw Table tool that resembles a pencil to create more complex tables.

 

To create a table using the insert table command;

  1. Click Tables menu, position the pointer on Insert, then click Table
  2. In the Insert table dialog box displayed, specify the number of rows and columns.
  3. Click OK. The table will be displayed on the screen and you can start entering data in it.

NB: You can insert a table by clicking the table button on the standard toolbar, then drag to select the number of rows and columns.

 

To create a table using the drawing tool:

  1. Click Tables menu, then Draw table or simply click the Draw table button from the standard toolbar. The mouse pointer changes to a pencil symbol
  2. Drag the pointer to draw the outline of the table
  3. Fill in the table with rows and columns by dragging the pointer as you would draw using an ordinary pencil.

 

Formatting and editing a table

 

Inserting rows and columns

To insert a row:

  1. Place the cursor where you want to insert a row
  2. Click Table, point Insert then click Row above or Row below.

 

To insert a column:

  1. Place the cursor where you want to insert a column
  2. Click Table, point Insert then click Column to left then Column to the Right.

 

Adjusting the column width:

  1. Position the mouse pointer on the row or column boundary until the mouse pointer changes to an arrowed cross.
  2. Drag the boundary to the required size.

 

Deleting rows, column or cells

  1. Select the rows or columns to be deleted.
  2. From Table menu, point Delete, then Columns, Rows or Cells.

 

Merging cells in a table

This refers to combining more than one cell in a table. To merge cells:

  1. Select cells to be merged
  2. From Tables, click Merge cells.

 

Splitting cells in a table

This refers to subdividing a cell or cells into more cells. To split cells:

  1. Select cells to be split
  2. From Tables, click Split cells. A dialog box appears that lets you specify the number of rows and columns that the selected cells will be split.

 

Formatting table borders and shading

Word provides the user with automatic formatting feature that lets you choose border styles and shading.

 

To format a table:

  1. From Table menu, click Table AutoFormat.
  2. In the formats list box, select the format you want. Note that the format you choose applies to borders, shading font and colour.
  3. Click Ok to apply the effects.

NB: You can also format a table by using the table’s toolbar. If the toolbar is not displayed, click view point to toolbars then click tables and Borders.

 

 

Table conversions

With convert feature in Microsoft Word, you can convert a table to lines of text and vice versa.

 

To convert a table to text

  1. Select the entire table or row and columns you want to convert to text.
  2. From table menu, point to convert then click table to text. A dialog box is displayed that requires you to specify how the text will be separated after conversion
  3. In the separate text with box enter or select the character to be used as a separator.
  4. Click ok

 

To convert text to table:

  1. Select the text that you want to convert to a table.
  2. From table menu, point convert then click text to table .A dialog box is displayed that requires you to specify the number of rows and of columns
  3. From Separate text at, specify whether the table will be defined by paragraphs, commas, Tabs or other characters.
  4. Click OK. .

 

Importing tables

Microsoft Word lets you import tables from other applications or an existing file. To import a table,

  1. Click the Insert menu then Objects. A dialog box appears
  2. From the Object type select the type of object to insert e.g. Adobe table.
  3. The program in which the table was created in starts and lets you choose a table from it and return back to Microsoft Word. Alternatively click Create from file. This lets you browse for a file that contains the table you wish to insert.
  4. Click OK to insert the table.

 

Performing arithmetic calculations in a table

It is possible to perform mathematical calculations such as sum, product and count, if a table has numerical figures.

 

To perform calculations:

  1. Click the cell in which you want the result to be placed.
  2. From the Table menu, click Formula. A formula dialog box is displayed.
  3. Type the formula you want or select from the Paste function box. For example, to add figures in a row or column, click SUM. The function in Table 1.2 below that calculates the total is =SUM(ABOVE). The word “ABOVE”. in brackets is called the argument of the formula and tells Microsoft Word which cells in the table are to be worked on.

Sorting

In Microsoft Word you can sort a list of text, numbers and dates in ascending or descending order.

To sort a list or table:

 

  1. Highlight the text list or table you want to sort.
  2. From the Table menu, click Son.
  3. Select the type of data to be used when sorting i.e. Text, Number or Date.
  4. Click either Ascending or decending
  5. Click OK.

 

Mail merge document

Mail merge is the process of generating personalised letters or documents by combining a main document, e.g. a letter, with an existing data source such as the address book. Therefore in mail merge, the three files created are:

  1. The primary file (main document)
  2. The secondary file (Data source)
  3. Merged file

To create the main document,

 

1 From the file menu, select New to create a new document. You can also open or retrieve an existing document.

  1. On the Tools menu, click mail merge to display a dialog box.

3 Click create button, to select the type of document needed e.g. form .letters. Select the active window as the main document this means that the currently running document will be the form letter that will be later merged with a data source to produce individualised letters.

The next step is now to create a data source.

  1. Click Get Data. To use an existing list of names and addresses, click

Open Data. Source To use existing addresses from an electronic address book, click on Use Address Book. To create a new list of names and addresses, first choose the necessary fields from the create data source box then save the record structure. A message appears asking you whether you want to edit the data source or the main document choose one then the Next.

  1. With the main document open, spot the mail merge toolbar on the screen. Position the text cursor where you want to insert merge fields. Use the insert field’s button to insert merge fields in the document

Merging the document

Once you finish inserting merge fields from the data source in the main document, you are now ready to merge. There are several merge options:

 

To merge to a new document

Click the Merge to new document icon on the mail merge toolbar.

 

Merging to printer

Click the .Merge to printer, icon on the mail merge toolbar. Before you merge to a printer or other device, you may want to preview the appearance of the merged documents. For example, you can preview the merged documents one at a time. You can also collect the merged documents into a new document, so you can review and personalise the documents.

 

Preview merged documents

Before you print the documents, ensure that you’ve inserted merge fields in the main document and selected a data source. To preview, click anywhere in the main document, and then click View Merged Data on the Mail Merge toolbar.

 

Microsoft Word displays information from the first data record in place of the merge fields.

 

Send merged documents via e-mail or fax

Click the merge button on the Mail merge toolbar Select e-mail or fax in the merge to box. Click the Setup button to specify the e-mail addresses or faxing number then click the merge button. The internet connection wizard starts and if your computer is properly configured, the mail merged document will be sent.

Inserting graphics

 

Working with graphics

The term graphics refers to non-text images generated by a compute! This includes photographs, drawings and graphs. Graphics present information in a form that is easy to understand.

 

You can insert a graphical object from Microsoft Clip Gallery, a scanner or by using drawing tools available in Microsoft Word.

 

Inserting a clip art or a picture from clip gallery:

  1. Position the insertion pointer where you want your object to be inserted,
  2. On the insert menu, point to picture then click clipart Click on the tabs to select on the category of objects i.e. clip art, pictures, sound or videos. See Figure 1.42.
  3. Double click on the object you want or click it once then click the insert button.
  4. Use the object place holders to resize your object. If you place the mouse pointer on one of these holders, it turns into a two headed arrow, hold down the mouse button and drag to increase or reduce the object size
  5. Click anywhere outside the object to remove the holders.
  6. To move you object to another position, click inside the object. The pointer turns into an arrowhead cross. Hold down the mouse button and drag your image to a new location.

Fig. 1.42: A clip art image

Inserting an image from a scanner

The computer must be connected to a scanner to complete this procedure. A scanner is a data capture device that transforms a hand copy or real graphical object into digital form.

 

To scan an object:

  1. Position the insertion pointer where you want your picture to appear,
  2. from the insert menu, point to Picture and then click from scanner or Camera.
  3. To scan, follow the instructions that come with your scanner.
  4. When the image appears on the screen you can edit and format it as required the same way you would with a clipart.

 

Inserting a picture from another file

  1. Position the insertion pointer where you want your picture  placed,
  2.  From the insert menu, point to Picture, then click “From file
  1. Locate the file that contain the image you want to insert eg from your floppy disk, from a compact disk etc.
  2. Select the object you want to insert

5 Then click the Insert button.

6 When the image appears on the screen you can edit and format it as required the same way you would with a clipart.

 

Editing and formatting pictures

 

To format or edit a picture:

Microsoft Word provides the user with a picture editing toolbar that lets you adjust the brightness, contrast, change it to black and white or grayscale and crop the image. Cropping refers to hiding the unwanted details so that they do not come out when printing.

 

To display the picture toolbar, click on View menu, point to toolbars then select Picture. The picture toolbar has buttons that enable a person to format a picture to format a picture, click it to select it then use the commands on the picture toolbar.

 

Drawing an object using MS Word drawing tools

Microsoft Word provides the user with basic drawing tools such as polygons, lines, a circle, stars and banners, call outs and many others. If the drawings toolbar is not displayed, click on View menu, toolbars then click on Drawing. The toolbar will be displayed which a button has labeled Auto shapes, an arrow, a line, square and a circle

 

To draw a line, a circle an arrow or a rectangle:

  1. Click on the appropriate shape button. The pointer changes to a plus sign.
  2. Place the pointer where you want to draw that shape and drag to the required size.

 

To draw an object using the Auto shapes:

  1. Click the Auto shapes button. A menu is displayed showing categories of shapes you can choose from
  2. Point to the category required then select the type of object you wish to draw
  3. Place the pointer where you want to draw that shape and drag to the required size.

 

Editing and formatting a drawn object

You can resize, move, fill color and change the drawing outline.

 

To resize or move a drawing.

  1. Click anywhere inside it. The place holders appear.
  2. To move it, hold down the mouse button and drag.
  3. To resize it, place the pointer at one of the place holders and drag.

 

To fill the object with color and fill effects:

1    Click the object. The place holders appear.

2    Click the down arrow of fill color button, the one that looks like a bucket pouring ink.

3 Select the color you want applied. To fill the drawing with texture, gradient or pattern, click the Effects button. From the resulting dialog box, select the appropriate fill effect.

Printing a document

 

Printing in Microsoft Word

Because the main purpose of any word processor is to prepare documents for printing, this cannot be accomplished without a printer. The choice of a printer depends on the quality of hardcopy desired. Before you print, it is very important that you preview you document to confirm that no details are outside the printable area and that the document layout is okay.

 

Using print preview

In Microsoft Word, to view your document before printing proceed as follows:

  1. From file menu, select print preview the mouse pointer changes into a symbol that resembles a magnifying glass. You can click on the mouse button inside the document to increase or reduce the size of the view.
  2. Click the close button or Esc key to return to your document.

 

To print:

 

  1. From file menu click on print A dialog box appears where you can specify:
  • The type of the printer installed in your computer other than the default printer.
  • Whether to print the whole document or a range in the Page range box,

(c) Number of copies to print per page in the Number of copies box then,

  1. Click OK to start printing.

 

SPREADSHEETS MS-EXCEL

 

Chapter outline

 

2.1 Definition of spreadsheet

2.2 Components of a spreadsheet

2.3 Application areas of a spreadsheet

2.4 Creating a worksheet/workbook using Microsoft Excel

2.5 Cell data types

  1. Cell referencing
  2. 7 Basic functions and formulae

2.8 Editing a worksheet

2.9 Worksheet formattin2.10 Data management

2.11 Charts/graphs

2.12 Printing worksheets

 

2.1 Definition of a spreadsheet

A spreadsheet is essentially a ledger sheet that lets you enter, edit and manipulate numeric data. There are two types of spreadsheets namely:

  1. The manual spreadsheet.
  2. The electronic spreadsheet.

A manual spreadsheet is the most commonly used type by book keepers as a ledger book with many sheets of papers divided into rows and columns on which various amounts of money are entered manually using a pen or pencil. You can visit your bursar’s office and request to see a ledger sheet.

 

An electronic spreadsheet on the other hand is prepared using a computer program that enables the user to enter values in rows and columns similar to the ones of the manual spreadsheet and to manipulate them mathematically using formulae.         ‘

 

In this book, the word spreadsheet shall be used to refer to the electronic spreadsheet. ‘.

Advantages of Using Electronic Spreadsheets over Manual Spreadsheet

 

  1. The electronic spreadsheet utilizes the powerful aspects of the computer like speed, accuracy and efficiency to enable the user quickly accomplish tasks.
  2. The electronic spreadsheet offers a larger virtual sheet for data entry and manipulation. For example the largest paper ledger you can get is one that does not exceed 30 columns and 51 rows while with an electronic spreadsheet, the least ledger has at least 255 columns and 255 rows!
  3. The electronic spreadsheet utilizes the large storage space on computer storage devices to save and retrieve documents.
  4. The electronic spreadsheet enables the user to produce neat work because the traditional paper, pencil, rubber and calculator are put aside. All the work is edited on the screen and a final clean copy is printed. With a handwritten spreadsheet, neatness and legibility depends on the writer’s hand writing skills.
  5. Electronic spreadsheets have better document formatting capabilities. 6. Electronic spreadsheets have inbuilt formulae called functions that enable the user to quickly manipulate mathematical data.
  6. An electronic spreadsheet automatically adjusts the result of a formula if the values in worksheet are changed. This is called the automatic recalculation feature. For a manual sheet, changing one value means rubbing the result and writing the correct one again.

 

Examples of spreadsheets

  1. VisiCalc: This was the first type of spreadsheet to be developed for personal computers.
  2. Lotus 1-2-3: This is integrated software with spreadsheet module graphs and database. 3. Microsoft Excel
  3. VP-Planner etc.

In this book, the spreadsheet that will be considered in details is Microsoft Excel.

Components of a spreadsheet

A spreadsheet has three components  ­

  1. Worksheet. /
  2. Database.
  3. Graphs.

Worksheet

This is the component in which data values are entered. It is made up of rows and columns. The intersection between a row and a column is called a cell. A row is a horizontal arrangement of cells while a column is a vertical arrangement of cells. Each row is labeled with a number while each column is labeled with a letter as shown in the Figure 2.1. Each cell is referenced using the column label followed by the row label e.g. cell B3 has the value 20. A group of many worksheets make up a workbook.

 

A             B       C          D        E         F

1                      
2                      
3   20                  
4                      
5       I              

 

Fig. 2.1: A Worksheet

 

Database

Data values can be entered in the cells of the spreadsheet and managed by special Excel features found on the Data menu. These features were incorporated in Excel but they actually belong to database management software. One of such feature is filtering records, using forms, calculating subtotals, data validation pivot tables and pivot chart reports.

 

If the data values for the same entity (related values) are entered on the same row, they form a record. Hence a worksheet can be manipulated to some extent as a database that has data records entered in it. Figure 2.2 shows a worksheet having two records, Joy and Jeff.

 

A              B             c           D           EF1

      1 Name IDNo. Age Nationality
      2 Joy 123445 25 Kenyan
      3 Jeff 125675 35 Ugandan
      4        

 

Fig. 2.2: A spreadsheet with records

 

NB: A spreadsheet file is structured in such a way that it can be visualised as a table of records. That is why such a ‘file can be imported into a database program as will be discusses later in databases.

 

Graphs

A graph is a pictorial representation of the base data on a worksheet. Most spreadsheets refer to graphs as charts. A chart enables the user to present complex data elements from a worksheet in a simple easy to understand format. Examples of charts are pie charts, line charts and bar charts. As shall be discussed later, it is easy to generate charts when working with a spreadsheet program. Figure 2.3 shows an example of a pie chart.

 

2.3 Application areas of a spreadsheet

 

Statistical analysis

Spreadsheets provide a set of data analysis tools that can be used to save steps when developing complex statistical or engineering analyses. The user is usually expected to provide the appropriate data and parameters for each analysis. The statistical tool then uses appropriate automated statistical or engineering functions and then displays results in an output table. Some of the tools generate charts in addition to the output tables.

 

Because most of these tools are complex, the user needs to have the statistical background knowledge before attempting to use the tools. Examples of some simple statistical functions include the following:

  1. Average: This is used to calculate the mean of a set of values.
  2. Median: This is used to return the value in the middle of a set of values.

 

For example a set of values may be composed of:

 

10   20    30   40    50     60.

 

The average of the set is 35 and its median is also 35. The median is found by taking the average of the two numbers at the centre of the set, in this case 30 and 40.

 

Accounting

Many accountants find the spreadsheet a useful tool to use in recording daily transactions and keeping of financial records. Spreadsheets provide a user friendly environment for financial management and they come with inbuilt functions that make accounting tasks easier. For example, the spreadsheet can be used by accountants to do the following:

  1. To track the value of assets over time (depreciation and appreciation)
  2. To calculate profits
  3. To prepare budgets

 

Other formula like sum, average, product etc. enables the accountant to carry out his daily work without any problem.

 

Data management

A spreadsheet enables neat arrangement of data into tabular structure. Related data can be typed on the same worksheet. However, when data is on different worksheets, the worksheets can be linked to enhance accessibility.

 

Data management functions include sorting, filtering (displaying only the required items) and using forms to enter and view records.

 

Spreadsheets enable the user to create, edit, save, retrieve and print worksheet data and records.

 

Forecasting (“What if” analysis)

The automatic recalculation feature enables the use of “What if’ analysis technique. This involves changing the value of one of the arguments in a formula to see the difference the change would make on the result of the calculation. For example, a formula to calculate a company’s profit, margin may be as follows:

 

Profit =, (Total units sold x sale price) – (Total units bought x cost price) – Operating ‘expenses.

A sales manager in the company c n ask the following question: What if sales increase by 20%, how much profit wills the company make? The manager substitutes the total units sold value with one that is 20% higher and the spreadsheet automatically displays the new profit. A traditional analysis method would require a different work sheet to be prepared. Therefore, this method can be used for financial forecasting, budgeting, stock portfolio analysis, cost analysis, cash flow etc.

Creating a worksheet/workbook using Microsoft Excel

To start Microsoft Excel, click Start button, point to Programs and then select Microsoft Excel from the programs menu This procedure may vary slightly depending on the version of Excel you are using or the computer’s hardware and software configuration.

The Windows environment allows a person to place shortcuts to a program’s executable (.exe) file in various places like the desktop. If the Excel shortcut is on the desktop, simply double click it to start the application.

 

The Microsoft Excel application window opens as shown in the Figure 2.5. Make sure that you can be able to identify all the labeled parts of the Microsoft Excel application window.

 

The Microsoft Excel application window

The Microsoft Excel application window is made up of the following components:

Title bar: It has the title of the application and control buttons for minimising, maximising and closing the application

The menu bar: It displays a list of menu options e.g. File, Edit, View etc. Clicking one of them displays a menu that has commands which can be selected in order to manipulate data in the spreadsheet.      ‘

Tool bars: The most common of these are the standard and formatting toolbars. The most important thing is to be able to identify each toolbar by its icons. The standard toolbar has shortcuts to some of the most commonly used menu commands like print, copy, paste and save. The formatting toolbar has shortcuts to the commonly used commands found on the format menu option

Formula bar: This is one of the most important components of the Microsoft Excel application window. It enables the user to enter or edit a formula or data in a cell. You can identify the formula bar because it has an equal sign (or fx). The name box to the left of the formula bar displays the position of the cell in which data or a formula is being entered which is also called the current cell. If the formula bar is not available, click on View menu then select Formula bars. A check mark appears on the left of the selected item to show that it is now displayed on the screen.

Cell pointer: It marks the position of the current cell or the insertion point. It is special cursors that is rectangular in shape and makes the current cell appear as if it has darker boundaries.

The Worksheet: Consists of cells, rows and columns. Data is entered here for manipulation.

Status bar: It shows the processing state of the application. For example, on its left is the word Ready which shows that the spreadsheet is ready to receive user commands.            ‘

 

Worksheet labels: These are usually of the format Sheet 1, Sheet 2 etc. A workbook may have several sheets. It is also possible to rename the sheets by right clicking on the labels then choosing rename command from the shortcut menu that appears. The active sheet (one being used) has its label appearing lighter in colour than the rest. To move to a particular sheet in the workbook, simply click its sheet label.

 

Vertical and horizontal scroll bars: Clicking the arrows at their ends moves the worksheet vertically and horizontally on the screen respectively.

 

Worksheet layout

The worksheet has the following components: Cells: An intersection between a row and a column.

Rows: Horizontal arrangement of cells. Columns: Vertical arrangement of cells.

Range: Is a group of rectangular cells that can be selected and manipulated as a block.

 

Navigating the Microsoft Excel screen

  1. Click cell D5. Notice that the cell pointer immediately moves to the cell and the name box reads D 5. Typing on the keyboard now inserts entries in cell D5 as long as the pointer is still there.
  2. Click letter A that heads the first column. Notice that the whole column is highlighted.
  3. Double click cell EIO. Notice that the text cursor forms in the cell and you can now type characters inside the cell. Also the status bar will now read enter which means that Microsoft Excel expects you to enter a value in the cell.
  4. Click the down arrow on the vertical scroll bar. The worksheet moves upwards on the screen. The opposite happens when you click the up arrow on the vertical scroll bar.
  5. Click the right button on the horizontal scroll bar. The worksheet moves to the left. The opposite happens when you click the left button on the horizontal scroll bar.
  6. Press the right arrow key on the keyboard. Notice that the cell pointer moves one column to the right on the same row. This can also be done by pressing the Tab key once.
  7. Press the left arrow key on the keyboard. Notice that the cell moves one column to the left on the same row. Pressing gives the same results.

 

  1. Press the up arrow key on the keyboard. Notice that the cell pointer moves one row up on the same column.
  2. Press the down arrow key on the keyboard. Notice that the cell pointer moves one row down on the same column.
  3. Press the end key. The status bar will display the message “END”. If you press the right arrow key, the cell pointer will move right to the last cell on the row. If the left up or down keys were to be pressed instead, the cell pointer would move to the last cell to the left, top or bottom respectively.

 

  1. Pressing Ctr1+Home moves the cell pointer to the first cell of the worksheet i.e. cell AI.

 

Creating a worksheet

At its simplest level, creating a worksheet consists of starting the spreadsheet program and entering data in the cells of the current worksheet. , However, a person can decide to create a worksheet either using the general format or from a specially preformatted spreadsheet document called a template.

 

Using the general format

When a spreadsheet program is running it will present the user with a new blank screen of rows and columns. The user can enter data in this worksheet and save it as a newly created worksheet. If this is not available then click File menu option and select the new command. The dialog box shown in Figure 2.8 will be displayed on the screen. On the General tab, double click the workbook icon. Enter data in the new worksheet created.

 

Using a template

Click File menu option then new command. On the spreadsheets solutions tab, double click the template that you wish to create. Figure 2.9 below shows some examples of templates that may be present for selection.

 

NB: If the template was saved previously on the hard disk, it will open as a new worksheet with all the preformatted features present allowing the user to enter some data. However, some templates may require the original program installation disk in order to be able to use them because they may not have been copied to the hard disk during program installation.

 

Editing a cell entry

Editing a cell means changing the contents of the cell. Before the contents in a cell can be. Changed, the cell must be selected by making it the current cell.

To edit a cell entry proceeds as follows:

.1. Move the cell pointer to the cell you wish to edit.

  1. Double click the formula bar for the text cursor to appear in the bar. The status bar message changes to edit
  2. Use the keyboard to delete and add contents to the formula bar then press enter key to apply. Click the save button on the standard toolbar to save the edited changes.

 

Selecting a range

As you have experienced with the previous two examples, working with one item at a time is tedious and time consuming. Using a range saves time when working with a large .amount of data.

 

A range is a rectangular arrangement of cells specified by the address of its top left and bottom right cells, ‘separated by a colon (:) ego Range AI:CIO is as shown in Figure 2.10.

Selecting multiple ranges

When using a mouse, you can select more than one range without removing the highlight from the previous. To do this:

Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl key while you click on the row header of the second range you want to highlight. What happens? Do you notice the difference when holding down the shift and the ctrl keys?

  1. Shift key will cause all columns/rows between the selected and the newly clicked cell to be highlighted.
  2. Ctrl selects individually clicked cells or range.

 

Hiding rows/columns

You can hide some rows or columns in order to see some details, which do not fit, on the screen. To do this:

  1. Highlight the columns/rows you want to hide
  2. Click format menu, point on row or column and click hide command.

 

Saving a worksheet

To save a worksheet, one has to save the workbook in which it belongs with a unique name on a storage device like a hard disk. The procedure below can be used to save a workbook:

  1. Click File menu option then select Save as’ command. Alternatively, click the save command on the standard toolbar. The save as dialog appears
  2. Select the location in which your workbook will be saved in the Save in box then type a unique name for the workbook in the File name box. Make sure that the option Microsoft Excel Workbook is selected under the save as type box.
  3. Click the Save button to save.

 

Retrieving a saved workbook

This means opening a workbook that was previously saved.

  1. Click File menu option then the Open command. Notice that the Open command has three dots (called ellipsis) indicating that a dialog box will open, as the user is required to provide additional information. Alternatively just click the Open command on the standard toolbar. The open dialog box appears on the screen.
  2. Click the Look in drop down list arrow and select the drive or folder where the workbook was saved. For example, if you saved in a diskette, insert it in the floppy drive then select 3 1/2-floppy (A:). A list of folders and files in the drive will appear in the list box.
  3. Double click the icon of the workbook you want and the worksheet will be displayed in the Microsoft Excel window. Notice that the cell pointer is in the same cell it was in when the worksheet was last Saved.

Closing a worksheet

Click File then Close command. This closes the worksheet but does not

Close the Excel spreadsheet program. Alternatively, click the; close button of the worksheet window

Exiting from the spreadsheet                 

Click File then Exit command. This closes not only the worksheet but also the spreadsheet program as well. Alternatively click the close button of the main application window.

Cell data types

There are four basic types of data used with spreadsheets:

  1. Labels
  2. Values,
  3. Formulae
  4. Functions.

 

Labels

Any text or alphanumeric characters entered in a cell are viewed as labels by the spreadsheet program. Labels are used as row or column headings usually to describe the contents of the row or column. For example, if a column will have names of people, the column header can be NAMES. Sometimes, numbers can be formatted so that they can be used as labels. To achieve this add an apostrophe just before the most significant digit in the number. For example, the number 1990 will be treated as numeric. if typed in a cell but’ 1990 will be treated as a label.

 

Labels are aligned to the left of the cell and cannot be manipulated mathematically.

 

Values

. ,

These are numbers that can be manipulated mathematically. They may include currency, date, numbers (0-9), special symbols or text that can be manipulated mathematically by the spreadsheet.

 

Formulae

These are user designed mathematical expressions that create a relationship between cells and return a value in a chosen cell. In Microsoft Excel, a formula must start with an equal sign. For example, the formula

=B3+D4 adds the contents ofB3 and D4 and returns the sum value in the current cell.

 

Excel formulae use cell addresses and the arithmetical operators like plus (+) for addition, minus (-) for subtraction, asterisk (*) for multiplication and forward slash (I) for division.

Using cell addresses, also called referencing, enables Microsoft Excel to keep calculations accurate and automatically recalculates results of a formula in case the value in a referenced cell is changed. This is called automatic recalculation.

 

Functions

These are inbuilt predefined formulae that the user can quickly use instead of having to create a new one each time a calculation has to be carried out Microsoft Excel has many of these formulae that cover the most common types of calculations performed by spreadsheets. To add the contents of cell B3 and D4 the sum function can be used as shown below:

 

= Sum (B3:D4)

 

2.6

 

Cell referencing

A cell reference identifies a cell or a range of cells on the worksheet and shows Microsoft Excel where to look for the values or data needed to use in a formula. With references, you can use data contained in different cells of a worksheet in one formula or use the value from one cell in several different formulae.

By default, Microsoft Excel uses the A 1 cell referencing style. This means that a cell is identified by its column label followed by the row number. However, the Rl Cl referencing style can be used. In this case, the cell is referencing by its row number followed by its column number. The table below gives a few examples of equivalent referencing using both styles.

A1 style R1C1 style
B2 R2C2
C10 R10C3
E20 R20C5

 

 

The RlCl style is useful when automating commonly repeated tasks using special recording programs called Macros.

 

Relative referencing

When performing tasks that require cell referencing, you can use formulae whose cell references keep on changing automatically depending on their position in the worksheet. This is called relative cell referencing. A good example would be if you type the formula =Al+Bl in cell Cl. If the same formula is copied to cell C2 the formula automatically changes to =A2+B2.

 

Absolute referencing

These are cell references that always refer to cells in a specific location

, of the worksheet even if they are copied from one cell to another. To make a formula absolute, add a dollar sign before the letter and/or number,

such as $B$lO. In this case, both the column and row references are absolute. .

 

Referencing using labels and names

Labels of columns and rows on a worksheet can be used to refer to the cells that fall within those columns and rows. It is possible to create a name that describes the cell or range then use it instead of having to specify a range with actual cell references. Such a descriptive name in a formula can make it readable and easier to understand its purpose. For example, the formula =SUM(SecondQuarterProfits) might be easier to identify than =SUM(AlO:C20). In this example, the name SecondQuarterProfits represents the rangeAlO:C20 on the worksheet. Names can also be used to represent formulae or values that do not change (constants). For example, you can use the name .Tariffs to represent the import tax amount (such as 7.0 percent) applied to imports.

 

To create a named range

To create a named range proceeds as follows: 1. Select the range to be named:

  1. Click inside the name box to move the text cursor inside. Delete the Cell reference that is there and type a name for the range.
  2. Press Enter key to apply. Figure 2.13 shows a worksheet range called sales that has values used in a formula to give the sum in cell C 11.

 

 

2.7 Basic functions and formulae

Formulae perform mathematical operations ranging from very simple arithmetic problems t9 complex scientific, financial and mathematical analysis.

 

Statistical functions.

  1. Average: It returns the average (mathematical mean) of a set of values which can be numbers, arrays or references that contain numbers. If the value 20 is in cell DIO and 30 in ElO then:

=Average(D lO:E 1 0) returns 25 as the average of the two values.

  1. Count: Counts the number of cells that contain values within a range e.g.

= count (AIO: EIO) many return a value 5 if all the cells have values.

  1. Max: It returns the largest value in a set of values. It ignores text and logical values e.g. == Max (AlO:EIO) will return the maximum value in the range.
  2. Min: It returns the smallest value in a set of values. It ignores text and logical values e.g. = Min (AIO:EIO) will return the minimum values in the range.
  3. Mode: It returns the most frequently occurring value in a set of values. e.g. = Mode (AIO:ElO)
  4. Rank: Returns the rank of a number in a list by comparing its size relative to the others. For example if A 1 to AS contains numbers 7, 3.8,3.8, 1 and 2 then RANK (A2, Al :A5,1) returns 3 while RANK (AI, AI:A5,I) returns
  5. The general format is RANK (number to be ranked, range, order).

 

Logical functions

  1. If: It returns a specified value if a condition is evaluated and found to be true and another value if it is false. If (marks > 50, “pass”, “fail”) will display a pass if values are more than 50 else it will display fail.
  2. Countif: Counts the number of cells within a specified range that meet the given condition or criteria. e.g. suppose A 1 0 : E 1 0 contains eggs, beans, beans, eggs, eggs, countif(AIO:EIO, “Eggs”) will return 3.
  3. Sumif: It adds values in the cells specified by a given condition or criteria. e.g. For example if AIO to ElO contains values 10,50,60, 30, 70, to sum all values greater than 50 = Sumif(AIO:EIO, “>50”). This returns 130.

 

Mathematical functions

  1. Sum: adds values in a range of cells as specified and returns the result in the specified cell. e.g Sum (AIO:EIO) adds values in the range
  2. Product: multiplies values in a range of cells and returns the result in the specified cell. For example if A 10 has 30 and BIO has
  3. Product (AlO:BIO) will return 90.

 

Arithmetic formulae – using operators

       Operator Function

 

+ (plus)                                          adds values as specified

– (minus) .                                      subtracts values as specified

* (multiplication)                           multiplies values

/ (division)                                     divides values.

( ) parenthesis                                     encloses arguments to be calculated first.

 

For a formula =(Al +C3)/E20, if the value in E20 is not zero, the result is displayed in the current cell.

 

Order of execution

If several. Operators are used in a single formula; Microsoft Excel performs the operations in the order shown in Table 2.3. Formulas with operators that have same precedence i.e. if a formula contains both a multiplication and division operator are evaluated from left to right. Enclosing part of the formula to be calculated in parentheses or brackets makes that part to be calculated first.

 

Operator   Name Precedence
1. –   Negation as in -1 1
2.%   Percent 2
2. 1\   Exponentiation 3
3. * and / ! Multiplication and division 4
4. + and –   Addition and subtraction 5
6. =,<>,>,<,<=,>= Relational 6

 

Table 2.3: Operators’ order of execution

 

2.8

 

Editing a worksheet

 

Coping and moving data

Spreadsheet software automates many processes that could have been tedious if done manually. For example with Microsoft Excel, you can do calculations using formulae fairly easily as you give the data and correct instructions to the program. Copying and moving of, data can also be done quickly and efficiently.

 

When data is cut or copied from the worksheet, it is temporarily held in a storage location called the clipboard.

 

Copying data

To copy a cell or a range of cells:

  1. Highlight the cells or range you want copied
  2. Click the Edit menu then select Copy command.
  3. Select the cell in which you want to place a copy of the information 4. From the Edit again, click Paste command. The Paste command puts a copy from the clipboard on the specified location

 

Moving data

Unlike the Copy command where a duplicate copy is created, the Move command transfers the contents of the original cell (s) to a new location.

 

To move a range of cells:

  1. Highlight the range you want to move.
  2. From the Edit menu, select Cut.
  3. Specify the location you want to move the contents to.
  4. From the Edit menu again, click Paste.

 

2.9 Worksheet formatting

Worksheet formatting refers to enhancing the appearance of the worksheet to make it more attractive and appealing to the reader. Appropriate formatting should be used to lay emphasis, catch attention and bring otherwise II hidden detail to the fore of the document.

 

The golden rule of formatting is to use simple clear formats. It essentially consists of changing text colour and typeface (font), size, style and alignment. In Microsoft Excel, format the cells whether empty or not and their contents will acquire the set format automatically.

 

To format a single cell, make it the current cell then format menu option and select the cells command In the format cells dialog box, make the formatting specifications that you wish then click the ok button to apply. If it is a range of cells, they must be highlighted first before formatting them as a block of cells.

 

Formatting text

  1. Highlight the cells that have the text to be formatted.
  2. Click Format menu then cells command. The dialog box appears
  3. Select the font tab as shown in the figure by clicking it.
  4. Select the font type e.g. Times New Roman. Other font formatting features like style, size, underline and colour are available and can be selected.
  5. Click button to apply.

 

NB: Alternatively, use the formatting toolbar to accomplish all your text formatting needs. Notice that the options in the font dialog box are commands on the formatting toolbar.

 

Formatting numbers

  1. Highlight the cells that have the numbers to be formatted.
  2. Click Format menu then cells command. The dialog box in Figure 2.15 appears.
  3. Select the Number tab as shown in the figure below.
  4. You can now choose number formats as explained below:

Number            Meaning

General           general format cells have no specific number format.

Number           Used for general display of numbers e.g. 2345.23.

Currency         For displaying general monetary values e.g. $100, Ksh.10.

Accounting     Lines up the currency symbols and decimal poin s. Displays date in chosen format.

Date                Displays time in chosen format.

Percentage       Multiplies the value in a cell with 100 and display ‘ it as %.

Text                 Formats cells to be treated as text even when numbers are entered.

Custom          For a number format not predefined in Microsoft Excel, select custom then define the pattern.

 

Worksheet borders

You may need to put a printable border around your worksheet or in a range of cells to make it more attractive and appealing. To put a border:

  1. Highlight the range you wish to insert borders. From the format menu, click cells command.
  2. Click the borders tab and specify the border options for left, right, top and bottom. .
  3. From the style options, select the type of line thickness and style. Also select the preset options.
  4. Click the ok button. The selected range will have a border around it.

 

Formatting rows and columns

Sometimes, the information entered in the spreadsheet may not fit neatly in the cell set with the default height and width. It therefore becomes necessary to adjust the height of a row or the width of a column. The standard width of a column in Microsoft Excel is 8.43 characters but can be adjusted to any value between 0 and 255.

 

Changing column width

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the right hand side line that separates the column headers i.e. for instance the line between A and B.
  2. Notice that the mouse pointer changes from a cross to a double arrow
  3. Click the mouse button and hold it down so that you can now resize the width of the column by dragging to the size you wish. After Dragging to the required point release the mouse button and the Column will have a new size.

 

NB: Alternatively, move the cell pointer to one of the cells of the column then click Format, point to Column then click Width command from the sidekick menu. Type a width in the dialog box that resembles Figure 2.17 then click Ok.button to apply.

NB: To change the widths of several columns at the same time, highlight them first before following this method.

 

Changing row height

  1. Point to the line that separates two row numbers e.g. the line between 1 and 2. The mouse pointer becomes a double arrow.
  2. Drag the line until the height of the row is as required then stop and release the mouse button.

NB: Alternatively, click Format point to Row then click Height from the sidekick menu that appears. Type the height that you wish in the dialog box that appears and then click OK button to apply.

 

Inserting rows and columns

I, Click cell A5 to make it the current or active cell.

2.clik insert then columns to insert a ‘row above cell A5 and shift all the other rows downward.

OR

 

Click insert then Columns to insert a column to the left of column A and shift all the others to the right.

 

NB: Alternatively, click  insert  then cells to display the dialog box select the entire row or entire column options to insert a row or column respectively.

 

Global worksheet formatting

The word global in this case refers to the entire worksheet. In order to format the whole worksheet globally, it must be selected as a whole.

Two methods can be used to select a worksheet globally:

  1. Click the top left comer of the worksheet that has a blank column header i.e. immediately on the left of A and just above I,

OR

  1. Press Ctrl+A on the keyboard.

 

Notice that the whole worksheet becomes highlighted. It can now be formatted as one big block using format cells command.

 

Using autoformat

It allows the user to apply one of sixteen sets of formatting to & selected range on the worksheet. This quickly creates tables that are easy to read and are attractive to the eye..

  1. Select a range e.g. B 1 :G7 to make it active.
  2. Click format then select the auto format command on the menu that Appears. Select a format from the autoformat dialog box shown in Figure 2.19.
  3. Click the ok button to apply the format to the selected range.

 

2.9 Data management

At times, it becomes necessary to use advanced data management tools to manage large ,data stored on a ‘worksheet. For example, if the worksheet has many records, it may become necessary to arrange them in a particular order using a method called sorting for easier access to data items. Other methods of data management include use of filters, total/subtotal function and forms.

 

Sorting

To carryout sorting proceed as follows:

  1. Highlight the range that you wish to sort by clicking its column header letter.
  2. Click Data then Sort . Notice that the Sort by field is already reading the field that you selected. This field is called the criteria field.
  3. Select the field to be used as the key for sorting and the sort order as either descending or ascending then click OK button to apply.

 

Filtering data

Filtering is a quick and efficient method of finding and working with a subset of data in a list. A filtered list will only display the rows that meet the condition or criteria you specify. Microsoft Excel has two commands for filtering lists.

  1. The auto filter: It uses simple criteria and includes filter by selection.
  2. Advanced filter: It uses more complex criteria.

 

In this Pupil’s Book we will look at the autofilter.

 

Autofilter

Filters can be applied to only one list on a worksheet at a time.

  1. Click a cell in the list that is to be filtered; usually the list is in a column.
  2. On the Data menu, point to Filter, and then
  3. To display only the rows that contain a specific value, click the arrow in the column that contains the data you want to display as shown in Figure 2.21.
  4. Click the value that is to be displayed by the filter from the drop down list. e.g in the example below, the selected value is 34.

NB: Sometimes while looking through a list of values on a large worksheet, you may come to a value of interest and want to see all other occurrences of the value in the spreadsheet. Simply click the cell that has the value then click auto filter on the standard toolbar. Microsoft Excel turns on AutoFilter and then filters- the list to show only the rows you want.

 

Subtotals function

Consider the following scenario: A company that has many salespersons

will need to know how much each of them should be paid at the end of a period by looking at individual sales volumes. Also, the grand total for all the payments has to be calculated. Therefore, if the salespersons are held in a list, there would be need to calculate the amount due to each of them. This can be called a subtotal in the list. All the subtotals can then be added together to make the grand total. Consider the following list:

Name                    Amount Owed

Stephen           `           6000

Joy                              3000

Stephen                      2000

Virginia                     5000

Joy                             800

Stephen                       200

Virginia                     5000

 

Microsoft Excel can automatically summarise the data by calculating subtotal and grand total values of the list. To use automatic subtotals, the list must have labelled columns and must be sorted on the columns for which you want subtotals. In this example, the list is first sorted by name

  1. Click a cell in the list that will have subtotals e.g. cell A3.
  2. On the Data menu click Subtotals 3. Notice that all the data range is now selected.
  3. In each change in box, select Name from the drop down list because we want a subtotal for each of the names.
  4. In the Use function box select the sum function then select the list for which subtotals will be inserted in the add subtotals box by checking the appropriate label. In this case it is the amount owed field.
  5. Click ok button to apply and the list will now have sub totals inserted

Totals function

Use theAutoCalculate feature in Microsoft Excel to automatically show the total of a selected range. When cells are selected, Microsoft Excel displays the sum of the range on the status bar. Right clicking this function displays other functions like Min, Max and Average that can also be used. To find the total of a range, highlight it then click the autosum icon ∑ on the standard toolbar.

 

Forms

A form is a specially prepared template that the users can use to enter data in a worksheet. It is specifically formatted to enable users to enter data in a format that is more convenient to them. If data is collected on paper before entering in the computer, then a form can be created to have the layout of the data on the paper to quicken data entry procedures. To display a form: Click ‘Data, then form.

 

2.10 Charts/graphs

Charts/graphs are graphics or pictures that represent values and their relationships. A chart helps the reader to quickly see trends in data and to be able to compare and contrast aspects of data that would otherwise have remained obscure. Microsoft Excel has both two-dimensional and 3-dimensional charts that can be used instead of the raw data in the table that has to- be studied for a long time to understand it.

 

The various types of charts available include column, bar, line. Pie, bubble and area charts among others. Consider carefully the type of chart that would best represent the base data in the worksheet before creating one. For example, if the aim is to depict the performance index of a student from Form I-to 3, a line chart would be most appropriate because it clearly shows the trend in performance.

 

Types of charts

  1. Line chart – represents data as lines with markers at each data value in the x-y plane.
  2. Column chart- represents data as a cluster of columns comparing values across categories. .
  3. Bar chart – data values arranged horizontally as clustered bars. Compares values across categories.
  4. Pie chart – it displays the contribution of each value to a grand total.
  5. Scatter chart – compares pairs of values on the same axis.

To view types of charts, right click the chart object then select the chart type command.

 

Creating a chart

A chart must be based on values that are already entered in the worksheet.

 

To create a chart:

  1. Select the range of values for which you want to create a chart.
  2. Click the Chart wizard button on the standard toolbar and the chart wizard dialog box will open as shown in Figure 2.25
  3. Click the type of chart you wish to .create. If the office assistant appears, close it. The chart sub-type preview will show several styles of the selected chart type.
  4. Click the Next button to move to the dialog in Figure 2.26.
  5. Click the Series tab then the collapse dialog button on the labels text box.

This will shrink the dialog box so that only the category labels text box is shown. Highlight the data labels from the worksheet.

  1. Click the Expand dialog button to bring the full dialog box into view then click the: Next button. In step 3 of the wizard, use the appropriate tabs to type the title of the chart, show a legend, select whether to display gridlines or not etc. After all these click the Next button.’
  2. At step 4 determine whether the chart will be inserted in the current worksheet or a new worksheet then click Finish button (Figure 2.27).

 

Moving and resizing a chart

Once the chart is created, its size and location can be changed in the worksheet. The chart element is enclosed inside a boundary called the chart area and hence both can be resized independently. Simply click the object you wish to resize and use the object handles just like in objects to drag to size. To move the chart, click inside the chart area then drag to the desired position.

 

Data ranges

A data range is a rectangular block of cells that provides the base data that is used to create the chart. In charting, a data range is referenced as an absolute range e.g. .

=Sheetl !$B$2:$C$8 which means that the base data is found on Worksheet 1 and absolute range B2:C8.

To see the data range of a chart, right click it then select the Source data command. .

 

Labels

Each representation of data on a chart can either be labelled by a value

or text label. For example, in a bar chart that compares the height of pupils, each bar can be given a value label to make it more readable.

 

To label:

  1. Right click the chart then select the Chart options command from

the shortcut menu.

 

  1. Click the lables tab and choose whether you want value or text labels then click OK button to apply. .

 

Headings and titles

Each chart must have a heading showing clearly what it represents. To I make the chart understandable, include axis titles.

 

. To include axis titles proceed as follows:

  1. Right click the chart then select the. Chart options command.
  2. Click the Titles tab then type the chart title (heading). And axis titles respectively.
  3. Click OK button to apply.

 

Legends

The legend is like a key that explains what each colour or pattern of the data representation in the chart means. For example, Microsoft Excel may give red colour to one data value and green to the other. Without a legend it would be difficult to know how to differentiate the two sets of values.

 

: To create a legend:

.1.Right click the chart then select the Chart options command.

  1. Click the legends tab and specify that it be displayed in the chart area.
  2. Click OK button to apply.

 

2.11

 

Printing worksheets

A worksheet will finally be printed for sharing with others or for filing purposes. If it contains objects like charts, it may not fit on a standard printing page using the default printing options and settings. Therefore, Microsoft Excel allows the user to preview and set up the pages of a’ worksheet in order to fit them on the hard copy page.

 

Page setup

  1. Click .File menu option then Page setup command to display the page setup dialog box. . .
  2. On the Page tab, select the orientation of the page. Study the meanings of each buttons and options in Figures 2.28.
  3. After making the necessary selections, click OK to apply.

 

Print preview

It displays the worksheet from the point of view of the printer i.e. exactly the way it will look when printed. Before using this command, make I sure the chart is deselected.

  1. Click the Print preview button on the standard toolbar.
  2. The worksheet will be displayed in the print preview window with the status bar reading preview.
  3. Click Setup to start the page setup dialog box. To close the preview, click the Close. Button.

I Print options

 

To print click File then Print command. The print dialog, box appears as shown in Figure 2.29 .

  1. Select printer – the name box in this dialog box enables a person to select the printer that will be used to print the document. All the printers that are installed on the computer will be available here.
  2. The print what options are:

(a) Selection – this prints the selected worksheet area.

(b) Workbook – prints all the worksheets in the workbook.

(c) Selected chart – prints the selected chart only.

 

Page orientation

As explained earlier, page orientation refers to the layout of the text on the page. A worksheet can also be printed on either landscape or portrait depending on the number of columns across the worksheet.

 

Pages and copies                                                                        .

The number of copies box specifies how many copies of a particular worksheet or workbook should be printed.

 

Sometimes only some specified pages in a workbook are specified for printing e.g. if a workbook has 100 pages and you wish to print only pages 50 to 60 select the page(s) range button then type 50 and 60 in the from, to boxes respectively before clicking the OK button.

 

Printing

After selecting all the options, click the OK button to print.

 

Some common printing problems

  1. A message appears on the screen saying that the printer specified could not be found in the directory.

 

Possible problems and solutions

(a) The printer could be off. Switch it on and it will start printing.

(b) The data cable to the printer could be loose. Make sure it is firm at the ports.

(c) The wrong printer could have been selected. Select the right one in the print dialog box and send the print job again.

(d) A message appears on the screen reading that there is paper jam.         I

 

The printer is clogged with a paper jam. Alert the lab, technician or the Teacher to clear the paper jam.

 

DATABASES

 

Chapter outline

 

3.1 Introduction to databases

3.2 Database concepts

3.3 Data organization in a database

3.4 Creating a database using Microsoft Access

3.5 Editing a database

3.6 Form design

  1. 7 searching for specific records in a database

3.8 Creating reports

3.9 Creating labels

 

Introduction to databases

We are often faced with the need to keep, search for or give a report of daily experiences. This is the reason why many people use data storage methods like recording daily experiences in a diary. Traditionally, human beings used to manage data and information manually by using simple devices. However these methods have a number of weaknesses which include

 

  1. Unnecessary duplication of data
  2. Boredom and time wasting especially when searching for a Particular item.
  3. Misleading reports due to poor data entry and organisation
  4. Poor update of records etc.

 

Today, computerized systems have radically changec4the way data and information is managed by use of special programs called Database Management System (DBMS).

 

A database is a collection of structured and related data items organised so as to provide a consistent and controlled access to the items.

 

Database concepts                                                                           .

Computerised database creation and manipulation is achieved using Database Management System software. This software facilitates the creation, organisation and maintenance of databases. Examples of database management software’s include Microsoft Access (Ms Access), Oracle, FoxPro, Dbase/V, Lotus Approach etc.

 

The functions of database management software are to:

  1. Allow the user add or delete records.
  2. Update or modify existing records.
  3. Organise data for easy access, retrieval and manipulation of records.
  4. Act as an interface between a database and other application programs.
  5. Ensure security for the data in the database by safeguarding it against unauthorized access and corruption (damage).
  6. Keep statistics of data items in a database.

Database models

 

Databases are classified according to the method used to organise data. The main database models are;

  1. Flat file 2. Hierarchical
  2. Network 4. Relational

 

NB: Current database models are called object relational and object databases. However these models will not be discussed in details in this book.

 

Flat files

 

In a flat file model, a database holds only one set of data and is not any different from the manual files. For example, the teacher’s assessment report may consist of performance cards for every student in a class. Another example of a flat file database are the cards used in a library books catalogue. The cards are arranged sequentially for easy access e.g. alphabetically using books’ titles or by authors’ names. Figure 3.1 below is a sample record of a flat file.

Name Serah Seki
Admission number 649
Total marks 680
Number of subjects 10
Average 68
Position 4

Fig. 3.1: Sample record in a flat file

 

Hierarchical model

 

In this model, data items are arranged in hierarchical (tree) form as shown in Figure 3.2. To access level two data items, you have to first access level 1 data items. Level 1 item is called the root component. A specific single path leads to each item at lower levels. Hierarchical model is rarely used in modem database systems.

 

­                 Level 1 main data item

Path

  Level 2 data item

 

 

Fig. 3.2: Hierarchical database model

 

Network model

 

In this type of organisation, links are used to express the relationship between different data items, forming a network of items as shown in Figure 3.3. Access to one item can be through multiple paths and from any item. This model is also rarely used in modem database systems.

 

Dataitem 4

 

 

 

 

 

Fig 3.3: Network database model

 

Relational model

This is the most common type of model used on minicomputers and microcomputers. In this type of organisation, related data items are stored together in structures called relations or tables. Relationship can be created between tables such that a record or records from one table relates to another or other records in another table. Tables 3.1 and 3.2 show customers and orders tables that are related by two fields; the customer number in Table 3.1 and customer ID in Table 3.2. In this case, the orders table shows that one customer with number 450 (Bat Hori) has made several orders.

 

    Customer Number Name   Telephone number
    900   Mary Koech 02078907
    230   Peter Karimi 0667896
  450   Bat Hori 04456000
      Table 3.1: Customer number  
  Customer ID Order Number Date     Amount (sh)
900   2380   2/3/2004 90 000
  450   811   2/5/2004 5000
‘- 450   234   . 3/5/2004 13 000
  450   567   3/6/2004 13 000

Table 3.2: Customer ID

 

Object oriented models                                                                           . !

The next generation of database model will look at records as objects that are independent and relate with the other objects in the database. This concept is a bit difficult to conceptualise because such databases are still at developmental stage. However, many databases today combine object and relational concepts to come up with object relation models.

 

Features of a database management software

Most database software contains a collection of features that provides the user with a means to manipulate data in a database. These features include Tables/files, Queries, Reports generators, Form interface and a computer programming language within it. Microsoft Access database software that will be considered in this book has two distinct features used to automate operations namely Macros and Modules.

 

Tables/ file structure

This is a database structure that is used to hold related records. Tables are organised in rows and columns with each row representing a record while each column represents common fields in each record. Table 3.3 shows a table of six records and each record is made up of four fields.

 

FIRST NAME MIDDLE NAME LAST NAME ADDRESS
MBUGUA STEPHEN KIMANI 250 KERUGOYA
ADERA NELSON ODUOR 396 HOMA BAY
MARGARET JUDY WEKESA . 761 NAIROBI
GATO PATRICIA MUILA 170 TALA
MWELU LUCY. MWENI 390 KANGUNDO .
KOECH PETER KORIR 605 KERICHO

 

Table 3.3: Table of six records and four fields

 

Queries and query language

 

A query is a database tool used to search for or question a database on specific records. Because a query is a question posed to the database, it returns a result for the user. In Microsoft Access, this result is called a dynaset. For example, assume you work with the National Irrigation Board (NIB), you may wish to display all those farmers from Mwea Rice Irrigation Scheme who delivered rice in January to the National Irrigation Board. You can use a query object or statements to get the required records.

The query statements are written using a special language called

Structured Query Language (SQL). The user creates a, query by writing Structure query language statements such as:

Select

Farmer Number, Name, Month of Delivery

From

       Delivery Table

Where

Month of Delivery = “January”

 

Forms/screen input

 

A form is a graphical interface that resembles the ordinary paper forms used to collect data. However, a database form enables the user to view and enter data into a table. Figure 3.4 shows a sample form used for entering a student’s marks scored in four subjects and. the date of admission. Form interface is a more convenient and easy way of entering and viewing records from a table.

 

Reports

 

Most database systems provide the user with a tool for generating reports from an underlying table or query. It is the report generator that provides the user with a means to specify the output layout and what is to be output or printed on a report. Table 3.4 shows a sample report for employees’ salaries.

Net Pay Report

 

fay rol/no .Last.Name      First Name. . .Basic salary                PAYE              Net salary.

 

07      Wangui        Grace        sh 80,000.00   Kshs 7,300.00 sh 72,700.00

09      Ochieng       Mbenga    sh 37,000.00   Kshs 3,800.00 sh 33,200.00

13      Mumbua      Peter         sh 22,000.00   Kshs 2,300.00 sh 19,700.00

20      Mbuvai        Sicily        sh 60,000.00   Kshs 5,700.00 sh 54,300.00

Table 3.4: Sample report

 

Macros

 

Some database software provides the user with a tool called a macro, that can be used to automate frequently performed procedures or tasks. For example, if you frequently use a particular form when you start a database program, you need to create a macro that automates the opening of the form.

 

Programming module

 

When your database becomes more and more complex, you may need a more powerful tool than the macros to automate your database operations further. Some database software come with their own computer languages associated with them. For example Microsoft Access comes with a language called Visual Basic included as a Module in the software. Using this feature, you can create a program that will print a query result over and over again until a certain condition is true. This can be illustrated using a simple statement like;

 

Print Student Report until NumberofStudents = 40 (Not a real command anyway).

 

NB: For the purpose of this book, only tables, forms, queries and reports, have been covered.

 

Data organisation in a database

One of the functions of a database system is to organise data for easy access, retrieval and manipulation. Data is organised from the simplest fQfll1 called a field to a very complex structure called a data,base.

 

Fields

A field is a character or a logical combination of characters that represent data item. For example, in a class list, the student name is a field.

 

Records

This is a collection of related fields that represent a single entity. An example of a record is the student report card that may contain the. student’s name, admission number, class, total marks, average and grade.

 

Files/tables

A file is a collection of related records. For example, the students’ file in a school database contains the details of all the students in the school.

 

Database

This is the highest in data organisation hierarchy that holds all related files ‘or tables. For example, a school database may contain students and staff tables/files.

 

Creating a database using Microsoft Access

Microsoft Access (Ms Access) is a package in Microsoft Office suite used for creating and manipulating databases. Because there are different versions of Ms Access such as Ms Access 95/97/2000 and XP, a general approach for carrying out tasks has been adopted in this book. However most of the illustrations are based on Access 2000 in order to maintain consistency.

 

Starting Microsoft Access

  1. From Windows desktop, click the start button.
  2. Select. Microsoft Access from the programs menu
  3. In the dialog box that appears when Microsoft Access starts, click Blank Access database as shown in Figure 3.5 then OK.

 

  1. The Save As dialog box appears. See Figure 3.6. This lets you specify the name and location where your database will be stored. Click Create to save the database.

 

  1. Microsoft Access database objects window is displayed from which I you can choose the type of object to create such as tables, forms, queries etc.

 

Microsoft Access screen layout

Like the other applications discussed earlier, Ms Access application Window has a title bar, menu bar, toolbars and status bar. However instead of having a work area like that ofMs Word or Excel, it provides the user with an object window from which you choose the type of an objectto work with such as tables, forms, reports e,tc. See Figure 3.7.

 

.Exiting from Microsoft Access

Because Microsoft Access consumes a large amount of computer memory  it is advisable to exit from the application at end of each working session.

 

To exit:

From the File menu, click exit the close button on the title bar.

 

Guideline on designing a good databases

To design a good database which will require little time to maintain, consider the following:

  1. Carefully study the requirements of the user in order to define all the data inputs, outputs and relationships required.
  2. Design a draft database on the paper to determine the number of files or tables required.
  3. Divide the information into separate fields, records and tables to allow flexibility in manipulating the database. This process of dividing information into independent tables to avoid repetition of data entries items is referred to as normalizing a database.
  4. Define a field for each table that will be used to identify each record uniquely. This field is referred to as a primary key
  5. Give the most important fields the first priority when constructing a table structure. Important fields are those that are used in sorting’ and querying the database. “
  6. Design data entry forms needed for the database

Creating a table/file structure

To define a table structure:

  1. From the Microsoft Access objects window, click the tables tab then new
  2. From New table dialog box, select Design View Figure 3.8 appears. :
  3. using the grid displayed, enter a unique name for each field in the table. A field name must start with a letter and can be up to a maximum of 64 characters including letters, numbers, spaces and punctuation.
  4. Choose the correct data type before adding the next field. By default, Ms Access inserts Text as a data type. Figure 3.8 shows various data types used in Ms Access.
  5. To save the table, click the Save button on the standard tool bar or save from the file menu.
  6. Access will ask you whether you want to create a Primary Key, click Yes.

 

Description of field data types

The type of data to be used in a database must be clearly defined for the purpose of manipulation and storage. For example, if a field is to be used for calculation, it must be defined as a number. The data types allowed in Ms Access include:

 

Text

This type includes alphabetic letters, numbers, spaces and punctuation. Use this data type for fields that do not need to be used for calculations such as names, places, identification numbers etc. This type of field accommodates a maximum of 255 characters.

 

Number

These are fields made up of numeric numbers 0 to 9 that are to be manipulated mathematically.

 

Memo

This is a field made up of alphanumeric (both alphabetic and numeric) data. Instead of using Text use this data type if you need to enter several paragraphs of text because it accommodates a maximum of 32 000 characters.

 

Date/Time

Used to identify a field as either a date or time. This is because date/time values can be manipulated mathematically in a database. For example, you can calculate the age of a person from the date of birth to the current data.

Currency

Used to identify numeric values that have decimals or fractions. Use this data type especially when dealing with monetary values such as fees balance, amount sold etc.

 

AutoNumber

This is a numeric value used if you wish Ms Access to automatically increment the values in a field. For example when entering a list of forty students and you have a field labelled StudNumber, the numbers will increase by one every time you enter a new record.

 

Yes/No

This is a logical field where an entry is either a yes or a no, true or a

false. For example a field may require you to answer whether you are a male or a female.

 

OLE Object

OLE stands for Object linking and Embedding. This type of field is mostly used with graphical user interface applications for inserting graphical objects such as pictures, drawings charts etc. – – –­

 

Field properties

As you create more and more complex tables, you will find a need to use the field properties to specify finer details related to fields and the table entries expected. The field properties depend on the type of-the field selected. For example when you click on a Text field then the General tab you will see properties associated to text data type as shown in Figure 3.9. ­The various properties are:

 

Field size

This allows the user set the number of characters in a field instead of the default 50 for text fields for numeric field’s integer and long integer, Byte, Single and Double.

Integer and longer integer: Accept numbers with no decimals.

Byte: Can only accept a number from 0-255.

Single and double: Accept numbers with decimals. Single accommodates up to 38 decimal places while double, accommodates up to 308.

 

Format

Determines how information appears on the screen and when printed. For example, you can format a number to scientific, currency, percentage or general format.

 

Decimal places

For number and currency fields you can specify the number of decimal places.

Input mask                                                           ,

Input mask automatically formats the field entry into a specified format. F or example, if you enter a number such as 02000 I 00409874 and the input mask is set as 000-(00000)-000000, it is automatically displayed as 020-(00100)-409874. This property is mostly used to format phone and address entries.

 

Caption

This is a more descriptive name for a field to be used in a table or a form display. For example the caption for StuName could be Student Name.

 

Default value                                                                                         ,

This is a value that will appear automatically in the datasheet or form if ‘ nothing is entered by the user to change it. For example = Date -( ) automatically displays the current date in a date field.

   Validation Rule

Logical expression restricts the values to be entered in a field. ‘For example, if you want to restrict marks entered in a field to values between

, zero and a hundred, type >=0 And <= 100.

 

Validation Text

The message that appears once the validation rule is violated. For example, you may create a validation text for the above validation rule I to display “Enter a number between 0 and 100” whenever the user enters I a value outside this range.

 

Required

Determines if an entry must be made in the field before you proceed to the next field or record. For example, if a primary key is required, you must enter before you proceed.

 

Allow Zero Length

This allows the user to proceed without making any entry in the field set as Zero length.

 

Indexed

An Index, facilitates the organisation of records for easy search. A primary key is an example of an index set to No duplicates to control double entry of a record (redundancy).

 

Primary key and Indexes

 

An index is a database feature used to speed up search and sort operations in a table. A key field also referred to as a primary key is a special index that enforces uniqueness in a table so that one record is not entered twice.

 

Ms Access uses the primary key to search for data stored in a table as well as define relationships between tables. Once a field is set as primary key, its datasheet is automatically indexed or sorted using the primary key.

To set a primary key:

  1. Open the table in design view.
  2. Select the field you want to set as the primary key by clicking in the row header to the left of the Field Name.
  3. Click Set Primary key button on the tools bar. A key should appear on the left of the field name as shown in Figure 3.10.

 

To see another field as an index other than the primary key: 1. Open the table in design view.

  1. Ensure that non of the fields is selected as a primary key.
  2. Click the Indexes button on the tool bar that is located next to the primary key. The index design grid is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 3.11.
  3. In the index name column, type in the name you want to give to the index.
  4. In the Field Name column, click the cell to display a drop down list. From the drop down list, select the field to use as an index.

6 In the Sort Order column, select either ascending or descending.

  1. In the lower portion, specify whether you want to make the field a primary key by selecting yes for primary and unique, and Ignore Nulls to ensure that data is entered into the field before proceeding.
  2. Close the dialog box.

 

Entering data into a table

 

To enter/append data into a table:

  1. Open the database in which the table is located
  2. Click the Tables tab then double click the table you want to add records to.
  3. Enter each record field by pressing the tab key to move to the next. Once you reach the end of the record and move the cursor to a new row the previous record is automatically saved.

 

Editing a database

 

Modifying the Datasheet view

 

To adjust the column size:

  1. Point to the column border between the field’s header then drag to the require size.
  2. Alternatively, click on the format menu then point to column and click on width
  3. Type the desired width

To adjust row height

  1. Point to the border between two rows in the row header and then drag.
  2. Alternatively, use format menu, then Row height.

To reorder fields:

  1. Select the column of the field you wish to move by pointing to the desired file name.
  2. Drag the column right or left to the top of the field where you want your field to appear and then drop.

 

Modifying the table structure

 

Once you create a table, you may need to add more fields, remove some fields, reorder the fields or change fields data types and properties. Before you modify the table it is important to save a copy to avoid losing everything in case you make a mistake

To make a copy of your table:

  1. From the file menu, click save as /export
  2. From the dialog box that appears, choose whether to save to another (external) database or the current.
  3. Type a new name for your table and click OK.

 To modify the original table:

  1. Open the table in design view by clicking the button that looks like a pencil and a set square placed on the edge of a ruler.
  2. Select the field or fields to be modified and make the necessary changes.
  3. Click the Save button to save the changes.

NB: If a table contains data and you make changes to the field data type, Ms Access may refuse to implement the changes. To avoid this problem, exit without saving and delete all the records from the table then return to the design view. You can then import a copy or copies of tables you backed up.

To import a table from another database:

  1. From the File menu, point to Get External Data then click Import
  2. From the dialog box that appears, select the database you wish to

import data from then click the Import button. Objects dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3.12.

  1. From the objects dialog box displayed, click the Tables tab
  2. Select the table(s) you wish to import then click OK.

 

Form design

 

Tables display many records at once from the database and in some cases you may not be able to see some fields properly. A form is an interface that enables the user to view and make data entries into an underlying table more easily. Figure 3.13 shows a sample form used to enter records into a books table.

 

In Microsoft Access, a form is designed using graphical objects called controls. A control is an object such as a text box, check box, command button or shapes that you place on a form design grid to display data or perform actions. There are two types of controls you can place on the grid: bound and unbound controls. A bound control is one whose source of data is a field in a table or query while unbound control is a control that is not connected to any data source.

 

You design or modify a form layout by dragging these controls to the required position. Figure 3.14 shows a form layout grid for a table called exam entry.

 

 Creating a form layout using form wizard

 

To create a form layout, you can either use the form wizard or start from scratch. Using the form wizard you can create either a columnar, a tabular a datasheet or a justified form layout.

Columnar form: The fields for each record are displayed down a column i.e. each value displays on a separate line with field labels to the left. Tabular: Records are displayed from left to right across the page and labels appear at the top of each column and each row represents a new record.

Datasheet: The form resembles a table datasheet view.

Justified: One record occupies the whole form.

To create a form using the form wizard:

  1. Open the database for which the form is to be created e.g.”EMPLOYEES”
  2. Click the Form tab then, New. From the New form dialog box that appears, click Form Wizard.
  3. Select the table you want to create a form for then New, A dialog box appears.
  4. Click the name of the table or query that includes the data you want to add into the form, and then click OK.
  5. From the fields list window, select the fields to add into the form by clicking the> button or click>> to add all fields then
  6. From the layout dialog box, select the layout you wish to use e.g. Standard then. click Next.
  7. In the Form title dialog box, type the name of the form then click Finish. Ms Access will automatically display the form on the screen.

 

Creating a form using autoform wizard

 

You can easily create a form using the Autoform wizard. This wizard creates a form for you automatically by asking you very minimal questions. The form includes all the fields from the selected table.

 

To construct an autoform tabular.

  1. Make sure your database is open
  2. Click the Form tab, then New.
  3. In the new form dialog box, select an auto form layout e.g. columnar
  4. In the “Choose the table or query where the object data comes” select the table you wish to create a form for then click OK. The form with all fields will be displayed.
  5. Click the Save button to save the form.

 

Creating a form from scratch

 

  1. Open your database
  2. In the database window, click the Form tab then New
  3. From the New form dialog box, select Design view
  4. In the “Choose the table or query where the-object data comes” select the table you wish to create a form for then click The form with all fields will be displayed.

To add controls onto the grid:

  1. Click the View menu, then. Field list command . The table you selected fields list is displayed.
  2. Drag and drop each field and arrange them on the grid.
  3. Save the form by clicking on the save button.

 

 

Data manipulating in a form

 

Adding and displaying records

 

The form provides the user with navigation buttons located at the bottom that can be used to navigate the form

The functions of the buttons can be summarized from left to right as follows

  1. Displays the first record in the table
  2. Displays the previous record.
  3. Displays the next record
  4. Displays the last record.
  5. Add a new record.

 

Formatting fields/controls in a form

To format fields in a form;

  1. Open the form in design view
  2. To resize, click the controls then position the pointer on the outline of the control then drag to the required size.
  3. To move, click the control and position the pointer onto the place holder or inside the control then drag to the required location.

 

Searching for specific records in a database

One major reason for use of a computerised database is the ability to search and retrieve specific information more efficiently. Rather than searching through endless filing cabinets, you simply enter an instruction and let the database do the rest. To search for data in a database, Ms Access provides the user with two search tools:

  1. Find command 2. Queries’

 

Using the find command

With a large database, the Find command saves your time when you need to move a record pointer to a particular record.

To search for a record:

  1. From Edit menu, click Find. The find dialog box appears in which you specify the field you want to search for in the” Find What” box as shown in Figure 3.16.
  2. Type the name of field you wish to search for in the Find What text box. .
  3. In the Search box (Figure 3.16), specify whether to:

( a) Search All

(b) Search Down to up or

(c) Search up to bottom

  1. In the match box, you can select one of the match types:

(a) Any part of field – As long as a string of characters to be searched are present in a word, then all the words having the string will

be searched e.g. “Berg” finds Berger, inselberg etc.

(b) Whole Field – Searches for the whole field for example, “Berg”

will not return Berger, inselberg but specifically berg if it is in the database.

(c) Start of Field – Specifies that, the searched word should start with the specified search string e.g. “Berg”

  1. In searching, you can also check or uncheck;

(a) Match case – Finds only text that has the same pattern of upper and lower case as the one specified in the Find What box.

(b) Search Field As Formatted – Select (check) to find data based on its display format e.g. ‘a date stored asa number 1/5/98 but

displayed as 05-Jan-98

(c) Search Only Current Field:- Select to search through all records for the current field only.

  1. After you set the search conditions click the Find First button.
  2. If you want to search for the second record or other records with the same field, click Find Next button.

 

You can use a wildcard e.g. asterisks (*) if you are not sure of the correct search word that will find all records that match the specified search string. For example, if you wish to search for all names that start with letter “J” in a school database, type J *. All names that start with J e.g. John, Jane Joy, Joyce and James will be displayed.

 

Using Queries

Queries are the fastest way to search for information in a database. A query is a database feature that enables the user to display specific records as well as perform calculations on fields from one or multiple tables. You can analyse a table or tables by using either a select query or an action query. However, only the select queries will be discussed in detail in this book

 

Select query

This is the most common type query used for searching and analysing data in one or more tables. Select query lets the user specify the search criteria and the records that meet those criteria are displayed in a dynaset

 

Action query

These are queries that are used to make changes to many records once. They are mostly used to delete, update, add a group of records from one table to another or create a new table from another table.

 

The four types of a action queries found in Microsoft Access are:

  1. Update – Updates data in a table.
  2. Append query – adds data in a table from one or more tables.
  3. Make table Query – Creates a new table from a dynaset.
  4. Delete Query – Deletes specified records from one or more tables.

 

Creating a select query

  1. Ensure that the database you want to create a query for is open.
  2. Click the Query tab, then New.
  3. From the New query dialog box, choose either to create a query from in Design view or using a Wizard.
  4. To design from scratch, click Design View. The Show Table dialog box appears from which you can add a table or tables you wish to create a query for as shown in Figure 3.17.
  5. Click the table from the table/ query list and then click Add.’
  6. Click Close to close the show table dialog box.
  7. The query design grid opens. In Microsoft Access it is called Query By-Example. This lets the user to design a query. Figure 3.18 is QBE grid for a table called Exam.

 

Parts of the query grid             ­

Field row- Fields from a table or tables to be used are arranged in this row. Each field should occupy its column.

Sort row – By clicking the down arrow in the sort cell, you can specify the sort order i.e. ascending, descending or no sort.

Show row – By clicking the Show box, you specify whether to display the field in the query results: When the box is not checked, the field will not be displayed.

Criteria row – This is where you type conditional statement that will be used by the query to display specific records.

Or row – Used to specify an alternative condition e.g. if you want to display records with a field called City with items Nairobi or Embu, type Nairobi in criteria cell and Embu in the Or cell.

To add fields into the query grid:

  1. Open the query in design view
  2. From the field list of the underlying table, drag each field and place it in the field row

 

Specifying the search criteria

In order to search for a particular set of records, you have to enter a conditional statement or statements in the criteria row. For example if you have a table called employees with one of the fields as salary, you can display all the employees earning more than Shs. 5,000, by typing >5000 in the criteria row, salary column.

 

To define criteria, use either relational or logical operators. Relational operators include less than «), greater than (», greater than or equal to (>=), less than or equal to «=), not equal to «» and equal to (=). Logical operators include AND, OR and NOT.

 

Use AND to display values in a specific range. For example, to display records from the employees table with salaries above 4000 but less than 6000, type, >4000 AND < 6000 on the criteria row in the salary column. All the employees who meet this condition will be displayed.

 

Use OR if you wish to get either one of two values. For example if you wish to get those employees either in Nairobi OR Embu.

 

If you want to display data in a particular range use the word Between. For example, instead of typing , >4000 AND < 6000, type Between 4000 And 6000.

 

If you want to list all records except those that you do not want to see use NOT. For example if you type NOT 6000 in the salary column of the employees table, all employees records will be displayed except. those with their salary as 6000.

 

To display records you are not sure of the field name but at least you can remember a few characters, use LIKE and the wildcards. Wildcards are

special symbols mostly an asterisk and a question mark used in place of other characters. For example, to display all names starting with “Sm” followed by any other character, type Like Sm? Like */*/1993 lists records created in 1993 regardless of the day or month.

 

Saving and running the query

  1. Click the Save button on the standard tool bar or save command from the file menu.
  2. In the name box that appears, type in the name of the query then click OK.
  3. To run the query in design view, click the Run button on the toolbar as shown in Figure 3.19 or Run command from the Query menu.
  4. You can view the results of your query any other time by selecting the query, then clicking the Open button from the database window.

 

Sorting the dynaset To sort a dynaset:

  1. In the sort row, click the down arrow that appears to specify the sort order i.e. ascending or descending of the desired field.
  2. Display the dynaset.

 

Modifying and updating a query

To delete fields from the query grid:

  1. Open the desired Query in design view.
  2. Select the field column you wish to delete
  3. Choose Delete from the Edit menu.
  4. Click the Save button to save the changes

 

To adjust the column size in a query

  1. Open the desired query in design view.
  2. Position the mouse pointer at the boundary that separates columns then drag it to the required size. Alternatively, double click the boundary to auto fit cell content.
  3. Click the Save button to save the changes

To modify a criteria statement ‘select query,

  1. Open the desired query in design view.
  2. Modify the criteria statements as desired, 3. Click the Save button to save changes.
  3. To test whether the changes have been effected, click the Run button to display the results of the query.

 

Performing calculations in a query

Unlike tables, queries let the user perform mathematical calculations on numeric data. You can perform calculations in a query by using the Total functions or by creating basic formulas

Creating basic formulae

To create a formula that calculates the total marks in an underlying table e.g. Exams table:

  1. Open your query in design view
  2. In an empty cell, preferably the immediate last field cell, type an expression that includes a field name of your choice such as:

Total: [Math’s) + (Physics) + (Chemistry) as shown in Figure 3.20

 

Math’s Physics Chemistry Total: (Math’s)+(physics)+(Chemistry)
Exam Exam Exam  
      .
        √      √     √     √

 

Fig. 3.20: Creating an arithmetic expression

 

  1. You can then set the criteria, and other query options.
  2. Save the query and run it. The results of the calculations will be displayed in the dynaset as shown in Figure 3.21. However, this field is not added to the underlying table(s) because query results must always be based on the most current data in the database.

Using Total functions                 .

With a query, you can analyze all records fields using the inbuilt functions such as Sum, Average, Minimum and Maximum etc. To use the total functions:

  1. Open your query in design view.
  2. Click the Totals button on the query toolbar.
  3. Select the field you want to analyze.
  4. For each field to be analyzed, click its cell in the Total row, and then select any of the functions as shown in Figure 3.22.

Sum: Adds all the numerical data items.

Avg; Calculates the mean of all numeric data items in the field column.

Min: Returns the minimum value from the field column.

Max: Returns the maximum value from the field column.

Count: Returns the number of items field column.

  1. Set criteria and other options then click run to preview the results
  2. Save the query.

 

Printing a query:

  1. Open the database window of the database containing the query you want to print
  2. Click the query tab then the query you want to print.
  3. From the file menu, click print Set the printing options then click the OK. Button.

 

Creating a select query from multiple tables

When you use fields from more than one table in a query, there should be a common link or relationship between the tables. There are three type of relationships

  1. One – to – One
  2. One -to – Many
  3. Many -to – Many

In a one -to one relationship, for a particular field in one table (the main table), there is only one matching record in the related table and vice versa. In a one -to many relationships, for a particular field in one table there are several matching records in another table. This is the most common type of relationship. For example, a person may make one order, or several orders. For this instance, there is only one record with that person’s details say in customers’ table, yet there are several records related to the same person in the Orders table.

In a many -to many relationship, for particular records in one table there are several matching records in the other table and vice versa. This is not very common.

 

Defining relationship between tables

  1. Make sure your database is open.
  2. From Tools menu, choose Relationships. The relationship dialog box appears.
  3. Select the tables to add then click the Add button. .
  4. To create relationship, click on the common field and drag it to the second table. The fields used to create the relationship must be of the same type and properties.
  5. To Enforce Referential Integrity, right click the line joining the two tables then click Edit. An Edit relationship dialog box such the one in Figure 3.23 will be displayed.
  6. Make sure Enforce Referential Integrity is checked to ensure that all records entered in the related table exists in the primary table.

 

  1. Click OK to close the Edit relationship dialog box.

 

To create a query based on related tables

  1. Start the database window and click the Queries tab,
  2. Select design view and click OK.
  3. From the show table dialog box, click the tables you want to base your query on and then click Add.
  4. Relationship between various tables will be displayed as shown in Figure 3.24. Add the fields from both tables into the QBE grid.
  5. Save and Run the query.

 

Creating reports

Reports are used to summarize and present information from a database. A good database software should enable the user to generate database reports and print them for presentation and distribution. This process is referred to as formal presentations. As with forms, a report layout is also designed by placing controls on to the report layout grid as shown in Figure 3.25.

 

Parts of a report layout in design view

Report Header-This contains unbound controls that displays title of the report.

Page Header – Contains heading or labels data items to be displayed in every column.

Detail – Holds bound controls that display data items for the table or query it was created from.

Page footer holds a control that is to be displayed on every page such as the page number and date. For example =Now() displays the current date and time as set in the system clock.

 Report footer Used to display summary from a report such as the grand total for numerical data in a particular field column.

 

Creating a report using report wizard

Just like the form wizard, report wizard takes the user through a number of steps by answering a few questions and Ms Access automatically does the rest.

 

To create a report layout:

  1. Ensure that the database is open.
  2. Click the Report tab, then New
  3. From the/New Report dialog box, click Report Wizard then
  4. Select a table or a query then the fields to be added to the report then click next.
  5. The wizard asks you whether you wish to add any group. Grouping is used to categorise records using a particular field for better presentation or if you need to perform calculations on a group of common items. For example, to categorise books in a library database according to ISBNNumber, double click the field then click Next. (Figure 3.26).
  6. In .the dialog box that appears, select the Sort option if you want to sort the records. You can also click the Summary options button in case you want Ms Access to perform calculations on numerical fields. In summary options dialog box, select the Summary options you want performed e.g. Sum, Average etc. as shown in Figure 3.27. Click OK to close the summary options dialog box then Next.
  7. From the layout dialog box, select the type of layout such as stepped, block etc. Select page orientation i.e. either portrait or landscape then click Next.
  8. In style dialog box, specify the report style by selecting either bold, casual etc.
  9. Finally enter the name of your report then click finish. The report will be displayed on the screen in print preview mode.

 

Creating a report in design view

Just like with forms, you can create a report in design view by placing controls on the report design grid.

 

To design a report in design view:

 

.’

  1. In the database window, click the Reports tab then New.
  2. In the New Report dialog box, click Design view.
  3. Click the name of the table or query you want to generate a report from.
  4. Click the OK button. You will get a report design grid where you can place data controls.
  5. From the view menu, click Field List.
  6. To design the layout, drag each field from the field list to the layout grid and drop it where you want the data column to appear.
  7. Once you finish placing controls, click the Save button.
  8. In the save as dialog box, enter the name of the report and click OK.
  9. To view the report, click the Print Preview button. Alternatively, click Print Preview from the file menu.

 

Modifying a report layout

To modify headers and footers:

  1. Open the report in design view.
  2. Click the report header or footer you want to modify.
  3. Make the necessary changes and then click the Save button.
  4. Click the Print Preview button to view the changes.

 

To add more controls onto the report layout:

  1. Open a report in design view.
  2. Display the field list by clicking the Field list button or using the View.
  3. Select one or more fields in the field list and drag view to the Report design grid.

 

To resize or move a control:

  1. Click at once to select it. Position the mouse pointer to on the place holder, until the mouse pointer changes to a double-sided arrow. Drag the pointer to resize the control
  2. To move a control, select it and place the mouse pointer on the place holder until it changes to a hand.

 

Creating labels

A label is a sticker or piece of paper put on an item for the purpose of identification. Examples of stickers are mailing labels, label on the floppy disk where you write your name etc. Using the report label wizard, Microsoft Access lets you easily create labels of different sizes.

To create a label using the report wizard,

  1. Open the your database
  2. From the database window, click the Report tab then New
  3. From the New Report dialog box, select Label Wizard the table or query from which the labels are to be generated from.
  4. Label wizard starts running as shown in Figure 3.28.
  5. From a series of dialog boxes displayed, specify the label size, font, and fields to be included in the label, whether to sort the labels, the name of the label then click Finish.

 

Modifying labels

Just as you can modify a report or a form, you can also modify a label by manipulating the layout controls.

To modify a label,

  1. From your database window, click the Report tab then the Design View button.
  2. The label design grid is displayed. Edit the layout as desired, save and close the design grid.
  3. To view the modified label, click the Preview button from the database window.

 

Printing the report and labels

Before you print a report or a label, you should first set the page options i.e. the margins, paper size and orientation.

  1. Open the database that contains the report you want to print.
  2. Click the Report tab, select the report you want to print then click the Preview button.
  3. From the File menu, click Print.
  4. Set the printer options i.e. the printer type, print range and number of copies.
  5. Click OK to print.

 

 

DESKTOP PUBLISHING (DTP)

 

Chapter outline

 

4.1 Introduction.

4.2 Definition of desktop publishing.

4.3 Purpose of desktop publishing.

4.4 Types of desktop publishing software.

4.5 Designing a publication.

4.6 Manipulating text using the toolbox

4.7 Editing a publication.

4.8 Formatting a publication.

4.9 Printing a publication.

 

Introduction

Have you ever asked yourself how newspaper and book publishing companies manage to produce publications that are attractive with creative layouts and graphics in large volumes? They do this through a special process called publishing. Publishing is the process of producing publications like newspapers, cards, pamphlets, pictures, calendars etc. that have special text and graphical layouts and designs. The traditional method of publishing involved drawing and writing manually on wooden or metallic boards. The artwork would then be painted with ink and pressed on papers to produce a printout. This was a very tedious work.

 

Today the art of publishing has changed because of the advent of personal computers and smaller printers that are able to print high quality text and graphics even in an office or at home.

 

Definition of desktop publishing (DTP)

Desktop publishing refers to the process of producing publications like cards, newspapers etc. by designing their text and graphics layout and inserting, editing, formatting and printing of text and graphical objects using a special desktop publishing software installed on computers. The term desktop means that all the publishing processes can now be done on a desk in the office or at home using a personal computer! The difference between a desktop publisher and a word processor is that a desktop publisher software gives the user more tools and control of the page layout, text manipulation and graphic design than a word processor.

 

However it is important to note that some word processors today have also been incorporated with text and graphic formatting and editing tools. Hence a thin line exists between them and the desktop publishers. For example you can design a full publication in Microsoft Word by using the available drawing and picture tools, create columns etc.

 

Examples of desktop publishers include Adobe PageMaker, CorelDraw, Microsoft Publisher and Ventura. This book will use Adobe PageMaker to demonstrate the concepts of desktop publishing.

 

Purpose of desktop publishing software

Desktop Publishing programs are very popular in publishing because they give the person designing publications (typesetter) a lot of control on:

Graphic design: Using desktop publishing software, a typesetter can create and edit very complex text and graphical objects like pictures to the finest details. For example, the software provides the user with rulers and ruler guides that can be used to place an object in exactly the correct position.

Page layout design: With a desktop publisher, the user can be able to design a page layout by setting consistent picture and object locations, dividing a page in a number of columns and creating layers. A layer can be viewed as the arrangement of objects on top of each other with the one on top being on the first layer e.g. text can be on one layer while graphical objects on another. Therefore the text layer can be manipulated separate from the graphical object layer like for example text moves separate from the objects. Another good example is you can make the graphical object layer transparent in order to make the text in a layer behind the object visible.

Printing: Because the main purpose of any desktop publisher is to produce publication s, this cannot be accomplished without printing. Desktop publishing software therefore helps the user prepare what is referred to as an artwork in commercial circles for printing.

 

Types of desktop publishing software

There are two main types of desktop publishing software:

Graphical based: They are specifically developed to edit and format graphic objects like pictures. Examples are Adobe Photoshop, Corel Draw, harvard graphic etc. This desktop publishers have superior image handling capabilities like setting resolution, brightness, contrast, cropping and filling images of all types with colour.

 

Layout based: These types of desktop publishers are specifically developed to create different page layout designs for text and pictures. Have you ever wondered how the complicated front page of a newspaper is developed? It is difficult to achieve such without a good layout based DTP. Good examples of layout based desktop publishers are Adobe PageMaker and Microsoft Publisher.

 

Designing a publication

Publications vary in design and formatting. For example, a card has a particular design layout that is different from a newspaper. Therefore, publication designs determine how they are classified.

 

Types of publications

It is possible to produce different types of publications using a desktop publishing software. There are several types of publications that can be published namely:

Cards: These may be for weddings and other special occasions like graduations and for congratulations.

Certificates: To show completion of courses and special events. These type of publications are very sensitive because they must be designed to discourage any type of duplication or counterfeits.

Newspapers, magazines, pamphlets and newsletters: Have news targeting a group of people. They may have many text and graphical layouts and designs.

Books: Are bulky publications with many pages bound together in the same publication.

Calendars: Apart from showing dates, they are used by companies to advertise their products hence most of them have heavy catchy graphics.

 

Running Adobe PageMaker

Currently PageMaker versions 6.5 and 7.0 are the most common desktop publishing software developed by Adobe PageMaker. Other Adobe products includes Adobe Photoshop mainly used for editing and formatting photographs, Adobe illustrator used for creating complex freehand artwork such as drawings and logos etc.

 

Starting Adobe PageMaker

  1. Click the Start button and then point to Programs
  2. From the programs sidekick menu, point to Adobe group then select PageMaker. Figure 4.1 shows how to start PageMaker in a typical Windows environment.
  3. The PageMaker program starts and provides the Document Setup dialog box. If the Document setup dialog box is not displayed, then click File menu and select the New command.
  4. In the Document Setup dialog box similar to the one in Figure 4.5 specify the publication setup options.
  5. Click OK to apply the selected options. A publication window similar to the one in Figure 4.2 is now displayed.

 

PageMaker screen layout                                                       .

The PageMaker application window looks like most application windows for programs you have used before. It also has a title bar, menu bar and scroll bars. However, you will note that unlike most of the Microsoft applications you have used before, Adobe PageMaker does not have a status bar on its application window. The most notable difference between a desktop publishing software such as PageMaker and a word-processing software such as Microsoft Word is that a desktop publishing software

 

has its printable work area centered on a pasteboard as shown in Figure 4.2.

The PageMaker publication window is made up of the following layout components:

 

  1. The pasteboard. 3. The toolbox. 5. Rulers

 

  1. The printable area. 4. Master pages.
  2. Control pallete.

 

The pasteboard

A pasteboard is a large blank area where you place text and graphical objects before arranging them neatly on the printable work area enclosed with margins.

 

The printable area

It is the area that looks like a page surrounded by margins on the pasteboard. Any object or text that is placed on the printable area will be printed by the printer.

 

The Toolbox.

This is a set of buttons that contains various tools you can use to create and manipulate your publication it has the following tools

 

Line tool

Rectangle tool

Ellipse tool

Polygon tool

Hand tool

Pointer tool

Rotate tool

Text tool

Cropping tool

Constrained tool

Rectangle frame tool

Ellipse frame tool

Polygon frame tool

Zoom tool

 

The function of each tool can be summarised as follows:

 

 

Tool

 

Purpose

 

Pointer

 

Select, move, and resize text blocks and graphical

objects

Text

 

Type, select, and edit text.

 

Rotating Select and rotate objects.

 

Cropping

 

Crop i.e. trim imported graphics
Line Draw straight lines in any direction
Constrained line Draw vertical or horizontal lines.
Rectangle

 

Draw squares and rectangles.
Rectangle frame

 

Create a rectangular placeholder for text and Graphics.
Ellipse Draw ellipses and circles
Ellipse frame Create a circular or oval place holders for text and graphics
Polygon Draw basic polygons such as triangles, pentagons, stars etc
Polygon frame Create polygonal place holders for text and graphics
Hand Scroll the page or to preview and test hyperlinks
Zoom Magnify or reduce the area of the page

 

Master pages icons

At the bottom of the publication window is a bar that holds icons representing each page in the publication. These icons are called page thumbnails. To move to a page, just click its thumbnail. When you click the master page thumbnail(s), the master page(s) are displayed. A master page is used to design the general layout that needs to be applied in all other pages of the publication. (Figure 4.4)

 

Rulers

Each publication window can include horizontal and vertical rulers. They extend along the top and left borders of the window. You can display rulers when you need them and hide them when you want more room on the screen to view a publication. The rulers must be visible to help the user to manually create ruler guides, which are nonprinting extensions of the ruler as well as measure an object size.

 

Control pallete

It is a shortcut toolbar mainly having text and paragraph formatting command icons.

 

Setting up a publication

Sometimes, it is necessary to change the setup options of a publication e.g. page size, margins, orientation etc.

 

To change publication’s setup:

  1. From File menu, click Document Setup. A dialog box such as the one shown in Figure 4.5 appears.
  2. Select the following page set up options:

(a) In the Page size list box, select the appropriate size. When you select a page size, its dimensions appear in the Dimensions text boxes. Alternatively select custom size then use the dimensions text box to specify a custom page size of up to 1065 by 1065 mm.

(b) Select page orientation by either clicking Tall for portrait or Wide for landscape orientation.

(c) Click Double-sided to set inside and outside margins to accommodate binding on pages that will be printed on two sides.

(d) Click Facing pages if you want left and right pages displayed   together as a two-page spread on the screen.

(e) Enter the number of pages you initially plan for-the publication.

(f) Click OK to effect the changes.

 

Setting up a publication using master pages

If you are creating a publication that will have several pages such as a book or a project report, it is important that you layout a common layout foundation for all pages for the sake of consistency and cohesiveness. These pages used to design a common layout to be applied in the other pages of the publication are called master pages or a document master.            You can create, modify, and delete objects on master pages just like any other objects, but you must do so from the master pages themselves.

 

The document master applies to all pages in the publication until you’ specify otherwise, and cannot be renamed or removed from the publication. To switch to master pages, simply click the master page icon(s) then:

  1. Place non-printing ruler guides on the master pages to help you place text and graphics accurately and consistently throughout your publication. Non-printing ruler guides are vertical or horizontal lines

. you place on printable area. You place the guides by positioning. the mouse pointer on the ruler then dragging the guide to the required position.

  1. Create basic design elements on the master pages, including text and graphics that you want to appear on each page in your publication.

 

Setting up margin guides

Margin guides are very important because they define the printable area of your publication.

 

To change margin settings;

  1. From File menu, click Document Setup
  2. In the Setup dialog box

(a) For a double sided document enter the values for inside and outside margins to accommodate binding for a document that will be printed on both sides. For Single sided pages, set the left and right margins.

(b) Enter the value for the Top and Bottom margins.

  1. Click OK to close the setup-dialog box and effect the changes.

 

Saving the layout

Once you complete setting up your publication layout, it is important you save it before you start entering text and graphics.

To save the layout:

  1. To save the publication for the first time, from the File menu, click Save As or click the Save button on the toolbar.
  2. In the Save As dialog box, specify the name of the file and the storage location of your publication then click Save button
  3. To save changes made to a publication, from the File menu, click Save.

 

Displaying and hiding rulers

If the rulers are not displayed, click the View menu, then Show rulers to display them. To hide the rulers, click the View menu then Hide rulers.

 

Selecting ruler measurement units

It is possible to set different measurements on both rulers. For example, you can set the vertical rule in millimetres and the horizontal in inches. Therefore if you want to use common units, you must set each ruler measurement independently.

 

To set the measurement units,

  1. Right click a ruler separately. A drop down list displays available measurement systems that is inches, decimal, millimeters, picas and Ciceros as shown in Figure 4.6 below. If you are not familiar with some of these units, it is advisable you use millimeters.
  2. Select the measurement system option you want to use.

 

Manipulating text using the toolbox

 

Manipulating text

 

Using text tool

To create a text block with the text tool:

  1. Click the text tool from the toolbox. The pointer turns into an I-beam.
  2. On an empty area of the page or pasteboard click or drag a rectangular area to define a text block or frame. If you click without dragging, a text block the width of the column or page will be created. It is the text frame that defines the space you want the text to occupy. The borders of a text block remain invisible until you click the text with the pointer tool.
  3. Type the text you want.

 

Using text frame

You can create text by using a frame tool or by converting any object you have created with the drawing tools except a line into a frame. Text frames do not change height or width as you add or remove text.

 

To add text into a frame:

  1. Draw a frame using any of the frame tools that defines the shape you want the text block to take. Alternatively select a drawn shape, from Elements menu, point to Frame then click Change to Frame.
  2. Do one of the following:

(a) Click the text tool, click in the frame, and then type or paste text from the clipboard

(b) From the File menu click Place, double-click the file that contains the text you want to place in the text frame. When the cursor becomes a loaded icon, click inside the text frame to place the text.

 

You can also add text into a text frame by:

  1. Selecting a text block, hold down Shift, and then select an empty frame.
  2. From the Element menu, point to Frame and click Attach Content. The text flows into the frame and the text block disappears.

 

Manipulating graphical objects using the toolbox

The toolbox has several graphic drawing tools. For example, the polygon tool helps a person to draw polygons and the ellipse tool is used for drawing circular objects. All these tools enables a person to apply stroke and fill patterns. For more complex graphics, PageMaker allows a person to import pictures from other applications and to place them in the publication. A stroke refers to a line style while a fill refers to applying patterns such as shading. Figures 4.7 (a) and 4.7(b) shows examples of fill and stroke respectively applied to simple rectangular graphical objects drawn using the polygon tool.

 

Applying stroke and fill

Once you create a graphical object, you can enhance it by applying stroke and fill. To apply stroke or fill:

  1. Select the object you want to apply stroke or Fill.
  2. From the element menu either point to stroke to apply a line style or fill to fill the object with a background colour or pattern. Alternatively, click the fill and stroke command to set the fill and stroke options in the dialog box as shown in Figure 4.8.

 

Moving and resizing text and graphical objects

Once you create text and graphical objects, you can adjust the size, shape, or location of an object.

To move a text or graphical object:

  1. Click the object to select it then position the pointer tool anywhere inside the text or object.
  2. Drag the text or object to a new position.

 

To resize text or object:

  1. Select the text or object with the pointer tool. Selection handles are displayed at the comers of the text block or the object. 2. Position the pointer on the selection handle and drag to the required size.

 

Editing a publication

The term edit means making changes to a publication. In most cases, editing would include the process of correcting spelling mistakes, replacing words etc.

 

You can search for specific occurrences of a word or group of words in your publication and make the necessary changes. PageMaker comes with two special editing tools namely the Find and Change tool and the Spelling tool.

 

Before editing the publication, you must open it in the story window. PageMaker defines each text block as a story. Once text is in PageMaker, it is part of a story. A story is a text block that PageMaker recognizes as a single unit. A story can be one letter or several hundred pages of text, and can be contained in a single text object or threaded through many different ones.

 

Find and change tool

This editing tool helps a person to search for a particular word or a phrase and replace it with another one. To find and change a word and or a phrase in the publication:

  1. Using the text tool, click an insertion point in a story, or select a range of text if you want to limit your search to that section.
  2. Click Edit menu then select Edit story command. The publication now opens in the story window showing only the text but not the graphical objects.’
  3. Click Utilities then Find or Change. A dialog box such as the one shown in Figure 4.9 is displayed.

4 In the Find What text box, type or paste the text you want to find. To change the text, type new text in the Change To text box. To search for formatting only, leave the text boxes blank.

  1. Select Match Case and Whole Word as appropriate.
  2. In the dialog box, specify the formatting to search for and, if appropriate, how you want to change it, and click OK
  3. Select options to determine the scope of the search e.g. in all open publications or only the current one. If you search the current publication only, select Search Story option.
  4. Click Find to begin the search.
  5. Click Find Next to continue with the search operation
  6. Once you are through, click Story menu then Close Story. Alternatively press Ctrl+W.

Spell checking

To check spelling in one or more publications:

  1. Click the insertion pointer anywhere in the publication or select the range to be spell checked.
  2. From the Story Editor menu, choose Utilities then Spelling. A dialog box as shown in Figure 4.10 appears.
  3. Specify the scope of the search either as:

(a) In selected text.

(b) In the current story only.

(c) In all stories in the publication.

  1. Specify spell checking options:

(a) Checking alternate spellings lets you see suggested replacements for misspelled words.

(b) Checked show duplicates displays/repeated words.

  1. Click the start button and spell checking begins.

 

Formatting a publication

This refers to applying special attributes to text, graphical objects and pages in order to make them attractive and appealing to the eye. Therefore, formatting may include things like font sizing, bolding, changing text colour, adjusting picture brightness and contrast and formatting columns on the page.

 

Text and paragraph formatting

To format your publication, you can either use commands available in the Type menu or a control palette. The Control palette is a strip that contains command buttons and list boxes that let you assign attributes to text and graphical objects:

 

To display the control palette

From Window menu, click show control pallet The Control palette appears floating on top of your publication (Figure 4.11). You can move it by dragging the bar at the left edge of the palette.

The contents of the Control pallete  vary. Depending on which tool is selected from the toolbar or from itself. The two types of control palettes are the object mode and text mode. The text mo e can be selected by clicking the Character view or paragraph view button. There are two types of text modes namely;

  1. The character view that is, when the T tool on the pallete is selected. This means that you can apply character attributes to selected text. Character attributes determine how text looks on the page. such as font type, size, or style (bold, italic or regular).
  2. The paragraph view that is, when you select a paragraph and you click the button below the T on the control palette (labelled M) in Figure 4.11. Figure 4.12 is displayed. You can apply paragraph styles, select alignment options, and other paragraph attributes.

In object view i,e. when a graphical object is selected, it lets you apply attributes related to the object such as rotating, moving, resizing etc.

 

To format text:

  1. Using the text tool, select the text you want to format.
  2. From the Type menu of the Control palette, choose the formatting attribute you want.

 

To format several text attributes at once

  1. With the text tool, select the text you want to format.
  2. From the type menu, click character command
  3. In the Character Specifications dialog box select text attributes such as font, size, type, colour, position (normal, subscript, superscript etc.) then click ok

The simplest way to format text attributes is by using the control palette. In character view the control palette has the following main formatting sections

 

  1. Font list box and style buttons
  2. Font size and leading list box
  3. Tracking and Horizontal scale

 

Changing text colour

  1. Select the text.
  2. From Window menu choose Show Colors.
  3. In the colors dialog box, click the Colors tab.
  4. Select the colour you wish and it will apply on the selected text.

 

Changing case

As with Microsoft Word you can also change text case to upper or lower case, sentence case e.t.c.

To change case:

1 Select the text you want to change case.

2 Click Utilities menu, point to Plug-ins, and then click Change case. Change case dialog box will be displayed as in Figure 4.1

3 Select the case you want

  1. Click Apply to preview the change
  2. Click OK to close the dialog box.

 

Formatting text to superscript and subscript

Superscript refers to text that is positioned slightly higher than the rest on the same line e.g. the power of 3 in 103 while subscript refers to text slightly below the same line such as the number 2 in H2O. To format text to superscript or subscript;

1     Select the text you want to style as superscript or subscript.

2     From Type menu, click Character and the dialog box in Figure 4.14 appears.

  1. In the Character dialog box, select either superscript or subscript from Position list box as shown then click OK.

To remove superscript or subscript format:

  1. Repeat step 1 and 2 above
  2. In the character dialog box, select Normal from Position list box, and then click OK

 

Drop cap

D

rop cap refers to text formatting where the first character in a line is bigger and drops down to occupy the space in the next lines as shown by the first letter D in this paragraph.

 

To apply drop cap:

  1. Select the character you want to drop
  2. Click Utilities menu, point to Plug-ins, and then click Drop cap.
  3. Specify the number of lines you want the character to occupy in the Size box as shown in Figure 4.15.
  4. Click Apply to preview the format and then OK to close the dialog box.

Paragraph formatting

You can use either the Control palette to format a paragraph or Paragraph command from the Type menu. However the later lets you apply formatting that is not available on the Control palette.

 

Setting indents and tabs

Indents and tabs are powerful tools for positioning text. Indents move text inward from the right and left edges of a margin while tabs position text at specific positions. You can set indents by moving the indent markers in the Indents/Tabs ruler, typing indent values in the Paragraph dialog box or type indent values on the Control palette in paragraph View.

 

To set tabs using the Indents/Tabs ruler:

  1. Select the paragraph or paragraphs you want to indent.
  2. From Type menu, click Indents/Tabs.
  3. On the Tab ruler, click a tab-alignment icon (left, right, center, or decimal) for the first tab you want to set. See Figure 4.16.
  4. Drag the new tab marker along the ruler
  5. If you want the tab leader, click the Leader button then choose the type of leader you want.

To set indent using the Control palette:

  1. Select a paragraph or paragraphs you want to indent.
  2. On the Control palette, click the paragraph-view button.
  3. Type values for the indents in the Indent text box then press the Enter key.

 

To set an indent using the Paragraph command:

  1. Click an insertion point in a paragraph, or select a group of paragraphs.
  2. From Type menu, select Paragraph.
  3. Type values for the Indents options, and then Click OK.

 

Adding space above or below paragraphs

You can control the vertical space between paragraphs by specifying the amount of space before or after selected paragraphs or all paragraphs of a certain style.

NB: PageMaker never inserts space before a paragraph set to begin at the top of a column or page (using the Page Break Before or Column Break Before attribute). For those cases you must add the extra space manually by typing one or more paragraph returns.

 

To increase or decrease space before or after a paragraph:

  1. Select the paragraph you want to edit.
  2. Choose Type then Paragraph.
  3. In the paragraph Space options, specify the values you want in the Before and After text boxes.

 

Page formatting

This refers to formatting the whole page and may include things like column guides.

 

Columns guides

Column guides helps you divide the pages into columns that make the publication look more organized. The idea is to divide a large page into short readable sentence sections. Imagine if a newspaper page was not divided into columns! Therefore columns are mostly used in designing large publications, newspapers and journals. The difference between column guides and margin guides is that margin guides are around the edges of the printable page while column guides may split the page at the center. PageMaker. marks margins with a blue line but column guides with pink coloured lines.

 

To setup more columns:

  1. Turn to the publication page or master page
  2. From Layout menu, choose Column Guides. You can setup column guides separately in a double sided facing pages by clicking Set left and right pages separately check box as shown in Figure 4.17.
  3. Enter the number of columns you want on the page and the space you want between columns. If you are setting left and right pages separately, enter values for both pages.

4Select Adjust Layout if you want existing text and objects on the page to adjust to the revised column setup.

  1. Click OK.

 

Moving and locking columns

You can move the column guides by dragging them. The two lines forming the gutter between columns move in pairs and the space between the two lines remains consistent. Text and graphics already on the page are not affected when you drag column guides. Once you have set up your columns, you can lock them in place to prevent accidental moving.

 

To lock or unlock column and ruler guides:

From View menu, click Lock Guides.

Page numbering

To print page numbers in a publication, you must set the page numbers in the master pages. You do this by adding a page-number marker (a special character) that keeps track of the page order in the publication and ensures that each page is numbered correctly at all times.

 

To add page-number markers to master pages:

  1. Click the master page(s) icon
  2. Click where you want the page number to be placed.
  3. Press Ctrl + AIt +P. Page-number markers appear as RM (right master) or LM (left master) on the master pages but actual page numbers are displayed on each page of your document.

 

Changing page number style

By default, PageMaker applies the Arabic page numbering style ie 1,2,3,…..

 

To change the style:

  1. From File menu click Document Setup.
  2. In the Page setup dialog box, click Numbers.
  3. Select the numbering style you want to use then click OK to close the Page Numbering dialog box.
  4. To start page numbering from another number other than the default

one ( which is usually 1), type the starting page number in Start

Page # box in the Document setup dialog box.

 

Rearranging pages

In PageMaker, you can change the order of your pages by rearranging page thumbnails (icons at the bottom of the window that represent pages). Changing the order of pages does not affect the text objects in your publication even though they may have moved to different pages.

 

Sorting pages

  1. From Layout menu, click Sort Pages.
  2. Select the page or pages you want to move either a single-sided page or a pair of facing pages. To select one page in a pair of facing pages, press Ctrl and click the page.
  3. Drag the selection to the location you want. To insert a selection between a pair of facing pages, press the Ctrl key and drag the selection over the facing pages. Notice that a black bar indicates where the selected pages will be inserted.
  4. Release the mouse button to drop the page onto the new position. PageMaker automatically renumbers the pages. The original page icon appears dimmed and another page icon appears beside the thumbnail to indicate its new page number.
  5. Click ok to change the page order.

 

Inserting page and column breaks

Sometimes you may want certain text or paragraphs such as a new chapter to start at the top of a column or page regardless of editing or reformatting elsewhere in the document.

 

To set a page or column break:

.

  1. Select the paragraph or text you want to move to another column or page.
  2. From type menu, select paragraph to display the paragraph specifications dialog box.
  3. Check Column Break Before to force the paragraph to start at the top of the next available column or page break before as shown in Figure 4.19 to force the paragraph to start at the top of the next available page.

Adding headers and footers to a publication

A header refers to a line of text such as a page number, date, or a company name usually printed on the top margin of each page in a large document.

 

A footer on the other hand is a line of text printed in the bottom margin.

 

You can use the same header and footer throughout or use running headers and footers that indicates the content of each page as is the case in dictionaries, telephone and address directories.

 

Defining consistent headers and footers

To define header or footer common throughout the publication

  1. Click the master page(s) icon
  2. At the top of the page, click where you want header to appear or at the bottom click where you want the footer/header to be placed.
  3. Type the text that you want displayed on every page in your publication.

 

Defining Running headers and footers

1 Select the text block you want to use to create running headers and footers using the pointer tool.

2 Click Utilities, point to Plug-ins and then select Running Headers and Footers. A dialog box such as the one shown in Figure 4.20 is displayed with preview page that helps you correctly position the header or footer.

  1. Click the place icon and drag the header/footer place holder onto the text page.
  2. From content list box, select the words that will be used as headers or footers on every page e.g. the first word in the first paragraph then click Add. You can click the Preview button to preview the running headers and footers
  3. Click ok

 

Tracking and Kerning

Tracking refers to changing the visual denseness or openness of characters in a line while kerning is fixing particular pairs of letters that are too close or too far apart from each other such as To, Ta, We, we, Wo etc.

 

To apply a track:

  1. Select the text you want to track.
  2. From Type menu, choose Expert Tracking.
  3. Choose one of the five tracks options i.e. No Track, Loose, Tight or Very Tight as shown in Figure 4.21.

 

Very loose,

 

To automatically kern a pair of characters:

  1. Select the text you want to kern.
  2. From Type menu, click Expert Kerning
  3. In the dialog box such the one shown in Figure 4.22, click the appropriate slider button to make the text either tighter or looser.
  4. Click OK to apply the expert kerning.

 

To set a word or letter spacing:

  1. Select one or more paragraphs.

2.From the Type menu, click Paragraph to display the dialog in Figure 4.23.

  1. In the Paragraph dialog box, click Spacing to display Spacing dialog box.

4.In the Word Space or Letter Space text box, type new values.

  1. Click OK.

 

Measurements

 

Using rulers to measure objects

When using Page Maker, you can be able to design page layouts and graphics that are exact in measurement as specified using the horizontal and vertical rulers. The idea is to drag ruler guides to mark an area of the screen where you want to insert graphics or text that can fit in the guides.

For example, to draw a rectangle of 5cm by 5cm, set the rulers to measure in millimeters then drag and place ruler guides from the horizontal and vertical rulers to create a 5 x 5cm region on the screen. Finally, select the polygon tool and drag a polygon that fits exactly inside the marked region as shown in Figure 4.24.

 

Formatting graphical objects

Using the PageMaker tools and formatting effects, you can create very complex graphical objects.

Changing fill and stroke of graphics

To change fill or stroke of an object:

  1. Select the object by clicking it.
  2. From Element menu click Fill and Stroke.
  3. Select the type of fill or stroke you want.
  4. Select colors for the fill and stroke.

To apply fill:

  1. Select the object
  2. From Element menu, point to Fill then select the fill pattern you want to apply.

To apply stroke:

  1. Select the object
  2. From Element menu, point to Stroke then select the line style you want to apply.

 

Reshaping objects

To apply rounded comers to rectangles and squares:

  1. Select the rectangle or square you want to change comers
  2. From Element menu, choose Rounded Corners.
  3. Select the comer style you want, and then click OK. Figure 4.25 shows one rectangle without and another with rounded corners.

 

Reshaping a polygon

Once you draw a polygon, you can change it from the default rectangle or square to triangles, pentagons, hexagons and even a star.

To reshape a polygon:

  1. Select the polygon you want to reshape.
  2. Double click the selected polygon. PageMaker displays reshape placeholders.
  3. Reshape the polygon by dragging the vertices place holders.

 

To set the number of sides or create a star object:

  1. Select a polygon you want to reshape,
  2. From Element menu click Polygon Settings,
  3. In the Polygon settings dialog box, specify the number of sides you want, from three to a hundred.
  4. To create a star, enter a value in the Star inset box. A value of 0% means no star while 100% represents a star whose vertices meet at the centre.
  5. Click OK.

Copying an object:

  1. Select one or more objects.
  2. From Edit menu, choose Copy.
  3. Position the insertion pointer where you want to place the object.
  4. From Edit menu, select paste.

 

NB: You can quickly copy an object by right clicking it then selecting the copy command on the shortcut menu then paste in a new location. Alternatively, select the object then press Ctr+C to copy and Ctrl +V to paste in a new place.

 

 

Wrapping text around a graphical object

One of the best ways to enhance a publications visual impact is to wrap text around graphical objects. Wrapping determines how text behaves around an object. For example, you can select a wrap that makes text to surround an object without displacing it as shown in Figure 4.27(a).

 

To wrap text around an object:

  1. Select the object.
  2. From Element menu, choose Text Wrap to display the dialog box in

Figure 4.27(b).

 

  1. Click the middle wrap option as shown in Figure 4.27 (b)
  2. Specify a Text Flow option. The leftmost icon makes the text jump the object to the next page or column, while the middle icon allows text to jump over the object and continue on the same page. The rightmost icon creates a rectangular text wrap around all sides of an object.
  3. Enter standoff value (distance of the text from each side of the graphic) for the boundary.
  4. Click OK and notice how the text wraps around the object.

 

Importing graphics

You can import a graphic or text directly from another file or application by using a process called placing in PageMaker. In most cases, graphic files will be created in graphical based desktop publishers or picture editing software then imported into PageMaker. PageMaker has a very powerful object import engine that can be activated by the Place command.

 

The Place command is the main importing method. When you place text or a graphic, PageMaker establishes a link to the source file on the storage device (unless the file is an HTML document).

To import a graphic:

  1. Click the pointer tool. Select the frame in which you want to place the graphic. If you do not wish to place it in a frame then ignore this step.
  2. From File menu choose Place.
  3. Select the file you want to place, and then click the Open button.
  4. The cursor changes to become a loaded icon. Clicking any place on the paste board will place the new graphic at the clicked location.

NB: If you place using text tool, then the graphic that will be placed will be an inline graphic contained within the text object and will behave like text. It will become hard to format it separately as an object.

 

Grouping and ungrouping objects

You can group several objects into one, especially if you want to format, resize or move them as a single entity.

 

To group objects:

  1. Using the pointer tool, hold down the shift key as you click the objects to be grouped. This selects multiple objects.
  2. From Element menu, choose Group or simply press Ctrl + G on the keyboard.
  3. To select an object within the group then press Ctrl as you click the object.

To ungroup objects:

1, Select the Group.

  1. From Element choose. Ungroup.

 

Locking objects

You can lock individual objects in place in order to help preserve the design of your pages through all stages of production. You can change the attributes of a locked object, provided the change does not affect the object’s size or position. For example, you can change a colour or fill applied to a locked object, but not its degree of rotation or its skewing angle.

 

To lock or unlock an object:

  1. Select the object.
  2. From Element choose Lock Position to lock. Otherwise select. Unlock to unlock a locked object.

 

Rotating an object

The process of rotating an object falls under a group of operations called transformations because rotation changes the angular placing of an object. Other transforming operations include skewing and reflect­ing objects. However, this book limits itself to rotating objects.

To rotate an object with the rotating tool:

  1. Select the object.
  2. Select the Rotation tool from the toolbox. The pointer changes and becomes a Star bust.
  3. Position the Starburst at a fixed point or around the centre of the object.
  4. Drag the starburst away from the fixed point, in the direction you want to rotate the object. To rotate an intervals of 45 degrees, press Shift as you drag clockwise or anticlockwise. The rotation lever helps you control the amount of rotation. The farther you drag the starburst away from the fixed point, the more control you’ll have when you rotate the object.
  5. When the object is in the desired position, release the mouse button.

 

Cropping an object

When you import a graphic from another program or publication, you can cut off unwanted parts of the graphic starting from the edges that you do not want to print by the crop place holders.

 

To crop a graphic using the cropping tool:

  1. Select the cropping tool, then the graphic that You want to crop to display the place holders.
  2. Position the cropping tool so that the place holder shows through the center of the tool.
  3. Hold down the mouse button to turn the cropping tool into a double sided arrow, and drag inwards until only the part of the graphic you want in your publication remains. To show more of the graphic, drag away from the center of the graphic.
  4. To move the graphic within its frame, position the cropping tool at the centre of the graphic and hold down the mouse button. (in Windows, hold down the left mouse button.
  5. When the hand appears, drag until you see the part you want to appear in your publication, then release the mouse button. .

 

Printing a publication

Because. the main purpose of any desktop publisher is to produce publications, it is impossible to do so without printing. The choice of a printer depends on the quality of hardcopy desired.

 

To print a publication:

  1. From File menu, click Print. A dialog box appears in which you can

specify the following:

(a) The printer that you wish to use.

(b) The range of print in the Ranges box if you do not wish to print whole document.

(c) Number of copies to print per page in the Number of copies box.

(d) Whether to print blank pages or not.

(e) The print orientation.

(f) Whether to print both pages.

2 Click Print to start printing.

 

 

 

INTERNET AND E-MAIL

 

Chapter outline

 

5.1 Introduction.

5.2 Definition of the internet.

5.3 Development of the internet.

5.4 Importance of the internet.

5.5 Internet connectivity requirement.

5.6 Internet services.

5.7 Accessing the internet.

5.8 Electronic mail.

5.9 Accessing information on emerging issues.

 

Introduction

Computers can be connected together using data transmission media like cables, to communicate with one another. Communication in this case will be in the form of exchange of data and information. Such interconnection of computers to achieve message transfer is called networking. This is because the computers are linked to form a net.

 

In most cases computer networks are unique to an organization. For example the computers in your computer laboratory may be networked. Such a network is local in nature hence it is usually called a local area network (LAN).

 

Definition of the Internet

The term Internet can be broken down into two words, inter and net which implies that there is an interconnection of networks. Internet is therefore a large network of networks that covers the whole world and enables millions of computers from different organizations and people

To communicate globally. Because of its large size and great volume of information that passes through it, it is sometimes called the information superhighway.

 

Because of the flexibility of Internet technology, many organizations are creating their own private networks using the technology of the Internet. In this book we shall refer to the Internet (with capital letter I) as the information superhighway and the internet (with lower case letter (i) to refer to smaller networks.

 

5.3

 

Development of the Internet

In 1969, a research body in the USA called Advanced Research Projects Agency (ARP ) set up a computer network that connected four universities and was given the name ARPAnet. This network is viewed as the forerunner of today’s Internet. The aim was to allow sharing of data and information between computers. The main benefit was that there was fast communication between researchers through electronic mail or e-mail.

ARPA’s goal was to allow multiple users to send and receive information at the same time. The network used a special data transmission technique called packet switching which was later adopted for the Internet. A computer would send a packet that contained data, destination address information, error detection control information and packet sequencing information. By 1973 e-mail was the most common service on the Internet. It was not until 1979 that the first media companies connected to the Internet.

 

By 1981, many people had seen the importance of computer networking and the Internet. ARPAnet formed the backbone on which many organizations started connecting to, hence expanding it. The American military also became a big user of the Internet because they could communicate and tap into the resources available on the net. Next, the American Government decided to access the Internet for commercial purposes hence greatly increasing the traffic. By this time, for every twenty days, a new host computer was connected to the net.

 

By 1987, the Internet boasted of 10 000 host computers. However, its access was largely limited to the United States of America and some nations in Europe. As the importance of the Internet grew, businesses spent billions of dollars to improve it in order to offer better services to their clients. Fierce competition arose among software and hardware manufacturers as they came up with new technology to meet internetworking needs. The result was a great increase in message transmission capacity (bandwidth) and it became cheaper to work with the Internet.

 

By 1994, 3 million computers were connected to the Internet. Today, the Internet has grown and covered the whole world. Governments, private organizations and individuals are using the Internet in all spheres of daily life to send messages and conduct business.

 

Importance of Internet

The Internet is an extensive system of interlinked yet independent networks. It has evolved from a specialised communication network previously only used for military and academic purposes to a public network that is changing the way people carry out their daily activities.

 

The Internet is playing a very important role in all aspects of life, leading to the emergence of an elite society called the information society. The Internet’s importance can be between through its contribution to research, news and information dissemination, leisure and communication, a place to do business and many other profitable activities.

 

Internet connectivity requirements

For a computer to be able to connect to the Internet, there are several requirements one of them is to connect to a telecommunication service provider in order to transmit data over a wide region. This section seeks to discuss some minimum requirements for Internet connectivity to be achieved.

 

Telecommunication facilities

The Internet heavily relies on telecommunication facilities like the telephone lines, telephone exchange stations and satellite transmission in order to cover the whole wide world. Indeed, without these facilities, the Internet is as good as dead.

 

Therefore, a computer is connected to the external world through a telephone line and has to dial a remote computer on the net to establish a connection for data transfer. Dial-up connections, however, are quickly being replaced by dedicated digital data transmission telephone lines called dedicated digital leased lines. A leased line connection ensures constant and quick connection to the Internet unlike the dial-up that you need to dial every time you need to access the Internet.

 

Transmission of data on land takes the form of telephone exchange to telephone exchange until the data reaches the destination. However, intercontinental transfer of data is achieved by having satellite base stations transmitting g the data through a wireless uplink channel to the satellite. The satellite then sends the data signal to the base station on another continent where it is picked up and sent to telephone exchanges

 

For transfer to the destination computer. Figure 5.1 shows a simple logical illustration of the Internet.

Modems

A computer needs a special digital to analog and vice versa interface card called a modem that enables it to send and receive data on telephone lines. Remember that voice transmission on telephone lines is analog in nature while computers work with digital data. However, digital telephone lines make it possible for computers to transmit and receive digital data without a modem.

 

The word modem is short form for modulator – demodulator. During modulation, the data to be transmitted is changed from digital to analog so that it can be transmitted on the telephone lines. At the receiving end, the data is changed from analog to digital for the computer to understand it through a process called demodulation.

 

In most cases a modem is bought separately and plugged in one of the expansion slots on the motherboard. Some modems are external hence the computer may be connected to them through a network interface card. Most computers today come with an internal modem permanently fixed on the motherboard called an onboard modem.

 

Internet service providers (ISP’s)

These are companies that offer internet services to end users. For example, in Kenya, until recently, the sole gateway to the Internet for a long time was Telkom’s Jambonet. However, because Jambonet cannot meet the service needs for all users in Kenya, they lease some of their stake to Internet service providers like Africaonline@ and Swiftkenya@ who can now provide Internet services to the end users at a fee.

Internet software

The Internet interconnects millions of computers and telecommunication devices that have different configurations for hardware and software. Therefore, to achieve communication between these otherwise incompatible devices, special software called protocol is needed. A protocol is a set of rules that governs how two computers can send and receive data on the network.

 

For the Internet, the most common protocol is the Transmission control

Protocol (TCP) and Internet protocol (IP). As its name suggests, TCP governs how data is transferred from one place to the next, while IP determines the addressing system on the Internet. For example, each network and computer on the Internet is recognised by a special number called the IP address that enables data to be sent and received by it. These two are combined to form the TCP/IP protocol suite that is needed by any computer that needs to be connected to the Internet.

Internet services

The Internet has become very popular in today’s world because of the diverse but very important services that it offers to people. It is “seductive” i.e. once a person connects to it they find themselves falling in love with its power to provide information and services. The temptation is to continue using the Internet again and again.

 

The World Wide Web (www)

The World Wide Web can be viewed as a vast virtual space on the Internet where information pages called websites are installed. Most local area networks have a special computer called a server that stores information and data for others on the same network to access. In order to connect a network to the internet, the local area network needs an Internet server. This server is usually given the name world wide web (www) and has all the information that others on the Internet access. Hence, www is created by a network of Internet servers!

 

To enable easier access to information and data on the Internet, a standard method of preparing documents to be put on the Internet was developed. This method uses a special language such as hypertext markup language (HTML) to prepare documents called web pages that are  attractive and can be accessed on the Internet. HTML can be combined with other web page production tools to achieve wonderful websites. Individuals and organizations establish sites where their web documents can be placed

 

2for easy access by the external world. Such sites are called websites and each has a special address called a uniform resource locator (URL) that can be used to access them. For example, one common URL address is:

http://www.yahoo.com

The first part (http) stands for hypertext transfer protocol which is a protocol that transfers hypertext. www is the name of the Internet server (web server) on which the webpage resides. yahoo.com is usually called the domain name of the local area network. It uniquely identifies a particular local area network. On the Internet, two networks may have the same web server name but never the same domain.

 

Electronic mail (e-mail)

This is the exchange of electronic letters, data and graphics on the Internet.

Electronic commerce (e-commerce)

Many companies are increasingly using the Internet to sell and buy goods and services. This new business strategy where goods and services are sold over the internet is called electronic commerce (e-commerce).

 

One advantage of e-commerce is that a company can access customers all over the world and is not limited by space and time. Hence, small companies that establish websites to auction their goods and services not only reduce operating costs but increase their sales. For example, most vehicle importers buy vehicles directly from international dealers by accessing their websites and placing orders.

 

However, the major challenges that face e-commerce are that people deal with each other without ever meeting physically and there is lack of proper laws to govern such business.

 

Electronic learning (e-Iearning)

Apart from the fact that academic materials for all levels of education are readily available on the Internet (web), the Internet has opened the door for those who would like to do distance education programs and home schooling. Learning through interaction with special programs on the computer is called electronic learning (e-Iearning).

 

Internet fax

The Internet provides you with complete fax facilities from your computer. You can configure fax settings, send and receive faxes, track and monitor fax activity, and access archived faxes. Using fax, you can choose to send and receive faxes with a local fax device attached to your computer, or with a remote fax device connected to fax resources located on a network.

 

Other Internet services

  1. News media on the net. All major media houses post their daily news on the Internet for their clientele to access. Hence information about an event can be sent right round the globe within a very short time.
  2. Health information on the net. The Internet provides latest medical news and research findings for practitioners and scholars.
  3. Music and entertainment on the net. It is possible to listen to music on the web and to watch video clips if your computer is a multimedia machine.
  4. Chatting on the net. People can sign into a chat room and exchange ideas freely through discussion. Chat rooms are a common feature and usually put together people of common interest to exchange ideas. For example, if you sign into a chartroom for politics, then you can exchange political views with otherwise unknown Internet friends who can read your typed comments as you view theirs. Try accessing www. Try. Com to see listings of chat topics that you can participate in on-line. However, you need to be careful in selecting the people to chat with on the web because some people who use the chat rooms have intentions of harming others.

Accessing the Internet

There are many applications that enable a person to access the Internet. Such applications are called web browsers. Some of them have text interface while the most popular have graphical user interface. Perhaps, the most common browsers in the world today are Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.

 

Therefore before accessing the Internet, a person must start the browser software. This book will use Internet Explorer for demonstration,

  1. The back button returns the browser to the immediate former webpage.
  2. The next button moves the browser to the next web page in case a person had clicked the back button.
  3. The stop button tells the browser to stop searching/loading a website.
  4. The refresh button tells the browser to try accessing a web site address again after failure
  5. The search button enables a person to search for words on the website.
  6. Clicking the favorites button displays all web addresses in the’ favorites” folder.
  7. The history button displays the website addresses that were visited in the recent past.
  8. The mail button enables a person to view and send mail and WebPages to links.
  9. The print button enables a person to print the web pages.
  10. The Go button tells the browser to load the current web page whose address is in the address bar.
  11. The address bar allows the user to type the address of a website to be accessed.
  12. The home button moves the user to the first page of the website.

 

Log in/sign in

To access a website, type the full address of the website in the address bar then press the Enter key on the keyboard. If the Internet connection is working properly, the browser will start connecting to the requested web site or URL. Notice that the status bar will be reading something like “connecting to site www.yahoo.com “

 

Some web sites allow free access to all their pages by all visitors. However, others require people to be members hence a new visitor has to register (sign up) by filling some on-line forms. The registration process gives the visitor a user name and password that can be used to sign in or log on the website for each successive visit. This is very common for e-mail account providers like at www.mail.yahoo.com.

 

Websites that give users a chance to log in are better especially if the services offered need some degree of privacy and customizing for

Individual customers e.g. it would be a gross mistake to have everybody accessing the other’s e-mail account.

 

Surf/browse

Surfing or browsing is the process of accessing Internet resources like web pages and websites. This is done by either typing the URL address of a site in the address bar of the browser or by following special links that lead to web pages called hyperlinks.

 

Hyperlinks and search engines

A hyperlink is a text or picture on an electronic document, especially web page that causes other web pages to open when the link is clicked. A hyperlink can be identified by the fact that the mouse pointer changes to look like a palm having four folded fingers with the index finger not folded but pointing outwards.

 

The Internet is a big forest of web pages and websites. Searching for particular materials or resources can be a nightmare because of the massive volumes of available documents and resources. To make the work a bit easy, special websites that maintain lists of hyperlinks are available. These websites are called search engines. They have special programs called robots or spiders that traverse the web from one hyperlink to the next and when they find new material, they add them to their indexes or databases. Figure 5.4 below shows one of the most common search engines called Google found at www.google.com

The user searches for a word by typing a few key words in the search field of the engine then clicking the search button. The engine searches its database for links to the information requested and displays a list of links from which the user can now access information by clicking them to open web pages.

 

Example of search engines include: www.google.com, www.hotmail.com and www.yahoo.com.

 

Downloading/saving/printing web content

After searching and finding information on the Internet, you may want to save the information locally on your computer for future reference. The process of transferring information from a remote computer to a local storage is called downloading. To download a file, the following procedure is followed:

  1. Right click the hyperlink to the file.
  2. On the shortcut menu, click the Save target as command.
  3. After some searching the browser displays the save as dialog box. Specify the folder or drive where the file is to be saved then type a unique name for the file in the name box.
  4. Click the Save button and the download progress dialog appears on the screen. Unless otherwise selected, the download dialog will notify the user at the end of the download process.

Pen the file in its application to view it.

 

NB: If you download a file whose application is not currently installed on the computer, then you may not be able to view its contents. For example, if you download a file that was created in Microsoft Word then you can only open it in the same application.

 

To print a file, open it in the application in which it was created then send it to the printer for printing. You can also print a web page directly from the browser window by clicking File then Print.

 

Electronic mail (e-mail)

Electronic mail refers to the sending and receiving of electronic letters and documents on the Internet. This feature serves to popularize the Internet even among non-technical people. For many, gone are the days when paper mail (of late called snail mail) would be sent and the recipient had to wait for long before receiving it. E-mail is fast because it takes

Only a few seconds to reach the recipient regardless of where they are in the world.

 

E-mail software

E-mail software falls under a special group of application packages called communication SoftArt. It is specially designed and developed to help a person to read and send individual text documents on the Internet as long as both the sender and receiver have an e-mail address.

 

Like the normal postal address, an e-mail address directs the computers on the Internet on where to deliver the e-mail message. A typical e-mail address would look like this: chemwex@yahoo.com

  1. chemwex is the user name and is usually coined by the user during

E-mail account registration.

  1. @ is the symbol for Hat” which actually separates the user name from the rest of the address.
  2. Yahoo. Com is the name of the host computer in the network i.e. the computer on which the e-mail account is hosted.
  3. The period H. ” is read as dot and is used to separate different parts of the e-mail address.
  4. Com identifies the type of institution offering a particular service(s) and is called the domain, meaning it is a commercial institution. Other common domains include:

 

Domain                                                                        Type

 

.edu                                                                   Educational institution

.gov                                                                   Government institution

.org                                                                   Non-profit making organization

.mil                                                                   Military organization

.co                                                                               Commercial institution

 

Sometimes another two letter extension is added after the domain name to show the country where the site is located e.g. injsmith@yahoo.co.uk, .uk stands for United Kingdom. Other countries domain name includes .ke (Kenya) .ug (Uganda, :tz (Tanzania), .jp (Japan), .au (Australia) etc.

 

E-mail facilities

Basically all e-mail software packages provide the user with ability to receive messages, display them, reply to the messages, compose new ones and store received messages.      ‘

 

Mails

  1. Checking mail In order to check mail the user has to open the e­mail account by providing the correct user name and password. While

In the e-mail account, click the Inbox command to view a link list of all the mails that you have received. To view a message, simply click its link and it opens on the screen for reading.

  1. To compose a message, click the Col11posebutton. The e-mail software opens a blank screen on which you can type the new message. Figure.5.5 shows a typical e-mail screen for composing a message.

 

  1. To send mail, type the correct e-mail address of the recipient in the to: text box. Type a subject in the subject box e.g. if it is a letter to a friend, type “Hi”. Finally click the Send, or send / receive button, and your message will be sent.
  2. Forwarded messages can be read and sent on to other people. Most of such messages are fun pages, poems, e-cards etc. After reading,

Simply click the Forward button and then provide the addresses of the recipients. Click the Send button to send.

  1. An e-mail message can be saved using the normal procedure for saving e.g. Click File, Save as then provide the name of the file and click save button.
  2. To print e-mail, select the text to be printed then click the File – Print command. In the print dialog box select the options for the page size, orientation etc. then click the Print button.

 

File attachment:

E-mail software also enables a person to attach other files like pictures, music and movie clips to an e-mail for sharing with friends before sending. The recipient can then download the attached files or simply view them on the screen. A good example where people use attachments is on-line job applications where a person attaches curriculum vitae to an e-mail message. To attach a file:

  1. Start the e-mail software i.e. Microsoft outlook express.
  2. Click File then New or open a composed e-mail.
  3. Specify the recipients address and the subject.
  4. Click the Insert menu then File attachment. A dialog box appears where you chose the file you want to attach.
  5. Select the file then click the Attach button.
  6. An attachment bar is inserted in the e-mail window with a name of the file you chose.
  7. Click Send to send the e-mail.

 

NB: You can also attach a file by simply clicking the attach button.

 

On-line meetings

It is possible to hold on-line meetings with people by sending mail to them. For example, on-line interviews may involve a person sending electronic mail composed of interview questions to a recipient who can read and answer back immediately. This method may not be as effective as a face to face interview or discussion but it is very useful in situations where traveling may be impossible or too expensive.

 

Telephone messages

Because of integration between mobile telephony and the Internet technology, it is possible to send e-mail to a mobile handset and a mobile message to e-mail account. This mobile computing is made possible by a special Internet access protocol called wireless access protocol (WAP) and wireless markup language (WML).

 

Contact management

Most mail programs allow the user to develop an address book which holds ‘contact information like e-mail addresses of different people along with other necessary information. The e-mail software usually provides a simple way of accessing these contacts when required. To create a new contact:

 

  1. Start the e-mail software i.e. Microsoft express.
  2. From the tools menu, click Address book or simply click the address book button.
  3. From the address book window click File then: Contact.
  4. Click the Name tab and enter the contact details.
  5. Click the Add button and add the contact into the contact list.
  6. Close the contact window then the address book.

 

5.9

Accessing information on emerging issues

The Internet is a storehouse for all types of information, presented in the form of text documents, pictures, sound and even video. Many emerging

Issues in the world today may not be properly documented in terms of hardcopy textbooks and journals but the Internet has a wide range of information concerning the issues. Emerging issues in this context refer to HIV/AIDS, drug abuse, environmental issues and moral issues.

 

Therefore, it is already evident that before embarking on finding any information on the web, a person needs to carefully plan their search to

Avoid wasting a lot of time wading through “junk” or useless material.

I

 

Steps for searching

  1. Plan for your search. You must develop a search strategy. Consider the following questions before starting to search for information: (a) what would be the best place to find the information required? (b) What tool best suits the work at hand?

(c) What key words can best describe the search problem?

  1. There is always the best place to start the search. One of the best places is on websites of leading media houses like www.cnn.com and www.nationaudio.co.ke because you are likely to get links to the latest research discoveries in your area of interest.
  2. after checking out on the news houses, you can now open some search engines and type the key words in the search field. Use different search engines to look for information on all the emerging issues mentioned above because different search engines give different search results.

 

 

DATA SECURITY AND CONTROLS

 

Chapter outline

 

6.1 Introduction and definition.

6.2 Security threats and control measures. 6.3 Computer crimes.

6.4 Detection and protection

6.5 Laws governing protection of information.

 

6.1 Introduction and definition

Computer information systems are becoming more and more important in daily life. Governments, private enterprises and individuals have found the need to protect data and information that is in their custody against unauthorized access, disclosure or damage. This is because of the rise of the information age and society leading to the subsequent view of information as a scarce valuable resource. This has posed threats to data and information both from known and unknown sources.

 

Data and information security Data security involves:

  1. Protection of data and information against unauthorized access or

Modification.

  1. Denial of data and information to unauthorized users.
  2. Provision of data and information to authorized users.

 

Data security also includes all the measures that will be taken to detect, document and counter the threats to data and information.

 

Data and information privacy

Private data or information is that which belongs to an individual and must not be accessed by or disclosed to any other person unless with direct permission from the owner. On the other hand, the data or information held by a government or organization about people is confidential data. This data and information may be seen by many authorized persons without the knowledge of the owner. However, it should not be used for commercial gain or any other unofficial purpose without the owner being informed. This data must also be protected against unauthorized access or disclosure.

 

6.2 Security threats and control measures

 

Viruses

A computer virus is a destructive program that attaches itself to other files and installs itself without permission on the computer when the files are opened for use. The virus may cause havoc on the computer system, for example, it may delete data on storage devices or interfere with the proper functioning of the computer system.

 

Types of computer viruses include:

  1. Boot sector viruses – they destroy the booting information on storage devices.
  2. File viruses – attach themselves to files.
  3. Hoax viruses – Come as e-mail with an attractive subject and launches itself when e-mail is opened.
  4. Trojans – they appear to perform necessary functions but perform other undesirable activities in the background without user knowledge.
  5. Worms – viruses that stick in the computer memory.
  6. Backdoors – may be a Trojan or a worm that allows hidden access to a computer system.

Control measures against viruses

  1. Install the latest versions of anti-virus software on the computers.

Make sure that you continuously update the anti-virus software with new virus definitions to counter the new viruses that are being manufactured on a daily basis.

  1. Avoid foreign diskettes in the computer room. If they have to be used, they must first be scanned for viruses.
  2. Avoid opening mail attachments before scanning them for viruses.

 

Unauthorized access

Data and information is always under constant threat from people who may want to access it without permission. Such persons will usually have a bad intention either to commit fraud, steal the information and ­destroy or corrupt the data. Unauthorized access may take the following forms:

 

Eavesdropping

This is tapping into communication channels to get information. Hackers mainly use eavesdropping e.g. to obtain numbers of credit cards.

 

Surveillance (monitoring)

 

This is where a person may keep a profile of all computer activities done

By another person or people. The information gathered may be used for one reason or the other e.g. spreading propaganda or sabotage. Many websites keep track of your activities using special programs called cookies.

 

Industrial espionage

Spying on your competitor to get information that you can use to counter or finish the competitor. This is mostly done with an aim to get ideas on how to counter by developing similar approach or sabotage.

 

Also unauthorized access can be as follows:

  1. An employee who is not supposed to view or see sensitive data by

mistake or design gets it.

  1. Strangers who may stray into the computer room when nobody is using the computers.
  2. Forced entry into the computer room through weak access points.
  3. Network access in case the computers are networked and connected to the external world.

 

Control measures against unauthorized access

  1. Enforce data and information access control policies on all employees.
  2. Encrypt the data and information during transmission (data encryption is discussed in details later in the chapter).
  3. Keep the computer room closed when nobody is using it.
  4. Reinforce the weak access points like doors and windows with metallic grills and burglar alarms.
  5. Enforce network security measures.
  6. Use files passwords to deter any persons who may get to the electronic files.

Computer errors and accidental access

Sometimes, threats to data and information come from people making mistakes like printing sensitive reports and unsuspectingly giving them to unauthorized person(s). Also, if end users have too much privilege that allows them to change or access sensitive files on the computer then accidental access mistakes may occur.

 

Errors and accidental access to data and information may be as a result of people experimenting with features they are not familiar with. For example, a person may innocently download a file without knowing that it is self-installing and it is dangerous to the system.

 

Control measures against computer errors and accidents

  1. Give various file access privileges and roles to the end users and technical staff in the organization i.e. denies access permissions to certain groups of users for certain files and computers.
  2. Set up a comprehensive error recovery strategy in the organization.

 

Theft

The threat of theft to data and information is a real one. Some information is so valuable that business competitors or some governments can pay a fortune to somebody who can steal the information for them to use. Therefore the following control measures should be taken to prevent theft of hardware, software and information.

 

Control against theft

  1. Employ guards to keep watch over data and information centers and

Backups.

  1. Burglar proofs the computer room.
  2. Reinforce weak access points like the windows, door and roofing

With metallic grills and strong padlocks.

  1. Create backups in locations away from the main computing centre.

 

Computer crimes

6.3 Trespass

The term trespass here refers to two things. One is the illegal physical entry to restricted places where computer hardware, software and backed up data is kept. The other form would be accessing information illegally

 

B­on a local or remote computer over a network. Trespass is not allowed at all and should be discouraged.

 

Hacking

A hacker is a person who intentionally breaks codes and passwords to gain unauthorized entry to computer system data and information files. The hacker therefore violates the security measures put in place such as breaking through passwords or finding weak access points in software.

 

There are various motivations for hacking. One is that some people like the challenge and they feel great after successful hacking, while some do it for computer and software producer companies that want to secure their systems by reducing weaknesses discovered after professional hacking. The most vulnerable computers to this crime are the networked computers faced with hackers working remotely.

 

Tapping

In this case, a person sends an intelligent program on a host computer that sends him information from the computer. Another way is to “spy” on a networked computer using special programs that are able to intercept messages being sent and received by the unsuspecting computer.

 

Cracking

Cracking usually refers to the use of guesswork over and over again by a person until he/she finally discovers a weakness in the security policies or codes of software. Cracking is usually done by people who have some idea of passwords or user names of authorized staff.

 

Another form of cracking is trying to look for weak access points in software. For example, Microsoft announced a big weakness in some versions of Windows software that could only be sealed using a special corrective program prepared by them. Such corrective programs are called patches. It is advisable therefore to install the latest patches in software.

 

Piracy

Piracy means making illegal copies of copyrighted software, information or data. Software, information and data are protected by the copyright law. There are several ways of reducing piracy:

 

  1. Enact laws that protect the owners of data and information against. Piracy.
  2. Make software cheap enough to increase affordability.
  3. Use licenses and certificates to identify originals.
  4. Set installation passwords that deter illegal installation of software.

 

Fraud

Computer fraud is the use of computers to conceal information or cheat other people with the intention of gaining money or information. Fraudsters can be either employees in the company or outsiders who are smart enough to defraud unsuspecting people. Some fraud may involve production and use of fake documents.

 

An example of fraud is where one person created an intelligent program in the tax department that could credit his account with cents from all the tax payers. He ended up becoming very rich before he was discovered.

 

Sabotage

This is the illegal destruction of data and information with the aim of crippling service delivery or causing great loss to an organization. Sabotage is usually carried out by disgruntled employees or those sent by competitors to cause harm to the organization.

 

Alteration

This is the illegal changing of data and information without permission with the aim of gaining or misinforming the authorized users. Alteration is usually done by those people who wish to hide the truth. To avoid this, do not give data editing capabilities to just anybody without vetting. Secondly, the person altering data may be forced to sign in order for the system to accept altering the information.

 

Alteration of data compromises the qualities of good data like reliability, relevance and integrity.

 

6.4

 

Detector and protection against computer crimes

After seeing the dangers that information systems are faced with due to threats to data and information and perpetration of computer crimes, it is important to look at some measures that can be taken to detect, prevent computer crimes and seal security loopholes.

 

Audit trial

This is a careful study of an information system by experts in order to establish or find out all the weaknesses in the system that could lead to security threats and weak access points for crimesters. An audit of the information system may seek to answer the following questions:

  1. Is. the information system meeting all its originally intended design objectives?
  2. Have all the security measures been put in place to reduce the risk of computer crimes?
  3. Are the computers secured in physically restricted areas?
  4. Is there backup for data and information of the system that can ensure continuity of services even when something serious happens to the current system?
  5. What real risks face the system at present or in future?

 

Data encryption

Data on transit over a network faces many dangers of being tapped, listened to or copied to unauthorized destinations. Such data can be protected by mixing it up into a form that only the sender and receiver can be able to understand by reconstructing the original message from the mix. This is called data encryption. The message to be encrypted is called the plain text document. After encryption using a particular order called algorithm or key, it is sent as cyphertext on the network. The recipient receives it and decrypts it using a reverse algorithm to the one used during encryption called a decryption key to get the original plain text document. Hence without the decryption key nobody can be able to reconstruct the initial message. Figure 6.1 is a flow diagram showing how a message can be encrypted and decrypted to enhance message security.

 

6.5 Log files

This is special system files that keep a record (1og) of events on the use of the computers and resources of the information system. This is because each user is assigned a user name and password or account. The information system administrator can therefore easily track who accessed the system, ‘when and what they did on the system. This unto second information can help monitor and track people who are likely to violate system security policies.

 

The most dangerous aspect in this case is when genuine users lose or give their passwords to unauthorized users.

 

Firewalls

A firewall is a device or software system t at filters the data and information exchanged between different networks by enforcing t e host networks access control policy. The main aim of a firewall is to monitor and control access to or from protected networks. People who do not have permission (remote requests) cannot access the network and those within cannot access firewall restricted sites outside the network.

 

Laws governing protection of information

Although most countries do not have laws that govern data and information handling, the awakening has started and the laws are being developed. The “right to privacy” is expected by all people. For example, the data protection law may have the following provisions:

  1. Data is not transferred to other countries without the owner’s permission.
  2. Data and information should be kept secure against loss or exposure.
  3. Data and information should not be kept longer than necessary.
  4. Data and information should be accurate and up to date.
  5. Data and information be collected, used and kept for specified lawful purposes.

 

Therefore, countries are encouraged to develop a data and information handling legal framework that will protect people’s data and information.

MOKASA KCSE JOINT HISTORY EXAMS & MARKING SCHEMES PP2

HIST PAPER 2 CLUSTER QUESTIONS & MARKING SCHEME

SECTION A ( 25MKS )

  1. Identify any two classifications of written sources of information on History and Government. 2 mks               
  • Archives
  • Manuscripts
  • Printed sources 2×1 = 2mk
    1. Give one social activity that was practised by early man during the New Stone Age period. 1 mk
  • Development of a language for communication.
  • Lived in small groups
  • Practised religion and worship system.
  • Practised decoration of huts with animal paintings.
  • Use of red ochre to paint their bodies for beautification. 1 x 1=1mk
    1. State two effects of the Land Enclosure System in Britain during the Agrarian Revolution
  • It led to landlessness after poor peasants were forced to sell off their land.
  • Farmers were able to use their title deeds to borrow loans.
  • It allowed use of machines
  • Farmers were able to specialise in crop growing or animal keeping
  • Landless peasants migrated to towns and the new world. 2 x 1 = 2mks
  • Fencing prevented inbreeding and spread of diseases
  • It led to large scale farming/ ranches.
  1. Highlight two negative effects of the trans-Saharan trade.
  • Increased warfare.
  • Increased slavery
  • Increased insecurity
  • Hatred and suspicion among the people
  • Destruction of wild life
  • Depopulation due to increased capture of slaves                2 x 1 =2mks
    1. Name the first woman astronaut to travel into space
  • Sally K.Ride 1 x 1= 1mk
    1. State two importance’s of the radio as a form of communication.
  • Passes information fast.
  • Compliments transport systems by sending signals and updates
  • Broadcasts education programmes
  • Entertainment
  • Advertising
  • Used in space exploration in guiding space crafts.                               2 x 1=2mks
    1. Give two ways how scientific inventions have negatively impacted on Agriculture
  • Increase in food related diseases due to GMOs
  • Pesticides are toxic and harmful
  • Pests have become resistant to pesticides
  • Soil fertility has been impoverished
  • Traditional crops have been abandoned.
  • Unemployment as a result of mechanisation 2 x 1 = 2mks
    1. What was the title given to the highest political and religious leader of the Shona?
  • MweneMutapa 1mk
    1. Identify one chartered company that was used by the Europeans to acquire colonies in Africa.
  • Imperial British East Africa company
  • German East African Company
  • Royal Niger Company
  • British South African Company.

NB: Company name must be written in full

  1. State one way how the Lochner treaty benefited King Lewanika individually,
  • He would be paid $2000 p.a and royalties of 4% for all minerals extracted.
  • He would continue to be King but with lesser powers. 1 x 1 = 1mk
    1. Outline one social factor that led to the rise of Nationalism in Africa
  • Africans were subjected to cultural discriminations as their cultures were branded primitive.
  • The urban environment enabled Africans to interact and overcome tribal prejudices.
  • Africans were denied social services
  • Acquisition of western education exposed Africans new ideas about nationhood and patriotism.
  • Christian teachings on equality influenced Africans to question the behaviour of European. 1 x 1 = 1mks
    1. State one military alliance that was formed by European nations before the First World War.
  • Triple Entente.
  • Triple Alliance 1 x 1 =1mk
    1. Name two permanent member states of the United Nations security council
  • China
  • Russia
  • France
  • United states of America (USA)
  • Britain 2 x 1=  2mks
    1. State one way how the Cold War was witnessed in Africa
  • Overthrowing of Ethiopian government with the support of USSR in 1974
  • USSR supported Angola to acquire independence against Portugal while USA supported rebels.
  • Government of DRC was supported by NATO. 2 x 1 = 2mks
    1. Give two organs of the Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS)
  • Authority of Heads of states & Governments
  • Council of ministers.
  • Secretariat
  • Tribunal
  • Specialised commissions. 2 x 1 = 2mks
    1. State two political challenges facing the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) since independence.
  • Political assassinations of various leaders
  • Ethnic based political wars
  • Threats of seceding by some regions
  • Interference by former colonialists
  • Overthrowing of governments
  • Frequent rebellions
  • Army mutinies 2 x 1 = 2 mks
    1. State the system of government practised in Britain.
  • Constitutional Monarchy 1 x 1 =1 mk

 

SECTION B (45MARKS )

ANSWER ANY THREE QUESTONS IN THIS SECTION.

 

  1. State five physical changes that early man underwent tomark a clear distinction between apes and modern man.
  • The skull size became bigger to accommodate larger brains.
  • The size of jaws and teeth became smaller due to softer diets.
  • The fore arms and hands became shorter and appropriate for upright movement.
  • The thumb finger separated from the other fingers for former grip.
  • The leg and foot formation changed to support the body and maintain balance.
  • The tail disappeared.
  • The hair disappeared. any 5 x 1 = 5mks
  1. Explain five features of early man’s culture during the Neolithic period 10mks
  • They made smaller and better tools called Microliths
  • They practised large scale hunting and gathering because they lived in larger groups.
  • They practised fishing
  • They began domestication of crop and animals which marked the beginning of agriculture.
  • They made better shelters using tree branches and grass.
  • They lived a more settled life as a result of having semi permanent settlements.
  • The formulated rules and regulations to govern their social way of life/government.
  • They developed religion because they began to depend much more on natural forces such as the rain for livelihood.
  • They specialised in crafts such as basketry, pottery, weaving
  • They practised smelting of bronze and iron.
  • They invented language which was crucial for communication and strengthening of social bonds and preservation of cultures..                                              Any 5 x 2 = 10mks
  1. State five disadvantages of using animals as a means of transport 5mk
  • It’s tedious and slow because animals must feed and drink frequently along the way.
  • Pack animals may be attacked by wild animals
  • Animals can only travel relatively shorter distances compared to modern forms of transport.
  • Some animals are stubborn and difficult to control or tame.
  • Animals carry smaller loads than vehicles.
  • They can only travel during the day.
  • Animals are affected by diseases Any 5 x 1 = 5mks
  1. Explain five economic effects of modern forms of transport.
  • Local and international trade has been promoted through faster and efficient movement of goods across the globe.
  • The growth of the service sector has been boosted by modern means of transport through provision of insurance and banking services.
  • Agricultural production has increased because farmers can transport farm inputs and produce much faster.
  • Modern transport has influenced industrialisation because raw materials, finished goods and workers can be moved much faster and further across the globe.
  • Governments generate revenue through various charges and levies.
  • They create jobs/ employment opportunities.
  • Modern transport systems have enhanced exploitation of natural resources because they can be easily accessed.
  • They have boosted tourism since tourist attraction sites can be reached easily and fast.

5 x 2 = 10 mks

  1. State five uses of Gold in Africa in the early days.
  • Making ornaments
  • Making utensils
  • Making swords and flint knife handles.
  • Was used as a measure and store of wealth.
  • Making weapons.
  • Used as a trade item using gold bars and gold dust.
  • Used as a currency/medium of exchange/gold coins Any 5 x 1 = 5mks
  1. Explain 5 effects of iron working technology in Africa.
  • Widespread use of iron led to the decline of the use of other metals.
  • It led to the emergence urban centres which began as centres of iron working
  • It led to the growth of trade due to increased demand for iron ore and iron tools.
  • Use of iron tools improved agriculture as more land was put under cultivation.
  • There was increased food production as a result of increased use of iron tools/population increase
  • People were able to migrate and settle into new areas by using iron tools to clear forests.
  • Iron working led to specialisation in other crafts by those who were not smithers.
  • The smithers and smelters gained recognition and status in society because of the wealth they generated and their skills.
  • There was increased warfare and intercommunity conflicts lead to the rise of powerful kingdoms.                                                           Any 5 x 2 = 10 mks21.A
  • 21 a. Explain five causes of the Mandinka rebellion
  • SamoriToure wanted to safeguard the independence of his empire
  • Samori did not want to lose the Bure gold mines.
  • The French threatenedSamori’s plans of territorial expansion into areas they occupied.
  • Samori was confident of his large and well trained army and did not fear fighting with the French.
  • Samori was disappointed by the failure of the British to support him against the French.
  • Samori was not happy with the French who were selling arms to his enemies such as chief Tieba of Sikasso.
  • Samori was influenced by friends to resist e.g Chief Khama of Ngwato    Any 5 x 1 = 5mks
  1. Explain five results of the Chimurenga war
  • Company rule was discredited by the colonial office due to poor administration.
  • Africans eventually lost their independence and the British established their authority over the area.
  • Africans were exposed to great famine since the war hindered them from engaging infarming.
  • There was massive loss of lives.
  • There was massive destruction of property
  • TheIndunas were to be recognized as headmen.
  • No Shona police would be stationed in Matebele land.
  • There was massive land alienation and Africans were confined in reserves.
  • Africans were subjected to forced labour in European farms.
  • Africans were subjected to taxation.
  • Missionaries were able to spread Christianity since the people had lost confidence in their traditional religion.                                              Any 5 x 2 = 10mks

SECTION C (30 MARKS)

 

ANSWER ANY TWO QUESTIONS IN THIS SECTION.

22

  1. State three factors that led to the growth of Nationalism in Mozambique.
  • Arbitrary replacement of traditional leaders.
  • Land alienation by Portuguese settlers.
  • Introduction of taxes.
  • Violation of African cultures by Portuguese officials.
  • Forced labour and mistreatment of Africans in settler farms.
  • Racial discrimination against Africans in settlement schemes and semi skilled jobs.
  • Restrictions of African movement and press censorship.
  • Cruelty of the colonial police.. Any 3 x 1 = 3 mks
  1. Explain six factors that favoured FRELIMO in the war against the Portuguese colonial government.
  • The Portuguese did not have enough troops to deal with the African random attacks ( guerrilla warfare)
  • Many Africans joined the nationalist war voluntarily.
  • The region was heavily forested with narrow foot paths which rendered Portuguese aircraft and armoured vehicles ineffective.
  • The fighters were supported by the civilians with information of Portuguese movements.
  • The FRELIMO fighters cultivated their own crops thus were not overburdening the local population
  • The FRELIMO fighters were friendly to locals.
  • They were supported by communist countries such as USSR, China and Czechoslovakia
  • The guerrillas were supported by independent African countries through the OAU liberation committee.
  • FRELIMO abolished all forms of exploitation in the liberated areas and built social amenities thus receiving the support of local people
  • They respected women and recognised their role in mobilising Africans to support the struggle.
  • Ethnicity was removed through having people of different ethnic groups in the same fighting units.
  • They were supported by fighters from Southern Rhodesia (mercenaries). Any 6 x 2 = 12mks 

23

  1. State three conditions given to the Germans to surrender at the end of world war one (WWI)
  • To withdraw from all occupied territories including overseas colonies.
  • Withdrawal of all German forces North of River Rhine.
  • Surrender of all German warships to the Allied forces.
  • Occupation of some parts of Germany by the Allied forces.
  • Release of all prisoners of war. Any 3 x 1 = 3mks
  1. Explain six causes of the second world war
  • The rise of nationalism after WWI as nations were more concerned with their domestic affairs than international affairs.
  • The Great Depression resulted in the collapse of many European economies and they adopted protectionist politics and aggression in a bid to generate wealth.
  • Some nations continued to violate the terms of the Versailles treaty and this threatened world peace.
  • The policy of Appeasement adopted by Britain and France enabled some countries to continue with acts of aggression further threatening world peace.
  • The League of Nations had failed to maintain world peace.
  • Emergence of dictators across Europe and their acts of aggression further caused international tension.

                                                                                                    6 x2=12mks

24

  1. Identify any three political parties in India. 3mks
  • Congress party
  • Bharatiya Janata party
  • Communist parties
  • Regional parties                                                                                                        3×1= 3mks
  1. Explain six powers and functions of the president in India
  • Powers to declare emergency in a state and rule that state by decree
  • Powers to veto or assent to bills
  • Commander in chief of all armed forces
  • Powers to appoint supreme court judges and state governors
  • Powers to appoint the prime minister on the advice of parliament.
  • Is the major symbol of unity in the country

Any 6×2= 12mks

2023 KCPE Mathematics Commonly Tested Questions; Key Areas

COMMONLY KCPE TESTED QUESTIONS

MATHEMATICS

200 PREDICTION QUESTIONS

                                              Time: 2 Hours 30 Mins

  1. Which of the following is ten million ten thousand and ten?
    1. 10 010 100
    2. 10 010 010
    3. 10 100 010
    4. 10 001 010
  2. What is the 299.995 rounded off to the nearest two decimal places?
  3. How many days are there between 5th February and 4th April of a leap year?
  4. What is the place value of digit 9 in sum of 428 657 and 368 725?
  5. What is the value of 62 +42 +3 (2+4)?

2 x 7

  1. Chebet bought the following items from a shop

2-2 litre bottles of cooking oil @ 120 per litre

3kg sugar @ sh. 105

45kg rice @ sh. 80 5 rolls of tissues for sh. 100

If she paid using 2 – 1000 shilling note, how much balance did she get?

  1. The triangle ABC below is drawn to scale.

What is the size of angle ACB?

  1. What is the sum of the square of 1% and the square root of 2%? %
  2. What is the next number in the sequence? 1, 4, 9, 16,
  3. What is the simplified form of

3(2x + 3y) + 2(4x + 5y)

  1. The table below shows arrival and departure timetable for the train from towns A, B, C and D.
Town Arrival Departure
A   7.30am
B 9.15am 9.30am
C 11.25 am 11.35am
D 1.25pm  

How long did it take the train to travel from town B to town D?

  1. The area of a square plot of land was 625m?.

What was twice its perimeter?

  1. Construct a triangle ABC such that line AB-4cm, BC-5cm and angle BAC = 90°. Draw a circle touching the points ABC. What is the radius of the circle?
  2. What is the value of

12/5 ÷ 11/5 + 2½ of 1/3

  1. Salat bought a generator for sh.20 400 after getting a 15% discount. What was the marked price of the generator?
  2. Three streetlights light at an interval of 6min, 8min and 12min. If they all started at

8.00am. At what time did they light again?

  1. A cylindrical container with a radius of 28cm contain water to a height of 50cm. How many litres of water does it hold?
  2. The fractions 2/3, ¾, 3/8 and 2/5 are to be arranged in order from the smallest to the largest. What is the correct order?
  3. Which of the following characteristics of quadrilaterals is both for rhombus and square?
    1. Has one pair of parallel lines
    2. Diagonals are equal
    3. All the angles are right angle.
    4. Diagonal bisect at right angle.
  4. The table below shows the number of pupils who joined class eight in Kahutha location.
Year 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
No. of pupils 386 425 369 438 398

Which two consecutive years was the number highest?

  1. What is 74296 divided by 37?
  2. What is the value of t in the equation 3/5(10x+15)-10 = 20 ?
  3. The diagram below shows a net of a solid.

When folded which solid will be formed

  1. A company hired 18 men to do a job in 24 days. How long did it take if 6 men did not turn up?
  2. Which of the following sets of measurements will form a right angled triangle?
  3. The mass of an empty pick up is 0.9 tonnes. The pick up was loaded with 20 bales of maize flour each with 12-2kg packed. It is also loaded with 20-50kg bags of rice. What is the mass of the loaded pickup in kg?
  4. Ochieng bought a cow at sh.24 000. He later sold it making 18% profit. What was the selling price?
  5. Jamal deposited sh.120 000 in a commercial bank that charged simple interest at the rate of 8 percent per annum. How much interest did the money earn after two years?
  6. A public rally was attended by 380 men. The number of women was thrice that of men but half that of children. How many people attended the rally?
  7. The marked price of a TV is sh.24 000. The hire purchase price is 25% more than the marked price. Wambua bought it on hire purchase paying a deposit of sh. 12 000 and the rest in 12 equal monthly instalment. How much is each instalment?
  8. The diagram below shows an isosceles triangle.

If the perimeter is 36cm what is the area of the triangle?

  1. Parsaloi read 2/5 of a book on Monday and 1/7 on Tuesday and the rest on Wednesday.

What fraction of the book did he read on Wednesday?

  1. What is the value of 72 + 0.6 – 0.12 ?

0.2

  1. A saleslady earn a basic salary of sh. 15 000. She is also paid 5% commission on all the sales she makes in a month. How much money did she earn in a month she sold good worth sh. 250 000?
  2. A road in a map is drawn to scale 1: 500 000. What is the actual length of the road which is drawn to scale of 6cm?
  3. Three girls Nancy, Nelly and Nimo contributed a total of sh.325 to buy a gift for their friends. Nancy contributed sh.30 more than Nelly. Nimo contributed sh.25 more than Nancy. If Nancy contributed sh.m, which of the following equation will be used to find the amount Nancy contributed?
  4. In a school there were 840 pupils last year. This year the numbed increased by 25% What is the new population?
  5. The length of a rectangular plot is 240m and the width 160nt. What is the area of the plot in hectares?
  6. The mean age of seven pupils is 12. If the age of the first 6 is 8, 10, 11, 18, 16, 8, what is the age of the seventh pupil?
  7. A motorist covered a distance of 144km in two hours. What was his speed in m/s?
  8. What is the surface area of an open tank of diameter 1.4m and a height of 1.2m in mo?
  9. A watch loses 30 second every hour. If it was set right on Monday 8.30am, at what time did it shows on Tuesday 8.30am?!
  10. The ratio of boys to girls in a school is 3:4 if there are 120 less boys than girls, how many pupils are there in that school?
  11. A rectangular tank measures 0.5m by 0.6m by 0.8m. How many litres of water does it hold when half full?
  12. The table below shows how Wangira scored in an exam.
Subject Math Eng Kis Sci SST
Score out 39 30 36 42 33

If this information was put on a pie chart, what angle would represent Maths?

  1. The table below shows the charges of sending money order.
Value of order Commission
Upto 1000 54
1001 – 2500 86
2501 – 5000 124
5001 – 10000 182
10001 – 20000 246

Mugambi sent two money orders one worth sh.12 000 and the other worth sh. 7 500. How much money did he pay at the post office?

  1. What is the value of 2ab – b

3b if a=2 and 6 = 6?

  1. What is the sum of the next two numbers in 7, 14, 25, 38,___,___
  2. What is 65% as a ratio in its simplest form?
  3. A lorry was loaded with 40 bags of beans each weighing 110kg. When half of the was off loaded, the lorry weighed 5.7 tonnes. What is the mass of the empty lorry?
  4. How many groups of thousands are there in the total value of digit 4 in the number 548 928 671?
  5. What is ninety eight million, ninety eight thousand and ninety eight in numerals?
  6. What is the next number in the pattern?

209, 168, 131, 100, 71, ________

  1. What is 6/13, 9/14, 8/15, and 11/17 arranged in an ascending order?
  2. What is 28. 2586 rounded off to the nearest hundredths?
  3. What is the place value of digit 6 in the number 962 534?
  4. What is the value of 8¼ + 21/3 of  32/9 ÷ 11/6 ?
  5. What is the value of:

0.87 + 51.3 – 0.09 + 0.2?

  1. Which of the following numbers is divisible by 11?
  2. The area of a square plot of land is 2 809m2. Find the length of one side.
  3. The population of a country is 46 005 818. If 15 589 746 are women and 21 934 834 are children, how many men are in the country?
  4. In the figure below, line AB is parallel to line CD and line PQ is a transversal line.

Which of the following statements is true?

  1. Angle b and g are corresponding angles.
  2. Angle a and e are co-interior angles.
  3. Angle h and g are vertically opposite angles.
  4. Angle c and e are alternate angles.
  5. The area of a triangular piece of land is 22.5 Ares. It has a base length of 250 metres.

What is its height in metres?

  1. Which of the following properties is true in both a rhombus and a parallelogram? A. All sides are equal.
    1. The sum of interior angles adds up to four right angles.
    2. Diagonals bisect each other at right angles.
    3. Each interior angle is a right angle.
  2. The total length of a barbed wire round a square piece of land is 144m. What is the area of the piece of land in square metres?
  3. Simplify:

3/5 (40x − 25y) + 2/3 (18x − 21y)

  1. What is the value of a (3c – 2b)

d when a = 2, d = 5, b = 3 and c = 4?

  1. What is the value of letter y in the equation below? 5(3y − 2) = 2(3y + 13)
  2. Simplify the inequality 2(x − 1) < x + 4
  3. The height of the tank below is 1.2 m. It has water upto a depth of 70 cm. How many litres are needed to fill the tank?
  4. Construct triangle PQR in which line PQ = 6.5cm, angle QPR = 30° and angle PRQ = 40°. Draw a circe that touches points P, Q and R. What is the radius of the circle?
  5. The top of a 17m ladder leans on a vertical wall with its lower end touching the ground. Which one of the following sets of measurements represents the height of the wall and the horizontal distance from the ladder to the wall?
  6. What is the total value of digit 8 in the decimal number 3.52842?
  7. Which one of the following fractions will give a recurring decimal?
  8. Work out:

√0.0324

  1. A bus travelled from Mombasa to Nairobi, a distance of 468km. Later on, the bus went another 281km to Nakuru and then further 96km to Kericho. What distance in kilometres was covered by the bus altogether?
  2. A lorry carries 378 bags of rice in one trip. Each bag of rice is 25kg. If the lorry makes 18 trips, how many tonnes does the lorry transport?
  3. In a coffee plantation, 28 080 coffee seedlings were planted in 156 rows. How many coffee seedlings were planted in each row?
  4. Three bells ring at intervals of 24 minutes, 30 minutes and 40 minutes. The bell rang together at 1145hrs. At what time in am/pm will they ring together again?
  5. Kipkoech’s stride is 5/8, of a metre. How many strides will he make to cover a distance of 80m?
  6. A man spent 3/8 of his salary on food, 1/5 on clothing, ¼ on other expenses and saved the rest. What fraction of his salary did he save?
  7. What is the GCD of 28, 63 and 84?
  8. A matatu left Busia for Nairobi at 2045hrs on Wednesday. The journey took 8 hours 55 minutes. What time and day did it reach Nairobi?
  9. What is the square of 2¼ ?
  10. What is 11/16 as a percentage?
  11. Construct triangle PQR where line PQ = 9cm, QR-12 cm and angle PQR is a right angle. Draw a circle touching the sides of the triangle. Measure the radius.
  12. The radius of a bicycle wheel is 21cm. How many turns will it make to cover a distance of 6.6km?
  13. The cost of a plot in Isinya in the year 2020 was sh. 400 000. After one year, the cost of the plot appreciated by 35%. What was the cost of the plot in the year 2021?
  14. A rectangular piece of land measures 32.4m in length and 26.8m in width. Kiba fenced this land with four strands of barbed wire. What was the length of the wire used?
  15. In the year 2021, covid related deaths in a certain country was 3 500. In the year 2022, this number reduced by 26%. How many people died of covid in the year 2022?
  16. The table below show the marks scored by a pupil during a test.
SUBJECT MATHS ENGLISH KISW SCIENCE SIST
SCORE 88 84 68 90 70

If a pie chart was to be drawn, what angle would represent Kiswahili?

  1. There was 1 800 litres of water in a tank. During construction, 68% of the water was used. How much water was left in the tank?
  2. What is the area of a circle whose radius is 28cm?
  3. The following are characteristics of a quadrilateral;
    1. Diagonals are not equal
    2. Some angles are equal
  • Interiror angles add up to four right angles
  1. All sides are equal.

The quadrilaterial described above is a;

  1. In a certain factory 3/5 of the employees are women. On a day when 3/20 of the women were absent, 306 women were present. How many men are there in the factory?
  2. The table below shows Wanjala’s expenditure for the month of December 2021. The information on the expenditure on clothing is not indicated.
 Item  Rent  Food  Saving  Clothing
 Amount  Sh. 6 000  Sh. 5 000  Sh. 4 000  

A pie chart was drawn to represent the information above. If the angle representing the expense on food was 100°, how much was used on clothing?

  1. A length of 3.2cm era on a scale drawing represents an actual length of 9 600m. What is the scale used?
  2. If a tray holds 30 eggs, on which day did the farmer collect 1050 eggs?
  3. The mean mark scored by five pupils in an examination was 82. If the marks of four of them were 84, 96, 78 and 64, what was the score of the fifth pupil?
  4. Ole Munyere shared a number of cows: To his four children. Their shares were Timothy 0.3, Gloria 0.11, Sein 0.19 Naiserian 0.17. If the children gota total of 462 cows, how many cows did he remain with?
  5. Write 30030030 in words

 

  1. Work out:

4/5 × 3¾ − 3/7 ÷ 5/14 + 3/10

  1. What is the total value of 80.4 − 46 + 4.54 ?

0.4

  1. What is the value of digit 2 in the quotient of 3.40068 and 17?
  2. How many days are there between 20th May and 20th July?
  3. Which of the following is the smallest digit that can be added to 7395 to make it divisible by 11?
  4. The below shows a school farm. Adhiambo walked around the farm four times. What distance did she cover?
  5. A map was drawn using a scale of 1:1000. Calculate the actual length of a road 5

cm long on the map in metres.

  1. Which quadrilateral has only one pair of parallel lines?
  2. What is the value of: 2 x 0.05 of (6.4 − 3.2) − 0.32 ÷ 2
  3. A bus arrived in Nairobi from Mombasa at 3.00am on Tuesday. If it took 8 hours 50min to travel from Mombasa to Nairobi, when had it left Mombasa?
  4. What is the next number in the sequence below?

6, 13, 24, 39, ________________________

  1. In the year 2006 a factory was supplied with 4800 parallel lines? bags of maize. This was 20% less than what was received in 2005. How many bags were supplied in 2005?
  2. What is the value of

− 9?

  1. The mass of a bag decreased by 30kg to 120kg what is the percentage decrease?
  2. In the figure below EFGH, GJK and MJH are straight lines. FM is parallel to GK. Angle EFM = 128° and angle MJK = 62°. What is the size of angle GHJ?
  3. Ann received a salary of sh. 30000 per month. She uses 3/20 of it for rent, for school fees and saves the rest. How much more does she save than use on rent?
  4. Three containers are capable of holding 54 litres, 72litres and 90litres respectively. Find the capacity of the largest container which can be used to fill each one of them exactly?
  5. The hire purchase price of a motor bike is sh. 97860. Allan paid a deposit of sh.

3000 and 30 equal monthly installments. How much was each instalment?

  1. What is the sum of faces, edges and vertices of an open rectangular prism?B
  2. What is the smallest number when divided by 12, 20 or 36 the remainder is always 4?
  3. Construct triangle PQR in which line PQ = 6.5cm, angle QPR = 30° and angle PRQ = 40°. Draw a circe that touches points P, Q and R. What is the radius of the circle?
  4. Four men working at the same rate would take 6 days to clear a piece of land.

How many more men are needed in order to complete the work in 4 days?

  1. What is the total value of digit 8 in the decimal number 3.52842?
  2. A wheel covers a distance of 7.92km after making 3000 revolutions. What is the radius of the wheel in metres?
  3. A trader sold 1.5 tonnes of rice in 3kg packets. How many packets were sold?
  4. What is the possible value of y in the inequality below 3y + 6 > by − 9?
  5. The cost of a plot in Isinya in the year 2020 was sh. 400 000. After one year, the cost of the plot appreciated by 35%. What was the cost of the plot in the year 2021?
  6. The masses of 8 pupils were recorded as 35kg, 32kg, 28kg, 25kg, 38kg, 40kg and 37kg. What was the median mass?
  7. What is the value of 8 x 0.084?

16.8

  1. Draw triangle ABC in which AB=6cm, BC= 10cm and AC = 8cm. Draw a circle to touch the points of the triangle ABC. What is the radius of the circle?
  2. A bottle holds 2.816litres of juice. If it has a height of 14cm, what is the diameter of the bottle in centimetres?
  3. What is 7869.85872 rounded off to the nearest hundredths?
  4. What is the value of x in

2(x+5) − 14 = 36

  1. On a certain day a trader spent sh. 8000 to buy 20 textbooks and then sold them making a profit of 15%. For how much did the trader sell each textbook?
  2. The total length of a barbed wire round a square piece of land is 144m. What is the area of the piece of land in square metres?

 

  1. Which of the following will not form a right angled triangle?
  2. Zainabu bought the following items from a wholesale shop

2kg of rice @ sh. 150

  • – 2kg packets of wheat flour @ sh 140

1kg of sugar @ sh. 124

2packets of tea leaves for sh. 120

She paid using two notes of sh. 500. How much balance did she receive?

  1. Agnes and John shared money in the ratio of 5:3. Agnes got sh. 1800 more than John. How much money did John get?
  2. Express 12½% as a ratio
  3. Omondi covered 325km. If he left Nairobi at 8.15am and reached Meru at

11.30am, calculate the speed?

  1. A rectangle measuring 32cm long and 18cm wide has an equal area as a square. Find the perimeter of the square?
  2. What is the area of a circle whose radius is 28cm?
  3. Find the value of 3c + 4d + 2b given that d = 3, c = ½b and b = 2

(cd)

  1. In a certain factory 3/5 of the employees are women. On a day when 3/20 of the women were absent, 306 women were present. How many men are there in the factory?
  2. An open cylindrical tin has a diameter of 14cm and has a height of 10cm. What is its capacity in millilitres when half full?
  3. The mean mass of 5 girls is 15kg. The average mass of the first three girls is 17kg. What is the total mass of the remaining two girls?
  4. A square plot has an area of 3600m2. It was fenced round using 4 strands of wire. What length of wire was needed?
  5. Which of the following is not a property of a square?
  6. Ole Munyere shared a number of cows: To his four children. Their shares were Timothy 0.3, Gloria 0.11, Sein 0.19 Naiserian 0.17. If the children gota total of 462 cows, how many cows did he remain with?
  7. What is 7090315 written in words?
  8. What is the value of 300 − 75 ÷ 15?

5

  1. What is the value of: 4/51/3 of ¾ +5/6 ?
  2. What is the value of 0.324 ÷ (0.03 x 0.6)?
  3. What is 570.9685 correct to the nearest lenth?
  4. What is the measure of the obtuse angle KLM drawn below?
  5. What is the square of 2¼?
  6. Mavia bought the following items from the shop

4 packets of sugar @sh 107

2kg tomatoes @sh 88

½ kg of meat @sh 400

  • bottles of soda @sh 35

How much balance did she get from sh 1000?

  1. What is 3/8(24x −16y) + 4y in the simplest form?
  2. What is 3/8, 4/5, 7/20, 3/10 arranged in ascending order?
  3. The semicircle below represents a vegetable garden. It was fenced with five strands of wire.

What length of wire was used? (Take π=22/7)

  1. Mwakio bought an item after being offered a discount of 30%. If this discount represented a reduction of sh 210, what was the price of the item before the discount?
  2. What is the next number in the pattern 5, 12, 19, 26, _____ ?
  3. What is the value of 6c − (b − a) when a = 4, b = a+2 and c=½a + 3?

b + c

  1. The figure below is an incomplete triangle PQR. Complete the triangle such that line

PQ=6cm and PR=7cm. Draw a circle whose circumference touches the points P, Q and R.

What is the radius of the circle?

  1. The marked price of a table is sh 20000. The hire purchase price is 40% more than the marked price. Wasike bought the table on hire purchase terms by paying a deposit of sh 15000 and the balance in 5 equal monthly installments. How much was each monthly installment?
  2. What is the Least Common Multiple of 24, 30 and 60?
  3. A trader had a tonne of salt. He repacked the salt into equal number of 200g and 300g packets. How many packets did he get altogether?
  4. Onyango earns a basic salary of sh 40000 per month plus a commission of 6% on the sale of goods above sh 50000. In one month he sold goods worth sh 300000. How much altogether did he earn that month?
  5. A bus left town Q for town R a distance of 240km. It was driven at a speed of 80km/h. If it arrived at 2:40am, at what time did it depart from town Q?
  6. A rectangular tank measures 3m long, 2.8m wide and 2.5m high. What is the capacity of the tank in litres?
  7. In the triangle EFG below, bisect angle EGF to meet line EF at P.

What is the length of line GP?

  1. The median of eight numbers is 7. Seven of the numbers are 11,4,9,4,5,8 and 10. What is the eighth number?
  2. The price of a laptop decreased by sh 15000 to 25000. What was the percentage decrease?
  3. Wahondo performed as follows in a test;

Maths 80%, English 75%, Kiswahili 85%. Science 70%, SSTRE 90%. If he represented his scores in a pie chart. How many more degrees would represent SSTRE than Maths?

  1. The volume of a cylindrical tin is 2816cm3 and the height is 14cm. What is its diameter?

(Take π=22/7 )

  1. What is the value of x in the inequality

5x − 20 > 3x + 8?

  1. The table below shows how three teams performed in sports competition. The number of times each team was placed in either 1st, 2nd or 3rd position is as shown.
   1st  2nd  3rd
 Star   3   2   1
 Elite   3   3   5
 Shine   2   4   2

If 6 points were awarded for the first position, four points for the second position and 2 points for the third position. What was the total points scored by the three teams?

  1. How many groups of a hundred are there the total value of the digit in the thousands position in the smallest six-digit number formed using the digits 4,3,0, 5, 7, 1?
  2. Magelo and Olwande shared some fruits in the ratio 5:3 Magelo received 30 more fruits than Olwande. How many fruits did Magelo get?
  3. Milkio sold some of his properties to three people as follows: Kavunga got ¼ while Meso got 1/6 while Kioko received ½ of the remainder. What fraction of the properties did he sell?
  4. Which one of the following sets of measurements will form a right angled triangle? 183.The figure below shows a stack of cubes. The stack was painted all over.

How many cubes had paint on two faces only?

  1. A plane reached town Q from town on a Sunday at 0240hrs after travelling for 6 hrs 55mins. On what day and time did it leave town R?
  2. The length of road is 4.5km. The road is represented on a map by 3cm. What is the scale of the map?
  3. The fractions ½,⁷/₉,³/₈,⁵/₇ are to be arranged from the largest to the smallest. Which of the following is the correct order?
  4. At a function the number of women was twice that of men. The number of children was half the total number of men and women. The function was attended by 270 people. How many children attended the function?
  5. The table below shows the postal charges in shillings for small packets in a certain year.
 Mass of packet  East Africa  Rest of Africa  Rest of the world
Not over 20g

Not over 100g

Not over 250g

Not over 500g

Not over 1kg

Not over 2kg

Each additional

1kg upto 5kg

 49.00

98.00

187.00

319.00

529.00

728.00

364.00

  54.00

170.00

214.00

375.00

618.00

850.00

430.00

 68.00

154.00

275.00

482.00

768.00

1019.00

553.00

Mutunga sent the following packets

A 600g packet to Tanzania

A 4kg packet to Nigeria

A 260g packet to America  How much did he pay altogether?

  1. Twelve people can complete a piece of work in 20 days. How many more days will 8 people working at the same rate require to complete the same work?
  2. The following properties describe a certain quadrilateral
    • Diagonals are not equal
    • Sum of interior angles is 360°
    • Has a pair of parallel sides
    • Diagonals do not bisect each other.

Which quadrilateral has the above properties?

  1. The diagram below shows a wooden solid

Calculate the sure area taking π=3.14

  1. A motorist left town A for town B a distance of 120km at a speed of 60km/h. After 30 minutes he got a puncture which took 30 minutes to repair. After repair he travelled the remaining distance at a speed of 45km/h. What was his average speed for the whole journey?
  2. A rectangular plot of land is 80m long and the length of one diagonal is 100m. What is the area of the plot in hectares?
  3. Makau bought f fruits. Obach bought 5q more fruits than Makau while Ongeri bought three times the total bought by both Makau and Obach. How many fruits were bought by the three people altogether?
  4. In the figure below line AB is parallel to line CD and XY is a straight line, angle CKR = 110°, line RT RY.

What is the measure of angle YTB?

  1. Special porridge is made by mixing sorghum and millet in the ratio 2:3. Sorghum costs sh60 per kg and millet costs sh40 per kg. If Aisha made 10kg of special porridge, how much money did she spend on sorghum and millet altogether?
  2. Muunda bought 40 plates for sh 4160. He sold all the plates at a profit of 120% How much did he sell cach plate?
  3. Bongonko borrowed sh250000 from a bank that charged a simple interest at the rate of 20% per annum. How much interest did she earn altogether after 2 years?
  4. Mutua left Machakos at 8:15am and took 1 hours to travel to Emali. He stayed in Emali for 2 hours then travelled back to Machakos. The time taken to travel back to Machakos was half the time taken to travel to Emali. At what time did he arrive at Machakos?
  5. Construct triangle PQR in which PQ=6.7cm.Tem QR= 5.8 and PR=7.1cm,Bisect angle QRP and let the sector meet Line PQ at M.

What is the size of angle PRM?

HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT PHYSICS NOTES

HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT

Energy Changes and Potential Difference

In electric circuits, electrical energy is supplied from a source such as a battery to an electrical
device, where it is converted into other forms of energy. For example:

(i) an electric motor transfers most of the electrical energy supplied to mechanical energy.
(ii) an electric fire (radiant heater) transforms most of the electrical energy supplied to heat energy in the fire element and some to light energy.

(iii) an electric lamp transform  most of the electrical energy to heat energy with some produced
as light (luminous) energy.

EXPERIMENT 8.1: To investigate the effect of current on a coil (resistance wire)
Apparatus

A battery of four or more cells, connecting wires, switch, thick copper wire, coil of resistance
wire, ammeter, variable resistor, stopwatch

Procedure

  • Assemble the apparatus as in figure 8.l.
  • Feel with your fingers the temperature of the coil and other parts of the circuit when
    circuit is open.
  • Close the circuit.
  • After sometime, say 2 minutes, feel the temperature of the coil and other parts of the
  • Increase the amount of current flowing through the coil and feel the temperature of the
    coil after sometime.
  • Switch off the circuit.

Observations

The coil feels warmer after closing the switch. This shows that the electric current produces
heating effect in the coil. A higher current produces more heat.

Explanation

 

The e.m.f of the battery forces a flow of electrons round the circuit against the resistance
offered by the various components in the circuit. The work needed to keep the current flowing
through the high resistance wire (coil) is much greater than the work needed to keep the current
flowing through the low resistance copper wire. The coil therefore gets warmer than the parts

of the circuit..                                                                       ..      . .

If the amount of heat produced is increased, the coil may get red hot. Further heating will
cause the atoms of the metal to break free from the crystal lattice, making the wire melt.

Factors Determining Heat Produced by Electric Current

 

In the heating effect, heater transforms electrical energy supplied to heat
energy and light energy. Electric device uses electric current to generate heat
energy.

The following factors affect heat energy produced by electric device.

(a) Time

The longer the time the heater is on, the more electric current is converted to heat. Heat generated is directly proportional to time.

Eαt

(b) Resistance of the heating filament.

Heat generated is directly proportional to resistance.

EαR

(c) Magnitude of current (I)

Heat generated is directly proportional to square of current.

E α I2

In summary:

H αI2Rt

From Ohms law V= IR

H αIvt

H=Ivt

Conclusion

The heating effect produced by an electric current I flowing in a conductor of resistance R in time t is given by H = Ivt.

This equation is known as Joule’s law of electrical heating, in honor of James Joule who first investigated the heating effect of an electric current.

Joule’s law of electrical heating states that the energy of developed in a wire is directly proportional to:

(a) the square of the current F (for a given resistance and time).

(b) the time t (for a given resistance and current) .

(c) the resistance R ofthe wire (for a given current and time).

Example 1

The potential difference across a lamp is 12 volts. How many joules of electrical energy are changed to heat and light when:

(a) a charge of 5 coulombs passes through it?

(b) a current of 2 A flows through the lamp for 10 seconds?

Solution

(a) W = QV

Energy changed to heat and light, W = 5 x 12
= 60J

(b) W = IVt

Energy changed to heat and light, W = 2 x 12 x 10 = 240J

.Example 2

, An iron box has a resistance coil of 30 Q and takes a current of 10 A. Calculate the heat in kJ
developed in 1 minute.

, Solution

 

R = 30 Q, I = 10 A, t = 60 s
H = PRt
  = 102 x 30 x 60
  = 18 x 1()4
  = ‘180 kJ

 

Example 3

A heating coil providing 3 600 Jmin-1 is required when the p.d. across it is 24 V. Calculate, the length of the wire making the coil given that its cross section area is 1 x 10-7 m2 and resistivity 1 x 10-6Ωm.

Solution

H = Pxt

P = H

t

= 60W

 

 

 

Electrical Energy and Power

The work done in pushing a charge round an electrical circuit is given by;
W=VIt

So, W =VI

t

But work/time is power

Therefore power p=IV

Hence, electrical power is given by, P = VI (1)

From Ohm’s law;

V = IR  …………..(2)

Substituting (2) in (1);

P = I2V………………………………………………….. (3)

Substituting (4) in (3);

Current I=V/R

P=V2/R

In summary, electrical power consumed by an electrical appliance is given by;
P= VI, or,

P= I2R, or,

P=V2

R

The unit for power is the watt (W) and is equal to the energy change rate of 1 joule per second,
i.e., 1 W = 1 Js-I. Thus, an electrical lamp with a power rating of 100 W converts 100 J of
electrical energy into heat and light every second.

A larger unit of power is the kilowatt (kW).
1 kW= 1000W

Example 4

How much electric energy in joules does a 150 watt lamp convert to heat and light in:
(a) 1 second?

(b) 5 seconds?

(c) 1 minute?

 

Solution

1 W = 1 JS-1

So, energy changed in:

(a) 1 second is 150 x 1 = 150 J
(b) 5 seconds is 150 x 5 = 750 J
(c) 1 minute is 150 x 60 = 9 ()()() J

ExampleS

How much current does a bulb rated at 100 W and designed for a mains supply of 250 V draw
when operating normally?

Solution

P=VI

When the bulb is operating normally;
P= 100, V = 250

100= I x 250

:. I = ~~

= 0.40A

Example 6

What is the maximum number of 100 W bulbs which can be safely run from a 240 V source supplying a current of 5 A?

Solution

Let the maximum number of bulbs be n. Maximum energy developed in the circuit per second equals total energy converted by the bulbs per second.

Thus, 240 x 5 = 100 n

240 x 5
So, n = 100

= 12 bulbs

Example 7

What is the operating resistance of an electric lamp rated by the manufacturer at 60 W, 240 V?

Solution

From P = VI, current I flowing in the lamp when used normally is given by;
60=lx240

I

– 60

240

=0.25A

Resistance R = i= 5i~
= 960.Q

 

 

Example 8

An electric light bulb has a filament of resistance 470 O. The leads connecting the bulb to the 240V mains have a total resistance of 10 O. Find the power dissipated in the bulb and in the leads.

Solution

R total = 470 + 10
=4800

Therefore, I = ~~

=0.5A
For the bulb alone;
R=4700andI= 0.5A

:. Power dissipated = FR

= (0.5)2 X 470
= 117.5 W

For the leads alone, R = 10 0 and I = 0.5 A.
:. Power dissipated = (0.5)2 X 10

= 2.5W

Example 9

An electric iron of resistance 50 0 and an electric indicator of 6 000 0 are connected in parallel to a 240 V mains supply. Find the dissipated in the electric iron and in the indicator.

Solution

P= V2

R

For the iron alone;
V = 240 V, R = 50 0

Power = 2402

50

= 1152 W

For the indicator alone;
V=240V,R=60000

Power= 2402

6000

= 9.6W

Example 10

A house has twenty 60 W bulbs, two 1 000 W heater and two 500 W security lights. If the appliances are running on 230 V, calculate:

(a) the total power in kW used when all are switched on.
(b) the total current drawn from the mains supply.

Solution

(a) PT= (20 x 60) + (2 xl 000) + (2 x 500)
=4200W

=4.2kW

(b) T    – 4200

‘T – 230

= 18.3A

Example 11

A hoist motor powered by a 240 V mains supply requires a current of 30 A to lift a load of mass 3 tonnes at the rate of 5 m per minute. Calculate:

(a) the power input.

(b) the power output.

(c) the overall efficiency.

Solution

(a) Power input = N

= 30×240
= 7200W

(b) Power output = force x velocity

= 3 x 1000 x 10 x go
 = 2500W

(c) Efficiency = 2500 x 100

7200

= 34.72

Example 12

Two heaters A and B are connected in parallel across a 10 volts supply. Heater A produces 1 000 J of heat in one hour while B produces 200 J in half an hour. Calculate:

(a) the ratio

(b) RA, if RB = 100 Q.

(c)   the amount of heat produced if the two heaters are connected in series across the same
voltage for 4 minutes.

CLASS 8 ENGLISH SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 1-3 UPDATED FREE

English schemes of work

Standard Eight Term I

References

  1. New progressive primary English teacher’s guide book 8
  2. New progressive primary English pupil’s book 8
  3. Primary English pupil’s book 8
  4. Primary English teacher’s guide book 8
WEEK LESSON TOPIC OBJECTIVES TEACHER;S   ACTIVITIES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES RESOURCES/ REFERENCES ASSESSMENT REMARKS
1 REPORTING AND OREPERATION
2 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

-clauses introduced by who

-clauses introduced by whose

-verb followed by to + infinitive

-verbs + object + infinitive

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg3-7

NPPE 8 Pg2-8

PE PB8 Pg2-8

PE TG8 P2-6

ORAL EXERCISE  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,pronounce and construct correct sentence using the new words –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg3-7

NPPE 8 Pg2-8

PE PB8 Pg2-8

PE TG8 P2-6

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘Social values’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions.

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg3-7

NPPE 8 Pg2-8

PE PB8 Pg2-8

PE TG8 P2-6

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using the pattern

-the-ing form a subject

-question tags

-using present progressive question

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg3-7

NPPE 8 Pg2-8

PE PB8 Pg2-8

PE TG8 P2-6

Witten exercise  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write composition to a dry a hot place –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg3-7

NPPE 8 Pg2-8

PE PB8 Pg2-8

PE TG8 P2-6

Writing composition  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

Oral questions  
3 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using the pattern

–present simple tense describing general truth

-present simple tense for habitual action

-present continuous tense for future arrangements

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

ORAL EXERCISE  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ A little boys dream’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

Oral questions  
5-6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

-present continuous tense

-present simple tense

-determiners, this, that, these, those, some, any,  no, enough

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

Witten exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg7-12

NPPE 8 Pg8-13

PE PB8 Pg8-14

PE TG8 P6-11

Writing composition  
4 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using 

-phrasal verb with get

-present simple tense

-past perfect tense

present continuous tense

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use pronounce and construct sentence using new words –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

ORAL EXERCISE  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘mutulu,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions.

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB7 Pg7-12

NPPE TG7 Pg6-11

PE PB7 Pg8-14

PE TG7 Pg5-9

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences 

-using past perfect tense

-past continuous tense

-modal verbs 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write a formal letter –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Witten exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Writing composition  
5 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

-determiners with singular nouns

-determiner with plural noun

present simple tense

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, pronounce and construct correct sentences using the new words –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

ORAL EXERCISE  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ life skills’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
5-6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

-adverbs of degree

-the infinitive with/without to

-order of adjectives

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

-a class debate

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Witten exercise  
6 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

-determiners in affirmative, interrogative

-past simple tense to narrate past events

-past continuous tense for actions in progressive

-past continuous tense for extended action in the past

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Writing composition  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use of

-hope by sentences with possible condition

-pronounce and construct sentence using new words

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘The child labourer’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB7 Pg12-18

NPPE TG7 Pg-11-17

PE PB7 Pg8-14-19

PE TG7 Pg11-16

ORAL EXERCISE  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

-the colon

-the passives

-countable and uncountable nouns

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write a guided composition –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Oral questions  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg12-18

NPPE 8 Pg13-19

PE PB8 Pg14-20

PE TG8 P11-17

Witten exercise  
7 MID TERM EXAMINATIONS  
8 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using the pattern

-past continuous tense for action in progression at specific time

-verbs followed by present participle

-use brackets at punctuation marks

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, pronounce construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

ORAL EXERCISE  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ The East African parliament’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

i.       speech mark

ii.      the hyphen

iii.    the bracket

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Written questions  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write an interesting story  given an ending –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Witten exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Writing composition  

 

 

 

9 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

-determiner with uncountable nouns

-verb + noun/pronoun + infinitives

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use of

-use of whether or not

-use auxiliary verbs

pronounce and construct sentence using new words

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Written questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage, ‘Aunt Tara’s shop’ fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Witten exercise  
5-6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

●          past perfect continuous tense

●          present simple tense

●          write an informal letter to a friend

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Writing composition  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg35-44

NPPE 8 Pg33-38

PE PB8 Pg31-36

PE TG8 P26-34

Oral questions  
10 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences using the pattern

-present perfect continuous tense

-clause introduced by who

-present simple tense

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Written questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Witten exercise  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ The trade exhibition’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Writing composition  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

–the dash

-regular and irregular verbs

-the hyphen

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Oral questions  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write a composition about an exhibition –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Written questions  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg43-50

NPPE 8 Pg42-48

PE PB8 Pg41-47

PE TG8 Pg38-44

Witten exercise  
11   REVISION
12 EXAMINATIONS
13 MARKING
14 CLOSING THESCHOOL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

English schemes of work

Standard Eight Term II

Year 2016

 

 

References

 

  1. New progressive primary English teacher’s guide book 8
  2. New progressive primary English pupil’s book 8
  3. Primary English pupil’s book 8
  1. Primary English teacher’s guide book 8

 

 

 

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB-TOPIC OBJECTIVES ACTIVITIES ACTIVITIES RESOURCES/ REFERENCES ASSESSMENT REMARKS
1 REPORTING AND PREPRATIONS
2 1 social   values Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using 

-appropriate determiners with uncountable nouns

-past simple passive

-use of ‘as well as’ as a connector meaning ‘also’

-verb + ing as a nominal

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
2   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, pronounce and construct correct sentences using new words, –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage, ‘the Olympic games’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions.

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
5   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to  write correct sentences  using

–determiners

– write a conversation accurately

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Written exercise  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Written exercise  
3 1-2 Career Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

–when/after/as soon as

-determiners a, an, the

-comparatives and superlatives

construct and pronounce sentences using new words

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ Haile Gerbrselassie’ correctly and fluently and answer oral question –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
5   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

i.                 correct order of adjectives

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Written exercise  
4 1   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

– present simple tense for habitual action

-present continuous tense for extended action

-verb + to+ infinitives

-the dash

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Written exercise  
2   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use pronounce and construct sentence using new words –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg58-63

NPPE 8 Pg56-62

PE PB8 Pg53-61

PE TG8 Pg53-58

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘The young Farmers Club’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions.

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
5-6   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

-countable and uncountable nouns

-the dash

-adverb with a verb

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Written exercise  
5 1   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

-not only …but also

-determiners/cross-examine/hear + nominal

-phrasal verbs

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Written exercise  
2   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ A court of law’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
5   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence

-pronoun which /that

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
6   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write composition a bout an accident –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Written exercise  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the story of ‘ fun spot for comprehension and enjoyment –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Written exercise  
6 1   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences 

-this is…/it is called…/it is used

-relative pronoun that/this

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
2   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,pronounce and construct sentences using new words –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg63-70

NPPE 8 Pg62-68

PE PB8 Pg61-67

PE TG8 Pg58-64

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘A court drama’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Oral questions  
5-6   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences 

-using relative clauses with who/whom/whose/where/when

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Written exercise  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Written exercise  
7 MID TERM EXAMINATIONS  
8 1   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

-present simple tense for habitual action

-present continuous + or else

-adverbs of degree

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Oral questions  
2   Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Oral questions  
3-4   Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ Don’t throw us in the sea’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Written exercise  
5   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

i.                 the semi colon

ii.                conjuctions

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Written exercise  
6   Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write a story a journey by sea –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Oral questions  
7   Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

Oral questions  

 

 

9 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

i.                 the + proper noun

ii.                description of general truths

iii.              imaginary events

iv.              relative clauses introduced by who/whose

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg92-98

NPPE 8 Pg90-99

PE PB8 Pg93-101

PE TG8 Pg93-98

   
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage, ‘you are not about to die’ fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
5-6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

●          new word with suffixes including,- ful, -less, -ly, ment, -ish

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
10 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences using the pattern

-will + 2nd and 3rd person subject

shall + 1st person subject

present perfect continuous tense

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ Hi-tech phone’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

-past continuous tense

correct order of adjectives

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write a descriptive composition  –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg102-108

NPPE 8 Pg100-109

PE PB8 Pg103-111

PE TG8 Pg103-108

   
11 REVISION
12 EXAMINATIONS
13 MARKING AND CLOSING THE SCHOOL

 

 

 

English schemes of work

Standard Eight Term III

Year 2016

 

 

References

 

  1. New progressive primary English teacher’s guide book 8
  2. New progressive primary English pupil’s book 8
  3. Primary English pupil’s book 8

 

 

WEEK LESSON TOPIC OBJECTIVES TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES RESOURCES/ REFERENCES ASSSESSMENT REMARKS
1 REPORTING AND PREPARATIONS
2 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

-time clauses with present simple + will/shall

-use of will and shall to make prediction

-use of verb followed by present participle

-positive and negative statement

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use construct sentence using the new word –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage, “space exploration,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Oral exercise  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

–present perfect continuous tense

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Written exercise  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write a composition –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Writing composition  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg113-120

NPPE TG8 Pg111-114

PE PB8 Pg113-119

PE TG8 Pg108-114

Written exercise  
3 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using —structure that can follow find

■       present perfect continuous tense for the event that began in the pas but still continuous

■       contrast of present perfect and past simple with for

■       contrast of for and since with present perfect continuous

■       use of past participle and past perfect

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ if you elect me…’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral exercise  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

suffixes –ness, -able, -ment, -ly, -ish, -y

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Written exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Writing composition  
4 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences 

-conditional with would and could + negative

-understands/see + question

-use of should for obligation

-use of should for probability

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Written exercise  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use pronounce and construct sentence using new words –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘debate on technology’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions.

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

–        preposition

–        correct order of adjective

–        correct tense

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral exercise  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able debate on technology has done more harm than good –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Written exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Writing composition  
5 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using

conjuctions

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Written exercise  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, construct correct sentences  using the new words given –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
3 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read the passage ‘ Leopard is dead’ correctly and fluently –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write correct sentence using

–        irregular verbs

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Oral exercise  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, write a composition of caring  for our wildlife –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg122-128

NPPE 8 Pg120-129

PE PB8 Pg123-131

PE TG8 Pg113-118

Written exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explanation

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Writing composition  
6 1 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to construct correct sentences  using  the pattern

-using of linking words e.g. so…that, too…to.  prefer…to, very…but, no sooner…than, not only…but also, in spite, in fact

-indirect speech

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

–        Handkerchief

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Written exercise  
2 Oral work By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to,use of construct correct sentences using the new word

 

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

OPDEA NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Oral questions  
3-4 Reading By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to, read passage ‘The carjackers’,fluently and accurately and answer oral questions. –        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        Explaining

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

Reading

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Oral questions  
5 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write correct sentences  using

-use of dictionary

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Oral exercise  
6 Writing By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to write composition on carjacking –        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Written exercise  
7 Library By the end of the lesson the pupil should be able to read

-the story in ‘fun spot’ for comprehension and enjoyment

a story book for comprehension and for enjoyment

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        Pronouncing words

–        Asking questions

–        Describing events

–        Writing

 

–        poster

–        pictures from the book

 

NPPE PB8 Pg134-140

NPPE TG8 Pg135-141

PE PB8 Pg132-139

PE TG8 Pg118-124

Writing composition  
7 MID TERM EXAMINATIONS
8 FIRST KCPE TRIAL EXAMINATION
9 SECOND KCPE TRIAL EXAMINATION
10 THIRD KCPE TRIAL EXAMINATION/ REHEARSALS
11 KCPE EXAMINATIONS
  6            

 

English Grammar Best Notes Form one to Four

English Grammar Best, Simplified Notes Form one to Four

ENGLISH

 

GRAMMAR

 

SIMPLIFIED

      

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transcribed in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying or otherwise without the prior written permission of the publisher.

 

 

 

First Edition

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

CHAPTER ONE:  PARTS OF SPEECH

 

  NOUNS:…………………………………………………………

 

            Common and Proper nouns………………………….

         Countable and uncountable nouns ……………….

         Singular and Plural nouns…………………………..

         Collective nouns……………………………………….

         Compound nouns………………………………………

         Possessive nouns………………………………………

                                  PRONOUNS:…………………………………………………….

         Personal pronouns…………………………………….

         Possessive pronouns…………………………………

         Contractions with pronouns………………………..

         Idefinite pronouns…………………………………….

         Demonstrative pronouns…………………………….

         Interrogative pronouns……………………………….

         Reflexive and Intensive pronouns………………….

        

                                 VERBS……………………………………………………….…..

          Action verbs……………………………………………

          Linking verbs………………………………………….

             Verb phrases…………………………………………..

          Verb tenses……………………………………………

          Subject-Verb Agreement…………………………..

          Regular and Irregular Verbs………………………

          Active and Passive Verb Forms……………………

          Transitive and Intransitive Verbs…………………

 

ADJECTIVES…………………………………………………….

          Descriptive Adjectives………………………………

          Demonstrative Adjectives………………………….

          Definite and Indefinite Adjectives……………….

          Interrogative Adjectives……………………………

          Articles and Possesive Pronouns…………………

          Comparing with Adjectives………………………..

 

ADVERBS……………………………………………………….

          Adverbs Describing Verbs………………………….

          Adverbs Describing Adjectives……………………

          Describing other Adverbs…………………………..

          Specific categories of Adverbs……………………

          Formation of Adverbs……………………………….

          Negatives Comparing with Adverbs………………

 

 

 

 PREPOSITIONS……………………………………………….

         Common   Prepositions……………………………..

         Prepositional Phrases……………………………….

         Preposition Adverb…………………………………..

 

 CONJUCTIONS      …………………………………………..

         Coordinating Conjuctions…………………………..

         Subordinating Conjuctions…………………………

         Correlative Conjuctions……………………………..

 

  INTERJECTIONS………………………………………………

 

CHAPTER TWO: FORMATION AND ORIGIN OF WORDS..

 

         Sound words (onomatopoeias)…………………….

         Eponyms…………………………………………………

         Portmanteau words…………………………………..

         Prefix ad suffixes……………………………………..

         Words usage……………………………………………

         Homographs……………………………………………

         Homophones…………………………………………..

         Synonyms………………………………………………

         Antonyms……………………………………………….

         Idioms and sayings…………………………………..

 

CHAPTER THREE:   PHRASES……………………………………

         Nouns  Phrases………………………………………..

         Verb Phrases……………………………………………

         Prepositional phrases………………………………..

         Gerund Phrases………………………………………..

         Participial Phrases…………………………………….

         Infinitive phrases……………………………………..

 

 CHAPTER FOUR:  SENTENCES………………………………….

         What is a sentence?………………………………….

         Sentence Fragments…………………………………

         Objects…………………………………………………..

         Complements………………………………………….

         Types of sentences…………………………………..

         Simple sentences……………………………………..

         Compound sentences………………………………..

         Complex sentences…………………………………..

         Declarative sentences……………………………….

         Interrogative sentences……………………………..

         Exclamatory sentences……………………………….

         Imperatives sentences……………………………….

         Conditional sentences………………………………..

         Direct and indirect speech…………………………..

         Question tags…………………………………………..

 

 

CHAPTER FIVE:  CAPITALIZATION AND PUNTUATION……..

        Capitalization……………………………………………

        Punctuation……………………………………………..

        End marks……………………………………………….

        The comma………………………………………………

        The Semicolon and the Colon……………………….

        The Hypen………………………………………………..

        The Apostrophe…………………………………………

        Quotation Marks………………………………………..

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

           

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PREFACE

 

This book has been specially prepared to meet the needs of Secondary School Students and learners of English as a second language.  It embarks on enlightening them on the nature and structure of the English Grammar in a very simplified and understandable manner.

English is the official language and the main medium of instruction in many countries in the world.  Besides this, it is an examinable subject in many national examinations.  Hence this book will certainly come handy for many people in the world.

Numerous exercises have been provided after every single topic to give the students a chance to practice and test their understanding of the areas discussed.  Answers to those exercises are provided at the back of this book.

It is my hope that this book will simplify the English grammar for all who read it.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PART ONE

 

 

PARTS OF SPEECH

 

All words may be classified into groups called parts of speech. There are 8 parts of speech namely: Nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections.

We shall now discuss these parts of speech one at a time:

 

CHAPTER ONE

 

  1. NOUNS

 

A noun is the part of speech that names a person, a place, a thing or an idea. You use nouns every day when you speak or write. Every day you probably use thousands of nouns. Because nouns name the objects and people and places around you, it would be very difficult to talk about anything at all without them. Many nouns name things you can see:

 

Persons                                  Places                                       Things

Boy                                         Lake                                          Boot

Student                                  Country                                    Shadow

John Kamau                           Nairobi                                     Chair

Stranger                                 Jupiter                                      Sweater

Writer                                    Kenyatta Market                      Calendar

Barrack Obama                      Sierra Leone                             Short story

 

Note: Nouns can be two or more words e.g. John Kamau, Kenyatta Market and Short story. They are called compound nouns. We shall learn more about them in coming pages.

 

Some nouns name things you cannot see such as feelings, ideas and characteristics:

 

Feelings                                  Ideas                                         Characteristics

Excitement                             Freedom                                   Curiosity

Fear                                        Justice                                       Cowardice

Anger                                     Fantasy                                     Courage

Happiness                              Faith                                         Imagination

Surprise                                  Evil                                            Self-confidence

 

Exercise 1

 

What words in each sentence below are nouns?

Example: John is a dancer – John, dancer

  1. The students planned a party.
  2. Three boys performed songs.
  3. Excitement filled the air.
  4. Joyce Chepkemoi won a prize.
  5. Otieno lives in a house on my street.

 

Exercise 2

 

Copy the nouns below and write whether it names a person, a place, a thing, or an idea.

Example: river – place

  1. Candle Guitar
  2. Wrestle China
  3. Joy Hatred
  4. Menengai Crater Masanduku Arap Simiti

 

Exercise 3

 

Write down each noun in the following sentences.

Example:  Kenya is a beautiful country – Kenya, country

  1. The musicians played drums and trumpets.
  2. Her family lives in a village.
  3. Petronilla enjoyed the trip.
  4. A festival was held in Kenyatta University.
  5. People in costumes filled the streets.
  6. Boys in Scouts uniforms were leading the parade.
  7. The holiday was a great excitement.
  8. A taxi brought the family to the airport.
  9. Maryanne built a huge castle in the wet sand.
  10. Her mother swam in the warm water.

 

There are different kinds of nouns:

 

  • Common and proper nouns

 

All nouns can be described as either common or proper. When you talk or write about a person, a place, a thing, or an idea in general, you use a common noun.

Example: Doctors work hard. They treat many patients.

 

A proper noun is the name of a particular person, place, thing, or idea. Proper nouns always begin with capital letters.

Example: Ephraim Maree is a doctor. He comes from Kirinyaga.

 

Note: When a proper noun is made up of more than one word, only the important words in the noun will begin with a capital letter. Do not capitalize words such as the, of, or for.

Example: Gulf of Mexico, State of Liberty, the Commander – in – Chief.

 

Common and Proper Nouns

 

Common nouns           Proper nouns             Common nouns           Proper nouns

 

street                                     Kerugoya                           city                                         Raila Odinga

author                                   South Africa                      ocean                                    Wanjohi wa Kigogo-ini

policeman                            Asia                                     bed                                         Moi Avenue

country                                 Indian Ocean                    wardrobe                              Lake Victoria

mountain                              England                              continent                              Dr. Frank Njenga

lake                                        Nelson Mandela               assistant                               Professor Saitoti

 

Proper nouns are important to good writing. They make your writing more specific, and therefore clearer.

 

Exercise 4

 

Which words are proper nouns and should be capitalised? Which words are common nouns?

Example: kenya       Proper:  Kenya

  1. july student                                   11. america
  2. book kendu bay                               12. business
  3. face john hopkins                           13. day
  4. england life                                           14. east africa
  5. crocodiles johannesburg                       15. calendar

 

Exercise 5

 

List the common nouns and the proper nouns in each of the following sentences.

Example: Nancy welcomed the guests.

Proper: Nancy                   common: guests

  1. Lucky Dube was a famous singer.
  2. This dancer has performed in London and Paris.
  3. His last flight was over the Mediterranean Sea.
  4. She worked as a nurse during the Second World War.
  5. Her goal was to educate students all over the world.
  6. It was the worst accident in the history of Europe.
  7. Bill Gates is best known for founding Microsoft.
  8. The Pilot was the first woman to cross that ocean alone.
  9. She grabbed a kettle and brought them water.
  10. Professor Wangari Maathai won a Nobel Peace Prize.

 

1.2 Singular and Plural Nouns

 

A noun may be either singular or plural.

A singular noun names one person, place, thing, or idea.

Example: The farmer drove to the market in his truck.

 

A plural noun names more than one person, place, thing or idea.

Example: The farmers drove to the markets in their trucks.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rules for forming plurals

 

The following are guidelines for forming plurals:

 

  1. To form the plural of most singular nouns, add -s.

Examples: Street – streets, house – houses, painter – painters, shelter – shelters, event- events, hospital – hospitals.

  1. When a singular noun ends in s, sh, ch, x, or z, add – es.

Examples: dress-dresses, brush-brushes, ax-axes, coach-coaches, box – boxes, bench-benches, dish-dishes, waltz – waltzes.

  1. When a singular noun ends in o, add -s to make it plural.

Examples: Piano-pianos, solo-solos, cameo – cameos, concerto – concertos, patio-patios, studio-studios, radio-radios, rodeo – rodeos.

  1. For some nouns ending with a consonant and o, add -es.

Examples: hero – heroes, potato – potatoes, echo-echoes, veto – vetoes, tomato – tomatoes.

  1. When a singular noun ends with a consonant and y, change the y to i and add -es.

Examples: Library – libraries, activity – activities, story – stories, city – cities, berry – berries.

  1. When a singular noun ends with a vowel (a,e,i,o,u) followed by y, just add -s.

Examples: Valley – valleys, essay – essays, alley – alleys, survey – surveys, joy – joys.

  1. To form the plural of many nouns ending in f or fe, change the f to v and add -es or s.

Examples: Wife – wives, thief – thieves, loaf – loaves, half – halves, shelf – shelves, leaf – leaves, scarf – scarves, life – lives, calf – calves, elf – elves.

  1. For some nouns ending in f, add –s to form the plural.

Examples:  proof – proofs, belief – beliefs, motif – motifs, cliff – cliffs.

  1. Some nouns remain the same in the singular and the plural.

Examples: deer – deer, sheep – sheep, series – series, species – species, moose – moose, trout – trout.

  1. The plurals of some nouns are formed in special ways.

Examples: foot – feet, child – children, mouse – mice, man – men, woman – women, ox-oxen, tooth – teeth.

NB: If you don’t figure out the correct spelling of a plural noun, look it up in a dictionary.

 

Exercise 6

 

What is the plural form of each of the following nouns? Example: scarfscarves

  1. tooth cuff                              17. moose           25. boss
  2. wife deer                           18. child              26. fox
  3. giraffe cliff                            19. echo              27. bunch
  4. hero auto                          20. baby              28. ferry
  5. radio studio                        21. sky                 29. flash
  6. potato man                           22. beach            30. ship
  7. belief roof                           23. eye
  8. thief rodeo                        24. volcano

 

Exercise 7

 

Write the plural form of each noun in brackets to complete each sentence correctly.

Example: I bought two ________________ from the shop. (loaf) loaves

  1. I used two different _______________ to cut the rope. (knife)
  2. She peeled the _______________ with a knife. (potato)
  3. They are feeding the noisy _____________. (goose)
  4. The tools are placed on the _____________. (shelf)
  5. Mukami cut a few _______________ for the salad. (tomato)
  6. The ______________ are playing in the field. (child)
  7. Some ______________ are hiding in the ceiling. (mouse)
  8. The ______________ of the buildings must be repaired. (roof)
  9. The music helped them imagine the strange ________________. (story)
  10. Koech used creative ______________ to help young people sharpen their imagination. (activity)

 

Countable and Uncountable Nouns

 

Countable Nouns

 

These are nouns that take plurals and can be counted.

Examples:

Egg – eggs              One egg, three eggs  ,  ten eggs

Potato   –  Potatoes     Twenty potatoes

Onion –  Onions         Two hundred onions

Such nouns are known as COUNTABLE   or  COUNT NOUNS

 

Uncountable Nouns

 

These are nouns that do not take plurals and cannot be counted.

Examples :   salt, butter, cooking fat, milk, bread, jam

We do not say:

Two butters*

Ten milks*

Three breads*

Such nouns  are known as UNCOUNTABLE  or MASS NOUNS

 

Exercise 8

 

Rewrite the words below in two columns, COUNTABLE and UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS

               Orange                                             Coffee

Furniture                                           tea

Water                                                gold

Chair                                                  team

Friend                                                music

 

Plurals with uncountable Nouns

 

One way to express plurals of uncountable nouns is by use of expressions of quantity.

Example:

a piece of information –         pieces of information

a loaf of bread           –           four loaves of bread

a tin of soup             –             three tins of soup

a piece of furniture –           several pieces of furniture

a litre of milk        –               twenty litres of milk

a bottle of beer        –          ten bottles of beer

Exercise 9

 

Supply  an appropriate expression of quantity for the following uncountable nouns

  1. …………………………………… of cigarettes.
  2. …………………………….. of cooking oil
  3. ……………………….. of jam.
  4. ………………………of butter.
  5. ……………………..of soda.
  6. …………………….. of toothpaste
  7. …………………….of rice.
  8. five ……………………….. of flour.
  9. two ………………………… of chocolate.
  10. ……………………. of news.

 

Collective Nouns

 

These are nouns that represent a group of people or things as a single unit.

 

Some collective nouns can take plural forms

Examples:

Crowd (s)                                                        flock (s)

Group (s)                                                        herd (s)

Team (s)                                                         committee (s)

Pair (s)

 

Some collective nouns, however, cannot be used in the plural:

Examples                                                       

 

Furniture*                                                                               beddings*

Equipments*                                                                           informations*

Luggages*                                                                                baggages*

 

Exercise 10

When I arrived at the airport, there were ……………1………….. (crowd ) of people blocking the entrance with their ……………..2………………( luggage ).

Near the customs sections, several……………3……………..(group ) of officials  were standing, checking the ………………4……………… (equipment ) that was being loaded onto a trolley.  Most people were standing, waiting for… ………….5……………..(information ) from the loundspeakers onthe departures and arrivals of aircraft.

 

COMPOUND NOUNS

 

A compound noun is a noun that is made up of two or more words.  The words that form compound nouns may be joined together, separated or hyphenated.

Examples:

 

Joined: bookcase, blackboard, pushcart

Separated: high school, rabbit hutch, radar gun

Hyphenated: go-getter, mother-in-law, sergeant –at-arms

 

Compound nouns are usually a combination of two or moreword classes.  The most common combinations are as follows;

  1. some are formed by joining a noun with another noun. Most of these compound noun take their plurals in the last words.

Examples:

Tableroom (s)                grassroot (s)                         prizefighter(s)

Cubboard (s)                  policeman/men                   rubber-stamp (s)

Bookcase(s)                     farmhouse (s)                     sanitary towel (s)

Cowshed (s)                    fruit machine (s)                 shoulder blade (s)

  1. Some are formed by joining a verb and an adverb. Most of these compound nouns also take their plurals in the last words.

Examples:

Breakfast (s)                   push-up (s)                          rundown (s)

Takeaway (s)                   knockout (s)                       slip-up (s)

Sit-up (s)                           meltdown (s)

  1. Some compound nouns are formed by joining an adjective and a noun. Most of these also take their plurals in the last words.

Examples:

Hotdog(s)                               polar bear(s)                safe guard (s)

Blackboard(s)                        quicksand

Highway (s)                            remote control (s)

Nuclear power                       right angle (s)

  1. Some are formed by joining a verb and a noun. Most of these also take their plurals in the last words.

Examples:

Driveway (s)                          playground (s)               spend thrift (s)

Breakdance                            pushchair (s)                go-getter (s)

Mincemeat                            screwdriver (s)

Password (s)                          spare wheel (s)

  1. Some ore formed by joining an adverb and a noun. Most of these also take their plural in the last words

Examples:

Overdraft (s)                          overcoats (s)                 backyards (s)

Backbencher (s)                     undercoat (s )              backbone (s)

Backlog (s)                               underwear ( s)            oversight ( s)

  1. A few compound nouns are formed by joining an adverb and a verb. These ones also take their plurals in the last words.

Examples:

Outbreak (s)                              Backlash ( s)              Output ( s)

Outburst (s)                                Outcast (s)               input (s)

  1. A few others are formed by joining a noun and a verb. They also take their plurals in the last words

Examples:

Nosedive (s)

Nightfall (s)

  1. A number of compound nouns are formed by joining two nouns by use f hyphens and a short preposition in between. These compound nouns always take their plurals in the first words.

Examples:

Commander (s) – in- chief                                           Sergeant (s) -at-arms

Mother(s)-in-laws                                                       sister(s)-in-law

Play(s)-within-play

 

Exercise 11

Underline the compound nouns in the following sentences and write down their plural forms where possible.

  1. John wants to be a quantity surveyor when he grows up.
  2. Rainwater had washed away all the top soil.
  3. The footballer was shown a red card by the referee.
  4. Neither candidate won the elections, forcing a runoff.
  5. The goalkeeper saved a penalty in the second half.
  6. He killed the wild pig with a sledge hammer
  7. Njoroge’s tape-recorder was stolen yesterday.
  8. The theatregoer was disappointed with the show
  9. Size 8’s latest song has caused an uproar
  10. He attempted a creative writing workshop

 

 

 

Possessive Nouns

 

A possessive noun shows who or what owns something. A possessive noun can either be singular or plural.

A singular possessive noun shows that one person, place, or thing has or owns something. To make a singular noun show possession, add an apostrophe and s (‘s).

Example: the feathers of the chick – the chick’s feathers

the hat that belongs to the man – the man’s hat

Other examples: the child’s toy

Mark’s bike

The fish’s fins

The horse’s tail

Using possessive nouns is shorter and better than other ways of showing possession.

Example:

LONGER: The dog belonging to Papa is barking.

BETTER: Papa’s dog is barking.

 

Plural Possessive Nouns

 

A plural possessive noun shows possession or ownership of a plural noun.

Example: The cars that belong to the teachers are parked here.

The teachers’ cars are parked here.

When a plural noun ends in s, add only an apostrophe after the s to make the noun show possession.

Not all plural nouns end in s. When a plural noun does not end in s, add ‘s to form the plural possession.

Examples: the shoes of the men – the men’s shoes

The food of the children – the children’s food

The noun following a possessive noun may either be the name of a thing or a quality.

Example: Thing –     Koki’s raincoat

Brian’s umbrella

                Quality –   the judge’s fury

Bob’s courage

 

Exercise 8

 

Change the following phrases to show possession in a shorter way.

Example: the claws of the leopard

the leopard’s claws.

  1. the tail of the lion
  2. the dog that Cliff has
  3. the hat of my mother
  4. the book that Evans owns
  5. the pot that the child has
  6. the name of the doll
  7. the mobile phone that Lucy owns
  8. the shoes that Kimani has
  9. the teeth that the fox has
  10. the rabbit that my friend owns

 

 

Summary of rules of forming Possessive Nouns

 

  1. For singular a noun, add an apostrophe and s.

Example: Mr. Mukui’s car is a Toyota Corolla.

  1. For plural a noun ending in s, add an apostrophe only.

Example: The victim’s property was stolen

  1. For a plural noun that does not end in s, add an apostrophe and s.

Example: The women’s boots were muddy.

 

Singular Noun            Singular possessive             Plural Noun                  Plural possessive

                                   Noun                                                                          Noun

 

boy                             boy’s                                    boys                              boys’

child                           child’s                                  children                        children’s

mouse                        mouse’s                               mice                              mice’s

deer                            deer’s                                   deer                              deer’s

 

Exercise 9

 

Write the following phrases to show possession.

Example: teachers – pens =      teachers’ pens

  1. Cooks – aprons Women – sports
  2. Men – boots Carpenters – nails
  3. Countries – flags Sailors – uniforms
  4. Guests – coats Musicians – instruments
  5. Athletes – medal Neighbours – pets

 

Exercise 10

 

Rewrite the following sentences changing the BOLD words to plural possessive nouns.

Example: The players on the teams practised after school.

The team’s players practised after school.

  1. Each day the wealth of the couple
  2. There was a team of men and a team of women.
  3. The uniforms that the teams were new.
  4. Numbers were printed on the shirts of the athletes
  5. Scores made by the team-mates were put on the scoreboard.
  6. The players enjoyed the cheers of their friends.
  7. The whistles of the coaches stopped the game.
  8. The eyes of the children were full of tears of joy.
  9. The soothing voices of their mothers calmed them.
  10. However, the houses belonging to their neighbours were destroyed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON NOUNS

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. students, party
  2. boys, songs
  3. Excitement, air
  4. Joyce Chepkemoi, prize
  5. Otieno, house, street

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. candle – thing guitar – thing
  2. wrestler – person China – place
  3. joy – idea hatred – idea
  4. Menengai Crater – place Masanduku arap Simiti – person

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. musicians, drums, trumpets
  2. family, village
  3. Petronilla, trip
  4. festival, Kenyatta University
  5. people, costumes, streets
  6. Boys, Scouts, sniforms, parade
  7. holiday, excitement
  8. Taxi, family, airport
  9. Maryanne, castle, sand
  10. mother, water

 

Exercise 4

 

Proper nouns                                       Common nouns

 

July                                                       book

England                                                face

Kendu Bay                                            crocodiles

John Hopkins                                       student

Johannesburg                                      life

America                                                business

East Africa                                            day

calendar

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. Proper – Lucky Dube

Common –   singer

  1. Proper – London, Paris

Common –   dancer

  1. Proper – Mediterranean sea

Common –    flight

  1. Proper – Second World War

Common –    nurse

  1. Common – goal, students, world
  2. Proper –        Europe

Common –    accident

  1. Proper – Bill Gates, Microsoft
  2. Common – pilot, woman, ocean
  3. Common – kettle, water
  4. Proper – Professor Wangari Maathai, Nobel Peace Prize

 

Exercise 6

 

  1. tooth – teeth cliffs                         17. moose                25. bosses
  2. wives deer                       18. children              26. foxes
  3. giraffes cliff                          19. echoes               27. bunches
  4. heroes autos                       20. babies               28. ferries
  5. radios studios                   21. skies                   29. flashes
  6. potatoes men                         22. beaches             30. ships
  7. beliefs roofs                      23. eyes
  8. thieves rodeos                    24. volcanoes/volcanos

 

Exercise 7

 

  1. knives                                           children
  2. potatoes                                mice
  3. geese                                           roofs
  4. shelves stories
  5. tomatoes                                activities

 

Exercise 8

 

  1. the lion’s tail
  2. Cliff’s dog
  3. my mother’s hat
  4. Evan’s book
  5. the child’s pet
  6. the doll’s name
  7. Lucy’s mobile phone
  8. Kimani’s shoes
  9. the fox’s teeth
  • my friend’s rabbit

 

Exercise 9

 

  1. cook’s aprons             women’s sports
  2. men’s boots                                  carpenter’s nails
  3. countries’ flags                       sailors’ uniforms
  4. guests’ coats                                   musicians’ instruments
  5. athlete’s medals                     neighbours’ pets

 

Exercise 10

 

  1. The couple’s wealth
  2. a men’s team, a women’s team
  3. The teams’ uniforms
  4. the athletes’ shirts
  5. The team-mates’ scores
  6. their friends’ cheers
  7. The coaches’ whistles
  8. The children’s eyes
  9. Their mothers’ soothing voices
  10. their neighbours’ house

PRONOUNS

 

A pronoun is a part of speech that takes the place of a noun. They include such words as I, we, he, she, thy, me and us.

Pronouns enable you to avoid repeating the same names (nouns), when writing or speaking, which would otherwise make you sound very awkward and wordy. By using pronouns effectively, you can make your writing and speaking flow smoothly.

 

Pronouns can be classified into 6 types. These are personal, indefinite, demonstrative, interrogative, reflexive and intensive pronouns.

 

2.1 Personal pronouns

 

A personal pronoun is a word that is used in place of a noun or another pronoun. They are used to refer to nouns that name persons or things.

Example:

Awkward            Kamau put on Kamau’s gum boots. Then Kamau went to the shamba.

Improved            Kamau put on his gum boots. Then he went to the shamba.

 

In the above example, the personal pronoun his helps the writer avoid repeating the same noun. The pronoun he acts as a bridge to connect the two sentences.

Personal pronouns are further classified in terms of person and gender.

 

Person

 

In terms of person, personal pronouns can be divided into three classes.

  • First person – I, my, me, we, our and us.

These ones refer to the person(s) speaking.

   Example: I always ride my bike to school.

  • Second person – you, your, yours

These refer to the person(s) spoken to.

  ExampleI will call you tomorrow.

  • Third person – he, his, him, she, hers, her, it, its, they, their, them.

These ones refer to another person(s) or thing(s) that is being spoken of.

 

The personal pronoun it usually replaces a noun that stands for a thing or an animal. It is never used in place of a person.

 

 

 

 

 

Gender

 

Personal pronouns can also be classified by gender. Gender can either be masculine (referring to male people), feminine (referring to female people) or neuter (referring to animals or things).

Examples:

Joseph cleaned his car. (His is the third person, masculine gender).

Isabel said the dress was hers (Hers is the third person, feminine gender).

The dog wagged its tail. (Its is the third person, neuter gender).

 

 

FORMS OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS

 

In English, personal pronouns have three forms: the subject form, the object form and the possessive form.

Examples:

She is a painter (subject form)

He praised her. (Object form)

It is her best painting. (Possessive form)

 

Subject Pronouns

 

A subject pronoun takes the place of a noun as the subject of a sentence. These pronouns are:

  • Singular forms – I, you, he, she, it
  • Plural forms – we, you, they

Examples:

 

Noun                                                                    Subject Pronoun

 

The housegirl takes care of the baby                She takes care of the baby

The dog guards the house                                 It guards the house

Mark and Francis love swimming                      They love swimming

 

Subject pronouns also appear after forms of the linking verbs be.

Examples:

The watchman today is he.

The composers were they.

 

Exercise 1

 

Underline the subject pronouns in the following sentences.

Example: She ate a water melon

  1. They ate fish and chips.
  2. We like Italian food.
  3. It is delicious.
  4. The biggest eater was he.
  5. You helped in the cooking.
  6. The cooks were Tom and I.

 

Exercise 2

 

Replace the underlined words with subject pronouns.

Example: Pio and Gama are friends – They

  1. The glasses were under the table.
  2. Emma fed the chicken.
  3. The pears were juicy.
  4. Uncle Ben and Lillian visited the orphans.
  5. The new waitress is Jane.
  6. The fastest runners were Tecla and Kirui.
  7. Lisa went to the hall.
  8. The chicken was slaughtered.
  9. Lucky Dube and Brenda Fasie were South African Singers.
  10. Samuel Wanjiru has won many athletics medals.

Object pronouns

 

Object pronouns can replace nouns used after action verbs. These pronouns are:

  • Singular – me, you, him, her, it
  • Plural – us, you them

Examples:

The driver drove him. (direct object)

The parents thanked us. (direct object)

The reporters asked him many questions. (indirect object)

In the above examples, the personal pronouns are the direct or indirect objects of the verbs before them.

 

Object pronouns can also replace nouns after prepositions such as to, for, with, in, at or by. That is, they can be objects of prepositions.

Examples:

Gladys waved to them. (object of a preposition)

The delivery is for me.

Ben went with them to the theatre.

 

Exercise 3

 

Choose the correct pronoun in the brackets in the following sentences.

Example: Irungu photographed (us, we). = us

  1. Lisa asked (he, him) for a picture.
  2. Adam sketched Lisa and (I, me).
  3. He gave a photo to (us, we).
  4. Ann and (she, her) saw Dave and Bob.
  5. Adam drew Lisa and (they, them).
  6. Mark helped (I, me) with the packing.
  7. Loise praised (him, he) for his good work.
  8. Everyone spotted (they, them) easily.
  9. That night Mike played the guitar for (us, we).
  10. (We, Us) drove with (they, them) to the mountains.

 

 

Possessive pronouns

 

A possessive pronoun shows ownership.

Example: My pen is black.

 

There are two kinds of possessive pronouns:

  • Those used as adjectives to modify nouns. These possessive pronouns are:

Singular: My, your, his, her, its

Plural: Our, your, their

Examples: My shirt is yellow.

Your food is on the table.

His bag is green.

This is her dress.

Its fur is soft.

These are our parents.

Pay your bills.

They removed their bats.

The above possessive pronouns always appear before nouns to modify them. Hence, they are called modifiers.

 

  • Those that stand alone and replace nouns in sentences. These possessive nouns are:

Singular: mine yours his, hers, its

Plural: ours yours, their

     Examples: The yellow shirt is mine.

The food on the table is yours.

The green bag is his.

This dress is hers.

Its is the soft fur.

                 These crops are ours.

These bills are yours.

Those hats are theirs.

 

Exercise 4

 

Complete the following sentences by choosing the correct possessive pronoun from the brackets.

Example: The lazy girl completed (her, hers) home work. = her.

  1. (My, mine) journey to Mombasa was enjoyable.
  2. Florence said (her, hers) was the best.
  3. Are the pictures of Fort Jesus (your, yours)?
  4. (Her, Hers) were taken at Jomo Kenyatta Beach.
  5. Tomorrow we will make frames for (our, ours) pictures.
  6. (My, mine) class is planning a trip to Mt. Kenya.
  7. (Our, ours) trip will be taken on video.
  8. Micere is excited that the idea was (her, hers).
  9. Koki and Toti cannot hide (their, theirs) excitement.
  • (My, mine) dream is to climb to the highest peak of the mountain.

 

POINTS TO NOTE

 

  1. The pronoun I is used as a subject or after forms of the linking verb be.

Examples:

Subject: I travel by bus

After the linking verb be: Yesterday, the prefects on duty were Victor and I

  1. The pronoun me is used object after action verbs or words (prepositions) such as to, for, with, in, or at.

Examples:

Object: Rose met me at the gate.

After prepositions: Rose waited for me at the gate.

You are coming with me.

  1. When using compound subjects and objects (i.e. subjects and objects comprising of a pronoun and a noun or another pronoun), always name yourself last.

Examples:

Diana and I visited our grandmother yesterday.

Who appointed Chege and me?

Rose waited for her and me at the gate.

 

CONTRACTIONS WITH PRONOUNS

 

A contraction is a shortened form of two words. One or more letters are omitted and an apostrophe (’) is used in place of the letters left out.

A contraction is formed by combining pronouns and the verbs am, is, are, will, would, have, has, and had.

 

Pronoun + verb                 Contraction                    Pronoun + verb       Contraction

 

I am                                   I’m                                   I have                       I’ve

He is                                  he’s                                 he has                      he’s

It is                                     it’s                                   it  has                       it’s

You are                              you’re                              you have                  you’ve

They are                            they’re                            they have                 they’ve

I will                                   I’ll                                    I had                         I’d

You will                             you’ll                               you had                   you’d

We would                          we’d                                we had                     we’d

 

Note:

  • Some contractions look the same but are formed from different words.

Examples: he is, he has = he’s

we had, we would = we’d

  • Some possessive pronouns sound like contractions. Because the words sound alike, they are sometimes confused.

Examples:

 

Possessive pronouns                             Contractions         

 

its                                                            it’s

your                                                        you’re

their                                                        they’re

whose                                                     who’s

 

Incorrect: The team celebrated it’s victory.

Correct: The team celebrated its victory.

Incorrect: Your late for the preps.

Correct: You’re late for the preps.

Incorrect: Whose the fastest runner in the world?

Correct: Who’s the fastest runner in the world?

 

Rules of using possessive pronouns and contractions correctly

 

  1. If the word you want to use stands for two words, it is a contraction and needs an apostrophe.
  2. Never use an apostrophe in a possessive pronoun.

 

 

Exercise 5

 

Write the contractions for the following word pairs. Example: It has = it’s

  1. You will He had                               5. You have
  2. We would I am                                    6. they will

 

Exercise 6

 

What pronoun and verb make up each of the following contractions?

Example: It’s = it is, it has

  1. I’ll you’d                                  5. they’re
  2. we’re he’s                         6. she’d

 

 

Exercise 7

 

Choose the correct word given in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. The Kenyan government has worked hard to improve (its, it’s) educational system.
  2. (Whose, Who’s) going to decide where the guests will sleep?
  3. (Their, they’re) learning French their school.
  4. Only students (whose, who’s) scores are excellent will join national schools.
  5. (Its, It’s) been estimated that about 8 million Kenyans are living with HIV AIDS.

 

 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

 

An indefinite pronoun  is a pronoun that does not refer to a specific person or thing.

In English, there are singular indefinite pronouns, plural indefinite and both singular and plural indefinite pronouns.

 

Singular Indefinite Pronouns

 

another                      anything           everybody           neither                one

anybody                     each                  everyone             nobody                somebody

anymore                     either                everything           no one                 someone.

 

An indefinite pronoun must agree with its verbs and in number with its possessive pronoun. The above indefinite pronouns are used with singular verbs. They are also used with singular possessive pronouns.

Examples:

           Agreement with verbs

Correct: Everyone has heard of Lake Turkana.

Incorrect: Everyone have heard of Lake Turkana.

Correct: Nobody knows what happened to Samuel Wanjiru.

Incorrect: Nobody know what happened to Samuel Wanjiru.

Correct: Everything about the old man remains a mystery.

Incorrect: Everything about the old man remain a mystery.

 

Agreement in number with possessive pronouns

Correct: Neither believed his/her eyes.

Incorrect: Neither believed their eyes.

Correct: Each strained his/her neck to see.

Incorrect: Each strained their neck to see.

 

Plural indefinite pronouns

 

both                many                 few                             several

These indefinite pronouns use plural verbs and possessive pronouns.

Examples:

Plural verbs

Correct: Few know about Lake Olbolsat.

Incorrect: Few knows about Lake Obolsat.

Correct: Both stand by what they believe.

Incorrect: Both stands by what they believe.

 

Plural possessive pronouns

Correct: Several reported their findings.

Incorrect: Several reported his/her findings.

 

Both singular and plural indefinite pronouns

 

all                some                any                    none

These indefinite pronouns may be singular or plural, depending on their meaning in the sentence.

Examples:

All of my story is true – singular

All of the guests are here – plural

None of the lake is foggy – singular

None of the photos are spoiled – plural.

 

 

EXERCISE 8

 

Underline the indefinite pronouns in the following sentences and then write the correct form of the verb or possessive pronoun in the brackets.

  1. All the photographs of the killer (is, are) unclear.
  2. (Has, Have) anybody seen my camera?
  3. Many (believes, believe) a monster lives in the lake.
  4. Each of the photographs (make, makes) people want more.
  5. All of the evidence (indicates, indicate) that he was killed by his wife.
  6. Everyone has taken (his, their) payment.
  7. Several eyewitnesses volunteered to give (his, their) accounts.
  8. Anyone can lose (her, their) eyesight.
  9. Another reported (his, their) case to the police.
  10. Somebody left (her, their) handbag in the lecture hall.

 

 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

 

A demonstrative pronoun is used to single or point out one or more persons or things referred to in the sentence.

These pronouns are this, that, these, and those.

 

This and these point to persons or things that are near.

Examples:

This is a gazelle.

These are the students of Kianjege West Secondary School.

 

 

 

That and those point to persons or things that are farther away.

Examples:

That is the city square.

Those are the lodging rooms.

 

This and that are used with singular nouns.

These and those are used with plural nouns.

 

Exercise 9

 

Pick the correct demonstrate pronouns from the choices given in the brackets in the following sentences.

  1. (This, That) is the canteen we are entering now.
  2. (This, That) is the dispensary across the street
  3. (These, Those) are beautiful flowers on the counter over there.
  4. Are (those, these) chocolate bars on the far counter?
  5. I think (these, those) are called vuvuzelas.

 

 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS

 

An interrogative pronoun is used to ask a question. These pronouns are who, whose, whom, which and what.

Examples:

Who is the mayor of this town?

Whose is the red car?

Which is her blouse?

What did she ask you?

Whom should I trust with my secret?

 

USING WHO, WHOM, AND WHOSE

 

Who, whom, and whose are often used to ask questions. Hence, they are interrogative pronouns.

 

WHO is the subject form. It is used as the subject of a verb.

Examples:

Who taught you how to play the guitar? (Who is the subject of the verb taught.)

 

WHOM is the object form. It is used as the direct object of a verb or as the object of a preposition.

Examples:

Whom did you meet? (Whom is the object of the verb did meet).

For whom is this trophy? (whom is the object of the preposition for).

 

WHOSE is the possessive form. It can be used :

  • To modify a noun

Example:

Whose is umbrella is this? (whose modifies the noun umbrella)

  • Alone as the subject or object of a verb

Examples:

Whose are those water melons? (whose is the subject of the verb are)

Whose did you admire? (whose is the object of the verb did admire)

 

Exercise 10

 

Pick the correct interrogative pronouns from the brackets in the following sentences.

  1. (Who, Whom) owns that shop?
  2. (Who, Whom) can we ask the way?
  3. (Which, What) did they ask you?
  4. (Which, What) are the objects on the table called?
  5. To (who, whom) does the boutique belong?

 

Exercise 11

 

Complete the following sentences with who, whom, or whose.

  1. ________________ knows the origin of the Luos?
  2. ________________ did you ask about it?
  3. To _______________ did you give the letter?
  4. _________________ is the most attractive painting?
  5. _________________ is likely to receive the Chaguo la Teeniez award?
  6. For ______________ did you buy this doll?
  7. _________________ skill in dancing is the best?
  8. _________________ is the officer-in-charge here?
  9. _________________ are you looking at?
  10. _________________ are those healthy Merino sheep?

 

 

REFLEXIVE AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS

 

Reflexive and intensive pronouns end in self or –selves. These are myself, yourself, herself, himself, itself, ourselves, and themselves.

There is, however, one difference between reflexive and Intensive pronouns.

A reflexive pronoun refers to an action performed by the subject of the sentence. The meaning of the sentence is incomplete without the reflexive pronoun.

Examples:

Monicah bought herself a new dress. (The meaning of the sentence is incomplete without the reflexive pronoun because we do not know for whom Monicah bought the dress).

An Intensive pronoun is used to emphasise a noun or a pronoun. It does not add information to a sentence, and it can be removed without changing the meaning of the sentence.

I myself pulled the boy out of the river. (If you remove myself, the meaning of the sentence does not change)

 

Exercise 12

 

Identify the Reflexive and Intensive pronouns in the following sentences, labelling them accordingly.

  1. I myself have never tried mountain climbing.
  2. He himself was taking the cows to graze in the forest.
  3. My sister Annastasia mends her clothes herself.
  4. She often challenges herself by doing strenuous activities.
  5. You may ask yourself about the sanity of beer drinking competition.

 

 

 

 

SPECIAL PRONOUNS PROBLEMS

 

  1. Double subjects

 

We all know that every sentence must have a subject. Sometimes we incorrectly use a double subject – a noun and a pronoun – to name the same person, place, or thing.

 

     Incorrect                                              Correct

Jane she is my cousin.                          Jane is my cousin.

                                                               She is my cousin.

Her scarf it is pretty.                            Her scarf is pretty.

                                                               It is pretty.

Jane and she should not be used as subjects together.

The subject her scarf should not be used together with it.

Use only a noun or a pronoun to name a subject.

 

  1. Pronouns and their Antecedents

 

The antecedent of a pronoun is a noun or another pronoun for which the pronoun stands.

A personal pronoun, you will remember, is used in place or a noun. The noun is the word to which the pronouns refer and it is therefore its antecedent.

The noun usually comes first, either in the same sentence or in the sentence before it.

Examples:

We met Mureithi. He is the medical doctor.

(He stands for Mureithi. Mureithi is the antecedent).

The students had come to school with their mobile phones.

(Their stands for students. Students is the antecedent).

Pronouns may be the antecedents of other pronouns.

Examples:

Does everybody have his booklet?

(everybody, which is a singular indefinite pronoun, is the antecedent of his).

All of the students have brought theirs.

(All, which is a plural indefinite pronoun, is the antecedent of theirs).

Now, a pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number. Agree here means that the pronoun must be the same in number as its antecedent.

The word number means singular or plural.

If the pronoun is singular, the word that it stands for must be singular, and it must be plural if the word it stands for is plural.

Examples:

Correct:       The scientists tested their new discovery

(Scientists is plural; their is plural.)

Incorrect:    The scientists tested his new discovery.

Correct:       Mr. Kiama turned on his TV.

(Mr Kiama is singular; his is singular)

Correct:       Nobody left her workstation

(Nobody is singular, her is singular)

NB: When the antecedent refers to both males and females, it is best to use the phrase his or her.

 

  1. Use of we and us with nouns.

 

Phrases such as we students and us girls are often incorrectly used. To tell which pronoun to use, drop the noun and say the sentence without it.

Problem: (We, Us) boys study hard.

Solution: We study hard = We boys study hard.

Problem: The DC praised (us, we) students.

Solution: The DC praised us = The DC praised us students

 

  1. Using the pronoun Them

 

The word them is always a pronoun. It is always used as the object of a verb or a preposition, never as a subject.

Examples:

Correct: The president greeted them (direct object of the verb greeted)

Correct: She gave them a Sandwich (Indirect object of the verb gave)

Correct: The information was useful to them (object of the preposition to)

Incorrect: Them they arrived late.

 

  1. Using Those

 

Although we previously said that those is used as a demonstrative pronouns, it is sometimes used as an adjective i.e. a word that modifies a noun or a pronoun. If a noun appears immediately after it, those is now an adjective, not a pronoun.

Examples:

Those are the new desks that were bought. (Those is a pronoun, the subject of the verb are).

Those desks are attractive. (Those is an adjective modifying the noun desks).

 

Exercise 13

 

Each of the following sentences has a double subject. Write each correctly.

  1. Papa Shirandula he is a good actor.
  2. Many people they find him funny.
  3. The show it was on television for many years.
  4. Their daughter she is also in that show.
  5. The shoes they are beautiful.
  6. People they like our hotel.
  7. My brother he drives a matatu.
  8. Our hotel it is open seven days a week.
  9. The TV it is very clear today.
  10. My brother and sister they work in Nairobi.

 

Exercise 14

 

Pick the correct pronoun in the brackets in the following sentences.

  1. (We, Us) students started a school magazine last month.
  2. Many careers are unpromising. (Them, Those) are the ones to avoid.
  3. One of (them, those) motivational speakers was especially interesting.
  4. A financial analyst told (we, us) students about his work.
  5. Finding jobs was important to (we, us) graduates.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON PRONOUNS

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. They ate fish and chips.
  2. We like Italian food.
  3. It is delicious
  4. The biggest eater was
  5. You helped in the cooking.
  6. The cooks were Tom and

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. They were under the table.
  2. She fed the chicken.
  3. They were juicy.
  4. They visited the orphans.
  5. The new waitress is she.
  6. The fastest runners were Tecla and
  7. She went to the hall.
  8. It was slaughtered.
  9. Lucky Dube and she were South African singers.
  10. He has won many athletics medals.

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. Lisa asked him for a picture.
  2. Adam sketched Lisa and me.
  3. He gave a photo to
  4. Ann and she saw Dave and Bob.
  5. Adam drew Lisa and them.
  6. Mark helped me with the packing.
  7. Loise praised him for his good work.
  8. Everyone spotted them
  9. That night Mike played the guitar for us.
  10. We drove with them to the mountains.

 

Exercise 4

  1. My journey to Mombasa was enjoyable.
  2. Florence said hers was the best.
  3. Are the pictures of Fort Jesus yours?
  4. Hers are about Jomo Kenyatta Beach.
  5. Tomorrow we will make frames for our
  6. My class is planning a trip to Mt. Kenya.
  7. Our trip will be taken on video.
  8. Micere is excited that the idea was hers.
  9. Koki and Toti cannot hide their
  10. My dream is to climb to the highest peak of the mountain.

 

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. You will = You’ll
  2. we would = we’d
  3. he had = he’d
  4. I am = I’m
  5. you have = you’ve
  6. they will = they’ll

 

Exercise 6

 

  1. I’ll = I will
  2. we’re = we are
  3. you’d = you would, you had
  4. he’s = he is, he has
  5. they’re = they are
  6. she’d = she would, she had

 

Exercise 7

 

  1. its                                  They’re                                    5 it’s
  2. who’s                                 whose

 

Exercise 8

 

  1. All – are                                        Everyone – his
  2. Anybody – has           Several – their
  3. Many – believe                             Anyone – her
  4. Each – makes                             Another – his
  5. All – indicates                                     Somebody – her

 

Exercise 9

 

  1. This Those                                     5. these
  2. That those

 

Exercise 10

 

  1. Who What                                   5. whom
  2. Whom What

 

Exercise 11

 

  1. Who whom
  2. Whom Whose
  3. whom Who
  4. Whose Who
  5. Who Whose

 

 

Exercise 12

 

  1. myself – intensive
  2. himself – intensive
  3. herself – reflexive
  4. herself – reflexive
  5. yourself – reflexive

 

Exercise 13

 

  1. Papa Shirandula is a good actor.
  2. Many people find him funny.
  3. The show was on television for many years.
  4. Their daughter is also in that show.
  5. The shoes are beautiful.
  6. People like our hotel.
  7. My brother drives a matatu.
  8. Our hotel is open seven days a week.
  9. The TV is very clear today.
  10. My brother and sister work in Nairobi.

 

Exercise 14

 

  1. We those                     5. us
  2. Those us

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VERBS

 

A verb is a word that:

  • expresses an action
  • expresses the state that something exists, or
  • links the subject with a word that describes or renames it.

 

Hence, there are two kinds of verbs. These are action verbs and linking verbs.

 

ACTION VERBS

 

Action verbs express actions. They show what the subject does or did. Most verbs are action verbs.

Examples:

Cats drink milk.

The ball flew over the goal post.

The farmer tills the land.

Robert ran to the house.

 

The action may be one that you can see.

Example:

They crowned their new King.

 

The action may be one that you cannot see.

Example:

She wanted recognition.

 

Whether the action can be seen or not, an action verb says that something is happening, has happened, or will happen.

 

LINKING VERBS

 

A linking verb links the subject of a sentence with a word or words that :

  • express(es) the subject’s state of being

Example:

She is here. (expresses state of being)

She seems ready. (state of being)

  • describe(es) or rename(es) the subject.

     Examples:

Anna is a nurse (a nurse, describes Anna)

Joyce is cheerful (cheerful describes Joyce)

The road is bumpy.

A linking verb does not tell about an action.

 

 

 

 

 

Common linking verbs

 

am              look                grow

are              feel                 remain

is                taste               become

was             smell               sound

were           seem

will be        appear

 

NB: Some verbs can be either linking verbs or action verbs.

Examples:

The crowd looked at the mangled car – ACTION

The driver of the car looked shocked – LINKING

The chef smelled the food – ACTION

The food smelled wonderful – LINKING

 

EXERCISE 1

 

Identify the verb in each of the following sentences. Then label each verb Action or Linking.

  1. Queen Elizabeth of England seems an interesting historical figure.
  2. We watched the Olympic games on television.
  3. The crowd cheered loudly.
  4. She seems calm.
  5. PLO Lumumba is a quick thinker.
  6. The hunter aimed the arrow at the antelope.
  7. The referee blew the whistle to start off the game.
  8. She was very tired after the journey.
  9. She is careful when crossing the road.
  10. The country seems prosperous.

 

VERB PHRASES

 

In some sentences, the verb is more than one word. It is in form of a phrase, which is called a verb phrase.

A verb phrase consists of a main verb and one or more helping verbs.

The main verb shows the action in the sentence.

The helping verb works with the main verb. Helping verbs do not show action.

 

Examples:

Mark Francis has passed the examinations

H.V.    M.V.

He will be admitted to a national school.

H.V. H.V.    M.V.

His parents are happy with him.

H.V.   M.V.

 

Common helping verbs

 

am              will                  can                    would

is                shall                could                 must

are              have                may

was             has                  should

were           had                 might

 

Some verbs, such as do, have and be, can either be used as main verbs or as helping verbs.

 

Examples:

As main verbs                        As helping verbs

 

I will do the job                     I do like the job.

Who has a pen?                    He has lost his pen.

They are my friends              They are coming today.

 

Sometimes helping verbs and main verbs are separated by words that are not verbs.

Examples:

I do not ride bicycle any more.

Can we ever be friends again?

We should definitely apologise for the mistakes.

 

Exercise 2

 

Indicate H.V. under the Helping verb and M.V. under the Main verb in the following sentences.

  1. The school choir is singing a new song.
  2. The football season has finally begun.
  3. This car just can travel very fast.
  4. He had waited for this chance for years.
  5. My parents will be visiting us soon.
  6. Our friends have come for a visit.
  7. You must buy your ticket for the game.
  8. Sarah has chosen Kenyatta University for her degree course.
  9. She is hitting her child with a rubber strap.
  10. I will go for the game next week.

 

VERBS TENSES

 

The time of an action or the state of being is expressed by different forms of the verb. These forms are called the tenses of the verb.

 

There are three main forms of a verb: the present, the past, or the future.

 

The Present Tense

 

A verb which is in present tense indicates what the subject of the sentence is doing right now.

Example:

The teacher sees the students.

The verb sees tells that the teacher is seeing the students now. To show the present tense, an -s or -es is added to most verbs if the subject is singular.

If the subject is plural, or I or You, the -s, or -es is not added.

Example:

The bird hatches in the nest.

The stream flows down the hill.

The boys rush for their breakfast.

We talk a lot.

 

 

 

Rules for forming the Present Tense with Singular Subjects

 

  1. Most verbs: add –s                                get – gets

                                                                           play – plays

eat – eats

 

  1. Verbs ending in s, ch, sh, x, and z: add-es pass – passes, mix – mixes

punch-punches, buzz – buzzes

push – pushes

 

  1. Verbs ending with a consonant and y:

change the y to i and add –es                          try – tries

empty – empties

 

Exercise 3

 

Write the correct present form of each verb in the brackets in the following sentences.

  1. She carefully ________________ the map (study)
  2. A fish _______________ in the water near me. (splash)
  3. She _______________ her hands. (wash)
  4. He ______________ to the classroom. (hurry)
  5. Bryan and I ____________ the assignment. (discuss)

 

The Past Tense

 

A verb which is in past tense shows what has already happened.

Example:

Tito liked his grandmother’s story.

The verb liked tells that the action in the sentence happened before now.

 

Rules for forming the Past Tense

 

  1. Most verbs: Add –ed                                            play – played

talk – talked

climb – climbed

 

  1. Verbs ending with e: Add -d praise – praised

hope – hoped

wipe – wiped

 

  1. Verbs ending with a consonant and -y: bury – buried

the y to i and add –ed                                          carry – carried

study – studied

 

  1. Verbs ending with a single vowel and stop – stopped

a consonant: Double the final consonant          man – manned

and add-ed                                                           trip – tripped

 

Exercise 4

 

Write the past tense forms of each of the verbs in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. John _____________ his house burn into ashes. (watch)
  2. The baby _____________ loudly. (cry)
  3. The teacher ______________ at the naughty student. (yell)
  4. The chef ______________ a delicious cake. (bake)
  5. We ______________ for a present for our grandmother. (shop)

 

The Future Tense

 

A verb which is in future tense tells what is going to happen.

Examples:

Evans will take his car to the garage.

She will probably come with us.

The verbs will take and will come tell us what is going to happen. Hence, they are in future tense.

 

To form the future tense of a verb, use the helping verb will or shall  with the main verb.

 

Exercise 5

 

Write the future tense forms of the verbs in the following sentences.

  1. We write in exercise books.
  2. The train stopped at the station.
  3. He decides what he wants to do.
  4. They practise in the football field.
  5. Rats multiply very fast.

 

 

 

 

 

More Tenses

 

The above three forms of tenses can further be divided into:

  1. The simple tenses – Present simple tense

– Past simple tense

– Future simple tense

 

  1. The perfect tenses – Present perfect tense

– Present perfect progressive

– Past perfect tense

– Future perfect

– Future perfect progressive

 

  1. The progressive tenses – Present progressive tense

– Past progressive tense

– Progressive tense

– Future perfect progressive tense.

 

The simple Tenses

 

The most common tenses of the verb are the simple tenses. You use them most often in your speaking and writing.

 

  1. Present simple tense.

 

Look at the following sentences.

  • I know Kisumu
  • He goes to school everyday.
  • The sun rises from the east.

 

All the above sentences contain a verb in the present simple tense. This tense is used for different purposes.

  • To state a personal fact

          Example: I know Kisumu.

  • To point out a regular habit.

          Example: He goes to school everyday.

  • To state known a scientific fact

Example: The sun rises from the east.

 

 

Exercise 6

 

Complete the following sentences putting the verbs in brackets in the present simple tense.

  1. They _________ their new principal. (like)
  2. Every morning, she ______________ her teeth. (brush)
  3. The earth ______________ on its own axis. (rotate)
  4. Twice a year, he _______________ his family. (visit)
  5. Air ____________ when heated. (rise)

 

  1. Past Simple Tense

The past simple tense is used when an action has been completed                     .

Examples:

We cleaned our classrooms yesterday.

He drove the car this morning.

She planned the whole incident.

 

 

Exercise 7

 

Write down the past simple tense of the following words and then use each of them in sentences of your own.

start                                         breathe

add                                          roam

trap                                         obey

annoy                                     worry

pity                                         fit

 

 

 

 

  1. Future Simple Tense

 

The future simple tense places the action or condition in the future. It is formed by using the word shall or will before the present form of the main verb.

Examples:

We shall need help with her load.

She will eat the bananas alone

The dancers will entertain them.

 

Exercise 8

 

Use the following words in future simple tense in sentences of your own.

see                                               develop

go                                                begin

exist                                             consume

introduce                                    hunt

bring                                            become

 

The Perfect Tenses

 

The perfect tenses are used to show that an action was completed or that a condition existed before a given time.

The perfect tenses are formed using has, have, or had before the past participles i.e. verb forms ending in -ed.

Examples:

  1. Present Perfect Tense:

Ceasar has just finished his homework.

Kamau and Njoroge have now agreed to meet.

 

  1. Present Perfect Continuous Tense

Kibet has been working in his shamba for two hours.

We have been swimming in this pool for ten minutes.

 

  1. Past Perfect Tense

We had completed the work by the time the supervisor came.

Nobody knew that she had already remarried.

 

  1. Past Perfect Continuous Tense

I had been trying to contact him for two hours before he finally appeared.

Mrs. Masumbuko had been feeling unwell the whole week before she decided to visit a doctor.

 

  1. Future Perfect Tense

Agege will have sold his goats by two p.m.

By next term, twenty students will have dropped from this school.

 

  1. Future Perfect Continuous

The players will have been playing for twenty minutes by the time the President arrives.

By the end of this term, she will have been living with her aunt for five years.

 

Exercise 9

 

Rewrite the following sentences changing the verb into present perfect, present perfect progressive, past perfect, past perfect progressive, future perfect and future perfect progressive tenses. Make any necessary changes to make the sentences meaningful.

John comes here every year.

 

 

The Progressive Verb Forms

 

The progressive form of the verb shows continuing action.

Examples:

I am singing

She was dancing.

 

The progressive form is formed using various forms of the verb be plus the present participle i.e. a verb form that ends in –ing.

Examples:

  1. Present Progressive Tense

I am reading a book about Red Indians.

Her mother is preparing dinner.

 

  1. Present Perfect Progressive

He has been cleaning his car since morning.

They have been exercising for a week now.

 

  1. Past Progressive Tense

She was cooking supper when I arrived.

They were fighting fiercely when the police arrived.

 

  1. Past Perfect Progressive Tense

Sonko had been wearing an earing for years before he removed it.

Onyancha had been killing children before he was finally discovered.

 

  1. Future Progressive

He will be tilling the land next week.

Joyce and Joan will be washing clothes all morning.

 

  1. Future Perfect Progressive

The children will have been sleeping for two hours by the time their parents arrive.

John will have grown a beard by the time he is twelve.

 

Exercise 10

 

Rewrite the following sentence changing the verb into present progressive, present perfect progressive, past progressive, past perfect progressive, future progressive and future perfect progressive tenses. Make any necessary changes to make the sentences meaningful.

Jane plays the guitar well.

 

 

SUBJECT – VERB AGREEMENT

 

Present tense

 

A verb and its subject must agree in number. To agree means that if the subject is singular, the verb must be in singular form. If the subject is plural, the verb form must be plural.

Examples:

The baby cries every morning – SINGULAR

The babies cry every morning – PLURAL

 

Rules for subject-verb Agreement

 

  1. Singular subject The man drives a bus.

Add -s or -es to the verb                     She teaches in a primary school.

He studies his map.

 

  1. Plural subject: The men drive

Do not add -s or -es                            They teach in primary schools.

to the verb                                           We study our maps.

 

  1. For I or You I hate

Do not add -s or -es to the verb          You like dogs.

I admire actors.

 

When a sentence has a compound subject i.e. two subjects joined by and, the plural form of the verb is used.

Examples:

John and James work at Naivas Supermarket.

The teachers and the students respect one another a lot.

 

Subject-verb Agreement with be and have

 

The verbs be and have change their forms in special ways in order to agree with their subjects.

 

Various ways in which be and have change in order to agree with their subjects.

  Subject            Be                 Have
1.

 

 

Singular subjects:

I

You

He, she, it

Singular Noun

 

         am, was

         are, were

         is, was

         is, was

 

            have, had

            have, had

            has, had

            has, had

2. Plural subjects:

We

You

They

Plural Noun

      

        are, were

        are, were

        are, were

        are, were

 

 

         

            have, had

           have, had

           have, had

          have, had

 

 

 

Exercise 11

 

Put appropriate Present tense verbs in the blank spaces in the following sentences. Ensure that the subject agrees with the verb and that the sentence makes sense.

  1. The dogs _______________ their owners.
  2. She ______________ at the door.
  3. They ______________ the road at the Zebra-crossing.
  4. Many blind people ___________________ dogs as guides.
  5. We ________________ dogs every day.
  6. Mark always _______________ his house.
  7. I often _______________ with June.
  8. Mwangi __________________ his aunt in Mombasa.
  9. He and Jane ________________ next month.
  10. The directors ______________ the company.

 

REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS

 

We have learned in previous chapter how to form the past tense and how to use helping verbs to show that something has already happened. We saw that for most verbs, we form the past tense and participles by adding -d or -ed to the verb. Verbs that follow this rule are called Regular Verbs.

Examples:

The framer planted his crops last month. – past tense

The crops have been planted recently. – past participle.

 

For all regular verbs, the past and the past participles are spelled alike. They are made up by adding -d or -ed to the present form of the verb.

 

Examples:

Present Past Past Participles
help

rescue

rush

support

play

talk

live

helped

rescued

rushed

supported

played

talked

lied

had helped

had rescued

had rushed

had supported

had played

had talked

had lied

 

The spelling of many regular verbs changes when –d or -ed is added i.e. the last consonant is doubled before adding -d or -ed. For those ending -y, it is dropped and replaced with –i:

Examples:

Present Past Past Participles
hop

drug

permit

knit

cry

carry

hopped

drugged

permitted

knitted

cried

carried

(had) hopped

(had) drugged

(had) permitted

(had) knitted

(had) cried

(had) carried

 

 

Exercise 12

 

Write the present, past and past participles of the following verbs. Remember to change the spelling appropriately where necessary.

  1. prevent               aid
  2. donate               relieve
  3. hurry               share
  4. worry               enrol
  5. train             save

 

 

Irregular Verbs

 

Some verbs do not form the past by adding -d or –ed. These verbs are called irregular verbs. There are only about sixty frequently used irregular verbs. For many of these, the past and the past participles are spelled the same but some are different.

Examples:

He saw great misery all around him – past

He has seen great misery all round him – past participle

 

Common irregular Verbs

Verb Past tense Past participles
begin

choose

go

speak

ride

fight

throw

come

sing

steal

swim

make

run

grow

write

ring

drink

lie

do

eat

know

began

chose

went

spoke

rode

fought

threw

came

sang

stole

swam

made

ran

grew

wrote

rang

drank

lay

did

ate

knew

 

( had) begun

(had) chosen

(had) gone

(had) spoken

(had) ridden

(had) fought

(had) thrown

(had) came

(had) sung

(had) stolen

(had) swum

(had) made

(had) run

(had) grown

(had) written

(had) rung

(had) drunk

(had) lain

(had) done

(had) eaten

(had) known

 

For a few irregular verbs, like hit and cut, the three principal parts are spelled the same. These ones offer no problems to learners. Most problems come from irregular verbs with three different forms. For example, the irregular verbs throw and ring.

Throw        threw           had thrown

Ring            rang              had rung

If you are not sure about a verb form, look it up in the dictionary.

 

 

Exercise 13

 

Write the past tense and past participles of the following irregular verbs and then use each of them in sentences of your own.

  1. arise                fall
  2. tear                blow
  3. wear                freeze
  4. lay         fly
  5. see       write

 

 

ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VERB FORMS

 

Active Voice

 

A verb is in active voice when the subject of the sentence performs the action.

Examples:

Our teacher punished us for making noise in class.

Subject               action

Players arrived for their first match early in the morning.

Subject     action

In the above sentences, the subject is who performed the action. Hence, the verbs of these sentences are in active voice.

 

Passive voice

 

The word passive means “acted upon”. When the subject of the sentence receives the action or expresses the result of the action, the verb is in passive voice.

Examples:

We were punished by the teacher for making noise.

Subject                  action

He was helped by a passer-by.

Subject        action

In the above sentences the subjects we and he receive the action.

 

When we do not know who or what did the action, or when we do not want to say who or what did it, we use the passive voice.

The passive form of a verb consists of some form of be plus the past participle.

Examples:

 

       Active                                              Passive

 

Baabu explored the sea.           The sea was explored by Baabu.

Be + past participle

 

The captain helped him.           He was helped by the captain.

Be+past participle

 

 

Exercise 14

 

Write the verbs from the following sentences and then label each one Active or Passive.

  1. The guest of honour presented prizes to the best students.
  2. The cattle were taken home by the herders.
  3. The health officer ordered the slaughter house closed.
  4. Peace and order has been restored in the area by the youth wingers.
  5. The workers cleared the farm.
  6. The crop was harvested by the hired workers.
  7. The government stressed the importance of unity among tribes.
  8. The farmers were urged to redouble their efforts in food production.
  9. The KIE is developing support materials for the 8-4-4 system of education.
  10. A fishing pond was started by the Wildlife Club in the school.

 

 

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS

 

Some sentences express a complete thought with only a subject and an action verb.

Example:

The sun shines.

Subject      Active verb

In other sentences, a direct object must follow the action verb for the sentence to be complete. A direct object is a noun or a pronoun that receives the action of the verb.

 

 

Example:

The goalkeeper caught the ball.

Subject                 action verb      direct object

 

Transitive verbs

 

A Transitive verb is an action verb that must take a direct object for the sentence to express a complete thought. A direct object answers the question what? or whom?

Examples:

The captain steered the ship. (Steered what? the ship)

The teacher praised the students. (Praised whom? The students)

Transitive verbs cannot be used alone without direct objects in sentences; they would not have complete meanings.

 

Exercise 15

 

What are the action verbs and the direct objects in the following sentences?

  1. He carried his bag with him.
  2. The two friends discussed the examination paper.
  3. We took a trip to Nakuru last month.
  4. The water splashed me.
  5. He gave interesting facts about whales.
  6. We searched the house for rats.
  7. They cheered the team noisily.
  8. My brother bought a camera.
  9. Njoroge admires Papa Shirandula.
  10. We viewed the shouting star at midnight.

 

Intransitive verbs

 

An Intransitive verb is an action verb that does not require a direct object for the sentence to have complete meaning.

Examples:

The ship sailed.

Subject        action verb

The child smiled.

Subject        action verb

They do not answer the questions what? or whom? Sometimes they answer the questions how? or how often?

Examples:

The ship sailed smoothly. (How did it sail? Smoothly)

The child smiled repeatedly. (How often did the child smile? Repeatedly)

 

Both transitive and intransitive verbs

 

Some verbs can be used both transitively and intransitively.

Examples:

We cheered our team noisily. (Transitive)

We cheered noisily. (Intransitive)

He broke the window pane. (Transitive)

The glass broke. (Intransitive)

 

 

NB: Only transitive verbs can be changed from active to passive voice.

Examples:

Active                                                    Passive

 

He kicked the ball                                The ball was kicked by him

She bought a new dress                      A new dress was bought by her.

 

She wailed loudly                                      ??

They danced well                                      ??

 

Exercise 16

 

Indicate at the end of each of the following sentences whether the underlined verb is Transitive or Intransitive.

  1. Some whales sing
  2. We gave our books to the gatekeeper.
  3. She cried
  4. He made a sketch of the giraffe.
  5. John danced to the music.
  6. The bird flew in the air.
  7. They located the lost ship.
  8. She pleaded with him mercifully.
  9. The children heard the sound from the cave.
  10. It rained heavily.

 

 

TROUBLESOME PAIRS OF VERBS

 

Some pairs of verbs confuse learners of English because their meanings are related but not the same. Others confuse them because they sound similar, but their meanings are different. Others are similar in appearance but different in meanings.

 

  The pairs Meaning Present tense Past tense Past participle Examples of its usage
1 Sit

 

set

To be in a seated position

To put or place

Sit

 

set

Sat

 

set

Sat

 

set

Sit on that chair.

 

Set the cage down.

2. Lie

 

lay

To rest in a flat position

To put or place

Lie

 

lay

Lay

 

laid

lain

 

laid

The cat lies on the table.

Lay the cloth on the table.

 

3. rise

raise

To move upward

To move something upward or to lift

rise

 

raise

rose

 

raised

risen

 

raised

The children rise up early in the morning.

The scout raised the flag.

4. let

leave

To allow or permit

To depart or to allow to remain where it is

let

leave

let

left

let

left

Let the bird go free.

Leave this house now!

Leave the door closed.

5. Learn

 

Teach

To gain knowledge or skill

To help someone learn or to show how or explain

Learn

 

teach

Learned

 

taught

Learned

 

taught

I learned a lot in school.

That teacher taught me in Biology.

6. Can

 

may

To be able

 

To be allowed

      I can ride my bike well.

You may go out.

 

EXERCISE 17

 

Pick the correct verb from the ones given in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. Studying spiders closely can (learn, teach) us how they get their food.
  2. An insect that (lays, lies) motionless on a leaf can become prey to some other animal.
  3. The lion will (lay, lie) there waiting for its prey.
  4. The monster spider (sits, sets) patiently near its web.
  5. Experience has (taught, learned) me not to take things for granted.
  6. A bird (raises, rises) its body using its wings.
  7. This (raises, rises) another question,
  8. Nature has (learned, taught) spiders new tricks.
  9. The watchman instantly (raises, rises) the alarm when there is danger.
  10. The trappers have (lain, laid) fresh traps for the porcupines.

 

ANSWERS ON VERBS

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. seems – Linking verb
  2. watched – Action verb
  3. cheered – Action verb
  4. seems – Linking verb
  5. is – Linking verb
  6. aimed – Action verb
  7. blew – Action verb
  8. was – Linking verb
  9. is – Linking verb
  10. seems – Linking verb

 

Exercise 2

 

    Helping verb                                 Main verb

  1. is                                     singing
  2. has                                    begun
  3. can                                      travel
  4. had                                     waited
  5. will be                                    visiting
  6. have                            come
  7. must                           buy
  8. has                                     chosen
  9. is                                       hitting

10     will                                        go

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. studies
  2. splashes
  3. washes
  4. hurries
  5. discuss

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. watched
  2. cried
  3. yelled
  4. baked
  5. shopped

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. will write
  2. will stop
  3. will decide
  4. shall practice
  5. will multiply

 

Exercise 6

 

  1. like
  2. brushes
  3. rotates
  4. visits
  5. rises

 

Exercise 7

 

  1. started                                breathed
  2. added                roamed
  3. trapped                                    obeyed
  4. annoyed                                    worried
  5. pitied                                             fitted

 

Exercise 8

 

  1. will/shall see                          will/shall develop
  2. will/shall go                                       will/shall begin
  3. will/shall exist                             will/shall/consume
  4. will/shall introduce                    will/shall hunt
  5. will/shall bring                           will/shall become

 

Exercise 9

 

  1. John has come here every year. – present perfect
  2. John has been coming here every year. – present perfect progressive
  3. John had come here every year. – past perfect
  4. John had been coming here every year. – past perfect progressive
  5. John will have come here every year. – future perfect
  6. John will have been coming here every year. – future perfect progressive.

 

Exercise 10

 

  1. Jane is playing the guitar. – present progressive
  2. Jane has been playing the guitar. – present perfect progressive
  3. Jane was playing the guitar. – past progressive
  4. Jane had been playing the guitar. – past perfect progressive
  5. Jane will play the guitar. – future progressive
  6. Jane will have been playing the guitar. – future perfect progressive

 

 

 

 

Exercise 11

 

  1. guard                                     cleans
  2. stands    study
  3. cross             visits
  4. use             wed
  5. feed run

 

Exercise 12

 

            Present                               Past                                        Past participle

  1. prevent     prevented                     prevented
  2. donate donated                                             donated
  3. hurry hurried                                                hurried
  4. worry worried                                               worried
  5. train trained                                                trained
  6. aid aided                                                  aided
  7. relieve relieved                                              relieved
  8. share shared                              shared
  9. enrol enrolled                                             enrolled
  10. save saved                                                  saved

 

Exercise 13

 

            Present            Past                                          Past participle

  1. arise arose                                           arisen
  2. tear tore                                            torn
  3. wear wore                                            worn
  4. lay      laid                                                      lain
  5. see saw                                            seen
  6. fall fell                                             fallen
  7. blow blew                                  blown
  8. freeze froze                                         frozen
  9. fly flew                                            flown
  10. write wrote                                            written

 

Exercise 14

 

  1. presented – active                         was harvested – passive
  2. were taken – positive stressed – active
  3. ordered – active were urged – passive
  4. restored – passive is developing – active
  5. cleared – active was started – passive

 

Exercise 15

 

        Action verbs                                                     direct object

  1. carried his bag
  2. discussed                                            the examination paper
  3. took                                                      a trip
  4. splashed                                            me
  5. gave                                                      interesting facts
  6. searched                                            the house
  7. cheered                                            the team
  8. bought                                           a camera
  9. admires                                           Papa Shirandula
  10. viewed                                           the shooting star

 

Exercise 16

 

  1. Transitive                  Intransitive
  2. Transitive    Transitive
  3. Intransitive Intransitive
  4. Transitive    Transitive
  5. Intransitive   Intransitive

 

Exercise 17

 

  1. teach                                                 raises
  2. lies raises
  3. lie taught
  4. sits raises
  5. taught                  laid

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADJECTIVES

 

An adjective is a word that describes or modifies a noun or a pronoun. To describe or modify means to provide additional information about nouns or pronouns. To modify further means to change something slightly.

Writers and speakers modify an idea or image by choosing certain describing words, which are called adjectives. Hence, these adjectives are also called modifiers. Adjectives are like word cameras. They are words that describe colours, sizes and shapes. Adjectives help you capture how the world around you looks and feels.

 

Adjectives tell:

 

  1. what kind?

Examples:

The powerful gorilla knocked down the hunter.

The old man walked slowly.

  1. how many?

Examples:

Three zebras were resting.

He has few friends.

  1. which one(s)?

Examples:

This painting is attractive.

These farmers are clearing the field.

 

There are 4 main kinds of adjectives, namely:-

  1. Descriptive adjectives
  2. Definite and indefinite adjectives
  3. Demonstrative adjectives
  4. Interrogative adjectives
  5. Articles and possessive adjectives

 

Descriptive adjectives

 

Descriptive adjectives tell us the size, shape, age, colour, weight, height, make, nature and origin of the nouns they are describing.

 

Examples of descriptive Adjectives:

Size Shape Age Colour Weight Height Make Nature Origin
big

huge

small

tiny

thin

fat

wide

shallow

slender

oval

circular

triangular

rectangular

round

square

twisted

pointed

 

old

young

aged

red

green

white

blue

brown

black

maroon

purple

pink

heavy

light

tall

short

 

wooden

plastic

metal

stony

glass

mud

warm

cold

shy

famous

peaceful

brave

powerful

gentle

kind

Kenya

American

Tanzania

Italian

South African

Ugandan

Korean

 

 

Descriptive adjective are of two types.

 

  • Common descriptive adjectives – these are adjectives that give general features of somebody or something. They are the adjectives of size, shape, age, colour, weight, height, make and nature. Refer to the examples in the diagram above.

 

  • Proper adjectives – These ones are formed from proper nouns. They are always capitalized. They always appear last in a string of adjectives modifying the same noun, just before the noun itself.

Examples of proper adjectives:

The Japanese ambassador

A Mexican carpet

An Italian chef

 

Note that when a proper adjective comprises of two words, both are capitalized.

          Examples:

A South African farmer

A North American cowboy

 

Exercise 1

 

Find the adjectives in the following sentences and indicate what types they are.

  1. Alaska is the largest state in the USA.
  2. The Alaskan Senator is Lord John Mc Dougal.
  3. Kenya is the tallest mountain in Kenya.
  4. Alaska has a tiny population of one and a half million people.
  5. Northern Province has small, scattered towns.
  6. A trip to Northern Kenya will take you across vast wilderness.
  7. American tourists are fond of wild animals.
  8. There is a huge lake in the Rift Valley Province.
  9. I sent a letter to my Australian pen pal.
  10. I have a beautiful Egyptian robe.

 

Demonstrative Adjectives

     A demonstrative adjective tells which one or which ones. They are used before nouns and other adjectives.

There are 4 demonstrative adjectives in English: This, that, these and those.

This and these are used to refer to nouns close to the speaker or writer. That and those refer to nouns farther away. This and that are used before singular nouns while these and those are used before plural nouns.

Examples:

This picture is very beautiful.

Singular noun

That one is not as beautiful.

Singular noun

These drawings are very old.

Plural noun

Those ones were painted in Uganda.

Plural noun.

 

Exercise 2

 

Choose the word in brackets that correctly completes each of the following sentences.

  1. My bus left the station before (that, those) matatus.
  2. (Those, These) chairs behind me were occupied.
  3. My seat has a better view than (this, that) one over there.
  4. (Those, That) man should fasten his seat belt.
  5. (This, That) car is old, but that one is new.
  6. (These, Those) clouds are far away.
  7. (This, That) window next to me has a broken pane.
  8. (That, This) chair near me is broken.
  9. My car is moving faster than (these, those) buses over there.

10.(These, Those) goats grazing over there are my uncle’s.

 

 

Definite and indefinite adjectives

 

These are adjectives which tell how many or how much. They give the number or the quantity, either specific or approximate, of the noun in question. They are also referred to as numerals

Examples:

Three elephants were killed by the game rangers.

He bought several houses in Kileleshwa.

Don’t put much sugar in the tea!

 

More examples of numerals

 

Numbers Amount Approximate
Three

Ten

Five

Hundred

Twenty

 

Much

All

Some

Any

Few

 Several

Some

Little

Many

Few

Each

Every

Numerous

Adjectives that are in form of numbers are used with countable nouns:

Examples:

Two calves were born yesterday.

Five chimpanzees performed funny tricks.

Many children like dinosaurs.

 

A definite or indefinite adjective may look like a pronoun, but it is used differently in a sentence. It is an adjective used to modify a noun.

 

Adjectives that are in farm of quantity are used with uncountable nouns.

Examples:

Do you have any water in the house?

How much flour did you buy?

 

Interrogative Adjectives

 

The interrogative adjectives are used with nouns to ask questions. Examples are what, which, and whose.

Examples:

What movie do you want to see?

Which leaves tern colour first?

Whose son is he?

An interrogative adjective may look like an interrogative pronoun but it is used differently. It is an adjective, used to modify a noun.

 

Exercise 3

 

Underline the adjectives in the following sentences.

  1. Twenty bulls were slaughtered for wedding.
  2. Few people know the name of our president.
  3. They stole all the money in the safe.
  4. There isn’t much sugar in the dish.
  5. Numerous disasters have hit China this year.
  6. What game is playing on TV tonight?
  7. Whose car is that one over there?
  8. Which house was broken into?
  9. I don’t know what misfortune has faced him.
  10. Nobody knows which table was taken.

 

Articles and Possessive Pronouns

 

Two special kinds of adjectives are the articles and the possessive pronouns.

 

Articles

 

Articles are the words a, an and the. A and an are special adjectives called indefinite articles. They are used when the nouns they modify do not refer to any particular thing.

Examples:

A student rang the bells (no specific student)

An orange is good for you health. (no specific orange)

A is used before a noun that begins with a consonant sound. An is used before a noun that begins with a vowel sound. Note that it is the first sound of a noun, not the spelling, that determines whether to use a or an.

Examples:

An hour               an heir

A hall

The is a special adjective known as the definite article. It is used to refer to particular things.

Examples:

The tourist was robbed. (a particular tourist).

The team began practising at 8 o’clock (a particular team).

All articles are adjectives. The is used with both singular and plural nouns, but a and an are used with singular nouns

Examples:

The tourist, the tourists, a tourist

The adjective, the adjectives, an adjective

 

Exercise 4

 

Choose the correct article from the choices given in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. (A, An) mountain climber climbed Mt. Elgon.
  2. He went up a cliff and was stranded on (a, an) jagged rock.
  3. No one knew (a, the) route he had taken.
  4. (The, An) climber’s friend called the local police.
  5. The police began the search within (a, an) hour.
  6. A police dog followed (a, an) climber’s scent.
  7. A helicopter began (a, an) air search of the mountain.
  8. The dog followed the climber’s scent to (a, the) jagged edge of the cliff.
  9. A climber from (a, the) police team went down the jagged rock.
  10. (A, An) rope was tied to the climber and he was pulled to safety.

 

Possessive Pronouns

 

The words my, her, its, our and their are possessive pronouns, but they can also be used as adjectives. These modifiers tell which one, which ones or whose?

Examples:

My brother likes Sean Paul, but his sister does not.

Of his songs, ever blazing is his favourite.

Our school produces heroes, its fame is widespread.

 

Exercise 5

 

Write the adjectives from the following sentences and the nouns they modify.

  1. In her lifetime, Brenda Fasie composed many songs.
  2. Her early songs entertained her fans all over the world.
  3. Our first performance was successful.
  4. Her coughing grew worse with time.
  5. They agreed that it was their best goal in ten years.

 

Position of adjectives in sentences

 

  1. Most adjectives appear immediately before the nouns they are modifying e.g.

Descriptive: The beautiful house belongs to my uncle.

Demonstrative: That house belongs to my uncle.

Numerals: Two houses were burned down.

Articles: The house on fire belongs to her sister.

Possessive pronouns: Their house was burned down.

 

  1. Predicate Adjectives

Some adjectives appear after the nouns that they are modifying. These adjectives are always used after linking verbs that separate them from the words they modify. An adjective that follows a linking verb and that modifies the subject is called a predicate adjective.

Examples:

Joyce seemed lonely.

Her brother was upset.

He became concerned.

 

Exercise 6

 

Identify the predicate adjectives in the following sentences.

  1. Her early songs were often quiet and serious.
  2. One of her songs, Vulindlela, is very popular.
  3. The dark city below the sky seems calm and peaceful.
  4. Her performance in K.C.S.E. was brilliant.
  5. The West African singer Kofi Olominde is extraordinary.

 

COMPARING WITH ADJECTIVES

 

We have seen that adjectives describe nouns. One way in which they describe nouns is by comparing people, places or things.

 

To compare two people, places or things, we use the comparative form of an adjective. To compare more than two, we use the superlative form of the adjective.

Examples:

ONE PERSON: Kimenju is tall.

TWO PERSONS: Kimenju is taller than James.

THREE OR MORE: Kimenju is the tallest of all.

 

The comparative

 

The comparative form of the adjective is used to compare one thing, person or place with another one. It is formed in two ways.

  1. For short adjectives, add –er.

Examples:

great + er = greater                      sweet + er = sweeter

big + er = bigger                            light + er = lighter.

 

  1. For longer adjectives, the comparative is formed by using the word more before them.

Examples:

More handsome        more remarkable

More attractive          more hardworking

Most adjectives ending in ful and ous also form the comparative using more.

Examples:

More successful                more curious                more ferocious

More beautiful                 more generous             more prosperous

 

The superlative

 

The superlative form of the adjective is used to compare a person, a place or a thing with more than one other of its kind.

Examples:

Elephants are the largest animals in the jungle.

However, they are the most emotional animals.

The superlative form of an adjective is formed in two ways.

  1. By adding -est to the short adjective

Examples:

great + est = greatest               sweet + est = sweetest

big + est = biggest                     light + est = light

  1. For longer adjectives, use most before them.

Examples:

most mysterious         most awkward

most successful          most attractive

The ending -er in the comparative becomes -est in the superlative while more becomes most.

 

Adjective                     comparative                 superlative

 

strong                          stronger                        strongest

quick                            quicker                          quickest

adventurous               more adventurous       most adventurous

co-operative               more co-operative       most co-operative

 

Summary of rules comparing with adjectives:

 

  Rule Examples
1. For most short adjectives:

Add -er or -est to the adjective

bright          dark              smart

bright          darker          smarter

brightest     darkest         smartest

2. For adjectives ending with e:

Drop the e and add -er or -est

safe              nice              wide

safer            nicer             wider

safest           nicest           widest

 

3. For adjectives ending with a consonant and y:

Change the y to i and add -er or -est

busy                     crazy       happy

busier                  crazier     happier

busiest                craziest   happiest

4. For single-syllable adjectives ending with a single vowel and a consonant:

Double the last consonant and add   -er or -est

flat                       slim                   fat

flatter                  slimmer             fatter

flattest                slimmest           fattest

5. For most adjectives with two or more syllables: Use more or most careful                 generous

more careful       more generous

most careful        most generous

 

 

Points to note about Adjectives:

 

  1. A comparative is used to compare two persons, or things or two groups of persons or things.

Examples:

A rat is smaller than a mouse.

Buffaloes are larger than domestic cows

  1. A superlative is used to compare a thing or a person to more than one other of its kind.

Examples:

Lions are the bravest of all animals.

Elephants are the largest of all herbivores.

  1. You must use the word other when comparing something with everything else of its kind.

Examples:

Leopards are more ferocious than any other cat.

  1. Do not use both -er and more or -est and most.

Incorrect: Men die more earlier than women.

Correct: Men die earlier than women.

Incorrect: My father is the most oldest of the three brothers.

Correct: My father is the oldest of the three brothers.

 

 

Exercise 7

 

Write the adjectives in brackets in the following sentences correctly.

  1. My next sculpture will be even ___________________ (beautiful).
  2. That was the ________________ cartoon I have ever watched (funny).
  3. English is my ____________ subject of all (enjoyable).
  4. Job is the ______________ person in his family. (energetic)
  5. She is the ______________ of the three nurses. (helpful)
  6. That story sounds ____________ than fiction. (strange)
  7. He is _______________ than a cat. (curious)
  8. Her school grades are ______________ than mine. (high)
  9. You are _______________ than Maria. (creative)
  10. My next test will be _______________ than this one. (simple)

Irregular comparisons

 

Some adjectives have special forms for making comparisons. i.e. they do not form their comparatives by use of er or more, or their superlatives by use of est or most. Instead, these adjectives change the words completely to form comparatives and superlatives.

Examples:

Adjectives                              Comparative                        Superlative

 

good                                           better                                     best

well                                            better                                     best

bad                                             worse                                     worst

ill                                                worse                                     worst

little                                           less or lesser                          least

much                                          more                                      most

many                                          more                                      most

far                                               farther                                   farthest

 

Example of use in sentences:

The presentation of our play was good.

Our second performance was better.

But our last performance was the best.

 

Exercise 8

 

Write the correct forms of the adjectives in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. The comedy was the ________________ show of the three. (good)
  2. Mary had a _________________ cold yesterday. (bad)
  3. It was her ____________ performance this year. (good)
  4. Her illness is getting _____________ every day. (bad)
  5. The old woman received the _____________ amount of money from the MP. (little)
  6. Smoke your cigarette _______________ away from the children. (far)
  7. There was ______________ noise in the classroom than yesterday. (little)
  8. The musician said that that was a very ______________ year for him. (good)
  9. This year’s songs were much ______________ than last year’s. (good)
  10. He has the _____________ pairs of shoes in the school. (many)

 

SPECIAL PROBLEMS WITH ADJECTIVES

 

  1. Those and Them

Those is an adjective if it followed by a noun. It is a pronoun if it is used alone.

Examples:

Those thieves are daring! (adjective modifying thieves)

Those are thieves! (pronoun)

 

Them is always a pronoun. It is used only as the object of a verb or as the object of a preposition. It is never used as an adjective.

Examples:

We followed them. (object of a verb)

They caught one of them. (object of a preposition)

We heard them thieves breaking the door. (incorrect)

 

  1. The extra Here and There with demonstrative adjectives

It is incorrect to use the demonstrative adjectives this, that, those, and these with here and there before the nouns they modify.

Examples:

“This here job”

“That there house”

“These here books”

“Those there carpets”

The adjectives this and these include the meaning of here whereas the adjectives that and those include the meaning of there. Saying this here is like repeating oneself.

 

  1. Kind and sort with demonstrative adjectives

Kind and sort are singular and hence should be used with singular demonstrative adjectives this and that.

Examples:

I like this kind of story.

She likes that sort of food.

Kinds and sorts are plural and should be used with plural demonstrative adjectives these and those.

Examples:

Those sorts of horror movies scare me.

These kinds of sports are for strong people.

 

Exercise 9

 

Choose the correct adjectives from the ones given in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. A robot is one of (those, them) machines that looks and acts human.
  2. (These, This) sorts of machines are very strange.
  3. (This, This here) church was built in 1921.
  4. (Them, Those) mushrooms are very delicious.
  5. (Them, Those) soldiers won the battle.
  6. People call (these, this) kinds of songs Soul.
  7. John needed a name for (them, those) songs.
  8. (This, this here) play is called Aminata.
  9. Human beings have a fascination with (those, that) kind of machine.
  10. (These, This) sort of a car is meant for ministers.

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON ADJECTIVES

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. largest vast
  2. Alaskan American, wild
  3. tallest huge
  4. tiny Australian
  5. small, scattered beautiful, Egyptian

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. those Those
  2. Those This
  3. that This
  4. That those
  5. This Those

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. Twenty What
  2. Few, our Whose
  3. all Which
  4. much what
  5. Numerous, this which

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. A the
  2. a an
  3. the the
  4. The the
  5. an A

 

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. many – songs
  2. Her, early – songs, her – fans
  3. Our, first – performance
  4. Her – coughing
  5. their, best – goal, ten – years

 

Exercise 6

  1. quiet, serious
  2. popular
  3. calm, peaceful
  4. brilliant
  5. extraordinary

 

Exercise 7

 

  1. more beautiful 6. stranger
  2. funniest 7. more curious
  3. most enjoyable 8. higher
  4. most energetic 9. more creative
  5. most helpful 10. simpler

 

Exercise 8

 

  1. Best Farther
  2. Bad Less or lesser
  3. Best Good
  4. Worse Better
  5. Least Most

 

Exercise 9

  1. those these
  2. These those
  3. This This
  4. Those that
  5. Those This

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADVERBS

 

An adverb is a word that describes a verb, an adjective, or another adverb.

Adverb tell how, when, or where, or to what extent an action happens.

Examples:

HOW: The man walked quickly.

WHEN: It will rain soon.

WHERE: We shall meet here at 2 p.m.

TO WHAT EXTENT: He is extremely rude.

 

Other examples:

 

HOW                        WHEN                      WHERE                       TO WHAT EXTENT

 

happily                    sometimes              underground               fully

secretly                    later                         here                                 extremely

together                  tomorrow                there                                quite

carefully                   now                         inside                               very

sorrowfully              finally                      far                                    rarely

painfully                  again                        upstairs

fast                           often                        downstairs

hard                         once                         somewhere

slowly                      first                          forward

hurriedly                  next                         behind

quietly                     then                         above

 

Adverbs used to describe verbs

 

Adverbs that describe verbs tell how, when, where and to what extent an action happened.

Examples:

HOW: John waited patiently for his turn.

WHEN: He is now walking into the office.

WHERE: He will eat his lunch there.

TO WHAT EXTENT: He is very pleased with himself.

Adverbs make the meaning of the verb clearer.

Example:

He will eat his lunch. (without adverb)

He will eat his lunch there. (The adverb makes it clear where the action of eating will take place.)

 

Exercise 1

 

Write the adverbs in the following sentences and then indicate whether the adverb tells how, when, where, or to what extent.

  1. The tourist travelled far.
  2. They cheerfully greeted their grandmother.
  3. Tina hurried downstairs when she heard the knock.
  4. He worked carefully and skilfully.
  5. She was extremely agitated.
  6. The scientist looked curiously at the creature.
  7. Soon the bell was rung.
  8. The hall was fully occupied.
  9. They hugged their grandmother adorably.
  10. He brought the cake down.

 

Adverbs used to describe adjectives

 

Adverbs that tell to what extent can be used to describe adjectives.

Examples:

The cave was very dark.

adv  adj                                     

The tea was extremely hot.

                           Adv       adj

 

Other adverbs used with adjectives

 

just                           nearly                           somewhat                    most

 

These adverbs make the adjectives they are describing more understandable and precise.

Example:

The tomb was dark. (without adverb)

The tomb was fully dark. (The adverb fully describes the extent of the darkness).

 

Exercise 2

 

Identify the adverb in each of the following sentences and then indicate the adjective it describes.

  1. He is a highly successful businessman.
  2. The extremely cold weather made me shiver.
  3. They are quite difficult to deal with.
  4. The house is barely visible from here.
  5. He is a very old man by now.
  6. She is mysteriously secretive about her activities.
  7. Jackline is horribly mean with her money.
  8. The book was totally exciting.
  9. The secretary was completely mad when the money was stolen.
  10. The boss is never punctual for meetings.

 

Adverbs used to describe other adverbs

 

Some adverbs that tell to what extent are used to describe other adverbs.

Examples:

The student spoke very softly.

adv  adv

 

The cold subsided very gradually.

adv    adv

 

These adverbs make the adverbs they are describing more understandable and clear.

Examples:

She spoke rudely. (without adjective modifier)

She spoke extremely rudely. (extremely describes the extent of her rudeness).

 

Exercise 3

 

Identify the adverbs modifying other adverbs in the following sentences.

  1. The mourners covered the casket with earth very gradually.
  2. He appeared on her surprisingly quickly.
  3. The sun appeared somewhat closer that day.
  4. He drinks extremely irresponsibly.
  5. The driver sped the car totally carelessly.

 

Specific categories of Adverbs

 

  1. Adverbs of time – These answer the question when?

     Examples:

He joined the class yesterday.

    Today, I will go to the cinema.

 

  1. Adverbs of place– These answer, the question where?

Examples:

Mrs. Kilome has gone out.

The bus stop is near the post office.

 

  1. Adverbs of frequency: These answer the question how often?

Examples:

She often leaves without permission.

He always works hard.

 

  1. Adverbs of manner: These answer the question how?

Examples:

Many ran fast to catch the bus

He painted the house badly.

 

  1. Adverbs of degree. These answer the question how much?

Examples:

Luka is extremely intelligent.

She is very ill.

 

 

 

 

FORMATION OF ADVERBS

 

Many adverbs are formed by adding -ly to an adjective.

Examples:

Slow + -ly = slowly                               quiet + -ly = quietly

Sometimes the addition of -ly to an adjective may require changing the spelling in the adjective.

Examples:

Easy + -ly = easily (y changes to i)

Full + -ly = fully (ll changes to l)

Other adverbs are complete words on their own. That is, they are not formed from other words.

Examples:

fast                      tomorrow              soon                       first                      later

next                     inside                     somewhere           quite

 

Note:

  1. Soon and quite can be used only as adverbs.

Examples:

The school will soon open.

The holiday was quite well spent.

 

  1. Some other modifiers, like late or first, can either be used as adverbs or adjectives.

Examples:

The visitors arrived late. (adverb)

The late arrivals delayed the meeting (adjective)

The robbers had gotten there first. (adverb)

The first house was already broken into. (adjective)

 

  1. When you are not sure whether an adjective or an adverb has been used in a sentence, ask yourself these questions.
  • Which word does the modifier go with?

If it goes with an action verb, an adjective or another adverb, it is an adverb.

Examples:

The story teller spoke quietly. – used with an action verb.

The story teller was very interesting. – used with an adjective.

The story letter spoke extremely slowly. –used with another adverb.

But if it goes with a noun or a pronoun, it is an adjective.

Examples:

The quiet story teller spoke. – used with a noun.

He was quiet. – with a pronoun.

  • What does the modifier tell about the word it goes with?

If the modifier tells when, where, how, or to what extent, it is an adverb.

Examples:

He will come tomorrow. – when

He will come here. – where

He will come secretly. – how

He will be very cautious. – to what extent

But if it tells which one, what kind, or how many, it is an adjective.

He will steal this cow. – which one

He will carry a sharp spear. – what kind

He will be joined for ten years. – how many

  1. Adverbs and predicate adjectives

You will recall that we said that an adjective appears after a linking verb and modifies the subject.

Examples:

He became successful. (successful modifies he)

You seem tired. (tired modifies you)

You appears sick. (sick modifies she)

You look great! (great modifies you)

They sound bored. (bored modifies they)

It feels wet. (wet modifies it)

The oranges taste sweet. (sweet modifies oranges)

The baby grows big. (big modifies baby)

She smells nice. (nice modifies she).

 

 

Sometimes the verbs in the sentences above are used as action verbs.  In this case, they are followed by adverbs, not adjectives. They modify the verbs and tell how, when, where, or to what extent.

Examples:

The singer looked up.

v     adv

We tasted the chocolate eagerly.

v                                adv

The principal appeared suddenly.

v                 adv

  1. Good and well

Good and well have similar meanings, but differ in their use in a sentence.

Example:

Incorrect: He narrates the story good.

Correct: He narrates the story well.

 

Good is always an adjective and modifies nouns or pronouns. It is never used to modify a verb.

Example:

He is a good narrator. (adjective modifying the noun narrator)

Well can be used as either an adjective or an adverb.

Examples:

I feel well. (as an adjective)

He drives well. (as an adverb)

 

 

 

Exercise 4

 

Choose the correct form of the words in brackets in the following sentences.

  1. Luos tell you (quick, quickly) that they are not Bantus.
  2. Over the months, the snow (gradual, gradually) melted.
  3. Rice tastes especially (good, well) with avocado.
  4. The popularity of video games has grown. (rapid, rapidly)
  5. The name of the town may sound (strange, strangely) to some people.
  6. These puppies look a little (odd, oddly).
  7. The idea of breaking the door does not sound (reasonable, reasonably).
  8. Visitors eat Nyama Choma very (rapid, rapidly).
  9. If Nyama Choma has been prepared (good, well), it tastes even better than chicken.
  10. Since fish is high in proten and low in fat, it is bound to keep you (good, well).

 

COMPARING WITH ADVERBS

 

We have seen that we can use adjectives to compare people, things or places.

Adverbs can also be used to compare actions. And like adjectives, we use the comparative form of an adverb to compare two actions and the superlative form of an adverb to compare more than two actions.

Examples:

ONE ACTION:          Maree swims fast.

TWO ACTIONS:       Maree swims faster than Ciku.

THREE OR MORE: Maree swims fastest of all.

Just like adjectives, adverbs have special forms or spelling for making comparisons.

 

The comparative form

 

The comparative form of the adverb is used to compare one action with another. It is formed in two ways:

  1. For short adverbs, add –er.

Examples:

The bird flew higher than the helicopter.

The president arrived sooner than we expected.

  1. For most adverbs ending in ly, use more to make the comparative.

Examples:

She visited him more frequently than Martin.

The tractor towed the lorry more powerfully than the bull-cart.

 

The superlative form

 

The superlative form is used to compare one action with two or more others of the same kind.

Examples:

Of the three athletes, Kipruto runs the fastest.

The lion roars the loudest of all the big cats.

Adverbs that form the comparative with –er form their superlative with est. Those that use more to form comparative use most to form superlative.

Examples:

Adverbs        Comparative                                      Superlative

long                              longer                                     longest

fast                               faster                                      fastest

softly                           more softly                              most softly

politely                       more politely                          most polite

 

 

Points to Remember

 

  1. Use the comparative to compare two actions and the superlative to compare more than two.

Examples:

Comparative: He sat nearer to the window than him

Superlatives: He sat nearest to the window than all the others.

  1. Do not leave out the word other when comparing one action with every other action of the same kind.

Examples:

Incorrect: The lion roared louder than any lion.

Correct: The lion roared louder than any other lion.

  1. Do not use both -er and more or -est and most.

Incorrect: The dancer moved more faster than before.

Correct: The dancer moved faster than before.

Summary of rules for comparing with Adverbs

 

1. For most adverbs

Add -er or -est to the adverb

hard                   late                 deep

harder               later              deeper

hardest              latest            deepest

2. For most adverbs comprising of two or more syllables: Use more or most with the adverb skilfully                 firmly              rudely

more skilfully       more firmly    most rudely

most skilfully       most firmly    most rudely

 

 

Exercise 5

 

Write each of the following sentences using the correct form of the adverb.

  1. Does she cry ______________ (often) than the baby does?
  2. She crosses the river _____________ (slowly) than her son does.
  3. James jumps into the swimming pool _____________ (quickly).
  4. Charles swims _____________ (skilfully) than all of us.
  5. Of all the athletes, Tecla Lorupe is ____________ (fast).
  6. The antelope disappeared _____________ (swiftly) than the gazelle.
  7. Chicharito scored the goal _____________ (accurately) of all.
  8. Mange and Marto stayed in the hall ______________ (long) of all.
  9. Sarah walks _____________ (gracefully).
  10. Ng’ang’orito sang ____________ (sweetly) of all participants.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON ADVERBS

 

Exercise 1

 

           Adverb                                    What it indicates

  1. far                                                     where
  2. cheerful                                                      how
  3. downstairs                                                      where
  4. carefully, skilfully how
  5. extremely  how
  6. curiously how
  7. soon when
  8. fully to what extent
  9. adorably how
  10. down where

 

Exercise 2

 

                 Adverb                                                      Adjective

  1. highly                                                       successful
  2. extremely                                                  cold
  3. quite                                                         difficult
  4. barely                                                        visible
  5. very                                                           old
  6. mysteriously                                            secretive
  7. horribly mean
  8. totally                                exciting
  9. completely mad
  10. never punctual

 

Exercise 3

 

            Adverb                                                    adverb

  1. very                                gradually
  2. surprisingly quickly
  3. somewhat closer
  4. extremely irresponsibly
  5. totally                                        carelessly

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. quickly odd
  2. gradually reasonable
  3. good rapidly
  4. rapidly well
  5. strange well

 

Exercise 5

  1. more often more swiftly
  2. more slowly        most accurately
  3. quickly the longest
  4. more skilfully gracefully
  5. the fastest the most sweetly

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PREPOSITIONS

 

A preposition is a word that shows the relationship between other words in a sentence.

Examples:

The cat lay under the table.

The preposition under connects the verb lay with table. Under points out the relationship between lay and table. Hence a preposition is a word that links another word or word group to the rest of the sentence. The noun or pronoun after the preposition is called the object of the preposition. The table is the object of the preposition under in the above sentence. The preposition under relates the verb lay to the noun table.

More examples:

She gave it to me.

(The preposition to relates the pronoun me with the action gave).

I liked the bike with the metal handles.

The preposition with relates the noun handles with the noun bike.

 

Common prepositions

 

about                  before                    except                    on                        toward

above                  behind                   for                          onto                    under

aboard                below                    from                       out                       underneath

across                  beneath                 in                            outside                until

after                    beside                    inside                     over                     up

against                between                into                        past                     upon

along                   beyond                  like                         since                    with

among                 by                           near                       through               within

around                down                     of                           throughout         without

at                         during                    off                          to

 

From the above list of prepositions, you will note that some of them tell where, others indicate time, others show special relationships like reference or separation.

 

Changing one preposition with another in a sentence changes the meaning of the sentence.

Example:

The cat lay under the table.

The cat lay on the table.

Lying under the table means below the surface of the table but on means above the surface.

 

Exercise 1

 

Write the preposition in each of the following sentences and say what relationship it indicates.

  1. Sometimes they lie on the ground.
  2. They have grown maize for food.
  3. The children played with the dolls.
  4. A man found some treasure in the cave.
  5. They make clothes from cotton.

 

Exercise 2

 

Use the most appropriate preposition to complete the sentences below.

  1. Driving had been my dream ________________ years.
  2. _____________ 1990, I bought a second-hand car.
  3. ______________ that year, I learned how to drive.
  4. I rolled the car ________________ the road _____________ more than two kilometres.
  5. I was really thrilled ______________ the experience.

 

Preposition Phrases

 

A prepositional phrase consists of a preposition, its object and any words that modify the object.

Examples:

The school children waited for the green light.

In this sentence, the preposition is for, its object is light, and the modifier, or adjective, is green. The entire preposition phrase modifies the verb waited.

 

Sometimes two or more nouns or pronouns are used as objects in a prepositional phrase.

Example:

He needs a worker with diligence and a good character.

The preposition with has two objects: diligence and character.

 

Exercise 3

 

Identify the prepositional phrase in each of the following sentences. Underline the preposition once and its objects twice.

  1. Donkeys help people in many ways.
  2. They bring happiness to the people around them.
  3. In large cities, they help to carry water.
  4. On farms, they carry heavy loads.
  5. How could you travel across a river?
  6. You might swim to the other side.
  7. You might cross at a shallow place.
  8. You can cross by boat.
  9. Bridges are a better solution to the problem.
  10. Most bridges are built over water.

 

Types of prepositional phrases

 

Prepositional phrases can either be:

  • Adjective prepositional phrases – these prepositional phrases, just like adjectives, modify nouns and pronouns.

Example:

A scout leader wears a uniform with many badges.

In this sentence, with many badges is an adjective prepositional phrase modifying the noun uniform.

  • Adverb prepositional phrases – these ones, just like adverbs, modify verbs, adjectives or other adverbs.

Examples:

Scouts rain for many hours.

The adverb prepositional phrase for many hours modifies the verb train.

They are active in all public functions.

The adverb prepositional phrase in all public functions modifies the adjective active.

The scout leader commands forcefully with a loud voice.

The adverb prepositional phrase with a loud voice modifies the adverb forcefully.

 

We have seen that the object of a preposition is the noun or pronoun that follows the preposition. When the object of the preposition is a pronoun, we use an object pronoun like me, you, him, her, it, us, and them. (And not a subject pronoun like I, he, she, we, and they).

Examples:

Correct: I gave a present to her.

Incorrect: I gave a present to she.

Correct: I gave a present to Jane and her.

Incorrect: I gave a present to Jane and she.

 

 

 

Exercise 4

 

Choose the pronoun in brackets that correctly completes each of the following sentences.

  1. The dog chased after Travis and (her, she).
  2. Cleaning the house was a tasking job for Evans and (I, me).
  3. We planned a family picture of our parents and (us, we).
  4. The victory belonged to (he, him).
  5. Michael and Bernard stood behind Mom and (she, her).
  6. The crowd around (we, us) started cheering.
  7. My little sister ran behind Sammy and (I, me).
  8. The toys belong to Karen and (him, he).
  9. Johnny sat between James and (me, I).
  10. I went to the cat race with Jim and (she, her).

 

Sometimes one prepositional phrase immediately follows another.

Examples:

The thief entered the house through the door on the right.

(through the door modifies the verb entered and tells where. on the left modifies the noun door and tells which one.

 

A prepositional phrase can be at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of a sentence.

Examples:

BEGINNING: At dusk we closed the shop.

MIDDLE: The chief of the area was helpful.

END: The path went through the village.

 

Preposition or Adverb?

 

Sometimes the same word can be used as either a preposition or an adverb. How can you tell the difference between the two?

Examples:

PREPOSITION:    He has a box inside the house.

ADVERB:             They ran inside.

You can tell the difference by remembering the following:

  • A preposition never stands alone. It is always followed by its object, a noun or a pronoun.

Examples:        

The helicopter flew past the airport. (preposition)

The aircraft was parked inside the hangar. (preposition)

  • An adverb is never followed by a noun or a pronoun, may be by an adverb.

Examples:

The helicopter flew past. (adverb).

The aircraft was parked inside. (adverb)

The helicopter flew past noisily (adverb).

Therefore, if a word begins a prepositional phrase, it is a preposition. If it stands alone or is followed by an adverb, it is an adverb.

 

Some words that can be used either as prepositions or adverbs.

 

above                       down                   over

along                        in                         out

around                     inside                  outside

below                       near                     under

by                             off                        up

 

Exercise 5

Indicate after each of the following sentences if it has a preposition or an adverb.

  1. Jack stood outside the shop.
  2. He was curious and went inside.
  3. He saw strange things in every corner.
  4. An old coat and several sweaters lay over a chair.
  5. Blue and green umbrellas stood above the fire place.
  6. He looked up suddenly.
  7. He sat down heavily.
  8. Then he lifted the curtain and peeped outside.
  9. A jogger ran by
  10. Jack ran out.

 

 

NEGATIVES

Negatives are words that mean “no” or “not”. These words are adverbs.

Examples:

She has no more work.

There are none left.

 

Other common negatives

 

not                           nowhere              nobody                aren’t        haven’t

never                        nothing               no one                 doesn’t      wouldn’t

 

The combination of a verb and not also form a contraction which is also a negative. The letters n’t stand for not.

Examples:

They won’t be able to attend the funeral.

He couldn’t make a speech.

 

Double negatives:

 

A sentence should have only one negative. Using double negatives in a sentence is usually incorrect. A double negative is the use of two negative words together when only one is needed.

Examples:

Incorrect                                                             Correct

 

We don’t need no more problems.  We don’t need any more problems.

She hasn’t bought nothing.                           She hasn’t bought anything.

Mark hasn’t no homework.                           Mark hasn’t any homework. Or

Mark has no homework.

When you use contractions like don’t  and hasn’t, do not use negative words after them. Instead, use words like any, anything, and ever.

Examples:

We don’t have any work.

He hasn’t any work.

I won’t ever respond to the summons.

 

Other negatives include hardly, barely, and scarcely. They are never used after contractions like haven’t and didn’t.

Examples:

Incorrect                                                                        Correct

 

We couldn’t hardly continue with the work.     We could hardly continue with the work.

The child can’t barely walk.                                The child can barely walk.

 

Exercise 6

 

Write the following sentences choosing the correct negatives from the ones given in brackets.

  1. They (have, haven’t) nothing to eat.
  2. Isn’t (anyone, no one) at home?
  3. Didn’t you (ever, never) swim in that river?
  4. There isn’t (anybody, nobody) weeding the farm.
  5. Ann and Martin haven’t (anywhere, nowhere) to sleep.
  6. Our friends (had, hadn’t) none of the fun.
  7. Isn’t (anybody, nobody) watching Tahidi High?
  8. Hasn’t (anyone, no one) thought of washing the utensils?
  9. Tabby (hasn’t, has) had no luck.
  10. We haven’t (ever, never) tried.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON PREPOSITIONS

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. on – where
  2. for – purpose
  3. with – use
  4. in – place
  5. from – place

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. for
  2. In
  3. In
  4. down, for
  5. by

 

Exercise 3

 

    Preposition                                              Object/objects

  1. in ways
  2. to                          people
  3. In cities
  4. On farms
  5. across river
  6. to side
  7. at place
  8. by boat
  9. to problem
  10. over water

 

Exercise 4

  1. her           us
  2. me me
  3. us           him
  4. her           me
  5. us         her

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. outside – preposition          up – adverb
  2. inside – adverb          down – adverb
  3. in – preposition          outside – adverb
  4. over – preposition          by – adverb
  5. above – preposition        out – adverb

 

 

 

 

Exercise 6

  1. have anybody                    7. anybody            10. ever
  2. anyone anywhere       8. anyone
  3. ever had                            9. has

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CONJUNCTIONS

 

A conjunction is a word that connects words or groups of words. Like prepositions, conjunctions show a relationship between the words they connect. But, unlike prepositions, conjunctions do not have objects.

There are 3 main categories of conjunctions;

  • Coordinating conjunctions
  • Subordinating conjunctions
  • Correlative conjunctions

 

Coordinating Conjunctions

 

Coordinating conjunctions connect related words, groups of words, or sentences. There are three coordinating conjunctions: and, but and or. And is used to join words, groups of words, or sentences together. But shows contrast while or shows choice.

Examples:

The bull and the cart are inseparable. (connects two subjects).

The cart carries the farmer and his tools. (connects two direct objects).

The food was hard and tasteless. (connects two predicate adjectives).

Each night, the dancers danced in a circle or in several other patterns. (connects two prepositional phrases).

Some people died in the fracas, but most managed to escape, alive. (connects two sentences).

 

Exercise 1

 

Complete each of the following sentences using the most appropriate coordinating conjunction

  1. Bats and insects fly, ____________ only birds have feathers.
  2. Eagles build nests on cliffs ______________ in tall trees.
  3. Parrots live in wild places _______________ in zoos.
  4. Swallows ______________ sparrows often build nests in buildings.
  5. Hummingbirds are tiny __________ very brave.
  6. Many birds fly south in winter, ______________ others do not.
  7. Their feathers keep them warm ____________ dry.
  8. A bird can fly forward _____________ backward.
  9. Many birds shed old feathers ______________ grow new ones.
  10. Their legs are weak ____________ their wings are strong.

 

Subordinating conjunctions

 

Subordinating conjunctions connect two or more clauses to form complex sentences. (Refer to Part Two of this handbook). Subordinating conjunctions introduce subordinate clauses. They include because, since, if, as, whether, and for.

Examples:

If I go home, my dog will follow me.

The subordinating conjunction if connects the subordinate clause I go home with the main clause my dog will follow me.

The stayed inside the church because it was raining.

He was always rude since he was a child.

The rain fell as they entered the building.

The pastor asked the congregation whether they were happy.

The man rejoiced for he had won a prize.

 

Exercise 2

 

Join the following pairs of sentences using the most appropriate subordinating conjunctions.

  1. They arrived late. It was raining heavily.
  2. John worked hard. He wanted to buy a house.
  3. I won’t carry the umbrella. You need it.
  4. I drove the car madly. I was later for the meeting.
  5. He will come. The meeting ends.

 

Correlative conjunctions

 

Correlative conjunctions are conjunctions that are used in pairs to connect sentence parts. These include either ….. or, neither ….. nor, not only……. but also, whether ……. or and both …… and.

Examples:

Both boys and girls attended the conference.

People brought not only food but also clothes for the victims of the floods.

The students ride either on bicycles or motorbikes.

The sailor had to decide whether to sail on or head back when the weather changed.

Neither John nor James was moved by the shocking news.

 

Exercise 3

 

Join the following pairs of sentences using the correlative conjunctions in brackets.

  1. The vehicles stopped for repairs. The vehicles stopped for fuel. (either…..or)
  2. The drivers knew they had to travel more than fifty kilometres. If they did not travel more than fifty kilometres, they would have to endure harsh storms. (either….or).
  3. Many people build their own homes. Many people grow their own food. (not only…but also)
  4. Men wanted to buy the pictures. Women also wanted to buy the pictures.(both…. and)
  5. Maize is an important part of a Kenyan’s diet. Meat is important too. (both… and)

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON CONJUNCTIONS

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. but but
  2. or and
  3. or or
  4. and and
  5. but but

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. They arrived late because it was raining heavily.
  2. John worked hard as he wanted to buy a house.
  3. I won’t carry the umbrella for you need it.
  4. I drove the car madly since I was late for the meeting.
  5. He will come before the meeting ends.

 

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. The vehicles either stopped for repairs or for fuel.
  2. The drivers knew they had either to travel more than fifty kilometres or endure harsh storms.
  3. Many people not only build their own homes but also grow their own food.
  4. Both men and women wanted to buy the pictures.
  5. Both maize and meat are important parts of a Kenyan’s diet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                

 

INTERJECTIONS

 

An interjection is either a single word or short groups of words that is used to express a feeling or emotion. Interjections can express such feelings as urgency, surprise, relief, joy, or pain. An interjection that expresses strong emotion is often followed by an exclamation mark. An interjection that expresses mild emotion is usually followed by a comma.

Examples:

Let’s go! We can’t sleep before we find the missing boy (urgency).

Phew! I was afraid we would never find him. (relief)

Oh, you have grown so big. (surprise)

Well, I have never been so happy. (joy)

 

Exercise 1

 

Identify the interjection in the following sentences and indicate what feeling or emotion it expresses.

  1. Say, have you heard about Nameless and Jua Kali, the famous Kenyan musicians.
  2. Wow! Seeing the calf being born was exciting.
  3. “All right!” I yelled to him. “This is not right thing to do.”
  4. Boy! Some people felt wonderful being in the air balloon, but I felt nervous.
  5. Oh, did that boat rock back and forth for a while.

 

ANSWERS TO CHAPTER EIGHT

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. Say –     wonderment
  2. Wow! – joy
  3. All right! – urgency
  4. Boy! – fear
  5. Oh – surprise

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER TWO

 

FORMATION AND ORIGIN OF WORDS

 

Some words in the English language have unique origins and formations.

 

  • Sound words (onomatopoeias)

Some of the words imitate the sounds they represent. These words are called sound or onomatopoeic words. For example, the words bang and crash describe a loud, sudden noise. The word murmur describes a low, soft noise that keeps going.

Many English words imitate noises made by animals. For example, the word chirp imitates the short, high sound made by a small bird or a cricket.

 

Other examples of sound (onomatopoeic) words

 

beep                         gobble                          neigh                             squeal

blast                         growl                             purr                               tick

buzz                         hiss                               quack                            zip

clang                        honk                             rip

clatter                      hum                              roar

crack                         meow                            smash

crunch                      moo                              splash

 

Exercise 1

 

Write a sound word for each of the following descriptions.

  1. The sound of something breaking
  2. The loud, deep sound of a lion.
  3. The sound of a clock.
  4. The sound of an angry dog.
  5. The sound of a loud bell.
  6. The sound made by a duck.
  7. The sound of a bottle opening.
  8. The sound of a cat drinking milk.
  9. The sound of a bomb exploding.
  10. The sound of a snake.

 

  • Words that come from names of people and places (Eponyms)

Some of the words in the English language come from the names of people and places.

Examples:

Word Meaning Named after
Sandwich Two or more slices of bread with meat between them. John Montagu, the fourth Earl of Sandwich, who liked eating meat between slices of bread.
Maverick A person who breaks from conventional actions Samuel Maverick, a Texas cattle owner who refused to brand the calves of one of his herds as per the requirements.
Saxophone A musical wind instrument Adolphe Sax, the Belgian inventor of the musical instrument.
Madras A cotton cloth with a design or pattern on plain background Madras, a city in India, where it was invented.
Rugby A game Rugby school. England, where rugby was invented.
Tarantula A large, hairy spider Taranto, a town in Italy where Tarantulas are found.
Shylock A greedy money-lender The relentless and vengeful money- lender in Shakespeare’s play, The Merchant of Venice.
Sousaphone A musical instrument John Phillip Sousa, an American composer who invented the Sousaphone.

 

There are many more words in the English language which originated from names of people or places.

 

Exercise 2

Find out from your dictionary the origins and meanings of the following English words.

  1. lima bean guppy                                11. guillotine
  2. cardigan cheddar                             12. macadam
  3. bloomer quisling                            13. pasteurisation
  4. canary birds silhouette                         14. watt
  5. Ferris wheel Marxism                           15. ohm

 

  • Words formed from blending two or more words (portmanteau words)

Some words in the English language are a blend of two or more words or morphemes.

Examples:

Word Combination of Meaning
Smog Smoke + fog A combination of smoke and fog in the air.
Fantabulous Fantastic + fabulous Incredible, astonishing, unbelievable, wonderful
Brunch Breakfast + lunch A late breakfast taken some hours before lunch
Wikipedia Wiki + encyclopaedia A website
Comcast Communication + broadcast  
Verizori Veritas + horizon  
Accenture Accent + future  
Spork Spoon + fork An eating utensil that is a combination of a spoon and a fork.
Skort Skirt + shorts An item of clothing that is part skirt and short.
Simulcast Simultaneous + broadcast To broadcast a programme on television and radio at the same time
Cyborg Cybernetic + organism  
Motel Motor + hotel A roadside hotel

 

Exercise 3

 

Identify the words that are blended to form the following words. Find out their meanings from your dictionary.

  1. slithy breathalyser
  2. chortle                                                     cable gram
  3. galumph camcorder
  4. bash edutainment
  5. blog                  email

 

  • Words formed by use of prefixes and suffixes

Some words are formed addition of prefixes and suffixes to other words.

 

Prefixes

A prefix is a word part that is added to the beginning of a word to form another word or to change its meaning. The word to which the prefix is added is called the base word.

Examples:

Prefix                                     Base word                       New word

un                                      friendly                           unfriendly

pre                                     pay                                  prepay

 

A prefix changes the meaning of the base word. For example, the prefix un-above means “not”. Hence, unfriendly means “not friendly”. Each prefix has its own meaning.

 

More examples of common English prefixes

Prefix Meaning Examples
mis-

re-

pre-

ante-

anti-

contra-

counter-

en-

extra-

inter-

intra-

non-

over-

post-

pre-

 

pro-

re-

semi-

trans-

un-

 

under-

wrong, incorrectly

again

before, in advance

before, preceding

opposing, against,  the opposite

against

opposition, opposite direction

put into or on

outside, beyond

between, among

inside, within

absence, negation

excessively, completely

after in time, or order

before in time, place order or importance

favouring, in support of

again

half, partly

across, beyond

not

 

beneath, below

misspell – to spell incorrectly

revisit – visit again

preschool – before school

antecedent, ante-room

anti-aircraft, antibiotic, anticlimax

contraceptive, contraband

counter-attack, counteract

engulf, enmesh

extraordinary, extracurricular

interact, interchange

intramural, intravenous

non-smoker, non-alcoholic

overconfident, overjoyed

postpone, post-mortem

precondition, preadolescent

 

Pro-African

repaint, reawaken

semicircle, semi-conscious

transnational, transatlantic

unacceptable, unreal, unhappy, unmarried

underarm, undercarriage

 

Exercise 4

 

Give the meaning of the following prefixes and write two examples each of words in which they are used. Use your dictionary.

  1. ultra- infra-
  2. hypo- hypo-
  3. hemi- hemi
  4. ex- ex-
  5. dia dia-

 

 

Suffixes

 

A suffix is a word part that is added to the end of a base word to form a new word or to change its meaning.

Example:

Enjoy + able = enjoyable

Each suffix has its own meaning. The suffix “able” means “capable of”. Hence enjoyable means “capable of being enjoyed”.

 

Common English suffixes

Suffix Meaning Examples
Noun Suffixes

-acy

-al

-ance, -ence

-dom

-er, -or

-ism

-ist

-ity, -ty

-ment

-ness

-ship

-sion, -tion

Verbs suffixes

-ate

-en

-ify, -fy

-ize, ise

Adjective suffixes

-able, -ible

-al

-esque

-ful

-ic, -ical

-ious, ous

-ish

– ive

-less

-y

 

state or quality

act or process of

quality of

place or state of being

one who

doctrine, belief

one who

quality of

condition of

state of being

position held

state of being

 

become

become

make or become

become

 

capable of being

pertaining to

reminiscent of

notable for

pertaining to

characterized by

having the quality of

having the nature of

without

characterized by

 

privacy, advocacy

refusal, dismissal

Maintenance, eminence

freedom, kingdom

trainer, protector

Communism, Marxism

chemist, pharmacist

veracity, curiosity

argument, armament

heaviness, fearlessness

fellowship, headship

concession, transition

 

eradicate, fumigate

enlighten, fugliten

terrify, specify

civilize, apologize

 

edible, presentable

regional, sectional

picturesque

fanciful, colourful

musical, mythic

nutritious, portentous

fiendish, greenish

creative, abusive

endless, pointless

sleazy, cheeky

 

 

 

Exercise 5

 

Add an appropriate suffix to each of the following words and then give the meaning of the new word.

  1. hope green
  2. read wear
  3. child fear
  4. grey kind
  5. play wash

 

 

WORDS USAGE

 

Words in English language have various meanings depending on their usage in sentences.

  • Homographs

Homographs are words which are spelled the same but have different meanings. They usually appear as separate entries in a dictionary.

Examples:

The man dug a well in his compound.

They worked well together.

In the first sentence, the noun well means “a spring of water”. In the second sentence, the adverb well means “in a good manner”.

 

Examples of common homographs in the English Language

Homograph Meaning Examples
bear

 

sow

 

lead

 

 

close

 

 

 

wind

 

 

date

 

 

 

 

fast

 

 

hide

 

 

net

 

 

 

pick

(V)    to support or carry

(N)    an animal

(V)    to plant seed

(N)    female pig

(V)    to guide

 

(N)    a metal

(Adv)near

 

(V)    lock

 

(V)   turning something around

(N)   marking air

 

(V)   to determine the age

(N)   to “go out”

(N)   a kind of fruit a calendar

 

(N)  time

(Adj) quick

(V)  to choose not to eat food

 

(N)  animal skin

(V)  to conceal

 

(N)  woven trap made of rope or cord

(Adj) amount remaining after deductions.

(N)  a kind of tool

(V)  to choose

I will bear the burden.

The bear killed the hunter.

The farmer sowed the seeds.

The sow is very fat.

The mother duck can lead her ducklings around.

Gold is heavier than lead.

The tiger was now so close. that I could smell it.

“Will you please close that door?”

Wind your watch.

The wind howled through the woodlands.

Can you date this sculpture?

I have a date with Mary.

Dates are grown in South Africa.

What is the date today?

He is a fast runner.

The Christians fast just before Easter.

He is tanning the hide.

They hide their money under their pillows.

They caught fish using a net.

 

His net pay is thirty thousand shillings per month.

He used a pick to dig the hole.

Pick the dress that you want.

Some homographs are spelled the same but pronounced differently.

Example:

The wind is strong today.

This path winds through the hills.

 

Exercise 6

 

Write two meanings of the following homographs and use each of them in sentences of your own.

  1. pen                                               act
  2. tire                                                               arms
  3. dove block
  4. wound box
  5. mean bank

 

  • Homophones

Homophones are words that sound the same but have different spellings and meanings.

Example:

She will buy music composed by my favourite artist.

Homophones are often confused when writing by many students because of similarity in pronunciation.

 

Examples of common homophones in English

Homophones Meaning Examples
aisle

isle

(V)      the walkway

(N)      island

I quickly walked down the aisle.

He grew up on the isle of Elba.

 

allowed

aloud

(V)     permitted

(Adv) not silently

His mother allowed him to stay up late.

She read the story aloud.

Ate

 

eight

(V)     past tense of “eat”

(N)     number

She ate a quick lunch.

I bought eight tickets.

ball

 

bawl

(N)    a round object used in games

(V)     to cry

 

He took the ball to the beach.

 

Please don’t bawl! It’s not that bad.

bear

 

bare

(V)     to stand something

(Adj.) naked

He can’t bear exams.

 

He stood outside in the rain completely bare.

Base

 

 

bass

 

(N)   the bottom

support of something

(N)   the lowest pitches in music

 

We need a new base for that lamp.

 

I sang bass in the church choir.

 

 

 

 

More examples of homophones

lead, led

least, leased

loan, lone

male, mail

meet, meat

mind, mined

morning, mourning

naval, navel

new, knew

no, know

one, won

pear, pair

pie, pi

piece, peace

pier, peer

poor, pour

rain, reign

raw, roar

read, reed

road, rode

sale, sail

saw, sore

see, sea

sun, son

tail, tale

tea, tee

their, they’re

they’re, there

tide, tied

too, to

two, too

wail, whale

warn, worn

weal, wheel

wear, where

weather, whether

week, weak

weight, wait

while, wile

wood, would

write, right

yew, you

your, you’re

acetic, ascetic

axle, axial

formerly, formally

ion, iron

loch, lock

holy, wholly

heal, heel

ad, add

ail, ale

all, awl

alms, arms

altar, alter

arc, ark

aren’t, aunt

anger, augur

aural, oral

away, aweigh

awe, oar, or, ore

bale, bail

band, banned

bean, been

blew, blue

brake, break

cell, sell

cent, scent, sent

 

 

cereal, serial

check, cheque

chord, cord

cite, site, sight

coo, coup

cue, queue

dam, damn

dew, due

die, dye

doh, doe, dough

earn, urn

ewe, yew, you

faint, feint

fair, fare

feat, feet

few, phew

find, fined

fir, fur

flaw, floor

flea, flee

flew, flue

flour, flower

for, fore, four

foreword, forward

fort, fought

gait, gate

genes, jeans

gnaw, nor,

gorilla, guerrilla

grate, great

groan, grown

guessed, guest

hale, hail

hair, hare

 

 

 

 

Exercise 7

 

Give the homophones and the meanings of the following words.

  1. in                             knight
  2. heard knows
  3. horse tick
  4. hey rung
  5. need sees

 

 

 

 

  • Synonyms

 

Synonyms are words that have almost the same meaning but different spelling and pronunciation.

Examples:

Slender – thin                                    finish – end                            sick –ill

Some words have several synonyms. For example, happy has such synonyms words like light-hearted, pleased, and cheerful.

Synonyms help vary the writing, just like pronouns do. For example, the word happy and its synonyms help vary the writing.

Daniel felt happy – Daniel felt light-hearted.

She was happy with her grade – She was pleased with her grade.

They sang a happy song – They sang a cheerful song.

                          

Examples of common synonyms in English

about, approximately

accomplish, achieve

administer, manage

admit, confess

almost, nearly

annoy, irritate

answer, reply

arise, occur

arrive, reach

begin, start

belly, stomach

bizarre, weird

brave, courageous

chop, cut

clerk, receptionist

close, shut

contrary, opposite

correct, right

daybreak, dawn

demonstrate, protest

denims, jeans

desert, abandon

devil, Satan

disappear, vanish

eager, keen

emphasize, stress

enormous, huge, immense

enquire, investigate

evaluate, assess

fanatic, enthusiast

fool, idiot

sincere, honest

skull, cranium

soiled, dirty

suggest, propose

sunrise, dawn

temper, mood

trustworthy, reliable

 

formerly, previously

fragrance, perfume

function, operate

garbage, rubbish

gay, homosexual

grab, seize

gut, intestine

hard, tough

hashish, cannabis

hawk, peddle

hint, trace, tip

homicide, murder

hunger, starvation

hurry, rush

idler, loafer

if, whether

illustrate, demonstrate

imitate, mimic

immediate, instant

immobile, motionless

impartial, neutral

impasse, deadlock

impolite, rude

inconsiderate, thoughtless

infamous, notorious

informal, casual

inheritor, heir

instructions, directions

jealous, envious

joy, delight

lacking, missing

lethal, deadly

ultimate, final

uncommon, unusual

uncooked, raw

unforeseen, unexpected

unfortunate, unlucky

unmarried, single

untimely, premature

lousy, awful

madness, insanity

magnify, exaggerate

manmade, artificial

material, fabric

merciless, cruel

midway, halfway

mind, intellect

mirror, reflect

mistrust, distrust

modern, contemporary

movie, film

murderer, assassin

naked, bare

nameless, anonymous

nightfall, dusk

noon, midday

numerous, many

object, thing

outside, external

overlook, miss

peaceable, peaceful

poisonous, toxic

post-mortem, autopsy

praise, compliment

reasonable, fair

refrain, chorus

religious, devout

respond, reply

scarcity, shortage

signal, sign

silly, foolish

vain, useless

vary, differ

vast, huge

winery, vineyard

withstand, resist

zenith, peak

Exercise 8

 

Give the synonyms of the following words:

  1. start collect
  2. come assist
  3. lengthy build
  4. shattered reply
  5. Fix          purchase

 

  • Antonyms

Antonyms are words that have opposite meanings. Antonyms also add variety to your writing.

Examples:

Cold-hot                     heavier – lighter                     fearful – brave.

Some words have more than one antonym. Some of these antonyms can be formed by adding a prefix to a base word.

Examples:

Kind – cruel, unkind                                               like – hate, dislike

 

Examples of common antonyms in English

absent – present

absurd – sensible

abundant – scarce

accidental – intentional

accuse – defend

accurate – incorrect

admit – deny

advance – retreat

after – before

alien – native

alone – together

always – never

amuse – bore

anger – kindness

applaud – boo

asleep – awake

beautiful – ugly

beg – offer

below – above

bitter – sweet

buy – sell

careful – careless

cease – begin

civilian – military

closed – open

condemn – praise

crooked – straight

dangerous – safe

dead – alive

deep – shallow

destroy – create

drunk – sober

east – west

 

enemy – friend

evil – good

exhale – inhale

expensive – cheap

fail – succeed

fat – skinny

fertile – barren

floor – ceiling

former – latter

funny – serious

generous – stingy

genuine – fake

guilty – innocent

humble – arrogant

husband – wife

illegal – lawful

import – export

indoor – outdoor

inferior – superior

intelligent – stupid

joy – grief

kind – mean

king – commoner

lazy – industrious

lock – unlock

majority – minority

man – woman

merciful – cruel

moist – dry

nervous – calm

obey – disobey

original – copy

patient – impatient

permit – forbid

polite – rude

positive – negative

private – public

push – pull

question – answer

quick – slow

reckless – cautious

rival – friend

sane – insane

servant – master

sick – well

simple – complex

slavery – freedom

smart – dumb

solid – gas

spend – save

stranger – friend

strong – weak

sudden – gradual

suffix – prefix

tame – wild

temporary – permanent

thaw – freeze

tough – tender

unique – common

vacant – occupied

victory – defeat

villain – hero

war – peace

young – old

 

 

 

Exercise 9

 

Give the antonyms of the following words:

  1. easy       sweat
  2. whisper       stationary
  3. triumph       strengthen
  4. dull       precious
  5. dangerous naked

 

 

  • Idioms and Sayings

 

An idiom is a phrase that has a special meaning as a whole. The meaning of an idiom is different from the meanings of its separate words.

Examples:

It was raining cats and dogs.

The idiom raining cats and dogs does not mean that cats and dogs were falling out of the sky! It means “raining heavily”.

I put my foot in my mouth today.

The idiom put my foot in my mouth means “to say the wrong thing”. Sometimes the context in which an idiom is used can give a hint of its meaning.

Example:

Jeff is talking through his hat when he says that he can spell every word in the English language.

This idiom clearly means that Jeff cannot possibly spell every word in the English language. Hence, the idiom talking through his hat means talking nonsense

More examples of idioms in the English language

              Idiom                  Meaning
1.

 

 

2.

 

 

3.

 

 

4.

 

 

5.

 

 

6.

 

 

7.

 

 

8.

 

 

 

9.

 

10

 

 

11

 

 

12

 

 

13

 

It was a blessing in disguise.

 

 

He is a doubling Thomas.

 

 

That scandal was a drop in the bucket.

The exam was a piece of cake.

 

The punishment was a slap in the wrist.

 

The thief received a taste of his own medicine.

 

Don’t add fuel to the fire!

 

 

The principal is just all bark but no bite.

 

 

The theory is all Greek to me.

 

We are all in the same boat.

 

 

The house cost him an arm and a leg.

 

The teacher has an axe to grind with the bursar.

 

Joyce is the apple of my eye.

Something good that is not recognised at first.

 

A sceptic who needs physical or personal evidence in order to believe something.

 

A very small part of something big or whole.

A task that can be accomplished very easily.

 

A very mild punishment.

 

 

He was mistreated the same way he mistreats others.

 

When something is done to make a bad situation even worse than it is.

 

When someone is threatening and/or aggressive but not willing to engage in a fight.

 

Meaningless and incomprehensible.

 

When everyone is facing the same challenges.

 

Very expensive. A large amount of money.

 

 

To have a dispute with someone.

 

 

Someone who is cherished above all others.

 

 

14

 

 

15

 

16

 

 

 

17

 

 

 

18

 

 

19

 

20

 

 

21

 

22

 

 

23

 

 

24

 

25

 

 

26

 

27

 

 

28

 

29

 

30

 

 

31

 

 

32

 

33

 

 

34

 

35

 

 

36

 

 

37

 

38

 

 

39

Idiom

The boy did the work at the drop of a hat.

 

The politician is a back seat driver.

 

They were back to square one in their search for the treasure.

 

The government has to go back to the drawing board on the issue of the New Constitution.

 

The investigator realised he was barking the wrong tree.

 

You are beating a dead horse.

 

Stop beating around the bush.

 

I will bend over backwards to see you through school.

She was caught between a rock and a hard place.

 

You are biting off more than you can chew.

 

John decided to bite his tongue.

 

Tom has a cast iron stomach.

 

 

 

That is a cock and bull story.

 

I will have to win, come hell or high water.

 

Don’t cry over spilt milk.

 

 

He likes crying wolf.

 

Tim is a dark horse.

 

 

Kinyua is a devil’s advocate.

 

 

 

My father drinks like a fish.

 

This problem is driving me up the wall.

 

The students had a field day with the visiting guests.

 

The food was finger licking good.

 

He changed from rags to riches.

 

I need to get over it.

 

 

She got up on the wrong side of the bed.

 

You must go the extra mile to achieve your goal.

 

Meaning

Willing to do something immediately.

 

 

People who criticize from the sidelines.

 

 

Having to start all over again.

 

 

 

When an attempt fails and its time to start all over again.

 

 

 

A mistake made in something you are trying to achieve.

 

To force an issue that has already ended.

 

 

Avoiding the main topic, not speaking directly about an issue.

 

Do whatever it takes to help.

Willing to do anything.

Stuck between two very bad options.

 

 

To take on a task that is way too big.

 

 

To avoid talking.

 

 

Someone who has no problems, complications, or ill effects with eating or drinking anything.

 

 

An unbelievable tale.

 

Any difficult situation or obstacle.

 

 

When you complain about a loss from the past.

 

 

Intentionally raise a false alarm.

 

One who was previously unknown and now is prominent.

 

Someone who takes a position for the sake of argument without believing in that particular side of the argument.

 

To drink very heavily.

 

To irritate or annoy very much.

 

 

An enjoyable day or circumstance.

 

 

Very tasty food or meal.

 

 

To go from being very poor to being very wealthy.

 

To move beyond something that is bothering you.

 

Someone who is having a horrible day.

 

Go above and beyond whatever is required for the task at hand.

40

 

 

41.

 

42

 

 

42

 

 

44

 

 

45

 

46

 

47

 

 

48

 

 

49

 

 

50

 

 

 

51

 

 

52

 

53

 

 

54

 

 

55

 

56

 

 

57

 

 

58

 

 

59

 

 

60

 

 

 

61

 

 

62

 

 

63

 

 

64

 

 

65

 

 

66

 

 

67

 

 

68

 

 

69

 

 

70

 

 

 

71

 

 

72

 

73

 

 

74

 

 

75

 

 

76

 

 

77

 

 

78

 

79

 

 

 

80

 

 

81

 

 

 

82

 

 

83

 

84

 

 

85

 

 

86

 

 

87

 

 

88

 

 

89

 

 

90

 

 

91

 

 

92

 

 

93

Joan is a good Samaritan.

 

 

I have a gut feeling she will die.

 

The player lost his head when he missed the goal.

 

He was head over heels in love with her.

 

He gave her a high five when he won the contest.

 

Let us hit the books!

 

I will hit the hay now.

 

The preacher hit the nail on the head.

 

She hit the sack after a hard day’s work.

 

Hold your horses, the speaker is coming.

 

The certificate was an icing on the cake after the monetary. reward.

 

The girl became careless in the heat of the moment.

 

The policeman kept an eye on him.

He kept his chin up during the burial.

 

The old man kicked the bucket.

 

Lend me your ear.

 

You let the cat out of the bag.

 

The by-election was not a level playing field.

 

He ran all over like a chicken with its head cut off.

 

Mr. Gumo is a loose canon.

 

 

I am not interested in his mumbo jumbo.

 

 

She is the new kid on the block.

 

He started off on the wrong foot.

 

The accused man is now off the hook.

 

I said that off the record!

 

 

I was on pins and needles.

 

 

The prefects sit on the fence when there is a strike.

 

The dog appeared out of the blue.

 

You will get the job over my dead body.

 

Mark is fond of passing the buck to his brother.

 

Dennis is a peeping Tom.

 

 

 

Pipe down! We have heard you!

 

You are pulling my leg.

 

Rise and shine! It’s time to go to school.

 

The businessman has run out of steam nowadays.

 

The convict was saved by a bell.

 

He was a scapegoat for amorous politician.

 

The naughty boy got away scot-free.

 

She was sick as a dog.

 

He has a sixth sense.

 

 

 

The judge smelt a rat when the witness started trembling.

 

The prosecutor smelt something fishy when the accused winked at the witness.

 

We have to start from scratch.

 

The ball is in your court.

 

They tied the knot in December.

 

I will wait till the cows come home.

 

To make a long story short, you are not coming with us.

 

The government turned a blind eye to the plight of IDPs.

 

I am under the weather today.

 

Forget the water under the bridge.

 

He will pay you the money when pigs fly.

 

She wines and dines with stars.

 

It is without a doubt the best programme.

 

Your guess is as good as mine.

 

Someone who helps others when they are in need without expecting a reward.

 

A personal intuition you get, especially when you feel something may not be right.

 

Angry and overcome by emotions.

 

 

Very excited and joyful, especially when in love.

 

Slapping palms above each others heads as a celebration gesture.

 

To study, especially for a test or exam.

 

Go to bed or go to sleep.

 

Do or say something exactly right.

 

 

Go to bed or sleep.

 

 

Be patient.

 

 

When you already have it good and get something on top of what you already have.

 

 

Overwhelmed by what is happening at the moment.

 

Carefully watch somebody.

 

To remain joyful in a tough situation.

 

 

Die

 

 

To politely ask for someone’s full attention.

 

To share a secret that wasn’t supposed to be shared.

 

A fair competition where no side has an advantage.

 

To act in a frenzied manner.

 

 

Someone who is unpredictable and can cause damage if not kept in check.

 

Nonsense or meaningless speech.

 

 

 

Someone new to the group or area.

 

 

Getting a bad start on a relationship or task.

 

 

No longer have to deal with a tough situation.

 

 

Something said in confidence that the speaker doesn’t want attributed to him or her.

 

Anxious or nervous especially in anticipation of something.

 

Undecided.

 

 

Something that suddenly and unexpectedly occurs or appears.

 

When you absolutely will not allow something to happen.

 

Avoid responsibility by giving it to someone else.

 

Someone who observes people in the nude or sexually active people, mainly for his own gratification.

 

To shut up or be quiet.

 

 

Tricking someone as a joke.

 

Time to get out of bed and get ready for work or school.

 

To be completely out of energy.

 

 

Saved at the last possible moment.

 

 

Someone else who takes the blame.

 

 

To escape and not have to pay.

 

 

To be very sick (with flu or a cold)

 

A paranormal sense that allows you to communicate with the dead.

 

 

To be suspicious or detect someone in the group is betraying the others.

 

Detecting that something isn’t right and there might be a reason for it.

 

 

To do it all over again from the beginning.

 

 

It is your decision this time.

 

To get married.

 

 

A long time.

 

 

Said by someone during a long boring story.

 

 

Refuse to acknowledge something you know is real or legitimate.

 

Feeling ill or sick.

 

 

Anything from the past that isn’t significant or important any more.

 

Something that will never ever happen.

 

 

When someone is treated to an expensive meal.

 

For certain.

 

 

I have no idea.

 

 

 

Common idiomatic expressions and sayings

 

  1. A bird in the hand is worth to in the bush. – Having something that is certain is much better than taking a risk for more, because chances are you might lose everything.
  2. A fool and his money are easily parted. – It’s easy for a foolish person to lose his/her money.
  3. A house divided against itself cannot stand. – Everyone involved must unify and function together or it will not work out.
  4. A leopard can’t change his spots. – You cannot change who you are.
  5. A penny save is a penny earned. – By not spending money you are saving money (little by little).
  6. A picture paints a thousand words. – A visual presentation is far more descriptive than words.
  7. Actions speak louder than words. – It’s better to actually do something than just talk about it.
  8. Curiosity killed the cat. – Being inquisitive can lead you into a dangerous situation.
  9. Don’t count your chickens before they hatch. – Don’t rely on it until you are sure of it.
  • Don’t look a gift horse in the mouth. – When someone gives you a gift, don’t be ungrateful.
  1. Don’t put all your eggs in one basket. – Do not put all your resources in one possibility.
  2. Drastic times call for drastic measures. – When you are extremely desperate you need to take extremely desperate actions.
  3. Elvis has left the building. – The show has come to an end. It’s all over.
  4. Every cloud has a silver lining. – Be optimistic, even difficult times will lead to better days.
  5. Great minds think alike. – Intelligent people think like each other.
  6. Haste makes waste. – Doing things quickly may result in a poor ending.
  7. Idle hands are the devils’ tools. – You are more likely to get it trouble if you have nothing to do.
  8. If it’s not one thing, it’s another. – When one thing goes wrong, then another, and another ….
  9. It takes two to tango. – A conflict involves two people and both must cooperate to have it resolved.
  10. It’s a small world. – You cannot hide from your evil deeds in this world.
  11. Let bygones be bygones. – To forget about a disagreement or argument.
  12. Let sleeping dogs lie. – To avoid restarting a conflict.
  13. Never bite the hand that feeds you. – Don’t hurt anyone that helps you.
  14. Practice makes perfect. – By constantly practising, you will become better.
  15. Rome was not built in one day. – If you want something to be completed properly, then it’s going to take time.
  16. The bigger they are, the harder they fall. – The bigger and stronger opponent may be more difficult to beat, but when he does, he suffers a much bigger loss.
  17. Variety is the spice of life. – The more experiences you try the more exciting life can be.
  18. When it rains, it pours. – Since it rarely rains, when it does it will be a huge, storm.
  19. You are what you eat. – In order to stay healthy, you must eat healthy foods.
  20. You can’t judge a book by its cover. – Decisions shouldn’t be made primarily on appearance.

 

Exercise 10

 

Give the meaning of the italicized idioms in the following sentences.

  1. I was completely at sea when the Prime Minister visited my house.
  2. Jane has her hands full. She can’t take on more work.
  3. Do you have a bone to pick with me?
  4. I can’t make heads or tails of this story.
  5. The test was as easy as pie.
  6. I am sick and tired of doing nothing at work.
  7. I am broke! I have to borrow some money.
  8. She dropped me a line
  9. He filled in for her when she fell sick.
  10. My business is in the red.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS FROM CHAPTER TWO

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. crack quack
  2. roar pop
  3. tick lap
  4. growl boom
  5. chime          hiss

 

Exercise 2         

 

  1. Lima bean – a broad, flat, pale-green or white bean used as a vegetable – named after Lima, the capital of Peru where it was grown first.
  2. Cardigan – a kind of a pullover or sweater that buttons down the front – named after J.T. Brudwell, the 7th Earl of Cardigan.
  3. Bloomer – a woman’s baggy and long garment for the lower body – named after Amelia Bloomer, an American women rights and temperance advocate.
  4. Canary birds – yellow songbirds – named after Canary Islands, Spain, where they are found in large numbers.
  5. Ferris wheel – a special wheel for an amusement park – named after the inventor G.W. Ferris.
  6. Guppy – the most popular freshwater tropical fish – named after R.J.L. Guppy, the man who introduced it in England.
  7. Cheddar – A firm Cheese – named after the English village of Cheddar, where it was first made.
  8. Quisling – a person who treacherously helps to prepare for enemy occupation of his own county, a traitor – named after Vidkum Quisling, a Norwegian politician.
  9. Silhouette – an outline portrait or profile – named after a French minister of finance, Etienne de Silhouette.
  • Marxism – the political and economic theories of Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels – named after Karl Marx.
  1. Guillotine – a device used for carrying out executions – named after Dr. Joseph Guillotine, the designer.
  2. Macadam – small, broken stones that are used for making roads – named after John L. McAdam, a Scottish engineer who invented this kind of a road.
  3. Pasteurisation – the process of heating milk, wine, beer, or other liquids hot enough to kill harmful bacteria and to prevent or stop fermentation – named after Louis Pasteur, a French chemist, who invented the process.
  4. Watt – Unit of measuring electric power – named after James Watt, a Scottish engineer, who pioneered in the development of the steam engine.
  5. Ohm – a measure of electrical resistance – named after George S. Ohm, a German physicist.

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. slithy – lithe + slimy breathalyser – breath + analyser
  2. chortle – chuckle + short            cablegram – cable + telegram
  3. galumph – gallop + triumph            camcorder – camera + recorder
  4. bash – bang + smash            edutainment – education + entertainment
  5. blog – web + log   email – electronic + mail

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. utra –           beyond                               – ultraviolet, ultrasonic
  2. syn – in union                   – synchronize, symmetry
  3. sub – at a lower position         – submarine, subsoil
  4. peri – round, about                 – perimeter
  5. out – surpassing, exceeding – outperform
  6. infra – below                            – infrared, infrastructure
  7. hypo – under                             – hypodermic, hypothermia
  8. hemi – half                                – hemisphere
  9. ex – previous                        – ex-wife, ex-policeman
  10. dia – across, through             – diagonal

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. hopeful – full of hope                       greenish – having green colour
  2. reader – a person who reads            weary – tired
  3. childish – having manners of a child fearless – lacking fear
  4. greyish – having grey colour            kindness – the quality of being kind
  5. playful – fond of playing                      washable – can be washed

 

Exercise 6

  1. Pen – a device for writing

– an enclosure for sheep

  1. Tire – to make weary

– the rubber material on the wheel of an automobile or bicycle.

  1. Dove – past tense of dive

– a bird

  1. Wound – past tense of wind

– an injury.

  1. Mean – stingy

– average

  1. Act – a dramatic performance

– doing something

  1. Arms – upper limbs

– weapons

  1. Block – a building

– obstruct

  1. Box       – a carton

– fight with gloves

  1. Bank – edge of a river

– a money depository

 

Exercise 7

 

  1. in –inn knight – night
  2. heard – herd knows – nose
  3. horse – hoarse tick – tic
  4. key – quay rung – wrung
  5. need – knead           sees – seize

 

 

 

Exercise 8

 

  1. start – begin collect – gather
  2. come – arrive assist – help
  3. lengthy – long build – construct
  4. shattered – broken reply – answer
  5. fix – repair          purchase – buy

 

Exercise 9

 

  1. easy – hard sweet – sour
  2. whisper – yell stationary – mobile
  3. triumph – fail strength – weaken
  4. dull – interesting precious – worthless
  5. dangerous – safe          naked – clothed

 

Exercise 10

  1. at sea – confused
  2. has his hands full – is busy
  3. have a bone to pick with me – have a quarrel
  4. make heads or tails – make sense
  5. as easy as pie – very easy
  6. sick and tired – can’t stand, hate
  7. broke – to have no money
  8. dropped me a line yesterday – sent me a letter or email
  9. filled in for her – did her work while she was away
  10. in the red – losing money, not profitable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER THREE

 

PHRASES AND SENTENCES

 

PHRASES

 

A phrase is a group of words without a subject or a predicate or both and does not express a complete thought. Therefore, a phrase can never stand on its own as a complete sentence. Using different kinds of phrases enables a writer or a speaker to create informative and descriptive sentences that vary in structure. phrases combine words into a larger unit that can function as a sentence element.

 

The most common kinds of phrases in English are: Noun phrases, verb phrases, prepositional phrases, gerund phrases and participial phrases.

 

  • Noun Phrases

 

A noun phrase consists of a noun and all its modifiers. It can function as a subject, object, or complement in the sentence. The modifiers may include articles, prepositions and adjectives.

Examples:

(a) Noun phrases as subjects

The lazy old man sleeps all day long.

Some school boards reward teachers who produce good results.

(b) Noun phrases as objects

Teachers rejected the proposed performance contracts.

Critics opposed the controversial marriage bill.

(c) Noun phrases as complements

Teaching is a valuable profession.

Sheila is a hardworking no-nonsense lady.

 

Exercise 1

 

Identify the noun phrases in each of the following sentences and indicate whether it functions as a subject, object or complement.

  1. I saw a TV show yesterday.
  2. Playful animals really fascinate me.
  3. Yesterday, I had a thrilling adventure.
  4. Swimming is an exciting activity.
  5. Twenty university students were expelled last month.
  6. She is a certified public health officer.
  7. Many of the soldiers were killed in the battle.
  8. The old woman carried a heavy load of firewood on her back.
  9. Peter seems a very complicated man to understand
  10. A devastating earthquake hit China yesterday.

 

  • Verb phrases

 

A verb phrase consists of a main verb and its helping verbs. It can function as the predicate of a sentence. The predicate tells what the subject does or is. (It tells something about the subject).

Examples:

John was born in Malindi.

This problem may have contributed to the collapse of the economy.

Without highly – trained workers, many Kenyan companies would be forced to close down.

 

Sometimes the parts of a verb phrase are separated from each other by words that are not verbs.

Examples:

He is finally buying a new house.

Salesmen must occasionally travel long distances.

 

Some words are joined with other words to make contractions.

Examples:

He hasn’t turned up for the meeting (has + not)

We couldn’t tell what had killed the cow. (could + not)

I’ve ordered them to leave the house. (I + have).

NB: The word not and the contraction n’t are adverbs. They are never part of a verb or verb phrase.

 

Exercise 2

 

Write the verb phrase in each of the following sentences.

  1. We should have taken pictures of the wild animals.
  2. You must have seen the posters of the event.
  3. They should have been told to come with flowers to plant in the school compound.
  4. Muchira would have told some interesting stories.
  5. Scientists must’ve visited the Menengai Crater.
  6. He must have seen some wonderful places.
  7. Many advocates do fear the new Chief Justice.
  8. The scouts have often made camp here.
  9. The bull fighters would sometimes stampede noisily.
  10. I could have read the book if he had allowed me.

 

 

  • Prepositional phrases

 

A prepositional phrase is made up of a preposition, the object of the preposition, and all the words between them. It often functions as an adjective or adverb, but it can function as a noun as well.

Examples:

We carried the fruits in our school bags. (adverb telling where)

The plane flew through the cloud. (adverb telling where)

Almost half of Africa’s population suffers from water – related diseases. (adverb modifying suffers).

The water supply in the United States is expected to decline dramatically. (adjective modifying water  supply).

The best time to practise water conservation is before a water shortage. (noun functioning as a complement).

In sentence 1 above, the preposition is in, the object of the preposition is bags, and the modifiers or adjectives are our and school.

 

Sometimes two or more nouns or pronouns are used as objects in a prepositional phrase.

Example:

He needs a wife with diligence and a good character.

Diligence and character are objects of the preposition with.

 

When prepositional phrases function as adjectives and adverbs in sentences, they are called adjectival and adverbial phrases respectively.

  • An adjectival prepositional phrase modifies nouns or pronouns.

Examples:

The woman wears shoes with sharp heels. (an adjectival phrase modifying the noun shoes)

The man with a funny – looking dog crossed the road. (an adjectival phrase modifying the noun man)

 

  • An adverbial prepositional phrase modifies verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.

Examples:

Soldiers train for many months. (an adverbial phrase modifying the verb train)

People are lazy in the afternoons. (an adverbial phrase modifying the adjective lazy.)

She arrived late in the night. (an adverbial phrase modifying the adverb late).

 

Sometimes one prepositional phrase immediately follows another.

          Examples:

The man led him through the door on the left.

Note that the prepositional phrase through the door is an adverbial phrase modifying the verb led and tells where? The second prepositional phrase on the left is an adjectival phrase modifying the noun door and tells which one?

 

A prepositional phrase can be at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of a sentence.

Examples:

At dusk, we began to walk home.

The map of the area was very helpful.

The path went by a forest and a large lake.

 

Exercise 3

 

Underline the prepositional phrases in the following sentences and indicate what type each of them is.

  1. The oldest building is found in Mombasa.
  2. Five companies around the country have bought new fire engines.
  3. The barking of the dog scared the strangers.
  4. Bulls are bred for hard work.
  5. Most bridges are built over water.
  6. Travellers were spared many miles of travel.
  7. I went by bus to the market.
  8. At the market, I saw beautiful and unusual people.
  9. I also saw a display of colourful clothes.
  10. She took him through the lesson with professional expertise.

 

  • Gerund phrases

 

A gerund is a verb form used as a noun. It is formed by adding –ing to the present these of a verb. Gerunds can be used as subjects, direct objects, objects of prepositions, and complements.

Examples:

Subject: Fishing is a popular activity in Nyanza Province.

(Fishing is a gerund, the subject of the verb is)

Direct object: The sport involves riding. (riding is a gerund, the direct object of the verb involves)

Object of preposition: The sport is similar to fencing. (fencing is a gerund, the object of the preposition to).

 

A gerund phrase includes a gerund, its modifiers, objects or complements. It always functions as a noun.

Examples:

Becoming a Tusker Project fame finalist was Msechu’s lifetime dream. (gerund phrase is the subject of the sentence.)

Msechu dreamt all his life about winning the top award. (the gerund phrase is an object of the preposition about).

One of Msechu’s biggest disappointments was losing to Alpha. (the gerund phrase is a complement).

The game involves jumping over hurdles. (object of the verb involves).

 

Exercise 4

 

Underline the gerund or gerund phrases in the following sentences and label each one subject, direct, object, object of preposition, or complement.

  1. In early days, golfing was a game for the rich.
  2. The rich were mostly interested in protecting their status.
  3. Playing golf with a commoner would mean lowered status.
  4. Much of the rich people’s time was spent playing the game.
  5. Training thoroughly improved a golfer’s accuracy in the game.
  6. There he learned about playing the game.
  7. Later, he started contesting with other junior golfers.
  8. At fifteen or sixteen, he began playing with the professionals.
  9. Participating in international tournaments was the golfer’s dream.
  10. But the greatest dream was winning an in international title.

 

 

  • Participial phrases

 

A participle is a verb form that always acts as an adjective. There are two types of participles:

  • The past participle – it is usually formed by adding –d, or -ed to the present tense.

Examples:

Fooled, the shopkeeper bought fake products. (Fooled is a past participle modifying the noun shopkeeper)

Shaken, he dashed to the police station.

(Shaken is a past participle modifying the pronoun he)

The participles of irregular verbs, however, do not follow the above rule: run-run, throw-thrown.

 

  • The present participle – it is usually formed by adding -ing to the present tense of any verb.

Examples:

Smiling, the conman stepped out of the shop. (Smiling is a present participle modifying the noun conman).

 

Using participles is a simple way of adding information to sentences and to vary sentences beginnings.

 

A participial phrase consists of a present or past participle and its modifiers, objects, or complements. It always functions as an adjective.

Examples:

Rounding the corner, the conman met two policemen.

(Rounding the corner is a present participial phrase modifying the noun conman).

Surprised by the appearance of the conman, the policemen started blowing their whistles.

(Surprised by the appearance of the conman is a past participial phrase modifying the noun policemen).

 

A participle or participial phrase is not always at the beginning of a sentence. Sometimes it may appear in the middle but it should be near the noun or pronoun it modifies.

Examples:

The skilled policemen arrested the conman.

The conman, losing control, fought the policemen fiercely.

 

Points to note

 

Both the gerund and the present participle are created by a adding –ing to the present tense of a verb. BUT how can you tell whether a word is a gerund or a participle? It all depends on how the word is used in a sentence.

  • A participle is used as a modifier in a sentence.

           Example:

Gaining courage, the conman attempted to escape. (Gaining courage is a participial phrase modifying conman).

  • A gerund is used as a noun in a sentence.

Example:

Gaining courage made the conman look aggressive. (Gaining courage is a gerund phrase, the subject of the verb made).

 

Exercise 5

Underline the participial phrases in the following sentences, indicating whether it is a past or present participial phrase and the noun or pronoun it modifies.

  1. Defying all odds, Kisoi Munyao attempted to climb to the highest peak of Mt. Kenya for seven times.
  2. Failing each time, he refused to give up.
  3. Seeing his passion to scale the peak, the government offered him financial assistance.
  4. The climber ascended slowly, making steady progress.
  5. Pleased with his progress, he camped at eleven thousand feet.
  6. The climber, determined to hoist the Kenyan flag, progressed on the following morning.
  7. Slipping on the snow, Munyao fell on a dry tree trunk.
  8. A rope worn from too many climbs then broke.
  9. One of his hot water bottles, slipping to the bottom of the cliff, broke into pieces.
  10. Munyao, overcome with joy, finally hoisted the flag at Point Batian.

 

 

 

  • Infinitive phrases

 

An infinitive is a verb form that usually appears with the word to before it. To is called the sign of the infinitive.

Examples:

to lift                        to eat                        to launch                          to register

 

To is a preposition if it is followed by a noun or noun phrase, but it is a sign of the infinitive if it is followed by a verb or verb phrase.

Examples:

Joseph longed for a flight to the moon. (prepositional phrase)

Not until 1985 was he able to succeed. (infinitive)

 

An infinitive phrase consists of an infinitive and its modifiers, objects or complements. It can function as a noun, adjective, or adverb.

Examples:

To write clearly and concisely can be difficult sometimes. (Infinitive phrase functioning as a noun and the subject of the sentence).

Proofreading your writing is a good way to ensure the absence of typing mistakes. (Infinitive phrase functioning as an adjective modifying the noun way).

To greatly increase the amount of stress in your life, leave your writing task until the night before it is due. (Infinitive phrase functioning as an adverb modifying the verb leave).

 

Exercise 6

 

Underline the infinitive phrases in each of the following sentences and state whether it is functioning as a noun, adjective or adverb.

  1. To climb Mt. Kenya was the dream of Kisoi Munyao.
  2. The freedom hero decided to climb the mountain on the eve of the country’s independence.
  3. He was one of the first Kenyans to try this risky climb.
  4. His determination helped him to make rapid progress to reach Point Batian.
  5. Munyao was able to reach the peak with very limited climbing gear.
  6. To reach Point Batian was Munyao’s ultimate goal.
  7. At first few other climbers bothered to listen to Munyao.
  8. He was even forced to finance much of his expedition himself.
  9. Munyao worked hard to achieve his dream of hoisting the Kenyan flag.
  10. His success made it easier for other climbers to scale the tallest mountain in Kenya.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS ON CHAPTER THREE

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. a TV show – object
  2. Playful animals – subject
  3. a thrilling adventure – object
  4. an exciting activity – complement
  5. Twenty university students – subject
  6. a certified public health officer – complement
  7. Many of the soldiers – subject
  8. The old woman – subject, a heavy load – object
  9. a very complicated man – complement
  10. A devastating earthquake – subject

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. should have taken must have seen
  2. must have seen do fear
  3. should have been told                         have made
  4. would have told would stampede
  5. must’ve visited could have read

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. in Mombasa – adverbial modifying the verb found.
  2. around the country – adjectival modifying the noun companies.
  3. of the dog – adjectival modifying the noun barking.
  4. for hard work – adverbial modifying the verb bred.
  5. over water – adverbial modifying the verb built.
  6. of travel – adjectival modifying the noun miles.
  7. by bus – adverbial modifying the verb went.

to the market – adverbial modifying the verb went.

  1. At the market – adjectival modifying the
  2. of colours clothes – adjectival modifying the noun display.
  3. with professional expertise – adverbial modifying the phrasal verb took through.

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. golfing – complement
  2. protecting their status – object of the preposition in.
  3. Playing golf with a commoner – subject
  4. playing the game – direct object
  5. Training thoroughly – subject
  6. playing the game- object of preposition
  7. contesting with junior golfers – subject
  8. playing with the professionals – direct object
  9. Participating in international tournaments – subject
  10. Winning an international title – complement

 

 

 

 

Exercise 5

 

  1. Defying all odds – present participial phrase – Kisoi Munyao
  2. Failing each time – present participial phrase – he
  3. Seeing his passion to scale the peak – present participial phrase – government
  4. making steady progress – present participial phrase – climber
  5. Pleased with his progress – past participial phrase – he
  6. determined to hast the Kenya flag – past participial phrase – climber
  7. Slipping on the snow – present participial phrase – Munyao
  8. worn from too many climbs – past participial phrase – rope
  9. slipping to the bottom of the cliff- present participial – bottles
  10. overcome with joy – past participial phrase – Munyao

 

Exercise 6

 

  1. To climb Mt. Kenya –noun
  2. to climb the mountain – noun
  3. to try this risky climb – adjective modifying the noun Kenyans
  4. to make rapid progress – adverb modifying the verb helped
  5. with very limited climbing gear – adverb modifying the verb reach
  6. To reach Point Batian – noun
  7. to listen to Munyao – noun
  8. to finance much of his expedition – adverb modifying the verb forced
  9. to achieve his dream of hasting the flag – adverb modifying the verb worked
  10. to scale the tallest mountain in Kenya – adverb modifying the verb made.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER FOUR

 

SENTENCES

 

What is a sentence?

 

A sentence is a group of words that expresses a complete thought. A complete thought is clear. A sentence always begins with a capital letter. It ends with a full stop (.), a question mark (?) or an exclamation mark (!).

Examples:

Ted sent me a letter.

Jane slept soundly.

 

Sentence fragments

 

A sentence fragment does not express a complete thought. The reader or listener cannot be sure what is missing in or the meaning of a sentence fragment.

He or she will be left wondering: What is this about? What happened?

Examples:

Fragment: The huge boat. (What happened?)

Sentence: The huge boat sails down the river.

 

You can correct a sentence fragment by supplying the missing information.

 

Subjects and predicates

 

The two fundamental parts of every English sentence are the subject and the predicate. A subject can be described as the component that performs the action described by the predicate. It tells who or what does or did the action. It may also name the topic.

The predicate tells about the subject. It tells what the subject does or is.

Examples:

Subject                                                        Predicate

 

(Who or what)                                             (What is said about the subject)

The antelope                                              jumped over the high fence.

Pigs                                                              eat anything is sight when hungry.

 

In a sentence, a few key words are more important than the rest. These key words make the basic framework of the sentence. The verb and its subject are the key words that form the basic framework of every sentence. The rest of the sentence is built around them.

Examples:

Sentence                                                            Key words

 

The young kids jumped playfully.                  kids, jumped

Their faces shone brightly.                                faces, shone

 

To find out the subject, ask who or what before the verb.

Examples:

Who jumped playfully? – kids

What shone brightly? – faces

 

To find out the verb, ask what after the subject.

Examples:

The young kids did what? – jumped

Their faces did what? – shone

 

The key word in the subject of a sentence is called the simple subject. For example, kids, faces. The complete subject is the simple subject plus any words that modify or describe it. For example, The young kids, Their faces.

The key word in the predicate is called the simple predicate. For example, jumped, shone. The complete predicate is the verb plus any words that modify or complete the verb’s meaning. For example, jumped playfully, shone brightly.

 

The simple subjects and predicates may sometimes be more than one word. For simple subjects, it may be the name of a person or a place.

Examples:

Ballack Obama won the US presidential race.

South Africa is the home of many bats.

 

The simple predicate may also be more than one word. There may be a main verb and a helping verb.

Tanya has acted in many TV shows.

She will be performing again tonight.

 

Objects

 

An object in a sentence is a word or words that complete the meaning of a sentence. It is involved in the action but does not carry it out. The object is the person or thing affected by the action described in the verb. It is always a noun or a pronoun and it always comes after the verb.

Example:

The man climbed a tree.

 

Some verbs complete the meaning of sentences without the help of other words. The action that they describe is complete.

Examples:

It rained.

The temperature rose.

 

Some other verbs do not express a complete meaning by themselves. They need to combine with other words to complete the meaning of a sentence.

Examples:

Christine saw the snake.

Rose wears goggles.

He opened the door.

 

In the above examples, the snake, goggles and the door are the objects as they are the things being affected by the verbs in the sentences.

(Refer to the topic on Transitive and Intransitive Verbs under the main topic VERBS).

 

Exercise 1     

                     

Which groups of words are sentences and which ones are sentence fragments?

  1. A huge storm was coming.
  2. Behind the wattle tree.
  3. After the earthquake.
  4. The wind broke several houses.
  5. Surprised by a loud noise.
  6. Winds of high speed.
  7. Rescue workers arrived.
  8. From different parts of the world.
  9. Many people were injured.
  10. In the weeks after the earthquake.

 

Direct and indirect objects

 

Objects come in two types, direct and indirect:

 

Direct objects

 

The direct object is the word that receives the action of a verb.

Examples:

Christine saw a snake. ( a snake receives the action of saw)

Rose wears goggles. (goggles receives the action of wears)

 

Sometimes the direct object tells the result of an action.

Examples:

Tecla won the race.

She received a trophy.

 

To find the direct object first find the verb. Then ask whom or what after the verb.

Examples:

Christine saw a snake.                             Rose wears goggles

Verb: saw                                                  verb: wears

Saw what? a snake                                  wears what? goggles

Tecla won the race                                   She received a trophy

Verb: won                                                 verb: received

Won what? the race                                received what? a trophy

 

Remember, we said earlier that a verb that has a direct object is called a transitive verb and a verb that does not have an object is called an intransitive verb. We also said that a verb may be intransitive in one sentence and transitive in another. Other verbs are strictly intransitive like disagree.

 

Indirect objects

 

The indirect object refers to a person or thing who receives the direct object. They tell us for whom or to whom something is done. Others tell to what or for what something is done.

Examples:

I gave him the book.

He is the indirect object as he is the beneficiary of the book.

 

Direct object or adverb?

 

Direct objects are sometimes confused with adverbs. The direct object tells what or whom as we have seen earlier. Adverbs on the other hand tell how, where, when or to what extent. They modify the verbs.

Examples:

Brian Swam slowly. (slowly is an adverb telling how)

Brian Swam a tough race. (race is a direct object telling what).

 

Verbs can also be followed by a phrase that tells how, when, or where. This kind of a phrase is never a direct object but an adverbial phrase.

Example:

Brian swam across the pool. (a cross the pool tells where Brian Swam).

 

Therefore, to decide whether a word or a phrase is a direct object or adverb, decide first what it tells about the verb. If it tells how, where, when or to what extent, it is an adverb. If it tells what or whom, it is a direct object.

 

Exercise 2

 

Identify the objects or the adverbs/adverbial phrases in the following sentences. If the sentence has two objects, indicate the direct object and the indirect object.

  1. Nanu sings pop music.
  2. Nanu sings sweetly.
  3. He spoke very quietly.
  4. I have read that book three times.
  5. She has gone to the bank.
  6. David gave her a present.
  7. David disagreed bitterly.
  8. The player sat on his heels.
  9. She made a list of the items to buy.
  10. They offered him help.

 

Complements

 

Some sentences do not take objects or adverbs (or adverbial phrases) after the verbs. Instead, they take complements. A complement is the part of the sentence that gives more information about the subject (subject complement) or about the object (object complement) of the sentence.

 

Subject complements

 

Subject complements normally follow certain verbs like be, seem, look, etc.

Examples:

He is British. (British gives more information about he)

She became a nurse. (nurse gives more information about she)

 

Object complements

 

Object complements follow the direct objects of the verb and give more information about those direct objects.

 

Examples:

They painted the house red. (red is a complement giving more information about the direct object house)

She called him an idiot. (an idiot is a complement giving more information about the direct object he).

 

The complement often consists of an adjective (e.g. red) or a noun phrase (e.g. an idiot) but can also be a participle phrase.

Example:

I saw her standing there. (standing there is a complement telling more about her).

 

Exercise 3

 

Pick out the complements in the following sentences and indicate whether subject, object or participial complements.

  1. The tourist is a German citizen.
  2. She seems a very arrogant lady.
  3. You look tired.
  4. They painted the car green.
  5. James nicknamed Lucy the queen.
  6. I saw him stealing the mango.
  7. They beat the thief senseless.
  8. The priest looks a kind person.
  9. We left her crying.
  10. Job left her trembling.

 

TYPES OF SENTENCES

 

Sentences can be categorised in terms of structure or in terms of purpose.

 

  • In terms of structure

                       

Sentences can be categorised into 3 main types:

  • Simple sentences
  • Compound sentences
  • Complex sentences.

 

  • Simple sentences

 

A simple sentence contains a single subject and predicate. It describes only one thing, idea or question, and has only one verb. It contains only an independent (main) clause.

Any independent clause can stand alone as a sentence. It has a subject and a verb and expresses a complete thought.

Examples:

Bill reads.

Jack plays football.

 

Even the addition of adverbs, adjectives and prepositional phrases to a simple sentence does not change its structure.

Example:

The white dog with the black collar always barks loudly.

Even if you join several nouns with a conjunction, or several verbs with a conjunction, it remains a simple sentence.

Example:

The dog barked and growled loudly.

 

  • Compound sentences

 

A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences joined together using a co-ordinating conjunction such as and, or or but.

Example:

The sun was setting in the west and the moon was just rising.

 

Each clause can stand alone as a sentence.

Example:

The sun was setting in the west. The moon was just rising.

 

Every clause is like a sentence with a subject and a verb. A coordinating conjunction goes in the middle of the sentence; it is the word that joins the two clauses together.

Other examples:

I walked to the shops, but my wife drove there.

I might watch the film, or I might visit my aunt.

My friend enjoyed the film, but she didn’t like the actor.

 

Note

 

Two simple sentences should be combined to form one compound sentence only if the ideas they express are closely related. If the ideas are not closely related, the resulting sentence may not make sense.

Examples:

Incorrect: The car is old, and Dan likes sociology.

Correct: The car is old, but it functions superbly.

 

Punctuating compound sentences

 

When writing some compound sentences, a comma is used before the conjunction. The comma tells the reader where to pause. Without a comma, some compound sentences can be quite confusing.

Examples:

Confusing: Jane studied the specimen and her sister took notes.

(The sentence might cause the reader to think that Jane studied both the    specimen and her sister)

Better: Jane studied the specimen, and her sister took notes.

(The comma makes the sentence to be clear)

 

Sometimes the parts of a compound sentence can be joined with a semicolon (;) rather than a comma and a conjunction.

Example:

Jane studied the specimen; her sister took notes.

 

Never join simple sentences with a comma alone. A comma is not powerful enough to hold the sentences together. Instead use a semicolon.

 

Example:

Incorrect: My father enjoyed the meal, he didn’t like the soup.

Correct: My father enjoyed the meal; he didn’t like the soup.

Correct: My father enjoyed the meal, but he didn’t like the soup.

 

  • Complex sentences

 

A complex sentence contains one independent (main) clause and one or more subordinate (dependent) clauses. They describe more than one thing or idea and have more than one verb in them. They are made up of more than one clause, an independent clause (that can stand by itself) and a dependent clause (which cannot stand by itself).

Example:

The picture looks flat because it is colourless.

(The picture looks flat is the independent (main) clause whereas because it is colourless is the subordinate (dependent) clause)

 

What is a clause?

 

A clause is a group of words that contains a verb and its subject. There are two types of clauses – main clauses and subordinate clauses.

 

Main clauses

 

A main clause is a clause that can stand as sentence by itself. A compound sentence contains two or more main clauses, because it is made up of two or more simple sentences. Each of these simple sentences is a main clause.

Example:

Robots operate machines, and they solve many labour problems.

Robots operate machines and they solve many labour problems are both main clauses. They are also simple sentences. Main clauses are sometimes called independent clauses.

 

Subordinate clauses

 

Subordinate clauses are clauses that do not express a complete thought. So they cannot stand by themselves.

Examples:

If technology will improve                                            When robots can do the work

While electronics will work                                           After the system is complete.

 

None of the above clauses express a complete thought. They are sentence fragments that leave the reader wondering then what?

 

Subordinate clauses are introduced by subordinating conjunctions such as if, when, while, and after.

 

Other examples of subordinating conjunctions:

although                                     because                           so that                   until

as                                                before                             than                       whatever

as if                                             in order that                   though                   wherever

as long as                                    provided                         till                          whenever

as though                                   since                                unless                    where

Now we can understand a complex sentence better. We have said that it contains one main clause and one or more subordinate clauses.

 

Main clause                                                     subordinate clause

The bell started ringing                                  before we were out of bed.

The battery needs recharging                        so that it can work tonight.

 

The subordinate clause can sometimes appear before the main clauses.

Examples:

When the power failed, the computer stopped.

Before you know it, your flat screen television will be stolen.

 

The subordinate clause can also sometimes appear in between the sentence.

Example:

The medicine man, who knew many tricks, cheated the man that he had been bewitched.

 

Types of subordinate clauses

 

Subordinate clauses may be used in sentences as adjectives, adverbs and nouns in complex sentences. Such clauses are called adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses respectively. They add variety to one’s writing. They can also make one’s writing more interesting by adding details.

Examples:

Without subordinate clause: The bushman told us about the hidden cave.

With subordinate clause: The bushman, who knew the forest well, told us about the hidden cave.

 

  • Adjectival clauses

 

An adjectival clause acts as an adjective in a sentence, that is, it modifies a noun or a pronoun.

Examples:

The bushman, who knew the forest well, told us about the hidden cave.

(who knew the forest well is an adjectival clause that modifies the noun bushman).

The bushman told us a legend that involved the cave. (that involved the cave is an adjectival clause that modifies the noun legend).

An adjective clause usually comes immediately after the noun it modifies.

More examples:

People still search for the treasure that the pirate hid.

 

As can be seen from the above examples, adjectival clauses, like adjectives, modify nouns or pronouns answering questions like which? or what kind of?

Adjective                                                          Adjective clause

The red coat                                                    the coat which I bought yesterday

 

Like the adjective red the adjectival clause which I bought yesterday modifies the noun coat. Note than an adjectival clause usually comes after what it modifies while an adjective comes before.

 

Relative pronouns

 

Besides use of subordinating conjunctions, adjectival clauses can be introduced by relative pronouns. Relative pronouns are the words who, whom, whose, that and which. These words relate the subordinate clauses to the word it modifies in the main clause.

Examples:

The books that people read were mainly religious.

Some fire-fighters never meet the people whom they save.

The meat which they ate was rotten.

 

In the last sentence, the relative clause (called so because it is introduced by the relative pronoun which) which they ate modifies the noun meat and answers the question which meat?

More examples:

They are searching for the one who borrowed the book.

 

The relative clause who borrowed the book modifies the pronoun one and answers the question which one?

 

Besides relating the adjectival clause to a noun or pronoun in the main clause, a relative pronoun may also act as the subject, object, predicate pronoun, or object of a preposition in the clause.

Examples:

Subject: This is the forest that has a secret cave.

(that is the subject of has)

Object: The map, which you saw, guides the way.

(which is the object of saw)

Object of a preposition: The map leads to the cave of which the bushman spoke.

(which is the object of the preposition of)

 

In informal writing or speech, you may leave out the relative pronoun when it is not the subject of the adjectival clause, but you should usually include the relative pronoun in formal academic writing.

Examples:

Formal: The books that people read were mainly religious.

Informal: The books people read were mainly religious.

Formal: The map which you saw guides the way.

Informal: The map you saw guides the way.

 

But never omit the relative pronoun if it is in the clause.

Examples:

Correct: This is the forest that has a secret cave.

Incorrect: This is the forest has a secret cave.

 

Commas are put around adjectival clauses only if they merely add additional information to a sentence.

Example:

The map, which you saw, shows the way.

This adjective clause can be left out without affecting the grammatical structure of the sentence. It is merely adding information to the sentence by telling us which map?

The map shows the way.

 

 

 

  • Adverbial clauses

 

An adverbial clause is a subordinate clause which takes the place of an adverb in a sentence. Just like adverbs and adverbial phrases, adverbial clauses answer the questions where, when, how, to what extent, with what goal/result and under what conditions. In addition, an adverbial clause may tell why.

Note how an adverb clause can replace an adverb and an adverbial phrase in the following example:

Adverb: The Prime Minister gave a speech here.

Adverbial phrase: The Prime Minister gave a speech in the afternoon.

Adverbial clause: The Prime Minister gave a speech where the workers were striking.

Usually, an adverbial clause is introduced by a subordinating conjunction like because, when, whenever, where, wherever, since, after and so that.

Note that a subordinate adverb clause can never stand alone as a complete sentence.

Example:

after they left dining hall

 

The above adverbial clause will leave the reader asking what happened after they left the dining hall?

Adverbial clauses express relationships of cause, effect, place, time and condition.

 

Cause

 

Adverb clauses of cause answer the question why?

Example:

Njoroge wanted to kill his uncle because he had murdered his father.

 

Effect

Adverbial clauses of effect answer the question with what goal/result?

Example:

Njoroge wanted to kill his uncle so that his father’s murder would be avenged.

 

Time

 

Adverbial clauses of time answer the question when?

Example:

After Njoroge’s uncle married his mother, he wanted to kill him

 

Condition

 

Adverbial clauses of condition answer the question under what conditions?

Example:                            

If the uncle cooperates, Njoroge may decide to pardon him.

 

Place

Adverbial clauses of place answer the question where?

Example:

Njoroge organised a demonstration where his father’s murder occurred.

 

Note that an adverbial clause can appear either before or after the main clause of the sentence.

 

  • Noun clauses

 

A noun clause is a clause which takes the place of a noun or a noun phrase. It can be used in any way that a noun is used. That is, it can act as the subject, object, object of a preposition, or predicate noun in a sentence. Just like a noun, a noun clause answers the questions who, when, or what?

Examples:

As subjects

Noun: Kamau is unknown

Noun phrase: Their destination is unknown

Noun clause: Where they are going is unknown.

The noun clause where they are going is the subject of the verb is.

 

As objects

Noun: I know French.

Noun phrase: I know the three ladies.

Noun clause: I know that Latin is no longer spoken as a native language.

In the first sentence, the noun French acts as the direct object of the verb know. In the third sentence, the entire clause that Latin is no longer spoken as a native language is the direct object of the verb know.

 

As objects of the preposition                                    

Noun: He talked about him.

Noun phrase: He talked about the funny items.

Noun phrase: He talked about what you bought at the supermarket.

In the first sentence the pronoun him is the object of the preposition about. In the third sentence, what you bought at the supermarket is the object of the preposition about and answers the question about what?

 

As predicate nouns

Her first day in school was what shaped her life.

The adverbial clause what shaped her life gives more information about the subject of the sentence Her first day in school.

 

 

 

 

Words often used to introduce noun clauses

 

that                                         when                                 whose

what                                       whatever                           whoever

how                                        who                                   whoever

where                                     whom

 

Note

 

You cannot tell the kind of a clause from the word that introduces it. You can tell the kind of clause only by the way it is used in a sentence. If the clause is used as a noun, it is a noun clause. If the clause is used as a modifier, it is an adjectival clause or an adverbial clause.

Examples:

Whoever built the house was not an expert. (noun clause as a subject)

No one knew where he came from. (noun clauses a direct object)

He left the construction site whenever he wished. (as an adverbial clause)

This is the layout which he left behind. (as an adjectival clause).

 

Exercise 4

 

Identify the following sentences as simple, compound or complex. If it is a complex sentence, indicate whether it has an adjective, an adverb or a noun subordinate clause.

  1. The hotel is not very old.
  2. The hotel is not very old; it was constructed in 1987.
  3. It has a strange name, but it attracts many tourists.
  4. Whoever broke the mirror will have to pay for it.
  5. The Gor Mahia fans hope that the team will win again.
  6. Did I tell you about the author whom I met?
  7. They are searching for the man stole the cow.
  8. People began riding horses at least five thousand years ago.
  9. Some people watch the moon as though it affects their lives.
  10. Some superstitions developed when people felt helpless about the world around them.
  11. The parachute was really a sail that was designed for skiing.
  12. The moon orbits the earth every 291/2
  13. My dog loves bread crusts.
  14. I always buy bread because my dog loves the crusts.
  15. Whenever lazy students whine, Mrs. Ndegwa throws pieces of chalk at hem.
  16. The lazy students whom Mrs. Ndegwa hit in the head with pieces of chalk complained bitterly.
  17. My dog Shimba, who loves bread crusts, eats them under the kitchen table.
  18. A dog that drinks too much milk will always be alert.
  19. You really do not want to know what Aunt Lucy adds to her stew.
  20. We do not know why, but the principal has been away from school for two months.
  • In terms of purpose

 

We have seen how sentences are categorised into simple, compound and complex depending on their internal structures. Now, we shall see how they can be categorised in terms of purpose.

There are five kinds of sentences classified according to their end marks and the different jobs they do:

  • Declarative sentences
  • Interrogative sentences
  • Exclamatory sentences
  • Imperative sentences
  • Conditional sentences

 

  • Declarative sentences

 

A declarative sentence simply states a fact or argument without requiring either an answer or action from the reader or listener. It is punctuated with a simple period. (fullstop)

Examples:                                                                                              

Nairobi is the capital of Kenya

He asked which path leads back to the park.

Deserts are dry.

 

The declarative sentence is the most important type of sentences. You can write an entire essay or report using only declarative sentences, and you should always use them for more often than any other type. Some declarative sentences contain indirect questions but this does not make them into interrogative sentences.

Examples:

He asked which path leads back to the park.

 

  • Interrogative sentences

 

An interrogative sentence asks a direct question and always ends in a question mark.

Examples:

How many roads lead into Mombasa city?

Does money grow on trees?

Do you like deserts?

 

Note that an indirect question does not make a sentence interrogative.

Examples:

Direct/interrogative

When was professor Saitoti the Vice President of Kenya?

 

Indirect/Declarative

I wonder when Professor Saitoti was the Vice President of Kenya.

 

A direct question requires an answer from the reader or listener, while an indirect question does not. A special type of direct questions is the rhetorical question. A rhetorical question is one that you do not expect the reader or listener to answer.

Example:

Why did the Mau Mau war take place? Some people argue that it was simply a way of Kenyan Africans saying “enough is enough”.

Rhetorical questions can be very effective way to introduce new topics or problems in one’s writing or speech. But if you use them too often, you sound patronising or even monotonous or mediocre!

 

  • Exclamatory sentences

 

An exclamatory sentence expresses strong feeling, emphasis or emotion. It is actually a more forceful version of a declarative sentence that is marked at the end with an exclamation mark.

Examples:

It was so cold!

How beautiful this picture is!

You look so lovely tonight!

Exclamatory sentences are vey common in speech and sometimes in writing (but rarely).

Note that an exclamation mark can appear at the end of an imperative sentence, but this does not make it into an exclamatory sentence.

 

 

  • Imperative sentences

 

An imperative sentence gives a direct command to someone. This sentence can end either with a period or with an exclamation mark, depending on how forceful the command is.

Examples:

Sit!

Read this book tomorrow.

Always carry water.

Wash the windows!

 

Note

 

You should not usually use an exclamation mark with the word “please”.

Example:

Close that door, please!

Please close that door.

In an imperative sentence, you is always the subject. It is usually not stated in the sentence. We say that you is the “understood” or “implied” subject.

Examples:

(You) Please bring my camera.

(You) Take your medicine before going to bed.

 

 

  • Conditional sentences

 

A conditional sentence expresses what one would to if a condition were or were not met.

The condition in the conditional if-clause will determine the fulfilment of the action in the main clause.

Examples:

If I had a million dollars, I would buy a Hummer.

John would be very successful if he had more brains.

In sentence 1, the condition of having a million dollars will determine whether the speaker will buy a hummer or not. In sentence, the condition of John not having more brains determines that he is not very successful.

 

 

Exercise 5

 

Label each of the following sentences declarative, imperative, exclamatory, interrogative or conditional

  1. There is a terrible storm tonight.
  2. Try to cover yourself with a blanket.
  3. How strong the winds are!
  4. If the storm continues, we shall have to go down into the bunker.
  5. Do you think it will rip off the roof?
  6. Look at that that flash of lighting!
  7. What an amazing sight that is!
  8. The night looks dark and scary.
  9. Please tell the children to stop screaming.
  10. Susan will sit beside me if the storm continues.
  11. We are hopeful all will be well.
  12. Dive under the table if it breaks the roof.
  13. How will I find my way?
  14. Can I take a glass of water?
  15. John wants to know what will happen if our house collapses.
  16. There goes the thunder!
  17. We shall have to move to another city if we get out of this alive.
  18. Tell me a good city where we can move to.
  19. The storm is subsiding.
  20. Hooray! Safety at last!

 

DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECH

 

DIRECT SPEECH

 

    Direct speech is used to give a speaker’s exact words.  It is also referred to as direct quotation.

 

Direct speech is always enclosed within quotation marks.

Examples:

Hemedi announced,  “My aunt works in a biscuit factory ”

“Creating jobs will be my first priority” the governor said.

 

A comma always separates the quoted words from the speaker’s name, whether the name comes before or after the quotation

Examples:

Jim asked “Who are you voting fir?”

“I don’t know yet” answered Carol.

 

A direct quotation always begins with a capital letter

Example:

Senator Karabba said, “You must believe in the new constitution”.

 

When a direct quotation is divided by speech tags, the second part of the quotation must begin with a small letter.

Example:

“Register to vote,” said the senator, ‘before the end of the day”.

 

If the second part of the quotation is a complete sentence, the forst kword of this sentence is capitalized.

Example:

“I did register,” said Carol. “It took only a few minutes”

 

Commas and full stops are placed inside quotation marks

Example:

“Last night,” said Joyce,” I listened to a debate”

 

Quotation marks and exclamation marks are placed inside a quotation mark if they belong to the quotation.  If they do not, they are placed outside the quotation.

Examples:

Joyce asked, “Whom are you voting for?

Did Carol say, “I don’t know yet’?

I can’t believe that she said, “I don’t know yet’!

 

Speech tags may appear before, in the middle or at the direct speech.

Examples:

He said, “You know quite well that you have to vote”

“You know quite well, he said, “that you have to vote”.

“You know quite well that you have to vote,” he said.

 

Exercise 6

 

Rewrite the following sentences correctly in direct speech.  Ensure you puntuiate them accordingly.

  1. John said there was a terrible accident in Nairobi.
  2. Petro added it happened in Umoja Estate.
  3. it involved a train and a bus added John
  4. sarah asked did anyone die
  5. No one died, but the railway line was destroyed answered Peter
  6. Over the months said John the railway line has been rebuilt
  7. How lucky that no one died exclaimed sarah
  8. I think kthey shoul put a railway-crossing sigh board

Petro said  it would help bus0drivers a lot

  1. Or they shoul put bumps on both sides of the railway line to slow down the buses John suggested
  2. Who knows what might happen next wondered Sarah

 

INDIRECT SPEECH

 

 Indirect speech is used to refer to a person’s words without quoting him or her exactly.  It is also referred to as indirect quotation or reported speech. The original spoken words are not repeated.

The exact meaning is given without repeating the speaker’s words.

Example:

Direct speech:  The governor said, “Creating new jobs will be my first priority”

Indirect speech: The governor said that creating new jobs would be his first priority.

 

Several changes do occur when changing a sentence from direct to indirect speech

 

  1. Quotation marks

Quotation marks are left out when writing a sentence in direct speech.

Example:

Direct:  Hemedi announced, “My aunt works in a biscuit factory”

Indirect: Hemedi announced that his aunt worked in a biscuit factory.

 

  1. Tense – The tense of a verb in the direct sentence will change in indirect speech

Examples:

  1. Simple present changes to past simple

Direct: John said, “She goes to school early”

Indirect: John said that she went to school early.

 

  1. Simple past changes to past perfect

Direct:  John said, “She went to school early”

Indirect: John said that she had gone to school early.

 

  1. Present progressive changes to past progressive

Direct:  “The baby is eating a banana,” the  nurse said.

Indirect:  The nurse said that the baby was eating a banana.

 

  1. Present perfect changes to past perfect

Direct:  “South Sudan has become a republic,” the new president declared.

Indirect:  The new president declared that South Sudan had become a republic

 

  1. Past progressive changes to past perfect progressive

Direct: “ I was dreaming when the fire started,” the boy said.

Indirect:  The boy said the he had been dreaming when the fire started.

 

  1. Future simple changes to modal

Direct:  “I will visit you tomorrow,” my desk mate said.

Indirect: My desk mate said the he would visit me the following day.

 

  1. May changes to might

Direct: : I may also visit you too,” I replied.

Indirect:  I replied that I might also visit him too.

 

Sometimes the verb in indirect speech does not change tense.  This occurs in sentences that are universal truths

Direct: Our Geography teacher said “The earth rotates round the sun”

Indirect:  Our Geography teacher said that the earth rotates round the sun

 

Words referring to place also change

Examples:

Direct:  “I live here,” retorted the old man.

Indirect: The old man retorted that he lived there

 

Direct:  “This place stinks,” noted the boy.

Indirect:  The boy noted that that place stunk.

 

Words referring to time also change

Examples:

Direct: “I will visit you tomorrow,” he shouted.

Indirect:  He shouted that he would visit me the following/next day

Direct :  “ He died last year,” the policeman reported.

Indirect:  The policeman reported that he had dies the previous year/ the year before.

 

Demonstrative pronouns also change:

Examples:

Direct:  “This book is mine,” Jane claimed.

Indirect:  Jane claimed that that book was hers.

Direct:  “These are hard times,” observed the president.

Indirect:  The president observed that those were hard times.

 

Pronouns also change when rewriting a sentence from direct to indirect speech.

Examples:

Direct: “My car is better than yours,” the teacher bragged.

Indirect:  The teacher bragged that his/her car was better that his/hers/theirs.

 

 

Exercise 7

Change the following sentences from Direct to Indirect speech.

  1. “Did you see the fire at the West gate Mall?” asked Joel.
  2. Njagi said,” Ten fire-engines arrived in fifteen minutes.”
  3. Patty exclaimed, “It destroyed an entire block of building!”
  4. “One fire fighter was slightly injured,” said Joel.
  5. Njagi said, “Several people working in the building escaped unhurt.”
  6. “Tell me what will happen to them,” said Patty.
  7. “Other people are giving them food and clothes,” replied Joel.
  8. Njagi added,” They are resting in the school for now.”
    “These terrorists will finish us!” exclaimed Patty.
  9. “Don’t worry,” Joels aid “They will be apprehended tomorrow”.

 

 

QUESTION TAGS

 

A question tag or a tag question is a phrase that is added at the end of a statement to turn into a question.  When a speaker uses a question tag at the end of a statement, he/she is seeking for approval, confirmation or correction.

Examples:

APPROVAL:  I look smart today, don’t I?  Yes you do.

CORFIRMATION: These are the new students, aren’t they?  Yes they are.

CORRECTION:  I paid your money yesterday, didn’t I ? No you didn’t

 

Many learners face a problem of supplying the correct question tags to sentences.  This is because they fail to observe the following rules of question tags:

  1. A comma must be put to separate the statement with the question tag. A question mark must be placed at the end of the question tag.

Examples:

Rufftone has released a new album, hasn’t he?

He is pushing for a decision by tomorrow, isn’t he?

  1. The auxiliary verb in the statement must be repeated in the question tag

Examples:

Neson Mandela was in prison for 27 years, wasn’t he?

The people of South Africa have lost a great hero, haven’t they?

  1. When there is no auxiliary verb in the statement, the appropriate form of the auxiliary verb Do must be used in the question tag

Examples:

Mark Francis wakes up very early, doesn’t he?

Peter Bryan bought an I-pad phone, didn’t he ?

  1. The subject in the statement must be repeated in the question tag. If it is a noun in the statement, it changes to the appropriate pronoun.   If it is a pronoun in the statement, it remains a pronoun in the question tag.

Examples:

Fatou Bensouda is prosecutor in ICC, isn’t she?

She does her work meticulously, doesn’t she?

  1. Wen the statement is positive ( i.e. It does not have the word not in it), the question tag must be negative ( i.e. must use the negative word not) and visa versa.

Examples:

David Rudisha has broken another record, hasn’t he?

Cathrerine Ndereba hasn’t been very active, has she?

Douglas Wakiihuri does not run any more, does he?

Ezekiel Kemboi entertains the audience after winning, doesn’t he?

 

You will note form the above examples that the auxiliary verb is usually contrated (joined) with the negative indicator not when using question tags.

However, this does not apply when using primary auxiliary verb am and the modal auxiliary verbs will and shall. Am does not allow contraction with not, will and shall usually change their forms to allow contraction.

Examples:

WRONG : am the next speaker, amn’t I?

CORRECT:  I am the nest speaker, am I not?

WRONG: They will be late for church, willn’t they?

CORRECT:  They will be late for church, won’t they?

WRONG:  We shall attend the Memorial service, willn’t we?

CORRECT:  we shall attend the memorial service, shan’t we?

 

  1. Whereas there is no inversion in the statement, inversion must occur in the question tag i.e. the auxiliary verb comes before the subject

Examples:

President Uhuru Kenyatta  has won the case, hasn’t he?

Subject verb                         verb                     verb subject

 

He          can  now relax and attend to his duties,  can’t he?

Subject verb                                                                  verb subject

 

  1. For sentences that are inform of requests and commands, the question tags will commonly take the auxiliary verb will or shall followed by the appropriate pronoun.

Examples:

Please help me with your pen, will you?

Let us go for  a swim, shall we?

Bring me that chair, will you?

Stop that noise, will you?

Kneel down right away, will you?

 

Those are  the rules that govern question tags and if followed well, the learners will not heve any problems with question tags.

 

 

 

 

 

Exercise 8

 

Supply the appropriate question tags in the following sentences.

  1. The marriage caused rupture in her relationship with her mother,……………………..
  2. She didn’t think anyone would be interested in a woman like her,……………………..
  3. The troops are on standby in case chaos erupt,…………………………………
  4. The Prime Minister must take a firm stand against extremist in his party,……………….
  5. I am the best so far,………………………………
  6. The amendments will strengthen the bill,………………
  7. The new tax is tantamount to stealing form the poor,………………
  8. Please send all your remarks to Prof Kibwana as soon as possible,…………………
  9. She raised the gun and pulled the trigger,………………
  10. We need to learn to prioritize,……………..
  11. Get out of this room now,………………
  12. We’ve made a reservation for next week,…………….
  13. Thy couldn’t conceal the secret any more,………………
  14. We shall not accept anything less,………………
  15. I am not a conman,
  16. Jonny wanted to pursue a career in theatre,……………..
  17. Sharon’s parents claim that the house is legally theirs,……………
  18. I haven’t told you my name,……………….
  19. Came and visit us tomorrow,……………………………
  20. Time will tell whether he made the right choice,………………..

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS TO CHAPTER FOUR

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. A huge storm was coming. – sentence
  2. Behind the wattle tree- sentence fragment
  3. After the earthquake – sentence fragment
  4. The wind broke several houses. – sentence
  5. Surprised by a loud noise – sentence fragment
  6. Winds of high speed – sentence fragment
  7. Rescue workers arrived. – sentence
  8. From different parts of the world – sentence fragment
  9. Many people were injured. – sentence
  10. In the weeks after the earthquake – sentence fragment

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. pop music – object
  2. sweetly – adverb
  3. very quietly – adverbial phrase
  4. that book – object, three times – adverbial phrase
  5. to the bank- adverbial phrase
  6. her – indirect object, a present – direct object
  7. bitterly – adverb
  8. on his heels – adverbial phrase
  9. a list of the items to buy – object
  10. help – object

 

Exercise 3

 

  1. a German citizen – subject complement
  2. a very arrogant lady – subject complement
  3. tired – subject complement
  4. green – object complement
  5. the queen – object complement
  6. stealing the mango – participial complement
  7. senseless – object complement
  8. a kind person – subject complement
  9. crying – participial complement
  10. trembling – participial complement

 

Exercise 4

 

  1. Simple sentence
  2. Compound sentence
  3. Compound sentence
  4. Complex – whoever broke the mirror – noun clause
  5. Simple sentence
  6. Complex sentence – whom I met – adjectival clause
  7. Complex sentence – who stole the cow – adjectival clause
  8. Simple sentence
  9. Complex sentence – as though it affects their lives – adverbial clause
  10. Complex sentence – when people felt helpless about the world around them – adverbial clause.
  11. Complex sentence – that was designed for skiing – adjectival clause
  12. Simple sentence
  13. Simple sentence
  14. Complex sentence – because my dog loves crusts – adverbial clause
  15. Complex sentence – whenever lazy students whine – adverbial clause
  16. Complex sentence – whom Mrs. Ndegwa hit in the head with pieces of chalk – adjectival clause
  17. Complex sentence – who loves bread crusts – adjectival clause
  18. Complex sentence – that drinks too much milk – adjectival clause
  19. Complex sentence – what Aunt Lucy adds to her stew – noun clause
  20. Compound sentence

 

Answers to Exercise 5

 

  1. Declarative Declarative
  2. Imperative Imperative/conditional
  3. Exclamatory Interrogative
  4. Conditional Interrogative
  5. Interrogative Declarative
  6. Exclamatory Exclamatory
  7. Exclamatory Conditional
  8. Declarative Imperative
  9. Imperative Declarative
  10. Conditional Exclamatory

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHAPTER FIVE

 

CAPITALIZATION AND PUNCTUATION

 

  • Capitalization

 

Capitalization is the writing of a word with its first letter as an upper case and the remaining letters in lower case. The following are the cases when capitalization is used:

(A) Abbreviations

 

Abbreviations begin with a capital letter.

  • Titles of persons

Examples:

Prof. George Saitoti                            Mr. Stephen Kiama

Dr. Ephantus Maree                            Mrs. Teresa Ndegwa

Lt. James Conary                                 Ms. Jacinta Atieno

Note that all the above abbreviations end with a period. Miss is not an abbreviation, so it doesn’t end with a period.

 

(ii) Words used as addresses

Examples:

St. (street)                                            Blvd. (Boulevard)

Ave. (Avenue                                       Rte. (Route)

Rd. (Road)                                            Apt. (Apartment)

 

(iii) Words used in businesses

Examples:

Co. (Company)                                     Inc. (Incorporation)

Corp. (Corporation)                            Ltd. (Limited)

 

(iv) Some abbreviations are written in all capital letters, with a letter standing for each important word.

Examples:

P.O. (Post Office)                                 USA (United States of America)

P.D. (Police Department)               E.A. (East Africa)

(v) Initials of names of persons

Examples:

E.W. Gichimu                                       D.M. Weyama

W.W. Muriithi                                     Everlyne A. Kira

 

 

  1. Titles of books, newspapers, magazines, TV shows and movies.

Examples:

The Minister’s Daughter (book)                              Tahidi High (TV show)

The Daily Nation( newspaper)                                 Harry Potter (movie)

Drum Magazine (magazine)                                     The Day of the Jackal (book)

Capitalize the first and last words only. Do not capitalize little words such as a,   an, the, but, as, if, and, or, nor etc.

 

(C)Titles of shorts stories, songs, articles, book chapters and most poems.

Examples:

Half a Day (short story)

Kigeugeu (song)

Three Days on Mt. Kenya (short story)

The Noun Clauses (chapter in a book)

Grass Will Grow (a poem)

 

(E) Religious names and terms    

Examples:

God           Allah          Jesus           the Bible             the Koran

Do not capitalize the words god and goddess when they refer to mythological deities.

 

(F) Major words in geographical names

Examples:

Continents – Africa, Asia, Europe, Australia

Water bodies – the Indian Ocean, the Atlantic Ocean, the Nile River, River    Tana, Lake Victoria.

Landforms – the Rocky Mountains, the Aberdares Mountains, the Rift Valley, the Sahara Desert.

Political Units – the Kirinyaga County, the Central Province, Inoi Sub-location.

Public Areas – Nairobi National Park, Wajee Nature Park.

Roads and Highways – Jogoo Road, Kenyatta Avenue, Uganda Road.

 

(G) Names of organisations and institutions

Examples:

Kianjege West Secondary School, United Nations, University of Nairobi, Nairobi Women’s Hospital

Note that here you capitalize only the important words. Do not capitalize such words such as a, in, and of. Do not capitalize such words as school, college, church and hospital when they are not used as parts of names.

Example:

There will be a beauty contest at school.

 

(H) Months, days and holidays

Examples:

June                                                     Labour Day

Tuesday                                               December

Kenyatta Day                                       Mashujaa Day

Do not capitalize names of seasons: autumn, summer, winter, spring

 

  • Languages, races, nationalities and religions

Examples:

Chinese             Kikuyu              Christianity           Caucasian

Bantu                 Nigerian           Muslim                  Oriental

 

(J) The first word of every sentence

           Example:

          What an exciting day it was!

 

 

(K) The pronoun I

             Example:

What should I do next?

 

 

(L) Proper Nouns

              Examples:

Lang’ata Cemetery                               Ann Pauline Nyaguthii

           Kangaita Women’s Group                   Muhigia Teachers Sacco

 

 

(M) Proper Adjectives

               Examples:

We ate at an Italian restaurant

She is a German

 

(N) The first word in greetings and the closing of a letter.

               Examples:

Dear Mark,                                               Yours sincerely,

Dear Bryan,                                              Yours faithfully,

My dear Mum,                                         Very truly yours,

 

(O) Quotations

Examples:

Jamlick exclaimed, “This book would make a great movie!”

Where,” asked the stranger, “is the post office?”

It’s late,” Billy said. “Let’s go home!”

 

(P) First word of each main topic and subtopic in an outline

Examples:

  1. Parts of speech
  2. Nouns

(i) Proper nouns

 

 

Exercise 1

 

Correct all errors of capitalization in the following sentences.

  1. this play is a revision of shakespeare’s earlier play, the merchant of venice.
  2. john kiriamiti wrote my life in crime
  3. i admire women who vie for parliamentary seats
  4. benard mathenge and his wife have travelled to america.
  5. my grandmother grew up in witemere.
  6. the nile river is one of the largest rivers in africa.
  7. each year tourists visit maasai mara national part.
  8. the tv show papa shirandula has attracted many viewers.
  9. uganda and kenya have signed an agreement over the ownership of migingo islands.
  10. our country got it’s independence in december 1963.
  11. on christmas day, all my relatives gathered at my home.
  12. waiyaki is a fictional character in ngugi wa thiongo’s novel, the river between.
  13. the city of mombasa gets its water from river tana.
  14. i would like to become a famous writer like sydney sheldon.
  15. they captured the stark beauty of hell’s gate national park in their movie.

 

  • Punctuation

 

Punctuation is the system of symbols that we use to separate sentences and parts of sentences, and to make their meaning clear. Each symbol is called a punctuation mark. For example (. , ! – : etc)

Punctuation marks can be grouped into:

  • End marks
  • The comma
  • The semicolon and the colon
  • The hyphen
  • The apostrophe
  • Quotation mark

 

  • End Marks

 

There are three kinds of end marks: the full stop (.), the question mark (?), and the exclamation mark (!). End marks show where sentences end.

 

  • The full stop (.)

 

A full stop is used to end a complete sentence. We use a full stop to end:

  • a declarative sentence- a sentence that makes a state

Example:

The highest skyscraper in Nairobi is Times Tower.

 

  • an imperative sentence – a sentence that makes a request or tells someone to do something.

Example:

Please climb the stairs carefully.

Note: An imperative sentence is followed by an exclamation mark when it expresses a strong emotion.

Example:

Be careful!

  • at the end of an indirect question – one that tells what someone asked, without using the person’s exact words.

Example:

The naughty boy wanted to know why there was no mid-term   break.

 

Other uses of the full stop

 

Full stops are also used:

  • after initials and after most abbreviations

Examples:

L.L. Coo J.              Mr. Sammy Njagi               11:00 A.M.

Sept.                          Wed.                                  2hr. 12min

Note that some abbreviations do not require full stops:

Examples:

M (metres)             FM (frequency modulation)                       Km kilometres)

  • after each number or letter that shows a division of an outline or precedes an item in a list.

Examples:

                  Outline                                                     List

1.Parts of speech                           1. Water – borne diseases

  1. Nouns                    Air-borne disease

1.Types of nouns                3. Sexually – transmitted diseases

  1. Uses of nouns 4. Skin diseases
  2. Verbs Hereditary diseases
  3. Types of verbs 6. Lifestyle diseases
  4. Uses of verbs 7. Infectious diseases

 

  • between numerals representing dollars, cents, before a decimal and in percentages

Examples:

$ 25.65                  165.42                           25.3%

 

  • The question mark (?)

 

The question mark is used at the end of an interrogative sentence (a sentence that asks a question).

Examples:

When was the Times Tower built?

Who built it?

 

 

 

 

           (c)The Exclamation mark (!)

 

The exclamation mark is used at the end of the exclamatory sentence and after an interjection. (An exclamatory sentence expresses strong feeling, emotion or emphasis. An interjection is a word or group of words that expresses strong feelings).

Examples:

Exclamatory sentence: Oh, what a tall building it is!

Interjections: Superb! Fantastic! Impressive!

An exclamation mark can also be used at the end of an imperative sentence that expresses strong feeling.

Example:

Sit! And stay in that chair if you know what’s good for you!

 

  • The comma

 

There are a number of uses of the comma in English. A comma generally tells the reader where to pause. They are used:

  • to separate words in a series except the last

The three or four items in a series can be nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, phrases, independent clauses, or other parts of sentences.

Examples:

Nouns: John, Jim, Jack walk to school everyday.

Verbs: He located, patched, and sealed the leak in the tyre.

Adverbs: She walked quickly, steadily, and calmly.

Prepositional phrases: He walked through the park, over the bridge, and onto the streets.

Independent clauses: The match was over, the crowd cheered, and Barcelona received the first- place trophy.

Adjectives: The fresh, ripe fruit was placed in a bowl.

 

Note in the above examples that a comma must be used just before the conjunction.

 

 

  • Before the conjunction in a compound sentence

Some students were taking their lunch, but others were studying.

Marto photographed the accident scene, and he sold the pictures to the newspaper.

Example:

Would she be a lawyer, or would she be a doctor?

 

Note: A comma is not required in very short compound sentence in which the parts are joined by and. However, always use a comma before the conjunctions but and or.

Examples:

 Marto photographed the accident scene and Toni reported it.

Marto photographed the accident scene, but Toni reported it.

 

Note also:  A comma is not required before the conjunction that joins the parts of a compound verb unless there are more than two parts.

Examples:

Mary entered and won the beauty contest.

That camera focuses, flashes, and rewinds automatically.

 

  • after introductory words phrases or clauses

Special elements add specific information to a sentence, but they are not essential. A comma is used to separate a special element from the rest of the sentence.

Examples:

Word: Cautiously, he entered the building

Phrase: After his failure, he disappeared from the public scene.

Clause: Because he had practised daily, he presented his new song perfectly.

 

Note: If the pause after a short introductory element is very brief, you may omit the comma.

Examples:

At first he was unsure of his singing ability.

Finally it was his turn.

 

Commas are also used after introductory words such as yes, no, oh and well when they begin a sentence.

Examples:

Well, it’s just too cold out there.

No, it isn’t seven yet.

Oh, you have spilled the milk.

 

  • with interrupters

Interrupters are words that break, or interrupt the flow of thought in a sentence. The commas are used before and after the interrupter to indicate pauses.

Examples:

I didn’t expect, however, to lose the job.

So many people, assumed, sing as well as he does.

He was chosen, nevertheless, as the new band leader.

 

  • to set off nouns of direct address

Examples:

Yes, Kamau, you can borrow my book.

Serah, do you know where I kept my phone?

How is your leg, grandpa?

 

  • to set off the spoken words in a direct sentence or quotation from the speech tag

            Examples:

Jackson said, “After my injury I had to learn to walk again.”

“The therapists urged me to keep trying,” he continued.

If the speech tag interrupts the spoken words commas are used after the last word of the first part of the spoken words and after the last word in the speech tag.

Example:

“After a while,” he added, “I was walking without a cane”.

 

Note: When a sentence is indirect or reported, no commas are used.

Example:

He added that after a while he was walking without a cane.

 

  • when writing dates

Place a comma after the day of the month.

Examples:

July 3, 1965                           December 12, 2010

 

  • when referring to geographical location.

Place a comma between the name of the town or city and the name of the state, district, or country.

Examples:

Kibingoti, Kirinyaga County                          Mombasa, Kenya

 

  • after the closing of a friendly or business letter.

Examples:

Dear Rose,                                                      Yours sincerely,

 

  • The semicolon (;) and the colon(:)

 

  • The semicolon (;)

 

The semicolon is used:

  • to separate the parts of a compound sentence when no conjunction is used.

 Example:

 Mountain climbing is exciting; it can also be dangerous.

 

Note that the semicolon replaces the comma and the coordinating conjunction.

Conjunctions that are commonly replaced by semicolons are and, but, or, for, and nor.

 

  • before a conjunctive adverb that joins the clauses of a compound sentence (conjunctive adverbs are words like therefore, however, hence, so, then, moreover, nevertheless, yet, consequently, and besides).

 Example:

The competition takes place in July; however, I prefer August.

 

  • to separate the parts of a series when commas occurs within the parts.

Example:

Last year I flew to Johannesburg, South Africa; Cairo, Egypt; and Kingston, Jamaica.

 

  • The colon (:)

 

The colon is used:

  • to introduce a list of items

Example:

My school bag contains the following items: exercise books, text books, pencils, pens, a geometrical set, and a packet of crayons.

 

  • after the greeting of a business letter

Example:

Dear Mr. Mututho:

  • between numerals that represent hours and minutes and between chapter and verse in a biblical reference

Examples:

9:00 A.M.                               6:00 P.M.                               Exodus 2:1-3

 

  • The Hyphen (-)

 

The hyphen is used:

  • to divide a word at the end of a line of writing.

Note that only words with two or more syllables may be divided at the end of a line and words should be divided only between syllables.

Example:

When walking along the streets of Naivasha Town, he met his friend, Waina

ina.

Never divide a word of one syllable and do not divide words to leave a single letter at the end or beginning of a line.

Incorrect: attraction

Correct: attraction.

 

  • in compound adjectives that come before the nouns they modify and in certain compound nouns.

Examples:

Samuel Wanjiru was a worldfamous athlete.

She is my sisterinlaw.

 

  • in compound numbers from twenty-one through ninety-nine and in fractions.

Examples:

seventythree relatives                                              onequarter full

 

 

  • The Apostrophe (’)

The apostrophe is used:

  • to form the possessive of a singular noun

Add an apostrophe and an s.

Examples:

the babys cot               Jamess car                         Josephs radio

 

  • to form the possessive of a plural noun that does not end in s

Add an apostrophe and an s.

Examples:

childrens                        mens                                      womens

 

  • to form the possessive of a plural noun that ends in s – Add only the apostrophe.

Examples:

tricksters                                                         tenants

 

  • to form the possessive of an indefinite pronoun

Use an apostrophe and an s.

Examples:

everybodys                     somebodys                              nobodys

Note: Never use an apostrophe with a possessive pronoun like our, yours, hers, theirs.

  • in names of organisations and business,

Show possession in the last word only

Example:

the United Nations brochure

 

  • in hyphenated terms

Show possession in the last word only.

Example:

My mother-in-laws photograph album

 

  • in cases of joint ownership

Show possession in the last word only.

Example:

Peter and Patricks Limousine

 

  • in forming contractions

In contractions, apostrophes replace omitted letters.

Examples:

shes = she is                   arent = are not                             I’m = I am

its = It is                            isnt = is not                                          we’ll = we will

cant = cannot                  wont = will not                                     they’ve = they have

 

  • To show that part of a date has been omitted

Examples:

The tribal clashes of 08 (the tribal clashes of 2008)

The82 coup attempt (the 1982 coup attempt)

 

  • Quotation Marks (“ “)

 

The quotation marks are used:

  • to enclose the spoken words in a direct sentence. Indirect sentences need no quotation marks.

Example:

Direct speech: The presidential candidate promised, “Creating new jobs for the youths will be my first priority.”

Indirect speech: The presidential candidate promised that creating new jobs would be his first priority.

Note:

  • Always begin a direct quotation with a capital letter.

Example:

The minister said, “You must conserve our environment.”

 

  • When the spoken words are divided by the speech tag, begin the second part of the quotation with a small letter.

Example:

“Bring me the money,” said the moneylender, “before the end of the day.”

If the second part of the quotation is a complete sentence, the first word of this sentence is capitalized.

Example:

“I am scared,” said the borrower. “That moneylender is a brute.”

 

(iii) Place commas and fullstops inside quotation marks

Place semicolons and colons outside quotation marks.

Examples:

“Last month,” the borrower explained, “I borrowed some money from the moneylender.

Carol said to the borrower, “And you refused to repay back on time”; however, the borrower did not agree.

These candidates were suggested in the article “Our Country’s Future”: Raila Odinga, Uhuru Kenyatta, William Ruto, and Martha Karua.

 

  • Place question marks and exclamation marks inside quotation marks if they belong to the quotation. Place them outside if they do not belong to the quotation.

Examples:

Carol asked, “How much money did you borrow?

Did the borrower say, “I can’t remember”?

“You are a fool!” exclaimed Carol.

 

(v) Use single quotation marks to enclose a title or quotation within a quotation.

Example:

Carol heard the borrower say, I can’t rememberbefore she lost her temper.

If the tile or quotation within the quotation ends the sentence, use both the single and the double quotation marks after the last word of a sentence.

Example:

Carol heard the borrower say, I can’t remember.’”

 

  • In a quotation of more than one paragraph, use quotation marks at the beginning of each paragraph and the end of the final paragraph.

 

Exercise 1

 

Punctuate each of the following sentences appropriately.

  1. He earned about three million dollars that year
  2. You know who Jomo Kenyatta was, don’t you
  3. What a wonderful and inspired leader he was
  4. He was also a person who helped many people
  5. Some people write stories but others write poems.
  6. Try to write a concise informative and interesting letter.
  7. Also make sure your letter as a heading an inside address a salutation a body a closing and your signature.
  8. One of the most exciting modern developments I believe is the computer.
  9. Today is July 2 2011. I will never forget this date.
  10. I have lived in Sagana Kirinyaga County since 2008.
  11. Try submitting your work to these Publishers Longhorn Publishers Jomo Kenyatta Foundation or Oxford University Press.
  12. Remember a writing career requires the following traits confidence perseverance and a thick skin!
  13. Long ago people used hand sharpened straws or reeds as pens.
  14. Fountain pens were invented in our great grandparents time
  15. Soft tip pens and rolling ball pens were invented twenty five years ago
  16. What would you do if you couldn’t build a house for yourself
  17. Youd find someone who could built It for you wouldn’t you.
  18. These archives are important to modern historians research.
  19. In his play shreds of tenderness, John Ruganda said people who have never lived through a coup d’etat have romantic ideas about it.
  20. Mureithi said a short letter to a friend is an insult.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS TO CHAPTER FIVE

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. This play is a revision of Shakespeare’s earlier play, The Merchant of Venice.
  2. John Kiriamiti wrote My life in Crime.
  3. I admire women who vie for parliamentary seats.
  4. Bernard Mathenge and his wife travelled to America.
  5. My grandmother grew up in Witemere.
  6. The Nile River is one of the largest rivers in Africa.
  7. Each year tourists visit Maasai Mara National Park.
  8. The TV show Papa Shirandula has attracted many viewers.
  9. Uganda and Kenya have signed an agreement over the ownership of Migingo Islands.
  10. Our country got independence in December, 1963.
  11. On Christmas Day, all my relatives gathered at my home.
  12. Waiyaki is a fictional character in Ngugi wa Thiongo’s novel, The River
  13. The city of Mombasa gets its water from River Tana.
  14. I would like to become a famous writer like Sidney Sheldon.
  15. They captured the stark beauty of Hell’s Gate National Park in their movie.

 

Exercise 2

 

  1. He earned about three million dollars that year.
  2. You know who Jomo Kenyatta was, don’t you?
  3. What a wonderful and inspired leader he was!
  4. He was also a person who helped many people.
  5. Some people write stories, but other write poems.
  6. Try to write a concise, informative, and interesting letter.
  7. Also make sure that your letter has a heading, an inside address, a salutation, a body, a closing, and your signature.
  8. One of the most exciting modern developments, I believe, is the computer.
  9. Today is July 2, 2011. I will never forget this date.
  10. I have lived in Sagana, Kirinyaga County, since 2008
  11. Try submitting your work to the following publishers: Longhorn Publishers, Jomo Kenyatta Foundation, or Oxford University Press.
  12. Remember, a writing career requires the following traits: confidence, perseverance, and a thick skin!
  13. Long ago, people used hand – sharpened straws and reeds as pens.
  14. Fountain pens were invented in our great – grandparents’ time.
  15. Soft-tip pens and rolling-ball pens were invented twenty-five years ago.
  16. What would you do if you couldn’t build a house for yourself?
  17. You’d find someone who could build it for you, wouldn’t you?
  18. These archives are important to modern historians’ research.
  19. In his play Shreds of Tenderness, John Ruganda said, “People who have never lived through a coup d’etat have romantic ideas about it.”
  20. Mureithi said, “A short letter to a friend is an insult.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2021-2022 KNAT Prediction Sets Series STD 8 Exams

Download the latest KNAT EXAMS 2021-2022 WITH their MARKING SCHEMES. These resources are available at no cost. You can also get unlimited free secondary and primary teachers’ resources here; TEACHERS’ RESOURCES PORTAL.

KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022 WITH MARKING SCHEMES.

ENGLISH FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

KISWAHILI FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

MATHS FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

SCIENCE FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

SOCIAL/ RE FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022 MARKING SCHEMES

ALSO DOWNLOAD;

CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION PAPERS; FREE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS DOWNLOADS

Free KCPE past papers, class 8 exams and revision materials

Class 8 free notes and exams (KCPE)

Class 8 free latest schemes of work downloads

Schemes of work class 5, 6, 7, and 8 term 1 to 3

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021-2022

Targeter series 2 class 8 exams 2021

Class 8 Targeter, Jesma free exams with marking schemes

Jesma exams 2021 class 8 pdf

Mentor Series Exams with Marking Schemes (Class 8 KCPE Revision Exams)

Form 2 Term 1, 2 & 3 Exams {Latest}

Download free Form 2 Term 1, 2 & 3 Exams {Latest}. Achievers and Sunrise Exams available too at no extra cost:

FORM 2 SUNRISE EXAMS

101 F2 ENGLISH MS

101 F2 ENGLISH QS

102 F2 KISWAHILI MS

102 F2 KISWAHILI QS

121 F2 MATHEMATICS QS

231 F2 BIOLOGY MS

231 F2 BIOLOGY QS

232 F2 PHYSICS MS

232 F2 PHYSICS QS

233 F2 CHEMISTRY QS

311 F2 HISTORY MS

311 F2 HISTORY QS

312 F2 GEOGRAPHY MS

312 F2 GEOGRAPHY QS

313 F2 CRE MS

313 F2 CRE QS

441 F2 HOMESCIENCE MS

441 F2 HOMESCIENCE QS

451 F2 COMPUTER MS

451 F2 COMPUTER QS

565 F2 BUSINESS MS

565 F2 BUSINESS QS

FORM 2 TERMLY EXAMS

AGRICULTURE MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

AGRICULTURE QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

BIOLOGY FORM 2 EXAM

BIOLOGY MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

BUSINESS STUDIES FORM 2 EXAM

BUSINESS STUDIES MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

CHEMISTRY MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

CHEMISTRY QUESTIION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

CRE MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

CRE QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

ENGLISH MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

ENGLISH QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

F2 CRE MS (2)

F2 CRE QS

F2 ENGLISH MS

F2 ENGLISH QSTNS

F2 GEO QS

F2 HIST MS (2)

F2 HIST QS

F2 KIS MS

F2 KIS QN

F2 MATHS MS (2)

F2 MATHS QS (2)

F2 PHYSICS MS

F2 PHYSICS QS

GEOG QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

GEOGRAPHY QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

HISTORY & GOVT QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

HISTORY MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

KISWAHILI MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

KISWAHILI QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

MATHS MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 EXAM

MATHS QUESTION PAPER FORM 2 EXAM

FORM 2 END TERM 2 EXAMS

END-TERM-2-MATHS-F-2

English-F2-End-T2-MS

English-F2-End-T2-Qns

F2-AGR-ET2-MS

F2-AGR-ET2-QN

F2-BIO-ET2-MS

F2-BIO-ET2-QN

F2-BST-END-T2-MS

F2-BST-ET2-2019-QN

F2-CHEM-ET2-MS

F2-CHEM-ET2-QN

F2-CRE-ET2-MS

F2-CRE-ET2-QN

F2-GEO-ET2-MS

F2-GEO-ET2-QN

F2-HIST-ET2-MS

F2-HIST-ET2-QN

F2-KISWA-ET2-MS

F2-KISWA-ET2-QN

F2-PHY-ET2-MS

F2-PHY-ET2-QN

Form 2 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers)

Free Form 2 Exams & Answers- Term 1, 2 & 3

Free Form 2 Exams for All Subjects

Form 2 exams with marking scheme

FORM 2 EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

CRE FORM 2 EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

Form 2 Exams & Answers For all subjects

Form 2 Term 1, 2 & 3 Exams {Latest}

CHEMISTRY FORM 4 NOTES- EDITABLE

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II: ALCOHOLS AND ALKANOIC ACIDS:

1. Alkanols

  • Nomenclature of alkanols
  • Primary secondary and tertiary alcohols
  • Preparation and properties of alcohols
  • Hydrolysis of halogenoalkanes
  • Hydration of alkenes
  • Fermentation of sugars and starches (Ethanol)
  • Physical properties of alcohols
  • Chemical properties of alcohols
  • Combustion
  • Reaction with metals (sodium)
  • Esterification
  • Oxidation
  • Reaction with acidified potassium dichromate
  • Reaction with acidified potassium permanganate
  • Reaction with copper metal
  • Dehydration reactions of alcohols
  • Uses of alkanols

 

  1. Alkanoic acids
  • Nomenclature
  • Preparation and properties of alkanoic acids
  • Physical properties
  • Chemical properties
  • Reaction with sodium carbonate
  • Reaction with sodium hydroxide
  • Reaction with magnesium metal
  • Esterification
  • Uses of ethanoic acid

 

  1. Fats and oils

 

  1. Soaps and soapless detergents
  • Soaps
  • Preparation of soaps
  • Role of soap in cleaning
  • Effect of hard water on soap
  • Removal of hardness
  • Temporary hardness
  • Permanent hardness

 

  • Soapless detergents
  • Preparation
  • Advantages

 

  1. Polymers
  • Natural and synthetic polymers
  • Addition polymerization
  • Condensation polymerization

ALCOHOLS (ALKANOLS):

– They derivatives of alkanes in which a hydrogen has been replaced by a hydroxyl group (OH); which is the functional group.

– They form a homologous series of the general formula CnH2n+1OH, in which the OH can also be denoted as ROH, where R is an alkyl group.

Note: alkanol is the IUPAC name while alcohol is the common name;

 

Nomenclature of alcohols

  1. The ‘e’ of the corresponding alkane molecule is replaced with the suffix – ol;
  2. The parent molecule is the longest chain containing the – OH group;
  3. The numbering of carbon atoms is done such that the carbon atom with the hydroxyl group –OH- attains the lowest possible number
  4. The constituent branch is named accordingly;

 

Examples:                                         

CH3                                                      (ii). CH3CH2CH2CH2OH                    (iii). H     OH     H

|                                                 Butan-1- ol;

CH3-C-OH                                                                                          H     C       C       C        H

|

CH3                                                                                                                                  H       H      H

2,2 dimethylpropanol-1-ol;                                                                                                                                   Propan-2-ol;

 

(iv).                 CH3                 (v). H     H      OH     H     H             (vi).          H      H

 

CH3     CH2    CCH3                H    C     C        C      C      C    H                H    C       C      OH

 

OH                         H     CH2   H     H      H                              H       H

2 methyl butan-2-ol;                                                                                      Ethanol;

CH3

3,4 ethyl methylhexan-3-ol;

 

Isomerism in alkanols.

– Alcohols exhibit positional isomerism due to the fact that the position of attachment of the functional group varies within the carbon chain;

 

Examples of isomeric alcohols

(a). Isomers of propanol

(i).      H     OH     H                            (ii).      H     H            H

 

H     C     C         C     H                        H     C     C     O    C     H

 

H     H        H                                        H     H            H

Propan-2-ol                                                                              Ethyl methyl ether or methoxyethane;

 

(iii).      H     H     H                            (iv).

 

H     C     C     C     O     H

 

H     H    H

Propan-1-ol;

Note: Ethyl methyl ether is not actually an alcohol as it lacks the –OH group;

– All have the molecular formula: C3H7OH

 

(b). Isomers of butanol

(i). CH3CH2CH2OH                (ii). CH3CH2CHCH3               (iii).            CH3

                  Butan-1-ol;                                        

OH                            CH3     C      OH

                                                            Butan-2-ol;

CH3

                                                                                                2,2-dimethyl propan-2-ol

Note: All have the molecular formula: C4H9OH

 

(c). Draw the Isomers of pentanol, C5H11OH;

(i).       H    H    H          H   H                   (ii).                                   (iii)                               (iv)

 

H – C – C – C – O – C – C – H

 

H    H   H           H    H

                      Ethylpropylether

 

Primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.

  • Primary alcohols:

– Are alcohols in which the OH group is attached to a carbon atom to which 2 hydrogen atoms are attached;

– Thus they contain a –CH2OH group;

Examples:

H    H    H    H

 

H – C – C – C – COH

                      H     H   H    H

    Butan-1-ol;

 

  • Secondary alcohols:

– Are alcohols in which the hydroxyl group is attached to the carbon atom to which only one other hydrogen atom is attached;

– The carbon atom with the OH group is thus bonded to two carbon atoms;

– They contain a CHOH group;

Example:

H    H    H    H

 

H – C – C – C – C – H

                      H     H   OH H

Butan-2-ol;

 

  • Tertiary alcohols:

– The hydroxyl group is attached to a carbon atom with no hydrogen atoms attached

– The carbon atom with the OH group is bonded to 3 other carbon atoms; hence sorrounded by the methyl groups;

– Tertiary alcohols thus a contain a –COH group;

Examples:

H   OH H

 

H – C – C – C – H

          H    CH3   H

         2-methyl propan-2-ol;

Preparation and properties of alkanols.

– Alkanols are prepared from three main methods.

  • Hydrolysis of halogenoalkanes;
  • Hydration of alkenes
  • Fermentation of starches and sugars (mainly for ethanol)

 

(a). Hydrolysis of halogenoalkanes;

– Halogenoalkanes are compounds in which one or more hydrogen atoms in an alkane are replaced by halogens;

– Addition of aqueous KOH or NaOH to a halogenoalkane and heating results to corresponding alcohol;

– Reaction involves replacement of the halogen atoms with the -OH from the alkali;

 

Examples:

(i). Preparation of methanol

CH3Cl     +       NaOH       heat              CH3OH    +    NaCl

Chloromethane          sodium hydroxide;                           methanol                sodium chloride

 

(ii). Preparation of propanol;

CH3CH2CH2Br    +      KOH               heat      CH3CH2CH2OH       +     KBr

1-bromopropane                          potassium hydroxide                       Propan-1-ol                                      Potassium bromide

 

Note: –the conversion of a halogenoalkane to an alcohol is known as hydrolysis;

– Reagent in this case is an alkali and condition for reaction is heat;

 

(b). Hydration of alkenes.

– Conversion of an alkene to an alcohol is known as hydration;

– Main reagent for the reaction is water;

– Conditions for the reaction are:

  • An acid catalyst, mainly conc. H2SO4 or phosphoric acid (H3PO4);
  • High temperatures of about 80oC;
  • High pressures of about 25-30 atmospheres;

 

Examples:

(i). Preparation of ethanol from ethene.

 

C2H4   +  H2O      Conc. H2SO4           C2H5OH;

80oC; 25-30 atm;

H     H                                                         H    H

 

 

H     C  = C     H     +     H     OH                H     C     C     H

Ethane                                   Water

H     OH

Ethanol

(ii). Preparation of butanol from butene.

 

CH3CHCHCH3   +    H2O       Conc H3PO4         CH3CH2CH2CH2OH

       Butene                                    80oC, 25-30 atm                              Butanol

 

(c). Preparation (of ethanol) by fermentation.

It is prepared from the fermentation of starches or sugars in the presence of yeast;

Fermentation: Is a chemical decomposition brought by bacteria or yeast (anaerobically) usually accompanied by evolution of carbon (IV) oxide and heat.

 

The chemical process

– Starch is broken into sugars by the action of the enzyme amylase or diastase;

Break up into

Starch molecule + water                                    sucrose molecules

Amylase

(C6H10O5) n  +  nH2O                         nC6H12O6

      Starch                      Water                                  many sucrose molecules

 

– When yeast is added to dilute sucrose solution (ordinary sugar); the enzyme sucrase in yeast catalytically breaks down sugar (sucrose) into the simplest sugars, glucose and fructose i.e.

 

Equation:

C12H22O11(aq) +  H2O(l)        Sucrase             C6H12O6(aq) +  C6H12O6

     Sugar                          Water                                                     glucose                      fructose

 

– Finally the enzyme zymase, also produced by yeast converts glucose and fructose into ethanol and carbon (IV) oxide.

 

Equation:

C6H12O6 (aq)        Zymase         2C2H5OH(aq) + CO2

Glucose/fructose                                    ethanol                         carbon (IV) oxide

 

Optimum conditions for fermentation:

  • Temperatures of 25-30oC;
  • Yeast catalyst;
  • Absence of oxygen (airtight);

 

Note:

– When the reaction mixture contains about 12% by volume of ethanol, the activity of yeast ceases.

– This is because higher ethanol concentrations kill the yeast cells;

– Fermentation provides about 10% alcohol by volume;

– The concentration of resultant ethanol can be increased by fractional distillation.

– During the process, ethanol distills over fast due to its lower boiling point (78°C)

– The distillate at below 95°C is first collected (leaving water behind).

– The resultant fraction will have 95% alcohol by volume; and is called rectified spirit;

– Absolute ethanol; which is 99.5% by volume can be obtained by re-distillation of rectified ethanol between 78-82oC to remove all the water in the mixture;

 

– This can be done in two main ways:

  • Addition of a small amount of benzene to the rectified spirit and then distilling; (benzene dissolves in the water in the alcohol)
  • Distillation of rectified spirit over a suitable drying agent like calcium oxide and then over calcium; (calcium reacts with steam, calcium oxide takes in condensed water)
Properties of alcohols (Ethanol)

(a) Physical properties

(i). It is a colourless, volatile liquid soluble in water in all proportions forming a neutral solution;

(ii). Has a characteristic smell and boils at78.5°C

 

Variation in physical properties of alkanols.

 

Name Molecular formula Molecular mass Boiling point (oC) Melting point (oC) Solubility in 100g of water
Methanol CH3OH 32 64.5 -94 Soluble
Ethanol C2H5OH 46 78.5 -117 Soluble
Propanol C3H7OH 60 97 -127 Soluble
Butanol C4H9OH 74 117 -90 Slightly soluble
Pentanol C5H11OH 88 138 -79 Slightly soluble
Hexanol C6H13OH 102 158 -52 Slightly soluble
Heptanol C7H14OH 116 175 -34.6 Very slightly soluble
Octanol C8H16OH 130 194 -16 Very slightly soluble;

 

Note:

– Solubility of alkanols decreases with increase in molecular mass;

– Both melting and boiling points increases with increase in the relative molecular mass; due to progressive increase in number of van der waals forces;

– Alkanols have higher melting and boiling points than their corresponding alkanes with the same molecular formula;

Reason:

– Alkanols have hydrogen bonding between their molecules, caused by the presence of the OH group; alkanes have van der waals between its molecules; Hydrogen bonds are stronger than weak van der waals;

 

Diagram: Hydrogen bonding between four ethanol molecules.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Chemical properties /main reactions of ethanol.

Note; the main reactions of ethanol are those of its functional group –OH;

 

(iii). Combustion

Procedure;

– A few drops of ethanol are placed in a watch glass and lit.

– A dry gas jar is held over the flame and the gas collected tested with limewater.

 

Observation:

– It burns with a blue flame, which is almost colourless.

– The resultant gas turns limewater into a white precipitate, indicating it is carbon (IV) oxide.

 

Explanations:

– Ethanol (alcohols) burns in air (oxygen) producing carbon (IV) oxide, water and heat energy;

– The lower members of the homologous series burn with a blue or non-luminous flame leaving no residue;

– As the hydrocarbon chain increases the flame becomes more luminous and smoky and a black residue remains;

 

Equation

C2H5OH(l) +  3O2(g)                                         2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)

 

Note:

– If an alkanol is burnt in a limited supply of oxygen, then the combustion is incomplete and the products include carbon (II) oxide or carbon and water

 

Equations

(i). C2H5OH(l) +  2O2(g)                                   2CO(g) + 3H2O(l)

 

(ii). 2C2H5OH(l) +  2O2(g)                                4C(s) + 6H2O(l)

 

(iv). Reaction with metals (sodium);

Procedure:

– Tiny pieces of sodium one at a time; are added 1cm³ of pure ethanol in a boiling tube.

 

Observation;

– Sodium metal darts on the surface of the ethanol and then dissolves /disappears;

– The beaker becomes warmer indicating an exothermic reaction.

Effervescence occurs and bubbles of a colourless gas are observed; gas burns with a pop sound.

 

Explanation:

– Sodium reacts with alcohol much as it does with water but the reaction is more gentle.

– Sodium reacts with ethanol to produce hydrogen gas, which on testing burns with a pop sound.

– The reaction is exothermic producing heat hence warmer beaker.

– A clear solution of sodium ethoxide is left formed in the boiling tube.

 

Equation;

2C2H5OH + Na (l)                                   2CH3CH2ONa(l)  + H2(g)

 

Note:

Alkanols react with electropositive metals such as sodium, potassium and aluminium to liberate hydrogen gas and form a solution of the metal salt, the metal alkoxide;

 

Examples

(i). 2CH3CH2CH2OH  +  Na                           2CH3CH2CH2ONa  +  H2

       Propanol                                       Sodium metal                           Sodium propoxide                         hydrogen

 

(ii). CH3CH2CH2CH2CHOH  +  K                              2CH3CH2CH2CH2CHOK  + H2

          Pentanol                                                     Potassium                                                 Potassium pentoxide                             Hydrogen

 

Note: The reactivity of alkanols with metals decreases as the hydrocarbon chain increases;

 

(v). Esterification;

– It is the production of esters (alkyl alkanoates) from the reaction between alcohols and carboxylic acids;

 

Procedure

– 2-3 drops of concentrated sulphuric acid are added to a mixture of equal proportions of ethanol and pure ethanoic acid in an evaporating dish.

– The mixture is warmed gently in a water bath for sometime.

– The mixture is poured into a beaker and smelt;

 

Observation

A fruity sweet smell (of ethyl ethanoate);

 

Explanation

– Ethanol reacts with ethanoic acid in the presence of a few drops of concentrated sulphuric acid to form ethyl ethanoate and water.

– The reaction is very slow and so catalyzed by the hydrogen ions from the sulphuric acid.

 

Equation                                      Conc. H2SO4; warm

C2H5OH(l) +  CH3COOH (aq)                                CH3COOC2H5(l)   +   H2O(l)

Ethanol                     ethanoic acid                                                                 ethyl ethanoate (ester)

 

Structurally;

H     H                          H    O                                 H     O            H     H

Conc. H2SO4

H        C      C     OH  +   H     C    C                          H     C     C     O     C     C    H   +   H2O

                                                                                                                                             Water

H     H                          H    OH                              H                    H      H

Ethanol                                                          Ethanoic acid                                                           Ethylethanoate                     

 

– The alkyl part of the ester is derived from the alkanol, while the alkanoate part is derived from the alkanoic acid;

– The alkanol attaches itself at the group in the carboxylic acid thereby displacing hydrogen atom;

– Under ordinary conditions the reaction takes place slowly; but in presence of concentrated sulphuric acid which act as a catalyst and warm (heat) conditions, the reaction is enhanced;

 

 

 

Further examples:

Write balanced equations for each of the following esterification reactions:

(i). Ethanol and propanoic acid;

 

(ii). Propanol and ethanoic acid;

 

(iii). Ethanol and methanoic acid;

 

Note:

– Generally a reaction between alcohol and a carboxylic acid (-COOH-) produces an ester and water in a process called Esterification;

 

General equation:

Conc. H2SO4, warm

Organic acid +  alcohol                               ester  + water….(Esterification), while;

 

 

Inorganic acid   + alkali                                        salt +  water….(neutralization)

 

Differences between neutralization and Esterification

  1. Esterification is slower than neutralization as the reaction is between molecules and not ions as in neutralization
  2. Esterification is reversible; the forward reaction is esterification and the backward reaction is hydrolysis.
  3. Esterification results to esters which are covalent compound; neutralization forms salts which are electrovalent.

 

Name and formulae of some common esters.

 

Alkanol Alkanoic acid Ester
Methanol

CH3OH

Propanoic acid

O

 

CH3CH2     C     OH

Methylpropanoate

O

 

CH3CH2     C     OCH3

 

Ethanol

C2H5OH

Methanoic acid

O

 

H     C     OH

Ethylmethanoate

O

 

H     C     OCH2CH3

Propan-1-ol Ethanoic acid

 

 

 

 
Butan-1-ol Ethanoic acid

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(vi). Oxidation of primary alkanols;

– On heating in presence of oxidising agents, primary alkanols are oxidised to alkanoic acids;

Note:

– During oxidation of alcohols, they first lose hydrogen to form compounds called aldehydes (compounds ending in –al)

– The resultant aldehydes (alkanal) then gain oxygen to form alkanoic acids.

 

Equations:

(i). Alkanol – hydrogen                 alkanal + water

Then;

(ii). Alkanal +  oxygen                alkanoic acid;

 

General equation:

H                                                         O

 

R     C     OH  +   2 [O]                        R     C     OH   +   H2O

From oxidizing agent

H

 

 

Example: Oxidation of ethanol

– Ethanol like all other alcohols is oxidized by strong oxidizing agents such as potassium dichromate (VI) and potassium manganate (VII) to form ethanoic acid.

 

(a). Reaction with acidified potassium dichromate (VI):

Procedure

– A little solution of acidified potassium dichromate (VI) is added to a little solution of ethanol in a test tube and then warmed gently;

 

Observation:

– The solution (dichromate) changes from yellow to green;

 

Explanation

– The acidified potassium dichromate (VI) oxidizes the ethanol to ethanal then to ethanoic acid, while the dichromate undergoes reduction (chromate (VI) to Cr3+ changing colour from yellow to green;

 

Equations

O

H+ from Conc. H2SO4

C2H5OH(l)    +   [ O ]                                            CH3CH(aq)   +   H2O(l)

Ethanol                           From                        Slow reaction                            Ethanal                          water

K2Cr2O7

 

Structurally:

H     H                                                                 H    H

 

H     C      C     OH   +    [ O ]                              H     C     C    O   +   H2O

 

H     H                                                                  H

Then;

O                                                                     O

 

CH3CH(aq)  +   [ O ]                                         CH3C     OH

Ethanal                                       H+ reaction                     Ethanoic acid

General equation

H     H                                                                        O

 

H     C     C    OH(l)   +   2 [ O ]                                   CH3C   OH   +   H2O

 

H     H

(b). Reaction with acidified potassium manganate (VII).

Procedure

Acidified potassium permanganate solution is added to ethanol in a test tube end the mixture is warmed gently.

 

Observation

The  permanganate solution turns from purple to colourless.

The characteristic smell of ethanoic acid is felt.

 

Explanation

The ethanol is oxidized to ethanal then to ethanoic acid. The reduced permanganate decolorizes (turns from purple to colourless);

-The H+/KMnO4 is decolourised due to reduction of manganate (VII) ions to Mn2+

 

General equation:

 

H     H                                                                        O

 

 

H     C     C    OH(l)   +   2 [ O ]                                   CH3C   OH   +   H2O

H+/ KMnO4

H     H

 

 

(c). Catalytic oxidation of alkanols.

– Catalytic oxidation of alkanols results to a dehydrogenation (removal of hydrogen) resulting to the formation of an alkanal (aldehyde);

– These are compounds with the functional group COH;

 

Example: Catalytic oxidation of ethanol with hot copper metal

When ethanol is passed over heated copper at about 300 °C, it is dehydrogenated i.e. hydrogen is removed.

This results into formation of an ethanal; and hydrogen gas is liberated.

 

Equation                       Cu(s)

CH3CH2OH(g)                                    CH3CHO(l)   +   H2(g)

Ethanol                             250oC             Ethanal

(vii). Dehydration reactions of alcohols.

– Dehydration is the removal of water molecules from a compound;

– Excess concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid dehydrates alkanols and forms corresponding alkenes.

 

Conditions required: –

– High temperatures of 140-180°C.

– Catalysts such as conc. sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid and aluminium oxide;

 

Example: Dehydration of ethanol

(i). Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii). Procedure

– 15cm3 of absolute ethanol are put in around bottomed flask and 5cm3 of con H2SO4 added.

– The contents are mixed thoroughly by swirling the flask.

– The flask is then heated (warmed) gently with little shaking for about 1 minute.

– The gas collected is tested with acidified potassium manganate (VII) and bromine water.

 

(iii). Observations

– Evolution of a colourless gas that decolourises the purple acidified potassium manganate (VII)

– The resultant gas also decolourises the red brown bromine water.

 

(iv). Explanations

– On heating the alkanol (ethanol) undergoes an elimination reaction.

– It loses both a hydrogen (H) and a hydroxyl (OH) from two adjacent carbon atoms.

– The H and OH combine to form water; and the remnants form ethene.

– The sulphuric acid acts as a catalyst.

 

Note: Disadvantage of concentrated sulphuric acid over phosphoric acid.

– Being a strong oxidising agent the concentrated sulphuric acid oxidizes some of the alkanol formed to CO2 and it is itself reduced to SO2;

– This reduces the volume and purity of resultant alkanol; and is also a potential source of pollution;

 

 

Equation

H     H                                                           H    H

Conc. H2SO4

H     C     C     H                                            H     C = C     H   +   H2O

170oC

H     OH

 

Note:

With cold concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid, alkanols react to form alkyl hydrogen sulphates.

 

Example: Ethanol and cold conc. sulphuric acid.

 

C2H5OH   +  H2SO4(l)                          C2H5HSO4(l)  +   H2O(l)

Ethanol                                                                         Ethyl hydrogen sulphate

                                                                                                     (Ethoxyethane)

Uses of ethanol

  1. Used as solvents; in the preparation of drugs, perfumes, liquors, vanish and paints.
  2. Source of fuel e.g ethanol when blended with gasoline to form gasohol.

Note:

– Addition of ethanol to petrol improves the antiknock propertied of petrol, due to its low ignition point;

– The alkanol also absorbs any traces of moisture that may enter and damage the petrol system;

– Alkanols also ignite on their own to liberate heat;

Example:

CH3CH2OH(l)   +   3O2(g)                                 2CO2(g)   +   3H2O(l)  ∆H = -1368KjMol

 

  1. Starting material for the manufacture of polyvinyl chloride (P.V.C)
  2. Ethanol is used as a disinfectant (antiseptic) at special concentrations e.g for cleaning tissues and surgical equipments during operations and in dressing wounds;
  3. Manufacture of alkanoic acids e.g ethanoic acid
  4. Ethanol is used as thermometer liquid for measuring low temperatures;
  5. Manufacture of alcoholic drinks
  6. Large amounts of methanol are used in the manufacture of formaldehyde a chemical used in preservation of corpses;
  7. They are used as antifreeze mixtures in car radiators e.g a mixture of ethanol and water freezes at lower temperatures that pure water;
  8. Manufacture of esters to giver fruity flavourings for confectionery and drinks;

 

Tests for primary alkanols.

  1. Reaction with sodium metal

– Alkanols liberate hydrogen gas, a colourless gas that burns with a pop sound;

 

Equation:

2CH3CH2OH(l)  +   2Na(s)                    2CH3CH2ONa   +   H2(g)

 

  1. Reaction with phosphorus (V) chloride:

– Alkanols liberate misty fumes of hydrogen chloride gas;

 

Equation:

PCl5(s)   + CH3CH2OH                                   2CH3CH2OP   +   HCl2

Note:

– Both alkenes and alkanols decolourise the purple acidified potassium manganate (VII);

– However, alkenes decolourise the red bromine water; while alkanols do not.

 

Summary on preparation of alkanols (ethanol).

 

 

Ester                                                                                                 RCOOC2H5

 

 

 

                                                                                       Heat with NaOH(aq)

 

 

 

Ethyl iodide        Boil with KOH(aq)                     Ethanol                             Fermentation        Starch, sugars

(Iodoethane)                                                                                                                cellulose

CH3CH2I

 

 

                                                                                       H2O + H2SO4

 

 

 

                                                                           Ethene

                                                            CH2CH2

 

 

 

Summary on reactions of alkanols.

 

 

CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

 

 

                                                                                          Combustion

 

 

 

Ester                      Esterification                           Ethanol                 Sodium metal                  Sodium ethoxide   + Hydrogen

RCOOC2H5          H+/ RCOOH                       CH3CH2OH                                        CH3CH2ONa  + H2

 

 

                              Conc. H2SO4 at 170oC                                    Warm with acidified K2Cr2O7 or KMnO4

 

 

 

 

Ethene                                                                       PCl5                                                          Ethanoic acid

CH2CH2                                                                                                                                     CHCOOH

 

 

 

                                                           

                                                            Chloroethane

                                                            CH3CH2Cl

 

 

 

 

 

ALKANOIC ACIDS (CARRBOXYLIC ACIDS)

– Also called organic acids and form a homologous series with a general formula of CnH2n-1OOH

– The formula can also be written as CnH2n + 1COOH; in which case n = (no. of carbon atoms – 1)

– Members differ from each other by an additional CH2 group.

– Their functional group is the carboxylic group (-COOH) which is attached to the alkyl group.

– Graphical representation of carboxyl group; O

 

C   OH

Note: All carboxylic acids have the –COOH as the functional group but alkanoic acids are strictly alkanoic acids derived from alkanes

 

Nomenclature of alkanoic acids

– The ending of the corresponding alkane is replaced by ¢oic acid’.

 

Examples;

– Methane to methanoic acid.

– Ethane to ethanoic acid.

 

– They are named as if they are derived from alkanes through replacement of one of the hydrogen atoms by the -COOH group.

 

Note: –Unlike alkanols the functional group (COOH) in alkanoic acids can only be at the end of the carbon chain.

– The C in the COOH is always given the first position, while the substituents are given locants (numbers in reference to the first position).

 

Examples:

IUPAC name Old (traditional ) name Structural formula
Methanoic acid Formic acid              OH

 

H     C = O

Ethanoic acid Acetic acid                OH

 

CH3 – C = O

Propanoic acid Propionic acid                     OH

 

CH3CH2 –  C = O

Ethanedioic acid Oxalic acid  

O                    O

C –   C

HO                  OH

 

Butanedioic acid Succinic acid                  O

CH2C

OH

O

CH2C

OH

Branched alkanoic acids

– The naming of branched alkanoic acids follow the same general rules like that of alkanes; as long as the carbon atom with the –COOH group is given the first position.

– The branch can either be an alkyl group or a halogen other than hydrogen.

 

Examples:

 

Compound IUPAC name
                            O

Cl  –  CH2 –  C

OH

 

2-chloroethanopic acid;

                             O

CH3  –  CH –  C

OH

CH3

 

3-methylpropanoic acid;

                            O

CH3  –  CH –  C

OH

OH

 

2-hydroxypropanoic acid;

 

OH

O

CH3  –  C –  C

OH

CH3

 

 

2-hydroxy, 2-methylpropanoic acid;

                                         O

CH2  – CH  –  CH2 –  C

OH

Br        Cl

 

4-bromo, 3-chlorobutanoic acid;

 

 

Isomerism in alkanoic acids.

– Due to the existence of branched alkanoic acids, it is possible to obtain various isomers for a given alkanoic acid;

 

Example:

Draw all the isomers of pentanoic acid.                                                                            (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Preparation of alkanoic acids

(a). Industrial manufacture

– Is done by the oxidation of primary alkanols using air (oxygen) as the oxidising agent.

 

Conditions:

– Moderate temperatures

– 5 atm pressure

– Hot copper catalyst;

 

Laboratory preparation.

– Is done by the oxidation of primary alkanols using acidified potassium dichromate (VI).

 

Example: Laboratory preparation of ethanoic acid.

(i). Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii). Procedure

– Acidified potassium dichromate (VI) is heated in a water bath and ethanol added slowly from a water bath.

-The mixture is heated further and then distilled.

– The distillate is collected at about 105oC.

 

(iii). Observations and explanations.

Colour of potassium dichromate (VI) changes from orange to green.

Reason:

The dichromate ions are reduced to chromium (III) ions.

 

Equation:

Cr2O72-(aq) +  14H+(aq)  +  6e-                      2Cr3+(aq)  +   7H2O(l)

 

– The ethanol is oxidised to ethanal (acetaldehyde); which is further oxidised to alkanoic acid.

Equations

O

H+ from Conc. H2SO4

C2H5OH(l)    +   [ O ]                                            CH3CH(aq)   +   H2O(l)

Ethanol                           From                        Slow reaction                            Ethanal                          water

K2Cr2O7

 

Structurally:

H     H                                                                 H    H

 

H     C      C     OH   +    [ O ]                              H     C     C    O   +   H2O

 

H     H                                                                  H

Then;

O                                                                     O

 

CH3CH(aq)  +   [ O ]                                         CH3C     OH

Ethanal                                       H+ reaction                     Ethanoic acid

General equation

H     H                                                                        O

 

H     C     C    OH(l)   +   2 [ O ]                                   CH3C   OH   +   H2O

 

H     H

 

Properties of alkanoic acids

 

Gradation in physic al properties of alkanoic acids

 

Name of acid Formula (structural) Molecular formula M.P °C B.P °C Solubility
Methanoic acid

Ethanoic acid

Propanoic acid

Butanoic acid

Pentanoic acid

Hexanoic acid

HC OOH

CH3COOH

CH3CH2COOH

CH3CH2CH2COOH

CH3CH2CH2CH2COOH

CH3(CH2)4COOH

CH2O2

C2H4O3

C3H6O2

C4H8O2

C5H10O2

C6H12O2

8.4

16.6

-20.8

-6.5

-34.5

-1.5

101

118

141

164

186

205

Most Soluble

 

increasing

     solubility

 

 

Least soluble

 

Physical properties of ethanoic acid

– A colourless liquid with a sharp pungent smell.

– B.P is 118oC and freezes at 17°c forming ice like crystals termed as glacial ethanoic acid.

– It is soluble in water and is weakly acidic with a P.H of approximately4.8.

 

Note

– Concentrated ethanoic acid is only slightly ionized and is a poor conductor of electricity

– On dilution its conductance steadily improves as the extent of ionization increases

 

 

 

 

Chemical properties (reactions) of alkanols.

(i). Reaction with carbonates.

– Alkanoic acids react with metal carbonates to form a salt (metal alkanoate), carbon (IV) oxide and water.

 

Examples:

Ethanoic acid and sodium carbonate

Ethanoic acid reacts with sodium carbonate to form sodium ethanoate and water with the liberation of carbon (IV) oxide gas.

 

Equation

Na2CO3  +   2CH3COOH                       2CH3COONa   +   CO2(g)   +   H2O(l)

Sodium carbonate                                                                       Sodium ethanoate

 

Zinc carbonate and ethanoic acid.

ZnCO3  +   2CH3COOH                        (CH3COO)2Zn   +   CO2(g)   +   H2O(l)

Zinc carbonate                                                                            Zinc ethanoate

 

(ii). Reaction with metal hydroxides (Neutralization)

Alkanols neutralize alkalis like sodium hydroxide forming a salt (metal alkanoate) and water only.

 

Examples:

Sodium hydroxide and ethanoic acid.

CH3COOH   +   NaOH                        CH3COONa   +   H2O(l)

Ethanoic acid                 Sodium hydroxide                      Sodium ethanoate

 

Potassium hydroxide and methanoic acid

HCOOH   +   KOH                               HCOOK   +   H2O(l)

Methanoic acid         Potassium  hydroxide                      Potassium methanoate

 

(iii). Reaction with metal oxides (neutralization).

– Alkanoic acids react with metal oxides to produce salt (metal alkanoate and water only.

 

Examples:

Ethanoic acid and copper (II) oxide.

2CH3COOH   +   CuO                         (CH3COO)2Cu   +   H2O(l)

Ethanoic acid                     Copper (II) oxide                      Copper ethanoate

 

(iv). Reaction with metals

Alkanoic acids react with reactive metals to form a salt (metal alkanoate) and hydrogen gas;

 

Examples:

Ethanoic acid and sodium metal

2CH3COOH  +  Na(s)                                       2CH3COONa   +   H2(g)

Ethanoic acid                                                                                             Sodium ethanoate

 

Propanoic acid and magnesium metal

2CH3CH2COOH  +  Mg                                  (CH3CH2COO)2Mg   +   H2(g)

Propanoic acid                                                                                            Magnesium propanoate

 

 

(v). Reaction with alkanols (Esterification)

– Alkanoic acids react with alkanols to form esters;

Conditions:

– Drops of concentrated sulphuric acid.

– Gentle warming.

 

Reaction of ethanoic

– Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol in the presence of a few drops of concentrated sulphuric acid forming a sweet fruity smelling compound called ester. 

– The process is called esterification.

 

Procedure

– 2-3 drops of concentrated sulphuric acid are added to a mixture of equal proportions of ethanol and pure ethanoic acid in an evaporating dish.

– The mixture is warmed gently in a water bath for sometime.

– The mixture is poured into a beaker and smelt;

 

Observation

A fruity sweet smell (of ethyl ethanoate);

 

Explanation

– Ethanol reacts with ethanoic acid in the presence of a few drops of concentrated sulphuric acid to form ethyl ethanoate and water.

– The reaction is very slow and so catalyzed by the hydrogen ions from the sulphuric acid.

 

Equation                                      Conc. H2SO4; warm

C2H5OH(l) +  CH3COOH (aq)                                CH3COOC2H5(l)   +   H2O(l)

Ethanol                     ethanoic acid                                                                 ethyl ethanoate (ester)

 

Structurally;

H     H                          H    O                                 H     O            H     H

Conc. H2SO4

H        C      C     OH  +   H     C    C                          H     C     C     O     C     C    H   +   H2O

 

H     H                          H    OH                              H                    H      H

 

– The alkyl part of the ester is derived from the alkanol, while the alkanoate part is derived from the acid;

– The alkanol attaches itself at the group in the carboxylic acid thereby displacing hydrogen atom;

– Under ordinary conditions the reaction takes place slowly; but in presence of concentrated sulphuric catalyst and warm (heat) conditions, the reaction is enhanced;

 

If propanol were used in place of ethanol, the reaction would yield the ester propyl ethanoate, according to the following equation;

 

CH3COOH(aq) +  CH3CH2CH2OH(aq)                   CH3COOCH2CH3(aq) + H2O(l)

Ethanoic acid                    propanol                                                             Propylethanoate

 

 

 

Note: –

Esters react with water to form the respective alkanoic acid and alkanol.

This reaction is termed hydrolysis and occurs in presence of concentrated sulphuric acid and heat as conditions.

 

Example:                                Conc. H2SO4

CH3COOCH3   +   H2O                                           CH3COOH   +   CH3OH

Methyl ethanoate                                                      Heat                            Ethanoic acid                  Methanol

 

(vi). Reaction with ammonia.

Alkanoic acids react with ammonia to produce the ammonium salt of the acid.

General formula of the ammonium alkanoate salt is RCOONH4

 

Example:

Ethanoic acid and ammonia gas.

CH3COOH   +   NH3                           CH3COONH4

 

Uses of alkanoic acids

  1. In pharmaceuticals, for making medicines e.g ethanoic acid is used in the manufacture of aspirin.
  2. Manufacture of dyes and insecticides
  3. Seasoning food as vinegar
  4. Coagulation of rubber latex
  5. Preparation of polyethenyl ethanoate and cellulose ethanoate which are used are used to make artificial fibres such as rayon.
  6. Manufacture of soaps.
  7. Preparation of perfumes and artificial favours used in food manufacture.

 

Tests for alkanoic acids.

The following tests can be used to test for alkanoic acids.

Reaction with carbonates and hydrogen carbonates

Esterification

 

Summary: Draw a summary flow chart to show all the reactions of a named alkanoic acid.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FATS AND OILS.

– Are esters of long chain carboxylic acids and glycerol

(a). Oils

– Oils occur naturally in plants and animals.

Examples: Whale oil, groundnut oil, corn oil and castor oil.

– Oils are liquids at room temperature.

Reason:

– They have high proportion of esters derived from the unsaturated oleic acid in them.

 

(b). Fats.

– These occur naturally in animals only.

Examples: Tallow, butter from milk, lard from pigs etc.

– Fats are solids at room temperature

– Oils can be converted to fats /hardened into fats by hydrogenation.

– This is the conversion of oils into fats by use of hydrogen; and forms the basis of margarine manufacture.

– During hydrogenation:

  • Hydrogen is bubbled into oils under high pressure and temperatures of about 400oC in the presence off a nickel catalyst

 

Note

– Fats and oils are important raw materials in the manufacture of soaps.

 

Soaps and soapless detergents

Soaps

Are a variety of compounds produced when oils or fats are reacted with sodium hydroxide.

– They are similar in that they contain a long hydrocarbon chain ending in a carboxylate anion to which is attracted a sodium cation.

– A typical soap is sodium stearate; C17H35COONa+

 

Structurally

                                                                                                                               O

CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C

ONa+

 Preparation of soaps

– 2cm3 of castor oil and 10 cm3 of 4M sodium hydroxide are poured into a 100cm3 beaker.

– The mixture is then for about 10 minutes, stirring continuously and adding distilled water to make up for evaporation.

 

Explanation:

– On boiling an alkali with fat or oil, a hydrolysis reaction occurs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equation:

CH2 – COO – C17H35                                                                                                  CH2OH

 

 

CH –   COO – C17H35   +   3NaOH                             3C17H35COO Na+   +   CHOH

Sodium stearate (soap)

CH2 – COO – C17H35                                                                                                  CH2OH

Fat                                                                                                                                                                                                     Glycerol

 

– When hydrolysis reaction occurs in the presence of an alkali (sodium hydroxide), the process is known as saponification (the chemical reaction between a fat and an alkali)

– In the fat hydrolysis NaOH neutralizes the acid formed (i.e. stearic acid) to form the sodium salt of the acid removing it from the aqueous mixture.

– Thus in excess alkali, all the fat is utilized.

– The sodium salt (sodium stearate) of the acid is termed soap if the number of carbon atoms per molecule is more than eight.

 

Note:

– KOH may be used in place of NaOH as the alkali.

 

  1. To the boiled mixture 3 spatula measures of sodium chloride are added, stirred well and allowed to cool.

Reason:

– The NaCl helps in separating the soap from the glycerol.

– This step is called salting and it reduces the solubility of the soap in the aqueous layer.

– The lower layer consists of glycerol, salts and unused alkali solution.

 

General formula of ordinary soap

CnH2n+1COONa+ where n >8 (n is greater than eight)

 

  1. The solid is filtered off and washed with cold distilled water, to remove impurities like NaCl

 

  1. The solid sample is placed in a test tube with distilled water, then with tap water.

 

Note:

The resultant soap may not have lathered easily with tap water.

Reason:

Some tap water contains a high proportion of calcium or magnesium ions that make water hard.

Summary on soap preparation

 

Fat (oil)    Step I: saponification        Solution of soap and alcohol

 

 

Add NaOH and boil                                    Step II: salting

Add NaCl, stir well

And allow to cool

 

 

 

Ordinary soap

 

 

 

 

The role of soap in cleaning

Note: functions of soap in water

  1. It makes the water able to wet material more effectively by lowering the surface tension.
  2. Emulsification of oil and grease.

Soap molecules have two dissimilar ends:

  • A hydrocarbon chain which is non-polar and has no attraction for water- hence oil soluble
  • A Carboxylate end, which is polar and is attracted to water; hence is water-soluble.

Note: the Carboxylate end is in fact negatively charged in water because after dissolution, the sodium ion and the carboxylate ion exist as separate entities.

 

Illustration:

O

 

CH3(CH2)16 – C – ONa+

Non polar                Carboxylate (Polar)

 

Effects of soap on oil –water mixture (removal of oils and grease during washing)

Note: schematic representation of a soap molecule

 

 

 

 

 

  • On adding soap into oil water mixture the following build up occurs:

– A molecule of soap has a polar (hydrophilic) and non-polar (hydrophobic) parts;

– The non-polar end dissolves in oil and the polar end dissolves in water.

– When the mixture is agitated (thoroughly shaken) the hydrocarbon chain (tail) dissolves in grease while the carboxylate – sodium end of the soap molecule (the head) remains dissolved in water.

 

Diagrams: role of soap in cleaning.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– Each oil drop ends up with a large cloud of negative charge around it as the polar heads are negatively charged.

– Consequently the oil drops repel each other, hence preventing them from coalescing.

– The water –soluble sodium “heads” on the surface of the droplets keep the droplets emulsified (suspended) in the water.

– During rinsing the water carries away the oil droplets.

 

 

 

 

Effect of hard water on soap

– The Calcium and magnesium ions in hard water react with soap (sodium stearate) and remove it as an insoluble grey scum of magnesium or calcium stearate.

 

Equations:

(i). 2C17H35COONa+(aq)   +   Ca2+(aq)                          (C17H35COO)2Ca2+(s)   +   2Na+ (aq)

            Sodium stearate (soap)                                                                                                 Magnesium stearate

 

(ii). 2C17H35COONa+(aq)   +  Mg2+(aq)                        (C17H35COO)2Mg2+(s)  +  2Na+ (aq)

           Sodium stearate (soap)                                                                                                  Magnesium stearate

– Soap is wasted in this way until all the calcium (II) and magnesium (II) stearate has been removed.

– The resultant scum is deposited on fabrics, giving them an unsightly dull appearance.

– Thus in hard water districts it is obviously advantageous to remove hardness before washing.

 

Removal of hardness:

Depends on whether the hardness is temporary or permanent

 

(a). Temporary hardness

Cause:

– The presence of calcium hydrogen carbonate or magnesium hydrogen carbonate dissolved in water.

 

Removal

– By boiling the water

– During the process the soluble calcium or magnesium hydrogen carbonate is precipitated out as insoluble calcium or magnesium carbonate.

 

Equation:

Ca(HCO3)2(aq)        Heat            CaCO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

(b). Permanent hardness

Cause:

– Presence of calcium or magnesium chlorides and sulphates

 

Removal

Can be removed using the following methods:

 

(i). Distillation

– The water is distilled and the dissolved substances are left behind as water is evaporated and condensed

 

(i). Addition of washing soda (Na2CO3)

The washing soda reacts with the Mg²+ and Ca²+(aq) ions precipitating them as the insoluble carbonates

Equations:

2Na+(aq)   +   CO32-(aq)   +   2Cl-   +  Ca2+ aq)                       CaCO3(s)   +   2Na+ (aq)  + 2Cl (aq)

 

CO32- (aq)    +   Mg2+                            MgCO3(s)

 

Disadvantage of washing soda as a water softener

– It is alkaline and can cause damage to wool and silk.

(iii). Ion exchange process (e.g. in the permutit water softener)

– It involves use of resins and compounds which will exchange their own Na+ for Ca²+or Mg²+ dissolved in hard water

– Thus as the Na²+ go into the water are left in the resin.

 

Equation:

2Na+ (resin)(aq)   +   Ca2+(aq)                           Ca2+ (Resin)2 (aq)   +   Na+(aq)

 

Advantages and disadvantages of hard water

Advantages of hard water

  1. It is good for drinking purposes as calcium contained in it helps to form strong bones and teeth.
  2. When soft water flows in lead pipes some lead is dissolved hence lead poisoning. However when lead dissolves in hard water insoluble PbCO3 are formed, coating the inside of the lead pipes preventing any further reaction
  3. It is good for brewing and the tanning industries;

 

Disadvantages of hard water

  1. Soap forms insoluble salts with magnesium and calcium ions; scum (calcium or magnesium stearate) thereby wasting soap.

Note: For these reason soapless detergents are preferred to ordinary soaps because they do not form scum; but rather form soluble salts with Mg2+ and Ca2+

– Examples of soapless detergents: brand names such as omo, perfix, persil, and fab e.t.c.

 

  1. Deposition of insoluble magnesium and calcium carbonates and sulphates formed from hard water result into blockage of water pips due to the formation of boiler scales

 

3.     Formation of kettle fur which make electrical appliances inefficient and increases running costs.

 

Soap and pollution effects.

  1. The wash water with soap and the dirt (grease) ends up in rivers and lakes thus affecting aquatic life; since plants do not grow well in soapy water.

 

Note: soaps are however biodegradable and so do not persist long in the environment.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Soapless detergents (synthetic detergents)

– Are cleansing agents lacking the carboxylate ions; but also act like soap in the cleaning process

– Instead they have sulphates (-OSO3Na+) or sulphonate groups (-SO3Na+) groups.

Are thus of two main types:

  • Sodium alkyl sulphates
  • Sodium alkylbenzene sulphonate.

 

(i). Sodium alkyl sulphates.

– Are detergents with the formula R – OSO3Na

 

Illustration.

– Consider the structure of sulphuric acid

                      O

 

HO     S      OH

 

O

– Replacing one of the hydrogen atoms with an alkyl group, R results into the compound

R – OSO3H;

– This is known as alkyl hydrogen sulphate;

– If the alkyl group (R) is a long chain such as dodecyl; CH3(CH2)10CH2 ; then the formula of the compound becomes CH3(CH2)10 – OSO3H (alkylhydrogen sulphate)

– Reacting the alkylhydrogen sulphate with an alkali (NaOH) results into a compound with the formula CH3(CH2)10 – OSO3Na.

– This is the soapless detergent, and is known as sodium dodecyl sulphate.

 

(ii). Sodium alkyl benzene sulphonates.

– Are formed when one of the OH groups in sulphuric acid is replaced with an alkyl benzene group.

 

 

– Have the general formula R –           – SO3Na

 

Illustration.

– If the alkyl benzene is of formula CH3(CH2)10CH2 ; then the resultant compound is of formula CH3(CH2)10CH2 –           – SO3H (hydrogen dodecyl benzene sulphonate)

 

– The sodium alkylbenzene sulphonate is neutralized using sodium hydroxide to obtain the detergent, CH3(CH2)10CH2 –           – SO3Na

 

The compound CH3(CH2)10CH2 –           – SO3Na is called sodium dodecyllbenzene sulphonate.

 

Conclusion:

The two main types of soapless detergents are:

  • Sodium alkyl sulphates; CH3(CH2)10 – OSO3Na
  • Sodium alkylbenzene sulphonate; CH3(CH2)10CH2 – – SO3Na

 

Note:

– Due to lack of carboxylate ions, soapless detergents do not form scum with hard water. Advantage over soap

– They are not affected by hard water, as they do not form scum in hard water as follows:

Preparation of soapless detergents

– Most are made from residues from crude oil distillation

– The hydrocarbons are treated with concentrated sulphuric acid  (instead of alkalis in cases of soap)

 

Procedure

– About 10cm³of olive oil in a small beaker, which is then stood in a larger one with ice-cold water.

– While stirring with a glass rod, concentrated sulphuric acid is carefully added to the olive oil using a dropping pipette.

– The acid is added until the yellow oil turns uniformly brown.

– 20cm³of 6M NaOH is then added; to neutralize the acid solution, resulting into a slightly basic product.

The soap is then tested with tap water and distilled water.

 

Explanation

– Some compounds like olive oil contain double bonds which can react concentrated sulphuric acid to form compounds of alkylhydrogen sulphate

 

Example:

 

R – CH = CH – CH – CH2 – Est   +   H2SO4 (l)                   R – CH – CH – CH – CH2 – Est

 

 

H   OSO3H

– In this case; R=alkyl group, either branched or straight; while Est = ester group.

– On adding NaOH, the alkyl hydrogen sulphate is neutralized where the hydrogen of the hydrogen sulphate is replaced by a sodium atom.

– The resultant compound is sodium alkylsulphate; R-CH  – CH-CH2-Est;

|          |

H     OSO3Na

Equation:

 

R – CH – CH – CH – CH2 – Est   +   NaOH(aq)          R – CH – CH – CH – CH2 – Est   +  H2O(l)

 

 

H   OSO3H                                                                     H     OSO3Na

 

– The R – CH  – CH – CH – CH2 – Est is the detergent and lathers easily with both tap and distilled water.

|          |

H     OSO3Na

Note:

– Alkylhydrogen sulphates can also be from alcohols.

 

Example:

 

R – CH – CH3   +   H2O(l)                             R – CH – CH3   +   H2O(l)

 

 

OH                                                                  OSO3H

– Most soapless detergents are sodium alkyl sulphates with a general formula ROSO3Na

 

– Sodium alkylbenzene soapless detergents are industrially manufactured from alkylbenzene;

– In this process alkylbenzene (a petroleum product) reacts with SO3 to form sulphuric acid

– Upon neutralization with NaOH, sulphuric acid forms sodium alkylbenzene sulphonate,

R –            – – SO3Na, a detergent.

 

Summary: manufacture of soapless detergents

 

Dodecene                                                   benzene

CH3(CH2)9CH = CH2   +

 

 

                              Chemical reaction

 

                                   

CH3(CH2)11                   Dodecylbenzene

 

 

Conc. sulphuric acid

 

 

 

CH3(CH2)11 –         SO3H

Hydrogen dodecylbenzene sulphonate

 

 

Sodium hydroxide

 

 

CH3(CH2)11            SO3 Na+

 

Sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate

 

 

Mode of action of soapless detergent.

Soapless detergents have two ends; a long hydrocarbon part, the tail and a short ionic part the head.

 

Simple representation of a detergent molecule.

                                                                        SO3  Na+

 

 

 

Non-polar tail (water hating)                                                 Polar head (water loving)

 

Examples:

(i). Sodium lauryl sulphate

 

CH3(CH2)10CH2  – O – SO3Na+

 

 

       Tail                                                head

 

(ii). Sodium alkylbenzene sulphonate

 

CH3(CH2)10CH2  –              SO3Na+

 

 

            Tail                                                     head

– The tail is non-polar and dissolves in oil or grease (waterphobic) while the head is polar and dissolves in water (waterphilic).

– Each oil or grease gets sorrounded by the detergent molecules and hence a cloud of charged heads hence repel each other and do not coalesce.

– The dirt (grease loses its direct contact with the fabric being washed.

– Any agitation at this point then removes the dirt from the object.

 

Advantages of soapless detergents over soap;

  1. They lather easily with hard water since the corresponding calcium and magnesium salts are soluble in water due to lack of the carboxylate ions.
  2. Are mainly prepared from non-food raw materials.
  3. They do not react with acidic water.

 

Note:

– Soapless detergents with branched chain alkyl groups are not easily broken down by bacteria and are therefore the cause of frothing in sewerage plants, rivers etc.

– Consequently modern industry is overcoming this disadvantage by making the detergents from alkylbenzene with straight chain alkyl groups.

 

Pollution effects of soapless detergents.

  1. The active ingredients such as alkylbenzene sulphonates are non-biodegradable, hence accumulate in water sources and end up in human bodies.
  2. Some of the additives such as phosphates cause eutrophication hence excessive build up of algae (algal blooms) which change the water taste and odour, and also reduce oxygen supply hence poor growth of aquatic organisms.
  3. Because of their high lathering tendency, they cause excessive frothing and foaming in water sources especially after heavy rains.

 

Comparisons between soaps and soapless detergents.

 

Detergents Soaps
Have strong cleansing action Have weaker cleansing action
Are highly soluble in water; hence can be used in acidic or hard water. Are not very soluble in water, and tend to be wasted when used in hard water;

They cannot be used in acidic water.

Are made from byproducts of petroleum industry; which helps to conserve edible fats and oils Are made from edible fats and oils;
They cuse water pollution; Are biodegradable and have minimum pollution effects.
They are expensive. Are cheaper than detergents.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

POLYMERS

– A polymer is a macromolecule formed when two or more molecules link together to form a larger unit.

– Polymers have different properties different from those of the monomers.

– The process of polymer formation is called polymerization.

– Two types of polymers exist; natural and synthetic /artificial polymers.

 

(a). Natural polymers and fabrics

– Natural polymers occur naturally in living systems.

 

Examples:

– Rubber (latex), starch, cellulose, wool and proteins.

 

Natural rubber.

– Rubber trees give out a liquid called latex, which is collected from cuts in the trunks of rubber trees.

– Natural rubber is made out of latex from rubber trees.

– Latex is a hydrocarbon C5H8, called isoprene (2,methylbut 1,3 diene).

Formula of isoprene.

 

CH2 = C – CH = CH2

 

CH3

 

– Coagulation of latex leads to formation of a hydrocarbon polymer consisting of isoprene

(2, methylbut-1, 3-diene) units.

– This polymer is called polyisoprene with the formula; [ CH2 – C = CH – CH2 ]

 

CH3

Characteristics of natural rubber.

– Soft and sticky;

– Low resistance and low tensile strength; thus breaks easily upon stretching;

– Loses its rubber like properties at temperatures above 60oC;

 

Note:

– These are not good qualities and for industrial purposes this quality must be improved.

– This is done through vulcanisation of rubber.

 

Vulcanization of rubber.

– Is a chemical reaction in which raw rubber is heated with sulphur and is done purposely to improve the wear quality of rubber.

 

Process of vulcanization;

– Rubber is heated with sulphur

– The sulphur atoms form links between chains of rubber molecules.

– This reduces the number of double bonds in the polymer; making the material tougher, less flexible and less softer.

– During the process the sulphur atoms attach themselves to the rubber molecule in such a way that the molecules become locked in place and are prevented from slipping.

 

Note: –

– Soft rubber has about 2% sulphur, while toughened rubber about 10 % sulphur.

 

– Rubber can also be made artificially in industries and this gives a form of synthetic rubber.

– Other than undergoing vulcanisation it has chemicals that give it desired properties.

– It is made from byproducts of petroleum industry.

– Examples of synthetic rubber include neoprene and thiokol.

 

Note: Neoprene is made by polymerization of chloroprene (2, chlorobut 1, 3 diene), C4H5Cl

 

Equation:

CH2 = C – CH = CH2                                     CH2 – C = CH – CH2

 

Cl                                                                    Cl

Chloroprene                                                                                                                     Neoprene or polychloroprene

 

 

 

Properties of synthetic rubber.

  1. Are unreactive, hence they don’t react with industrial chemicals like oils, grease, petrol etc.
  2. Are non-inflammable, as they don’t catch fire easily.
  3. Capable of withstanding wide range of temperatures without changing shape.
  4. Have high mechanical strength.

 

Uses of synthetic rubber.

  1. Manufacture of insulating materials for electrical connections.
  2. Making conveyor and seat belts.
  3. Manufacture of car tyres and tubes.
  4. Making gaskets, flexible pipes.

 

Advantages and disadvantages of natural polymers.

– Are biodegradable hence not a likely cause of environmental pollution.

– Are made from renewable resources such as wool and trees; hence not easily exhaustible.

– Most are not easily flammable hence good materials for items like clothing.

 

  • Disadvantages

– Are often very expensive compared to synthetic polymers.

– Some do not last for very long.

– Are easily affected by acids, alkalis, air etc.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b). Synthetic polymers

– They are man-made e.g. polythene, Perspex

– They are of two main types; thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers.

 

  • Thermoplastic;

– Softens on heating and becomes rigid on cooling.

Examples: nylon, polythene, polystyrene, etc.

 

  • Thermosetting:

– Are those that become hard on heating and cannot be softened by heating.

 

Advantages of synthetic polymers and fibres over natural polymers

  1. They can be made into different shapes easily.
  2. They are cheaper.
  3. Are often unaffected by ac ids, alkalis, water and air.
  4. Are usually less denser and yet stronger

 

Disadvantages

  1. Plastics are non-biodegradable hence causes a lot if problems in disposal
  2. Plastics burn more readily than natural material
  3. Some synthetic polymers give off poisonous gases when they burn. E. g. polyurethane gives off cyanide and carbon monoxide

 

Methods of polymerization:

  1. Addition polymerization;

– Occurs when unsaturated molecules (monomers) join to form a long chain molecule (polymer) without the formation of any other product.

– Usually the monomers must have at least a double or triple bond.

– One of the bonds in the double or triple bonds in the monomer opens up, and the unbonded electrons form bonds with neighbouring molecules.      

 

Conditions for polymerization.

– High pressures.

 

Examples.

Polymerization of ethene to Polythene

 

CH2 = CH2   +  CH2 = CH2                                          [-CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 -]

 

Calculations involving polymers.

  1. A polyisoprene molecule is represented as: -[ CH2 – C = CH – CH -]n

 

CH3

– Given that the relative formula mass of polyisoprene is 748 000, calculate the number of isoprene units in the polymer.

 

 

 

 

Summary on common addition polymers.

 

Monomer Polymer properties Uses
H                 H

C = C

H                 H

Ethene

   H     H

 

C –  C

 

H     H

Polythene

 

Light, tough, and durable – Polythene bags, bowls packaging, electrical insulation; plastic pipes etc
       H    H     H

 

H    C    C =  C – H

 

H

Propene

   H       H

 

C       C

 

CH3  H

Polypropylene

 

Light, tough and durable – Making crates, boxes; and plastic ropes
H                 H

C = C

H                 Cl

Chloroethene

   H     H

 

C –  C

 

H     Cl

Polychloroethene(polyvinyl chloride)

 

Strong and hard (not as flexible as polythene) –        Making plastic pipes,

-electrical insulators, floor tiles, credit cards,

                 CH = CH2

 

 

Phenyl ethene (styrene)

         H     H

 

C –   C

 

Cl

 

Polyphenylethene (polystyrene)

 

Light, poor heat conductor, brittle; -Insulation,

-packaging materials and food containers;

F                  F

C = C

F                 F

 

Tetrafluoroethene

      F       F

 

C –    C

 

F      F

Polytetrafluoroethene (Teflon)

 

Non-stick surface;

Withstands high temperatures

– Non-stick coatings on pans; Insulation;
                  O

 

CH2 = C – C – O – CH3

 

CH3

Methylmethacrylate

     H      CH3

 

C  –    C

 

H       C – O – CH3

 

O

Polymethylmethacrylate (Perspex)

  -Optical components

– transparent doors and windows;

– Display signs;

– dental fillings;

 

 

 

  1. Condensation polymerization

– Occurs when monomers (similar or different) combine to form a long chain molecule; with the loss of small molecules like ammonia or water.

– The monomers should have at least two functional groups.

Reason:

– For molecules to join at both ends permitting chain formation;

 

Illustration

– Consider two molecules A and B; each with 2 functional groups:

  • Molecule A; HO – A – OH, with two OH functional groups;
  • Molecule B; HOOC – B – COOH, with two -COOH functional groups

 

On condensation

HO – A – O H +  H O O C – B – COOH + HO – A – OH +…………..

                   

                       Lost to form water

Hence;

HO – A – OH  + HOOC – B – COOH                       [HO-A-OOC-B-CO]n + 2H2O(l)

 

Types of condensation polymers.

– Are of two types:

  • Polyesters

– Are polymerized formed by an ester linkage; usually with the liberation of a water molecule.

 

Examples

O                   O                                                                    O                     O

 

 

HO    C                   C – OH + H – OCH2CH2O – H                            –    C                   C – OH + H – OCH2CH2O –    +  H2O

A diol                                                                                                                                   n

          A dioic acid                                                                                                            Polyester

 

– Are condensation polymer involving monomers that have at least an amine group (in at least one of them); and thus usually result to the evolution of ammonia gas or water.

 

Example:

O                   O                              H                  H                                                  O                   O                             H                   H

 

H – C – (CH2)4 – C – OH   +  H – N – (CH2)6 – N – H                                                    – C – (CH2)4 – C – OH   +  H – N – (CH2)6 – N –     +   H2O

n

Examples of condensation polymers and their uses.

 

Polymer Monomer Uses
Polyvinyl chloride Vinyl chloride Making rain coats, plastic discs, plastic water pipes, and electric insulation;
Starch Glucose Laundry
Cellulose. Glucose Paper and clothing manufacture
Silk and wool Proteins (amino acids) Making clothes
Polyester (terylene) Terephthalic acid and Ethan 1,2  diol Clothes and seat belts
Bakelite Urea and methanol Electrical fittings
Perspex Methylmethacrylate Safety belts, windscreen, and plastic lenses;
Nylon Hexane-1,6-dioyl dichloride; and hexane- 1,6- diamine; Used in making safety glass; reflectors; contact lenses; false teeth

Further examples of polymerization reactions.

Formation of nylon.

                                                                                                              H                     H    O                    O

H                                                           H               O                                           O

NCH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2N           +            CCH2CH2CH2CH2C                                                            – N – (CH2)6 – N – C – (CH2)4 – C –

H                                                     H            Cl                                          Cl                                                                                                           n

 

Hexane – 1,6 – diamine                                   hexane – 1,6 – dioyl dichloride                                                                                 Nylon

 

 Formation of Terylene
UNIT 2: ACIDS, BASES AND SALTS

Unit Checklist:

  1. Acids;
  • Meaning
  • Strong and weak acids
  • Concentrated and weak acids
  • Comparing strength of acids
  • Using evolution of hydrogen and carbon (IV) oxides
  • Using electrical conductivity
  • Using PH
  • Role of solvents in acidic properties of solvents
  • Hydrogen chloride in water
  • Hydrogen chloride in methylbenzene

 

  1. Bases:
  • Meaning
  • Strong and weak bases (alkalis)
  • Measuring strength of alkalis
  • Using electrical conductivity
  • Using PH values
  • Effect of solvent type on properties of ammonia solution
  • Ammonia n water
  • Ammonia in methylbenzene

 

  1. Uses of acids and bases

 

  1. Oxides and hydroxides
  • Basic oxides
  • Acidic oxides
  • Neutral oxides
  • Amphoteric oxides
  • Meaning of amphoteric oxides
  • To verify amphoteric oxides
  • Reactions of amphoteric oxides

 

  1. Salts
  • Meaning
  • Preparation methods (summary)
  • Solubility of salts
  • Qualitative tests for cations using NaOH and NH4OH;
  • Effect of heat on metal oxides and hydroxides.
  • Effect of sodium carbonate on salt solutions
  • Properties of cations with sodium chloride, sodium sulphate and sodium sulphite

 

  1. Solubility and solubility curves
  • Definition of solubility
  • Factors affecting solubility
  • Solubility curves and related calculations.
  • Fractional crystallization

 

  1. Water
  • Hardness of water
  • Temporary hardness (Meaning; causes; and removal)
  • Permanent hardness (meaning; cause; and removal)

 

 

  1. Acids

– Are substances whose molecules yield hydrogen ions in water; or

– Are substances, which contain replaceable hydrogen, which can be wholly or partially replaced by a metal.

 

HCl (aq)                      H+(aq)  + Cl(aq)

 

OR: – Acids are proton donors i.e. a substance which provides protons or hydrogen ions.

 

Strength of Acids

– Acids can be categorized as either strong or weak acids;

 

  • Strong acids

– Are those which dissociate or ionize completely to a large extent in water, to yield many hydrogen ions.

– They yield to the solution as many protons as they possibly can.

 

  • Examples

Hydrochloric acid; HCl(aq)                             H+ (aq)  + Cl(aq)

Sulphuric acid; H2SO4(aq)                              2H+ (aq)  + SO4 2-(aq)

Nitric acid; HNO3(aq)                                    H+ (aq)    NO3 aq)

 

  • Weak acids.

– Are acids, which undergo partial dissociation to yield fewer hydrogen ions.

– They do not ionize in water completely or to a large extent i.e. some of their molecules remained unionized in solution.

 

Examples:

Carbonic acid:

H2CO3(aq)              water           H+(aq) +  HCO3(aq)

 

Ethanoic acid

CH3COOH (aq)            water                  H+(aq) + CH3COO(aq)

 

Note: – concentrated acids and dilute acids

Concentrated acids

– Is an acid with a high number of acid molecules per given volume.

 

Dilute acids:

Are acids with a low number of acid molecules per given volume.

 

– Thus there are concentrated strong acids or dilute strong acids; as well as concentrated weak acids and dilute weak acids.

 

 

 

 

Comparing the strength of acids

(i). Using rate of evolution of hydrogen

Apparatus:

– Boiling tubes; 1M HCl/ H2SO4/ HNO3; Methanoic acid/ tartaric acid; magnesium ribbon.

 

Procedure:

– One boiling tube is half filled with 1M HCl; while another is half filled with 1M Ethanoic acid.

– 2 pieces of magnesium ribbons are cleaned to remove a layer of oxide on the surface.

– One of the two pieces is put in each tube of the acid.

 

Observations:

– Hydrochloric acid evolves hydrogen much more quickly than Ethanoic acid yet they were of equal concentration.

 

Conclusion

– Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid;

– Ethanoic acid is a weak acid.

 

Note:

– The same experiment can be repeated with marble chips (CaCO3) in acids of same concentration.

-The marble chips dissolve more quickly in HCl, which is a strong acid.

 

(ii). Using electrical conductivity

Procedure:

– 50cm3 of 2M-hydrochloric acid solution is placed into a beaker and set up apparatus as shown below.

– The switch is closed and the brightness of the bulb noted.

 

Diagram: Electrolytic circuit

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Observations

– Strong acids like HCl, HNO3 and sulphuric acid gave a brighter bulb light than weak acids like ethanoic, carbonic acids e.t.c

 

Explanations

– Strong acids are completely dissociated and have more H+ in solution and hence have got a higher electrical conductivity; than solutions of weak acids which are only partially ionized thus have fewer hydrogen ions in solution

 

 

(iii). Using PH

Procedure

– 2cm3 solutions of different acids of equal concentrations are paired into different test tubes.

– To each test tube 2 drops of universal indicator are added.

– Acids tested: HCl, H2SO4, HNO3; ethanoic acid, carbonic acid, and tartaric acid.

– All acids are of 2M solutions

– The indicator colour and hence the PH number of each is noted; by comparing against the indicator chart.

 

Observations

Substance (1M) Colour of universal indicator PH
Sulphuric acid

Hydrochloric acid

Nitric acid

Ethanoic

Carbonic acid

Tartaric acid

Red

Red

Red

Orange

Yellow

orange

3

3

3

5

6

5

 

Explanations

– Solutions of strong acids contain a higher concentration of hydrogen ions than those of weak acids

– Strong acids have low PH usually less than 3.

– Weak acids have higher PH values usually between 5 – 6.

 

Role of solvents on acidic properties of a solute.

Experiment: – to find out if solutions of HCl in different solvents display acidic properties

Apparatus and reagents

– Hydrogen chloride gas, water and methylbenzene

– Beakers and a funnel

– Blue and red litmus papers.

 

Procedure

– Solutions of hydrogen chloride gas are made by bubbling the dry gas from a generator into water and into methylbenzene contained in separate beakers.

– The hydrochloric gas is passed into the solution using an inverted funnel to prevent sucking back.

 

Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The resultant solutions are each separately subjected to various tests as shown below and observations recorded

 

Tests and observations

 

Test. Aqueous HCl solution Solution of HCl in methylbenzene
1.      A piece of dry blue litmus paper is dropped into solution

2.      Dry universal indicator paper

3.      Add magnesium ribbon

4.      Add small marble chips

5.      Electrical conductivity

Blue litmus turns red

 

– Turns red (strong acid)

– Evolution of hydrogen

– CO2 evolved

– Good conductor

No effect on litmus

 

– Turns green (neutral)

– No reaction

– No reaction

– Does not conduct

 

Explanation

– The results show that the aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride behaves as an acid; but the solution in methylbenzene lacks acidic properties

– When HCl gas dissolves in water it changes from molecules to ions;

 

Equation:

HCl (aq)        water                 H+(aq) + Cl(aq)

 

– It is the hydrogen ions which give the acidic properties and these can only be formed in the presence of water

– HCl in water conducts electric current due to presence of free ions in solution

– HCl gas in methylbenzene does not conduct electric current because the HCl exists as molecules hence lack free ions

 

Note: – hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water because both HCl and water polar molecules;

– This causes mutual attraction of both ends of HCl molecule by different water molecules causing the dissociation of HCl molecules into ions.

 

Illustration:

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hence:

HCl (g) + water                       HCl (aq)

HCl (aq)                      H+(aq)  + Cl(aq)

– The presence of hydrogen ions in aqueous solution of hydrogen chloride explains the electrical conductivity and acidic properties of hydrogen chloride

  • Acidic properties: –
  • turns blue litmus paper red;
  • evolves hydrogen gas when reacted with magnesium;
  • evolves carbon dioxide on reaction with CaCO3;

 

2H+ (aq)  +  CaCO3 (s)                           Ca2+(aq)  +  CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

2H+(aq)  +  Mg(s)                         Mg 2+(aq)   + H2  (g)

 

– Methylbenzene has a weak attraction for hydrogen chloride and hence hydrogen chloride remains as molecules in methylbenzene

 

  1. Bases

– Are substances which accept the protons donated by acids and are hence proton acceptors

NH3 (aq)   +   H+ (aq)                          NH4+(aq)

 

CuO(s) +  2H+ (aq)                         Cu 2+(aq)   +   H2O(l)

 

Alkalis

– An alkali is a soluble base i.e. a base that is soluble in water.

– They are compounds, which produce hydroxyl ions in aqueous solutions.

 

NaOH(aq)                           Na+(aq)   +  OH (aq)

 

Note: –

When an acid proton reacts with a base (hydroxyl ions) in aqueous solution, a neutralization reaction occurs.

 

Strength of an Alkali

– Alkalis can be grouped as either strong or weak alkalis.

 

(a). Strong alkalis

– Are alkalis that undergo complete dissociation in aqueous solution; yielding a large number of hydroxyl (OH-) ions

 

Examples:

– Sodium hydroxide.

– Potassium hydroxide.

 

(b). Weak alkalis

– Are alkalis that undergo only partial dissociation in aqueous solution (water) yielding fewer numbers of hydroxyl ions.

 

Examples

– Calcium hydroxide

– Ammonium hydroxide

 

Measuring the strength of alkalis

(i). Using electrical conductivity

Procedure

50 cm3 of 2 M sodium hydroxide solution is put into a beaker and the apparatus set as shown below

Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure

– The same procedure is repeated using other alkalis like NH4OH; Ca (OH)2 e.t.c.

 

Observation

– The bulb lights brightly with KOH and NaOH as electrolyte than with NH4OH and Ca (OH)2

 

Explanation

– NaOH and KOH are strong alkalis and are completely dissociated and have more ions in solution and hence have got a higher electrical conductivity than the weak alkalis of NH4OH and Ca(OH)2(aq)

 

(ii). Using PH values

Procedure

– 2 cm3 of NaOH and 2 cm3 of NH4OH are each poured into 2 different test tubes separately

– Into each test tube 2 drops of universal indicator are added.

– The colour change is noted and the corresponding PH scale recorded

 

Observations

 

Alkali Colour of universal indicator PH
– Ammonium hydroxide (1M)

– Calcium hydroxide (1M)

– Sodium hydroxide (0.1M)

– Sodium hydroxide (1M)

– Potassium hydroxide

Blue.

Blue.

Purple.

Purple.

Purple.

11

10

13

14

14

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note: the PH scale

– Is a scale which gives a measure of the acidity of alkalinity of a substance.

 

Illustration: a PH scale.

 

1     2     3     4     5     6     7     8     9     10     11     12     13     14

 

 

Strong acid               Weak acids       Neutral   Weak alkali                                    Strong alkali

 

 

Increasing acidity                                                                                 Increasing alkalinity

(High H+ ion concentration)                                                               (Low H+ ion concentration)

 

 

Indicator colours:

 

PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Colour Red     Orange/ red Yellow/ Green Green Green/ Blue Blue/ Purple Purple

 

Effects of type of solvent on the properties of ammonium solution

Procedure

– Ammonium solution is prepared by bubbling the gas from a generator into methylbenzene (toluene) and into water contained in separate beakers

– The solutions are each divided into 3 portions and tested with litmus paper; universal indicator and for electrical conductivity

 

Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Observations

Test Solution of NH3 in water Solution of NH3 in methylbenzene (toluene)
Dry litmus paper Red litmus paper turns blue; No effect
Dry universal indicator paper Colour turns purple (alkaline PH) Turns green (Neutral PH)
Electrical conductivity Poor conductor Non-conductor

 

Explanations

– When NH3(g) dissolves in water it changes from molecules to ions.

Equation:

NH3(g) + H2O(l)                 NH4+(aq) + OH(aq)

 

– It is the hydroxide ions that cause alkaline properties.

– Since ammonium hydroxide is a weak alkali, it dissociates partially releasing fewer hydroxide ions hence the poor electric conductivity.

– Ammonium gas in methylbenzene or trichloromethane exists as molecules without free ions hence no alkaline properties and the electrical conductivity.

Uses of acids and bases

  1. Acids

– Refer to the various acids for uses of sulphuric, nitric and hydrochloric acids.

 

  1. Bases/ alkalis

– Some weak bases e.g milk of magnesia, are used to relieve stomach disorders.

 

Amphoteric oxides and hydroxides.

  • Oxides

– An oxide is a binary compound of oxygen and another element.

– Are of four categories:

  • Basic oxides
  • Acidic oxides
  • Neutral oxides
  • Amphoteric oxides

 

(i). Basic oxides

– Are usually oxides of metals (electronegative elements)

– They react with acids to form salt and water only.

Examples

CaO, MgO, CuO etc.

 

(ii). Acidic oxides

– Are usually oxides of non metals (electronegative elements).

– Many of them react with water to form (give) acids and are known as acid anhydrides

Examples

CO2; SO2; SO3; P2O5 and NO2

 

(iii). Amphoteric oxides

– Are oxides, which behave as both bases and acids.

– Are mainly oxides of certain metals in the middle group of the periodic table.

Examples

Oxides of Zn, Al, Pb

 

Experiment: – To verify amphoteric oxides

Procedure

– A small sample of aluminium oxide is placed in a test tube and 5 cm3 of 2M nitric acid added to it and the mixture shaken.

– The procedure is repeated in different test tubes with ZnO, PbO, CuO and CaO.

– The experiments are repeated using excess 2M sodium hydroxide in place of nitric acid

 

Observations

 

Name of solid Observations when
acid is added hydroxide is added
Aluminium oxide

Zinc oxide

Lead II oxide

Zinc hydroxide

Lead hydroxide

Aluminium hydroxide

Oxide dissolves

Oxide dissolves

‘’

Hydroxide dissolves

‘’

Oxide dissolves

‘’

‘’

Hydroxide dissolves

‘’

Explanations

– These oxides are soluble in acids as well as in the alkalis (NaOH)

  • Reaction with acids

– Oxides react with acids to form a salt and water only in a reaction called neutralization reaction.

 

Equations

  • Oxides

(i).PbO(s) + 2H+(aq)                   Pb2+(aq) + H2O(l)

 

(ii). Al2O3(s) + 6H+(aq)                 2Al3+(aq) + 3H2O(l)

 

(iii). ZnO(s) + 2HCl(aq)               ZnCl2(aq) + H2O(l)

 

  • Hydroxides:

(i). Pb(OH)2(s) + 2HCl(aq)                          PbCl2(aq) + 2H2O(l)

 

(ii). Zn(OH)2(s) + 2HCl(aq)                   ZnCl2(aq) + 2H2O(l)

 

(iii). Al(OH)3(s) + 3HCl(aq)                      AlCl3(aq) + H2O(l)

 

Note: in these reactions the metal oxides are reacting as bases

 

  • Reaction with alkalis

– These oxides and hydroxides also react with alkalis e.g sodium hydroxide in which case they are reacting as acids.

– Their reactions with alkalis involve the formation of complex ions; M(OH)2-4

 

Equations

  • Oxides

(i). PbO(s) + 2NaOH(aq) + H2O(l)                   Na2Pb(OH)4(aq)

 

Ionically: PbO(s) + 2OH(aq) + H2O(l)                 [Pb(OH)4]2-(aq)

 

(ii). Al2O3(s) + 2OH(aq) +  3H2O (l)                   2[Al(OH)4](aq) + 3H2O(l)

 

Ionically: Al2O3(s) + 2OH(aq) + 3H2O(l)                       2[Al(OH)4](aq)

 

(iii). ZnO(s) + 2NaOH(aq) + H2O(l)                     Na2Zn(OH)4(aq)

 

Ionically: ZnO(s) + 2OH(aq) + H2O(l)                 [Zn(OH)4]2-(aq)

 

  • Hydroxides:

(i). Al(OH)3(s) + NaOH(aq)                              NaAl(OH)4(aq)

 

Ionically: Al(OH)3(s) + OH(aq)                     [Al(OH)4](aq)

 

(ii). Zn(OH)2(s) + 2NaOH(aq)                           Na2Zn(OH)4(aq)

 

Ionically: Zn(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)                      [Zn(OH)4]2-(aq)

 

(iii). Pb(OH)2(s) + 2NaOH(aq)                            Na2Pb(OH)4(aq)

 

Ionically: Pb(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)                      [Pb(OH)4]2-(aq)

 

 

Salts

– Is a compound formed when cations derived from a base combine with anions derived from an acid.

– Salts are usually formed when an acid reacts with a base i.e. when the hydrogen ions in an acid re wholly or partially by a metal ion or ammonium (NH4+) radical.

 

Laboratory preparations of salts

– Salts are prepared in the laboratory using various depending on property of the salt especially solubility

Examples

(a). Preparations by direct synthesis

Equation:

Fe(s) + Cl2(g)                          2FeCl3(s)

 

(b). Reactions of acids with metals, metal oxides, metal hydroxides and metal carbonate

Equations:

Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq)                         ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)

 

CuO(s) + H2SO4(aq)                      CuSO4(aq) + H2O(l)

 

NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)                     NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)

 

PbCO3(s) + 2NHO3(aq)                 Pb(NO3)2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

Note:

– Acid + metal method will not be suitable if:

  • The metal is too reactive e.g. sodium or potassium.
  • The salt formed is insoluble; as it will form an insoluble layer on the metal surface preventing further reaction.
  • The metal is below hydrogen in the reactivity series.

 

(c). Double decomposition/ precipitation

– Mainly for preparations of insoluble salts

– Involves formation (precipitation) of insoluble salts by the reaction between two solutions of soluble salts.

 

Equations:

Pb(NO3)2(aq) + 2NaCl(aq)                    PbCl2(s) + 2NaNO3(aq)

 

AgNO3(aq) + HCl(aq)                  AgCl(s) + HNO3(aq)

 

Types of salts:

– Are categorized into three main categories:

  • Normal salts
  • Acid salts
  • Double salts

 

 

 

 

Solubility of salts: – a summary

– All common salts of sodium, potassium and ammonium are soluble.

– All common nitrates are soluble.

– All chlorides are soluble except silver, mercury and lead chlorides.

– All sulphates are soluble except calcium, barium, lead and stomium sulphates.

– All carbonates are insoluble except sodium, potassium and ammonium carbonates.

– All hydroxides are insoluble except sodium, potassium ammonium and calcium hydroxides is        sparingly soluble.

 

Note:

– Lead(II) chloride is soluble in hot water.

– Calcium hydroxide is sparingly soluble in water.

 

Reactions of some cations with NaOH(aq)  and NH4OH(aq) and solubilities of some salts in water

 

Cation Soluble compounds in water Insoluble compounds in water Reaction with NaOH(aq) Reaction with NH4OH solution
K+ all None No reaction No reaction
Na+ all None No reaction No reaction
Ca2+ Cl; NO3 CO32-; O2-; SO42-; OH; White precipitate insoluble in excess No precipitate
Al3+ Cl; NO3; SO42-; CO32-; O2-; OH; White precipitate

soluble in excess

White precipitate insoluble in excess
Pb2+ NO3; ethanoate; All others White precipitate soluble in excess White precipitate insoluble in excess
Zn2+ Cl; SO42-; NO3; CO32-; OH; White precipitate soluble in excess White precipitate soluble in excess
Mg2+ Cl; SO42-; NO3; CO32-; OH; White precipitate insoluble in excess No precipitate
Fe2+ Cl; SO42-; NO3; CO32-; O2-; OH; (dark) green precipitate insoluble in excess Green precipitate insoluble in water
Fe3+ Cl; SO42-; NO3; CO32-; O2-; OH; (red) brown precipitate insoluble in excess Brown precipitate insoluble in excess
Cu2+ Cl; SO42-; NO3; CO32-; O2-; OH; Pale blue precipitate insoluble in excess Pale blue precipitate soluble in excess forming a deep blue solution
NH4+ all none Ammonium gas on warming Not applicable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explanations

– In these experiments NaOH forms insoluble hydroxides with ions of Zn2+, Al3+, Cu2+, Fe2+, Ca2+, Mg2+, Fe3+, and Pb2+.

– These hydroxides have a characteristic appearance, which form the basis of their identification

Examples

Equations:

Zn2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Zn(OH)2(s)

(White ppt).

 

Cu2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Cu(OH)2(s)

(Pale blue ppt).

 

Fe2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Fe(OH)2(s)

(Dirty green ppt).

 

Fe3+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Fe(OH)3(s)

(Red-brown ppt).

 

Pb2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Pb(OH)2(s)

(White ppt).

 

– The hydroxides of aluminum, zinc and lead dissolves in excess sodium hydroxide solution because of complexes are formed

Equations:

Al(OH)3(s) + OH(aq)                      [Al(OH)4](aq)

(Tetra-hydroxyl-aluminium (III) ion)

 

Pb(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)                   [Pb(OH)4]2-(aq)

(Tetra-hydroxyl-lead (II) ion)

 

Zn(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)                       [Zn(OH)4]2-(aq)

(Tetra-hydroxyl-zinc (II) ion)

 

Note: – in these reactions KOH(aq) may be used instead of sodium hydroxide

 

With ammonia solution

– Insoluble metals hydroxides are similarly formed.

Zn2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Zn(OH)2(s)

(White ppt).

 

Cu2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Cu(OH)2(s)

(Pale blue ppt).

 

Fe2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Fe(OH)2(s)

(Dirty green ppt).

 

Fe3+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Fe(OH)3(s)

(Red-brown ppt).

 

Pb2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                         Pb(OH)2(s)

(White ppt).

 

– However hydroxides of copper and zinc dissolve in excess ammonia solution due to formation of complex ions/ salts

Equations:

Zn(OH)2 (s) + 4NH3(aq)                      [Zn(NH3)4]2+(aq)  + 2OH(aq)

(White ppt)                                             (Tetra-amine zinc (II) ion; colourless solution)

 

Cu(OH)2(s) + 4NH3(aq)                      [Cu(NH3)4]2+(aq)  + 2OH(aq)

(Pale blue ppt)                                              (Tetra-amine copper (II) ion; deep blue solution)

Effects of heat on metal hydroxides

Procedure

– Hydroxides of Zn, Ca, Pb, Cu e.t.c are strongly heated in a test tube each separately

 

Observation

– Most metal hydroxides are decomposed by heat to form metal oxides and water

– Sodium and potassium hydroxides only decompose at very high temperatures.

– Hydroxides of metals lower in the reactivity series are readily decomposed by heat than those metals higher in the series.

 

Examples

Cu(OH)2(s)            Heat               CuO(s) + H2O(l)

(Blue)                                                                     (Black)

 

Pb(OH)2(s)            Heat               PbO(s) + H2O(l)

(White)                                                                  (Red brown when hot; yellow when cold)

 

Zn(OH)2(s)            Heat               ZnO(s) + H2O(l)

(White)                                                                  (Yellow when hot; white when cold)

 

Ca(OH)2(s)            Heat               CuO(s) + H2O(l)

(White)                                                                  (White)

 

Note:

– Both iron (II) and iron (III) hydroxides give iron (III) oxide when heated.

Equations:

2Fe(OH)2(s)  + ½ O2(g)          Heat                Fe2O3(s) + 2H2O(l)

(Green)                                                                                           (Red-brown)

 

Fe(OH)3(s)             Heat               Fe2O3(s) + 3H2O(l)

(Brown)                                                                 (Red-brown)

 

These oxides do not decompose on further heating

 

Effects of sodium carbonate on various salt solutions

Procedure

– 3 drops of NaOH(aq) are added to 2cm3 of 1M solution containing magnesium ions in a test tube

the procedure is repeated with salt solutions containing

 

Solution containing Observations after adding sodium carbonate
Mg2+ A white precipitate is formed
Ca2+ A white precipitate
Zn2+ A white precipitate
Cu2+ A green precipitate
Pb2+ A white precipitate
Fe2+ A green precipitate
Fe3+ A brown precipitate and a colourless gas that forms a white ppt. in lime water;
Al3+ A white precipitate and a colourless gas that forms a white ppt. in lime water;

 

Explanations:

– Sodium carbonate, potassium and ammonium carbonate are soluble in water; all other metal carbonates are insoluble

– Hence their solutions may be used to precipitate the insoluble metal carbonates.

Ionic equations:

Ca2+(aq) + CO32-(aq)                         CaCO3(s)

 

Note:

Iron (III) and Aluminium salts hydrolyse in water giving acidic solutions which react with carbonates to liberate carbon dioxide gas; hence effervescence.

 

Reaction of metal ions in salt solutions with sodium chloride, sodium sulphate and sodium sulphate

(i). Procedure

– 2cm3 of a 0.1M solution containing lead ions is placed in a test tube.

– 2-3 drops of 2M sodium chloride solution are added and the mixture warmed;

– The procedure is repeated using salt solutions containing Ba2+; Mg2+; Ca2+; Zn2+; Cu2+; Fe2+ and Fe3+

– Each experiment (for each salt) is repeated using Na2SO4 and Na2SO3 respectively, in place of sodium chloride.

 

(ii). Observations

 

Solution containing Sodium sulphate Sodium chloride Sodium sulphate
Zn2+ – Colourless solution – Colourless solution Colourless solution
Mg2+ – Colourless solution – Colourless solution Colourless solution
Cu2+ – Blue solution – Blue solution Blue solution
Fe2+ – Greenish solution – Green solution
Fe3+ – Yellow solution – Yellow/ dark brown solution
Pb2+ – White precipitate – White precipitate which dissolve on warming White precipitate
Ba2+ – White precipitate – White precipitate White precipitate

 

Explanations

– All the listed cations soluble salts except Ba2+ and Pb2+

– Lead sulphate and barium sulphate are insoluble in water;

– Lead chloride and barium sulphite are insoluble; however PbCl2(s) dissolves on warming

 

Equations:

Pb2+(aq) + 2Cl(aq)                     PbCl2(s)

 

Pb2+(aq) + SO42-(aq)                   PbSO4(s)

 

Ba2+(aq) + SO42-(aq)                   BaSO4(s)

 

Ba2+(aq) + SO32-(aq)                   BaSO3(s)

 

Note:

– To distinguish the precipitate of barium sulphate from barium sulphite; dilute HNO3 (aq) or HCl(aq) is added to both;

– BaSO3(s) will dissolve in the dilute acid but barium sulphate will not.

 

Uses (importance) of precipitation reactions.

– Precipitation of metal carbonate from aqueous solutions is useful in softening hard water; usually by removing calcium and magnesium ions from water as insoluble carbonate

 

Useful information on salts (qualitative analysis)

Colours of substances in solids and solutions in water.

 

COLOUR  
SOLID AQUESOUS SOLUTION

(IF SOLUBLE)

1. White Colourless Compound of K+; Na+, Ca2+; Mg2+; Al3+; Zn2+; Pb2+; NH4+
2. Yellow Insoluble Zinc oxide, ZnO (turns white on cooling); Lead oxide, PbO (remains yellow on cooling, red when hot)
Yellow Potassium or sodium chromate;
3. Blue Blue Copper (II) compound, Cu2+
4. Pale green

 

Green

Pale green (almost colourless)

Green

Iron (II) compounds,Fe2+

 

Nickel (II) compound, Ni2+; Chromium (II) compounds, Cr3+; (Sometimes copper (II) compound, Cu2+)

5. Brown Brown (sometimes yellow)

 

Insoluble

Iron (III) compounds, Fe3+;

 

Lead (IV) oxide, PbO2

6. Pink Pink (almost colourless)

Insoluble

Manganese (II) compounds, Mn2+;

Copper metal as element (sometimes brown but will turn black on heating in air)

7. Orange Insoluble Red lead, Pb3O4 (could also be mercury (II) oxide, HgO)
8. Black Purple

Brown

Insoluble

Manganate (VII) ions (MnO) as in KMnO4;

Iodine (element)-purple vapour

Manganese (IV) oxide, MnO2

Copper (II) oxide, CuO

Carbon powder (element)

Various metal powders (elements)

 

Reactions of cations with common laboratory reagents and solubilities of some salts in water

 

CATION SOLUBLE COMPOUNDS (IN WATER) INSUOLUBLE COMPOUNDS (IN WATER) REACTION WITH AQUEOUS SODIUM HYDROXIDE REACTION WITH AQUEOUS AMMONIA SOLUTION
Na+ All None No reaction No reaction
K+ All None No reaction No reaction
Ca2+ Cl; NO3; CO32-; O2-; SO42-; OH; White precipitate insoluble in excess White precipitate insoluble in excess, on standing;
Al3+ Cl; NO3; SO42- O2-; OH; White precipitate soluble in excess White precipitate insoluble in excess
Pb2+ NO3; ethanoate; All others; White precipitate soluble in excess White precipitate insoluble in excess
Zn2+ Cl; NO3; SO42- CO32-; O2-; SO42-; OH; White precipitate soluble in excess White precipitate soluble in excess
Fe2+ Cl; NO3; SO42- CO32-; O2-; OH; (Dark) pale green precipitate insoluble in excess (Dark) pale green precipitate insoluble in excess
Fe3+ Cl; NO3; SO42- CO32-; O2-; OH; (Red) brown precipitate insoluble in excess (Red) brown precipitate insoluble in excess
Cu2+ Cl; NO3; SO42- CO32-; O2-; OH; Pale blue precipitate insoluble in excess Pale blue precipitate soluble in excess forming a deep blue solution
NH4+ All None; Ammonias gas on warming Not applicable.

 

 

 

Qualitative analysis for common anions.

 

  SO42-(aq) Cl(aq) NO3(aq) CO32-(aq)
TEST Add Ba2+(aq) ions from Ba(NO3)2(aq); acidify with dilute HNO3(aq) Add Ag+(aq) from AgNO3(aq).

Acidify with dilute HNO3

Alternatively;

Add Pb2+ from Pb(NO3)2 and warm

Add FeSO4(aq);

Tilt the tube and carefully add 1-2 cm3 of concentrated H2SO4(aq)

Add dilute HNO3(aq); bubble gas through lime water;
OBSERVATION The formation of a white precipitate shows presence of SO42- ion; The formation of a white precipitate shows presence of Cl ion;

Formation of a white precipitate that dissolves on warming shown presence of Cl(aq) ions

The formation of a brown ring shows the presence of NO3 ions Evolution of a colourless gas that forma a white precipitate with lime water, turns moist blue litmus paper red; and extinguishes a glowing splint shows presence of CO32- ions
EXPLANATION Only BaSO4 and BaCO3 can be formed as white precipitates.

BaCO3 is soluble in dilute acids and so BaSO4 will remain on adding dilute nitric acid

Only AgCl and AgCO3 can be formed as white precipitates.

AgCO3 is soluble in dilute acids but AgCl is not;

– PbCl2 is the only white precipitate that dissolves on warming

Concentrated H2SO4 forms nitrogen (II) oxide with NO3(aq) and this forms brown ring complex (FeSO4.NO) with FeSO4; All CO32- or HCO3 will liberate carbon (IV) oxide with dilute acids

 

Checklist:

  1. Why is it not possible to use dilute sulphuric acid in the test for SO42- ions;
  2. Why is it not possible to use dilute hydrochloric acid in the test for chloride ions?
  3. Why is it best to use dilute nitric acid instead of the other two mineral acids in the test for CO32- ions?
  4. How would you distinguish two white solids, Na2CO3 and NaHCO3?

 

What to look for when a substance is heated.

 

1. Sublimation White solids on cool, parts of a test tube indicates NH4+ compounds;

Purple vapour condensing to black solid indicates iodine crystals;

2. Water vapour (condensed) Colourless droplets on cool parts of the test tube indicate water of crystallization or HCO3 (see below)
3. Carbon (IV) oxide CO32- of Zn2+; Pb2+; Fe2+; Fe3+; Cu2+;
4. Carbon (IV) oxide and water vapour (condensed) HCO3
5. Nitrogen (IV) oxide NO3of Cu2+; Al3+; Zn2+; Pb2+; Fe2+; Fe3+
6. Oxygen NO3 or BaO2; MnO2; PbO2;

 

 

 

 

 

 

Reduction-oxidation (Redox reactions)

(a). Displacement reactions.

(i) More reactive halogens metals will displace less reactive metals from solutions of their salts in the series:

Zn                               Fe  Pb Cu

More reactive                                Less reactive

 

Example:

– Zinc powder placed in a solution of copper (II) sulphate, which contains Cu2+(aq) ions, will become Zn2+(aq) ions and brown copper solid (metal) will be deposited.

– The Cu2+(aq) is reduced to copper by addition of electrons and the zinc is oxidized to Zn2+(aq) by removal of electrons.

 

(ii). More reactive halogens will displace less reactive halogens from solutions of their salts in series:

Cl2                             Br2 I2

More reactive                              Less reactive.

 

Example:

– Chlorine bubbled into a solution of potassium iodide (colourless), which contains I(aq) ions will turn grey (black) as iodine is liberated.

– The chlorine is reduced to Cl(aq) ions by addition of electrons and the I(aq) ions are oxidized to iodine by removal of electrons.

 

(b). Decolourisation of purple potassium manganate (VII) ions.

When a few drops of purple KMnO4 solution are added to a compound and the purple colour disappears, then this shows that the MnO4(aq) ions have been reduced to almost colourlessMn2+ (aq) ions

The substance in the solution has been oxidized.

 

Example:

– KMnO4 will oxidize Fe2+(aq) ions to Fe3+(aq) ions; pale green solution turns red-brown.

– KMnO4 will oxidize Cl(aq) ions to Cl2(g); colourless solution results to a green gas with a bleaching action;

 

(c). Orange potassium chromate (VI) turning to a green solution.

– Orange solution of dichromate ions, Cr2O72-(aq), changes to green Cr3+(aq) ions when the dichromate is reduced.

– The substance causing this change is oxidized.

 

Example:

– K2Cr2O7 will oxidize Fe2+(aq) to Fe3+(aq)

– K2Cr2O7 will oxidize SO2(g) to SO42-(aq)

– Formation of sulphate ions in solution from sulphur (IV) oxide gas is often used in the test for sulphur (IV) oxide gas.

 

(d). Oxidation of Fe2+(aq) to Fe3+(aq) ions by concentrated nitric acid.

 

 

 

 

Solubility and solubility curves

  • Solubility

– Is the maximum number of grams of a solid which will dissolve in 100g of solvent (usually water) at a particular temperature

– A solution is made up of two parts: – a solute and a solvent.

 

Solute

– The solid part of a solution usually dispersed in the solvent e.g. a salt.

 

Solvent

– The liquid part of the solution into which the solute is dissolved.

 

Experiment: to determine the solubility of potassium nitrate at 20oC.

(i). Materials

– Beakers, evaporating dish, measuring cylinder, burner, scales, thermometer, distilled water and potassium nitrate

 

(ii). Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii). Procedure

– About 50cm3 of distilled water is placed in a beaker

– Potassium nitrate is added to it a little at a time stirring continuously.

– The nitrate is added until no more will dissolve and there is an excess undissolved salt present. This is the saturated solution of KNO3 at the temperature.

Note:

  • Saturated solution: solution that cannot dissolve any more of the solid/ solute at a particular temperature

– The solution is allowed to settle and it is temperature recorded.

– About 25 cm3 of clear solution is poured in a previously weight evaporating dish.

– The mass of the dish and solution is recorded.

– The dish is then heated in a water bath (to avoid spurting) till the solution is concentrated.

– The concentrated solution is allowed to cool and the dish weighted with its contents.

 

Results and calculations

 

Temperature 20.0oC
Mass of evaporating dish + solution 100.7g
Mass of evaporating dish 65.3g
Mass of solution 35.4g
Mass of evaporating dish + dry salt 73.8g

Calculating:

Mass of salt dissolved = (73.8 – 65.3)g = 8.5g;

Mass of water (solvent) = (35.4 – 8.5)g = 26.9g

Thus:

If 26.9g of water dissolves 8.5g of KNO3 at 20oC;

Then 100g of water will have ? = 100 x 8.5 = 31.6g of salt;

26.9

Therefore the solubility of KNO3 at 20oC = 31.6g per 100g of water

 

Factors affecting solubility.

(i). Temperature

– For most salts solubility increases with rise/ increase in temperature.

Reason

– Increased temperature increases the kinetic energy, and hence the momentum and velocity of the solvent molecules so that they can disintergrate the solute molecules more effectively.

– However solubilities of certain salts remain almost constant with temperature change

– Solubility of gases however decreases with increase in temperature;

Reason:

Increase in temperature causes the gas molecules to expand and hence escape from the solvent.

 

Experiment: To investigate the effect the effect of temperature on solubility.

Requirements: potassium nitrate, distilled water, test tube, thermometer, stirrer, bunsen burner, 250 cm3 glass beaker, 4.5g of potassium nitrate.

 

(ii). Procedure.

Using a 10ml measuring cylinder, measure 5 cm3 of distilled water and add it to the boiling tube containing solid potassium nitrate.  Insert a thermometer into the boiling tube and heat the mixture gently in a water bath or while shaking to avoid spillage. Continue heating until all the solid has dissolved.  Stop heating and allow the solution to cool while gently stirring with a thermometer. Record the temperature at which the crystals of potassium nitrate first appear. Note this in the table below.

Retain the boiling tube and its contents for further experiments.

Measure 2 cm3 of distilled water and add to the mixture in the boiling tube. Heat until the crystals dissolve, then cool while stirring with a thermometer. Record the temperature at which the crystals again first stat to reappear. Repeat this procedure, each time adding more 2 cm3 of distilled water, heating, cooling and recording the crystallization temperature until the table is completely filled.

 

Table 2:

 

Experiment number I II III IV V
Volume of water added 5 7 9 11 13
Temperature at which crystals appear (oC)          
Solubility of K in g/100g of water          

 

 

 

 

Questions:

(a). Complete the table and calculate the solubility of solid X in g/100g of water at different temperatures.                                                                                                                                (2 marks)

 

(b). Using the table above, plot a graph of solubility of solid X in g/100g of water against temperature.                                                                                                                                             (5 marks)

(c). From the graph:

(i). calculate the mass of K that would be obtained if the saturated solution is cooled from 60oC to 40oC.                                                                                                                                            (2 marks)

 

(ii). determine the solubility at 70oC.                                                                                                        (1mark)

 

(iii). at what temperature would solubility of K be 100g/100g of water?                                    (1mark)

 

(ii). Stirring

– Stirring increases the solubility of a solid

Reason

– Stirring causes the molecules of solvent and solute to move faster causing the solute particles to disintergrate more effectively

 

Solubility curves

– Are curves showing the variation of solubility with temperature.

 

Uses / importance of solubility curves

– Can be used to determine the mass of crystals that would be obtained by cooling a volume of hot saturated solution from one known temperature to another.

– Solubility differences can be used to separate substances i.e. recrystallization or fractional crystallization (refer to separation of mixtures)

– Separation of salts from a mixture of salts with differing solubilities e.g. extraction of sodium carbonate from Trona (refer to carbon and its compounds)

– Manufacture of certain salts e.g. sodium carbonate by the Solvay process (refer to carbon and its compounds)

 

Worked examples

  1. An experiment was carried out to determine the solubility of potassium nitrate and the following results were obtained.

 

Temperature 10 15 30 40 50 60
Mass of KNO3 per 100g of water 20 25 45 63 85 106

 

(a). What is meant by solubility?                                                                                                 (1 mark)

 

(b). Plot a graph of mass of potassium nitrate against temperature.                                                     (3 marks)

 

(c). From the graph work out the mass of KNO3 that would crystallize if a solution containing 70g of KNO3 per 100g of water was cooled from 45oC to 25oC.                                                                  (2 marks)

 

(d). Explain what would happen if 100g of KNO3 was put in cold water and heated to 50oC.                                                                                                                                                                  (2 marks)

  1. The table below shows the solubility of sulphur (IV) oxide at various temperatures.

 

Temperature (oC) 0 5 10 15 20 25 35 40 45 50 55 60
Mass of SO2 per 100g of water 22 18.4 15.4 13.0 10.8 9.05 7.80 6.80 5.57 4.80 4.20 3.60

 

(a). On the grid provided plot a graph of solubility against temperature.                                  (3 marks)

 

(b). From the graph determine:

(i). The lowest temperature at which 100cm3 of water would contain 11.6g of sulphur dioxide.(1 mark)

 

(ii). The maximum mass of sulphur (IV) oxide that would dissolve in 2 litres of solution at 10oC. (Assume that the density of the solution is 1gcm-3)                                                                      (3 marks)

 

(c) (i). Sulphur (IV) oxide reacts with sodium hydroxide solution to form sodium sulphite and water.                                                                                                                                     (1 mark)

(ii). Write the equation for this reaction.                                                                                     (1 mark)

 

(iii). Using the information from the graph, determine the volume of the saturated sulphur (IV) oxide solution that can neutralize 153 cm3 of 2M sodium hydroxide solution at 25oC.                                                                                                 (3 marks)

Water

– Can be pure or impure

Pure water

– Is a pure substance which is a compound of hydrogen and oxygen; that boils at 100oC; melts at 0oC and has a density of 1gcm-3 at sea level.

 

Impure water

– Are the natural waters constituted of dissolved solutes in pure water.

 

Hardness of water

– Water without dissolved substances (salts) hence lathers easily with soap is referred to as soft water while water with dissolved substances that does not lather easily with soap is termed as hard water

 

Experiment: effect of water containing dissolved salts on soap solution

Procedure

– 2 cm3 of distilled water is put in a conical flask.

– Soap solution from a burette is added into the water and shaken until formation of lather is noted.

– If the soap fails to lather more soap solution is added from the burette till it lathers and the volume of the soap required for lathering recorded.

– The procedure is repeated with each of the following: tap water, rain water, dilute solutions of MgCl2, NaCl, CaCl2, a(NO3)2, CaSO4, MgSO4, Mg(HCO3)2, Ca(HCO3)2, ZnSO4 , NaHCO3, and KNO3.

– The procedure is repeated with each of the solutions when boiled.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Observations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explanations

– Distilled water requires very little soap to produce lather because it lacks dissolved salts and hence termed soft water.

– Solutions containing NaCl, ZnSO4, KNO3 and NaHCO3 do not require a lot of soap to form lather

Water containing Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions do not lather easily (readily) with soap

Reason:

– These ions react with soap (sodium stearate) to form an insoluble salt (metal stearate) called (Mg and Ca stearate respectively); which is generally termed scum.

 

Equations:

With Ca2+

2C17H35COONa+(aq) + Ca2+(aq)                                 (C17H35COO)2Ca(s) + 2Na+(aq)

Sodium stearate                                                                                                            calcium stearate

 

With Mg2+

2C17H35COONa+(aq) + Mg2+(aq)                                (C17H35COO)2Mg(s) + 2Na+(aq)

Sodium stearate                                                                                                            Magnesium stearate

 

– Thus water with Mg and Ca is termed hard water and can only be made soft by removing these ions upon which the water will lather easily with water

– When Ca(HCO3)2(aq) and Mg(HCO3)2(aq) are boiled the amount of soap required for lathering decreases than before boiling

 

Reason

– Boiled decomposes the 2 salts into their respective carbonate s which precipitates from the solution leaving soft water which leathers easily with water

 

– The amount of soap solution used with  solutions containing sulphates and chlorides of calcium and magnesium did not change significantly even after boiling

Reason

– The soluble sulphates and chlorides of Mg and Ca do not decompose upon boiling hence can not be precipitated out.

 

Types of water hard ness

Temporary hardness

– Is hardness due to the presence of CaHCO3 or Mg(HCO3)2 in water; and can usually be removed by boiling.

 

Removal of temporary hardness in water:

(i). Boiling:

– Boiling decomposes and an insoluble chalk of CaCO3 and MgCO3 respectively is deposited in the sides of the vessel.

– This forms an encrustation commonly known as furr the process being furring.

 

Equations:

Ca(HCO3)2(s)           Heat        CaCO3(s) + 2CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

Mg(HCO3)2(s)           Heat        MgCO3(s) + 2CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

(ii). Distillation:

– Water containing dissolved salts is heated in a distillation apparatus;

– Pure water distils over first leaving dissolved salts in the distillation flask (refer to separation of mixtures)

– Is of less economic value as it is too expensive hence disadvantageous.

 

(iii). Addition of calcium hydroxide:

– Involves adding correct amount of lime water where CaCO3 is precipitated out.

– This method is cheap and can be used on large scale at water treatment plants.

– However if excess lime (Ca2+) ions is added this will make water hard again.

 

Equation:

Ca(HCO3)2(aq) + Ca(OH)2(aq)                           2CaCO3(s) + 2H2O(l).

 

(iv). Addition of ammonia solution:

– Addition of aqueous ammonia to water containing calcium and magnesium hydrogen carbonates (temporary hard) precipitates calcium and magnesium ions as corresponding carbonates.

 

Equations:

Ca(HCO3)2(aq) + 2NH4OH(aq)                           CaCO3(s) +2H2O(l) + (NH4)2CO3(aq)

 

 

(ii). By permutit softener (ion exchange).

– Uses a complex sodium salt (NaX), such as sodium aluminium silicate commonly known as sodium permutit.

– Permutit is a manufactured ion exchange resin.

 

  • Iron exchange resin: materials that will take ions of one element out of it’s compounds and replace it with ions another element

 

 

 

 

Working principle

– The permutit is contained in a metal cylinder

– The hard water is passed through the column of permutit in the cylinder and it emerges softened at the other end

– As hard water passes through the column ion exchange takes place.

– The Ca2+ and Mg2+ remain in the column while sodium ions from the permutit pass into water thus softening it.

 

Diagram: permutit water softener.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equations:

NaX(aq) + Ca2+(aq)                       CaX(s) + 2Na+(aq)

 

NaX(aq) + Mg2+(aq)                      MgX(s) + 2Na+(aq)

 

– When all the Na+ ions in the permutit have been replaced by Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions the permutit can not go on softening water.

– It is then regenerated by washing the column with brine (a strong NaCl solution); during which calcium and magnesium chlorides are washed away.

 

Equation:

CaX(s) + 2NaCl(aq)                       CaCl2(aq) + Na2X(s)

 

MgX(s) + 2NaCl(aq)                      MgCl2(aq) + Na2X(s)

 

Permanent hardness

– Is that due to soluble sulphates and or chlorides of calcium and or magnesium and cannot be removed by boiling

 

Removal of permanent hardness

(i). By the addition of washing soda (sodium carbonate)

– Washing soda softens hard water by causing the formation of insoluble CaCO3 or MgCO3

– The soluble sodium salts left in water do not react with soap.

 

Equations:

Na2CO3(aq) + CaCl2(aq)                            2NaCl(s) + CaCO3(S)

 

Ionically:

Ca2+(aq) + CO32-(aq)                   CaCO3(s)

 

Na2CO3(aq) + MgSO4(aq)                         Na2SO4(s) + CaCO3(S)

 

Ionically:

Mg2+(aq) + CO32-(aq)                  MgCO3(s)

– This method is very convenient and economical on large scale. It softens both temporary and permanent hardness

 

(ii). By permutit softener (ion exchange); explanations as before

(iii). Distillation.

 

Advantages of hard water

(i). It is good for drinking purposes as calcium ions contained in it helps to form strong bones and teeth.

 

(ii). When soft water flows in lead pipes some lead is dissolved hence lead poisoning. However when lead dissolves in hard water insoluble PbCO3 are formed, coating the inside of the lead pipes preventing any further reaction; this reduces any chances of lad poisoning.

 

(iii). It is good for brewing and the tanning industries; it improves wine or beer flavour in brewing industries.

 

Disadvantages of hard water

(i). Soap forms insoluble salts with magnesium and calcium ions; scum (calcium or magnesium stearate) thereby wasting soap.

– For these reason soapless detergents are preferred to ordinary soaps because they do not form scum; but rather form soluble salts with Mg2+ and Ca2+

  • Examples of soapless detergents: omo, perfix, persil, fab e.t.c.

 

(ii). Deposition of insoluble magnesium and calcium carbonates and sulphates formed from hard water result into blockage of water pips due to the formation of boiler scales

(iii). Formation of kettle fur which makes electrical appliances inefficient hence increasing running costs.

 

(iv). Formation of scum on clothing reduces their durability and aesthetic appearance

 

 

UNIT 3: ENERGY CHNAGES IN CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL PROCESSES (THERMOCHEMISTRY)

 

Unit Checklist.

1. Introduction

2. Specific heat capacity and enthalpy of a system

3. Endothermic and exothermic reactions.

4. Activation energy

5. Determination of heat changes

Ø  Heat of combustion

  • Meaning
  • Determination
  • Calculations

Ø  Fuels

  • Meaning
  • Heating value of a fuel
  • Fuel pollution
  • Choice of a fuel

Ø  Heat of neutralization

  • Meaning
  • Determination
  • Calculations

Ø  Enthalpy of solution

  • Meaning
  • Determination
  • Calculations
  • Enthalpy of displacement
    • Meaning
    • Determination
    • Calculations
  • Enthalpy of precipitation.
    • Meaning
    • Determination
    • Calculations
  1. Energy level diagrams
  2. Thermochemical cycles
  3. Hess’s law
  4. Enthalpy of formation.
  5. Heat of formation and bond energies.
  6. Latent heat
  • Latent heat of fusion
  • Latent heat of vapourisation
  • Relationship between vapourisation, fusion and structure.

 

Introduction:

– Most chemical and physical process are accompanied by energy changes which occur in the form of heat measured in joules (J) and kilojoules (KJ).

– The heat results from the motion of atoms and molecules.

 

Specific heat capacity

– Specific heat capacity of a substance is the number of joules required to raise the temperature of one gram of the substance by one degree Kelvin e.g. – SHC for water is 4.18Jg-1K-1

 

The heat content (Enthalpy) of a system.

– Heat content is denoted by H; while heat change is denoted as ∆H1;

– And; ∆H = HProducts – HReactants

= H2-H1

– Heat changes in chemical reactions can either be exothermic and endothermic.

 

Endothermic and exothermic reactions.

(a). Endothermic reactions

– Is a reaction accompanied by a fall in temperature and energy is absorbed from the surroundings.

– The enthalpy change is normally positive since heat of products (HProducts) is higher than heat of reactants (Hreactants).

– Thus H2-H1 is a positive value; since HI is less than H2.

 

Graphically this can be denoted as follows;-

 

 

 

 

∆H = +Ve; reaction is endothermic

 

 

Reactants; H1

 

 

 

 

Reaction path

 

Examples:

(i). When NH4NO3 dissolves in water, the temperature of the solution drops.

 

Procedure

– A spatula end-full of ammonium nitrate is dropped into a test tube of water.

– The bottom of the test tube is felt with the hand.

 

Observations:

– The hand feels cold.

Reason:

– Energy is absorbed by the products, cooling the test tube.

 

Thus H1 is less than H2 giving a positive ∆ H1 showing an endothermic reaction.

 

 

(ii) N2(g) +  O2 (g)                2NO(g); ∆H=+91KJMol-1

 

(b). Exothermic reactions.

– Are reactions accompanied by a rise in temperature and energy is liberated to the surroundings.

– The enthalpy change is normally negative, since heat of reactants (H1) is normally higher than heat of products (H2).

– Thus, H2-H1 gives a negative value since H1 is higher than H2.

 

Exothermic reactions can be represented graphically as follows;-

 

 

 

 

 

∆H = Ve; reaction is exothermic

 

 

Products; H2

 

 

 

 

Reaction path

 

– In exothermic reactions H2 is lower than H1.

 

Examples:

(i). Manufacture of ammonia in the Haber process;

i.e. N2(g) +  3H2 (g)                     2NH3(g); ∆H=-46Kjmol

 

(ii) Dissolving sodium hydroxide pellets in water,

-The temperature of the resulting NaOH(aq) is higher than the temperature of water at room temperature.

-This implies the internal temperature of products is lower than the reactants’ original temperature.

-Thus (H products – H reactants) = -ve value, an exothermic reaction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Activation energy.

– Is the energy required to activate the reactants before a reaction can take place.

– Thus activation energy is the energy required to initiate a reaction.

– The size of activation energy will differ from one reaction to another and so will be the gap between the energy of reactants and the energy is products.

 

Examples:

(i). Exothermic reactions

 

 

E1

A               B      Activation energy

Reactants

C(s) + O2(g)

 

∆H = -ve.

E2

 

 

Products

CO2(g)

 

 

Reaction progress (pathway)

 

  • At A; bonds are being broken and the energy is absorbed.
  • At B; bonds are now being formed, and so energy is evolved.

 

Endothermic reactions

 

 

A          B

 

E2

Products

CaO(s) + CO2(g)

 

∆H = +ve

 

 E1

Reactants

CaCO3(s)

 

Reaction progress (pathway)

 

  • At A; bonds are broken and energy is absorbed.
  • At B; bonds are formed and energy is evolved.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determination\ measurement of Enthalpy (heat) changes.

Calorimeters are sued and have to be insulated to reduce heat loss to the surrounding.

 

Source of errors:

– Heat loss to the surrounding.

– Absorption of heat by the calorimeter (vessels).

 

Main heat changes under consideration:

  • Enthalpy of combustion (∆Hc)
  • Enthalpy of neutralization (∆Hneut)
  • Enthalpy of solution (∆Hsoln)
  • Enthalpy of precipitation (∆Hprecip)
  • Enthalpy of displacement (∆HDisp)
  • Enthalpy of formation (∆Hf)

 

  1. Heat of combustion ∆Hc

– Is the heat changes when the mole of a substance is completely burned in oxygen, at one atmospheric pressure.

– Since heat is usually evolved and hence ∆H is usually negative.

 

Example;

C(s) +  O2(g)                             CO2(g) ; ∆ H= -394 Kjmol-1

 

 

Apparatus for finding ∆Hc of a fuel.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Heat evolved = Specific heat capacity of water x Mass of water x Temperature rise

 

= CM∆T; joules, where; C = specific heat capacity.

M = mass of water.

∆T= temperature change.

 

 

 

 

Examples

  1. Assume

Volume of water in calorimeter   = 100cm3

Initial temperature of water         = 225oC

Final temperature of water           = 50.5oC

Change in temperature of water   = 28.0oC

Mass of water                              = 100g

Mass of lamp before burning       = 30.46g

Mass of lamp after burning          = 30.06g

Mass of ethanol burnt                  = 30.46 -30.06

                                                     = 0.40g

(a). Determine the heat evolved;

= ∆ H= CM∆ T

=4.2 x 100 x 28

=11760 Joules

=11.760 KJ

 

(b). Hence calculate the molar heat of combustion of ethanol;

 

Moles of ethanol burnt  = Mass of ethanol burnt; 0.4 = 0.008695 moles.

RFM of ethanol            46

Thus if 0.008695 moles = 11.76 kilojoules,

Then 1mole = ?

 

1 mole = 11.76 x 1 = -1352.50 KJMol

0.008695

 

= -1352.5 KJMol-1 (negative value as the reaction is exothermic since heat is evolved).

 

  1. When ethanol was burnt in the apparatus shown (in example 1), the results were: mass of fuel burnt, M1=1.50g; mass of water, M2=500g; ∆T= 13.0oC. (C=12; H=1; O=16; SHC of water=4.18KJKgK). Find the molar enthalpy of combustion of ethanol.

Compare the experimental value with the listed value of –1368 KJMol and explain any difference.

 

Solution:

Heat evolved = CM∆T

= 4.18 x 500 x 13

1000

= 27.17KJ

Molar mass of ethanol, C2H5OH = [(12 x 2) + (1 x 6) + (1 x 16)] = 46

Thus if 1.5g = 27.17KJ

Then 46 g = ?

= 46 x 27.17

1.5

= 833.213KJMol

 

 

  1. In an experiment to determine the heat of combustion of methanol, CH3OH a student used a set up like the one shown in the diagram below. Study the set up and the data and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Data:

Volume of water       =500 cm3

Final temperature of water =27.0oC

Initial temperature of water =20.0oC

Final mass of lamp + menthol = 22.11g

Initial mass of lamp + methanol =22.98g

Density of water- 1gcm-3

(Heat change = mass x temperature change x 4.2Jg-1oC1

 

Questions:

(a). Write an equation for the combustion of methanol.                                                                {1mark}

 

(b). calculate:

(i). The number of moles of methanol used in the experiment                                                    {2marks}

 

(ii). The heat change for this experiment.                                                                                      {1mark}

 

(iii). The heat of combustion per mole of methanol.                                                                   {2marks}

 

(c) Explain why the molar heat of combustion for methanol obtained in this experiment is different from the theoretical value.                                                                                                           {2marks}

 

  1. When 0.6g of element J were completely burned in oxygen, all the heat evolved was used to heat 500 cm3 of water, the temperature of the water rose from 23.0oC to 32.0oC. Calculate the relative atomic mass of element J given that the specific heat capacity of water = 4.2jg-1k-1, density of water=1.0gcm-3 and molar heat of combustion of J is 380JMol                           {3marks}

 

  1. Hydrogen peroxide contained in 100cm3 of solution with water was completely decomposed. The heat evolved was 1380J. Determine the rise in temperature due to the reaction.

(SHC of water = 4.2Jg-1k-1; density of water = 1gcm-3; O =16; H = 1)                                    {3 marks}

 

Fuels:

– Are compounds which produce a high heat of combustion.

– Fuels can be:-

  • Solids; such as charcoal, wood, coal.
  • Liquids; such as ethanol, gasoline
  • Gaseous; such as methane, water, gas etc.

 

Basic concepts:

  • Calorific value

– Is the energy content of a fuel;

– Is the heat evolved when a given mass of fuel is completely burnt in oxygen;

 

Note:

– Sometimes fuels may undergo incomplete combustion.

– Incomplete combustion of fuel is disadvantageous in that:-

  • It reduces the energy content.
  • It leads to pollution.

 

  • Heating value:

– Is the amount of heat energy given out when a unit mass or unit volume of a fuel is completely burnt in oxygen.

 

Fuel pollution.

– Is commonly caused by internal combustion engine.

– Fuel in engine (e.g. petrol) burns completely to water and carbon (IV) oxide, only under ideal conditions.

 

Causes of fuel pollution:

(i). Incomplete combustion which causes production of (produces) CO and unburnt carbon (soot).

 

(ii). Some fuels contain sulphur and nitrogen and on combustion release SO2 and NO2. These gases are acidic, resulting to acidic rain which corrodes buildings and affects trees and animals in various ways.

 

(iii). Fuel additives; e.g. tetraethyl lead, Pb (C2H5)4 added to petrol to enhance burning efficiency produces volatile lead compounds in the exhaust fumes.

– Lead is very poisonous and affects the nervous system and the brain in children.

 

Factors to consider when choosing a fuel.

(i) Heating value,

(ii) Ease and rate of combustion.

(iii) Availability

(iv) Ease of transportation

(v) Ease of storage

(vi) Environment effects.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Heat of neutralization;

Is the heat evolved when acid and a base react to form and mole of water.

– Alternatively;

– It is the heat evolved when one mole of hydrogen ions from an acid reacts with one mole of hydroxide ions from an alkali to form\ give one mole of water.

 

Equation:

OH(aq) +  H+(aq)                     H2O(l)

 

– Neutralization reactions are exothermic.

– Are determined by:

– measuring the temperature rise produced when a known volume of acid is neutralized by a known volume of alkali.

Examples.

(a). Strong acids reacting with strong alkalis.

The ∆H is always about –57KJMoland higher than that for weak acids – weak alkalis.

Reason:-

– Strong acids and alkalis are already fully ionized in aqueous solution and no heat is lost in ionizing the acid or the alkali.

 

Consider:

– Reaction between sodium hydroxide and hydrochloric acid

 

NaOH(aq)                     Na+(aq) + OH(aq)

HCl(aq)                  H+(aq) +  Cl(aq)

 

On reacting; OH(aq) + H+(aq)                H2O(l)

 

Diagrammatically (energy level diagram)

 

 

 

 

 

 

∆H = -57KJMol-1

 

H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Reaction progress (pathway)

 

(b). Neutralization reactions involving weak acids or weak alkalis.

– The ∆H is lower than expected, e.g. only –52Kjmol-; and hence lower than that for strong acids-strong alkalis.

 

Reason:

– Weak acids and weak alkalis are NOT fully ionized in aqueous solutions and some heat is used in ionizing them.

Consider; reaction between ethanoic acid and ammonia solution.

 

 

NH4+(aq) + OH(aq) + CH3COO(aq) + H+(aq)

 

 

 

∆H = +5KJ

 

∆H = -57KJ

NH3(aq) + H2O(l) + CH3COOH(aq)

 

 

 

 

CH3COO(aq) + NH4+(aq) + H2O(l)

 

 

 

Reaction pathway

 

Therefore;

∆H is given by;

∆H = ∆HI + ∆HII

= 5 + (-57)

= -52KJMol-1

 

Note:

– Dibasic acids e.g. H2SO4 contains two replaceable hydrogen atoms hence on incomplete neutralization, they form two moles of water.

 

 

– Therefore, H neutralization =  ½ x ∆H reaction.

 

Experiment: – To determine the heat of neutralization of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide.

(i) Procedure:-

– A clean dry 250 cm3 glass or plastic beaker is wrapped with a newspaper leaf.

– Exactly 50 cm3 of 2.0M hydrochloric acid solution is transferred into the beaker.

– The temperature T1 of the acid solution is noted.

– Using another clean dry measuring cylinder, exactly 50 cm3 of 2.0M NaOH solution is measured and its steady temperature T2 is noted.

– The contents of the beaker (acid), are carefully stirred with a thermometer while adding NaOH.

– The highest temperature T4 attained by the resulting mixture is noted.

 

(ii) Apparatus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii). Results:

– Temperature of the acid, T1 = oC;

– Temperature of the hydroxide, T2 = oC;

– Average temperature of the two solutions; T1 + T2 = T3 = oC

2

-The highest temperature of the mixture; T4 = oC;

-The temperature change, ∆T= (T4 –T3) = oC;

 

Sample calculations:

Given: Temperature of hydrochloric acid solution T1= 22.75oC;

Temperature of sodium hydroxide solution T2 = 22.80oC;

Average temperature of acid and alkali T1 + T2 = T3 = 22.78oC;

2

Highest temperature of alkali and acid mixture, T4 = 36.40oC;

Temperature change, ∆T= T4 – T3 = (36.40 – 22.78)oC;

=13.62oC;

 

  • Assumption: the specific heat capacity of the solution= 4.2KJKg-1K-1.

 

– In the experiment, 50 cm3 of 2M HCl are neutralized by 50 cm3 of NaOH, thus; volume of the mixture= (50 + 50) cm3 = 100 cm3.

– Taking density of the resultant solution to be 1gcm-3, then;-

Mass of solution M;

=density x volume

=1g/cm3 x 100cm3= 100g.

=0.1 kg i.e. (100/1000)

Thus heat evolved,

Mass of solution x specific heat capacity x temperature change

= MC∆T,

= 0.1Kg x 4.2kj/kg.k x 13.62oC

=- 5.7 KJ.

 

– But 50 cm3 of 2M HCl contains 2 x 50 moles, = 0.1 moles of H+ ions.

1000

– Similarity 50 cm3 of 2M NaOH contains 2 x 50 = 0.1 moles of OH ions.

1000

– This implies that the two solutions neutralize each other completely.

Therefore;

Molar heat of neutralization (heat liberated when one mole of each reagent is used;-

  • Mole = 5.72KJ

1mole = 1 x 5.72 = -57.2 KJMol-1

0.1

– Since heat is evolved, the reaction is exothermic, the molar heat of neutralization= -57.2 KJMol-1.

Thus, enthalpy change;

H+(aq) + OH(aq)                    H2O(l); ∆H(neut) = -57.2 KJMol. (Thermochemical equation)

1mole            1mole                                   1mole

Note:

Thermochemical equation: refers to a chemical equation which shows the enthalpy change.

 

Worked examples:

  1. Given, T1= 21.0oC; T2=22.0oC; T4 = 34.5oC; volume of hydrochloric acid= 100 cm3, volume of NaOH(aq) =100 cm3, molarity of the solutions are each 2M. Calculate the heat of neutralization for the two reagents. (Assumptions, density of the mixture=1gcm-3 and SHC=4.2KJKg-1K-1)

 

2 (a). When 100g of water at 94.0oC were added to a calorimeter at 17.5oC, the temperature rose to 80.5oC. Determine the heat capacity of the calorimeter. What assumption did you make in your calculations?

 

Solution:

Heat given out by water = heat received by calorimeter of heat capacity C.

Heat = MC∆T,

0.100 x 4180 x (94.0 – 80.5) = C (80.5 – 17.5)

C = 0.100 x 4180 x 13.5

62.5

= 90.288Jg-1k-1

Assumption; specific heat capacity of water is 4180jg-1k-1

 

(b). 250 cm3 of sodium hydroxide were added to 250 cm3 of hydrochloric acid in the calorimeter. The temperature of the two solutions was 17.5oC initially and rose to 20.1oC. Calculate the standard enthalpy of neutralization.

 

Solution:

– Assuming the specific heat capacities of the solutions is the same as that of water, 4180jg-1k-1.

Heat from neutralization = heat by calorimeter + solutions.

= (C∆T)   + MC∆T,

Mass of solutions = 250+250) =500 cm3

= density x volume; = 1gcm-3 x 500 cm3=500g

Hat from neutralization = 90(20.1-17.5) + (0.500 x 4180 x (20.1-17.5)

= 5670J.

 

  1. The following results were obtained in an experiment to determine the heat of neutralization of 50 cm3 2M HCl and 50 cm3 2M sodium hydroxide.

Mass of plastic cup = 45.1g

Initial temperature of acid = 27.0oC

Initial temperature of alkali = 23.0oC

Mass of plastic cup + HCl + NaOH = 145.1g

Temperature of the mixture of acid and alkali = 38.5oC.

 

(a) Define heat of neutralization;                                                                                                  {1mark}

Solution:-

Enthalpy change when one mole of water is formed from a reaction between an acid and a base.

 

(b) Write an ionic equation for the neutralization of hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide.  {1mark} Solution:

H+(aq) + OH(aq)                      H2O(l)

 

 

 

(c) Calculate;

(i) The amount of heat produced during the experiment.                                                            {3marks}

(Specific heat capacity of solution=4.2kjkg-1k-1, density of solution= 1gcm-3).

 

Solution:

Amount of heat = MC∆T

Mass of solution = (145.1 – 45.1) = 100g

Temperature change; ∆T = (38.5)-(27.0 +23.0) = 38.5 – 25 =13.5oC;

2

Heat produced ∆H = 100g x 4.2kjg-1k-1 x 13.5oC

=5670 joules

=5.67KJ

 

(ii). Molar heat of neutralization for the reaction.                                                                    {3marks}

 

Solution:

Number of moles involved; taking only NaOH or HCl’

1000 cm3 = 2moles

50 cm3= 2 x 50 = 0.1moles

1000

If 0.1 mole produced 5.67 kg; 1 mol = ?

0.1=5.67kg

1mol= (5.67 x 1) = 56.7 KJMol-1

0.1

 

(d). Explain why the molar heat of neutralization of NaOH and ethanoic acid of equal volume and molarity would be less than the value obtained in c (ii) above.                                                     (1mark)

 

Solution:

– Some of the heat produced during neutralization is used up by the weak acid to dissociate fully hence the lower value.

 

(e). Write down the Thermochemical equation for the reaction between NaOH and dilute hydrochloric acid above.

 

Solution

NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq)                     NaCl(aq) + H2O(l); ∆H= -56.7KJMol-1

 

(f). Draw an energy level diagram for the neutralization reaction in 4 (c ) above.

 

Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)

 

 

∆ H=-56.7KJMOL-1

H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

Reaction pathway

 

  1. Heat of solution/ enthalpy of solution.

– Is the heat change when a given mass (moles) of a substance is dissolved in a stated amount of solvent (water).

 

Molar enthalpy of solution:

– Is the heat change when one mole of a substance is dissolved in a stated amount of solvent (water).

– Alternatively;

– It is the heat change when one mole of a substance dissolves in water to give an infinitely dilute solution i.e. (a solution which shows no change in its properties when more water is added).

 

– Is determined as;

 

 

∆Hsolution = – ∆Hlattice + ∆Hhydration    ; when ∆Hlattice is given as a negative value;

 

Alternatively;

 

 

 ∆Hsolution = ∆Hlattice + ∆Hhydration   ; where ∆Hlattice is given a s appositive value;

 

Where,

  • Lattice energy

– Is the leaf evolved when one mole of a compound is formed from its separate gaseous ions.

Alternatively;

– It is the energy required to break the ionic bonds within a crystal (solid) lattice.

 

  • Hydration (solvation) energy,

– Is the heat evolved when one mole of ions are hydrated by water molecules.

 

Note:

– Water is a good solvent because it has a high negative(-ve) enthalpy of solvation resulting from powerful interaction between polar molecules and solute ions due to large dipoles on water molecules.

 

– Therefore,

– Heat of solution can either be exothermic or endothermic depending on the magnitude of hydration and lattice energies.

 

– Solution process occurs into two stages.

 

Example:

– Consider the dissolution of sodium chloride solid.

(i). Energy is taken in to break the crystalline lattice.

 

NaCl(s)                       Na+(g) +  Cl(g)

∆H = +∆Hlattice

=+776KJ.

 

(ii). Heat is evolved when one mole of icons are hydrated by water molecules.

Na+(g) + Cl(g)   H2O(l)          Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)

 

∆H hydration=-771KJ

 

Illustrations:

(a) Energy level diagram for an endothermic dissolving process for a solid MX(s)

 

 

M+(g) + X(g) + H2O(l)

 

Step II

Step I                                                             ∆Hhydration

 

Final state

∆Hlattice                                 M+(aq) + X(aq)

 

 

∆Hsolution

 

MX(s) + H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

-The lattice energy is larger than the hydration energy hence;-

∆Hsolution = +ve

 

(b) Energy level for the diagram for an exothermic dissolving process for solid MX(s)

 

 

M+(g) + X(g) + H2O(l)

 

Step I                                                            Step II

∆Hlattice                                                         ∆Hhydration

 

Initial state

MX(s) + H2O(l)

 

 

∆Hsolution

 

 

Final state

M+(aq) + X(aq)

 

 

 

 

The lattice energy is smaller than hydration energy hence;

∆H solution = -ve.

 

Note: All gases dissolve with evolution of heat;

Reason:

– There are no intermolecular forces or bonds to break before hydration occurs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Worked examples:

  1. The equation below represents changes in physical states for iron metal.

 

Fe(s)                         Fe(l); ∆H = 15.4KJMol

Fe(l)                         Fe(g); ∆H = 354KJMol

 

Calculate the amount of heat required to change 11.2g of solid into iron to gaseous iron. (Fe=56.0)

 

Solution:

Total heat needed to convert 1 mole of iron from solid to gas = (15.4Kj + 354Kj); = 369.4Kj;

1 mole = 56g;

Thus if 56g requires 369.4Kj;

Then 11.2g =?

= 11.2 x 369.4; = 73.88Kj;

56

 

  1. The lattice and hydration enthalpies for lithium chloride and potassium chloride are given below.

 

Salt ∆Hlattice ∆Hhydration.
LiCl -861 -884
KCl -719 -695

 

(a). Calculate the enthalpy of solution, ∆Hsolution; Kj mol for;

  1. Lithium chloride. (2 marks)

 

Solution:

 

Hsolution = -∆Hlattice + ∆Hhydration

= – (-861) + (-884)

= 861- 884;

= -23Kjmol-

 

  1. Potassium chloride: (2 marks)

 

Solution:

 

Hsolution = -∆Hlattice + ∆Hhydration

= – (-719) + (-695)

= 719- 695;

= -24Kjmol-

 

(b) Which of these two salts above has a higher solubility in water? Give reasons for your answer.

 

Solution:

Potassium chloride; the difference in ∆Hsolution is greater;

 

  1. Given that the lattice energy of NaCl(s) is +77kjmol-1 and hydration energies of Na+(g) and Cl(g) are

-406kjmol-1 and -364kjmol-1 respectively. Calculate the heat of solution, ∆Hsoln for one mole of NaCl(s)

 

 

 

 

Experiment: To measure the molar enthalpy change for the dissolution (enthalpy of solution) for various compounds.

(i) Procedure;

– A clean 250 cm3 glass or plastic beaker is wrapped with a newspaper leaf.

– About 50 cm3 of tap water is measured into the beaker and the steady temperature noted.

– The beaker is held in a tilted position and 2 cm3 of and sulphuric acid added into the water.

 

(ii) Apparatus.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Caution:

– Concentrated sulphuric acid should always be added to water and never vise versa.

Reason:

 

 

– The mixture is then carefully but vigorously stirred using a thermometer and the highest temperature of the solution recorded.

– The experiment is repeated with other compounds:

  • Ammonium nitrate solid
  • Potassium nitrate solid
  • Sodium hydroxide pellets.
  • Sodium nitrate solid

 

Results and observations.

 

  Concentrated sulphuric acid Ammonium nitrate solid Potassium nitrate solid Sodium hydroxide pellets
Temperature of water(˚c)        
Highest temperature of solution (˚c)        
Change in temperature(˚c)        

 

Calculate the enthalpy change (∆Hsoln) in each experiment done.

 

Additional information;

– Density of concentrated Sulphuric acid =1.84gcm-3

– Density of water =1gcm-3

– No change in volume when any of the solids dissolved in water

– The specific heat capacities of the solutions=4.2kjkg-1k-1

 

 

(a). Sulphuric acid:

– Total volume of solution = (50 +2) =52 cm3

– Temperature change =A rise of 1ºC

– Enthalpy change; ∆Hsoln; =MC∆T

M = 52 cm3 x 1gcm-3 = 52g = 0.52kg.

C = 4.2kjkg-1k-1

∆T = 5K.

Thus enthalpy change = 0.52 x 4.2 x 1

= – 2.184kj

 

Calculating molar enthalpy of solution of concentrated sulphuric acid:

Mass of acid used = density x volume

= 1.84 x 2 = 3.68g;

Formula mass of Sulphuric acid = 98g

3.6g of acid liberated 2.184kj

Thus 98g of acid liberated; 2.198 x 98 =56Kj;

3.68

Because heat was liberated (+ve ∆T), the ∆Hsoln = -56Kjmol-1

 

(b). Sodium nitrate:

Data:

– Volume of water used = 100 cm3

– Mass of sodium nitrate = 2.5g

– Initial temperature of water = 21.0ºC

– Final temperature of water =19.5ºC

– Temperature change; = A fall of 1.5ºC i.e. (19.5 – 21.0) ºC;

– Mass of 100 cm3 of water = 100g = 0.1kg;

 

Enthalpy change i.e. heat absorbed = MC∆T

= 0.1 x 4.2 x 1.5

= 0.63Kj.

Molar heat of dissolution;

– Molar mass of NaNO3 =23 + 14 + 48 = 85g;

– 2.5g of NaNO3 absorbed 0.63Kj;

– 85g of NaNO3 will absorb =?

= 0.63 x 85

2.5

= +21.42Kjmol-1

Since heat is absorbed (-ve heat change), the reaction is endothermic thus ∆Hsoln = +21.42Kjmol-1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note: energy level diagram for the dissolution of sodium nitrate:

 

NaNO3(aq)

 

 

 

 

∆Hsoln

 

 

 

 

 

Reaction path

 

 

  1. Potassium hydroxide;

– Calculate the molar enthalpy of dissolution of potassium hydroxide (based on values obtained).

 

  1. Heat of displacement.

– This refers to the enthalpy change that occurs when one mole of a substance is displaced from a solution of its ions.

 

Experiment: To determine the molar enthalpy change in the reaction between Cu2+ ions and zinc or iron.

 

(i) Procedure:

– A plastic cup or glass beaker is wrapped with a newspaper leaf.

– 25 cm3 of 0.2M copper (II) sulphate solution is transferred into the beaker.

– The steady temperature of the solution is noted.

– 0.5g of zinc powder are carefully transferred into the plastic cup and stirred with a thermometer.

– The highest temperature attained by the solution is recorded.

 

 

Spatula

(ii). Procedure:

 

Thermometer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Observations:

– The blue colors of copper (II) sulphate fades.

– Brown deposits of copper metal are formed in the plastic cup.

 

Explanation:

– Zinc is higher in the electrochemical series than copper;

– Zinc therefore displaces copper ions from its solution.

 

Equations:

Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq)                      ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s)

 

Ionically:

Zn(s) + Cu2+(aq)                   Zn2+ + Cu(s)

 

– During the reaction the blue Cu2+ in the solution are replaced by the colorless Zn2+.

– Consequently the blue colour of the solution fades, as brown deposits of copper metal are formed in the plastic cup.

– Excess solid (zinc powder) was used to ensure complete displacement of Cu2+.

 

Results:

– Initial temperature of copper sulphate solution, T1 = 23˚C

– Highest temperature of the mixture T2 = 33ºC

– Temperature change, ∆T; = T2-T1 =10ºC

– Volume of copper sulphate solution used = 25.0 cm3.

– Mass of zinc powder taken = 0.6g

– Density of the solution = 1gcm-3.

– Specific heat capacity of the solution = 4.2Kjkg-1k-1.

 

Assumptions:

– The volume of the solution remains unchanged after the reaction.

(Cu = 63.5, S = 32, O =16, Zn = 65, Fe =56)

 

Question:

Using the above data, calculate, calculate the;

(i). Heat change for the above reaction.

(ii). The molar heat of displacement of copper (II) ions.

 

Solutions:

(i) Heat change = MC∆T

Mass = density x volume

1gcm-3 x 25cm3 =25g.

∆H = 25kg x 4.2 kjkg-1k-1x 10k

1000

= 1.050Kj;

 

(ii). Molar heat of displacement of Cu2+ displacement.

1000 cm3 = 0.2 moles.

25 cm3 = 0.2 x 25 = 0.005moles

1000

Thus,

0.005moles =1.050Kj

1mole =1 x 1.050 = 1050 = 210Kj;

0.005          5

– Since the final temperature of the mixture is higher than initial temperature; it means the Hproducts is lower than Hreactants.

– The reaction is thus exothermic.

– Thus molar heat of displacement of Cu2+ = -210Kjmol

Thermochemical equation:

 

Zn(s) + Cu2+(aq)                    Cu(s) + Zn2+(aq); ∆H=-210kJmol-1

 

Note:

– The experimental value for the heat liberated in this reaction is lower than the theoretical value of 216Kjmol-1.

Reasons:

– The heat lost to the surroundings and the heat absorbed by the apparatus is not accounted for in the calculations.

– This reaction is typically a Redox reaction.

 

i.e.                               Oxidation

 

 

Cu2+(aq) + Zn(s)                        Cu(s) +  Zn2+(aq)

 

 

Reduction.

 

  1. Heat of precipitation:

– Is the heat change which occurs when one mole of a substance is precipitated from the solution.

 

Experiment: To determine the heat of precipitation of silver chloride.

Procedure:

– 50 cm3 each of 2M AgNO3 and 2M NaCl are left in separate beakers and their constant temperatures noted and recorded.

– The NaCl solution is added to the silver nitrate solutions.

– The beaker is covered with a card board and shaken gently to allow mixing of the solution.

– The highest temperature of the mixture is noted and recorded.

 

 

(ii). Apparatus:                                                                                                                           50cm3 2M NaCl(aq)

 

Thermometer

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Beakers

 

 

 

 

 

   50cm3 2M AgNO3(aq                    50cm3 2M HCl(aq)                                                      50cm3 2M AgNO3(aq)                                                                 Mixture (1ooml)

 

(ii) Data (results)

– Temperature of AgNO3 solution = 21.0ºC

– Temperature of NaCl solution =19.0ºC

– Mean temperature of the solutions = {19+21} = 20.0ºC

2

– Final temperature after mixing = 34.0ºC;

– Temperature change = a rise of 14oC;

– Volume of solution mixed =100 cm3

– Mass of solution mixed =100g (assuming density=1gcm-3)

Questions:

– From the above data, calculate;-

(i) Energy change/ heat change for the reaction

(ii) The molar ∆Hprecipitation for AgCl.

 

Solution:

(i) Heat change, = MC∆T

= 100 x 4.2 x 14

1000

= – 5.88kj

(ii) Equation,

AgNO3(aq) + NaCl(aq)                      AgCl(s) + NaNO3(aq)

Mole ratio                1   :               1       :                       1       :       1

 

Moles of AgNO3;

1000 cm3 = 2 moles

50 cm3 = 2 x 50 = 0.1mole;

 

Since reaction ratio AgNO3: AgCl = 1:1, then moles of AgCl(s) precipitated = 0.1mole

If 0.1mole = 5.88kj

1 mole = (1 x 5.88) = 58.8kJmol

0.1

Reaction being exothermic, ∆Hprecip = -58.8kJmol

 

Thermochemical equation:

 

Ag+(aq) + Cl(aq)             AgCl(s); ∆H= -58.8kjmol-

 

Suitable energy level diagram,

 

 

                        Ag+(aq) + Cl(aq)

 

 

 

∆Hprep = -58.8kJmol

 

                                                                              

AgCl(s)

 

 

 

                        Reaction pathway

 

 

  1. Enthalpy of formation.

– Is the heat change when one mole of a substance is formed from its constituent elements under standard conditions.

Note: this will be dealt with under thermochemical cycles and Hess’s law.

 

 

 

Standard conditions for measuring enthalpy changes.

– Experimental evidence shows that enthalpy changes are affected by physical stats of the reactants, temperature, concentration and pressure.

– Consequently, for comparison purposes certain conditions have been chosen as standard for measurement and determination of enthalpy changes.

– These conditions are:

  • A temperature of 25oC (298K)
  • Pressure of 1 atmosphere (101.325K)

 

Standard enthalpy changes:

– Are values of enthalpy changes that are measured under standard conditions.

– They are denoted by he symbol ∆H0

– A subscript is also added to the symbol to indicate the type of enthalpy change involved.

 

Common standard enthalpy changes.

 

(i). ∆H0f; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of formation.

 

Example:

H2(g) + ½ O2(g)                       H2O(l); ∆H0f (H2O) = -286KJmol

 

(ii). ∆H0c; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of combustion;

 

Example:

CH4(g) + 2O2(g)                            CO2(aq) + 2H2O(l); ∆H0c(CH4)  = -890KJmol

 

(iii). ∆H0neut; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of neutralization.

 

Example:

HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq)                        NaCl(aq) + H2O(l); ∆H0neut = -58KJmol

 

(iv). ∆H0soln; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of solution (dissolution).

 

Example:

NaNO3(s) + H2O(l)                             NaNO3(aq); ∆H0soln (NaNO3) = +21KJmol

 

(v). ∆H0hyd; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of hydration.

 

Example:

Na+(s) + Cl(s)    + H2O(l)                         Na+(aq) + Cl(aq); ∆H0hyd (NaCl) = -774KJmol

 

(vi). ∆H0latt; refers to the molar enthalpy change of lattice formation.

 

Example:

Na+(g) + Cl(g)                        NaCl(aq); ∆H0latt (NaCl) = -774KJmol

 

(vi). ∆H0at; refers to the standard molar enthalpy change of atomization.

 

Example:

Na(s)                       Na(g); ∆H0at (Na) = 108.4 KJmol

 

 

 

Energy level diagrams, thermochemical cycles and Hess’s law.

Hess’s law (the law of constant heat summation);

States that:

– If a reaction can occur by more than one route the overall change in enthalpy is the same,           whichever route is followed.

 

Route 1; ∆H1

Illustration:

 

 

 

Route 2

Route 2       ∆H2                              ∆H3

 

B

 

 

 

 

Therefore,∆H1= ∆H2 + ∆H3

 

Worked examples:

  1. Use the information below to determine the enthalpy of combustion of carbon (formation of carbon (IV) oxide).

C(s) + ½O2(g)                    CO(g); ∆H = -110.45KJ

CO(g) + ½O(g)                 CO2(g); ∆H = -282.0KJ

 

Solution:

 

 

 

Route 2

Route 2       ∆H2                              ∆H3

 

CO(g)

 

 

 

 

 

Therefore; ∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3

= -110-45 + (-282.0) = – 392.45kJ

∆H1 = ∆Hcombustion

= -392.45KJ;

 

Note: – Enthalpy of formation, ∆Hf;

– Is the heat absorbed or evolved when one mole of a substance is formed from its elements under standard conditions.

– This can not be determined experimentally because reactions cannot take place under standard conditions.

– In such cases the enthalpy change is determined theoretically using other measurable enthalpies.

– In the case of enthalpy of formation, the enthalpies of combustion of the compound and that of its constituent elements are linked using an energy level or energy cycle diagram.

– The enthalpy of formation is then calculated using the law of constant heat summation (Hess’s law).

 

 

 

 

 

 

Worked examples:


  1. One mole of butane(C4H10) burns completely in oxygen and liberates 2877kj.

(a) Write an equation for the combustion of butane.

2C4H10(g) + 13O2(g)                          8CO2(g) + 10H2O(l)

 

(b) Draw an energy cycle, hence an energy level diagram for the reactions concerned.

 

Solution:

Equations for combustion:

 

C(s) + O2(g)                       CO2(g); then  8C(s) + 😯2(g)                     8CO2(g) (based on balancing for butane)

H2(g) + ½ O2(g)                H2O(g); then  10H2(g) + 5O2(g)                10H2O(g); (based on balancing for butane)

2C4H10(g) + 13O2(g)                          8CO2(g) + 10H2O(l)

 

Then, energy cycle for the changes,

 

 

 

 

 

      ∆Hc;       ∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                         ∆H3 = Hc        

 

8CO2(g) + 10H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Thus energy level diagram for the reactions.

8C(s) + 10H2O(l)

 

 

 

∆H2 = ∆Hf

 

2C4H10(l)

+½13O2(g)

∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                          ∆H3 = ∆Hc

+13O2(g)

 

8CO2(g) + 10H2O(l)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

(c) If the following heats of combustion are given

∆Hºc (graphite) = -393kjmol

∆Hºc (H2(g)) = -286KJmol

∆Hºc (C4H10) = -2877kjmol

 

Calculate the heat of formation of butane, C4H10 from its elements in their normal states at S.T.P.

 

 

 

Solution:

 

∆H1=∆H2 + ∆H3 where:

∆H2 = ∆Hformation of C4H10;

∆H1 =∆Hºc(graphite) + ∆Hºc(hydrogen);

While ∆H3= ∆Hºc(butane)

 

From the equation,

∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3,

∆H2 = ∆H1 – ∆H3

= {8(-393) +10(-286)]-[2(-2877)]

Dividing all through by 2;

= {4(-393) +5(-286)]-2877]; i.e. in order to work with 1 mole of butane;

 

= (-1572) + (-1430) – (-2877)

= -3002 + 2877

= -125KJmol

 

2 (a). Define standard heat of combustion of a substance.

 

Solution:

– The heat change when one mole of a substance is completely burnt in oxygen under standard conditions;

 

(b). Ethanol, CH3CH2OH; cannot be prepared directly from its elements and so its standard heat of formation must be obtained indirectly.

(i) Write an equation for the formation of ethanol from its elements in their normal physical states at standard conditions of temperature and pressure.

 

Solution:

 

2C(s) + 3H2(g) +  ½O2(g)                       C2H5OH(l)

 

(ii). Draw an energy level diagram linking the heat of formation with its heat of combustion and the heats of combustion of its constituent elements.

 

Solution:

Equations

(i). C2H5OH(l) + 3O2(g)                         2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)

Balancing based on equation for combustion of ethanol

(ii). 2C(s) + 2O2(g)                                2CO2(g)

(iii). 3H2O(g) + 1½O2(g)                          3H2O(l)

 

Then, energy cycle for the changes,

 

 

 

 

+3O2(g)

      ∆Hc;       ∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                         ∆H3 = Hc        

+3O2(g)

2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)

 

 

 

Thus energy level diagram for the reactions.

2C(s) + 3H2(l) + ½ O2(g)

 

 

 

∆H2 = ∆Hf (ethanol)

 

C2H5OH(l)

+3O2(g)

∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                          ∆H3 = ∆Hc (ethanol)

+3O2(g)

 

2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

(iii). If the following heats of combustion are given:

∆Hc(graphite) =-393kJmol

∆Hc(hydrogen) =-286kJmol

∆Hc(ethanol) = -1368kJmol

 

Calculate the heat of formation of ethanol, ∆H0f (ethanol)

 

Solution:

∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3

∆H2 = ∆H1 – ∆H3

= [2(-393 + 3(-286)]-[-1368]

= [(-786) + (-856)] – [-1368]

= -164 + 1368

= – 276kJmol

 

  1. Given the standard enthalpies of combustion as

C(s) + O2(g)                CO2(g); ∆H1 = -394kJmol;

H2(g) + ½O2(g)                    H2O(l); ∆H2 = -286kJmol

C2H2(g) +  1½O2(g)                    2CO2(g) + H2O(l); ∆H = -1300kJmol.

 

Find the standard enthalpy of formation of ethyne, C2H2(g).

 

Solution:

– Considering the Hc(ethyne), 2 moles of CO2 and 1 mole of H2O(l) are produced;

– Rebalancing the equations for Hc(carbon) and Hc(hydrogen) likewise:

2C(s) + O2(g)                2CO2(g);

H2(g) + ½O2(g)                    H2O(l);

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Then, energy cycle for the changes,

 

 

 

 

+2½O2(g)

      ∆Hc;       ∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                         ∆H3 = Hc (ethyne)        

+2½O2(g)

     2CO2(g) +  H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

Thus energy level diagram for the reactions.

 

2C(s) + H2(l)

 

 

 

∆H2 = ∆Hf (ethanol)

 

C2H2(l)

+2½O2(g)

∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3                          ∆H3 = ∆Hc (ethanol)

+2½O2(g)

 

2CO2(g) + H2O(l)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

Thus ∆H1 = ∆H2 + ∆H3

∆H2 = ∆H1 – ∆H3

= [2(-394) + (-286)]-[-1300]

= (-788-286) + 1300

= -1074 + 1300

= +226kJmol

 

 

Since ∆Hf is +ve, ethyne is described as an endothermic compound.

 

Note:

– In the determination of ∆Hf of ethyne, Hess law is used because attempts to make ethyne from carbon and hydrogen {2C(s) + H2(g)                C2H2(g) }will result to the formation of a mixture of hydrocarbons.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Heat of formation and bond energies

– Chemical reactions involve:

  • Bond breaking; this requires energy.
  • Bond formation; releases energy.

 

Example:

– Formation of methane from carbon and hydrogen.

C(s) + 2H2(g)                CH4(g); ∆H = -74.9kJmol

 

Energy level diagonal for the formation of CH4.

 

 

C(s) + 4H(g)

 

 

II   ∆Hat;

 

C(s) + 2H2(g)

 

 

 

I   ∆Hat = +715KJmol–                    III   ∆H = -4(C-H); bond energy

C(s) + 2H2(g)

 

 

∆HIV = I + II + III

Final enthalpy               = -74.9Kj

CH4(g)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

Energy changes involved are:

  • ∆HI; Enthalpy of atomization – this is the energy absorbed when a substance decomposes to form one mole of gaseous atoms.
  • ∆HII; enthalpy of atomization of H2; i.e. dissociation of hydrogen molecules to free hydrogen atoms.
  • ∆HIII; enthalpy of formation of four C – H bonds, during which heat is liberated;

 

Therefore, enthalpy of reaction ∆HR = ∆HIV

∆HR = ∆H1+ ∆HII + ∆HIII

= +715 + 4(218) + -4(C-H)

-74.9 =+715 + 872 +-4 (bond energy)

4 (C-H) =1587 + 74.9

=1661.9

C –H =1661.9 = 415.4kjmol-

4

– This is the amount of energy released when one C-H bond is formed;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Worked examples.

 

  1. Use the bond energies given below to calculate the heat of reaction for;-

H2(g) + Cl2(g)                     2HCl(g)

 

Bond Bond energy
H-H 435kjmol
Cl-Cl 243kjmol
H-Cl 431kjmol

 

Solution:

 

Bond breaking,

Total energy absorbed = +678 KJ

H2(g) = H-H                  2H(g); ∆H = +435Kj;

Cl2(g) = Cl-Cl                2Cl(g); ∆H= +243Kj

 

Total energy released = -862 KJ

Bond formation,

2H(g) + 2Cl(g)                  2(H-Cl)(g); ∆H=2(-431) = -862Kj;

 

Heat of reaction:

Energy absorbed in bond breakage + energy released in bond formation.

= [+435 + 243] + [-862]

= [+678-862] kJ

= -184kj

Thus, H – H + Cl – Cl                 2[H – Cl]; ∆H=-184Kj

 

Note: energy level diagram.

 

 

2H(g) + 2Cl(g)

 

 

∆HII  ∆Hat (chlorine)

+243KJ

2H(g) + Cl2(g)

 

 

 

∆HI   ∆Hat = +435KJmol–                          ∆HIII = -2 (H-Cl); bond energy

H2(g) + Cl2(g)

 

 

∆HIV = I + II + III

Final enthalpy               = -74.9Kj

2HCl(g)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Study the information given in the table below and answer the questions that follow;-

        

Bond Bond energy(kJmol)
C – H 414
Cl – Cl 244
C – Cl 326
H – Cl 431

(a). Calculate the enthalpy change for the reaction

    CH4(g) + Cl2(g)                      CH3Cl(g) + HCl(g)

 

Solution:

 

Bond breaking

(i). 4(C-H)                  4CH(g); ∆H =4(+414) = +1656kj;

(ii). Cl – Cl                2Cl(g); ∆H1 = +244kj

 

Bond formation

(i). 3(CH)           3(C-H); ∆H= 3(-414) =-1242kj

(ii). CCl              (C-Cl); ∆H= -326kj

(iii). HCl             (H-Cl); ∆H= -431kj

 

Heat change = ∆Hbond breakage + ∆Hbond formation

= [(+1656) + (+244)] + [(-1242) + (-326) + (-431)]

= -1900 + (-1999)

∆H = -99kJ

 

(b). Draw an energy level diagram for the reaction

 

 

 

C4H(g) + 2Cl(g)

 

 

∆HII  ∆Hat (chlorine)

+244KJ

C4H(g) + Cl2(g)

 

 

 

∆HI   ∆Hat = +1656Kj                                 ∆HIII = -2 (H-Cl); bond energy

CH4(g) + Cl2(g)                                                = -99Kj;

 

 

∆HIV = I + II + III

Final enthalpy             

CH3Cl(g) + HCl(g)

 

 

Reaction pathway (progress)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Study the information given in the table below and answer the questions that follow.

 

Bond Bond energy
C – C 346
C = C 610
  C – Br 280
  Br – Br 193
C – H 413

 

(i) Calculate the enthalpy change for the reaction.

 CH2=CH2 + Br2                       CH2-CH2

                                                     

                                                  Br     Br

Solution:

 

Bond breaking,

4(C-H)                4CH(g); ∆H = 4 (+413) = +1652kj

Br2                      2Br       ∆H = +193kj

C = C                       C = C; ∆H= + 610kj;

 

Bond formation:

4(C-H),                 4CH; = 4(-413) = -1662kj

2(C-Br),                2CBr; = 2(-280) = -560kj

(C-C )                   2C; = -346kj

 

Heat change:

∆H bond breakage + ∆H bond formation

= [+1652 + 193 + 610] + [-1652 + -560 + -346kJ]

= [+2455] + (-2558)

∆H change = -103kJ;

 

Molar heat of fusion, ∆Hf;

– Is the amount of heat required to change one mole of a solid into a liquid at its melting point.

– It is a measure of intermolecular forces between solid particles since it is the heat energy used to separate the solid particles.

 

Molar heat of vaporization, ∆Hvap;

– Is the amount of heat required to change one mole of liquid into vapor at its boiling point.

– It is a measure of the intermolecular forces between the liquid particles since it is the heat energy used to separate liquid particles.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Relationship between heats of fusion and vaporization to structure.

They are;-

(a). Higher for substances with giant structures e.g.

  • Ionic solids
  • Metals
  • Giant covalent structures, e.g. diamond, graphite and silicon (IV) oxide

(b). Lower in simple molecular structures whose particles are held together by weak intermolecular forces.

Examples:

  • Iodine crystals
  • Sulphur

 

Examples:

 

  NaCl C(graphite) Cu H2O I(s) S
Structure type Giant ionic Giant atomic Giant Metallic Molecular Molecular Molecular
∆Hfusion kjmol 28 13 6 8
∆Hvap kjmol 171 717 305 41 21 10

 

 

UNIT 4: RATES OF REACTION AND REVERSIBLE REACTIONS

UNIT OUTLINE:

  1. Reactions rates:

Ø  Measurements of reaction rates

  • Rate of product yield pre unit time
  • Rate of disappearance of reactants

Ø  Apparatus for measuring reaction rates

  • Collision theory and activation energy
  • Factors affecting reaction rates

§  Temperature

  • Particles size (surface area)
  • Catalysts
  • Pressure

 

  1. Reversible reactants
  • Meaning
  • Chemical equilibrium

Ø  Factors affecting position of equilibrium

§  Temperature

  • Pressure
  • Concentration (of reactants or products)
  • Catalysts
  • Le’Chartaliers principle.

 

Reaction rate:

– The rate of a chemical reaction is taken as the rate at which products are formed or the rate at which reactants disappear.

 

Measurements of reaction rates

Reaction rates are measured in terms of

  • How much product appears in a given time.
  • How much reactant disappears in a given time

– Rates curves are then plotted

– These are plots of concentration or properties, which are functions of concentration against time

 

Graph: concentration of products against time.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time

 

Graph: concentration of reactants against time.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Apparatus used to determine rates of reaction

Examples:

– Reaction between dilute HCl and marble chips.

– This can be by:

(a). Measuring the decrease in mass with time

Apparatus:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Graph:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time

 

(b). Measuring the volume of the gas produced with time and then plotting a graph.

Apparatus:

Graph:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time

Similar experiments maybe done using zinc granules and zinc powder with an acid

 

Worked example:

Marble chips and dilute hydrochloric acid were mixed. The mass of the reaction mixture was measured and recorded with time. The results are shown in the table below.

 

Time (sec) 0 30 60 90 12 150 180 21 240 270 300
Mass of mixture (g) 42.0 41.5 41.0 40.7 40.4 4.02 40.1 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
Loss in mass (g)                      

 

(a). Complete the table.                                                                                                                (5 marks)

 

(b). Draw a graph of loss of mass against time.                                                                          (3 marks)

 

(c). On the same axes sketch the curves that would be obtained if:

(i). the acid was more concentrated.                                                                                              (1mark)

 

(ii). larger marble chips were used.                                                                                               (1mark)

 

Collision theory and activation energy.

The collision theory of reacting particles postulates that:

Ø  Reacting particles must collide before a chemical reaction occurs

  • Not all collisions are effective/ result in chemical reaction
  • Only those particles with sufficient energy result in effective collisions i.e. energy equal to or greater than the activation energy.
  • Any factor, which increases the rate of a chemical reaction, does so by increasing the number of effective collisions;

 

Activation energy (EA):

– Is the minimum amount of energy required by reacting particles to cause a successful collision to form products;

– It refers to the energy an energy barrier that must be overcome by the reactants to be converted to products;

– This energy barrier determines the magnitude of the activation energy of the reactants;

 

Factors determining the value of activation energy:

– Strength of the bonds in the particles of the reactants;

– Whether the reaction is exothermic or exothermic;

– Presence of catalysts;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Graph: activation energy:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Factors affecting the rate of reaction

– Factors that increase the rate of a reaction does so by:

  • Increasing number of effective collisions;
  • Lowering the activation energy; since a reaction with high activation energy is slow at ordinary conditions;

 

These factors are:

  • Concentration of reactants
  • Temperature
  • Surface area (size of the particles
  • Catalyst Light
  • Pressure

 

(a).  Concentration of reactants.

– Increase in concentration of one of the reactants increases the rate of the reaction;

Reason:

– Higher concentration results in a greater probability of collision hence a higher rate of reaction

 

Example: reaction between Mg s) and 2M and 4M hydrochloric acid.

 

Graphical representation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time (seconds)

– The maximum volume of a gas collected in both experiments is the same because the number of moles of HCl is the same

– Curve for 4M HCl is steeper indicating a faster rate because the acid is more concentration

– The 4M HCl contains more H+ ions per unit volume than 2M HCl. This reaction takes a shorter time to go to completion

– The start of the flat part of the curve indicates the end of the reaction;

 

Diagram:

Magnesium and hydrochloric acid mixture

Note: Rate of reaction can also be verified by measuring the rate of disappearance of reactants per unit time.

– Reactants with 4M HCl will disappear faster;

– Curve for a faster reaction rate is always to the left of the reference curve;

 

Worked example:

In an experiment to determine the effect of concentration on the rate of a reaction, various concentrations of sodium thiosulphate were reacted with equal volume of hydrochloric acid and the time taken for the precipitate to obscure a cross on paper put under the reaction beaker was determined.

The results are shown in the table below.

 

Volume of S2O32- (cm3) Volume of H2O, cm3 Volume of HCl, cm3 Time for cross to disappear, (s)
50 0 10 20
40 10 10 25
30 20 10 34
20 30 10 52
10 40 10 70

 

(a). Plot a graph of time (vertical axis) against volume of aqueous sodium thiosulphate.         (3marks)

 

(b). From the graph estimate the time for the cross to disappear when 10 cm3 of hydrochloric acid is added to a mixture of 35cm3 of aqueous thiosulphate and 15cm3 of water.                                (2 marks)

 

(c). What is the effect on the rate of the reaction of adding more water to the aqueous sodium thiosulphate? Explain your answer.                                                                                            (2 marks)

 

(d). On the same graph, plot the curves you would obtain if the experiment were repeated at:

(i). at 45oC;                                                                                                                                     (1mark)

 

(ii). using 10 cm3 of less concentrated hydrochloric acid.                                                            (1mark)

 

 

(b). Effect of temperature.

– An increase in temperature increases the rate of a chemical reaction.

Reasons:

– Increase in temperature increases the kinetic energy of the reacting particles;

– The particles therefore move faster leading to more frequent and more effective collisions.

– The rate of reaction therefore increases;

 

Example: reaction between sodium thiosulphate and dilute HCl(aq)

Stoichiometric equation:

Na2S2O3(aq)  +  2HCl(aq)                      2NaCl(aq)  +  H2O(l)  +  S(s)  +  SO2(g)

 

Ionic equation:

S2O32- (aq)  +   2H+(aq)                    S(s)   +   SO2(g)   +  H2O(l);

 

– The time taken to precipitate the same amount of sulphur by the same volume of acid at different temperatures is measured.

– Concentration of thiosulphate solution and the acid are kept constant.

 

Graph: relationship between time and temperature in a reaction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Temperature (oC)

 

– The rate is proportionate to 1/ t;

  • Hence;

– The higher the temperature the shorter the time for completion of the reaction and the higher the rate of the reaction;

  • Alternatively:

You can plot a graph of 1/ t against temperature;

 

Graphically:

Temperature (oC)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c). Effect of particle size (surface area).

– A decrease in particle size (surface area) increases the rate of a chemical reaction; and an increase in particle size decreases the rate of a chemical reaction.

Reason:

– A smaller particle size means a larger total surface area and this offers a large surface on which the reacting particles can collide;

– This means more collisions, hence more chances of effective collisions leading to a higher rate of reaction;

 

Example: Reaction between dilute HCl and marble chips

The larger CaCO3 granules undergo a slower rate of reaction than the finely powdered CaCO3

 

Equation:

CaCO3  (S)     +  2H+ aq)                  Ca2+(aq)  +   CO2(g)   +   H2O(l)

 

Graph 1: volume of gas produced against time (for granules and powder)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time (seconds)

 

Graph 2: loss in mass of calcium carbonate against time

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time (seconds)

 

 

 

 

 

Worked example:
1. exactly 3.0g of powdered carbonate of metal M of formula MCO3 were mixed with excess dilute hydrochloric acid. The mass of the reaction vessel and its contents were recorded at various times. From these readings, the total loss in mass of the reaction vessel and its contents was calculated and recorded as shown in the table below. The experiment was carried out at room temperature.

 

Time (secs) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210
Total loss in mass (g) 0 0.08 0.37 0.90 1.19 1.28 1.32 1.32
                 

 

(a) (i). Plot a graph of total loss in mass against time.                                                                 (1mark)

 

(ii). Determine the total loss in mass after 100seconds.                                                             (2 marks)

 

(b) (i). Write an equation for the reaction that occurs.                                                                 (1mark)

 

(ii). calculate the number of moles of:

  • Carbon (IV) oxide gas produced.       (2 marks)

 

  • MCO3       (2 marks)

 

(iii). Calculate the relative atomic mass of metal M.                                                                             (3 marks)

 

(c). On the same axis sketch a curve that you are likely to obtain if the experiment was repeated:

(i)9. at 50oC. Explain.                                                                                                                  (2 marks)

 

(ii). Using MCO3 granules instead of the powder. Explain.                                                       (2 marks)

 

(d). Effect of catalysts

– Catalysts are substances which alter the rate of a chemical reaction without being consumed, e.g. finely divided iron in the harber process;

– They alter the rate of a chemical reaction but remain unchanged at the end of the reaction;

– They can therefore be reused at the end of the reaction;

 

Modes of action of catalysts:

  • Provision of a surface over which particles can react.

Note: Due to this solid catalysts are more effective when used in powder form;

  • Formation of short-lived intermediate compounds with products which then break up to give the products and the catalyst;
  • By adsorption;

 

Note: – Generally, a catalyst increases the rate of a reaction by providing a different pathway of lower activation energy.

– This means more collisions can overcome this energy barrier and result in a reaction.

– It lowers the activation energy of the reaction;

– Catalysts are also reaction-specific;

 

 

 

Some common catalysts:

 

Catalyst Reaction catalyzed.
Manganese (IV) oxide Dissociation of hydrogen peroxide to give oxygen gas and water;
Vanadium (V) oxide or platinum Contact process for the conversion of sulphur (IV) oxide to sulphur (VI) oxide;
Platinum Manufacture of nitric acid in the Oswald’s process;
Finely divided iron or vanadium Haber process in the manufacture of ammonia;
Nickel Hydrogenation of oils to make fats;

Hydrogenation of unsaturated hydrocarbons

Copper (II) oxide Oxidation  of ethanol to produce ethanal;
Titanium (IV) chloride Ziegler method of polymerizing alkenes

 

Graph: reaction rates with and without a catalyst.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time (seconds)

 

Worked example:

Hydrogen peroxide decomposes slowly to water and oxygen under normal conditions.

When a little manganese (IV) oxide is added to the solution the rate of decomposition is enhanced. The results of an experiment on the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in presence of manganese (IV) oxide are shown below. Study the results and answer the questions that follow.

 

Volume of oxygen (cm3) 0 19 27 33 36 38 39 40 40
Time (seconds) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240

 

(a). Plot a graph of volume of oxygen produced (vertical axis) against time.                           (3 marks)

 

(b). What is the rate of reaction:

(i). during the first 30 seconds.                                                                                                    (2 marks)

 

(ii). between 30 seconds and 60 seconds.                                                                                    (2 marks)

 

(c). Explain why: (i). the slope of the curve is steeper at the start of the reaction.                    (2 marks)

 

(ii). the curve goes flat at the end of the reaction.                                                     (2 marks)

(d) (i). Suggest the role of manganese (IV) oxide I the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide.     (1mark)

 

(ii). Comment on change in mass of manganese (IV) oxide at the end of the reaction. Explain.(2 marks)

 

(e). Effect of light on the rate of reaction

-The effect of heating and illuminating substances is the same;

– In both cases the constituent particles absorb radiant energy leading to an increase in the number of particles with activation energy resulting in increased rate of reaction;

– Light energizes the particles involved in a reaction;

– This increases the chances of effective collisions per unit time thus increasing the rate of reaction.

– Light of higher frequencies give higher reaction rates e.g. UV Light;

– Examples of reactions affected by light are those involving halogens:

 

Examples of reactions affected by light.

  • Reaction between Cl2(g) and H2(g) does not take place in the dark but is explosive in bright light;

Cl2(g)  +  H2(g)    bright light            2HCl (g)

 

  • For the reaction between methane and bromine; decolourisation of bromine only occurs in presence of light;

CH4(g)  +   Br2(l)           Light        CH3Br(g)  +  HBr(g)

 

Experiment: Effect of light on the decomposition of silver bromide.

  • Procedure:

– About 20cm3 of 0.1M potassium bromide is put in a glass beaker.

– 5cm3 of 0.05M silver nitrate solution is added.

– The resulting pale yellow precipitate is divided into three portions in 3 separate test tubes.

– One of the test tubes in immediately placed in a dark cupboard; the second on a bench and the third is placed in a direct source of light e.g. sunlight.

 

– Formation of a pale yellow precipitate of silver bromide when silver nitrate reacts with potassium bromide.

  • Equation:

KBr (aq) +  AgNO3(aq)                          AgBr(s)   +    KNO3(aq)

Pale yellow

  • Test tube in light: precipitate changes colour from pale yellow to grey.
  • Test tube on the bench: slight change in colour from pale yellow to slight grey.
  • Test tube in dark cupboard: no observable (noticeable) colour change in precipitate.

 

Explanation:

– Light decomposes silver bromide to metallic silver (hence the grey colour) and bromine.

 

Equation:

Light

2AgBr(aq)                       2Ag(s)  +   Br2(g)

 grey

– No observable change in test tube placed in darkness due to lack of light;

– The degree of decomposition and hence change depends on the light intensity falling on the test tubes;

– The rate of decomposition of silver bromide increases with increase in light intensity.

 

 

 

Conclusion:

– Light affects the rate of some chemical reactions by energizing the particles involved in a reaction hence increasing the chances of effective collisions per unit time thus increasing the rate of reaction.

 

Application of effect of light on reaction rate.

– Processing of black and white photographic films is done in dark to prevent the decomposition of the silver bromide that is usually used to coat photographic plates;

 

Further examples of reactions affected by light:

(i). Cl2(g) + H2(g)           UV Light             2HCl(g)

 

CH4(g) + Br2(g)       UV Light     CH3Br(g) + HBr(g)

 

(iii). 6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l)             Light       C6H12O6(aq) + 6O2(g)

 

(f). Pressure

– Increase in pressure increases the rate of reaction involving the formation of small volume of product because of increase in concentration and slight increase in temperature

– In a given volume the higher the number of molecules of a given gas in a container, the greater the pressure;

– Increase in pressure causes the same effect as increase in concentration;

– Thus the rate of reactions involving gases can be increased by increasing the pressure of the gases

 

Note:

From gas laws, decreases in volume results in increase in pressure. Thus, reactions accompanied by decrease in volume move faster to completion.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Reversible reactions

– Are reactions which can be made to go to either direction (forward or backward) by changing conditions such as temperatures, pressure etc.

– In such cases none of the reactants is completely used up and so the reaction does not go into completion.

 

Note:

Reversible reactions are of two types:

  • Reversible physical changes e.g. heating ice, iodine etc.
  • Reversible chemical changes e.g. heating hydrated copper (II) sulphate, Haber process, decomposition of limestone, heating blue cobalt chloride, ammonium chloride etc.

 

Examples:

– Reaction of nitrogen and hydrogen to give ammonia in the Haber process.

N2(g)  +  3H2(g)                     2NH3 (g)

 

– The reversible sign means the reaction can reach a state of equilibrium if left undisturbed.

 

Explanations of reversible reactions:

Consider the curves below:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time

 

Point (a): forward reaction.

– At the start of the reaction, the rate of the forward reaction is faster.

– The concentration of the reactants is greatest at the beginning.

– The rate of forward reaction and the concentration of reactants decreases with time as the reaction proceeds.

 

Point (b): backward reaction.

– At zero time the rate of the backward reaction is zero.

– The concentration of the products is lowest at this time.

– The rate of the backward reaction and concentration of products increases as the forward reaction proceeds.

 

Point (c): equilibrium.

– It comes to a time (t) when the rate of forward reaction is equal to the rate of backward reaction.

– This balance is called equilibrium.

 

 

 

Equilibrium:

– Is the state at which the rate of forward reaction is equal to the rate of backward reaction.

 

Types of equilibrium:

Static equilibrium:

– refers to a situation when two opposing forces balance each other and whatever was happening before comes to a standstill.

 

Dynamic equilibrium:

– Refers to a situation when two opposing processes, the forward and reverse, continue taking place but at the same rate.

– The equilibrium is said to be dynamic and this state of balance can be reached from either direction.

 

Examples:

3Fe (s)  + 4H2O (g)                    Fe3O4 (s)  + 4H2 (g)

– The Equilibrium state here is established when:

  • Either steam is passed over heated iron in a closed container; or
  • When hydrogen is passed over heated iron oxide;

 

Characteristics of equilibrium systems.

(i) The concentrations of reactants and products do not change after the equilibrium has been reached unless the system is disturbed.

 

Note:

– Observable properties of reactants or products such as colour, mass, volume, PH, temperature etc can be used to detect whether a system is in equilibrium or not.

Examples:

 

Property How it can be used to detect attainment of equilibrium
Colour The colour intensity remains constant at equilibrium
Volume. Total volume of solution remains constant at equilibrium;
Precipitate The height of the precipitate remains constant;

 

(ii). The equilibrium can be reached from either direction.

(iii). All the reactants and products are present in the system.

 

 

 

Factors affecting the position of equilibrium

– Such factors act as a strain on the state of equilibrium and the system reacts in a way to oppose the change.

– The factors are:

  • Temperature
  • Pressure
  • Concentration

 

(a). Temperature

  • Endothermic reactions

– Increase in temperature favours the endothermic reactions;

 

Example:

N2O4 (g)                        2NO2 (g) ; ∆H = + ve

Pale yellow                                dark brown

 

– Increase in temperature shifts the equilibrium to the right; since the reaction is endothermic and hence more yield of nitrogen (IV) oxide; hence dark brown fumes will be observed;

– Decrease in temperature shifts the equilibrium to the left;  since the reaction is endothermic favoured by low temperatures; hence formation of N2O4; and the pale yellow colour is observed;

  • Exothermic reactions:

– Decrease in temperature favours exothermic reactions.

 

Example:

2 SO2(g)   +    O2(g)                    2SO3(g); ∆H = -ve

 

Thus:

– Decrease in temperature causes more yield of sulphur (VI) oxide; because the equilibrium shifts to the right; since the reaction is exothermic favoured by low temperatures;

– Increase in temperature causes SO3 to decompose decreasing its yields. Increase in temperature shifts the equilibrium to the left; because the reaction is exothermic which is favoured by low temperatures;

 

(b). Pressure

-Increase in pressure favours the side with fewer numbers of gaseous molecules since this is the side where pressure is reduced (low).

 

Example:

  • N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) 2NH3 (g)

 

– Increase in pressure favours the production of ammonia; by shifting the equilibrium position to the right; because the volume of gaseous reactants is higher than the volume of gaseous products.

– Decrease in pressure leads to the production of less ammonia (ammonia decomposes); by shifting the equilibrium position to the left; because the volume of gaseous reactants is higher than the volume of gaseous products.

 

 

 

  • N2O4 (g) 2NO2 (g)

Pale yellow                                                        dark brown

 

Increase in pressure:

– Shifts the equilibrium to the left; leading to formation of more N2O4 hence mixture turns pale yellow; because the volume of gaseous products (NO2) is higher than the volume of gaseous reactants (N2O4).

Decrease in pressure:

– Shifts the equilibrium position to the right; leading to formation of more NO2 hence colour turns dark brown; because the volume of gaseous reactants  (N2O4) is lower than the volume of gaseous products (NO2);

 

Note: –

  • Change in pressure has no effect on the equilibrium mixture where gaseous molecules on the two sides are equal

Example:

N2 (g)  +  O2 (g)                            2NO(g)

 

– Increase or decrease in pressure has no effect on position of equilibrium; because the volume of gaseous reactants is equal to volume of gaseous products;

 

Note:

– Generally reactions involving only solids and, or liquids are not affected by pressure change because they are not compressible;

 

Summary: effects of pressure on equilibrium:

 

Reaction Effects of pressure change on position of equilibrium
Increase Decrease
N2O4(g)                    2NO2(g) Equilibrium shifts to the left; more N2O4 is formed; Equilibrium shifts to the right; more NO2 is formed;
N2(g) + 3H2(g)                     2NH3(g) – More NH3 is formed; equilibrium shifts to the right; since volume of gaseous reactants is higher than volume of gaseous products – More N2 and H2 are formed; equilibrium shifts to the left; since volume of gaseous reactants is higher than volume of gaseous products
2SO2(g) + O2(g)                   2SO3(g) – More SO3 is formed; equilibrium shifts to the right (forward reaction is favoured); since volume of gaseous reactants is higher than volume of gaseous products – Less SO3 is formed (more SO2 and O2 are formed); equilibrium shifts to the left (backward reaction is favoured); since volume of gaseous reactants is higher than volume of gaseous products
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g)               4NO(g) + 6H2O(g) – More NH3 and O2 is formed; equilibrium shifts to the left; since volume of gaseous reactants is lower than volume of gaseous products – Less NH3 and O2 is formed (more NO and H2O are formed); equilibrium shifts to the right; since volume of gaseous reactants is lower than volume of gaseous products
H2(g) + Cl2(g)                     2HCl(g) – No effect on the equilibrium; because volume of gaseous reactants and volume of gaseous products is the same; – No effect on the equilibrium; because volume of gaseous reactants and volume of gaseous products is the same;

 

 

 

(c). Concentration

– Consider the equilibrium in bromine water system:

 

Br2(aq)  +  H2O(l)                              OBr(aq)+ Br(aq) + 2H+(aq)

Yellow orange                                                                       Colourless

 

  • Addition of sodium hydroxide to the equilibrium:

– When NaOH(aq) is added to the equilibrium, the concentration of H+  decrease and the rate of forward reaction are favoured (equilibrium shifts to the right); the reaction of bromine with water increases and there is loss of colour of bromine water.

 

Explanation:

– Addition of sodium hydroxide provides hydroxyl ions into the equilibrium.

– The hydroxyl ions react with the hydrogen ions (on the right of equilibrium) to form water.

 

Equation:

OH(aq) + H+(aq)                        H2O(l)

 

– This process removes hydrogen ions from the equilibrium mixture.

– This shifts the equilibrium to the right hence formation of more products;

– This leads to a change in colour from yellow orange to colourless;

 

  • Addition of hydrochloric acid:

– Addition of HCl(aq) is added concentration of H+ increases; more bromine is formed and the orange-yellow colour of bromine water becomes more intense;

 

Explanation:

– Addition of hydrochloric acid introduces more hydrogen ions into the equilibrium;

– The hydrogen ions react with the colourless bromide and hypobromite ions to form yellow-orange aqueous bromine;

– This shifts the equilibrium to the left hence the increase in the intensity of the yellow-orange colour of bromine water;

 

Further examples:

 

(i). Given the equilibrium:

 

SO2(g) +  O2(g)                  2SO3(g)

 

  • Removal of sulphur (VI) oxide:

– Reducing the concentration of SO3 by removing it causes more sulphur (IV) oxide to be converted to sulphur (IV) oxide.

 

  • Addition of either oxygen or sulphur (IV) oxide.

– Addition of either sulphur (IV) oxide or oxygen to the equilibrium shifts the equilibrium to the right; due to increase of concentration of products hence more yield of sulphur (VI oxide;

 

  • Addition of pyrogallic acid:

– Addition of pyrogallic acid into the equilibrium shifts the equilibrium to the left; since pyrogallic acid dissolves oxygen gas reducing concentration of reactants on the left hence less yield of sulphur (VI) oxide;

(ii). Given the equilibrium:

 

2CrO42-(aq) + 2H+(aq)                          2Cr2O72-(aq) + H2O(l)

Yellow                                                                                 Orange

 

  • Addition of sodium hydroxide to the equilibrium:

– When NaOH(aq) is added to the equilibrium, the concentration of H+  decrease and the rate of backward reaction are favoured (equilibrium shifts to the left); the reaction of dichromate ions with water to form chromate ions and hydrogen ions increases and there is change in colour to yellow.

 

Explanation:

– Addition of sodium hydroxide provides hydroxyl ions into the equilibrium.

– The hydroxyl ions react with the hydrogen ions (on the left of equilibrium) to form water.

 

Equation:

OH(aq) + H+(aq)                        H2O(l)

 

– This process removes hydrogen ions from the equilibrium mixture.

– This shifts the equilibrium to the left hence formation of more reactants (chromate and hydrogen ions);

– This leads to a change in colour from orange to yellow;

  • Addition of hydrochloric acid:

– Addition of HCl(aq) is added concentration of H+ increases; more dichromate solution is formed and the orange colour of dichromate ions become more intense;

 

Explanation:

– Addition of hydrochloric acid introduces more hydrogen ions into the equilibrium;

– The hydrogen ions react with the yellow chromate solution to form orange dichromate solution (and water);

– This shifts the equilibrium to the right hence the increase in the intensity of the orange colour of dichromate solution;

 

Generally:

– A change in concentration disturbs the already established equilibrium by making the reaction rate in one direction faster

– The reaction then proceeds predominantly in that direction until equilibrium is re established

 

(d). Effect of catalyst

– Presence of a catalyst has no effect on the position of the equilibrium but alters the rate at which the equilibrium is attained.

– Catalysts usually allow the equilibrium to be reached in a shorter period of time by increasing the rates of the reactions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Le Chatelier’s Principle

– States that:

 

 

When stress is applied to a system in equilibrium, the system reacts so as to oppose the stress.

 

 

– This implies that when a change in condition is applied to a system in equilibrium, the system moves so as to oppose the change.

Note:

– The effect of different factors on equilibrium was first investigated in 1888 by a French Chemist; Henri Louis Le Chatelier.

– All explanations so far described are based on Le Chatelier’s principle.

 

Industrial applications of chemical equilibrium.

– The ability to change the position of an equilibrium by varying the conditions has been important in industrial processes as industrialists aim at obtaining maximum products at minimum cost and shortest time possible.

– Conditions required to obtain greatest yield of products at minimum costs and shortest time possible are called optimum conditions.

– Such optimum conditions are obtained by continuous removal of products hence reduction in its concentration or varying external factors like temperature and pressure.

 

Summary:

Optimum conditions for common industrial processes.

 

Condition Optimum condition for:
Ø  Haber process

N2(g) + 3H2(g)          2NH3(g); ∆H=- 92KJMol-

Ø  The contact process

2SO3(g) + O2(g)           2SO3(g); ∆H = -197Kjmol-

Temperature – The reaction is exothermic hence favoured by low temperatures; which shift the equilibrium to the right hence more yield of ammonia gas;

– However rate at which the NH3(g) will be produced would be too slow and thus uneconomical; an optimum temperature of about 450oC is thus normally used;

– Forward reaction is exothermic thus increase in temperature favours backward reaction; shifts the equilibrium to the left hence less yield of SO2(g);

– Low temperature will favour forward reaction thus shifts the equilibrium to the right; hence more production of SO2(g); However rate of yield will be too slow and hence optimum temperature for maximum yield are set at about 450oC;

Pressure Increase in pressure favours the forward reaction; shifting the equilibrium to the right hence more yield of ammonia; because the volume of gaseous reactants is higher than the volume of gaseous products;

– However the cost of producing and maintaining high pressures in a system is very high;

– Thus for maximum yield the optimum pressure is 200 atmospheres;

– An increase in pressure will shift the equilibrium to the left leading to  low yield of sulphur (IV) oxide; since the volume of gaseous reactants is lower than the volume of gaseous products;

– Thus the optimum pressure used is atmospheric pressure, which gives a percentage conversion of SO2(g) to SO3(g) of about 96%.

Concentration – Removal of ammonia gas shifts the equilibrium to the right hence more yield of ammonia; since this removal lowers concentration of NH3(g)

– thus for maximum yield ammonia is removed as soon as it is produced; so that more H2(g) and N2(g) can continue reacting;

– Removal of sulphur (VI) oxide gas shifts the equilibrium to the right hence more yield of SO3(g); since this removal lowers its concentration;

– thus for maximum yield SO3(g) is removed as soon as it is produced; so that more SO2(g) and O2(g) can continue reacting;

Catalyst – Main catalyst used is finely divided iron; platinum is a better catalyst but is very expensive and easily poisoned by impurities, hence may increase cost of production; – A catalyst of vanadium (V) oxide is used to increase the rate of reaction;

 

UNIT 4: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

Checklist:

  1. Meaning of electrochemistry
  2. Displacement and Redox reactions.
  3. Oxidation and Redox reactions in terms of electron gain and electron loss
  4. Oxidation numbers (states)
  • Rules of assigning oxidation numbers
  • Calculating oxidation numbers
  1. Redox reactions involving halide ions (halogens)
  • Further examples of Redox reactions.
  1. Tendency of metals to from ions.
  2. Measurements of tendency of metals to ionize
  • Electrochemical cells
  • Salt bridge
  • Cell diagrams
  • Cell equations
  1. Standard electrode potential
  • Definition
  • Standard hydrogen electrode
  • The hydrogen half cell
  • Electrode potentials (negative and positive values)
  • Calculating E0 values from Redox reactions.
  1. Voltaic cells
  • Primary cells
    • Structure
    • Reactions
    • Zinc (negative) terminal
    • Brass (positive) terminal
    • Functions of various components
  • Secondary cells (lead acid accumulators)
    • Structure
    • Reactions
    • During discharge
    • During recharging;
  1. Electrolysis
  • Definition
  • Terminologies used in electrolysis (basic concepts)
  • Preferential discharge of ions
  • Electrolysis of various substances
    • Dilute sulphuric acid
    • Dilute sodium chloride
    • Concentrated sodium chloride (brine)
    • The mercury cathode cell
    • Copper (II) sulphate
      • Using inert electrodes
      • Using copper electrodes
    • Factors affecting electrolysis and electrolysis products
    • Applications of electrolysis
      • Extraction of reactive metals
      • Purification of metals
      • Electroplating
      • Anodizing aluminium utensils
      • Manufacture of sodium hydroxide, chlorine and hydrogen;
        • The mercury cathode cell
        • Diaphragm cell;
        • Membrane cell;
      • Quantitative aspects of electrolysis
        • Basic terminologies
          • The ampere
          • The coulomb
          • The faraday
        • Faradays laws of electrolysis
          • Statements

Definition:     

– Electrochemistry is the chemistry of electrochemical reactions; which deal with the relationship between electrical energy and chemical reactions.

– Electrochemical reactions involve transfer of electrons and are essentially REDOX reactions.

 

Displacement and REDOX reactions

Experiment 1:- Displacement reactions among metals

(i). Procedure

(a). 5 cm3 of 1M CuSO4 (aq) is put in a test-tube and its temperature recorded.

– In the solution, a spatula end-full of iron fillings is added.

– Any observations and temperature change are determined and recorded.

– The procedure is repeated with fresh samples of CuSO4 with Zn, Mg, and Cu powders.

 

(b). The procedure is repeated with 1M magnesium sulphate solution instead of CuSO4 (aq).

 

(ii). Observations:

 

 

 

Metal solid

Copper (II) Sulphate Magnesium Sulphate
Iron fillings – A red brown solid (Cu) is formed

– The blue colour of the solution (Cu2+) fades then changes to green (Fe2+)

– No reaction

 

Zinc powder – A red brown solid, copper metal is deposited.

– The blue colour of the solution (Cu2+) fades then turns colourless;

– No observable reaction (change)

 

Copper powder – No reaction

 

– No reaction

 

 

(iii). Explanations

– Reactions between metals and ions of another metal involve transfer of electrons from the metal to the other metal ion in solution.

 

Examples:

  • Fe(s) and CuSO4 (aq)

– Copper being lower in the electrochemical series accepts electrons easier (than Fe) to form copper atoms (brown solid);

 

Half equations

Fe (s)                         Fe2+(aq) + 2e

 

Cu2+(aq) + 2e                       Cu (s)

 

Overall reaction       

Cu2+(aq)  +   2e-  + Fe(s)                           Fe2+(aq)  + 2e +  Cu(s)

Then;

 

Cu2+(aq)  +  Fe(s)                                 Fe 2+ (aq)  +  Cu  (s)

(Blue)                                                                                  (Green)                     (Brown solid)

 

 

Oxidation and reduction in terms of electron loss and gain

– The loss of electrons is oxidation and the species that gains electrons (causes electron loss); Cu2+ in this case is called oxidizing agent; and is itself reduced.

– Reduction: refers to gain of electrons, and the species that donates electrons (iron solid in this case) is called a reducing agent and is itself oxidized.

– Displacement reactions generally involve reduction and oxidation simultaneously and are thus termed Redox Reactions.

 

Further examples

(i). Zinc solid and CuSO4(aq)

 

(i). Zn(s)                       Zn2+(aq)  +  2e(Oxidation)

(ii). Cu2+(aq)   +  2e             Cu(s) (Reduction)

 

Oxidation

 

 

Then:   Cu2+(aq) +  Zn(s)                        Zn2+(aq) + Cu(s) (Redox)

                    Blue                                                                     Colourless;       Red brown

 

 

Reduction

 

(ii). Magnesium solid and copper (II) sulphate

 

(i). Mg(s)                      Mg2+(aq)  +  2e(Oxidation)

(ii). Cu2+(aq)   +  2e             Cu(s) (Reduction)

 

                           Oxidation

 

 

Then:   Mg(s) + Cu2+(aq)                        Mg2+(aq) + Cu(s) (Redox)

                                          Blue                                               Colourless;       Red brown

 

 

                                                   Reduction

 

(iii). Silver nitrate and copper solid.

 

(i). Cu(s)                       Cu2+(aq)  +  2e(Oxidation)

(ii). 2Ag+(aq)   +  2e            2Ag(s) (Reduction)

 

                                   Oxidation

 

 

Then:   Cu(s) + 2Ag+(aq)                        Cu2+(aq) + 2Ag(s) (Redox)

                    Brown       Colourless                                     Blue                Grey

 

 

                                                   Reduction

 

Note:

– Amount of heat evolved in these redox reactions depends on the position of the metal in the activity series relative to the metal ion in solution.

– The closer the metals are in the activity series; the less readily displacement occurs and the lower the heat evolution during the displacement.

E.g.:    Heat evolved Mg//Cu2+ is higher than that evolved between Fe//Cu2+.

 

Conclusion:

– Metals displace from solutions, those metals lower than themselves in the activity series.

Note:

– The more the reactive a metal is; the stronger a reducing agent it is and the weaker an oxidizing agent it is.

 

Example:

Potassium is stronger reducing agent; but weaker oxidizing agent than silver, gold etc.

 

Summary:

Strength of reducing/ oxidizing agent

 

 

                                         Weakest oxidizing agent        Potassium, K        Strongest reducing agent

Sodium, Na

Magnesium, Mg

Aluminium, Al

Zinc; Zn

Iron, Fe

Lead, Pb

Copper, Cu

Silver, Ag

                                       Strongest oxidizing agent        Mercury, Hg         Weakest reducing agent

 

Summary on displacement reactions

 

 

 

Metal ion (in solution)

Mg Al Zn Fe Pb Cu
K+ C C C C C C
Na+ C C C C C C
Ca2+ C C C C C C
Mg2+ C C C C C C
Al3+   C C C C C
Zn2+     C C C C
Fe2+       C C C
Pb2+         C C
Cu2+           C
Ag2+            

 

Key:

A cross (x) indicates no reaction hence no redox reaction occurs.

A tick indicates redox reaction occurs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Oxidation numbers/ oxidation state.

– Is the apparent charge that atoms have in molecules or ions.

– For monoatomic ions, the oxidation number (state) is the magnitude and sign of charge;

 

Example:

Oxidation no of Aluminium in Al3+ is +3;

 

Importance of oxidation numbers:

– Helps in keeping track of electron movement in redox reactions; hence determination of the reduced and oxidized species.

 

Oxidation and reduction in terms of oxidation numbers

  • Oxidation            

– Is an increase in oxidation number.

 

  • Reduction

Refers to a decrease in oxidation number

 

Rules in assigning oxidation numbers

  1. Oxidation number of an uncombined element is zero (0)
  2. The charge on a monoatomic ion is equivalent to the oxidation number of that element;
  3. The oxidation number of hydrogen in all compounds is +1 except in metal hydrides where its –1;
  4. The oxidation number of oxygen in all compounds is –2 except in peroxides where it is –1 and 0F2 where it is +2.
  5. In complex ions the overall charge is equal to the sum of the oxidation states of the constituent elements.
  6. In compounds, the sum of oxidation numbers of all constituent atoms is equal to zero.

 

Worked examples

  1. Calculate the oxidation number of nitrogen in:

(i). NO3

 

Solution:

N + (-2 x 3) = -1

N = -1 + 6

= +5

Note: thus nitric acid with a nitrate ion (NO3) is called nitric (V) acid since the oxidation number of nitrogen in it is +5;

 

(ii). NO2;

 

Solution:

N + (-2 x 2) = 0

N = 0 + 4

= +4

Note: Thus the gas NO2 is referred to as nitrogen (IV) oxide because the oxidation umber of nitrogen in it is +4

 

(iii). NO2;

 

Solution:

N + (-2 x 2) = -1

N = -1 + 4

= +3

Note: thus nitrous acid containing nitrite ion is called nitrous (III) acid since the oxidation number of nitrogen in it is +3.

 

(iii). AgNO3;

 

Solution:

1 + N + (-2 x 3) = 0

1 + N + (-6) = 0

N = 0 – 1 + 6;

N = +5

 

  1. Determine the oxidation number of manganese in each of the following, and hence give the systematic names of the compounds.

(i). MnSO4

 

Solution:

Mn + 6 + (-2 x 4) = 0

Mn = 0 – 6 + 8;

Mn = +2

Systematic name: Manganese (II) sulphate;

 

(ii). Mn2O3;

 

Solution:

2Mn + (3 x -2) = 0;

2Mn = 0 + 6

Mn = ½ x 6;

Mn = +3;

Systematic name: Manganese (III) oxide;

 

(iii). KMnO4

 

Solution:

1 + Mn + (-2 x 4) = 0

Mn = 0 – 1 + 8;

Mn = +7;

Systematic name: Potassium manganate (VII) oxide

 

(iv). MnO3;

 

Solution:

Mn + (-2 x 3) = -1

Mn = -1 + 6;

Mn = +5

Systematic name: Manganese (V) ion;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determination of redox reactions using oxidation numbers.

Worked examples:

 

 

 

 

 

Redox reactions involving Halide ions and halogens

Experiment

(i). Procedure:

– 2 cm3 of chlorine gas are bubbled into each of the following solutions: – KI, KCl, KBr, and KF.

– The observations are made and recorded.

– The procedure is repeated using fluorine, bromine and iodine in place of chlorine.

 

Precaution:   

– Chlorine and bromine are poisonous.

 

(ii). Observations

 

 

 

Halogen

Potassium fluoride Potassium Chloride Potassium Bromide Potassium  Iodide
Fluorine (F2) No visible, change Green-yellow gas is evolved Colourless solution  changes to red brown Colourless solution turns black;
Chlorine (Cl2) No visible colour change; No visible colour change; Colourless solution turns red brown Colourless solution turns  black
Bromine (Br2) No visible colour change; No visible colour change; No visible colour change; Colourless solution turns black;
Iodine (I2) No visible colour change; No visible colour change; No visible colour change; Colourless solution turns black;

 

Note:  Colours of halogens in tetra – chloromethane:-

 

Halogen Colour in tetrachloromethane
Fluorine  
Chlorine Yellow
Bromine Red-brown
Iodine Purple

 

(iii). Explanations

– Fluorine displaces all the other halogens; Cl2, Br2 and I2 because it has a greater tendency to accept electrons than all the rest.

– Chlorine displaces both Bromine and Iodine from their halide solutions

– Cl2 takes electrons from the bromide and iodide ions i.e. oxidizes them, to form bromine and iodine respectively.

 

Equations:

(i). Chlorine and potassium bromide:

Cl2 (g) + 2KBr (aq)                          2KCl (aq) + Br2 (l)

 

Ionically:

Cl2 (g) + 2Br(aq)                               2Cl(aq) + Br2 (l)

Green-yellow                                                                                           Red brown

 

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

Cl2 (g) + 2Br(aq)                                    2Cl(aq) + Br2 (l)

 

 

Oxidation

 

(ii). Chlorine and Potasium iodide:

Cl2 (g) + 2KI (aq)                        2KCl (aq) + I2 (l)

 

Ionically:

Cl2 (g) + 2I(aq)                                  2Cl(aq) + I2 (l)

Green-yellow                                                                                           Black

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 2I(aq)        I2(aq) + 2e-
  • Reduction: Cl2 (g) + 2e- 2Cl(aq)

 

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

Cl2 (aq) + 2I(aq)                         2Cl(aq) + I2 (l)

 

 

Oxidation

 

– Bromine takes electrons form iodide ions but not from fluorine and chlorine.

– Iodine is formed i.e. due to oxidation of iodide ions by the Bromine.

 

Equations

(ii). Bromine and Potasium iodide:

Br2 (g) + 2KI (aq)                        2KBr (aq) + I2 (l)

 

Ionically:

Br2 (g) + 2I(aq)                                  2Cl(aq) + I2 (l)

Red brown                                                                                               Black

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 2I(aq)        I2(aq) + 2e-
  • Reduction: Br2 (g) + 2e- 2Br(aq)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

Cl2 (aq) + 2I(aq)                         2Cl(aq) + I2 (l)

 

 

Oxidation

Note: oxidation number of chlorine decreases from 0 to -1 hence reduction; while oxidation number of iodine increases from -1 to 0; hence oxidation;

 

(iv). Conclusion:        

– The stronger the tendency of an element to accept electrons, the stronger is its oxidizing power.

– Fluorine is the strongest oxidizing agent of the 4 halogens considered.

 

 

 

 

 

Order of oxidizing power for halogens.

Fluorine; F2;

Chlorine; Cl2     Increasing oxidizing power.

Bromine; Br2

Iodine; I2

 

Further examples of redox reactions

(a). Action of acid on metals

Mg (s) + 2HCl (aq)                        2MgCl (aq) + H2 (g)

 

Ionically:

Mg (s) + 2H+(aq)                                Mg2+(aq) + H2 (g)

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: Mg(s)       Mg2+(aq) + 2e-
  • Reduction: 2H+(g) + 2e- H2(g)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

2H+ (aq) + Mg(s)                          H2 (aq) + Mg2+ (aq)

 

 

Oxidation

Note: oxidation number of hydrogen decreases from 1 to 0 hence reduction; while oxidation number of magnesium increases from 0 to 2; hence oxidation;

 

(b). Reaction of active metals with water

Example

2Na (s) + 2H2O (l)                           2NaOH (aq) + H2 (g)

 

Ionically:

2Na(s) + 2H2O (l)                                 2Na+(aq) + 2OH(aq) + H2 (g)

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 2Na(s)        2Na+(aq) + 2e-
  • Reduction: 2H2O (g) + 2e- 2OH(aq) + H2(g)

Redox equation:                    Oxidation

 

 

2Na(s) + 2H2O (aq)                     2Na+ (aq) + 2Cl(aq) + I2 (l)

 

 

Reduction

Note: oxidation number of water decreases from 0 to -1(total) hence reduction; while oxidation number of sodium increases from 0 to 1; hence oxidation;

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c). Reaction of heated Iron with dry chlorine

2Fe (s) + 3Cl 2(g)                           2FeCl 3(s)

 

Ionically (assumed):

2Fe (s) + 3Cl2(aq)                            2Fe3+ (aq) + 6Cl (g)

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 2Fe(s)       2Fe3+(aq) + 6e
  • Reduction: 3Cl2(g) + 6e H2(g)

Redox equation:                    Oxidation

 

 

2Fe (s) + 3Cl2(g)                         2Fe3+ (aq) + 6Cl (aq)

 

 

Reduction

Note: oxidation number of chlorine decreases from 0 to -1 hence reduction; while oxidation number of iron increases from 0 to 3; hence oxidation;

 

 

(d). Reaction between Bromine and Iron (II) ions

Ionically:

Br2(l) + 2Fe2+(aq)                              2Fe3+(aq) + 2Br (aq)

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: Br2(l)       2Br(aq) + 2e-
  • Reduction: 2Fe2+(g) + 2e- 2Fe3+(aq)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

Br2 (aq) + 2Fe2+(s)                        2Br (aq) + 2Fe3+ (aq)

 

 

Oxidation

 

Note: oxidation number of bromine decreases from 0 to -1 hence reduction; while oxidation number of Fe2+ increases from 2 to 3 (in Fe3+); hence oxidation;

 

(e). Oxidation by potassium Manganate (VII) (KMnO4)

Procedure:    

– Purple Potassium manganate (VII) is added into a solution containing iron (II) ions in a test tube.

– A few drops of concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid are added.

 

Observations:           

– The purple solution (containing Manganate (VII) ions) turns to colourless (manganate (II) ions) i.e. the purple solution is decolourised;

 

Explanation:

– The Manganate (VII) ions which give the solution a purple colour are reduced to Manganese (II) ions which appear colourless.  This is a redox reaction.

 

 

Equations

Ionically:

MnO4 (aq) + 8H+(aq) + 5Fe2+(aq)                                         Mn2+(aq) + 5Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O (l)

Purple                                                                                                                     Colourless

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 5Fe2+(s)       5Fe3+(aq) + 5e; (since number of electrons is 5)
  • Reduction: MnO4(aq) + 8H+(aq) + 5e                     Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(l)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

MnO4 (aq) + 5Fe2+(aq)                   Mn2+(aq) + 5Fe3+ (aq)

 

 

Oxidation

Note:

  • oxidation number of Manganate ions in KMnO4 decreases from 7 to 2 (in Mn2+) hence reduction; while oxidation number of iron increases from 2 (in Fe2+) to 3 (in Fe3+); hence oxidation;

 

  • The presence of Fe3+ at the end of the reaction can be detected by adding sodium hydroxide solution to form a red brown precipitate of Fe(OH)3;

 

(f). Action of potassium dichromate (VI) on iron (II) ions (Fe2+):

(i). Procedure:

– A solution containing iron (II) ions is added into a solution of oxidized potassium dichromate (VI).

 

(ii). Observations:

– The orange solution of potassium dichromate turns green.

 

(iii). Explanations:    

– The iron (II) ions are oxidized to iron (III) ions

– The chromium (VI) ions (orange) are reduced to chromium (III) ions

– This is thus a REDOX reaction.

 

Equations

Ionically:

Cr2O72- (aq) + 14H+(aq) + 6Fe2+(aq)                             2Cr3+(aq) + 6Fe3+(aq) + 7H2O (l)

Orange                                                                                                                    Green

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 6Fe2+(s)       6Fe3+(aq) + 6e; (since number of electrons is 6)
  • Reduction: Cr2O72-(aq) + 14H+(aq) + 5e            2Cr3+(aq) + 7H2O(l) + 6Fe3+(aq)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

Cr2O72- (aq) + 6Fe2+(aq)                 2Cr3+(aq) + 6Fe3+ (aq)

 

 

Oxidation

 

Note:

  • The oxidation number of dichromate ions in K2Cr2O7 decreases from 6 to 3 (in Cr3+) hence reduction; while oxidation number of iron increases from 2 (in Fe2+) to 3 (in Fe3+); hence oxidation;

 

  • The presence of Fe3+ at the end of the reaction can be detected by adding sodium hydroxide solution to form a red brown precipitate of Fe(OH)3;

 

(g). Action of acidified potassium permanganate on Hydrogen Peroxide.

– The overall reaction is a Redox reaction

Redox equation

2MnO4 (aq) + 5H2O (l) + 6H+ (aq)                              2Mn2+ (aq) + 5H2O (l) + 5O2 (g)

Purple                                                                                                                     Colourless

 

Half cell reactions:

  • Oxidation: 5H2O2(aq)            10H+(aq) + 5O2(g) + 10e;
  • Reduction: 2MnO4(aq) + 16H+(aq) + 10e              2Mn2+(aq) + 8H2O(l)

Redox equation:                    Reduction

 

 

2MnO4 (aq) + 5H2O2 (aq)                2Mn2+(aq) + 10H+ (aq) + 5O2(g)

 

 

Oxidation

 

Note:

  • The oxidation number of manganate ions in KMnO4 decreases from 7 to 2 (in Mn2+) hence reduction; while oxidation number of hydrogen increases from -1 (in H2O2) to 1 (in H+); hence oxidation;
  • Thus the acidified potassium manganate (VII) oxidizes hydrogen peroxide to water and hydrogen;

 

(h). H2O2 oxidizes Iron (II) salts to Iron (III) salts in acidic medium

Oxidation:

2Fe2+ (aq)                           2Fe3+ (aq) + 2e

 

Reduction:

2H+ (aq) + H2O2(aq) + 2e                    2H2O(l)

 

Overall redox:

2Fe2+ (aq) + H2O2 (aq) + 2H+ (aq)                               2Fe3+ (aq) + 2H2O (l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Terms used in describing oxidation – reduction

 

Term Electron change Oxidation number change
Oxidation

Reduction

Oxidizing agent

Reducing agent

Substances oxidized

Substance reduced

loss of electrons

gain of electrons

receives electrons

loses electrons

loses electrons

gains electrons

increases

decreases

decreases

increases

increases

decreases

 

The tendency of metals to form ions

– When a  metal  is placed in an aqueous solution of its ions, some of the metal dissolves;

Equation:

M(s)                          Mn+ (aq) + ne

 

– Dissolution of the metal causes electron build up on its surface; making it negatively charged, while the surrounding solution becomes positively charged.

 

Diagram: dissolution of metal and electron build up.

 

 

                                                            Metal rod

 

 

 

 

                                                                 Solution containing metal ions

 

 

 

– The positive charge of the solution increases and some of the cations start recombining with the electrons on the metal surface to form atoms.

 

Equation:

Mn+ (aq) + ne                         M(s)

 

– Consequently, an electric potential difference is created between the metal rod and the positively charged ions in solution.

– This arrangement of a metal rod (electrodes) dipped in a solution of its ions constitutes a half – cell.

 

Note: 

– The tendency of a metal to ionize when in contact with the ions differs form one metal to another.

– This difference can be measured by connecting two different Half – cells to make a full cell.

– The electrodes of the 2 half – cells are connected by a metallic conductor; while the electrolytes (solutions) of the half cells are connected through a salt bridge.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram: Connection of two half cells to a full cell.

Experiment: – to measure the relative tendency of metals to ionize

(i). Procedure:

– A Zinc rod is placed into 50 cm3 of 1M zinc sulphate in a beaker;

– Into another beaker containing 50 cm3 of 1M CuSO4 (aq), a copper rod is dipped;

– The two solutions are connected using a salt bridge.

– The two metal rods are connected through a connecting wire connected to a voltmeter

– The experiment is repeated using the following half-cells instead of the Zinc-half cells:-

  • Mg rod dipped in 1M MgSO4 (aq)
  • Lead dipped in 1M lead Nitrate
  • Copper dipped in 1M CuSO4 (aq)

 

(ii). Apparatus

Diagram:

(iii). Observation

– The zinc rod in the zinc-zinc ions half – cell dissolves;

– The blue colour of the copper (II) Sulphate solution fades/ decrease;

– Red-brown deposits of copper appear on the copper rod in the copper-copper ions half-cell.

– A voltage of 1.10 V is registered in the voltmeter.

 

 

 

(iv). Equations/ reactions, at each half cell

  • In zinc-zinc ions half cell

Zn(s)                             Zn2+ (aq) + 2e

 

  • In the copper-copper ion half cell

Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-                          Cu(s);

 

(v). Explanations:     

– Zinc rod has a higher tendency to ionize than the copper rod, when the metal rods are placed in solutions of their ions.

– Thus the zinc rod has a higher accumulation of electrons than the copper rod.

– This makes it more negative compared to the relatively more positive copper rod, which has a lower accumulation of electrons.

– On connecting the 2 half cells; electrons will flow form the zinc rod to the copper rod through the external wire.

– The copper rod gains the electrons lost by the Zinc rod.

 

Roles of the slat bridge:       

Note: It forms a link between the 2 half cells, thereby completing the circuit

– It compete the circuit by:

  1. Allowing its ions to carry charge from one half – cell to the other.
  2. Maintaining the balance of charge in the two half-cells; by providing the ions which replace those used up at the electrodes.

 

– The overall reaction in the cells is a Redox  reaction

Half cell reactions:

Zn(s)                             Zn2+ (aq) + 2e (oxidation)

 

Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-                          Cu(s); (reduction)

 

Overall redox equation

                                                  Oxidation

 

 

Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq)                          Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)

 

 

Reduction

 

– The voltage of 1.10 V registered in the voltmeter is a measure of the difference between the electrode potential (Eθ) of Zinc and Copper electrodes, i.e. the potential difference/ the Electromotive force.

– Thus: An electrochemical/ voltaic cell;

  • Is the combination of two half –cells to give a full cell capable of generating an electric current from a redox reaction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cell diagram for a voltaic cell

Rules/conventions for cell representation

  1. A vertical continuous line (/); represents the metal-metal ion or metal ion-metal interphase.
  2. Vertical broken line ( ­); between the 2 half-cells; represents the salt bridge.

 

Note: The salt bridge may also be represented by two unbroken parallel lines (//).

 

Example: – cell diagram for the above cell;

Zn(s) / Zn2+ (aq)     Cu2+ (aq) / Cu(s);

 

Alternatively:

Zn(s) / Zn2+ (aq) // Cu2+ (aq) / Cu(s);

 

Electrode potential E0, values of other metal – metal ions relative tot he Cu/Cu 2+ half cell

Metal / metal ion half cell Electrode potential Eθ relative to Cu2+ / Cu half cell
Mg(s) / Mg2+ (aq) +2.04
Zn(s) / Zn2+ (aq) +1.10
Pb(s) / Pb2+ (aq) +0.78
Cu(s) / Cu2+ (aq) +0.00
Ag(s) / Ag+ (aq) -0.46

 

Positive and negative E values

 

(i). Positive E values –          

– If the Eθ value for a metal / metal ion is positive then the metal undergoes oxidation (loses electrons) while the reference electrode undergoes reduction (accepts electrons)

 

Example:

– The Eθ value for Zn(s) / Zn2+ (aq) relative Cu2+ (aq) / Cu(s) is positive because the zinc metal is oxidized to zinc ions while the copper ions are reduced to copper metal.

 

(ii). Negative E values:

– Implies that the reference half cell undergoes oxidation (donates electrons) while the other metal ions in the other half cell undergoes reduction (accepts electrons)

 

Example:

– The E value for Ag (s) / Ag+ (aq) is negative because Cu is more reactive than silver and gives out electrons (oxidation); while the less reactive Ag has its ions accepting electrons (reduction) to form Ag solid.

 

(iii). The 0 (Zero) E value:

Always indicate the reference electrode / half-cell; in which case there would be no potential difference (with itself)

 

Example:

– The 2 half  cells of Cu(s) / Cu2+(aq) or Cu2+(aq) / Cu(s)  have no potential difference in between them hence a zero (0) E value.

 

Note:

  1. – Any other element could be chosen as the reference electrode in place of copper Cu and difference electrode potentials values would be obtained for the same elements.

 

  1. – The electrode potential of a single element is usually determined by measuring the difference between the electrode potential of the element and a chosen standard electrode.

 

  1. – This gives the standard electrode potential (E0) of the element.

 

The standard electrode potential (E0)

Definition

– Is the potential difference for a cell comprising of a particular element in contact with 1 molar solution of its ions and the standard hydrogen electrode.

– It is denoted with the symbol E0.

 

Importance

– It is useful in comparing the oxidizing and reducing powers of various substances.

 

The standard Hydrogen Electrode

– Is the hydrogen half-cell, which has been conventionally chosen as the standard reference electrode.

– It has an electrode potential of zero at:-

  • A temperature of 25oC
  • A hydrogen pressure of 1 atmosphere
  • A concentration of 1M hydrogen ions

 

Note:  The ions in the other half-cell must also be at a concentration of 1 molar.

 

Components of the Hydrogen half – cell;

– Consist of an inert platinum electrode immersed in a 1M solution of Hydrogen ions

– Hydrogen gas at 1 atmosphere is bubbled into the platinum electrode.

– The hydrogen is adsorbed into the platinum surface and an equilibrium (state of balance) is established between the adsorbed layer of molecular hydrogen and hydrogen ions in the solution.

Equation:

½ H2 (g)                                   H+ (aq)   + e

 

Platinised platinum

– Is platinum loosely coated with finely-divided platinum.

– This enables it to retain comparatively large quantity of hydrogen due to its porous state.

– Platinised platinum also serves as a route by which electrons leave or enter the electrode.

– The hydrogen electrode is represented as: H2 (g)  / H+(aq); 1M

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram: The standard hydrogen electrode:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– The electrode potential of any metal is taken as the difference in potential between the metal electrode and the standard hydrogen electrode.

 

Negative and positive electrode potentials

(a). Negative electrode potential

– If the metal electrode has a higher/ greater tendency to loose electrons than the hydrogen electrode; then the electrode is negative with respect to hydrogen electrode; and its electrode potential is negative.

 

Examples: Zinc, Magnesium etc.

 

(b). Positive electrode potential

If the tendency of an electrode to loose electrode is lower than the hydrogen electrode, then the electrode is positive with respect to the hydrogen electrode; and its potential is positive.

 

Examples: copper, silver etc

 

Reduction potentials

– Is a standard electrode potential measured when the electrode in question is gaining electrons.

– The lower the tendency of an electrode to accept/ gain electrons; the lower (more negative) the reduction potential and vise versa.

 

Examples:

K+ (aq)   + e (aq)                                     K(s);         E0 = -2.92V

F2 (g)      + e (aq)                                      2F(aq);     E0 = +12.87V

Mg (s)    + 2e                                       Mg2+ (aq); Eθ = -2.71 V

 

– Thus potassium ions with E0 = -2.92V have a lesser tendency to gain electrons than magnesium ions.

– Thus Potassium is the weakest oxidizing agent; but the strongest reducing agent, since it has the greatest tendency to donate electrons.

 

Note:

– Oxidation potentials will be the potentials of electrodes measured when they are losing electrons hence undergoing oxidation.

 

 

 

Standard electrode potentials  reduction potentials) of some elements

 

 

  Reduction equation Eθvolts
Least readily reduced

 

Most readily reduced

 

 

 

 

  

                                – Increasing strength of oxidizing agent

                                – Decreasing strength of oxidizing agent

 

F2 (g)     +  2e                           2F (aq)

+2.87
Cl2 (g)   + 2e                            2Cl (aq) + 2.87
Br2(g)      +  2e                            2Br (aq) + 1.36
Ag+(aq)+ 2e                              Ag (s) + 0.80
I2 (g)      +  2e                           2I(aq) + 0.54
Cu2+(aq)+ 2e                            Cu (s) + 0.34
2H+ (aq) +  2e                           H2 (g) + 0.00
Pb2+(aq) +2e                             Pb (s) – 0.13
Fe2+(aq) +  2e                           Fe (s) – 0.44
Zn2+ (g) +  2e                           Zn (s) – 0.76
Al 3+ (aq)+   3e–                          Al (s) – 1.66
Mg2+ (aq) + 2e                         Mg (s) – 2.71
K+ (aq)    + e                             K (s) – 2.92

 

Note:

– The standard electrode potentials in the above table are reduction potentials.

– The greater the tendency to undergo reduction, the higher (more positive) the Eθ value.

– The reverse reaction (oxidation) would have a potential value equal in magnitude but opposite in sign to the reduction potential.

 

Example:

Zinc

Reduction potential

Zn2+ (aq)    +   2e-                                Zn (s); E0 = -0.76V;

 

Oxidation potential

Zn (s)                                    Zn2+ (aq)   +   2e; Eθ = + 0.76V;

 

Uses of E0 values

  1. Comparing the reducing powers and oxidizing powers of various substances;
  2. Predicting whether or NOT a stated REDOX reaction will take place.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The E0 value for a REDOX reaction

– Is usually calculated as the sum of the E0 value for the half cells involved.

 

Note:

– If the sum is positive then the reaction can occur simultaneously;

– If the value of the sum is negative the reaction cannot occur;

 

Sample calculations

  1. Cu 2+ can oxidize Zinc but Zn 2+ cannot oxidize Cu;

(a). Cu 2+/ Cu // Zn / Zn2+

Cu 2+ (aq) + 2e                               Cu (s); E0 = + 0.34 V

Zn (s)                                2e + Zn 2+ (aq); E0 = + 0.76 V

Cu 2+ (aq) + Zn (s)                      Cu (s) + Zn (aq); E0 = – 1.10 V

 

– The overall reaction is positive, hence zinc can be oxidized by copper (II) ions, and hence reaction occurs;

 

(b). Zn 2+ (aq) / Zn (s) // Cu (s) / Cu 2+ (aq)

Zn2+ (aq) + 2e-                                        Zn(s);  E0 = – 0.76 V

Cu(s)                             2e + Cu2+ (aq);  E0 = – 0.34 V

 

Zn 2+ (aq) + Cu(s)                   Zn (s) + Cu 2+ (aq) ; E0 = – 1.10 V

 

 

– The overall E0 is negative; thus Zn 2+ cannot oxidize Cu to Cu2+ (Cu cannot reduce Zn 2+ to Zn); and hence the reaction cannot occur.

 

  1. Can chlorine displace bromine form bromide solution?

Cell diagram: Cl2 (g) / Cl(aq) // 2Br(aq) / Br2 (g)

Cl2 (g) + 2e                                2Cl (aq); E0 = + 1.36 V

2Br (aq)                                2e + Br2 (g); E0 = – 1.09 V

Cl2 (g) + 2Br (aq)                    2Cl(aq) + Br2 (g); E0 = +0.27 V

 

– The overall E0 for the reaction is positive, so chlorine can displace bromine from a bromide solution.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Worked examples

  1. The diagram below represents part of the apparatus to be used for the determination of the standard electrode potential of Aluminum, Eθ Al 3+(aq) /Al (s)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a). Name the solutions which  could be placed in beakers A and B; specifying their concentrations.

Answer:

– In beaker A; 1 M HCl (aq) i.e. any solution with 1 M hydrogen ions

– In beaker B; 1 M Al (NO3) (aq); i.e. any aqueous solution with 1M Al 3+.

 

(b). One essential part of the cell has been omitted.  Name the missing part and give its functions.

Answer:-       

Missing part: salt bridge

Function: completes the circuit by;

  1. Allowing its ions to carry charge form one half cell to another.
  2. Providing ions which repose those used up of the electrodes, hence maintaining a balance of charge in the 2 half – cells.

 

(c). The voltmeter reading was found to be –1.66 V.

(i). Give the standard electrode potential for the aluminum electrode.

Solution: it is -1.66 since the Hydrogen-hydrogen ions half-cell = 0.00V.

 

(ii). Show the direction of flow of electrons in the circuit;

Solution: From Al3+ / Al half cell to the H2 / 2H+ (aq) half cell

 

(d). Give the half-cell equations and the overall cell equation

Solution:

3H+ (aq) + 3e                               1½ H2 (g); E0 = + 0.00V;

Al (s)                                    3e + Al3+ (aq); E0 = + 1.66V;

Overall:

Al (s) + 3H+ (aq)                      Al3+ (aq) + 1½H2 (g); E0 = +1.66 V

 

 

 

 

 

  1. You are given the following half-equations;

Mg2+ (aq) + 2e-                   Mg (s);  Eθ = – 2.71 V

Zn2+(g)  + 2e-                     Zn (s);   Eθ = – 0.76 V

 

(i) (a). Obtain an equation for the cell reaction.

 

Mg (s)                              2e + Mg2+ (aq); E0 = +2.71V

Zn2+(aq) + 2e                                 Zn (s); E0 = – 0.76V

Mg (s) + Zn2+ (aq)                   Mg2+ (aq) + Zn(s); E0 = +1.95V

 

Thus equation:

Mg (s) + Zn2+ (aq)                   Mg2+ (aq) + Zn(s); E0 = +1.95V

 

(b). Calculate the E0 value for the cell.

Mg (s)                              2e + Mg2+ (aq); E0 = +2.71V

Zn2+(aq) + 2e                                 Zn (s); E0 = – 0.76V

Mg (s) + Zn2+ (aq)                   Mg2+ (aq) + Zn(s); E0 = +1.95V

 

(c). Give the oxidizing species.

– Reducing species

Magnesium i.e. The species that undergoes oxidation since its oxidation number increases (from 0 to 2); as it reduces the other;

 

– Oxidizing species

Zinc/Zinc ions; – the species that undergoes reduction; since its oxidation number decreases (from 2 to 0) as it oxidizes the other species (Mg).

 

  1. Given the following half-equations

I2 (g) + 2e-                          2I (aq); Eθ = + 0.54V

Br2 (g) + 2e-                       2Br (s); Eθ = +1.09 V

 

(a). Obtain an equation for the all reaction

2I(aq)                               2e + I2 (g); E0 = – 0.54V

Br2 (g) + 2e                          2Br (s); E0 = +1.09V

Br2 (g) + 2I (aq)                      2Br (aq) + I2 (g); E0 = +0.55V

 

(b). Calculate the E0 value for the cell

2I(aq)                               2e + I2 (g); E0 = – 0.54V

Br2 (g) + 2e                          2Br (s); E0 = +1.09V

Br2 (g) + 2I (aq)                      2Br (aq) + I2 (g); E0 = +0.55V

 

 

(c). Give the oxidizing species;

Oxidation

 

Br2 (g) + 2I (aq)                      2Br (aq) + I2 (g); E0 = +0.55V

Reduction

0             -1                                   -1            0

 

Oxidizing species: Bromine; Br2 (aq)

 

  1. Consider the following list of electrodes and electrode potential values.

 

Electrode reaction Eθ volts
A2+/ A

B2+/ B

C2+/ C

D+/ D

E2+/ E

F2+/ F

+0.34

-0.71

-0.76

+0.80

-2.87

-2.92

 

(a). Which of the ions is the strongest oxidizer?

D+; because it is most readily reduced/ have the highest tendency to accept electrons as evidenced by its highest positive Eθ value when the ions change to element (D+/ D)

 

(b). Which of the ions is the strongest reducer?

– Is least readily reduced hence lowest E0 value (-2.92 V); accepts electrons least readily i.e. shows the lowest E0 when its ions gain electrons/ are reduced (F+/ F, = -2.92 V)

 

  1. The following is a list of reduction standard electrode potentials.

 

Metal Eθ volts(standard electrode potential)
Magnesium

Zinc

Iron

Hydrogen

Copper

Silver

-2.36

-0.76

-0.44

0.00

+0.34

+0.79

 

(a). Which two metals, if used together in a cell would produce the largest e.m.f?

Magnesium-silver cell;

Mg2+ (aq) + 2e                    Mg (s);  Eθ = – 2.36 V

2Ag+(g)  + 2e                    2Ag (s); Eθ = – 0.79 V

 

Thus;

Mg (s)                              2e + Mg2+ (aq); E0 = +2.36V

2Ag+(aq) + 2e                               2Ag (s); E0 = – 0.79V

Mg (s) + 2Ag+ (aq)                  Mg2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s); E0 = +3.15V

(b). What would be the voltage produced by:-

(i). Zinc-copper cell

Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-                    Cu (s);  Eθ = + 0.34 V

Zn2+(g)  + 2e-                      Zn (s);  Eθ = – 0.76 V

 

Thus; Zn(s) / Zn2+ (aq) // Cu2+ (aq) / Cu(s);

 

Zn (s)                               2e + Zn2+ (aq); E0 = + 0.76V

Cu2+(aq) + 2e                               Cu (s); E0 = + 0.34V

Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq)                    Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s); E0 = +1.10V

 

(ii). Copper-silver cell

Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-                    Cu (s); Eθ = + 0.34 V

Ag+ (g) + 2e-                       Ag (s); Eθ = + 0.79 V

 

Thus; Cu(s) / Cu2+ (aq) // 2Ag+ (aq) / 2Ag(s);

 

Cu (s)                               2e + Cu2+ (aq); E0 = – 0.34V;

2Ag+(aq) + 2e                               2Ag (s); E0 = + 0.79V;

Cu (s) + 2Ag+ (aq)                   Cu2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s); E0 = + 0.45V

 

(c). Explain the meaning of the positive and negative signs;

 

Positive signs

– The metal in question has a lower tendency to loose electrons than hydrogen hence more relatively positive to hydrogen;

– They are stronger oxidizing agents but weaker reducing agents but weaker reducing agents than hydrogen;

 

Negative signs

– The particular metal has a higher tendency to loose electrons than hydrogen; hence relatively more negative than hydrogen.

– They are weaker oxidizing agents but stronger reducing agents than Hydrogen.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The following are some half-cell electrode potentials of some elements.

 

 

 

 

Reaction

 

(a). Select two half cells which when oxidized give the  burst E value; and fill the cell representation.

Solution:         The silver – copper cell; i.e.

Cell representation

 

(b). Calculate the E0 value

 

(c). Give the strongest reducing  agent and strongest oxidizing agent.

 

Strongest reducing agent

Strongest oxidizer      –           silver   –           has highest reduction potential

 

  1. Study the table below and answer the questions that follow.

(a). Which two metals would form a metallic couple with the highest EMS.

 

(b). Calculate the e.m.f. of the cell that would be produced by (i) above.

 

(c). Write down the cell representation for the cell above.

 

(d). Which metal is the strongest reducing agent in the above list

Metal A           –           have the lowest reduction potential.

 

8 (a). The table below gives reduction potentials obtained when the half-cells for each of the metals represented by letters J, K, L, M and N where connected to a copper half- cell as the reference electrode.

 

 

(i). What is metal L likely to be?  Give a reason

 

Copper            It has an E0 value/ reduction potential of 0.00, with copper as the                                       reference electrode

 

(ii). Which of the metals cannot be displaced from the solution of its salt by any other metal in the table?  Give a reason.

 

Metal J:          Has the lowest reduction potential; meaning it least readily accepts                                                 electrons (most readily donates electrons) than any other metal.

(iii). Metal K and M were connected to form a cell as shown in the diagram below;

 

  1. Indicate on the diagram, the direction of flow of electrons. Explain.

from K to M.

K is a stronger reducing agent than M, as evidenced by its lower reduction potential.

It thus loses electrons faster becoming more Negative than M; hence electrons move from K through  external wires to M.

 

  1. Write the equations for the half-cell reactions that occur at:-

Metal K electrode:-

            Metal M electrode

 

III. If the slat bridge is filled with saturated sodium Nitrate solution, explain how it helps to complete the circuit.

 

Answer

It allows its ions (Na+ (aq) , and No– 3 (aq) ) to carry charge from one half cell to another. Providing ions which replace those used up at the electrodes.

 

VOLTAIC CELLS

– Are also called electrochemical cells.

Are cells in which electrical energy is generated from chemical reactions.

 

Types of electrochemical cells

(i). Primary cells        –          

Electrochemical cells which are not rechargeable

 

(ii). secondary cells- 

– Voltaic/electrochemical cells which are rechargeable.

 

  1. Primary cells/dry cells:

– Are of various types and an example is the Le’ clanche dry cell.

 

The Le’clanche dry cell

 

  1. Structure

 

  • Consist of a Zinc can with carbon rod at the centre.
  • The central graphite/carbon rod is surrounded by powdered Manganese (IV) oxide and carbon; which are inturn surrounded by a paste of NH4Cl (s) and Zinc Chloride.
  • The protruding portion of the carbon rod is covered with a brass cap; and the zinc can covered with a sealing material.

 

Chemical reaction

  • The Zinc can is the negative terminal; while the carbon/graphite rod is the positive terminal;
  1. a the Zinc can/negative terminal
  2. positive terminal /brass cap

 

Hydrogen gas

(NH3 (g) + 2e                         2NH3 (g) + H2 (g)

 

Note:  These gases (NH3 (aq)  and H2 (g) ) are NOT used immediately but are used in more             complex reactions.

  • The ammonia gas forms a complex with the zinc chloride in the paste.
  • The hydrogen gas is oxidised to water by the Manganese (IV) oxide.

 

Functions of the various components.

 

  1. a) Brass cap –           Functions as the positive terminal where the reduction reaction

 

  1. b) Zinc can –           Is the Negative terminal; where the oxidation reaction occurs.

 

  1. c) Carbon rod –           It serves as the positive electrode.
  • Acts as the connecting wire between the positive and negative terminal through it electron flow form the Zinc can to the brass cap.
  1. d) Manganese (IV) Oxide –           To oxidise the Hydrogen gas produced at the                                                             anode/positive terminal/brass cap to water.

 

  • A single dry cell can produce a potential of 1.5 V

 

Note:  Dry ammonium chloride does not conduct electric current.  This explains why a paste,   which is a conductor, is used.

 

The dry cells cannot provide a continuous supply of electricity for an undulate period of time.

 

Reason            –           The reactants (electrolytes) are used up and cannot be replaced.

 

  1. Secondary cells

 

Are voltaic/electrochemical cells that are rechargeable.

A common example is the lead – acid accumulator.

 

The lead – acid accumulator.

 

Structure:        –           The positive plate is a lead grill filled with lead (IV)  oxide; while                                                 the negative plate  consists of a similar lead grill filled with                                                             spongy lead.

 

–           The grills are immersed in sulphuric acid;  which serves as the             electrolyte.

 

Reactions

 

  1. i) During discharge/when in use

–           At the  negative terminal/lead           –           The lead dissolves forming lead (II) ions

 

equation

 

  • At the positive terminal (lead (IV)

Lead (IV) oxide reacts with the                                                                                 Hydrogen ions (H+) in sulphuric acid; also forming lead (II) ions.

Then; the lead (II) ions formed at both electrodes react instantly with the Sulphate ions     to form lead (II) Sulphate.

 

–           The  insoluble lead Sulphate adheres to the electrodes.

 

Overall reaction

 

Note:   The Lead Sulphate should NOT be left for too long to accumulate on the electrodes

 

Reason:          The fine PbSO4 (s)  will charge to coarse non – reversible and inactive form and                  the accumulator will become less efficient.

  • During use/discharge; the lead and the lead (IV) oxide are depleted, and the concentration of sulphric acid declines.

 

  1. ii) During recharging –           Is usually done by applying a suitable voltage to                                                      the terminals of the

–           At the negative  terminal       –           the lead ions                                                               accept electrons to form lead solid.

Overall reaction

 

This process restores the original reactants.

 

 

ELECTROLYSIS

 

Defination

 

Is the decomposition of molten or aqueous solutions by passage of electric current through it.

 

Terminologies used in electrolysis

  1. i) Electrolyte

–           Is a solution which allows electric current to pass through while it gets decomposed.

  • Electric current transfer in electrolyte occur through ions.
  • The electrolyte can be aqueous solutions or molten solutions
  • Electrolyte with may ions are called strong electrolyte; while those with few ions are called weak electrolytes.

 

Examples

 

  1. ii) Electrodes –           Are the solid conductors, usually roots, which usually complete                                             the circuit between electrolytes and cell/battery

–           Are of two types

 

  1. a) Anode – The electrode connected to the positive terminal f a battery/cell
  2. b) Cathode– Electrode connected to the negative terminal of the battery/cell.

 

Note:  Graphite rods are commonly preferred as electrodes in most access.

Reasons:         They are inert/unreactive

Are cheap

  • Platinum is also relatively inert; but not less preferred  to Graphite because its expensive.

 

 

Preferential discharge  of ions

 

  • The products of electrolysis of any given electrolyte depend on the ions present in an electrolyte.
  • Commonly most molten electrolytes have only two ions; a cation and an anion and are termed Binary electrolytes.
  • As the electrolyte decomposes, ions collect/move to the opposite poles.
  • Negatively charged ions move to the Anode; the positive electrode, while the positively charged  ions move to the cathode, the negative  electrode;
  • Regardless of how many ions move to an electrode; only one can be discharged ot give a product.
  • Both cations and anions have a preferential discharge series.

 

  1. Discharge for cations

 

Cations  are discharged by reduction (accepting electrons) to form their respective products.

 

The ease of reduction of cations depends on their position of electrochemical series.

 

Thus Ag+ is most readily discharged as it’s the weakest reducing agent.

 

  1. Discharge for anions

 

Anions are discharged by oxidation (electron loss) to form their respective products.

 

Discharge of anions is viz.

 

 

 

ELECTROLYSIS OF VARIOUS SUBSTANCES

 

  1. Electrolysis of various substances
  2. i)

 

 

 

  1. ii) Procedure –           An electric current is passed through the dilute sulphuric acid.

 

iii)       Observation

 

At the Anode

–           A colourless gas; collects

  • The gas collected relights a glowing splint; and its volume is half the volume of the gas at cathode.  The gas is oxygen.

 

At the cathode

  • A colourless gas collects
  • The collected gas burns with a pop-sound; and its volume is double the volume of gas at the anode.
  • The gas is Hydrogen gas.

 

  1. Explanations –           Ions present in the electrolyte
  2. i) Hydrogen ions and Sulphate ions form sulphuric acid.
  3. ii) Hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions from water.

 

At the Anode (Positive electrode)

 

–           The negatively charged Sulphate ions and hydroxide ions migrate to the anode.

 

Reason:          OH (aq) ions have a greater tendency to loose electrons than the SO2 – 4 (aq) ions

 

Anode equation

 

 

At the cathode (positive electrodes)  –           The positively charged hydrogen ions migrate to the cathode.

 

Equation

 

 

Note: 

 

  1. The volume of oxygen produced at the anode is half the volume of hydrogen produced at the cathode.

 

Reason:          The 4 electrons lost by the hydroxide ions to form 1 mole (1 volume) of                     oxygen molecules are gained by the four hydrogen ions which form 2                         molecules (2 volumes) of hydrogen  molecules.

 

  1. During the electrolysis, the concentration of the electrolyte (H2SO4 (aq), increases

 

Reasons:         The volumes of hydrogen and oxygen gas liberated are in the same ratio                as they are combined in water.

 

Thus the amount of water in the electrolyte progressively decrease; hence the increased electrolyte concentration.

 

Conclusion

 

Electrolysis of dilute sulphuric acid is thus the electrolysis of water.

 

Note:   The Hoffmans voltmeter can be used instead of the circuit above.  Viz.

 

 

 

 

Electrolysis of dilute sodium chloride

 

  1. i) Apparatus

 

 

 

  1. ii) Procedure
  • An electric current is passed through dilute sodium chloride solution; with carbon rods     as the electrodes.
  • Gases evolved of each  electrode  are collected and tested.

 

iii)       Observations

  • At the anode:
  • A colourless gas is collected
  • The gas relights a glowing  splint, and its volume is half the volume  of the gas collected at the cathode.
  • The gas is Oxygen, O2

 

  • At the Anode
  • A colourless gas collects
  • The gas burns with a pop sound; and its volume is twice the volume of the gas collected at the anode.
  • The gas is hydrogen gas;

 

  1. iv) Explanations
  • The Ions present in the electrolyte

 

 

 

  1. At the Anode
  • Cl and OH migrate to the anode
  • OH- are preferentially discharged – coz they have greater tendency to lose electrons than the chloride ions;  – the OH (aq)  lose electrons to form water and O2 (g) at anode.

 

Anode equations

 

 

  1. At the Cathode

–           The positively charged Na+ (aq) , and H+ (g)   migrate to the cathode

  • the H+(aq) are preferentially discharged.

 

Reason:          They  H+ (aq) have a greater tendency to gain electrons than Na+ (aq) ions

The H+ (aq) gain elect5rons to form Hydrogen atoms (H) which ten form molecules of hydrogen which bubble off at the electrode.

 

Cathode equations

 

 

  1. Conclusion

Ratio of the volumes of H2 (g) and O2 (g) evolved at cathode and anode is 2:1 respectively.

 

Electrolysis f dilute NaCl is thus the electrolyze of water since only water is decomposed.

 

 

 

  1. Electrolysis of Brine/concentrate sodium chloride.

 

  1. i) Apparatus

 

 

  1. ii) Procedure

An electric current is passed though concentrated sodium chloride/brinc

 

iii)       Observation

  1. a) At the Anode
  • A greenish – yellow gas is evolved.
  • The gas has a pungent irritating smell; and its volume is equal to the volume of the gas evolved at he cathode.
  • The gas is chlorine Cl2 (g)

 

  1. b) At the Cathode
  • A colourless gas is liberated
  • The gas burns with a pop sound; and its volume is equal to volume of gas evolved at the anode.
  • The gas is Hydrogen gas; H2 (g)

 

  1. iv) Explanations
  • The ions present in the electrolyte are:-
  • Na+ (aq) and Cl from sodium chloride
  • H+ (aq) and OH- (aq) from water.

 

  1. At the Anode
  • Cl (aq), and OH (aq), migrate to the anode
  • The chloride ions are preferentially discharged.

 

Reason;           –           OH (aq) have higher tendency to lose electrons  than Cl ions.

  • However coz of the higher concentration Cl (aq) , relative to OH (aq), the Cl (aq), are preferentially discharged hence the evolution of Chlorine gas.

 

  1. A the Cathode
  • Na+ (aq) and H+ (aq) migrate to the cathode.
  • H+ with a higher tendency to gain electrons are preferentially discharged; hence the evolution of hydrogen gas at the cathode.

 

NB:     1.         The pH of the electrolyte becomes alkaline/increases with time.

 

Reason:          The removal of H+ (aq) which come form water leaves excess                                              hydroxide ions  (OH (aq), hence the alkalinity.

 

  1. Evolution of chlorine gas at anode soon stops after sometime and is replaced by O2 (g)

 

Reason:          Evolution of Cl2 (g) decrease/lowers the concentration of Cl (aq) in                         the electrolyte.

                       

As soon as the Cl (aq) concentration  becomes equal to that of OH (aq)

 

The mercury cathode cell

 

Is an electrolytic arrangement commonly used for the large scale manufacture of chlorine and sodium hydroxide.

 

  1. i) Apparatus
  • Electrolyte in the mercury cell is Brine (concentrated NaCl)
  • Anode is carbon or titanium
  • Cathode is a moving mercury film.

 

 

  1. ii) Reactions
  2. At the Anode
  • Both Chloride and Hydroxide ions are attracted
  • Due to their high concentrations the chloride ions are preferentially discharged.
  • The Cl (aq) lose electrons to form Chlorine gas. (greenish yellow)

 

  1. Cathode (moving mercury)
  • The Na+ (aq) and H+ (aq) are attracted
  • The discharge of H+ (aq) is more difficult than expected
  • Hydrogen has a high over voltage at the moving mercury electrode and so sodium is discharged.

 

Equation

 

  • The discharged sodium atoms combine with mercury to form sodium amalgam

 

Equation

 

  • The sodium amalgam reacts with water to form sodium hydroxide, hydrogen and mercury.

 

Equation

 

  • Hydrogen is pumped out while the Mercury is recycled.
  • The resultant NaOH is of very high party.

 

 

Limitations/disadvantages of the Mercury Cathode cell.

 

  1. Its expensive due to the high cost of mercury.
  2. Pollution form Mercury; i.e. Mercury is poisonous and must be removed from the effluent.

 

 

  1. Electrolysis of Copper (II) Sulphate solution.

 

NOTE:            The products of electrolysis of copper (II) Sulphate solution depends on the nature of the elctrodes used.

 

  1. i) Apparatus

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Ions present in the elctrolyte:
  • From copper (II)  Sulphate

 

  • From water

 

  • During electrolysis

 

  1. Using carbon/platinum electrodes

 

iii)       Observations

 

  1. At the Anode:
  • A colourless gas is liberated
  • The gas relights a glowing splint; hence its oxygen.

 

  1. At the cathode
  • A reddish – brown coating (of Cu solid) is deposited.

 

  1. In the electrolyte
  • The blue colour of the solution (CuSO4) (aq) / becomes pale and finally colourless after a long time.

 

Reason:          The blue colour is due to Cu2+.  As the Cu2+ (aq) are continuously being                            discharged at the cathode; the concentration of CU 2+ decreases i.e. decrease in                     the concentration of Cu 2+ (aq) in the solution

 

The electrolyte become acidic/pH decreases (declines)

 

Reason:          Accumulation of H+ (aq) in the solution since only OH (from water) are being                         discharged (at the anode).

 

 

  1. iv) Explanation

 

At the anode

 

  • The SO 2- 4 (aq) and OH (aq) migrate to the anode.
  • The hydroxide ions have a higher tendency to lose electrons than the SO 2- 4 (aq)
  • They (OH) easily loose electrons to form the neutral and unstable hydroxide radical (OH)
  • The hydroxide radical (OH) decomposes to form water and Oxygen.

 

 

At the cathode

  • Copper ions and H+ (aq) migrate to the cathode
  • Cu2+ (aq) have a greater tendency to accept electrons than H+ (aq)
  • The Cu 2+ (aq) are thus reduced to form copper metal which is deposited as a red-brown coating on the cathode.

 

Cathode equation.

 

 

  1. Using copper rods electrodes

 

  1. observations

 

At the anode   –           Mass of the anode (Copper anode) decreases

 

At the cathode –           reddish – brown deposit

  • cathode increases in mass

 

Electrolyte – no apparent change

 

Note:   The gain in mass of the cathode is equal to the loss in mass of the anode.

 

Explanations

 

At the anode

–           The SO 2- 4(aq) and OH (aq) are attracted to the anode.

  • However, none of them is discharged;
  • Instead; the copper anode itself gradually dissolves; hence the loss in mass of the anode;

 

Reason:          it’s easier to remove electrons form the copper anode itself than format the                         hydroxide ions

 

At the cathode

 

  • H+ (aq) migrate to the cathode
  • The Cu 2+ (aq) are preferentially discharged; because they have a greater tendency to accept electrons
  • The copper cathode is thus coated with a reddish brown deposit of copper metal hence increase in mass.

 

 

Cathode equation

 

Factors affecting electrolysis  and electrolytic products.

 

  1. Electrochemical series
  • Electrolytic products at the anode and cathode during electrolysis depends on its position in the Electrochemical series.

 

Cations:          The higher  the cation in the electrochemical series; the lower the tendency of                     discharge at the cathode.

 

Reason:          Most electropositive cations require more energy in order to be reduced and                         therefore are more difficult to reduce.

 

Reduction order

 

 

Anions:           Discharge is through oxidation ad is as follows.

 

 

  1. Concentration of electrolytes

A cation or anion whose concentration is higher is preferentially discharge if the ions are close in the electrochemical series.

 

Example:  dilute and concentrated NaCl

 

Product at the anode.

 

 

  1. The electrodes used: Products obtained at electrodes depend on the types of electrodes used

 

Examples:      in the electrolysis of CuSO4 (aq) using carbon and copper rods separately.

 

 

 

APPLICATIONS OF ELECTROLYSIS

 

  1. Extraction of reactive metals

 

Reactive metals/elements like sodium, magnesium, aluminum are extracted form their compounds by electrolysis.

 

Example:        Sodium is extracted from molten sodium chloride using carbon                             electrodes.

 

  1. Purification of metals

 

It can be used in refining impure metals

 

Examples:      Refining copper

 

  • The impure copper is made of the anode.
  • Their strips of copper are used as the cathode
  • Copper (II) Sulphate are used as the electrolyte.

 

  • During the electrolysis the anode dissolves and pure copper is deposited on the cathode.

 

  • The impurities (including valuable amounts of silver and gold) from the crude copper collect as a sludge become the anode.

 

  1. Electroplating

 

Is the process of coating one metal with another, using electrolysis so as to reduce corrosion or to improve its appearance.

 

During electrolysis:

  • the item to be electroplated is made the cathode
  • the metal to be used in electroplating is used as the anode
  • the electrolyte is made from a solution containing the ions of the metal to be sued in electroplating.

 

Examples

  • Gold-plated watches; silver – plated utensils
  • Steel utensils marked EPNS. I.e. Electroplated Nickel Silver.

 

  1. Anodizing Aluminum

 

Is the reinforcement of the oxide coating on Aluminum utensils/articles

Is done by electrolysis of dilute sulphuric acid using Aluminum articles as anode.

 

Importance:   Prevention arrosion of Aluminum articles

 

  1. Manufacture of sodium hydroxide, chlorine and hydrogen

 

  • Sodium hydroxide is prepared by the electrolysis of brine, for which 3 methods are available
  • The method depends o the type of electrolytic cell.
  • These cells are
  • The mercury cell
  • The diaphragm cell
  • The membrane cell

 

  1. The mercury cell

 

  • Components
  • The electrolyte is concentrated sodium chloride
  • The anodes are made of graphite or titanium, which are placed above the cathode.
  • The cathode consists of mercury, which flows along the bottom of the cell.

 

 

 

Chemical reactions

 

Anode

 

  • Both chloride and hydroxide ions are attracted.
  • Chloride ions are preferentially discharged due to their high concentration
  • The chloride ions undergo oxidation to form green – yellow chlorine gas.

 

Equation

 

 

 

At the cathode (flowing mercury)

  • Na+ (aq) migrate to the cathode
  • Sodium ions are preferentially discharged.
  • They undergo reduction to form sodium solid.

 

Equation

 

  • the discharged sodium atoms combine  with mercury to form sodium diagram

 

Equation

 

 

  • The sodium amalgam is then passed into another reactor containing water.
  • The amalgam reacts with water forming hydrogen and sodium hydroxide.

 

The mercury is regenerated and it is recycled into the main cell.

–           Main product:                        Sodium hydroxide

–           By products:                           Sodium and chlorine.

 

Advantages of mercury cathode cell

  • The resultant sodium hydroxide is very pure; as it has no contamination from sodium chloride.
  • It is highly concentrated; e. about 50%.

 

Disadvantages

  • Some of the mercury said its way into the environment leading to mercury pollution; a common case of brain damage in humans.
  • At the operating temperatures (700C – 800C), mercury vapours escape into the atmosphere and cause irritation and destruction of lungs tissues.
  • Its operation requires highly skilled man power.

 

  1. Diaphragm cell

 

Components

  • An asbestos diaphragm; to separate the electrolytic cell into two compartments; thus preventing mixing of H2 and Cl2 molecules
  • The anode compartment contains a graphite rod.
  • The cathode compartment contains a stainless steel cathode.

 

 

Diagram

 

 

Chemical reactions

  • The asbestos diaphragm is permeable only to ions, but not to the hydrogen or chlorine molecules.
  • It thus prevents H2 (g) and Cl (g) form mixing and reacting to yield HCl (g)
  • It also separates NaOH and Cl2 which would otherwise react.

 

Chemical reactions

 

At the anode

  • Chloride ions undergo oxidation to form chlorine gas.

 

Equation

 

–           At the cathode

  • H= and Na+ (a) migrate to the cathode compartment.
  • The H+ are preferentially discharged.
  • They (H+ (aq) undergo reduction to form hydrogen gas.

 

 

Equation

 

  • the discharge of H+ causes more water molecules to dissociate, thus increasing the concentration of OH- in the solution.
  • therefore, the Na+ and OH- ions also react in the cathode compartment to form sodium hydroxide.

 

Equation

 

Advantage

  • Does not result into pollution

 

Disadvantage

  • The resultant NaOh is dilute (12% NaOH)
  • It is also not pure due to contamination with NaCl – (12% NaOH + 15% NaCl by mass.

 

Note:  –           The concentration of the NaOH can be increased by evaporating excess water,              during which NaCl with a lower solubility crystallizes out first, leaving NaOH at                      a higher concentration.

–           The solid NaCl (Crystals) are then filtered off.

  • This is a case of fractional crystallization.

 

 

 

 

  1. The membrane cell
  • Is divided into 2 compartments by a membrane
  • Most commonly used type of Membrane is the cation – exchange membrane.
  • This membrane type allows only cations to pass through it.

 

Components

  • A cation exchange that divides the cell into 2 compartments; an anode and a cathode compartments.
  • Both electrodes are made of graphite
  • The electrolyte in the anode compartment is purified brine
  • The electrolyte in the cathode compartment is pure water.

 

Diagram

 

Chemical reactions

 

The anode

 

Chloride ions undergo oxidation to form green – yellow chlorine gas.

 

The cathode

 

As current passes through the cell H+ and Na+ pass across the membrane to the cathode

  • H+ are preferentially discharged.
  • They undergo reduction to liberate hydrogen gas.

 

  • Continuos discharge of H+ leaves the OH- at a higher concentration

 

  • The OH- react with Na+ to form sodium hydroxide

 

Advantages

 

  1. Resultant sodium hydroxide is very pure, since it has no contamination from NaCl.
  2. The sodium hydroxide has a relatively high concentration; at about 30 – 35% NaOH by mass.

 

 

Uses of sodium hydroxide, chlorine, and hydrogen

 

  1. Sodium Hydroxide

 

  • React with chlorine to form sodium chlorate sodium hypochlorite or I, NaOCl. This is a powerful oxidising agent which is used for sterilization and bleaching in textiles, paper and textile industries.

 

i.e. 2NaOH (aq)  +   Cl2 (g)                                NaOCl (aq)  +  NaCl (g)  + H2O (l)

 

  • Manufacture of sodas, detergents and cosmetics.
  • Neutralization of acidic solutions in the laboratories.

 

  1. Hydrogen

 

  • For hydrogenation in the manufacture of margarine
  • Manufacture of ammonia
  • Production of hydrochloric acid

 

  1. Chlorine
  • Formation of sodium chlorate I; for bleaching in pulp, textile and paper industries.
  • Sewage and water treatment
  • Manufacture of polymers such as polyvinyl chloride.
  • Manufacture of pesticides.

 

QUANTITATIVE ASPECTS OF ELECTROLYSIS

 

Basic terminologies and concepts

 

  • Ampere

Is the standard unit used to measure an electric  current; the flow of electrons

Is usually abbreviated as amps.

 

  1. Coulomb

Is the quantity of electricity, when a current of 1 ampere flows for one second. I.e.  1 Coulomb = 1 Ampere x 1 second

Generally:

Quantity of     Electricity       =          current x Time in seconds

A         =          It; Where

Q         =          Quantity of electricity in coulombs

I           =          Current in Amperes

T          =          time in seconds

 

  1. Faraday

Is the quantity of electricity produced by one mole of electrons; and is usually a constant equivalent to 96487 (approx. 96500) coulombs

 

Faradays laws of Electrolysis.

First law;

The mass of substance liberated during electrolysis is directly proportional to the quantity of electricity passed.

 

Worked examples

  1. A current of 2.0 Amperes was passed through dilute potassium sulphate solution for  two minutes    using  inert electrodes.
  2. Write the equation for the reaction at anode.

 

 

  1. Work out the mass of the product formed at the cathode.  (H = 1.0, Faraday = 96,000 C)

Solution;         quantity of electricity =          current x time

=          2 x 2x 60

=          240 coulombs

cathode reaction

 

1 mole of electrons     =          96000 C

4 moles of e-   =          4 x 96000 C

=          384,000 C

 

 

  1. What mass of copper would be coated on the cathode from a solution of copper (II) Sulphate  by a current of 1 amp flowing for 30 minutes.

(Cu = 63.5;      Faraday constant = 96487 Cuo/-)

 

solution

 

Cathode  reaction

 

Cu 2+ (aq)       +          2e-                               Cu (s)

 

–           1 mole of Cu requires 2 moles of electrons

  • Quantity of electricity passed; = 1 x 30 x 60 coulombs; = 1800C
  • 1 mole of electrons carriers a charge of 96487 coulombs = 192974 coulombs
    • coulombs deposit 63.5 g of Cu.

 

Thus 1800 C will deposit   63.5 x 1800         =          0.592 grams

192974

 

  1. An element x has relative atomic mass of 88g. when a current of 0.5 amperes was passed through a solution of x chloride for 32 minutes, 10 seconds;  44 g  of x was deposited at the cathode.  (1 faraday = 96500 c)

Calculate  the charge on the ion of x.

 

 

  1. In the electrolysis of dil CuSO4 solution, a steady current of 0.20 Amperes was passed for 20 minutes. (1 Faraday = 96, 500 C Mol-, Cu = 64)

Calculate

  1. The number of Coulombs of electricity used

 

  1. The mass of the substance formed at the cathode.

2 moles of electrons liberate 1 mole of Cu.  i.e.  Cu 2+ + 2e                                     Cu (s)

 

  1. An element p has a relative atomic mass of 44. When a current of 0.5 Amperes was possed through a fused chloride of p for 32 minutes and 10 seconds; 0.22g of p were deposit

 

 

 

 

UNIT 5: METALS: EXTRACTION PROPERTIES AND USES.

Introduction:

  1. Introduction
  2. Extraction methods
  3. Concentration of the ores
  4. Metal extraction
  • Sodium metal
  • Main ores
  • Extraction process
  • Properties of sodium
  • Uses of sodium

 

  • Aluminium metal
  • Main ores
  • Qualitative analysis
  • Extraction from bauxite.
  • Electrolysis of purified bauxite
  • Properties of aluminium
  • Uses of aluminium

 

  • Zinc metal
  • Main ores
  • Qualitative analysis
  • Extraction process
  • By oxidation
  • By electrolysis
  • Properties of zinc
  • Uses of zinc

 

  • Iron metal
  • Main ores
  • Qualitative analysis
  • Extraction from haematite
  • Properties of iron
  • Uses of iron

 

  • Copper metal
  • Main ores
  • Qualitative analysis
  • Extraction process from copper pyrites
  • Properties of copper
  • Uses of copper

 

  • Lead metal
  • Main ores
  • Extraction process
  • Properties of lead
  • Uses of lead

Introduction:

Only most unreactive metals occur naturally in their elementary form.

Examples: – Gold, Silver, Platinum.

– Other elements occur as ores i.e. metal – bearing rocks.

Examples:

– Oxides

– Sulphides

– Carbonates

– Chlorides.

 

Note:
An ore is a mineral deposit with reasonable composition of a desired metal.

 

Methods of Extraction

Depend on position of the metal in the reactivity series.

– Main methods are:

  1. Electrolytic Method:

– Used for metals high up in the reactivity series

E.g. – Sodium and Potassium

– Calcium and Magnesium

– Aluminium.

– These metals occur in very stable ores

 

  1. Reduction method:

– For less reactive metals.

E.g. Iron, Zinc, and Copper.

 

– Is achieved using;

(i) Carbon in form of coke.

(ii) Carbon (II) oxide

(iii) Hydrogen

– Oxidation is also used followed by reduction.

 

Preliminary steps before extraction.

– Minerals (mineral) are usually mined with several impurities which lower the concentration of the metal per given mass or volume.

– Thus the ore is first concentrated before the actual extraction.

– Concentration is possible due to difference in properties between the mineral compound and the earthy materials.

 

Methods of ore concentration.

  1. Physical methods.

(a). Optical sorting.

– Used to separate ore particles that have sufficiently different colours to be detected by the naked eye.

– It involves physical handpicking of the desired particles.

– Mainly used for minerals containing transition elements such as chromium.

 

 

 

(b). Hydraulic washing.

– Also called sink and float separation.

– Utilizes the difference in density between the minerals and the unwanted materials

– The ore is washed with streams of water.

– The denser ore particles will sink to the bottom of the washing container and can then be collected.

– Examples in ores of tin and lead.

 

(c). Magnetic separation.

– Is used when either the ore particles or the earthy materials (unwanted materials) are magnetic.

– A strong magnet is used to attract the magnetic components and leaving the non-magnetic materials behind.

– Examples: in ores like magnetite (Fe3O4) and chromite which are magnetic.

 

(d). Electrostatic separation.

– Used to separate particles which have different electric charges.

– The particles are subjected into an electric field.

– The oppositely charged particles follow different paths and can then be separated.

 

(e). Froth floatation

– Is mainly use for sulphide ores.

– Takes advantage of two facts.

  • Oil can wet the surfaces of ores.
  • Oil floats on water

The process:

– The ore is ground into a fine powder; to increase the surface area for upcoming reactions.

– It is then mixed with water and a suitable oil detergent e.g pine or eucalyptus;

– The mixture is then agitated by blowing compressed air through it;

– Small air bubbles attach to the oiled ore particles; which are thenn buoyed up and carried to the surface where they float.

– A froth rich in mineral is formed at the top while impurities sink at the bottom.

– The froth is skimmed off and dried.

– Froth floatation process is used for copper, lead and zinc metals;

 

Diagram: froth floatation apparatus.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Chemical concentration.

– Involves the use of chemical reactions to concentrate the ores.

Examples:

– Bauxite, the main aluminium ore is chemically concentrated by a process known as Bayer’s process.

– This takes advantage of the amphoteric nature of aluminium oxide, which can thus react with both acids and bases.

– Chemical concentration can also be done by leaching.

– This involves reacting the ore with a compound such as sodium cyanide;

– The cyanide ions form complex ions with the metal.

– The complex ions formed are water soluble, and can be separated by filtration, leaving the unwanted materials in the residue.

 

 

The metals

  1. Sodium

Main ores;

  1. Rock salt / sodium chloride; NaCl
  2. Chile saltpetre / sodium Nitrate; NaNO3

iii. Soda ash/sodium carbonate; Na2CO3.

 

Other ores include;

(i). Borax; Na2B4O7.10H2O

(ii). Sodium Sulphate, Na2SO4;

 

Extraction;

– Sodium is obtained by the electrolysis of fused sodium chloride in the electrolytic cell.

– Calcium chloride and calcium fluoride are added to the electrolyte.

Reasons;

– To lower the melting point of sodium chloride from 800oC to 600oC;

 

– Once molten, the electrical resistance within the cell is sufficient to maintain the temperature without external heating.

Steel or iron is used as the cathode, while carbon/graphite is used as the anode.

– Thus steel is not used as the anode.

Reason;

– At high temperatures, steel would react with chloride formed at the anode, but graphite is inert even at high temperatures.

 

– Steel wire gauze separates the electrodes.

Reason;

– To prevent products of electrolysis (sodium and chlorine) from mixing and reacting to form sodium chloride.

 

– The electrolytic apparatus used in sodium extraction is called the Downs cell.

 

Diagram: The Downs cell.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– During electrolysis, fused sodium chloride dissociates according to the equation;

 

NaCl(l)                        Na+(l) +Cl(l)

 

At the cathode:

  • Observation;

– Soft silvery metal

 

Explanation

– Na+ ions are attracted and undergo reduction (accept electrons) to form/ produce molten sodium metal.

 

Equation;

Na+(l) + e                      Na(l)

 

– Molten sodium is lighter than fused sodium chloride and floats on the surface where it overflows into a separate container / sodium reservoir.

 

Note;

– The resultant sodium is usually collected in liquid / molten state, floating on top of the electrolyte.

Reasons;

– Less dense than molten sodium chloride

– Has a low melting point.

 

At the anode;

Observations;

– Evolution of a green-yellow gas.

 

Explanation:

– Chlorine gas is evolved as a by – product and collected separately.

– Negatively charged Cl ions migrate to the positive anode and undergo oxidation to form chlorine gas;

 

Equation:

2Cl(l)                    Cl2(g) + 2e-

 

 

Properties of Sodium;

– Is a soft silvery metal with low density; 0.979gcm-3

– Has a low melting point, 97oC, and a low boiling point of 883oC.

 

Chemical reactions

(a) With air

– Na is very reactive and tarnishes in moist air to form an oxide layer.

4Na(s)+ O2(g)                2Na2O(s);

 

– The oxide layer reacts with more air moisture to form hydroxide

Na2O(s) + CO2 (g)                  Na2CO3(s) + H2O(l)

 

Note

– Due to those series of reactions sodium is stored under a liquid hydrocarbon e.g. petroleum, kerosene.

 

– Sodium burns in oxygen with a golden yellow flame to form sodium peroxide

Equation:

2Na(s) + O2(g)                         Na2O2(s)

(White)

 

(b). With water

– Na reacts vigorously with water to form NaOH and Hydrogen.

Equation:

2Na(s) + 2H2O(l)                       2NaOH(aq) + H2(g)

 

– The resulting solution is highly alkaline with a PH of 14.

– Sodium is stored under oil to prevent contact with moisture from the atmosphere.

Note:

– The reaction between Na and dilute acids would be explosive and not safe to investigate

 

(c). With chlorine

– Sodium burns in chlorine gas;

2Na(s) + Cl2(g)                    2NaCl(s)

 

(d) With ammonia gas;

– Sodium forms hydrogen and a solid;

2Na(s) + NH3(g)                    2NaNH2(s) + H2(g)

            Sodamide

And;

NaNH2(s) + H2O(l)                    NaOH(aq) + NH3(g)

 

Uses of sodium;

  1. Is alloyed with lead in the preparation tetraethyl (IV) lead, which is added to petrol as an anti-knock.
  2. Provides the glow in sodium vapours lamps, for street lighting (orange-yellow street lights).
  3. Is an excellent conductor of heat and electricity with low melting point hence used;
  • In nuclear reactors to conduct away heat.
  • Modern aeroplane engines.
  1. Manufacture of sodium peroxide, and sodium cyanide used in the extraction of silver and gold.

 

Question;

– Although electrolysis is an expensive way of obtaining metals, it must be used for some metals. Explain.

Solution;

– Group 1 and 2 metals together with Al are themselves such powerful reducing agents that their oxides cannot be reduced by chemical reducing agents.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Worked example

  1. Below is a simplified diagram of the Downs cell in which sodium metal is manufactured.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) (i) Identify; –

Electrolyte X: – Molten sodium chloride

Gas Y: -Chlorine gas

 

(ii) Write an equation for the reaction at the cathode.

Na+(l) + e-                      Na(l).

 

(iii). In what state is sodium collected?

– Molten state/liquid state.

 

(iv). Give two properties of Na that makes it possible to be collected as in (b) (iii) above.

– Its less dense than molten sodium chloride.

– Has a low melting point.

 

(v). The cathode is made of steel but the anode is made of graphite.

Why is this yet steel is a better conductor?

– At high temperature steel would react with chlorine formed but graphite is inert even at high temperatures.

 

(vi). In this process, the naturally occurring, raw material is usually mixed with another compound. Identify the compound and state its use.

Compound; – Calcium chloride

Use;-To lower melting point of Nacl2 from 800oc to 600oc

 

(vii). What is the function of the steel gauze cylinder?

– Prevents sodium reacting with chlorine forming NaCl

 

(viii). Give one industrial use of sodium

– A coolant in nuclear reactors;

– Alloy with lead in tetraethyl (IV) lead;

 

(ix). Explain why sodium metal is stored under paraffin;

– Keep it out of air; reacts very fast with air forming a dull surface.

– Can react with water.

 

(b). State an industry that can be built next to a sodium extracting plant.

 

(c). A current of 100 Amperes flows through an electrolyte of molten sodium chloride for 15 hours. Calculate the mass of sodium produced in kg (Na = 23; 1F = 96500C)

Solution:

Q = It

=100 x 15 x 60 x 60

=5400000C.

Cathode equation

Na+(l) + e                     Na(l)

 

96500C = 23g of Na

5400000 C =23 x 5400000 =1287.04g

96500

=1.287kg

 

(d) .For the same quantity of electricity as in (c) above ; calculate the volume of the gaseous product produced in the cell at 150c and 800mmhg.(Molar gas volume at s.t.p = 22.4dm3)

 

 

  1. Aluminium

– Forms 7% of the earth’s crust and is the most common metal.

 

Main ores;

– Bauxite; Al2O3.H2O

– Mica; K2Al2S6016.

– China clay;Al2S2O72H2O

– Corundum;Al2O3.

 

Chemical test;

– Crush the ore into a fine powder;

– Add dilute nitric (V) acid to the powder

– Filter to obtain a solution of the ore;

– To a solution of the ore add NaOH(aq) dropwise till in excess, and then repeat the same procedure using Ammonia solution, NH4OH.

 

Observations:

  • With NaOH(aq):

– White precipitate in soluble in excess;

 

  • With NH4OH(aq):

– White precipitate insoluble in excess;

 

Extraction from Bauxite;

-Involves two main processes;-

  • Purification of Bauxite.
  • Electrolysis of purified bauxite (alumina)

 

  1. Purification of bauxite

– Chief impurities are small quantities of silica and iron (III) oxide.

– The oxide ore is ground and treated under pressure/ dissolved in hot aqueous sodium hydroxide.

 

During the process;

– The amphoteric bauxite dissolves in NaOH forming sodium aluminate;

Equation:

2NaOH(aq) + Al2O3.3H2O(s)                      2NaAl(OH)4(aq).

 

Ionically:

Al2O3(s) + 2OH(aq) + 3H2O(l)                           2[Al(OH)4](aq);

 

– Silica impurities also dissolve forming sodium silicate

Equation:

SIO2(s) + 2NaOH(aq)                       Na2SIO3(aq) + H2O(l)

 

– The iron impurities (mainly iron (III) oxide) DO NOT dissolve.

– This mixture is then filtered, during which iron (III) oxide remain as residue of red mud while a filterate of sodium aluminate and sodium silicate is collected.

– Carbon (IV) oxide is bubbled through the filterate, followed by dilution then addition of a little aluminium hydroxide to cause precipitation (seeding) of Aluminium hydroxide.

Ionically:

2[Al(OH)4](aq) + CO2(g)                         2Al(OH)3(s) + H2O(l);

 

Seeding

Al(OH)3

Alternatively:

Al(OH)4(aq)                               2Al(OH)3(s) + OH(aq);

 

General equation:

NaAlO2(aq) + 2H2O(l)    hydrolysis  NaOH(aq) + Al(OH)3(s).

 

– The precipitated Aluminium hydroxide is then filtered off, washed and ignited to give pure aluminium oxide (Alumina);

Equation:

2Al(OH)3(s)                        Al2O3(s) + 3H2O(l)

Alumina

 

  1. Electrolysis of purified bauxite (alumina)

The Alumina (Al2O3), has a high melting point, 2015oC and a lot of heat would be required to melt it.

– Additionally the molten compound is a very poor conductor of electricity.

– Consequently, cryolite (Na3AlF6) is mixed with the oxide.

Reason;

– To lower the melting temperature of Al2O3 from 2015oC to around 800oC;

– At this lower temperature the molten oxide also conducts well.

 

– The molten alumina mixed with bauxite is then electrolysed in a steel cell lined with carbon graphite as the cathode.

Note;

– Other than being an electrolyte the graphite cathode lining also prevents alloy formation, as it ensures no contact between the resultant aluminium and the steel tank;

-The anodes also made of Graphite dip into the steel tank at intervals.

Diagram: electrolytic steel cell for the extraction of Aluminium.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Electrolytic reactions;

– The Aluminium oxide dissociates to give constituent ions;

Equation:

Al2O3(l)                          2Al3+(l)  +3O2-(l)

At the cathode;

Observation;

– A silvery white metal which quickly becomes dulled.

 

Explanation:

– Aluminium ions move to the cathode and are reduced to form aluminium metal.

 

Equation;

2Al3+(l) + 6e-                2Al(l)

 

At the anode;

Observation;

– Effervescence of a colourless gas.

 

Explanations:

– Oxygen ions migrate to the anode and get oxidized to form oxygen gas.

– The resultant oxygen gas reacts further with the graphite anode to form carbon (IV) oxide.

– This is due to the high temperatures involved during the process.

Note;

– Consequently the carbon anode should be replaced from time to time.

 

Equations;

3O2-(l)                 3O2(g) + 6e-

Then;

C(s) (anode) + O2(g)                        CO2(g)

 

Note:

– Cryolite usually adds Na+; and F ions into the electrolyte.

– Thus the anions are O2- and F ions into the electrolyte.

– However oxygen is discharged in preference to Fluorine.

Reason;

– Fluorine is a stronger oxidizing agent than oxygen. Thus oxygen easily gives electrons than fluorine, hence discharge.

– Aluminium is discharged in preference to sodium.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Summary: – Flow chart on the Extraction of Aluminium from bauxite.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Properties of Aluminium

Physical properties

– Is a silvery white metal which quickly becomes dulled with a thin oxide layer.

– Has very low density (2.7gcm-3), with ability to be rolled into wires / foil.

– Is a good conductor of heat and electricity.

 

Chemical properties.

  1. Reaction with air;

– In air it acquires a continuous very thin coating of oxide, which resists further reaction.

– Removal of this protective cover renders the metal reactive.

– Consequently steel wool or wood ash should NOT be used in aluminium utensils.

– Usually, salty water attacks the oxide film allowing the aluminium to corrode and for this reason, ordinary aluminium is not used for marine purposes.

– Aluminium will burn in air at 800oC to form is oxide and nitrate.

Equations:

4Al(s) + 3O2(g)        2Al2O3(s);

2Al(s)­ + N2(g)                    2AlN(s)

 

  1. Reaction with Acids.

Note:

– The protective Aluminium oxide (being covalent and insoluble) layer makes its reactivity with acids less than expected.

 

  • With nitric (V) acid;

– Has hardly any effect on the metal, at any concentration.

Reason:

– Being a powerful oxidizing agent, it simply thickens the oxide layer thereby preventing further reaction.

 

  • With sulphuric (VI) acid;

– Only hot concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid breaks down the oxide layer and reacts with the metal.

Equation:

2Al(s) + 6H2SO4(l)                  Al2(SO4)3(aq) + 6H2O(l)  + 3SO2(g)

 

  • With Hydrochloric acid;

– Dilute HCl dissolves aluminium slowly; liberating hydrogen.

Equation:

2Al(s) + 6HCl(l)            2AlCl3(aq) + 3H2(g)

With concentrated HCl the rate of reaction is increased.

 

  1. Reaction with chlorine;

– Hot aluminium burns in chlorine gas with a white light, forming dense white fumes of Aluminium (III) Chloride.

-The white fumes cool and collect on the cooler parts of the apparatus as a white solid.

Equation:

2Al(s) + 3Cl2(g)                     2AlCl3(g)

 

Note:

– The apparatus for the preparation of AlCl3 is kept very dry.

Reason:

– Aluminium chloride is readily/easily hydrolysed by water/moisture, and so it fumes in damp air with the evolution of hydrogen chloride gas.

Equation:

AlCl3(s) + 3H2O(l)                     Al(OH)3(s)+3HCl(g)

 

  1. Reaction with water.

– Aluminium does not react with cold water, due to the formation of an insoluble coating of Aluminium oxide.

Note;

– If the oxide film is removed, the metal reacts slowly with cold water.

 

  1. Reaction with caustic soda.

– The metal, especially in powder form, reacts with caustic soda solution, liberating hydrogen and leaving sodium aluminate in solution.

– The reaction is exothermic and once started, it is very vigorous.

Equation:

2NaOH(aq) + 2Al(s) + 2H2O(s)                       2NaAlO2(aq) + 3H2(g)

 

Ionically:

2Al(s) + 2OH(aq) + 2H2O(l)                         2AlO-2(g)  + 3H2(g)

Note:

– Thus aluminium has an amphoteric nature as it reacts with both acids and alkalis.

Uses of aluminium

  1. Making parts of airplanes, railway, trucks, buses, tankers, furniture, and car e.t.c.

Reason;

– It is Very light due to a very low density.

 

  1. Making cooking vessels/ utensils such as sufurias.

Reason:

– It is a good conductor of heat and electricity.

– It is not easily corroded by cooking liquids due to the unreactive coating of aluminium oxide.

 

  1. Making overhead cables

Reason:

– It is a good conductor of electricity.

– It is light hence can easily be supported by poles and ductile to be rolled into wires (cables).

 

  1. Aluminium powder mixed with oil is used as a protective paint.

 

  1. Making Aluminium foils due to its high malleability. The foil is used in cooking; packaging and for milk bottle tops.

 

  1. Making alloys, which have high tensile strength and yet light.

Examples:

 

Alloy Component
Duralumin Aluminium, copper, manganese and magnesium
Magnalium Aluminium (70%) and magnesium (30%)

 

  1. As a reducing agent in the Thermite process in the production of some elements such as chromium, cobalt manganese and titanium.

Example:

Cr2O3(s) + 2Al(s)                       2Cr(s) + Al2O3(s)

 

Note:

  • The thermite process

Is a process of reducing oxides of metals which are ordinarily difficult to reduce using Aluminium powder.

 

Examples:

  • Iron (III) Oxide (Fe2O3)
  • Chromium (III) Oxide (Cr2O3)
  • Compound oxide of manganese (Mn3O4)

 

– The oxide and the Al powder are well mixed together, forming Thermite.

– The thermite is ignited using magnesium ribbon fuse, since the reaction will not start at low temperatures.

– The high heat of formation of Aluminium oxide , results into a vigorous exothermic reaction that leads to a molten metal.

 

Example: -In the reduction of chromium (III) Oxide.

Cr2O3(s) + 2Al(s)                         2Cr(l) + Al2O3(s) + Heat.

 

Sample question:

 

  1. Zinc

Main ores;

(i). Zinc blende; ZnS

(ii). Calamine; ZnCO3.

 

Extraction:

– Is done by electrolysis or reduction of its oxide using carbon.

 

Preliminary steps:

– The ore is first concentrated by froth floatation.

– The ore is roasted in air to convert it to the oxide.

Equations:

  • From Zinc blende:

2ZnS(s) + 3O2(g)                 2ZnO(s) + 2SO2(g)

 

  • From Calamine:

ZnCO3(s)                          ZnO(s) + CO2(g)

 

– After obtaining the oxide the metal is extracted by either reduction or reduction:

 

(a). The reduction method.

– The oxide is mixed with coke and limestone and heated in a furnace.

 

Diagram: Furnace for zinc extraction by reduction:

 

 

– The limestone (CaCO3) decomposes to liberate CO2 which is then reduced by coke to form carbon (II) oxide.

 

Equations:

Heat

 

 

CaCO3(s)                      CaO(s) + CO2 (g)

Then:

CO2 (g) + C(s)                 2CO (g)

 

– The resultant carbon (II) oxide and coke are the reducing agents in the furnace, at about 1400oC.

– They reduce the oxide to the metal; which is liberated in vapour form.

 

Equations:

  • ZnO(s) + C(s)                      Zn (g)  + CO (g)
  • ZnO(s) + CO(s)                       Zn (g)  + CO2 (g)

– At the furnace temperatures zinc exists in vapour form, and leaves at the top of the furnace.

– Liquid zinc being lighter settles above molten lead and is run off;

– The vapour is condensed in a spray of molten lead to prevent re-oxidation of zinc.

– The resultant zinc is 98-99% pure and can be further purified by distillation.

– SO2 is a by-product and is the main source of pollution in the extraction of zinc.

– Usually it is channeled to a contact process plant for the manufacture of sulphuric acid.

– Alternatively it can be scrubbed off to prevent pollution of the environment.

– Less volatile impurities remain in the furnace.

– The silica impurities combine with the quicklime/ calcium oxide (CaO) from limestone to form calcium silicate.

 

Equation:

CaO(s)  + SiO(s)                             CaSiO3(s)

 

– The silicates together with other less volatile impurities form slag, at the bottom of the furnace from where it is run off.

 

Summary: Flow chart and the extraction of zinc

 

                            Sulphur (IV) oxide                  Coke and limestone                       CO2 and excess CO(g)

ZnO(s)

 

 

 

 

ZnS (ore)

 

 

 

                                                                                                                                                             Zinc + impurities

Separation chamber
      Slag

 

 

                                     Air

 

 

 

                                                                                                                                                             Zinc liquid (pure)

 

 

 

 

 

(b). Electrolytic extraction of zinc.

– Zinc metal is obtained from the oxide via a series of steps:

 

Step I: Preparation of electrolyte:

– The ZnO obtained from roasting the ore is converted to zinc sulphate by reacting it with dilute sulphuric (VI) acid.

 

Equation:

ZnO(s) + H2SO4(aq)                           ZnSO4(aq) + H2O(l)

 

– Any lead (II) oxide impurity present in the zinc oxide reacts with the acid to form lead (II) sulphate.

Equation:

PbO(s) + H2SO4(aq)                          PbSO4(s) + H2O(l)

 

– The insoluble lead (II) sulphate is then precipitated and separated by filtration;

– The zinc sulphate is then dissolved in water and the solution electrolysed.

 

Step II: The electrolytic process:

Electrolyte:

– Zinc (II) sulphate solution;

 

Ions present:

– Zn2+ and H+ as cations; and SO42- and OH as anions;

 

Cathode:

Lead containing 1% silver.

 

Anode:

– Aluminium sheets;

 

Chemical reactions:

Cathode:

Observations:

– Deposits of a grey solid.

 

Explanations:

– Zn2+ and H+ migrate to the cathode.

– The Zn2+ are discharged in preference to H+;

Reason:

– The cathode is relatively reactive. Thus since zinc is more reactive thn hydrogen, its ions undergo reduction faster;

 

Equation:

Zn2+(aq) + 2e-                     Zn(s);

 

Note:

If graphite electrodes were used, hydrogen gas would have been evolved instead;

 

 

Anode:

Observations:

– Evolution of a colourless gas that relights a glowing splint;

 

Explanations:

– OH and SO42- migrate to the cathode.

– The OH are discharged in preference to SO42-; giving off oxygen gas

Reason:

The OH ions have a higher oxidation potential than SO42- and therefore easily giving electrons for reduction at the cathode

 

Equation:

4OH(aq)                             2H2O(l) + O2(g) + 4e-

 

Note:

– Over 80% of zinc is extracted by the electrolytic method.

– Zinc extracted by the electrolytic method is much more pure.

 

Note: – Industrial plants that can be set up near the zinc extraction plant.

– Contact process plant, to make use of the SO2 by-product.

– Lead accumulators factories, to utilize the zinc produced.

– Paper factory using, SO3 and hence SO2 in bleaching.

– Brass factory for alloying zinc and copper.

– Steel factory to use zinc in galvanization.

 

Properties of zinc

Physical properties

– Is a blue-grey lustrous metal with:

  • Density of 7.1gcm-3
  • Melting point of 420oC
  • Boiling point of 907oC

 

Chemical reactions

(a). with air;-

– Zinc tarnishes slowly forming a protective layer which prevents further reaction i.e. oxide layer or basic carbonate.

 

Equations:

2Zn(s) + O2(g)                           2ZnO(s)

Then;

ZnO(s) + CO2(g)                    ZnCO3(s)

 

– It burns with a blue-green flame when strongly heated in air to form an oxide which is yellow when hot and white when cold.

Equation:

2Zn(s) + O2(g)                          2ZnO(s)

 

 

 

(b). With water

– Zinc does not react with water

– Steam reacts with red-hot zinc, forming zinc oxide and liberating hydrogen gas.

Equation:

Zn(s) + H2O(g)                          ZnO(s) + H2(g)

 

(c). with dilute acids

– Zinc is above hydrogen in the reactivity series hence displaces hydrogen from steam (water) and dilute acids like H2SO4 and HCl.

Equation:

Zn(s) + 2H+(aq)                            Zn2+(aq) + H2(g)

 

– Pure zinc reacts slowly while impure zinc reacts faster/ more quickly.

– Copper (II) sulphate is used as a catalyst to speed up the reaction.

 

(d). Concentrated acids.

(i). Concentrated sulphuric (VI) acid.

Equation:

Zn(s) + 2H2SO4(l)                        ZnSO4(aq) + 2H2O(l) + SO2(g)

 

(ii). 50% concentrated nitric (v) acid.

– It reacts with 50% concentrated nitric (V) acid to liberate nitrogen (II) oxide.

Equation:

3Zn(s) + 8HNO3(l)                        Zn(NO3)2(aq) + 2H2O(l) + 2NO(g)

 

(iii). Concentrated nitric (V) acid.

– It reduces concentrated nitric (V) acid to nitrogen (IV) oxide.

Equation:

Zn(s) + 4HNO3(l)                        Zn(NO3)2(aq) + 4H2O(l) + 2NO2(g)

 

(e). with alkalis.

– Zinc is amphoteric and dissolves in hot alkalis to give the zincate ion and hydrogen gas.

Equation:

Zn(s) + 2OH(aq) + 2H2O(l)                          H2(g) + [Zn(OH)4]2-(aq)

 (Zincate ion)

(f). Other reactions.

(i). Zinc burns in chlorine to give zinc chloride

Zn(s) + Cl2(g)                       ZnCl2(s)

(ii). Zinc combines with sulphur

Zn(s) + S(s)                      2ZnS(s)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Uses of zinc:

  1. Galvanization of iron sheets to prevent corrosion and rusting.

Note:

Rusting does not occur even when galvanized iron sheets are scratched and exposed.

Reason:

– The rest of the zinc protects the iron from rusting. This is because zinc being more reactive gets oxidized in preference to iron, and is hence “sacrificed” in the protection of iron.

– This method is referred to as cathodic or sacrificial protection.

  1. Making brass; an alloy of copper and zinc.
  2. Making outer casings of dry batteries;
  3. Die-castings contain zinc and aluminium, and are used for making radio and car parts;
  4. Zinc cyanide is used for refining silver and gold;

 

Sample question:

 

  1. Iron

– Is the second most abundant metal after aluminium, forming about 7% of the earth’s crust.

 

Main ores

– Haematite, Fe2O3;

– Magnetite, Fe3O4;

– Siderite, FeCO3;

 

Qualitative analysis for presence copper in an ore sample.

– Crush the ore into fine powder;

– Add dilute nitric (V) acid to the ore, to dissolve the oxide filter to obtain the filtrate.

– To the filtrate add aqueous sodium hydroxide / ammonium hydroxide dropwise till in excess.

– Formation of a red brown / brown precipitate in both cases indicates presence of Fe3+

 

Extraction from haematite (Fe2O3).

Summary of the process

The ore-haematite is crushed and mixed with coke and limestone.

– The mixture is called charge.

– The charge is loaded into the top of a tall furnace called blast furnace.

– Hot air-the blast is pumped into the lower part of the furnace.

– The ore is reduced to iron as the charge falls through the furnace.

– A waste material called slag is formed at the same time.

– The slag floats on the surface of the liquid iron produced.

– Each layer can be tapped off separately.

 

Details of the extraction process.

(i) The blast furnace

Is a tall, somewhat conical furnace usually made of silica and lined on the inside with firebrick.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Details of the extraction process

Raw materials.

– Iron ore; i.e. haematite

– Coke; C

– Limestone; CaCO3;

– Hot air;

 

Conditions

– Temperature at the bottom of furnace, 1400-1600oC

– Temperature at the top of the furnace, 400oC

 

Reactions and processes

Step-1 – crushing and loading

– The ore is crushed into powder form, to increase the surface area for the upcoming reduction/ redox reactions.

– It is then mixed with coke and limestone and then fed at the top of the furnace using the double bell (double-cone devise) changing system

Note:

– The double bell charging system ensures that the furnace can be fed continuously from the top with very little heat loss, by preventing any escape of hot gases.

– This in turn reduces production costs.

 

Step 2: -Pre heating of the blast furnace.

– Air that has been preheated to about 700oC is blown/ fed into the base of the blast furnace through small pipes called tuyers.

– This provides the required temperatures for the reactions in the blast furnace.

– This results into highest temperatures, about 1600oC at the hearth (bottom of the furnace) which then decreases upwards the furnace.

 

Step 3: -Generation of reducing agents.

– Two reducing agents are used in this process: Coke and carbon (II) oxide; with carbon (II) oxide being the main reducing agent.

 

(i). Oxidation of coke;

– Coke burns in the blast at the bottom of the furnace.

– The reaction temperatures is about 1600oC and the product is Carbon (IV) oxide gas

– This reaction is exothermic, producing a lot of heat in the blast furnace.

 

Equation:

C(s) + O2(g)                CO2(g)

 

(ii). Decomposition of limestone;

– The limestone in the charge decomposes in the blast furnace to calcium oxide (Quicklime) and carbon dioxide.

 

Heat

Equation:

CaCO3(s)                           CaO(s) + CO2(g)

 

 

– The calcium oxide will be used in the removal of the main ore impurity/ silicates/ silica in the form of silicon (IV) oxide.

– The CO2 then moves up the blast furnace to regenerate carbon (II) oxide, the chief reducing agent.

 

(iii). Production of carbon monoxide

– The CO2 from oxidation of coke and decomposition of limestone (calcium carbonate) react with (excess) coke, to form carbon (II) oxide

– The reaction occurs higher up in the blast furnace at about 700oC;

 

Equation:

CO2(g) + C(s)               2CO(g)

 

Step 4: The actual reduction process

– Reduction of the ore is by either CO or coke, depending on temperatures.

 

(i). Reduction by coke

– This occurs much lower down the furnace at higher temperatures of about 800oC and above.

– This reaction is ordinarily slow and thus serves to only reduce the part of the ore reduced by CO at lower temperatures in the upper parts of the furnace.

 

Equation:

2Fe2O3(s) + 3C(s)                   4Fe(s) + CO2(g)

 

Note:

– The resultant CO2 is quickly reduced to CO by the white-hot coke to more carbon (II) oxide as per step 3(iii) above.

 

(ii). Reduction by carbon (II) oxide

– This is the main reducing agent.

– The reaction between CO and Fe2O3 is relatively faster and occurs at lower temperatures of 500oC-700oC, higher up the furnace.

 

Equation:

Fe2O3(s) + 3CO (g)                           2Fe(s) + CO2 (g)

 

– The resultant carbon (IV) oxide is also quickly recycled by being reduced to CO by coke to from more reducing agent

 

(iii). Melting

– The iron produced in both of the reduction processes is in solid state.

– As the iron drops / falls down the furnace, it melts as it passes through the melting zone/ molten zone (1500oC-1800oC)

– The molten iron runs to the bottom of the furnace.

– Temperatures at the hearth (bottom of the furnace) is maintained at approx. 1400oC and yet pure iron melts at about 1525oC.

– Consequently the molten iron would easily solidify at the base (Temp =1400oC)

– However this is not usually the case;

Reason:

-Impurities absorbed by iron during melting (mainly carbon) reducing the melting point to below 1400oC.

– The molten iron is then easily tapped off.

 

Step 5: -Removal of earthy impurities.

– The earthy impurities in the ore (mainly silica) react with calcium oxide from decomposition of limestone to form calcium silicate.

 

Equation:

CaO(s) + SiO2(s)                     CaSiO3(s)

 

– These earthy impurities form molten slag whose main component is calcium silicate.

– The slag does not mix with iron but rather floats on top of it, at the base of the furnace.

 

Importance of the slag

– As it floats on top of molten iron it protects it from being re-oxidized by the incoming hot air.

 

Uses/application of the slag

  1. Light-weight building material.
  2. Manufacture of cement.
  3. Road building material.

 

Step 6:- Removal of furnace (waste) gases.

– Hot unreacted/waste gases leave at the top of the furnace.

– Main components include Nitrogen, unreacted CO2, unreacted CO, oxygen and Argon (Noble gases)

– Additionally they contain dust particles.

Note:

– Upon removal of dust particles, the furnace gases, being hot can be used to pre-heat the air blown in at the base.

 

Summary: flow chart for the extraction of iron.

 

Properties of iron:

Physical properties:

– It has a melting point of 420oC and a boiling point of 907oC;

– Have a good thermal and electrical conductivity;

– It is ductile and malleable;

 

Chemical properties.

(i). Reaction with air.

– It readily rusts in presence of moist air hydrated brown iron (III) oxide; Fe2O3.H2O(s)

Equation:

4Fe(s) + 2H2O (l) + 3O2 (g)                          2Fe2O3.H2O (l)

 

– When heated it reacts with oxygen to form tri-iron tetroxide; Fe3O4;

Equation:

 

3Fe(s) + 2O2 (g)                             Fe3O4(s)

 

(ii). Reaction with water.

– It does not readily react with cold water.

– It however reacts with steam liberating hydrogen gas and forming tri-iron tetroxide.

Equation:

3Fe(s) + 4H2O(g)                          Fe3O4(s) + 4H2(g)

 

(iii). Reaction with chlorine.

– Hot iron glows in chlorine without further heating, forming black crystals of iron (III) chloride;

– Iron (III) chloride sublimes on heating and will thus collect on the cooler parts of the apparatus;

Equation:

2Fe(s) + 3Cl2(g)                           2FeCl3(s)

 

Note:
– Iron (III) chloride fumes when it is exposed to damp (moist) air;

Reason:

– It is readily hydrolysed by water with evolution of hydrogen chloride gas;

 

Equation:
FeCl3(s) + 3H2O(l)                       Fe(OH)3(s) + 3HCl(g)

 

(iv). Reaction with acids:

  • Hydrochloric acid:

– Iron reacts with hydrochloric acid to liberate hydrogen gas.

Equation:

2Fe(s) + HCl(aq)                         FeCl2(aq) + H2(g)

 

  • Sulphuric (VI) acid:

Fe(s) + H2SO4 (aq)                        FeSO4 (aq) + H2 (g)

 

Note: With hot concentrated H2SO4;

– The iron reduces hot concentrated H2SO4 to sulphur (IV) oxide and it is itself oxidized to iron (III) sulphate.

Equation:

2Fe(s) + 6H2SO4 (l)                              Fe2 (SO4)3(aq) + 6H2O (l) + 3SO2 (g)

 

  • Nitric (V) acid.

– Iron reacts with dilute nitric (V) acid to form nitrogen (IV) oxide and ammonia which then forms ammonium nitrate.

Equation:

10HNO3 (aq) + 4Fe(s)                          4Fe(NO3)2(aq) + NH4NO3(aq) + 3H2O(l)

 

– Warm dilute nitric (V) acid gives iron (II) nitrate.

– Concentrated nitric (V) cid renders the iron unreactive.

Reason:

– Formation of iron oxide as a protective layer on the metal surface.

 

(vi). Reaction with sulphur.

– Iron when heated in sulphur forms iron (II) sulphide.

Equation:

Fe(s) + S(s)                      FeS(s)

 

Uses of iron.

– Iron exists in different types and alloys, depending on percentage composition of iron, and other elements.

– Each type of alloy of iron has different uses depending on properties.

 

Iron alloy or type Properties. Uses
Cast iron – Refers to iron just after it has been produced in the blast furnace;

– Contains 3-5% carbon, 1% silicon, and 2% phosphorus;

Disadvantage: very brittle hence easily breaks;

Advantage: It is extremely very hard;

– Making:

Ø  Furnaces;

Ø  Grates;

Ø  Railings;

Ø  Drainage pipes;

Ø  Engine blocks;

Ø  Iron boxes;

Note: This is due to its very hard nature;

– Manufacture of wrought iron and steel;

Wrought iron – Refers to cast iron with 0.1% carbon.

– It is malleable hence can easily be moulded or welded;

– making iron nails; horse shoes; agricultural implements like pangas;

Note:

Its use is declining due to increased use of mild steel

Steel – Are alloys whose main component is iron;

– Other components may be carbon; vanadium; manganese; tungsten; nickel and chromium;

Examples:

Mild steel: has about 0.3% carbon, 99.75% iron;

Special steel: has a small percentage of carbon together with other small substances;

 

Stainless steel:

-Contains 74% iron, 18% chromium, and 8% nickel;

 

 

 

Cobalt steel:

– Contains about 97.5% iron and 2.5% cobalt;

– Very tough and hard;

– Slightly magnetic;

– Mild steel is used for making:

Ø  Nails; Car bodies;

Ø  Railway lines; Ship bodies;

Ø  Rods for reinforced concrete, pipes;

Note: Advantage of mild steel:

– It is easy to work on;

 

 

– That with 10-12% chromium and some nickel is used to make: cutlery; sinks; vats;

– Steel containing 5-18% tungsten is used for: making high speed cutting and drilling tools;

 

– For making electromagnets;

  1. Copper

Description: – A red brown metal.

Distribution: – Canada, USA, Zambia, and Tanzania.

 

Main ores;

– Copper pyrites, CuFeS2;

– Cuprite, CuO

– Chalcocite, Cu2S

– Malachite, CuCO3.Cu (OH)2

 

Qualitative analysis / test for presence in an ore sample.

– Crush the ore and then add dilute nitric or hydrochloric or sulphuric acid to dissolve the ore.

– Filter to obtain Cu2+ filtrate.

– Divide filtrate into 2 different test tubes.

– To one sample add aqueous Ammonium hydroxide dropwise till in excess formation of a pale blue precipitate soluble in excess NaOH to form a deep blue solution.

 

Equations

With little NaOH:-

Cu2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Cu(OH)2(s)

Pale blue ppt.

In excess:

Cu(OH)2(aq) + 4NH3(aq)                 [Cu(NH3)4]2+(aq)  + 2OH(aq)

Deep blue solution

 

-To the second portion add sodium hydroxide solution dropwise till in excess, formation of a pale blue precipitate insoluble in excess confirms presence of Cu2+.

 

Extraction- from copper pyrites.

  1. Crushing the ore

– The ore is crushed to increase the surface area for the succeeding chemical reactions.

– The ore is then concentrated.

 

  1. Concentration of the ore.

– The ore is concentrated by froth floatation.

– The fine ore powder is mixed with water and oil, after which air is blown into the mixture, usually from below.

– Bubbles of the air forms froth, resulting to concentration of the ore.

– The lighter oil floats on top of the water, with the ore floating on top of the oil.

– The denser water sediments the earthy impurities like soil particles.

– The concentrated ore is then tapped off.

– This process involves formation of an oil froth onto which the ore floats hence the name froth formation.

 

  1. First Roasting

-The concentrated copper pyrite, CuFeS2 is then roasted in air to remove some of the sulphur impurities as sulphur (IV) oxide.

Equation:

2CuFeS2(s) + 4O2 (g)                 3SO2 (g) + 2FeO(S) + Cu2S(s);

Note:

– During 1st roasting limestone and silica (SiO2) are added to the roasted ore and the mixture heated in the absence of air.

 

Importance

– Removal of iron impurities.

– The iron (II) so formed during roasting is converted to iron (II) silicate, FeSiO3.

– The iron (II) silicate constitutes the major portion/component of the slag.

 

Equation:

FeO(s) + SiO2(g)                 FeSiO3(s)

 

– The slag separates itself from the copper (I) sulphide.

– The sulphur (IV) oxide escapes into the atmosphere and is the major pollutant in this process.

 

Pollution control mechanisms.

– Scrubbing the gas using calcium hydroxide;

 

Equation:

SO2(g) + Ca (OH)2(s)                CaSO3(s) + H2O(l)

 

– Construction of a contact process nearby.

 

  1. Second Roasting.

– The CuS is heated in a regulated supply of air where some of it is converted to Cu2O

 

Equation:

2Cu2S(s) + 3O2(g)                      Cu2O(s) + 2SO2(g)

 

  1. Reduction of copper (II) oxide

Note: – Not all the Cu2S was oxidized to copper (I) oxide Cu2O.

– The unreacted (unoxidized) Cu2S serves as the reducing agent in this step.

i.e. The copper (I) oxide formed in step 4 is reduced to copper metal by the (unreacted) copper (I) sulphide.

– This is called blister copper.

 

Equation:

Cu2S(s) + 2Cu2O(s)                6Cu(s) + SO2 (g);

 

  1. Electrolysis

-The copper metal from reduction in step 6 is impure and is thus purified by electrolysis.

 

Main impurities

– Traces of gold

– Traces of silver

– Iron

– Sulphur

 

 

 

Electrolytic apparatus

Anode: Impure copper

Cathode: Pure copper plates/ sheets;

Electrolyte: Dilute copper (II) sulphate solution (containing Cu2+; H+; SO42- and OH)

 

Diagram of electrolytic apparatus.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Electrolytic reactions;

At the cathode.

Observations:

– Deposition of a brown solid.

 

Explanations:

– The copper (II) ions, Cu2+ move to the cathode, where they accept electrons and undergo reduction.

– Cations in the electrolyte are Cu2+ and H+ but Cu2+ are preferentially discharged due to their easy tendency to undergo reduction.

 

Equation:

Cu2+(aq) + 2e-                     Cu(s);

 

At the anode

Observations:

– Dissolution of the anode, hence the impure copper rod decreases in size.

 

Explanation

– Since the metal rod is dipped into a solution of its ions, the copper solid undergoes oxidation, losing electrons to form copper ions, Cu2+

– Consequently as more copper ions, Cu2+ get reduced at the cathode; more are released by the dissolving anode.

 

Equation:

Cu(s)                          Cu2+(aq) + 2e-

 

Overall reaction

Cu(s) + Cu2+(aq)                     Cu2+(aq) + Cu(s)

 

– The electrolytic product is 99.98% copper.

– Traces of silver and gold collect as sludge at the bottom of the cell.

Note:-To improve purity of the product of electrolysis, the following steps are advisable;

(i). Increase the dilution of the electrolyte/ use a very dilute electrolyte.

(ii). Reduce the amount of current / use a low current.

 

Summary of extraction of copper from copper pyrites.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Uses of copper

  1. Making copper wires and contacts in switches, plugs and sockets

Reason:-Copper is a good conductor of electricity

Note:-For this purpose, pure copper is necessary, since impurities increase electrical resistance.

 

  1. Making soldering instruments.

Reason:-Copper has a high thermal conductivity.

 

  1. Manufacture of alloys.

Examples

Alloy Components
Brass Copper and zinc
Bronze Copper and tin
German silver Copper, zinc and nickel;

 

  1. Making coins and ornaments.

Reason:-it is durable and aesthetic.

 

 

Properties of copper.

  1. Physical properties

– Soft red-brown metal.

– Melting point of 1083oC and a boiling point of 2595oC

– Density is 8.92gcm-3 and electrical conductivity is about 5.93 x 10-9 Ώ-1m-1

 

  1. Chemical properties

(i). It does not react with cold water or steam.

 

(ii). Heating in air

– When heated in air it forms a black layer of copper (II) oxide on its surface.

– Finely divided copper burns with a blue flame.

 

Equation:

2Cu(s) + O2(g)                     2CuO(s)

(Red brown)                                           (Black)

 

(iii). Reaction with chlorine

– Cu reacts with chlorine in presence of heat to form green copper (II) chloride.

 

Equation:

Cu(s) + Cl2(g)             CuCl2(s)

 

(iv). Reaction with Acids.

– Copper does not react with dilute hydrochloric, nitric and sulphuric acids.

– However it reacts with 50% Nitric acid, concentrated Nitric acid and concentrated sulphuric acid.

 

  • With 50% Nitric (V) acid

– Copper reduces the nitric acid to nitrogen monoxide.

 

Equation;

3Cu(s) + 8HNO3(l)                    3Cu(NO3)2 (aq) + 4H2O(l) + 2NO(g);

 

  • With concentrated Nitric (V) acid

– Copper reduces the acid to brown nitrogen (IV) oxide/Nitrogen dioxide gas.

 

Equation:

Cu(s) + 4HNO3(l)               Cu (NO3)2(aq) + 2H2O(l) + 2NO2(g)

 

  • With concentrated sulphuric acid.

-The sulphuric acid is reduced to sulphur (IV) oxide.

 

Equation:

Cu(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)                 CuSO4 (aq) + 2H2O(l) + SO2 (g)

 

 

Worked example.

The flow chart below outlines some of the processes involved in the extraction of copper from copper pyrites. Study it and answer the questions that follow.

 

Hot air                                       Air

(a) (i). Write an equation for the reaction in the first roasting chamber.                                  (1mark)

 

(ii). Name gas K.                                                                                                                          (1mark)

 

 

(iii). Give the name and formula of slag M.                                                                                  (1mark)

 

(iv). Give the name of the reaction in chamber N.                                                                        (1mark)

 

(v). Name the impure copper X.                                                                                                     (1mark)

 

(b). Pure copper is obtained from impure copper by electrolysis.

(i). Name the anode the cathode and the electrolyte.                                                                              (3 marks)

 

(ii). Write equations for the reactions at the anode and cathode.                                        (2 marks)

 

(iii). calculate the time taken for a current of 10 amperes to deposit 32kg of pure copper. (Cu = 64, 1F = 96000C)                                                                                                                                (3 marks)

(c). Draw a diagram to show how you would plate an aluminium spoon with copper

 

6. Lead.

– Is a transition element that combines with other elements to form compounds with 2 oxidation states.

– It is among the group 4 elements;

 

Main ores:

– Galena, PbS (lead sulphide); the main ore;

– Cerrusite, PbCO3 (lead carbonate)

– Anglesite, PbSO4 (lead II) sulphate);

Qualitative analysis / test for presence of Zn2+ in an ore sample.

– The ore is crushed and then dilute nitric or hydrochloric or sulphuric acid added to dissolve the ore.

– It is then filtered to obtain Zn2+ filtrate.

– The filtrate is divided into 2 different test tubes.

– To the first portion sodium hydroxide solution is added dropwise till in excess, formation of a white precipitate soluble in excess confirms presence of either Zn2+; Al3+ or Pb2+.

– To the second sample aqueous ammonium hydroxide is added dropwise till in excess; formation of a white precipitate soluble in excess NH4OH(aq) confirms presence of Zn2+ only;

 

Equations

With little NH4OH:-

Zn2+(aq) + 2OH(aq)                        Zn(OH)2(s)

White ppt.

In excess:

Zn(OH)2(aq) + 4NH3(aq)                 [Zn(NH3)4]2+(aq)  + 2OH(aq)

Colourless solution

Extraction of lead:

– Occur in three main steps:

Ø  Ore concentration;

Ø  Extraction by reduction;

Ø  Purification (refining) by electrolysis;

1. Ore concentration:

– Is done by selective froth floatation;

– The ore is ground into a fine powder, then water and a suitable oil added;

– Air is then blown into the mixture; facilitating formation of a low density froth that floats on top;

– Additionally, chemicals such as sodium cyanide and zinc sulphate are added to facilitate separation of zinc sulphide present in the ore.

– The separated PbS is then dried and broken into smaller pieces, then subjected to reduction;

2. Reduction:

Step I: Roasting the ore:

– The crushed and concentrated ore is roasted in a furnace to convert it to lead (II) oxide;

Equation:

2PbS(s) + 3O2 (g)                       2PbO(s) + 2SO2 (g)

– During roasting some of the lead (II) sulphide is converted to lead (II) sulphate;

Equation:

PbS(s) + 2O2(g)                          PbSO4(s);

– Any lead sulphate formed is converted to lead silicate by silicon (IV) oxide;

– The fate of lead (II) silicate;

Note:

– Additionally the lead (II) sulphate may further react with lead sulphide to form lead metal;

Step II: Ore reduction:

– The lead oxide obtained is mixed with coke, limestone and silica and some scrap iron;

– The mixture is fed into the top of the Imperial smelting furnace (ISF); where it is melted using hot air blasts introduced near the bottom of the furnace;

 

Diagram: The Imperial Smelting furnace for Lead extraction.

Main reactions:

(i). The lead (II) oxide is reduced to lead by the coke.

Equation:
PbO(s) + C(s)                                Pb(s) + CO(s);

 

(ii). The resultant carbon (IV) oxide produced in reaction (i) above further reduces any remaining lead (II) oxide;

 

Equation:
PbO(s) + CO(s)                                Pb(s) + CO2(g);

 

(iii). The scrap iron is added so as to react with any lead sulphide that may be present.

Equation:

Fe(s) + PbS(s)                       Pb(s) + FeS(s)

 

 

 

(iv). The limestone undergoes decomposition to give calcium oxide and liberate carbon (IV) oxide;

Equation:

CaCO3(s)                       CaO(s) + CO2 (g);

 

– The carbon (IV) oxide gets reduced by coke to form more carbon (IV) oxide for reduction as in reaction (ii);

 

Equation:
CO2 (g) + C(s)                    2CO (g);

 

(v). The calcium oxide reacts with silica in form of SiO2 to form calcium silicate;

 

Equation:

CaO(s) + SiO2 (g)                       CaSiO3 (l);

 

Waste gases and residues.

– The iron sulphide and calcium silicate form a molten slag which is less dense and floats on top of molten lead at the bottom of the furnace;

– From here the slag is separately tapped off;

– Excess gases and air that did not react in the blast furnace escape through outlets at the top of the furnace;

– These waste gases can be trapped and recycled;

– These gases include: excess CO; excess CO2; oxygen; nitrogen; some SO2; and argon;

 

Pollution effects:
– Main pollutant is sulphur (IV) oxide from roasting of the ore.

 

Pollution control:
– It is directly fed into a contact process plant or scrubbed using calcium hydroxide forming calcium sulphite;

 

  1. Purification (refining) of lead:
    – The molten lead obtained in this process contains impurities such as gold, silver, copper, arsenic, tin and sulphur;

– The impure lead is refined by electrolysis.

 

Electrolysis of molten lead.

(i). Electrolyte:

Any aqueous solution containing lead ions;

 

(ii). The anode:

– Impure lead;

 

(iii). The cathode:

– Pure lead;

 

 

 

 

Electrolytic reactions;

At the cathode.

Observations:

– Deposition of a grey solid.

 

Explanations:

– The lead (II) ions, Pb2+ move to the cathode, where they accept electrons and undergo reduction.

– Cations in the electrolyte are Pb2+ and H+ but Pb2+ are preferentially discharged due to their easy tendency to undergo reduction.

 

Equation:

Pb2+(aq) + 2e-                     Pb(s);

 

At the anode

Observations:

– Dissolution of the anode, hence the impure lead rod decreases in size.

 

Explanation

– Since the metal rod is dipped into a solution of its ions, the impure lead solid undergoes oxidation, losing electrons to form lead (II) ions, Pb2+

– Consequently as more lead (II) ions, Pb2+ get reduced at the cathode; more are released by the dissolving anode.

 

Equation:

Pb(s)                          Pb2+(aq) + 2e-

 

Overall reaction

                       Oxidation at anode;

 

 

Pb(s) + Pb2+(aq)                     Pb2+(aq) + Pb(s)

 

 

Reduction at cathode;

 

Summary: flow chart on extraction of lead.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Properties of lead:

Physical properties;

– Has a low melting point but a high density;

– The unusually low melting point of lead is difficult to explain using simple metallic bonding theory;

– It is rather soft and pliable;

– Relatively malleable;

 

Chemical properties.

Note: – Lead is fairly unreactive to most other metals;

 

  1. Uses of lead:
  1. It is used in several alloys e.g. solder and also added to bronze alloys to make them stronger;
  2. Lead ingots are used in the manufacture of accumulators;
  3. Being so malleable and so chemically inert lead sheeting was used for roofing (look at roofs of old churches and cathedral)-cost and pollution effects have however brought this to a stop;
  4. Making lead pipes for water supply; this is also discouraged particularly in soft water areas due to threat of lead poisoning;
  5. Making tetraethyl lead (IV) which for many years was used as a fuel additive to increase octane rating of fuels;
  6. Used in weights, clock pendulums, plumb bobs etc; due to its high density;
  7. It absorbs X-rays and hence lead aprons and lead glass are used to shield hospital radiographers;
  8. Used for safe disposal or storage of radioactive substances since no radioactive emission has been known to pass through thick lead blocks;

 

Sample question:

 

 

 

 

UNIT 6: RADIOACTIVITY

Checklist

  1. Meaning of radioactivity
  2. Natural and artificial radioactivity
  3. Nuclear equations and chemical equations.
  4. Types of radiations
  • Alpha particles
  • Beta particles
  • Gamma rays
  1. Half life of a radioisotope
  2. Radioactive decay curves and half life
  3. Radioactive disintegration and nuclear equations.
  4. Radioactive decay series, nuclear fission and nuclear fusion;
  5. Uses of radioactivity;
  6. Dangers and pollution effects of radioactivity;

 

 

Definitions:

  • Radioactivity is an automatic spontaneous disintegration of nuclei of some heavy elements emitting some kinds of radiant energy
  • Elements which exhibit this are said to be radioactive and emit different types of radiation

Types of radiation from radioactive elements

They can be identified by

  1. Measuring their penetration power
  • They were directed to thin leaves of paper, aluminium, lead plates of varying thickness.
  • Observations:
  1. One penetrated only thin foils of paper but not aluminium of 0.05mm thick and lead
  2. One penetrated both paper and Al but not lead
  3. One penetrated paper Al and lead
  4. Directing them to air
  • Observations
  • Penetrated less through air but caused a lot of ionization to the air molecule
  • Penetrated more through air but caused less ionization
  • Penetrated most through air but caused less ionization

These penetrated just as far as X-rays

Directing through magnetic /electric fields

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                                                                                    S                                                                                           N

–           +

 

 

 

 

 

 

The radioactive element radiation emits all the 3types of radiation when they were directed to poss through electric magnetic fields to the fields

Were slightly deflected towards the negative
Were strongly deflected towards the positive
  1. Were not deflected

Therefore

A and B –are charged particles

-Have opposite charges

A is positive, B is negative

And

Deflections obeyed through L.H Rule

  • A were deflected less because they were moving with higher momentum (MV) because of high mass

Experimental evidence

  • Experiments carried out by Rattlerford revealed
  1. Were positively charged and had a mass of 4 units and thus a charge of +2 these are Alpha- particles therefore double charged helium ions,
  2. Were negatively charged and had similar properties to cathode rays. Measurement of charge/ mass confirmed they were electrons and carries a unit of –1

They are beta particles

  1. Were carrying no charge. They are electromagnetic waves similar to light rays and X- rays with a wave length of only 10 metres

Their emission enables a nucleus to lose surplus energy

They are gamma rays

Evidence for the nature of gamma rays

  • Gamma rays
  • Are unaffected by an electric field
  • Are an affected by a magnetic field
  • Can penetrate several centimeters of lead
  • Can be diffracted by the lattice of a crystal
  • Have no change in atomic number mass of the atoms emitting them

 

NATURE AND PROPERTY OF α , β ,AND γ

 

Nature α- particles helium nuclei

4He (He )

Β-particles electrons Rays electromagnetic waves radiation
Relative penetrating power Least 5cm in air stopped by paper and Al foils Several metres of air thin Al foil (100) Penetrate air, Al and many mm of Pb (10000)
Range in air

 

 

 

A few cm A few m A few km
Effect of electric and magnetic fields Small deflection Large deflection No deflection
Ionization of gases Cause much ionization

Discharges electroscopes rapidly

Cause less ionization

Discharges electroscopes slowly

Negligible ionization

 

Radioactive decay curve

Is always a symptotic to the x-axis

 

 

 

 

 

Number of atoms of the

Radioactive element

 

 

 

 

– The number of atoms disintegrating per unit of time /second is always proportional to the number of atoms, N at that time

This number N decreases slowly / exponentially with time

  • At any time to the number of atoms of a radioactive element is N/ No and at time T½, only ½ the total number of atoms of the original radioactive element will be present i.e.

T½ = ½N

This time is referred to as the half-life period of a radioactive element

Therefore

Half-life period T½ of a radioactive element is defined as the time taken for ½ the atoms to disintergrate

Thus

In T½ the radioactivity of the element diminishes to half its value

Example

Radioactive decay curve of radon

With half life of 4 days

 

No = 6 X 103 atoms

T½ = 4days

 

No. Of atoms

103 x 6

 

 

103 x 5

 

 

103 x 4

 

 

103 x 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Radon emits α- particles

Initial no of radon atoms = 103 X 6

After 4 days the number of atoms present=103 X 3

“ “ “ “8 days “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ =103 X  1.5

“ “ “ “12 days “” “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “  “ “ = 103 X 0.75

It is impossible to predict the atoms that will disintergrate next

 

The half lives of some radioactive isotopes

Radioactive isotopes Half life
Uranium-238 4.5 X 109  years
Radium-226 1.6 X 103 years
Carbon-14 5.7 X 103 years
Strontium-90 28 years
Iodine-131 8.1days
Radon-222 4days
Bismuth-214 19.7minutes
Polonium-218 3minutes
Polonium-214 1.5 X 10 -4sec

-The half-life of a radioactive isotope provides aquantitave measure of its stability

Thus

-The shorter the half-life the faster the isotope decays and the more unstable it is

-The longer the half-life the slower the decay process and the more stable the isotope

RADIOACTVE DISINTERGRATION EQUATIONS

-Different radioactive elements disintergrate to emit different radiations

  1. Emission of α particles

-Occurs in isotopes with an atomic number greater than 83 (Z> 83) because they are unstable since their nuclei are so heavy and their atomic mass is too large

-They attain stability by ejecting an alpha particle containing two protons and two neutrons

Examples

  • 238U-α partially-

 

(b) Emission of β particles

  • Occur in isotopes with more neutrons than stable isotopes of the same element, therefore heaviest isotopes of an element  are likely to emit β particles to attain stability
  • During the β-decay process, a neutron splits up forming a proton &an electron

 

 

The proton remains in the nucleus while the electron /β particles is ejected.

Result

Number of neutrons in the isotope decreases by one while number of protons increase by one.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

© Emissions of α-& β alternatively

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(2) Emissions of beta particles in two –stage

 

Application of Radioactivity /Using radioactive isotopes.

  1. Carbon dating
  • Radio active Carbon –14 nuclide produced when Nitrogen –14 is bombarded with radiocum from the sum is used.
  • When they die carbon-14 resent starts to reduce as decay takes place by emission of β particles.
  • Using the decay curve of carbon –14 it is possible to estimate age of the animals/plants since the carbon –14 is present in their tissues.

 

2.Medication/treatment of cancer

  • Gamma rays are used to treat /kill cancer cells when the tumour is subjected to the radiations

E.G Gamma rays /penetrating from CO are used in treating inaccessible growths.

Superficial /skin cancers can be treated by less penetrating radiation from or in plastic sheets strapped on the affected

 

3.Studying metabolic pathways

-Radioactive Isotopes can be used to trace the uptake of metabolism of various elements by animals /plants.

E.g Uptake of phosphate & metabolism of phosphorus by plants can be studied using a fertilizer containing

Radioactive tracer studies using have helped in the exudation of photosynthesis and protein synthesis

I have been used in the diagnosis & treatment of thyroid diseases &in research into thyroid gland functioning.

 

4.Thickness gauge and empty packet detectors

-Radiation passing through a material decreases as the material gets thicker

Hence:

Amount of penetrating Beta –or-gamma- radiation can be used to estimate the thickness of various materials like paper, metal or plastic

-Radiation thickness gauges can be used to control the thickness of sheet steel emerging from a high-speed rolling mill.

-β –Rays measure thickness upto ~ 0.2cm of steel γ-rays can be used with steel upto 10cm thick.

-Level gauges are used to measure amount of liquid in fire extinguisher &gas cylinders

-Empty –packet detectors can be set to reject empty/insufficiently filled packets filled packets of biscuits/cigarettes.  \

5.decting pipe bursts

  • Can be underground pipes carrying water /oil
  • If the water / oil is mixed with radioactive substances form the mixture will leak at the point where there is a burst and the radiations can be detected if a detector is passed
  1. Effect on static electricity
  • In textile industry the presence of static charges can attract dust and cause fires
  • When a radioactive element is placed in such industries the radiations emitted will ionize air and ions formed will attract the static charges : this minimises problems due to static charges

Hazards of radioactive

  • Arise from
  1. Exposure of the body to external radiation
  2. Ingestion/ inhalation of the radioactive matter
  • They damage body cells/ tissues
  • Cause mutation/deformities

Precautions

  • Protect the body with lad/ concrete shielding
  • Never pick/ hold radioactive elements with bare hands ; use forceps and well protected tongs
  • Use radiation absorbers

SAMPLE QUESTIONS

  • Particles from a radioactive source move through 7cm in air at ordinary pressure
  • The radioactive emission of radium are α-, β- and γ. Draw labelled diagram to show how the rays can be separated
  • the table below shows nuclides which are radioactive products of   Their ½ lives and K.E during decay are shown
nucleide Half life energy
Th 1.39 X 1010 3.98
Th 1.9yrs 5.42
Ra 3.64days 5.66
Rn 54.5 sec 6.28
Po 0.16 sec 6.77
At 3 X 10-4 sec 7.64
Bi 60.5 min X
Po 2.9 X 10-7 sec 8.78

 

 

  1. Identify pairs of isotopes of same element
  2. Identify 2 nuclides by in this table, which have been produced directly by α- decay of other nuclides in the table. Use equations
  • Identify 2 nuclides in this table, which have been produced by β- decay of other nuclides in the table. Use equations
  1. Suggest a series of decays for formation of
  2. Deduce how ½ life varies with energy of emitted rays

Suggest the value of X for

TOPICAL QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS- GEOGRAPHY

In need of Geography Topic By Topic Questions And answers for All Topics? Worry no more. Download these materials here for free.

GEOGRAPHY TOPICAL QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.

AGRICULTURE ANSWERS

AGRICULTURE QUESTIONS

ENERGY ANSWERS

ENERGY QUESTIONS

EXTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESSES ANSWERS

EXTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESSES QUESTIONS

FIELD WORK ANSWERS

FIELD WORK QUESTIONS

FISHING ANSWERS

FISHING QUESTIONS

FORESTRY ANSWERS

FORESTRY QUESTIONS

INDUSTRY ANSWERS

INDUSTRY QUESTIONS

INTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESS ANSWERS

INTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESS QUESTIONS

INTRODUCTION TO GEO ANSWERS

INTRODUCTION TO GEO QUESTIONS

LAND RECLAMATION ANSWERS

LAND RECLAMATION QUESTIONS

MANAGEMENT & CONSERVATION OF ENVIRONMENT ANSWERS

MANAGEMENT & CONSERVATION OF ENVIRONMENT QUESTIONS

MAP WORK 

MINERALS & ROCKS ANSWERS

MINERALS & ROCKS QUESTIONS

MINING ANSWERS

MINING QUESTIONS

PHOTOGRAPH WORK ANSWERS

PHOTOGRAPH WORK QUESTIONS

POPULATION ANSWERS

POPULATION QUESTIONS

SETTLEMENT ANSWERS

SETTLEMENT QUESTIONS

SOILS ANSWERS

SOILS QUESTIONS

STATISTICAL METHODS ANSWERS

STATISTICAL METHODS QUESTIONS

THE EARTH AND SOLAR SYSTEM ANSWERS

THE EARTH AND SOLAR SYSTEM QUESTIONS

TRADE ANSWERS

TRADE QUESTIONS

TRANSPORT & COMMUNICATION ANSWERS

TRANSPORT & COMMUNICATION QUESTIONS

VEGETATION ANSWERS

VEGETATION QUESTIONS

WEATHER & CLIMATE ANSWERS

WEATHER & CLIMATE QUESTIONS

WORLDLIFE & TOURISM 

OTHER POPULAR DOWNLOADS.

Geography Notes and Exams for F1-4 

GEOGRAPHY FORM 1 NOTES FREE

Free updated schemes of work for all subjects (Secondary)

Schemes of work for all subjects, free updated downloads

Free Geography notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers 

ENGLISH FORM 1 LESSON PLANS IN PDF

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2021

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: LISTENING AND SPEAKING/ Oral Literature

SUB-TOPIC: Trickster Narratives

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Identify the features of a trickster narrative.

(b)        Discuss the functions of a trickster narrative

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of a trickster narrative

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 1-3

  • Oral Literature for Schools
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4        minutes

(a)   Reviews the previous lesson. Asks learners to define a myth a trickster narrative.

(b)   Tells the learners that they will be learning about trickster narratives.

(a)   Defines a legend.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

 

32    minutes

1. Narrates a trickster narrative to the learners.

2. Explains the features and functions of a trickster narrative.

3. Groups the learners. Gives the learners a sample trickster narrative h. Asks learners to identify the features of a trickster narrative in it.

4. Asks learners present their projects.

1. States how they grabbed and kept the attention.

2. Listens and takes notes. Seeks clarification.

3. Discusses.

4. Presents their projects.

CONCLUSION

4        minutes

(a)   Asks them to narrate a trickster narrative of their own.

(b)    Gives them an exercise.

(a)   Explains the ways.

(b)   Writes the exercise in their exercise books.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                         LISTENING AND SPEAKING

Oral Literature

Trickster Narratives

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2021

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________   

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: STUDY SKILLS

SUB-TOPIC: Silent Reading 1

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Develop techniques of silent reading.
  • Identify the main points and the supporting materials in a text.

T/L RESOURCES: Posters, chalkboard demonstration of sitting postures

REFERENCES:  Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 3-4

  • Head Start English Bk 1
  • New Integrated English Bk 1
  • Teacher’s Book
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)   Asks students to how they do their studies.

(b)   Tells them that they would be learning how to develop good silent reading techniques.

(a)   Gives the features of summary.

(b)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1.      Outlines the best silent reading study techniques for maximum concentration.

2.      Issues a handout with a passage to be read.

3.      Tells the learners to read it using the techniques explained and identify the main points as well as the supporting material.

4.      Summarizes the points to consider when preparing for silent reading

 

1.      Listens and takes notes.

2.      Reads the passage.

3.      Writes down the answers.

 

4.      Writes a summary.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)   Asks some students to read aloud their answers to the question given earlier.

(b)   Writes an exercise on the chalkboard.

(a)   Corrects the others.

 

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                           ENGLISH                                                    FORM 1

                                                                   STUDY SKILLS

                                                                  Silent Reading

 

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2021

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: READING/COMPREHENSION

SUB-TOPIC: Karani and Kemunto

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  • Read the passage and respond to questions after it.
  • Use new words in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Picture on students’ book/ Dictionaries for reference

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 5

Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides

PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

(a)   Talks about the issue raised in the passage without letting them know they are about to read a passage.

(b)   Asks students question concerning the issue.

(c)   Tells the students the passage they are about to read and asks them to open their course books.

(a)   Listens and seeks clarification.

 

(b)   Answers the questions asked.

(c)   Opens their books.

DEVELOPMENT

33 minutes

1.      Asks students to read the paragraphs in turns.

2.      Asks students to retell the passage in their own words.

3.      Asks students some questions on the passage.

4.      Identifies some new words and asks students to give their meanings and use in each in their own words.

1.      Reads the paragraphs.

2.      Retells the passage.

3.      Answers the questions.

4.      Gives the meanings of the words and use them in sentences of their own.

CONCLUSION

3 minutes

1.      Asks students to discuss the lessons they learn from the passage.

2.      Gives an exercise.

1.      Discusses the lessons they learn from the passage.

2.      Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                           READING

 COMPREHENSION

KARANI AND KEMUNTO  

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2021

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: GRAMMAR

SUB-TOPIC: Common and Proper Nouns

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

(a)        Define common and proper nouns.

(b)        Use common and proper nouns in sentences of their own.

T/L RESOURCES: Chart showing common and proper nouns

REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 6-7

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

5 minutes

(a)   Writes sentences with common and proper nouns.

(b)   Asks learners to identify the common and proper nouns.

(c)   Tells them that they will be learning common and proper nouns.

(a)   Reads the sentence.

(b)   Identifies the common and proper nouns.

(c)   Listens and takes notes.

DEVELOPMENT

30 minutes

1.      Writes more sentences.

2.      Explains more examples of common and proper nouns.

3.      Displays the chart with the common and proper nouns.

4.      Groups the learners and issues the handout with a paragraph.

5.      Asks learners identify the common and proper nouns.

1.      Identifies common and proper nouns.

2.      Listens and seeks clarification.

3.      Identifies their components.

4.      Identifies common and proper nouns.

5.      Uses the words in sentences.

CONCLUSION

5 minutes

(a)   Asks students to use common and proper nouns learnt in sentences.

(b)   Gives an exercise.

(a)   Uses them in sentences.

(b)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                                          FORM 1

                                                        GRAMMAR

COMON AND PROPER NOUNS

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FORM ONE LESSON PLAN TERM 1, 2021

SCHOOL: __________________________________________________

TCHR’S NAME: ___________________________CLASS: FORM 1_______________

DATE: _______________________DAY:__________________WEEK:_____ LESSON: _____________

SKILL/TOPIC: WRITING

SUB-TOPIC: Handwriting

OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

  1. a) Write neatly and legibly.
  2. b) Appreciate the importance of writing neatly.

T/L RESOURCES: Sample of good handwriting

 REFERENCES: Secondary English Bk 1 Pg 7-9

  • Head Start English Bk 1, New Integrated English Bk 1, Teacher’s Guides
PART/TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITES LEARNER’S ACTIVITIES
INTRODUCTION

4 minutes

 

(a)    Reviews the previous lesson.

(b)   Tells the learners they are going to learn how to write using a good handwriting.

Listens and writes down notes.

 

DEVELOPMENT

32minutes

1. Explains the importance of good handwriting.

2. Asks students to write a passage using good handwriting.

3. Asks individual students to read the passages of their neighbours.

1. Listens and seeks clarification. Takes notes.

2. Writes down the passage.

3. Reads the passage

CONCLUSION

4 minutes

(a)   Gives an exercise. (a)   Writes the exercise.

CHALKBOARD LAYOUT

Date                                                   ENGLISH                                      FORM 1

                                                       WRITING

Handwriting

COMMENTS:

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS (BASIC CONCEPTS AND FARM RECORDS) NOTES

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS (BASIC CONCEPTS AND FARM RECORDS)

This topic entails the following

  • Definition of scarcity, preference and classic, opportunity cot as used in agriculture production.
  • Uses of farm records
  • Types of farm records i.e. production records, filed operation records, breeding records, feeding records, health, labour records and master roll.

 

  1. Define the term farm record.
  • Documents kept in the farm showing various farm activities over a given period of time

 

  1. State two qualities of a good farm record
  • Titled
  • Neat
  • Concise
  • Complete
  • Showing actual amounts
  • Dated

 

  1. State four advantages of keeping up-to date labour records.
  • To lay off unproductive labour
  • Helps in budgeting
  • To determine peak demand
  • Helps to determine labour allocation

 

  1. Mention any three types of farm records that a farmer should keep
  • Field operation records
  • Production records
  • Inventory records
  • Marketing records
  • Labour records
  • Breeding records
  • Workshop records
  • Feeding records
  • Health records

 

  1. a) Give four types of records that can be kept by a crop farmer.
  • Field operation records
  • Labour records
  • Production record/ yield records.
  • Account record.

 

  1. b) Name two types of records a coffee farmer should keep.
  • Labour records
  • Production records
  • Marketing records
  • Field operation records
  • Inventory records.

 

  1. Name the type of farm record from which each of the following information could be obtained
  2. i) Common livestock diseases occurring on a given farm
  • Health records

 

  1. ii) Best fertilizer to use top dressing
  • Field operation records

 

iii) The number of Jembes a farm owns

  • Inventory

 

  1. iv) The sire used to obtain the calves on the farm
  • Breeding records                                

 

  1. What is the importance of taking a farm inventory?
  • In order to show what there is and what is not there in the farm / assist in detecting stolen items

 

  1. What are the uses of farm records to a farmer?
  • Show the farmers assets and liabilities which help the farmer to know his net worth
  • Provide history of the farm.
  • Assist in planning and budgeting of various activities.
  • Helps to detect losses or theft in the farm.
  • Assists when sharing losses or profits (dividends / bonuses) for communal owned farms/ partnership.
  • Help in settling disputes between heirs where there is no written will during succession
  • Help to support insurance claim e.g. against fire and theft.
  • Provide labour information like terminal benefits, NSSF due, Sacco dues for all employees.
  • Help to compare the performance of different enterprises within a farm or other farms or between seasons
  • Help in the assessment of income tax to avoid over or under taxation.
  • Records, helps to show whether the farm business is making profit or losses. This information
  • Used to obtain loan or credit facilities

 

                                                                                                        

  1. Identify the farm record below and the questions that follow:

 

Date Disease symptoms Animals affected Drug used Cost of treatment Remarks
           

 

(a)Identity of the record

  • Health record

 

(b) State two different information that should be entered in the remarks column

  • Next date of treatment /vaccination
  • Occurrence of the disease
  • Response to treatment

 

(c) Give two importance of keeping the farm record illustrated above

  • Select and cull animals on health ground
  • Know the course of action to be taken in the event of a disease and maintenance of good health
  • Know the prevalent disease
  • Calculate cost of treatment

 

  1. Study the illustration below of farm records:- Use it to answer the questions that follow:

 

Enterprise —-                                                                 Month——                     

Name of cow DAYS IN MONTH
  1   2   3   4   5   6  
AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM
                       

 

(a) Name the type of the farm record illustrated above

  • Milk production record

 

  1. b)  Give three reasons for keeping health records in a livestock production
  • Determine prevalent diseases;
  • Establish treatment of diseases;
  • Establish disease control method;
  • Determine cost of medication/health care;
  • Determine the health status of different animals;

 

(c) Give three pieces of information a dairy farm manager should collect for planning purposes

  • Price trends/market situation
  • Production techniques
  • Labour trends
  • Breeds of dairy cattle
  • Production constraints/risks and certainties
  1. List down four pieces of information recorded in a field operation record.

 

  • Field
  • Area of the land /plot.
  • Plot field no.
  • Season
  • Crop planted
  • Crop grown/ variety
  • Land preparation / Ploughing date
  • Planting date
  • Inputs used.
  • Type of fertilizer at planting
  • Type of fertilizer at top dressing
  • Seed rate used
  • Type of weed and date of weed control
  • Diseases controlled/ method
  • Type of pest and date of pest control
  • Date of harvesting
  • Yield
  • Remarks

 

 

  1. a) Give two importance of keeping health records.
  • Help in culling sickly animals (reject culling sick animals)
  • Help in selection of animals for breeding
  • Help in calculation of veterinary/ treatment cost
  • Assist the farmer in knowing the prevalent diseases

 

  1. b) List four important entries in a health record.
  • Disease ( type, name)
  • Symptom (s)
  • Drug used and the doctor, treating the animal
  • Cost of treatment
  • Remarks on response to treatment
  • Animals identity affected

 

  1. Explain the following economic concepts:

(i) Scarcity

  • Resource are limited in relation to the demand/where production resources are limited in relative to demand therefore a choice has to be made on which enterprises to allocate limited resources.

 

(ii) Preference

  • One makes a choice according to his/her tastes/liking.

 

(iii) Opportunity cost

  • The returns from the best alternative forgone.

 

  1. Under what conditions is opportunity cost zero?
  • When the item is free.
  • When the item is in plenty/ unlimited
  • W hen there is no alternative       

 

 

  1. Define the term Economics.
  • Economics is the study of how  man and society choose with or without the use of money to employ scarce productive resources which could have alternative uses to produce various commodities and services overtime and distribute them for consumption now and in future among various people and groups in society   or                                                        
  • Applied science carried at maximizing output at minimum costs through combining the limited supplies of land, capital, labour and management to produce goods and services for use in a given period of time

 

 

  1. What is opportunity cost in agricultural economics?
  • Is the value of best alternative foregone

 

  1. b) A farmer has a piece of land on which he can produce maize and barley. The yield and selling prices of the crops are as shown below.

 

Enterprise Yield ( 90kgs bags) Selling price ( KShs/90kg bag)
Maize 2500 800
Barley 2000 1500

 

The farmer decides to produce maize. Assuming the cost of producing any of the crops is the same.

(i) Calculate the farmer’s opportunity cost. Show your working.

Barley = 2000×1500

 = 3,000,000                                                                                                 

 

(ii) Which crop should the farmer grow?

Maize – 2500×800 = 2, 000,000

Barley-  2000×1500 = 3, 000,000

  • Farmers should grow barley

 

(iii) Give one circumstance under which opportunity cost may not arise.

  • When there is no choice/alternative
  • When resources are not limited /resources are free

 

  1. State two types of Labour records.
  • Labour utilization analysis.
  • Muster roll                                                                          

 

  1. Give the reasons for keeping health records on the farm.
  • Help in culling sickly animals.
  • Help in selection of animals for breeding.
  • Help in calculation of veterinary costs.
  • Assist the farmer in knowing the prevalent diseases.

 

  1. A farmer has a piece of land on which he can produce wheat, maize, and barley.

The yields and selling prices of the three crops as shown below:

 

Crop Yield 90 kg bag Selling price Kshs. Per bag
Tea 2000 750
Coffee 1400 900
Pyrethrum 1500 1200

 

The farmer decides to produce pyrethrum. Assuming the cost of producing any of the crops is the same.

  • Calculate the farmer’s opportunity cost. Show your working

        Tea                                       2000 bags x 750                               =             1,500,000

                Coffee                                  1400 bags x 900                =             1,260,000

                Pyrethrum                          1500bags x 1200                              =             1,800,000

  • Opportunity cost = KShs. 1,500,000

 

  • Give reasons for your answer in (i) above
  • Tea is the returns from the next best alternative forgone.

 

  1. Study the farm record below and answer the questions that follow.

 

Date Disease symptoms Animal affected Drug used Cost of treatment Remarks
           

(a) Identify the farm record shown.

  • Livestock health record.                               

 

(b) State three different information that should be entered in the remarks column.

  • Death of animal.
  • Net treatment date.
  • Frequency of disease.
  • Effect of treatment.                                   

 

  1. Name four important entries in a muster roll.

– Name of the worker

               – Pay roll number

               – Days worked

               – Rate of payment

               – Amount of salary or wage

               – Signature of the worker.                                                                                                        

 

  1. The table below is extracted from the farmer’s books. Study it and answer the questions that follow.

 

Name of person Personal number Days Days worked Rate Total
1 2 3 ….
                 

 

  1. Identify the type of record represented by the table.
  • Muster roll

 

  1. Give one importance of the record above.
  • Determine the total cost of the labour
  • Determine the amount of money each worker is to be paid
  • Determine the members of the labour force to be retrenched or promoted on basis of work output

FORM 4 FREE EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES

Download free Maranda School Form 4 Exams plus marking schemes. Get all pre-mocks, mocks and post mock exams free.

MARANDA SCHOOL KCSE REVISION PAPERS WITH ANSWERS.

ENGLISH PAPER 1 QUESTIONS.

PHYSICS PAER 2 QUESTIONS.

KISWAHILI PAPER 3 QUESTIONS

BUSINESS PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

GEOGRAPHY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

MATHS PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

BIOLOGY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

CHEMISTRY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

GEOGRAPHY PAPER 1 ANSWERS

AGRICULTURE PAPER 1 AND 2 QUESTIONS

HISTORY PAPER 1 ANSWERS AND QUESTIONS

CRE PAPER 1 ANSWERS AND QUESTIONS

HISTORY PAPER 1 QUESTIONS

KISWAHILI PAPER 1 ANSWERS

MATHS PAPER 1 ANSWERS

CHEMISTRY PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

BIOLOGY PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

BUSINESS PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

DOWNLOAD MORE FREE FORM 4 EXAMS.

FORM 4 EXAMINATIONS AND MARKING SCHEMES: ALL SUBJECTS FOR KCSE CANDIDATES- OVER 1,000 PAPERS.

Form 4 KCSE 2021/2022 mocks, predictions, termly exams, home works and revision papers; All subjects

FORM FOUR FULL EXAM PAPERS & ANSWERS FOR ALL SUBJECTS: OVER 1,000 KCSE REVISION PAPERS

Kenya police recruitment news today

The National Police Service, NPS, seeks to recruit 5,000 suitably qualified applicants to be trained as Police Constables.

Entry Requirements for applicants for Police Constable 

The applicant must:

1. Be a citizen of Kenya

2. Hold a Kenya National Identity Card

3. Possess a minimum qualification of ‘D+’( Plus) in the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE) examination with a ‘D+’ (Plus) in either English or Kiswahili languages;

4. Be aged between 18 and 28 years for holders of KCSE Examination Certificate or its equivalent, and up to 30 years for diploma and degree holders;

5. Meets the requirements of Chapter Six of the constitution.

6. Is physically, mentally, and medically fit.

7. Has no criminal record or pending criminal charges.

Female candidates must NOT be pregnant at recruitment and during the entire training period.

The candidates are advised that examinations result slips shall not be accepted.

Application Submission

All candidates must complete the prescribed application form from:

The nearest sub-county police commander (SCPC) or any police station; The nearest sub-county administration police commander’s (CIPU) offices; County commissioner’s offices or the nearest Huduma Centre.

Forms can also be downloaded from npsc.go.ke, nationalpolice.go.kekenyapolice.go.keadministrationpolice.go.kecid.go.ke websites.

All applications must be submitted in duplicate accompanied with the following documents

  • A copy of the academic certificates and testimonials
  • A copy of the Kenya National ID
  • A copy of the applicants Birth Certificate
  • KRA Pin Certificate

Dates for 2022 Police Recruitment Exercise

Applicants must present themselves at the recruitment centres with the duly completed form indicating the service of preference on the day of the recruitment exercise.

The exercise will be carried out countrywide and will commence on Thursday, March 24  from 8am to 5pm at listed constituency-based recruitment centres.

All applicants must be at the respective recruitment centre by 8 a.m.

Notice to Police Applicants

Each applicant must present the original supporting documents for verification. The originals will be returned to the applicant before leaving the recruitment centre.

Applicants recruited for the training into the service shall be bonded to serve in the Nationals Police Service for a minimum period of ten years.

The National Police Service insits that the applicants shall reflect the gender, ethnic and regional diversity of the kenyan people.

Warning to Police Recruits

  • An applicant who canvasses directly or indirectly, willfully presents false academic certificate and testimonials, engages in any corrupt activity shall be disqualified and will be arrested and prosecuted.
  • Under section 25 of the National Police Service Commission Act, any person who willfully gives to Commission any information which is false or misleading in any material particular commits an offence and shall on conviction be liable to a fine not exceeding Ksh200,000 or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding two years or both.

Police Recruitment Centres

Here are the recruitment centres in different sub counties:

RECRUITMENT OF POLICE CONSTABLES

COMMENCEMENT OF RECRUITMENT

The recruitment process will take place on THURSDAY, 24TH MARCH 2022 from 8:00am to 5:00pm at the listed Sub – Counties.

All applicants must be at their respective recruitment center by 8:00am.

COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE
MOMBASA 1 CHANGAMWE CHANGAMWE(CHANGAMWE OIL REFINERIES)
2 JOMVU NYS MAMLAI GROUNDS
3 KISAUNI KISAUNI SUB COUNTY POLICE HQS
4 LIKONI LIKONI APPROVED GROUNDS
5 MVITA MOMBASA (MVITA GROUNDS)
6 NYALI A.S.K SHOW GROUND
KWALE 7 KINANGO VURUNGANI STADIUM
8 LUNGALUNGA LUNGA LUNGA STADIUM/GROUNDS
9 MATUGA MATUGA BARAZA PARK (KWALE)
10 MSAMBWENI MSAMBWENI STADIUM
KILIFI 11 GANZE GANZE – MARKET GROUNDS
12 KAUMA KAUMA DCC’S OFFICE
13 KALOLENI COUNCIL GROUNDS KALOLENI
14 KILIFI NORTH BAHARI STADIUM
15 KILIFI SOUTH KIKAMBALA DCC’S OFFICE
16 CHONYI DCC’S OFFICE CHONYI
17 MAGARINI MAGARINI DISTRICT HQS
18 MALINDI MALINDI  ALSKA  GROUNDS
19 RABAI RABAI MKAPUNI OPEN GROUNDS
TANA RIVER 20 TANA NORTH BURA DISTRICT HQS
21 TANA RIVER HOLA STADIUM
22 TANA DELTA TANA DELTA DISTRICT HQS
LAMU 23 LAMU EAST FAZA  FOOTBALL FIELD
24 LAMU WEST TIGER GROUNDS
25 LAMU CENTRAL KIBAKI GROUNDS MOKOMANI
TAITA TAVETA 26 MWATATE SOKO YA SAMANI PLAY GROUNDS
27 TAVETA TAVETA AIRSTRIP
28 VOI VOI STADIUM
29 WUNDANYI(TAITA) WUNDANYI STADIUM
GARISSA 30 BALAMBALA DC’S OFFICE MBALAMBALA
31 DADAAB DADAAB POLICE STATION
32 LIBOI LIBOI DCC’s OFFICE
33 GARISSA GARISSA PTC GROUNDS
34 FAFI FAFI DCC’S OFFICE
35 BURA EAST BURA EAST POLICE STATION
36 IJARA MASALANI POLICE DIV. HQS
37 HULUGHO HULUGHO POLICE DIVISIONAL HQS.
38 LAGDERA MODOGASHE POLICE STATION
WAJIR 39 WAJIR EAST WAJIR STADIUM
40 KHOROF HARAR KHOROF HARAR DCC’S OFFICE
41 WAJIR SOUTH LEHELEY PLAY GROUND
42 HABASWEIN HABASWEINI BARAZA PARK
43 WAJIR WEST GRIFTU PLAY GROUNDS
44 WAJIR NORTH BUTE POLICE STATION
45 BUNA BUNA DCC GROUNDS
46 ELDAS ELDAS BARAZA PARK
47 TARBAJ DCC’S OFFICE TARBAJ
MANDERA 48 MANDERA CENTRAL ELWAK POLICE STATION
49 KOTULO KOTULO POLICE DIVISIONAL HQS.
50 MANDERA WEST DCC’S OFFICE TAKABA
51 MANDERA EAST MANDERA EAST DCC’S OFFICE
52 ARABIA ARABIA DCC’S OFFICE
53 MANDERA NORTH DC’S OFFICE RHAMU
COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE COUNTY COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE
CODE
MANDERA 54 BANISA BARAZA PARK 15 KITUI 106 TSEIKURU TSEIKURU STADIUM
55 KILIWEHIRI DCC’S OFFICE KILIWEHIRI 107 MIGWANI MIGWANI STADIUM
56 LAFEY LAFEY DC’S HQS 16 MACHAKOS 108 KANGUNDO KANGUNDO D.E.B
MARSABIT 57 MARSABIT CENTRAL MARSABIT STADIUM 109 KATHIANI MITABONI DO’S OFFICE
58 MARSABIT SOUTH (LAISAMIS) LAISAMIS POLICE DIVISION HQS 110 MACHAKOS MACHAKOS KENYATTA STADIUM
59 LOIYANGALANI LOIYANGALANI POLICE STATION 111 KALAMA KALAMA DCC’S OFFICE
60 MOYALE MOYALE POLICE STATION 112 MASINGA MASINGA SUB COUNTY HQS
61 SOLOLO SOLOLO YOUTH PLAY GROUND 113 MATUNGULU KISUKIONI PLAY GROUND BEHIND
62 NORTH HORR NORTH HORR POLICE DIV. HQS TALA BOYS
63 DUKANA DUKANA DCC’S OFFICE 114 ATHI RIVER KMC GROUND ATHI RIVER
64 MARSABIT NORTH DCC’S OFFICE MAIKONA 115 MWALA MASII STADIUM
65 TURBI TURBI DCC’S OFFICE 116 YATTA YATTA FIELD UNIT (NYS GROUNDS)
ISIOLO 66 ISIOLO ISIOLO POLICE DIV. HQS 17 MAKUENI 117 KILUNGU KYEMBEKE POLICE STATION GROUND
67 MERTI MERTI DCC’S HQS. 118 KIBWEZI KIBWEZI SPORTS GROUND
68 GARBATULLA GARBATULA POLICE DIV HQS 119 KIBWEZI WEST (MAKINDU) MAKINDU SPORTS GROUND
MERU 69 MERU CENTRAL GITHONGO STADIUM 120 MUKAA MUKAA DISTRICT HQS
70 IGEMBE CENTRAL KANGETA DCC PLAY GROUND 121 MAKUENI MAKUENI POLICE DIV. HQS
71 IGEMBE NORTH MURINGINE  PLAY GROUND 122 NZAUI DC’S OFFICE MATILIKU
72 IGEMBE SOUTH MAUA STADIUM 123 KATHONZWENI KATHONZWENI PUBLIC GROUNDS
73 BUURI WEST TIMAU STADIUM 124 MBOONI WEST KIKIMA PLAY GROUND
74 BUURI EAST KIIRUA DCC’S OFFICE 125 MBOONI EAST MBOONI EAST DCC’S OFFICE
75 IMENTI NORTH KINORU STADIUM 18 NYAN- 126 KINANGOP RURINJA STADIUM NJAMBINI
DARUA
76 IMENTI SOUTH NKUBU STADIUM 127 NYANDARUA SOUTH NYANDARUA SOUTH SUB COUNTY HQS
77 TIGANIA EAST NGUTHIRU STADIUM 128 KIPIPIRI WAKIONGO STADIUM
78 TIGANIA CENTRAL MIKINDURI STADIUM 129 NYANDARUA NORTH NDARAGWA POLICE SUB COUNTY HQS
79 TIGANIA W EST UURU STADIUM 130 ABERDARE SHAMATA DCC’S OFFICE
THARAKA 80 IGAMBANG’OMBE IGAMBANG’OMBE DCC’S OFFICE 131 NYANDARUA WE S T OL JOROROK PLAY GROUND
NITHI 132 GATHANJI NGANO DCC’S OFFICE
81 CHUKA (MERU SOUTH) CHUKA TOWN DCC’S BARAZA
GROUND 133 NYANDARUA CENTRAL OLKALOU STADIUM
82 MAARA KIENGANGURU DC’S GROUND 134 MIRANGINE MIRANGINE DC’S OFFICE
83 THARAKA SOUTH MARIMANTI STADIUM 19 NYERI 135 KIENI WEST MWEIGA STADIUM
84 THARAKA NORTH KATUNGA POLICE STATION 136 KIENI EAST CHAKA PLAY GROUND
EMBU 85 EMBU WEST MOI  MUN. STADIUM 137 MATHIRA EAST KARATINA STADIUM
86 EMBU NORTH KAIRURI STADIUM 138 MATHIRA WEST KAIYABA CHIEF’S CAMP
87 MBEERE NORTH MBEERE NORTH DC’S GROUNDS 139 MUKURWE-INI MUKURWEINI STADIUM
88 MBEERE SOUTH UMAU GROUNDS 140 NYERI CENTRAL RURINGU STADIUM
89 EMBU EAST RUNYENJES MUNCIPAL STADIUM 141 NYERI SOUTH OTHAYA STADIUM
KITUI 90 KITUI CENTRAL KITUI  SHOW GROUNDS 142 TETU WAMAGANA PLAY GROUNDS
91 MATINYANI MATINYANI KWAMKOMA PLAY 20 KIRINYAGA 143 KIRINYAGA EAST KIANYAGA STADIUM
GROUND
144 KIRINYAGA CENTRAL KERUGOYA STADIUM
92 MUTITU MURITU DCC’S GROUNDS
145 MWEA EAST WANG’URU STADIUM
93 MUTITU NORTH DCC’S OFFICE MUTITU NORTH
146 MWEA WEST KANDONGU HOSPITAL GROUNDS
94 NZAMBANI NZOMBE PLAY GROUNDS
147 KIRINYAGA WEST KIANJANGA GROUNDS (SHIKUKU)
95 KISASI MBITINI POLICE STATION
21 MURANG’A 148 GATANGA GATUNYU PLAY GROUND
96 KATULANI KATULANI DCC’S OFFICE GROUNDS
149 ITHANGA/KAKUZI MITUM- KIRATHANI SPORTS GROUNDS
97 LOWER YATTA ST. LUKE  PLAY GROUND BIRI
98 MUTOMO MUTOMO STADIUM 150 KANDARA KANDARA STADIUM
99 IKUTHA IKUTHA STADIUM 151 KANGEMA KANGEMA GENERAL KAGO STADIUM
100 KITUI WEST KAUWI SADIUM 152 KIGUMO KIGUMO BENDERA PLAY GRPUNDS
101 MWINGI EAST MATHUKI GROUNDS MURANG’A EAST IHURA STADIUM MURANG’A
102 MWINGI CENTRAL MUSILA PLAY GROUND 154 KAHURO KAHURO STADIUM
103 KYUSO KYUSO STADIUM 155 MURANG’A SOUTH KIMORORI DCC’S OFFICE
104 MUMONI KATSE FOOTBALL PITCH 156 MATHIOYA RURIE STADIUM
105 THAGICU DCC’S OFFICE THAGICU 22 KIAMBU 157 GATUNDU NORTH KAMWANGI DC’S OFFICE
COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE COUNTY COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE
CODE
KIAMBU 158 GATUNDU SOUTH GATUNDU TOWN STADIUM 30 BARINGO 211 MOGOTIO MOGOTIO POLYTECHNIC
159 GITHUNGURI GITHUNGURI STADIUM 212 TIATY WEST (EAST POKOT) CHEMOLINGOT STADIUM
160 JUJA PREMIER BAG GROUNDS 213 TIATY EAST TANGULBEI DCC’S OFFICE
161 KABETE KANJERU STADIUM 31 LAIKIPIA 214 LAIKIPIA EAST NANYUKI STADIUM
162 KIAMBAA KARURI PLAAY GROUNDS 215 LAIKIPIA CENTRAL SIRIMA GROUNDS
163 KIAMBU NDUMBERI STADIUM 216 LAIKIPIA NORTH DOLDOL T. CENTRE
164 KIKUYU DC’S OFFICE 217 LAIKIPIA WEST RUMURUTI GROUNDS
165 LARI KIRENGA MARKET 218 OLMORAN OLMORAN DCC’S OFFICE
166 LIMURU KWAMBIRA STADIUM 219 NYAHURURU NYAHURURU MUNICIPAL STADIUM
167 RUIRU RUIRU MUN. STADIUM 32 NAKURU 220 NAKURU NORTH KIUGOINI POLICE STATION
168 THIKA WEST THIKA MUN. STADIUM 221 GILGIL GILGIL STADIUM
169 THIKA EAST KILIMAMBOGO PLAY GROUNDS 222 KURESOI NORTH SIRIKWA DCC’S OFFICE
TURKANA 170 LOIMA LORUGUM RESOURCE CENTRE 223 KURESOI SOUTH OLONGURUONI STADIUM
171 TURKANA CENTRAL LODWAR P/STN 224 MOLO MOLO MUNICIPAL STADIUM
172 TURKANA EAST LOKORI DC’S OFFICE 225 NAIVASHA DC’S OFFICE NAIVASHA KIHOTO
173 TURKANA NORTH LOKITAUNG STADIUM 226 NAKURU EA ST AFRAHA STADIUM NAKURU TOWN
174 KIBISH DC’S OFFICE KIBISH 227 NAKURU WES T KAPTEMBWA GROUNDS
175 TURKANA SOUTH LOKICHAR DCC’S OFFICE 228 NJORO NJORO POLICE STATION
176 TURKANA WES T KAKUMA AIR STRIP 229 RONGAI DC’ S OFFICE KAMPI YA MOTO
WEST 177 POKOT NORTH ALALE AIR STRIP 230 SUBUKIA SUBUKIA PLAY GROUND
POKOT
178 KACHELIBA KACHELIBA DCC’S OFFICE 33 NAROK 231 TRANS  MARA EAST EMURUA – DIKIRR DISTRICT HQS
179 WEST POKOT DCC’S OFFICE KAPENGURIA 232 TRANS  MARA W EST DC’S OFFICE KILGORIS
180 POKOT SOUTH KABICHBICH DC’S OFFICE 233 NAROK EAST NAIRAGIE – ENKARE DCC’S OFFICE
181 KIPKOMO CHEBARERIA DC’S OFFICE 234 NAROK NORTH NAROK STADIUM
182 POKOT CENTRAL SIGOR DCC’S OFFICE 235 NAROK SOUTH OLOLULUNGA BARAZA PARK
SAMBURU 183 SAMBURU EAST WAMBA MARKET 236 NAROK WEST LAMEK DCC’S OFFICE
184 SAMBURU NORTH DC’S OFFICE BARAGOI 34 KAJIADO 237 KAJIADO CENTRAL KAJIADO DCC’S OFFICE
185 SAMBURU CENTRAL DC’S OFFICE MARALAL 238 ISINYA DC’S OFFICE ISINYA
TRANSNZOIA 186 TRANS  NZOIA EAST KACHEBORA DC’S OFFICE 239 MASHUURU DC’S OFFICE MASHUURU
187 ENDEBESS ENDEBES DC’S OFFICE 240 KAJIADO NORTH TRAFFIC TRAINING SCHOOL
188 KIMININI KIMININI POLICE STATION 241 LOITOKITOK LOITOKITOK STADIUM
189 KWANZA KWANZA POLICE PATROL BASE 242 KAJIADO WEST OLTINGA CENTER
190 TRANS  NZOIA WEST KENYATTA STADIUM 243 OLOILILAI NGATATAEK DCC’S OFFICE
UASIN  GI- 191 AINABKOI WAUNIFOR STADIUM 35 KERICHO 244 KERICHO EAST KERICHO GREEN STADIUM
SHU
192 KAPSERET ELDORET ASK  SHOW GROUND 245 BELGUT BELGUT (SOSIOT GROUNDS)
193 KESSES DC’S OFFICE KESSES 246 BURETI KAPKATET STADIUM
194 MOIBEN KIPCHOGE KEINO STADIUM 247 LONDIANI LONDIANI COUN. STADIUM
195 SOY 64 STADIUM 248 KIPKELION KIPKELION DCC’S OFFICE
196 TURBO 64 STADIUM 249 SOIN SIGOWET DCC’S OFFICE – SIGOWET
ELGEYO 197 KEIYO NORTH POLICE DIV. HQS ITEN TOWNSHIP 36 BOMET 250 BOMET CENTRAL BOMET STADIUM
MARAKWET
198 KEIYO SOUTH DC’S OFFICE CHEPKORIO 251 BOMET EAST LONGISA YOUTH EMPOWERMENT
GROUND
199 MARAKWET EAST CHESOI CHIEF’S CAMP
252 CHEPALUNGU SIGOR PLAY GROUND
200 MARAKWET W EST KAPSOWAR PLAY GROUND
253 KONOIN KONOIN STADIUM
NANDI 201 NANDI SOUTH KOBUJOI DCC’S OFFICE
254 SOTIK DC’S OFFICE SOTIK T/SHIP
202 CHESUMEI CHEMUNDU SUB COUNTY HQS
37 KAKAMEGA 255 BUTERE SHIATSALA PLAY GROUND
203 NANDI CENTRAL KAPSABET PARADE GROUND
256 KAKAMEGA SOUTH MALINYA STADIUM
204 NANDI NORTH KABIYET POLICE STATION
257 KHWISERO KHWISERO SPORTS GROUND
205 NANDI EAST NANDI HILLS STADIUM
258 LIKUYANI KONGONI DCC’S OFFICE
206 TINDERET MARABA DCC’S OFFICE
259 LUGARI LUMAKANDA TOWNSHIP PRY SCH.
BARINGO 207 BARINGO CENTRAL KABARNET SHOW GROUND
260 MATETE MATETE PLAYING GROUND
208 BARINGO NORTH KABARTONJO DCC’S OFFICE
261 KAKAMEGA CENTRAL BUKHUNGU STADIUM KAKAMEGA
209 MARIGAT MARIGAT SPORTS GROUNDS
262 KAKAMEGA NORTH ISANJIRO PLAY GROUND
210 KOIBATEK ELDAMA RAVINE  STADIUM
263 MATUNGU MATUNGU DCC’S OFFICE
COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE COUNTY COUNTY S/NO. SUB COUNTY CENTRE
CODE
KAKAMEGA 264 MUMIAS EAST MUMIAS EAST DCC’S OFFICE 44 MIGORI 315 KURIA WEST KURIA POLICE SUB COUNTY HQS
265 MUMIAS WEST NABONGO SPORTS GROUND 316 NYATIKE NYATIKE POLICE SUB COUNTY HQS
266 NAVAKHOLO NAVAKHOLO DCC’S PLAY GROUND 317 RONGO RONGO DISTRICT HQS
267 KAKAMEGA EAST SOLIO PLAY GROUND 318 SUNA EAST MIGORI STADIUM
VIHIGA 268 EMUHAYA DC’S OFFICE EMUHAYA 319 SUNA WEST PINY OYIE DCC’S GROUNDS
269 HAMISI HAMISI SPORTS GROUND 320 URIRI URIRI DISTRICT HQS
270 LUANDA DC’S OFFICE LUANDA 45 KISIII 321 NYAMACHE NYAMACHE STADIUM
271 SABATIA SABATIA DCC’S OFFICE 322 SAMETA SAMETA STADIUM
272 VIHIGA VIHIGA DCC’S OFFICE 323 KENYENYA KENYENYA STADIUM
BUNGOMA 273 BUMULA BUMULA CENTRE DC’S OFFICE 324 ETAGO DCC’S OFFICE ETAGO
274 BUNGOMA CENTRAL MUSESE CDF GROUNDS 325 GUCHA OGEMBO DCC’S OFFICE
275 BUNGOMA SOUTH KANDUYI AIRSTRIP 326 KISII SOUTH KISII SOUTH DCC’S OFFICE
276 KIMILILI-BUNGOMA KIMILILI – AMTALA SPORTS CENTRE 327 MARANI MARANI FOOTBALL GROUND
277 MT. ELGON MT. ELGON POLICE DIV. KAPSOKWONY 328 KITUTU CENTRAL KISII STADIUM
278 CHEPTAIS CHEPTAIS POLICE STATION 329 KISII CENTRAL KISII STADIUM
279 BUNGOMA NORTH DCC’S OFFICE BUNGOMA NORTH 330 MASABA SOUTH NYANTRAGO PLAY GROUND
280 BUNGOMA EAST SIRISIA SPORTS GROUND 331 GUCHA SOUTH NYAMARAMBE STADIUM
281 TONGAREN DC’S OFFICE TONGAREN 46 NYAMIRA 332 BORABU MATUTU POLICE STATION
282 BUNGOMA WEST PANPAPER GROUNDS WEBUYE 333 MA SABA NORTH RIGOMA MARKET
283 WEBUYE WE S T BOKOLI DIVISION HQRS 334 MANGA MANGA DC’S OFFICE (MRKT)
BUSIA 284 BUNYALA SIAGONJO STADIUM 335 NYAMIRA NORTH EKERENYO DC’S GROUND
285 BUTULA BUTULA YOUTH POLYTECHNIC 336 NYAMIRA SOUTH NYAMIRA DCC’S OFFICE
286 SAMIA FUNYULA STADIUM 47 NAIROBI 337 DAGORETTI NORTH NDURARUA STADIUM
287 BUSIA BUSIA MUN. STADIUM 338 DAGORETTI SOUTH NDURARUA STADIUM
288 NAMBALE NAMBALE POLICE STATION 339 EMBAKASI CENTRAL HURUMA GROUNDD
289 TESO NORTH AMAGORO SUB COUNTY POLICE HQS 340 EMBAKASI EAST CHAKARANDA GROUNDS
290 TESO SOUTH AMUKURA STADIUM 341 EMBAKASI NORTH SHEPHERD GROUNDS
SIAYA 291 SIAYA SIAYA STADIUM 342 EMBAKASI SOUTH VISION GROUNDS/ MAKAO BORA
292 BONDO BONDO UNIVERSITY GROUNDS 343 EMBAKASI WEST TENA GROUNDS
293 GEM SAWAGONGO DCC’S OFFICE 344 KAMUKUNJI KAMUKUNJI  SPORTS GROUNDS
294 RARIEDA NYILIMA CENTRE GROUNDS 345 KIBRA NYAYO STADIUM
295 UGENYA UGENYA DCC’S OFFICE 346 LANG’ATA/KAREN NYAYO STADIUM
296 UGUNJA UGUNJA SUB COUNTY POLICE HQS 347 MAKADARA CITY STADIUM
KISUMU 297 KISUMU CENTRAL KENYATTA GROUNDS 348 MATHARE MATHARE DEPOT PLAY GROUND
298 KISUMU EAST MAMBOLEO SHOW GROUND 349 KASARANI MOI SPORTS CENTRE KASARANI
299 KISUMU WEST DC’S OFFICE -OJOLA 350 ROYSAMBU MOI SPORTS CENTRE KASARANI
300 MUHORONI CHEMELIL SUGAR COMPANY STADIUM 351 RUARAKA MOI SPORTS CENTRE KASARANI
301 NYAKACH NYAKACH SUB COUNTY POLICE HQS (PAP 352 NJIRU MOI SPORTS CENTRE KASARANI
ONDITI)
353 STAREHE PUMWANI PLAY GROUND
302 NYANDO NYADO DCC’S OFFICE
354 WESTLANDS GIGIRI SUB COUNTY POLICE HQS
303 SEME DCC’S OFFICE – KOMBEWA
355 NYS NYS HEADQUARTERS – RUARAKA
HOMA BAY 304 HOMA BAY HOMA BAY POLICE DIV. HQS
356 CID T/SCH CID TRAINING SCHOOL
305 RACHUONYO  EAST PUNDO KARAILA SPORTS GROUND
(KADONGO)
306 RACHUONYO  NORTH KENDUBAY SHOW GROUND
307 RACHUONYO SOUTH KOSELE STADIUM
308 SUBA NORTH ONUNGO STADIUM
309 SUBA NORTH MFANGANO ISLANDS
310 NDHIWA NDHIWA POLICE SUB COUNTY HQS
311 RANGWE RANGWE MARKET
312 SUBA SOUTH PETER NGATIANO STADIUM
MIGORI 313 AWENDO AWENDO D.O OFFICE
314 KURIA EAST DISTRICT HQS

Bondo Technical Training Institute Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

Bondo Technical Training Institute Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

List of Courses & Requirements

CODE COURSE TITLE MINIMUM
REQUIREMENT
ADMISSION 

TIME

EXAMINATION 

BODY

1. BUILDING AND CIVIL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
1.1 Diploma Training Programs (9 terms with attachment)
DBT 

 

 

 

 

 

DLS

 

DQS

Building Technology (TVET) 

 

 

 

 

 

Land Survey

 

Quantity Survey

KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). D+(Plus) in Math’s/Physics KNEC Craft Certificate for Module 2 

 

As Above

 

As Above

Jan/May/Sep 

 

KNEC
DCE Civil Engineering (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). D+(Plus) in Maths/Physics KNEC Craft Certificate for Module 2 Jan./May/Sep KNEC
1.2 Certificate Training Programs (7 terms with attachment)
CBT Building Technology (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
CRC Road Construction (TEP) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
CP Plumbing KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
CM Masonry KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
CC Carpentry KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
1.3 Artisan Training Programs (4 terms with attachment)
AP Plumbing KCSE D (Plain) and below or 

KCPE

January KNEC
AM Masonry KCSE D (Plain) and below or 

KCPE

 

January KNEC
AC Carpentry KCSE D (Plain) and below or 

KCPE

January 

 

 

KNEC
2. COMPUTER STUDIES AND MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT
2.1 Diploma Training Programs (9 terms with attachment)
DCS Computer Studies 

 

 

 

 

 

KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). D+(Plus) in Maths/Physics KNEC Craft Certificate for Module 2 January/May/Sep KNEC
DICT 

 

 

 

 

 

DBICT

Information Communication Technology 

 

 

 

 

Business and Information Communication Technology

 

KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). D+(Plus) in Maths/Physics KNEC Craft Certificate for Module 2 

 

As in above

January /May/Sep KNEC
2.2 Certificate Training Programs (7 terms with attachment)
CICT 

 

 

CBICT

 

 

NW

 

WD

 

HS

 

COMP

 

 

Information Communication Technology Module 1, 2 and 3

 

Business and Information Communication Technology

 

 

Networking (Part-time , 3Months)

 

Web Design (Part-time , 3Months)

 

Hardware Support (Part-time , 3Months)

 

Computer Packages(Part-time , 3Months)

 

 

KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). 

 

As in Above

May/September KNEC
3. BUSINESS STUDIES DEPARTMENT
3.1 Diploma Training Programs (9 terms with attachment)
DACC Accountancy (B-TEP) KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates January /May/Sep KNEC
DBM Business Management Module 1,2 and 3 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates January /May/Sep KNEC
DCM Cooperative Management   (B-TEP) KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates KNEC
DHRM Human Resource Management Module 1,2 and 3 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade C (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates January /May/Sep KNEC
DSM Sales and Marketing Module 1,2 and 3 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade C- (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates KNEC
DSCM Supply Chain Management Module 1,2 and 3 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade C- (Minus). Or relevant KNEC Craft Certificates January /May/Sep KNEC
DSW&CD  

Social Work and CommunityDevelopment Module I, II, III

 

KCSE Mean Grade C- (Minus) KNEC craft Certificate for Module II

 

May/Sep

 

KNEC

3.2 Certificate Training Programs (7 terms with attachment)
CBM Business Management Module 1 and 2 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
CCM Cooperative Management Module 1 and 2 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). KNEC
CHRM Human Resource Management Module 1 and 2 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/ September KNEC
CSM Sales and Marketing Module 1 and 2 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/ September KNEC
CSCM Supply Chain Management Module 1,2 and 3 (TVET) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/ September KNEC
CSW&CD Social Work and Community Development KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/ September KNEC
4. Electrical Engineering Department
4.1 Certificate Training Programs (7 terms with attachment)
CEET Electrical and Electronics Technology power Option (KNEC) KCSE Mean Grade D (Plain). May/September KNEC
1.3 Artisan Training Programs (4 terms with attachment)
AEI Electrical Installation KCSE D (Plain) and below or 

KCPE

January KNEC

</style=”color-blue:>